Usa Krome Paramg e

2 E
Parameter Guide
ii
About this manual
The manuals and how to use them
TheKROMEcomeswiththefollowingmanuals.
VideoManual(approximately60minutes)
QuickStartGuide(printedandPDF)
OperationGuide(PDF)
ParameterGuide(PDF)
VoiceNameList(PDF)
Allofthesemanualsareontheincludedaccessorydisc.
AprintedcopyisincludedonlyfortheQuickStart
Guide.
Video Manual
Thisvideoillustratesthemainfunctionalityofthe
KROME.
Quick Start Guide
ThisprovidesasimpleexplanationoftheKROMEs
functions.Tobegin,pleasewatchtheVideoManualand
readtheQuickStartGuide.
Operation Guide
Putsimply,theOperationGuideisdesignedtoanswer
thequestion,HowdoIdothis?
Itexplainsthenamesandfunctionsofeachpartofthe
KROME,basicoperation,anoverviewofeachmode,
howtoeditsounds,recordonthesequencer,andsoon.
Thisguidealsoexplainsthebasicsofeffects,the
Arpeggiator,DrumTrack,andDrumKits.
Finally,italsocontainsatroubleshootingguideaswellas
supplementalinformationsuchasalistofspecifications.
Parameter Guide
TheParameterGuideisdesignedtoanswerthequestion,
Whatdoesthisdo?
Organizedbymodeandpage,theParameterGuide
includesinformationoneachandeveryparameterinthe
KROME.
Voice Name List
TheVoiceNameListlistsallofthesoundsandsetupsthat
areintheKROMEwhenitisshippedfromthefactory,
includingPrograms,Combinations,Multisamples,
Drumsamples,DrumKits,ArpeggioPatterns,DrumTrack
Patterns,TemplateSongs,andEffectPresets.
PDF versions
TheKROMEPDFmanualsaredesignedforeasynavigation
andsearching.TheyincludeextensivePDFcontents
information,whichgenerallyappearsonthesideofthe
windowinyourPDFreaderandletsyoujumpquicklytoa
specificsection.Allcrossreferencesarehyperlinks,sothat
clickingonthemautomaticallytakesyoutothesourceofthe
reference.
Conventions in this manual
References to the KROME
TheKROMEisavailablein88key,73key,and61key
models.Themanualsrefertoallmodelswithoutdistinction
astheKROME.Thefrontpanelandrearpanel
illustrationsinthemanualshowthe61keymodel,butthey
applyidenticallytotheothermodels.
Abbreviations for the manuals: QS, OG, PG, VNL
Inthedocumentation,referencestothemanualsare
abbreviatedasfollows.
QS:QuickStartGuide
OG:OperationGuide
PG:ParameterGuide
VNL:TheVoiceNameList
Symbols, , , Note, Tips
Thesesymbolsrespectivelyindicateacaution,a
MIDIrelatedexplanation,asupplementarynote,oratip.
Example screen displays
Theparametervaluesshownintheexamplescreensof
thismanualareonlyforexplanatorypurposes,andmaynot
necessarymatchthevaluesthatappearintheDisplayof
yourinstrument.
MIDI-related explanations
CC#isanabbreviationforControlChangeNumber.
InexplanationsofMIDImessages,numbersinsquare
brackets[]alwaysindicatehexadecimalnumbers.
* Allotherproductandcompanynamesaretrademarks
orregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespectiveholders.
Table of Contents
iii
Table of Contents
About this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Program mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PROG Page Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PROG P0: Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
01:Main ................................... 2
03:Mixer&DrumTrack ..................... 5
05:Arpeggiator...................................6
07:ToneAdjust............................. 7
PROG P1: Basic/Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
11:ProgramBasic .......................... 12
12:NoteOn/Scale................................14
13:ControllersSetup .............................16
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
21:OSC1Setup ............................ 17
22:OSC1Velocity.......................... 19
23:OSC1Pitch............................. 20
25:OSC2Setup ............................ 22
26:OSC2Velocity.......................... 22
27:OSC2Pitch............................. 23
210:PitchEG ...................................23
PROG P3: Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
31:Filter1 ................................. 26
32:Filter1KeyboardTrack.................. 28
33:Filter1Modulation ...................... 29
34:Filter1LFOMod. ....................... 30
35:Filter1EG.............................. 31
36:Filter2 ................................. 34
37:Filter2KeyboardTrack.................. 34
38:Filter2Modulation ...................... 34
39:Filter2LFOMod. ....................... 34
310:Filter2EG............................. 34
PROG P4: Amp/EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
41:Amp1/Driver1.......................... 35
42:Amp1Modulation ............................36
43:Amp1EG.............................. 38
45:Amp2/Driver2.......................... 40
46:Amp2Modulation...................... 40
47:Amp2EG.............................. 40
410:EQ................................... 41
PROG P5: LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
51:OSC1LFO1............................ 42
52:OSC1LFO2..................................44
55:OSC2LFO1............................ 44
56:OSC2LFO2............................ 44
510:CommonLFO ..............................45
PROG P6: AMS/Common Key Track
(AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track). . . . 46
61:OSC1AMSMix1 ........................46
62:OSC1AMSMix2............................. 51
64:OSC2AMSMix1,65:OSC2AMSMix2 ..51
69:CommonKeyTrk1
(CommonKeyboardTrack1) .................51
610:CommonKeyTrk2
(CommonKeyboardTrack2) .................52
PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
71:ARPSetup..............................53
72:ARPScanZone..........................55
74:DrumTrackPattern......................55
75:DrumTrackProgram......................... 56
PROG P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) . . . . . . 58
81:Routing................................58
82:InsertFXSetup............................... 59
83:IFX1...................................60
84:IFX2,85:IFX3,86:IFX4,87:IFX5 ........60
PROG P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/
LFO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
91:Routing................................61
92:MFX1 ..................................62
93:MFX2,94:TFX.........................62
95:CommonFXLFO............................. 63
Program: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
COMBI Page Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
COMBI P0: Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
01:ProgramT0108,02:ProgramT0916 .....70
03:MixerT0108,04:MixerT0916 ..........73
05:ARPEGGIATORA,06:ARPEGGIATORB ...... 74
07:ToneAdjust ................................. 75
Controls......................................... 76
COMBI P1: Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11:ControllersSetup........................78
COMBI P2: EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
21:EQTrimT0108,22:EQTrimT0916......79
23:EQGainT0108,24:EQGainT0916........... 80
COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
31:MIDIT0108,32:MIDIT0916...........81
33:OSCT0108,34:OSCT0916.............81
35:PitchT0108,36:PitchT0916 ............82
37:ScaleT0108,38:ScaleT0916 ............83
Table of Contents
iv
COMBI P4: Zone/Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
41:KeyZoneT0108,42:KeyZoneT0916
(KeyboardZonesT0108,T0916)............. 84
43:VelZoneT0108,44:VelZoneT0916
(VelocityZonesT0108,T0916) .............. 85
45:DelayT0108,46:DelayT0916.......... 86
COMBI P5: MIDI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
51:<1>T0108,52:<1>T0916.............. 87
53:<2>T0108,54:<2>T0916................... 88
55:<3>T0108,56:<3>T0916.............. 88
57:<4>T0108,58:<4>T0916................... 89
59:<5>T0108,510:<5>T0916............. 89
511:<6>T0108,512:<6>T0916............ 90
COMBI P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
71:SetupT0108,72:SetupT0916 .......... 91
73:ArpeggiatorA,74:ArpeggiatorB............. 92
75:ARPScanZone .............................. 93
77:DrumTrack............................ 93
COMBI P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect). . . . . . 95
81:Routing1T0108,82:Routing1T0916.... 95
83:InsertFXSetup......................... 96
84:IFX1 ....................................... 97
85:IFX2,86:IFX3,87:IFX4,88:IFX5............ 97
89:FXControlT0108,810:FXControlT0916..... 98
COMBI P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/
LFO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
91:Routing............................... 99
92:MFX1................................. 99
93:MFX2,94:TFX ....................... 100
95:CommonFXLFO........................... 100
Combination: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . .101
Sequencer mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
An overview of Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . .105
SEQ Page Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
SEQ P0: Play/REC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
01:ProgramT0108,02:ProgramT0916.... 109
03:MixerT0108,04:MixerT0916.............. 113
05:ArpeggiatorA,06:ArpeggiatorB ....... 114
07:ToneAdjust................................ 115
08:Preferences ................................ 116
09:PlayLoopT0108,010:PlayLoopT0916.. 119
Controls ....................................... 120
SEQ P1: Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
11:Setup ................................ 122
SEQ P2: EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
21:TrimT0108,22:TrimT0916.......... 123
23:EQT0108,24:EQT0916................... 124
SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters) . .125
31:MIDIT0108,32:MIDIT0916.......... 125
33:OSCT0108,34:OSCT0916............ 126
35:PitchT0108,36:PitchT0916 ................ 127
37:ScaleT0108,38:ScaleT0916 ................ 128
SEQ P4: Zones/Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
41:KeyZoneT0108,42:KeyZoneT0916
(KeyboardZonesT0108,T0916) ............ 129
43:VelZoneT0108,44:VelZoneT0916
(VelocityZonesT0108,T0916) ................... 130
45:DelayT0108,46:DelayT0916 .............. 131
SEQ P5: MIDI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
51:<1>T0108,52:<1>T0916.............. 133
53:<2>T0108,54:<2>T0916 ................... 134
55:<3>T0108,56:<3>T0916.............. 134
57:<4>T0108,58:<4>T0916.............. 135
59:<5>T0108,510:<5>T0916............. 135
511:<6>T0108,512:<6>T0916 ................. 136
SEQ P6: Track Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
61:TrackEdit............................. 137
62:TrackView................................. 138
63:TrackName ........................... 142
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
71:ARPSetupT0108,72:ARPSetupT0916... 143
73:ArpeggiatorA,74:ArpeggiatorB............ 144
75:ARPScanZone ........................ 145
77:DrumTrack ........................... 145
SEQ P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) . . . . . . .148
81:Routing1T0108,82:Routing1T0916 ... 148
83:InsertFXSetup......................... 149
84:IFX1....................................... 150
85:IFX2,86:IFX3,87:IFX4,88:IFX5....... 150
89:FXControlT0108,810:FXControlT0916
.......................................... 150
SEQ P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/
LFO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
91:Routing............................... 152
92:MFX1 ...................................... 153
93:MFX2,94:TFX........................ 153
95:CommonFXLFO............................ 154
SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
101:PatternEdit........................... 155
102:PatternName .............................. 157
103:RPPRSetup................................ 157
SEQ P11: Cue List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
111:CueList .............................. 160
Sequencer: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
System Exclusive events supported in
Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
KROMEsequencerfileformats .................... 192
Table of Contents
v
Global mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Global Page Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Global P0: Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
01:Basic................................. 194
02:SystemPreference...........................196
Global P1: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
11:MIDIBasic............................ 198
12:MIDIRouting......................... 200
Global P2: Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
21:FootControllers....................... 202
22:MIDICC#Assign............................202
Global P3: Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
31:Scales................................ 203
Global P4: Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
41:ProgramMain......................... 204
42:ProgramSub .......................... 204
43:CombinationMain,44:CombinationSub .. 204
Global P5: Drum Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
51:SampleSetup ......................... 206
52:SampleParameters ..........................207
53:Driver/EQ............................ 208
54:VelocitySplit.......................... 209
55:Voice/Mixer........................... 210
Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
61:PatternSetup ...............................211
ArpeggioPatternEdit ............................213
ToolTablet .....................................214
Global: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Media mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Media: File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
01:Load................................. 225
02:Save .......................................226
03:Utility......................................226
08:MediaInformation..................... 226
Media: Menu Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Effect Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Effectsineachmode ....................... 235
Dynamicmodulation(Dmod)andTempo
Synchronization .................................236
CommonFXLFOs ...............................237
FXControlBuses................................238
EffectI/O.......................................239
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
In/Out.................................... 240
Routing...................................240
Mixer .......................................... 243
ControllingtheInsertEffectsviaMIDI............. 244
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
In/Out ....................................245
Routing...................................245
Mixer.....................................246
ControllingtheMasterEffectsviaMIDI .......247
Total Effect (TFX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
In/Out ....................................248
Routing...................................248
Mixer.....................................248
UsingMIDItocontroltheTotalEffect .........248
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
MainOutputs ..............................248
Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Dynamics (Dynamic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
000:NoEffect..............................251
001:StereoCompressor......................251
002:RedComp.............................251
003:StereoLimiter............................... 252
004:MultibandLimiter ......................253
005:St.MasteringLimtr(StereoMasteringLimiter)... 253
006:StereoGate............................253
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
007:St.Parametric4EQ
(StereoParametric4BandEQ) ...............255
008:St.Graphic7EQ
(StereoGraphic7BandEQ) ..................255
009:St.Exciter/Enhncr(StereoExciter/Enhancer).. 256
010:StereoIsolator..........................256
011:St.Wah/AutoWah(StereoWah/AutoWah)..... 257
012:St.VintageWah
(StereoVintage/CustomWah) ................258
013:VOXWah.............................258
014:St.RandomFilter(StereoRandomFilter)....... 259
015:MultiModeFilter(StereoMultiModeFilter) .... 260
016:St.SubOscillator(StereoSubOscillator) ...260
017:TalkingModulator......................261
018:StereoDecimator.......................261
019:St.AnalogRecord(StereoAnalogRecord)...... 262
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD
Amp Mic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
020:OD/Hi.GainWah
(Overdrive/Hi.GainWah)....................263
021:St.GuitarCabinet(StereoGuitarCabinet) ...... 264
022:St.BassCabinet(StereoBassCabinet).......... 264
023:BassAmpModel ............................ 265
024:BassAmp+Cabinet(BassAmpModel+Cabinet) . 265
025:TrebleBST(TrebleBooster)...............266
026:TubePreAmpModel
(TubePreAmpModeling) ...................266
027:St.TubePreAmp
(StereoTubePreAmpModeling) .............266
Table of Contents
vi
028:MicModel+PreAmp
(MicModeling+PreAmp).................. 267
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
029:StereoChorus ......................... 268
030:VintageChorus........................ 268
031:BlackChorus............................... 269
032:EPChorus............................ 269
033:St.HarmonicChorus(StereoHarmonicChorus). 269
034:St.BiphaseMod.
(StereoBiphaseModulation)................ 270
035:MultitapCho/Delay
(MultitapChorus/Delay).................... 270
036:Ensemble ............................. 271
037:PolysixEnsemble........................... 271
038:StereoFlanger ......................... 271
039:VintageFlanger ....................... 272
040:St.RandomFlanger(StereoRandomFlanger) .. 272
041:St.Env.Flanger(StereoEnvelopeFlanger) ..... 273
042:StereoPhaser.......................... 273
043:SmallPhaser.......................... 274
044:OrangePhaser ........................ 274
045:BlackPhaser ............................... 274
046:UVIBE............................... 274
047:St.RandomPhaser
(StereoRandomPhaser).................... 275
048:St.Env.Phaser(StereoEnvelopePhaser) ....... 276
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 277
049:StereoVibrato......................... 277
050:St.AutoFadeMod.
(StereoAutoFadeModulation) .............. 277
051:2VoiceResonator...................... 278
052:Doppler.............................. 279
053:Scratch............................... 279
054:GrainShifter.......................... 280
055:StereoTremolo ........................ 281
056:TEXTreml(TEXTremolo) .............. 281
057:St.Env.Tremolo(StereoEnvelopeTremolo).... 281
058:StereoAutoPan....................... 282
059:St.Phaser+Trml(StereoPhaser+Tremolo) .... 283
060:St.RingModulator
(StereoRingModulator) .................... 283
061:Detune ............................... 284
062:PitchShifter................................ 285
063:PitchShifterBPM...................... 285
064:PitchShiftMod.(PitchShiftModulation) . 286
065:OrganVib/Chorus(OrganVibrato/Chorus) 286
066:RotarySpeaker ........................ 287
067:St.EPTone+Trml(StereoEPTone+Tremolo) .... 288
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
068:L/C/RDelay........................... 289
069:Stereo/CrossDelay.......................... 289
070:St.MultitapDelay(StereoMultitapDelay)..... 290
071:St.ModDelay(StereoModulationDelay) . 290
072:St.DynamicDelay(StereoDynamicDelay)..... 291
073:St.AutoPanningDly
(StereoAutoPanningDelay)..................... 292
074:EchoPlus .................................. 293
075:TapeEcho ............................. 293
076:AutoReverse.......................... 293
077:SequenceBPMDly(SequenceBPMDelay) ...... 294
078:L/C/RBPMDelay............................ 295
079:StereoBPMDelay...................... 295
080:St.BPMMtapDelay
(StereoBPMMultitapDelay)...................... 296
081:St.BPMMod.Delay
(StereoBPMModulationDelay) ................... 296
082:St.BPMAutoPanDly
(StereoBPMAutoPanningDelay) ............ 297
083:TapeEchoBPM........................ 297
Reverb and Early Reflections (Reverb ER) .299
084:ReverbHall............................ 299
085:ReverbSmoothHall ..................... 299
086:ReverbWetPlate ....................... 299
087:ReverbDryPlate....................... 299
088:ReverbRoom.......................... 299
089:ReverbBrightRoom..................... 299
090:Reverb2Spring......................... 300
091:Reverb2Hall........................... 300
092:Reverb2Plate.......................... 300
093:Reverb2Room......................... 300
094:EarlyReflections ....................... 300
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono). . . . . . . . .301
095:P4EQExciter
(Parametric4BandEQExciter) ............. 301
096:P4EQWah
(Parametric4BandEQWah/AutoWah)........... 301
097:P4EQCho/Flng
(Parametric4BandEQChorus/Flanger)...... 302
098:P4EQPhaser
(Parametric4BandEQPhaser).............. 302
099:P4EQMt.Delay
(Parametric4BandEQMultitapDelay)........... 303
100:CompWah(CompressorWah/AutoWah).... 303
101:CompAmpSim
(CompressorAmpSimulation) ................... 304
102:CompOD/HiGain
(CompressorOverdrive/Hi.Gain)................. 304
103:CompP4EQ
(CompressorParametric4BandEQ) .............. 305
104:CompCho/Flng
(CompressorChorus/Flanger).................... 305
105:CompPhaser(CompressorPhaser) .......... 306
106:CompMt.Delay
(CompressorMultitapDelay).................... 306
107:LimiterP4EQ
(LimiterParametric4BandEQ).................. 307
108:LimiterCho/Flng
(LimiterChorus/Flanger) ................... 307
109:LimiterPhaser........................ 308
110:LimiterMt.Delay(LimiterMultitapDelay) ... 308
111:ExciterComp(ExciterCompressor).......... 309
112:ExciterLimiter ............................. 309
113:ExciterCho/Flng(ExciterChorus/Flanger).... 310
114:ExciterPhaser.............................. 310
115:ExciterMt.Delay(ExciterMultitapDelay).... 311
116:OD/HGAmpSim
(Overdrive/Hi.GainAmpSimulation) ............. 311
Table of Contents
vii
117:OD/HGCho/Flng
(Overdrive/Hi.GainChorus/Flanger) ..............312
118:OD/HGPhaser(Overdrive/Hi.GainPhaser)...312
119:OD/HGMt.Delay
(Overdrive/Hi.GainMultitapDelay)..............313
120:WahAmpSim(WahAmpSimulation) .......313
121:DecimatorAmp(DecimatorAmpSimulation)
...............................................314
122:DecimatorComp
(DecimatorCompressor) .................. 314
123:AmpSimTremolo
(AmpSimulationTremolo) ................. 314
124:Cho/FlngMt.Dly
(Chorus/FlangerMultitapDelay).................315
125:PhaserCho/Flng(PhaserChorus/Flanger)....315
126:ReverbGate ...............................316
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) . . . . . 317
127:P4EQ//P4EQ
(Parametric4BandEQ//Parametric4BandEQ) ....319
128:P4EQ//Comp
(Parametric4BandEQ//Compressor) ....... 319
129:P4EQ//Limiter
(Parametric4BandEQ//Limiter) ............ 319
130:P4EQ//Exciter
(Parametric4BandEQ//Exciter)..................319
131:P4EQ//OD/HG
(Parametric4BandEQ//Overdrive/Hi.Gain) . 319
132:P4EQ//Wah
(Parametric4BandEQ//Wah).............. 319
133:P4EQ//Cho/Flng
(Parametric4BandEQ//Chorus/Flanger) ..........320
134:P4EQ//Phaser
(Parametric4BandEQ//Phaser) ............ 320
135:P4EQ//BPMDly
(Parametric4BandEQ//MultitapBPMDelay) 320
136:Comp//Comp(Compressor//Compressor).....320
137:Comp//Limiter(Compressor//Limiter) .. 320
138:Comp//Exciter(Compressor//Exciter)... 320
139:Comp//OD/HG
(Compressor//OverdriveHi.Gain) ................321
140:Comp//Wah(Compressor//Wah)....... 321
141:Comp//Cho/Flng
(Compressor//Chorus/Flanger) ............. 321
142:Comp//Phaser(Compressor//Phaser) .........321
143:Comp//BPMDly
(Compressor//MultitapBPMDelay) ......... 321
144:Limiter//Limiter...................... 321
145:Limiter//Exciter.............................322
146:Limiter//OD/HG
(Limiter//Overdrive/Hi.Gain)............... 322
147:Limiter//Wah......................... 322
148:Limiter//Cho/Fl(Limiter//Chorus/Flanger)....322
149:Limiter//Phaser ....................... 322
150:Limiter//BPMDl
(Limiter//MultitapBPMDelay)............. 322
151:Exciter//Exciter .............................323
152:Exciter//OD/HG
(Exciter//Overdrive/Hi.Gain)............... 323
153:Exciter//Wah......................... 323
154:Exciter//Cho/Fl(Exciter//Chorus/Flanger) .....323
155:Exciter//Phaser....................... 323
156:Exciter//BPMDl
(Exciter//MultitapBPMDelay) ..............323
157:OD/HG//OD/HG
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Overdrive/Hi.Gain) .......... 324
158:OD/HG//Wah
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Wah) ..................324
159:OD/HG//Cho/Fln
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Chorus/Flanger)........324
160:OD/HG//Phaser(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Phaser). 324
161:OD/HG//BPMDly
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//MultitapBPMDelay)....324
162:Wah//Wah............................324
163:Wah//Cho/Flng(Wah//Chorus/Flanger) ...... 325
164:Wah//Phaser ..........................325
165:Wah//BPMDly
(Wah//MultitapBPMDelay) ................325
166:Cho/Fl//Cho/Fl
(Chorus/Flanger//Chorus/Flanger) ................ 325
167:Cho/Fl//Phaser
(Chorus/Flanger//Phaser) ...................325
168:Cho/Fl//BPMDly(Chorus/Flanger//Multitap
BPMDelay)................................325
169:Phaser//Phaser........................326
170:Phaser//BPMDly
(Phaser//MultitapBPMDelay) ..............326
171:BPMDl//BPMDl
(MultitapBPMDelay//MultitapBPMDelay)..326
Double Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
172:St.MltbandLimiter
(StereoMultibandLimiter)...................327
173:PianoBody/Damper
(PianoBody/DamperSimulation).................. 327
174:Vocoder.................................... 328
175:OD/HyperGainWah
(Overdrive/HyperGainWah) ..................... 328
176:GuitarAmp+P4EQ
(GuitarAmpModel+Parametric4BandEQ)....... 329
177:G.AmpCleanCombo...................329
178:G.AmpCalifornia ......................329
179:G.AmpTweed.........................329
180:G.AmpModdedOD......................... 330
181:BassTubeAmp+Cab.
(BassTubeAmpModel+Cabinet) ................. 330
182:EPCabinet/Drive .......................331
183:St.Mic+PreAmp
(StereoMicModeling+PreAmp).............331
184:MultitapCho/Delay
(MultitapChorus/Delay) ....................331
184:St.PitchShifter(StereoPitchShifter) ........... 332
185:St.PitchShiftBPM(StereoPitchShifterBPM).... 333
186:RotarySpeakerOD(RotarySpeakerOverdrive) . 333
188:L/C/RLongDelay......................334
189:St/CrossLongDelay(Stereo/CrossLongDelay) . 334
190:HoldDelay ................................. 335
191:LCRBPMLongDly
(L/C/RBPMLongDelay)....................336
192:St.BPMLongDly(StereoBPMLongDelay) .... 336
193:EarlyReflections .......................337
Table of Contents
viii
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Alternate Modulation Sources (AMS) . . . . .339
AlternateModulationOverview............. 339
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)List........... 340
AlternateModulationsettings .................... 342
Dynamic Modulation Sources (Dmod) . . . .346
DynamicModulationSourceList ................. 346
Controller Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
SW1/2Assignments ........................ 348
RealtimeControlsKnobs14Assignments .... 348
Knobs14................................ 349
FootSwitchAssignments................... 349
FootPedalAssignments.................... 350
System exclusive messages affected by Create
Excl Data, Erase Excl Data, and Event Edit.352
MIDI transmission when the KROMEs
controllers are operated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
KROME and MIDI CCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
ResponsestostandardMIDIcontrollers ...... 356
ParameterscontrolledbyMIDICCs#7079......... 358
MIDI applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
AboutMIDI............................... 359
SettingswhenconnectedtoaMIDIdeviceor
computer ................................. 359
MessagestransmittedandreceivedbytheKROME . 360
Compatibility with the M50. . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
MIDI Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
1
Program mode
PROG Page Select
YoucanselectProgrammodepagesinseveralways.
1. PressthePAGEbutton.
Alternatively,pressthemodebuttonontheupperleftside
ofthedisplay,andthenpresstherightsideofthemenu.
PageSelectshowsanabbreviatednameforeachpage.
ThepagepriortopressingthePAGEbuttonisshownin
lightblue.
2. Selectthedesiredpageinthedisplay.
Other ways to select pages
HolddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumerickeys09
tojumptothecorrespondingpage.
Forexample,holddownthePAGEbuttonandpress
numerickey4tojumptotheP4:Amp/EQpage.
PresstheEXITbuttontoreturntothePlaypage.If
somethingotherthanthemainpageisselected,pressthe
EXITbuttontoaccessthemainpage.
Page Main content
P
L
A
Y
P0:Play
Selectandplayprograms.(seep.2)
OscillatorandDrumtracklevelsettings.
(seep.5)
Simpledrumtrackediting.(seep.6)
Simplearpeggiatorediting.(seep.6)
ToneAdjustsettings.(seep.8)
E
D
I
T
P1:Basic/
Controllers
Basicprogramsettings,suchasvoice
assignmode.(seep.12)
SW1,2,andknobsettings.(seep.16)
P2:OSC/Pitch
Oscillatorselectionandpitchsettings.(see
p.17)
P3:Filter Filter1,2(tone)settings.(seep.26)
P4:Amp/EQ
Amp1,2(volume)settings.(seep.35)
Amp1,2driverandpansettings.(seep.40)
3bandparametricEQsettings.(seep.41)
P5:LFO LFOsettings.(seep.42)
P6:AMS/
Common
KeyTrack
AMSMixersettings.(seep.46)
Commonkeyboardtrackingsettings.(see
p.52)
A
R
P
&
D
R
U
M
T
R
A
C
K
P7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack
Arpeggiatorsettings.(seep.53)
Drumtracksettings.(seep.55)
E
F
F
E
C
T
P8:Routing/IFX
Oscillatoroutputbusandmastereffect
sendlevelsettings.(seep.58)
Inserteffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(seep.59)
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
Mastereffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(seep.62)
Totaleffectselectionandsettings.(see
p.62)
CommonFXLFOsettings(seep.63)
Program mode
2
PROG P0: Play
ThisisthemainProgrammodepage.Here,youcan:
Selectaprogramtoplay.
SelectpatternsandprogramsfortheDrumTrack.
Adjusttheoscillatoranddrumtracklevels.
MakesimpleeditsfortheArpeggiator.
AdjusttheRealtimeContorols.
UsetheToneAdjustfunctiontomakesimpleeditsfor
programparameters
AllMIDIdatainProgP0:Playistransmittedand
receivedontheglobalMIDIchannelMIDIChannel
(Global11a).
Tip: Auto Song Setup
TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrentProgramor
CombinationintoaSong,andthenputstheKROMEin
recordreadymode.
Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhileyoure
playing,youcanuseAutoSongSetuptostartrecording
immediately.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAutoSong
Setuponpage 106.
01: Main
01a: Program Select
Bank (Bank Select) [A...F, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d)]
ThisistheBankcontainingthecurrentProgram.
PresstheBANKAFbuttontoselectabank.
ToselecttheGMbank,usethenumerickeys.
GM:Whileholdingdown[0],press[].
g(1)g(9):Whileholdingdown[0],pressavariation
number[1][9].Ifthebankcontainsnovariation
programs,thebasicGMsoundsetwillbeselected.(An
*symbolisshownatthebeginningoftheprogram
name.)
g(d):Whileholdingdown[0],press[.].
Program Select
[AF: 0...127, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 1...128]
Hereyoucanselectaprogram.
To switch programs
ChooseProgramSelect,usethenumerickeys09toenter
aprogramnumber,andpresstheENTERbutton.
ChooseProgramSelect,andturntheVALUEdialoruse
theINC/DECbuttons.
PresstheProgramSelectPopuptoviewandselectfrom
theBank/ProgramSelectmenuorganizedbybank.
PresstheCategoryPopuptoviewandselectfromthe
Category/ProgramSelectmenuorganizedbycategory.
Youcanuseafootswitchtoselectprograms.(seeFoot
SwitchAssignonpage 202andListofFootSwitch
assignmentsonpage 349)
YoucanselectprogramsbytransmittingaMIDIProgram
ChangefromaconnectedexternalMIDIdevice.
Bank/Program Select menu:
1. PressthepopupbuttonattheleftofProgramSelectto
opentheBank/ProgramSelectmenu.
2. Pressoneofthetabsonthelefttoselectaspecificbank.
TheVariationbuttonisactiveifBankGMisselected;
pressingitwillswitchthebanksinthefollowingorder:
GMg(1)g(2)...g(8)g(9)GM.
3. Fromthelist,YoucantouchaProgramsnamedirectly,
orusetheINCandDECbuttons.
Usethescrollbartoviewinformationnotcurrentlyshown.
Note:Ifyouwanttofindasoundbyitsprogramname,use
theFindfunction(seep.2).
4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice,orpress
theCancelbuttontoexitwithoutswitchingPrograms.
Bank/Program Select menu
Find (search function)
Hereshowtosearchforaprogrambypartofitsname.
1. IntheBank/ProgramSelectmenuortheCategory/Pro
gramSelectmenu,selectthetabthatyouwantto
search.
Note:Theprogramsintheselectedtabwillbethetargetfor
searching.
2. PresstheFindbuttononthelowerleftsidetoopenthe
dialogbox.
01a
01b
01e
01c
01d
01
Menu
Mode Stop Watch Page Menu
Bank
Program Select Popup Program Select
Category Popup
Tempo
Tab
Scroll bar
PROG P0: Play 01: Main
3
Find menu
3. PresstheTbutton,andenterthedesiredsearchtext
inthetextfield.Whenyouveenteredthetext,pressthe
OKbutton.
4. IftheIgnoreCasecheckboxisselected,thesearch
willnotdistinguishbetweenuppercaseandlowercase.
5. PresstheFindbuttontosearchforthetextthatyou
entered.
6. UsethePrev.andNextbuttonstofindthepreviousor
nextsound.
7. PresstheOKbuttontoselectaprograminthelist.
IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,theselectionwillbe
cancelled.
8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancelbut
tontocancelyourselection.
Category [00...17/00...07]
Here,youcanselectprogramsbymaincategoryandsub
category.Allprogramsareclassifiedintoeighteenmain
categories,andeachcategoryisclassifiedintoeightsub
categories.Youcanusethesemaincategoriesandsub
categoriestofindandselectprograms.Hereyoucanselecta
programbyitsmaincategoryandsubcategory.
Category/Program Select menu:
1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton(abovetheProgram
Selectparameter)toopentheCategory/ProgramSelect
menu.
2. Pressoneofthetabsontheleftorrighttoselectthe
desiredcategory.
Note:OnlyCategoriesandSubcategoriesthatareassigned
toprogramscanbeselectedfromthetabs.
3. Selectaprogramfromthelist.YoucantouchaPro
gramsnamedirectly,orusetheINCandDECbuttons.
UsethescrollbartobrowsethroughallProgramsinthe
Category.
Youcansearchforaprogrambyaportionofitsname(see
p.2).
Category/Program Select menu
4. Toselectfromasubcategory,presstheJumptoSub
button.
Pressoneofthelefttabstoselectasubcategory.
Note:OnlySubcategoriesthatareassignedtoProgramscan
beselectedfromthetabs.
Toconfirmyourselection,presstheOKbutton.Ifyou
decidetocancel,presstheCancelbutton.Youwillreturnto
themaincategories.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice,orpress
theCancelbuttontoexitwithoutchangingthePro
gram.
Note:YoucanassignacategorytoaProgramintheWrite
Programdialog.
, (Tempo) [40.00... 300.00, EXT]
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentProgram,whichappliestothe
arpeggiator,temposyncedLFOs,andtemposyncedeffects.
040.00...300.00allowsyoutosetaspecifictempoinBPM,
with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousingthestandard
dataentrycontrols,youcanusetheTEMPOknobtoadjust
thebpm,orjustplayafewquarternotesontheTAPbutton.
EXTisdisplayediftheMIDIClock(Global11a)issetto
ExternalMIDIorExternalUSB.Thisisalsoshownifthe
MIDIClocksettingisAutoandMIDIclockdataisbeing
receivedfromanexternaldevice.IfthetemposourceisEXT,
thearpeggiatoretc.willsynchronizetoMIDIclockdata
fromanexternalMIDIdevice.
Mode
Thisindicatesthemodethatscurrentlyselected.
Whenyoupressthisbutton,themodemenuwillappear.In
themodemenu,pressthenameofthedesiredmode.Ifyou
selectthesamemodewhereyouwerepriortoaccessingthe
modemenu,thePageSelectmenuofthatmodewillappear.If
youpresstheareatotherightofthemodename,thepage
selectmenuforthecorrespondingmodewillappear.
Toclosethemenu,presstheClosebuttonortheEXIT
button.
IfyouaccessedthismenufromGlobalorMediamode,it
willincludeanitemnamedReturn.PressingReturnwill
takeyoubacktothemodeandpagewhereyouwerepriorto
selectingGlobalorMediamode.
Category
tab
Scroll bar
Sub
category
tab
Scroll bar
When accessed from
Program, Combination,
or Sequencer mode
When accessed from
Global or Media mode
Program mode
4
Stop Watch
Whenyoupressthebuttonontheupperrightsideofthe
display,thescreenwillshowtheamountoftimethathas
elapsedsincethepowerwasturnedon.Youcanusethe
START/STOPbuttonandRESETbuttontomeasurea
duration.
START/STOP:Starts/stopsthestopwatch.
RESET:Resetsthestopwatchto000:00:00.
01b: Program Information
Thefollowinginformationfortheselectedprogramis
displayed:
OSC Pictures
Thisshowsagraphicfortheoscillator.Inthecaseofdouble
oscillatorsordoubledrums,theOctave(footageofthe
oscillatorsbasicpitch)isalsoshown.
Ifyouwanttochangetheoscillatorsgraphic,doubleclick
thegraphic,andchangethesettinginthemenu.Youcan
alsosetthisinP1ProgramBasicOSCPicture(seep.12).
SW1, SW2
ThesearethefunctionscontrolledbytheSW1,SW2
switches.
01c: Controls
ThisindicatesthesettingsoftheREALTIMECONTROLS
knobs(thenameoftheoperableparametersandtheir
currentvalue),andthe3bandEQsettings.
ThecurrentlyselectedREALTIMECONTROLSknob
functionsandtheEQsettingsareshown.UsetheSELECT
buttontoselectthefunctioncontrolledbytheknobs.
ThefunctionsoftheTONECONTROLSknobsarefixed.
YoucanassignvariousfunctionstotheUSERCONTROLS
knobs.AMIDIcontrolchangeisassignedtoeachfunction.
Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding
MIDICC.
Unlessotherwisenoted,scalingmeansthatthe
parametersareattheirprogrammedvalueswhenthe
controllerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthecontrollerisat
0,andattheirmaximumwhenthecontrollerisat127.For
anotherlookatthis,pleaseseethediagrambelow.
CC parameter scaling
TONE CONTROLS
CUTOFF (Filter Cut Off) [000...127]
ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAandB,
andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#74.
RESONANCE (Filter Resonance) [000...127]
ThisknobscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and
transmitsandreceivesMIDICC#71.
EG INTENSITY (Filter EG Intensity) [000...127]
ThisknobscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
frequenciesofFiltersAandB.Italsotransmitsandreceives
MIDICC#79.
RELEASE (EG Release) [000...127]
ThisknobscalesthereleasetimeoftheFilterandAmpEGs,
USER CONTROLS
1...4 [000...127]
YoucansetRealtimeControlsUSERknobs14toawide
varietyofmodulationfunctions,usingtheP1:Basic/
ControllersControllersSetuppage.
ManyofthefunctionsscaleaparticularsetofProgram
parameters.AllofthesettingsalsocorrespondtoMIDI
messagesusuallyCCs.
ARP CONTROLS
Thefunctionsofknobs14arefixed.Theknobswillcontrol
thedurationofthearpeggiatednotes,theirvelocity,the
pitchrange,andthelengthofthearpeggiopattern.
GATE [64...+00...+63]
Adjuststheduration(gatetime)ofthearpeggiatednotes
(SeeGateonpage 54).
VELOCITY [64...+00...+63]
Adjuststhevelocityofthearpeggiatednotes(SeeVelocity
onpage 54).
SWING [64...+00...+63]
Adjuststhedegreeofshuffleforthearpeggiopattern(See
Swingonpage 54).
STEP [64...+00...+63]
Thischangesthelengthandresolutionofthearpeggio
pattern.
Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthepatterns
length(Length)inunitsofonehalf.Turningtheknob
towardtherightwillshortentheintervalbetween
arpeggiatednotes(Resolution)inunitsofonehalf.When
theknobisinthecenter(12oclock),thenumberofsteps
andthespeedwillbeasspecifiedbytheLengthand
Resolution(SeeResolution*onpage 54).
EQ (Low, Mid [Hz], Mid, High)
Thisindicatesthe3bandEQsettings.Youcaneditthe
values.
Low[18.00...+00.0...+18.0]:Adjuststhegainofthe80Hz
lowshelvingEQin0.5dBsteps.
Mid[Hz][100...10.0k]:Adjuststhecenterfrequencyofthe
midsweepableEQ.
Mid[18.00...+00.0...+18.0]:Adjuststhegainofthemid
sweepableEQin0.5dBsteps.
High[18.00...+00.0...+18.0]:Adjuststhegainofthe10kHz
highshelvingEQin0.5dBsteps.
99
00
64 0 127
CC Value
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
PROG P0: Play 03: Mixer & Drum Track
5
01d: Effect
IFX 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
MFX 1, 2 [000...127]
TFX
Hereyoucanviewtheeffectsthatareassignedtotheinsert
effects,mastereffects,andtotaleffect.
Forthemastereffectsyoucanadjustthesendamounts.
TheMASTERFXandTOTALFXbuttonsrespectivelyturn
mastereffects1/2andthetotaleffecton/off(seeGlobal).
ChangingtheEnableMFX1&2andEnableTFX
settingswillrespectivelytransmitthecontrolchange
messagesCC#94(effectcontrol4)orCC#95(effect
control5).Thetransmittedvaluewillbe0foroff,and
127foron.
01e: Velocity Meter
Thismetershowsthenoteonvelocityvalue.
Thisindicatesthenoteonvelocityvaluesontheglobal
MIDIchannel,producedbythekeyboard,MIDIIN,or
arpeggiator.(Ifmultiplenoteonmessagesarereceived
simultaneously,thehighestvelocitywillbedisplayed.)
ThemeterwillrespondevenifKeyZoneorVelZone
settingsaresetsothatthenotedoesnotactuallysound.
Thismeterindicatesthenoteonvelocityvalue;itdoesnot
respondtochangesintheVolumeknobsetting,norto
changesintheleveloftheaudiosignalproducedbythe
Filter,Amp,EG,LFO,EQ,oreffects.
V 01: Menu Command
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
03: Mixer & Drum Track
03a: OSC/DrumTrack Mixer
Here,youcanadjustthevolumeandchangethePlay/Mute
andSoloOn/Offsettingsofoscillators1and2andthedrum
track.
OSC Play/Mute:
OSC1 Play/Mute [Play, Mute]
Play:Oscillator1willsound.
Mute:Oscillator1willbemuted(silent).
OSC2 Play/Mute [Play, Mute]
Play:Oscillator2willsound.
Mute:Oscillator2willbemuted(silent).
Note:OSC2Play/Mutecannotbesetforaprogramwhose
OscillatorModeisSingleorDrums.
DRUM Track Play/Mute 1 [Play, Mute]
Play:Thedrumtrackwillsound.
Mute:Thedrumtrackwillbemuted(silent).
OSC Solo:
OSC1 Solo [Off, On]
SwitchestheSolostatuson/offforoscillator1.
OSC2 Solo [Off, On]
SwitchestheSolostatuson/offforoscillator2.
DRUM Track Solo [Off, On]
SwitchestheSolostatuson/offforthedrumtrack.
Note:Soloappliestooscillators1and2,thedrumtrack.
Note:OSC2Solocannotbesetforaprogramwhose
OscillatorModeisSingleorDrums.
Note:TheSoloOn/Offsettingisnotsavedwhenyouwrite
theprogram.
Exclusive Solo [Off, On]
ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteralsoaffectstheway
thatSoloworks.IfExclusiveSoloisoff(unchecked),
MultipleSoloswillbeactive,allowingyoutoturnSoloon/
offformorethanoneoftheitems:oscillators1and2,and
thedrumtrack.EachtimeyoupressaSolobutton,thesolo
settingwilltoggleonandoff.
IfExclusiveSoloison(checked),onlyoneoftheapplicable
itemscanbesoloed.Inthismode,pressingaSolobutton
automaticallydisablesanyprevioussolos.
Tip:YoucanalsotoggleExclusiveSolobyholdingENTER
andpressing2onthenumerickeypad.
01a
03a
03
Menu
03b
Program mode
6
OSC Volume:
OSC 1 Volume [000...127]
ThisslideradjuststhevolumeofOscillator1.
OSC 2 Volume [000...127]
ThisslideradjuststhevolumeofOscillator2.
DRUM Track Volume [000...127]
Adjuststhevolumeofthedrumtrack.
Velocity Meter
Thismetershowsthenoteonvelocityvalueoftheglobal
MIDIchannelandthedrumtracksProgMIDICh(seep.5).
03b: Drum Track
TheDrumTrackprovidesaneasywayforyoutoplaybacka
rhythmsectionusingtheKROMEshighqualitydrum
programsandarichvarietyofdrumpatterns.
Pattern Bank [Preset, User]
Pattern No. [P000...605, U000...999]
Selectthepatternyouwanttouseinthedrumtrack.Youcan
createuserpatternsinSeqP10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEdit.
Drum Track Program
[A...F: 000127, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 001128]
Selecttheprogramthatwillplaythedrumtrackpattern.
Note:OnlyprogramsoftheDrumscategorycanbeselected.
TheMIDIchannelofthedrumtrackisspecifiedbythe
GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpageDrumTrackProg
MIDICh.MIDImessagetransmissionforapatternis
specifiedbyProgMIDIOut.Programchangesarenot
transmittedorreceived.
High Gain [18.0...+00.0...+18.0dB]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10 kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Mid Frequency [100Hz...10kHz]
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
Mid Gain [18.0...+00.0...+18.0dB]
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,inincrementsof
0.5 dB.
Low Gain [18.0...+00.0...+18.0dB]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80 HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Note:TheseparameterscanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack).
V 03: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
05: Arpeggiator
ArpeggiatorparametersareeditedinP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack),butmajorparameterscanbe
editedhereaswell.WhenyouareplayinginProgP0:Play,
youcaneditthearpeggiatorinrealtime,suchaschanging
thearpeggiopatternetc.
Towrite(save)theeditedcontent,useWriteProgram.You
canalsousetheTEMPOknob,TAPbuttonandthearpeggio
control(ARP)knobsGATE,VELOCITY,SWING,andSTEP
toeditthearpeggioinrealtime.
05a: ARP CONTROLS
ARP CONTROLS
ThisshowsthevalueofeachparameterfortheARP
assignmentsoftheREALTIMECONTROLSknobs(seep.4
andp.54).
GATE [64...+00...+63]
VELOCITY [64...+00...+63]
SWING [64...+00...+63]
seep.4,p.54
STEP [64...+00...+63]
seep.4
05b: Arpeggiator
Pattern [P0...P4, U000 (INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Arpeggio Pattern Preview
Thisshowsagraphicofthestepsoftheuserarpeggio
pattern.
Resolution [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
Sort [Off, On]
Latch [Off, On]
Key Sync. [Off, On]
Keyboard [Off, On]
Makesettingsfortheprogramarpeggiator.Formore
information,pleaseseePROGP7:ARP/DT(Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack)onpage 53.
Note:TheseparameterscanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack).
01a
05b
05a
05
Menu
PROG P0: Play 07: Tone Adjust
7
V 05: Menu Command
3:CopyArpeggiatorseep.66
Commandonpage 64.
07: Tone Adjust
TheToneAdjustfunctionassignsimportantprogram
parametersandeasyeditparameterstotheswitchesand
slidersinthedisplayforquickeditsofselectedparameters.
Tip:InCombinationandSequencermodes,ToneAdjustalso
letsyoueditProgramparameterswithouttheneedtosavea
differentversionoftheoriginalProgram.Formore
informationonToneAdjustinthesemodes,pleasesee0
7c:ToneAdjustonpage 75andpage 115.
Absolute (Abs), Relative (Rel), Meta parameter
TherearethreekindsofToneAdjustparameters:Absolute,
Relative,andMeta.
AbsoluteparametersusuallyeditasingleProgram
parameter,suchasOscillator1Drive.TheProgramand
ToneAdjustparametersmirroroneanother;whenyou
changeone,theotherwillchangetomatch.
RelativeparameterstypicallyadjusttwoormoreProgram
parameterssimultaneously.Forinstance,F/AEGAttack
TimeaffectsatotalofsixProgramparameters.Thevalueof
theRelativeparametershowstheamountofchangetothese
underlyingProgramparameters.
IftheRelativeparameterissetto0(thesliderinthedisplay
isatthecenterposition),thevalueofthecorresponding
programparameterwillnotchange.
Thedefinitionsofhigherandlowersettingscanvary,
dependingonthespecificparameter.Unlessnoted
otherwise,theyworkasfollows:
WhentheRelativeparameterisat+99(themaximum),the
Programparametersareallattheirmaximumaswell.
Similarly,whentheRelativeparameterisat99(the
minimum),theProgramparametersareatzero.
Relative Tone Adjust parameter scaling
AfewoftheProgramparameterscontrolledbyRelative
ToneAdjustarebipolar,meaningthattheycanbeeither
positiveornegative(insteadofjustpositive).Whenthese
Programparametersaresettonegativevalues,theTone
Adjustparametermaybehavedifferentlyfromthe
descriptionabove.
Forinstance,iftheEGIntensityissettoanegativevalue,
RelativeToneAdjustvalueswillrangefrom0to99,the
inverseofthediagramabove.EGSustainworksdifferently;
ifitssettoanegativevalue,ToneAdjustvaluesrangefrom
0downtotheprogrammedvalue,andthenupto+99,as
shownbelow.
Relative Tone Adjust parameter scaling: EG Sustain
MetaparametersdontaffectProgramparametersdirectly.
Instead,theyaffectthewaythatotherToneAdjust
parameterswork.Forinstance,MultisampleMin#and
Max#settheminimumandmaximumvaluesoftheTone
AdjustMultisampleparameter.
Saving Tone Adjust Edits
ToneAdjusteditsaresavedintwodifferentways,
dependingonwhethertheparameterisRelativeor
Absolute.(Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAbsolute
(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameterbelow.)
EditstoRelativeparametersaffectthesoundimmediately,
butdontchangetheunderlyingProgramparameter
settingsuntiltheProgramissaved.WhentheProgramis
saved,theKROMEcalculatesthecombinedeffectsofTone
AdjustanddedicatedCCmodulation(fromtheRealTime
knobs,forinstance),andsavestheresultsintotheProgram
parametersdirectly.Atthatpoint,alloftheRelative
parametersareresetto0.
EditstoAbsoluteparametersareimmediatelyreflectedin
thecorrespondingonscreenparameters,andviceversa.
Tone Adjust and MIDI SysEx
TheToneAdjusteditsallsendandreceiveMIDISystem
Exclusivemessages.Youcanusethistorecordandplay
backToneAdjusteditswithasequencer,includingthebuilt
insequencer.
07a
07b
07c
07
Menu
99
00
Relative Tone Adjust Value
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
0 99 +99
99
99
00
Relative Tone Adjust Value
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
0 99 +99
Program mode
8
Note:SystemexclusivemessagesarenotToneAdjust
parameters;theyarelinkedtotheactualvalue.Forexample,
ifasliderinthedisplayisassignedtocontrolfilter
resonance,andyoumovethissliderwhilerecordingtothe
sequencer,theslidermovementwillberecorded,butthe
changeinfilterresonancewillnotberecorded.Thismeans
thatifyoulaterreassigntheToneAdjustparameterto
controlLFO1Speed,playingbackthesequencerwillcause
theLFOspeed(notthefilterresonance)tochange.
Interaction between Tone Adjust and MIDI CCs
AnumberoftheCommonToneAdjustparameterscan
affectparameterswhicharealsomodulatedbydedicated
MIDICCs.ThespecificCCnumbersarenotedinthe
descriptionsfortheindividualToneAdjustparameters.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeToneAdjustParameterson
page 10.
ToneAdjustandtheCCsworkindependently.Itspossible,
forinstance,forToneAdjusttoreducethevalueofa
parameter,andthenforaCCtoincreaseitagain.
ToneAdjustscalestheparameterfirst,andthentheCC
scalestheresultoftheToneAdjust.
07a: Program Select & Tempo
Bank (Bank Select) [A...F, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d)]
Program Select [A...F: 000127, GM, g(1)...g(9),
g(d): 001128]
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Thisareadisplaysinformationabouttheprogramselected
forediting:theprogrambank/number/name,andthe
tempousedtocontrolthearpeggiatoretc.Formore
information,pleasesee01a:ProgramSelectonpage 2.
07b: Selected parameter information
Selected parameter information
Thisstatuslineshowsdetailed,readonlyinformationabout
thecurrentlyselectedToneAdjustparameter.
Control [SW1...8, SL1...8]
ThisisthecontrollerinthedisplaytowhichtheToneAdjust
parameterisassigned.
SW:Switch
SL:Slider
Assignment
Thisshowsthefullnameoftheparameterassignedtothe
controller.YoucanchangethisusingtheAssignparameter,
below.
Value
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.Therangeof
valueswillvarydependingontheparameterassignedtothe
control.
Type [Rel, Abs, Meta]
Thisshowsthetypeofparameter,whichrelatestohowedits
totheparameterareadjustedandsaved.Formore
information,pleaseseeAbsolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Meta
parameteronpage 7.
Stored Value
Thisshowstheoriginalvalueoftheparameter,beforethe
effectsofToneAdjust.ItappliesonlytoToneAdjust
parameterswhichcontrolasingleProgramparameter.
IfyouunassignaRelativeparameterfromacontrol,itwill
reverttothisvalue.
07c: Tone Adjust
Here,youcanassignToneAdjustparameterstoswitches
andslidersinthedisplay.
Switches 1...8
ToneAdjustswitchesinthedisplayactalittledifferently
thansliders.
WhenaswitchisassignedtoaRelativeparameter,oran
Absoluteparameterwithmorethantwostates:
SwitchOn=OnValue(seebelow)
SwitchOff=theProgramsstoredvalue
WhenaswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
parameter,suchasHold,theswitchstatusdirectlyreflects
theparametervalue:
SwitchOn=On
SwitchOff=Off
Assign
ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
displayedswitch.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,
pleaseseeCommonToneAdjustParametersandTone
AdjustParametersbelow.
On Value [Depends on parameter]
TheparameterissettothisvaluewhentheswitchisOn.
WhentheswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
parameter,suchasHold,thiswillalwaysbethesameasthe
SwitchStatus(seebelow).
Switch Status [Off, On]
ThissimplyshowswhethertheswitchisOnorOff.
Sliders 1...8
Assign
ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
displayedslider.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,please
seeCommonToneAdjustParametersandToneAdjust
Parametersbelow.
Control Assignment Value Stored Value Type
Assign
On/Of
Value
Assign
Value
9
PerOscillatorparametersapplytoOSC1and2individually,
andaremarkedassuch:OSC1andOSC2.
Eachslidercanbeassignedtoonlyoneparameter,andeach
parametercanbeassignedtoonlyoneslider.
Toswapaparameterfromoneslidertoanother,youllneed
tofirstunassignitfromtheoldslider,andthenassignitto
thenewslider.
Value
valueswilldependontheparameterassignedtotheslider.
Common Tone Adjust Parameters
TheseparametersaffectbothOscillators1and2.
Unlessotherwisenoted,alloftheCommonToneAdjust
parametersareRelative.
Note:Attherightofeachparameter,the(valuerangeand
CC#)areshowninparentheses.
Off.ThismeansthattheToneAdjustcontrolhasnoeffect.
FilterCutoff.(99...+99,CC#74)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersatonce.It
affectsbothFiltersAandB.
FilterResonance.(99...+99,CC#71)
Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.Itaffects
bothFiltersAandB.
FilterEGIntensity.(99...+99,CC#79)
ThisscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutofffrequency.
ItaffectsFiltersAandBsimultaneously.
99meansnomodulation.+99meansmaximum.
Modulationisinthesamedirection,positiveornegative,as
theoriginalProgram.Forinstance,iftheoriginalPrograms
EGIntensitywassetto25,thensettingtheToneAdjustto
+99movestheEGIntensityto99.
AmpVelocityIntensity.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheeffectofvelocityontheAmplevel.
99removesthevelocitymodulationentirely.+99means
maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positiveor
negative,astheoriginalProgram.
F/AEGAttackTime.(99...+99,CC#73)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs,along
withotherrelatedparameters.
Whenthevalueis+1ormore,thisalsoaffectstheAmpEGs
StartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,andAttackTime
AMS,asdescribedbelow:
Betweenvaluesof+1and+25,theStartLevel,StartLevel
AMS,andAttackTimeAMSwillchangefromtheir
programmedvaluesto0.Overthesamerange,theAttack
Levelwillchangefromitsprogrammedvalueto99.
F/AEGDecayTime.(99...+99,CC#75)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterandAmp
EGs.ItinteractswithCC#75.
F/AEGSustainLevel.(99...+99,CC#70)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterandAmpEGs.
F/AEGReleaseTime.(99...+99,CC#72)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs.
FilterEGAttackTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterEGs.
FilterEGDecayTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterEGs.
FilterEGSustainLevel.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterEGs.
FilterEGReleaseTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterEGs.
AmpEGAttackTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheAmpEGs.
AmpEGDecayTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheAmpEGs.
AmpEGSustainLevel.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheAmpEGs.
AmpEGReleaseTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheAmpEGs.
PitchEGAttackTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesofthePitchEG.
PitchEGDecayTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesofthePitchEG.
PitchEGSustainLevel(N/A).(99...+99)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsofthePitchEG.
PitchEGReleaseTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesofthePitchEG.
PitchLFO1Intensity.(99...+99,CC#77)
ThisscalestheeffectofLFO1onthePitch.
99removestheLFOmodulationentirely.+99means
maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positiveor
negative,astheoriginalProgram.
LFO1Speed.(99...+99,CC#76)
ThisscalesLFO1sfrequency.WhentheLFOisinMIDI/
Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.Formore
information,pleaseseeFrequencyonpage 42.
LFO1Fade.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO1sfadeintime.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeFadeonpage 43.
LFO1Delay.(99...+99,CC#78)
ThisscalesLFO1sdelaytimethetimebetweennoteon
andtheonsetoftheLFO.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Delayonpage 43.
ThisparameterinteractswithCC#78.
LFO1Stop.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO1isstopped
orrunning.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeStopon
page 42.
ThePROGsettingrestorestheProgramsoriginalvalues.
Forexample,ifyousetthistoPROGwhentheoscillator1
LFOisstoppedandoscillator2isplaying,theoriginal
settingoftheparameterwillbeused.
LFO2Speed.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO2sfrequency.WhentheLFOisinMIDI/
Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.Formore
information,pleaseseeFrequencyonpage 42.
LFO2Fade.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO2sfadeintime.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeFadeonpage 43.
LFO2Delay.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO2sdelaytimethetimebetweennoteon
andtheonsetoftheLFO.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Delayonpage 43.
LFO2Stop.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO2isstopped
orrunning.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeStopon
page 42.
CommonLFOSpeed.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheCommonLFOsfrequency.WhentheLFOis
inMIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.
Unison.(Off/On,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparameterturnsUnisononandoff.Formore
information,pleaseseeUnisononpage 13.
NumberOfVoices.(2...6,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthenumberofUnisonvoices.
Program mode
10
IfUnisonisnotOn,thisparameterhasnoeffect.Formore
information,pleaseseeNumberofVoicesonpage 13.
Detune.(00...99,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametersetstheamountofdetuning
betweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,this
parameterhasnoeffect.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Detuneonpage 13.
Thickness.(Off/01...09,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthepatternofdetuning
betweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,orifDetune
issetto0,thisparameterhasnoeffect.Formore
information,pleaseseeThicknessonpage 13.
Tone Adjust Parameters
Macro parameters
ThefollowingthreeparametersaffectbothOscillator1and
Oscillator2.
Note:Inthelistbelow,attherightofeachparameter,the
valuerangeandedittypeareshowninparentheses.
PitchStretch.(12...+12,Relative)
ThisspecialcontrolincreasestheOscillatorTuneparameter
whileloweringtheTransposeparameter.Theresultisthat
thepitchstaysthesame,butthemappingofthesamplesto
thekeyschanges.Youcanusethistocreateinterestingshifts
intimbre.
Hold.(Off/On,Absolute)
ThisletsyouturnHoldonandoff.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeHoldonpage 14.
Reverse.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
ThisturnsReverseon/offformultisamplesthatallowthe
reversesettingforbothoscillators.PROGrestoresthe
Programsoriginalsettings.Reverseplaysthewaveform
fromendtostart;theeffectisonlynoticeablewithunlooped
samples.
Per-Oscillator parameters
TheseparametersaffecteachOscillatorseparately.Inthe
list,theparametersforOscillator1appearfirst,witheach
nameprefacedbyOSC1;theparametersforOscillator2
appearnext,prefacedbyOSC2.
Unlessotherwisespecified,allofthePerOscillator
parametersareAbsolute.
Note:Inthelistbelow,theitemsinparenthesesare(value,
edittype)respectively.
Tune.(1200...+1200,Relative)
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromthe
OscillatorsTunesetting,asdescribedunderTuneon
page 17.
Transpose.(60...+60,Relative)
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromthe
OscillatorsTransposesetting,asdescribedunder
Transposeonpage 17.
Note:aswithTranspose,below,thisisasimpleadditionor
subtraction,asopposedtothemorecomplexscaling
function.
MS/DKitSelect.(PROG/0...540,Absolute)
InSingleorDoublePrograms,thisletsyouselectanew
MultisamplefortheOscillator.InDrumPrograms,itlets
youselectadifferentDrumKit.
Ingeneral,itsbesttousethisinconjunctionwiththeMS
TypeandMS/DKitBankparameters,asdescribedbelow.
PROGrestorestheProgramsoriginalMultisamples(orthe
DrumKit,foraDrumProgram),includingallvelocity
rangesandReverseandStartOffsetsettings.
YoucanalsolimittherangeofthecontrolbyusingtheMin
#andMax#parameters,describedbelow.
For Single and Double Programs:
MS/DKitSelectoverridesalloftheMultisampleVelocity
zones,sothatthenewlyselectedMultisampleplaysoverthe
entirevelocityrange.
Bydefault,youcanselectfromthesameBankastheoriginal
ProgramsMS1.
YoucanusetheMS/DKitBankparameter,describedbelow,
tochangethesedefaultsasdesired.
For Multisamples only:
YoucanusetheToneAdjustReverseandStartOffset
parameterstomodifythenewlyselectedMultisample.By
default,theReverseissettoOff,anditsStartOffsetissetto
0.
For Drum Programs:
Bydefault,youcanselectfromthesameBankastheoriginal
ProgramsDrumkit.YoucanusetheMSBankparameter,
describedbelow,toselectadifferentBank.
MSBank.(Mono,Stereo...,Meta)
ThisMetaparametermodifiestheMS/DkitSelect
parameter,sothatyoucanselectMultisamplesfromany
Bankyoulike.
MS/DKitMin#.(0...540,Meta)
ThisMetaparametersetsaminimumvaluefortheMS/Dkit
Selectparameter.Youcanusethisinconjunctionwiththe
MS/DKitMax#parameter,below,sothatfrontpanelvalue
dialselectsonlyfromasmallsetofchoices.Thisis
particularlyconvenientwiththeinternal,inwhichsimilar
Multisamplesaregroupedtogether.Forinstance,thismakes
iteasytoselectbetweenagroupofbells,orasetofelectric
basses.
MS/DKitMax#.(0...540,Meta)
ThisMetaparametersetsamaximumvaluefortheMS/
DkitSelectparameter.PleaseseeMS/DKitMin#,above,
formoreinformation.
StartOffset.(0ff,1th...8th,Absolute)
ThisallowsyoutochangetheStartOffsetofthe
MultisamplespecifiedbytheMSSelectparameter.It
appliesonlywhen:
TheProgramisaSingleorDouble(notaDrumKit)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOffset(StartOffset)on
page 18.
Drive.(0...99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsDriveparameter,asdescribed
underDriveonpage 35.
LowBoost.(0...99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsLowBoostparameter,as
describedunderLowBoostonpage 35.
PitchSlope.(1.0...2.0,Absolute)
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsPitchSlopeparameter,as
describedunderPitchSlopeonpage 20.
LFO1Waveform.(Triangle...Rad6,Absolute)
ThisselectsthewaveformfortheOscillatorsLFO1,as
describedunderWaveformonpage 42.
LFO2Waveform.(Triangle...Rnd6,Absolute)
ThisselectsthewaveformfortheOscillatorsLFO2,as
describedunderWaveformonpage 42.
AmpLFO1Intensity.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAmpmodulation
fromLFO1,asdescribedunderIntensity(LFO1)on
page 38.
AmpLFO2Intensity.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAmpmodulation
fromLFO2,asdescribedunderIntensity(LFO1)on
page 38.
FilterLFO1IntensitytoA.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoff
11
modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunderIntensitytoA
onpage 30.
FilterLFO1IntensitytoB.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoff
modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunderIntensitytoB
onpage 31.
FilterLFO2IntensitytoA.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoff
modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunderIntensitytoA
onpage 30.
FilterLFO2IntensitytoB.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoff
modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunderIntensitytoB
onpage 31.
PitchLFO1AMSIntensity.(12.00...+12.00,Absolute)
YoucanuseanAMSsource,suchasaftertouch,tomodulate
thedepthofpitchmodulation(vibrato)fromLFO1.This
controlstheintensityofthatAMSmodulation.Formore
information,pleaseseeIntensityonpage 21.
PitchLFO2AMSIntensity.(12.00...+12.00,Absolute)
ThisissimilartoPitchLFO1AMSIntensity,above.
Default Tone Adjust Settings
YoucanusetheToneAdjustfunctiontoeditallofthe
importantprogramparametersonthissinglepage.Mostof
thepresetsoundsusethedefaultlayoutshownbelow.You
cancustomizethesedefaultsettingsforeachprogram.
FordetailsontheToneAdjustfunction,pleasesee07b:
Selectedparameterinformationonpage 8.
Tone Adjust parameters
Thisappliestocommontoneadjustparametersandtone
adjustparametersfollowingthe07b:Selectedparameter
informationonpage 8.
Default Tone Adjust Settings
V 07: Menu Command
3:CopyToneAdjustseep.65
4:ResetToneAdjustseep.65
Commandonpage 64.
Controller Default settings
SW1 [OSC1]Transpose
SW2 [OSC2]Transpose
SW3 [OSC1]Tune
SW4 [OSC2]Tune
SW5 [OSC1]MS/DKitSelect
SW6 FilterCutoff
SW7 FilterResonance
SW8 FilterEGIntensity
Slider1 [OSC1&2]PitchStretch
Slider2 [OSC1]FilterLFO1IntA
Slider3 [OSC1]AmpLFOInt
Slider4 [OSC1]Drive
Slider5 F/AEGAttackTime
Slider6 F/AEGDecayTime
Slider7 F/AEGSustainLevel
Slider8 F/AEGReleaseTime
Program mode
12
PROG P1: Basic/Controllers
11: Program Basic
ThispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsfortheProgram.
Amongotherthings,youcan:
SetuptheProgramtobeaSingle,aDouble,aDrumKit,
oraDoubleDrumKit.
SettheProgramtoplaypolyphonicallyor
monophonically.
11a: Oscillator Mode
Oscillator Mode
[Single, Double, Drums, Double Drums]
SpecifiestheProgramsoscillatorassignment;whetherit
willuseoneortwooscillators,oradrumkit.
Single:Theprogramwilluseoneoscillator(Oscillator1,
Filter1,Amplifier1).Inthiscase,theprogramwillnormally
haveamaximumof120notepolyphony.
Double:Theprogramwillusetwooscillators(Oscillator1/
2,Filter1/2,Amplifier1/2).Inthiscasetheprogramwill
normallyhaveamaximumof60notepolyphony.
Drums:Theprogramwilluseoneoscillator(aswhenSingle
isselected),butOscillator1willbeassignedadrumkit
insteadofamultisample.Inthiscasetheprogramwill
normallyhaveamaximumof120notepolyphony.
DoubleDrums:TheProgramwillusetwooscillatorstoplay
twoDrumKits.InthiscasetheProgramwillnormallyhave
amaximumof60notepolyphony.
OSC Picture 1, 2 [MS Names...]
Hereyoucanspecifyagraphicforoscillators1and2that
willbeshowninthemainP0Playpage.
Toopenthemenu,pressthepopupbuttonorpressthe
previewareatwiceinsuccession.
Tochoosethegraphic,pressthegraphicviewatthebottom
ofthemenuortheleftorrightgraphicsintheupperpart.To
confirmyourselection,presstheOKbuttonorpressthe
uppermiddlegraphictwiceinsuccession.
OSCPicture2isunavailableiftheOscillatorModeisSingle
orDrums.
11b: Voice Assign Mode
Voice Assign Mode [Poly, Mono]
Selectthebasicvoiceallocationmode.Dependingonwhich
oneyouselect,variousotheroptionswillappear,suchas
PolyLegato(Polymodeonly)andUnison(Monomode
only).
Poly:Theprogramwillplaypolyphonically,allowingyou
playchords.
Mono:Theprogramwillplaymonophonically,producing
onlyonenoteatatime.
Poly Legato [Off, On]
PolyLegatoisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeisset
toPoly.
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnoteis
released.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached.
On(checked):Whenyouplayalegatophrase,onlythefirst
noteofthatphrase(andwithinapproximatelythefirst
30msec)willusethenormalmultisamplestartpoint
specifiedbyStartOffset(Prog21a);allsubsequentnotes
willusethelegatostartpointspecifiedforeach
multisample.
Note:Thisisausefulwaytosimulatethepercussiveattack
ofatonewheeltypeorgan.
Off(unchecked):Noteswillalwaysusethesettingofthe
StartOffset,regardlessofwhetheryouplaylegatoor
detached.
WithsomeMultisamples,PolyLegatomaynothave
anyeffect.
Single Trigger [Off, On]
SingleTriggerisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeis
settoPoly.
On(checked):Whenyouplaythesamenoterepeatedly,the
previousnotewillbesilencedbeforethenextnoteis
sounded,sothatthetwodonotoverlap.
Off(unchecked):Whenyouplaythesamenoterepeatedly,
thenoteswilloverlap.
Mono Legato [Off, On]
ThisisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono.
Legatomeanstoplaynotessothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnoteis
released.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached.
WhenMonoLegatoisOn,thefirstnoteinalegatophrase
willsoundnormally,andthensubsequentnoteswillhavea
smoothersound,formoregentletransitionsbetweenthe
notes.
TheModeparameter,below,switchesbetweentwodifferent
MonoLegatoeffects,eachofwhichachievesthis
smoothnessinadifferentway.Seethedescriptionofthat
parameterformoredetails.
On(checked):Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing,the
noteswithinalegatophrasewillsoundsmoother,according
tothesettingoftheModeparameter,below.
Off(unchecked):Legatophrasingwillproducethesame
soundasdetachedplaying.
11a
11b
11
Menu
PROG P1: Basic/Controllers 11: Program Basic
13
Mode [Normal, Use Legato Offset]
ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenMonoLegatoisOn.
Normal:Whenyouplaylegato,themultisample,envelopes,
andLFOswillnotbereset;onlythepitchoftheoscillator
willchange.Thissettingisparticularlyeffectiveforwind
instrumentsandanalogsynthsounds.
Withthisoption,thepitchmayoccasionallybe
incorrect,dependingonwhichmultisampleyouplay,
andwhereonthekeyboardyouplay.
UseLegatoOffset:Whenyouplaylegato,thesecondand
subsequentnoteswillusethelegatostartpointspecifiedfor
eachmultisample,ratherthantheStartOffset(StartOffset
21a)setting.
Thisiseffectivewhenusedwithamultisampleforwhich
youveassignedaspecificlegatooffsetpoint.Forexample,
youmightuseittocontroltheattackofabreathy,slow
attacksaxsound.Onsomemultisamples,thiswillhaveno
effect.
EnvelopesandLFOswillstillbereset,astheyarewith
detachedplaying.
Priority [Low, High, Last]
PriorityisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono.
Thisparameterdetermineswhathappenswhenmorethan
onenoteisbeinghelddown.
Low:Thelowestnotewillsound.Manyvintage,
monophonicanalogsynthsworkthisway
High:Thehighestnotewillsound.
Last:Themostrecentlyplayednotewillsound.
Unison [On, Off]
UnisoncanbeusedinMonomode.
On(checked):WhenUnisonison,theProgramusestwoor
morestacked,detunedvoicestocreateathicksound.
UsetheNumberofVoicesandDetuneparameterstosetthe
numberofvoicesandamountofdetuning,andthe
Thicknessparametertocontrolthecharacterofthe
detuning.
Off(unchecked):TheProgramplaysnormally.
Number of Voices [2...6]
Thiscontrolsthenumberofdetunedvoicesthatwillbe
playedforeachnotewhenusingUnison.Itappliesonly
whenUnisonisOn.
Detune [00...99 cents]
DetuneisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
ThisparametersetsthetuningspreadfortheUnisonvoices,
incents(1/100ofasemitone).TheThicknessparameter,
below,controlshowthevoicesaredistributedacrossthe
detuneamount.WhenThicknessisOff,thevoicesare
distributedevenly,centeredaroundthebasicpitch.
Forinstance,letssaythattheNumberofvoicesparameter
issetto3,Detuneissetto24,andThicknessisOff:
Voiceonewillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwowill
notbedetuned,andvoicethreewillbedetunedupby12
cents.
Asanotherexample,letssaythatDetuneisstillsetto24
andThicknessisstillOff,butNumberofvoicesissetto4:
Voiceonewillstillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwo
willbedetuneddownby4cents,voicethreewillbedetuned
upby4cents,andvoice4willbedetunedupby12cents.
Thickness [Off, 01...09]
ThicknessisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Thisparametercontrolsthecharacterofthedetuningforthe
unisonvoices.
Off:Unisonvoiceswillbeevenlydistributedacrossthe
Detunerange,asshownabove.
0109:Unisonvoiceswillbedetunedinanasymmetricway,
increasingthecomplexityofthedetune,andchangingthe
wayinwhichthedifferentpitchesbeatagainstoneanother.
Thiscreatesaneffectsimilartovintageanalogsynthesizers,
inwhichoscillatorswouldfrequentlydriftslightlyoutof
tune.Highernumbersincreasetheeffect.
V 11: Menu Command
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Commandonpage 64.
Voice Detune
1 12
2 0
3 +12
Voice Detune
1 12
2 4
3 +4
4 +12
Program mode
14
12: Note-On/Scale
Here,youcanmakethefollowingsettings.
MakekeyboardsplitsettingsforOSC1,OSC2,andHold.
Enable/disablethehalfdamperfunction.
Selectthebasicscaleoftheprogram.
12a: Key Zone
Youcancreatekeyboardsplitsbysettingtopandbottom
keylimitsforOscillators1and2.Also,youcancontrolthe
keyboardrangeoverwhichtheHoldparametertakeseffect.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevaluesandvelocityvaluesby
holdingdownaneditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
akey(seeOGp.10).
OSC 1 Bottom [C1...G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichOscillator1willplay.
OSC 1 Top [C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichOscillator1willplay.
OSC 2 Bottom [C1...G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichOscillator2willplay.
OSC 2 Top [C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichOscillator2willplay.
Hold [On, Off]
Holdislikepermanentlypressingdownonthesustain
pedal.Inotherwords,notescontinuetosoundasifyou
wereholdingdownthekeyevenafteryouliftyourfingers
fromthekeyboard.
UnlesstheSustainLevelissetto0inAmpEG1(andAmp
EG2inaDoubleProgram),thesoundwillplayforthe
entirelengthofthemultisample(s).
On(checked):TheHoldfunctionisenabledfortherange
setbytheHoldBottomandHoldTopparameters,below.
Off(unchecked):Noteswillplaynormally.Thisisthe
defaultsetting.
Using Hold with Drum Kits
Holdcanbeespeciallyusefulfordrumprograms,sinceit
letsthedrumsamplesringoutnaturally.Ingeneral,when
yousettheOscillatorModetoDrums,itsgoodtosetHold
toOn.
OnceyouveturnedonHoldforadrumprogram,the
functioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasisaccordingto
settingswithintheselectedDrumKit.
IfakeysEnableNoteOffReceiveparameter(Global54a)
isunchecked,thenotewillbeheld.
IfthekeysEnableNoteOffReceiveparameterischecked,
itwillnotbeheld.
IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbeheld
regardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffReceivesetting.
Using Hold with Acoustic Pianos
Holdisalsousefulforsimulatingthetopoctavesofan
acousticpiano,inwhichnotesalwayssustainuntiltheyfade
outnaturally,regardlessofhowlongyouholdthekey.
TheHoldBottomandHoldTopparametersaredesigned
forexactlythispurpose.Theyletyoulimittheeffectofthe
Holdparametertoaspecificrangeofthekeyboard.
Hold Bottom [C1...G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
Hold Top [C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
12b: Half-Damper Control
Ahalfdamperpedalisaspecialtypeofcontinuousfoot
pedal,suchastheKorgDS1H.Incomparisontoastandard
footswitch,halfdamperpedalsoffermoresubtlecontrolof
sustain,whichcanbeespeciallyusefulforpianosounds.
TheKROMEwillautomaticallysensewhenahalfdamperis
connectedtotherearpanelDAMPERinput.Forproper
operation,youwillalsoneedtocalibratethepedal,using
theHalfDamperCalibrationcommandintheGlobalmenu.
Theoffandfullonpositionsofthehalfdamperworkjust
likeastandardfootswitch.InconjunctionwiththeEnable
HalfDamperparameter,below,intermediatepositions
allowagraduatedcontrolofsustain,similartothedamper
pedalofanacousticpiano.
Enable Half-Damper [On, Off]
WhenthisisOn(checked),HalfDamperpedals,normal
sustainpedals,andMIDICC#64willallmodulatetheAmp
EG,asdescribedbelow.
WhenthisisOff(unchecked),thepedalsandMIDICC#64
willstillholdnotesasusual,butwillnotmodulatetheAmp
EG.
Half-Damper Pedal and Release Time
TheamountofmodulationdependsonwhethertheAmp
EGSustainLevelissetto0(asisthecasewithmostacoustic
pianosounds),orsetto1ormore.Themodulationis
continuous,from1x(nochange)to55timeslonger;thetable
belowshowsaselectionofrepresentativepoints.
Half-Damper modulation of Amp EG Release Time
12c: OSC1/2 Note-On Control
OSC1 Delay [0000ms...5000ms, KeyOff]
Thisspecifiesthetimefromwhenyoupressakeyuntil
oscillator1actuallybeginstosound.
ThisismostusefulinDoublePrograms,fordelayingone
oscillatorinrelationtotheother.
KeyOffisaspecialsetting.Insteadofdelayingthesoundby
aparticularamountoftime,thesoundwillplayassoonas
youreleasethekey.Youcanusethistocreatetheclick
heardwhenaharpsichordnoteisreleased,forinstance.
12a
12d
12
Menu
12c
12b
CC#64 Value
Multiply Amp EG Release Time by
If Sustain = 0 If Sustain = 1 or more
0 1x 1x
32 2.1x 2.1x
64 3.2x
3.2x
80 5.9x
96 22.3x
127 55x
PROG P1: Basic/Controllers 12: Note-On/Scale
15
Ingeneral,whenyouusetheKeyOffsetting,itsalsobestto
settheoscillatorsAmpEGSustainLevelto0.
Mode [Key, Key + Damper]
Normally,youplaynotessimplybypressingkeysonthe
keyboard.Inspecialcases,however,youcansetthis
parametersothatyoumustfirstbeholdingdownthe
damperpedal,andthenpressakey,inordertoplayanote.
Forinstance,thiscanbeusefulwhenmodelingthebehavior
ofapianosoundboard.
Keyisthenormalmode.
WhenyouselectKey+Damper,noteswillonlysoundifthe
damperpedalisbeinghelddown.Whenthedamperpedal
isreleased,allnoteswillbestoppedeveniftheyarestill
beinghelddown.
OSC2 Delay [0000ms...5000ms, KeyOff]
Mode [Key, Key + Damper]
Thisspecifiesthetimefromwhenyoupressakeyuntil
oscillator2actuallybeginstosound.
SeeOSC1DelayandMode,above.
12d: Scale
Type
[Equal TemperamentUser Octave Scale15]
SelectsthebasicscalefortheProgram.
Notethatformanyofthescales,thesettingoftheKey
parameter,below,isveryimportant.
EqualTemperament:Thisisthemostwidelyusedscaleby
far,inwhicheachsemitonestepisspacedatequalpitch
intervals.
EqualTemperamentallowseasymodulation,sothatachord
progressionplayedinthekeyofCsoundsroughlythesame
asthesameprogressionplayedinF#.Sacrificed,however,is
someofthepurityofindividualintervalsofferedbythe
scalesbelow.
PureMajor:Inthistemperament,majorchordsofthe
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune.
PureMinor:Inthistemperament,minorchordsofthe
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune.
Arabic:Thisscaleincludesthequartertoneintervalsusedin
Arabicmusic.
Pythagoras:ThisscaleisbasedonancientGreekmusic
theory,andisespeciallyeffectiveforplayingmelodies.It
producescompletelypurefifths,withoneexception,atthe
expenseofdetuningotherintervalsthirdsinparticular.
AsmuchasPythagorasmighthavelikedtodoso,itsnot
possibletomakeallthefifthspurewhilealsokeepingthe
octaveintune.Forthesakeoftheoctave,oneofthefifthsthe
intervalfromthesharpfourthdegreetothesharpfirst
degreeismadequiteflat.
Werkmeister(WerkmeisterIII):Thisscalewasoneofthe
manytemperamentsystemsdevelopedtowardstheendof
theBaroqueperiod.TheseWellTemperedtuningswere
aimedatallowingrelativelyfreetranspositionalthough
youllstillnoticethatthedifferentkeysmaintaintheirown
distinctcharacteristics,unlikeEqualTemperament.
J.S.Bachwasreferringtothesenewscalesinhistitle,The
WellTemperedClavier.Assuch,thisgroupare
particularlyappropriateforlatebaroqueorganand
harpsichordmusic.
Kirnberger(KirnbergerIII):ThisisasecondWell
Temperedtuning,datingfromtheearly18thcentury.
Slendro:ThisisanIndonesiangamelanscale,withfive
notesperoctave.
WhenKeyissettoC,usetheC,D,F,GandAnotes.Other
keyswillplaythenormalequaltemperedpitches.
Pelog:ThisisanotherIndonesiangamelanscale,withseven
notesperoctave.
WhenKeyissettoC,usethewhitekeys.Theblackkeyswill
playtheequaltemperedpitches.
Stretch:Thistuningisusedforacousticpianos.
UserAllNotesScale:Thisisauserprogrammedscalewith
differentsettingsforall128MIDInotes.Youcansetupthis
scaleinGlobalmode(Global31b).
UserOctaveScale0015:Theseareuserprogrammedscales
withsettingsforeachofthe12notesinanoctave.Youcan
setthemupinGlobalmode(Global31a).
Key (Scale Key) [CB]
Selectsthekeyofthespecifiedscale.
ThissettingdoesnotapplytotheEqualTemperament,
Stretch,andUserAllNotesscales.
IfyoureusingascaleotherthanEqualTemperament,
thecombinationoftheselectedscaleandtheKey
settingmayskewthetuningofthenote.Forexample,A
abovemiddleCmightbecome442 Hz,insteadofthe
normal440 Hz.YoucanusetheGlobalModesMaster
Tune(Global01a)parametertocorrectthis,if
necessary.
Random [07]
Thisparametercreatesrandomvariationsinpitchforeach
note.Atthedefaultvalueof0,pitchwillbecompletely
stable;highervaluescreatemorerandomization.
Thisparameterishandyforsimulatinginstrumentsthat
havenaturalpitchinstabilities,suchasanalogsynths,tape
mechanismorgansoracousticinstruments.
V 12: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
Program mode
16
13: Controllers Setup
HereyoucanspecifytheSW1andSW2switchandfront
panel14knobsoftheprogramwhenRealtimeControls
USERisselected.
13a: Panel Switch 1/2 Assign
SW1 (SW1 Assign) [Off, ..., JS-Y Lock]
ThisassignsthefunctionofSW1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeListofSW1/2assignmentsonpage 348.
Note:Ifyouchangethefunctionsetting,thestatusisresetto
off.
Note:Theon/offstatusoftheSW1,SW2switchesis
memorizedwhenyousavetheprogram.
Mode (SW1 Mode) [Toggle, Momentary]
Thisspecifiestheon/offoperationwhenyoupresstheSW1
switch.
Toggle:ThestatewillalternatebetweenOnandOffeach
timeyoupresstheSW1switch.
Momentary:ThestatewillremainOnonlywhileyou
continueholdingdowntheSW1switch.
ThisassignsthefunctionofSW2.Thefunctionsthatcanbe
assignedtoSW2arethesameasforSW1,withthesubstitution
ofSW2Mod.(CC#81)insteadoftheSW1sSW1Mod.(CC#80).
13b: Realtime Controls Knob Assign
Hereyoucanselectthefunctions(mainlytypesofcontrol
change)thatareassignedtoknobs14whenControl
Assign(08b)RealtimeControlsUSERisselected.(See
RealtimeControlsKnobs14Assignmentsonpage 348)
Thefunctionsyouassignhereareactivewhenyouusethe
SELECTbuttontoselectUSER,andoperateknobs14.
USER [1] [Off, ..., MIDI CC#95, CC#102119]
V 13: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
18a
18b
18
Menu
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch 21: OSC1 Setup
17
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch
Thesepagescontrolthefirstandmostbasicelementsof
sounds:theMultisamplesthattheoscillatorsplay,andthe
pitchatwhichitplaysthem.Forinstance,youcan:
SelectMultisamplesforSingleandDoublePrograms,or
DrumKitsforDrumsandDoubleDrumsPrograms.
Setupvelocitysplits,crossfades,andlayersforSingleand
DoublePrograms.
Setthebasicpitchofthesound,includingtheoctave,fine
tuning,andsoon.
Controlpitchmodulationusingavarietyofcontrollers
suchasLFO,pitchEG,andthejoystick.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingleor
Drums,onlyOscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepagesfor
Oscillator2sfilterswillbegrayedout.
Multisamples, and Drum Kits
MultisamplesandDrumKitsallowyoutoplaysamplesin
differentways.
Multisampleslayoutoneormoresamplesacrossthe
keyboard.Forinstance,averysimpleguitarMultisample
mighthavesixsamplesoneforeachstring.
Asthenamesuggests,DrumKitsareoptimizedfor
playingdrumsamples.
Velocity splits, crossfades, and layers
Eachoscillatorhaseightvelocityzonesthatallowdifferent
keyboardvelocitiestoswitchthemultisampleordrum
samplethatisactuallysounded.
Foreachzone,youcanspecifythethreshold(boundary
value)andcrossfade(howvelocitywillsmoothlyfade
betweenthesamplesofadjacentzones).Thisallowsyouto
createvelocityswitchedorlayeredsounds,suchasthe
followingexamples.
Velocitysplitsinwhichthezonesarecleanlyseparatedat
theirthreshold
Velocitycrossfadesinwhichthezoneswillsmoothly
crossfadebeyondtheirthreshold.
Velocitylayersinwhichadditionalsoundsareaddedfor
avelocityregionaboveaspecifiedthreshold.
Note:IftheOscillatorModeisDrumsorDoubleDrums,the
velocityzonesettingsalreadyspecifiedforthedrumkitwill
beapplied,andwillnotbeshowninthescreen.Thevelocity
zonesforadrumkitcanbeeditedinGlobalP5DrumKit
(seep.205).PressingtheJumptoDrumKitEditbutton
showninthescreenwilltakeyoudirectlytoGlobalP5.
21: OSC1 Setup
Programssoundsarebasedonmultisamples,andthispage
letsyousetupallofthebasicmultisamplerelatedsettings.
SelectMultisamplesfortheOscillator(inaSingleor
DoubleProgram),orselecttheDrumKitforaDrum
Program
SettheOscillatorsbasicpitch
21a: OSC1 Frequency
Oscillator Mode Single, Double
OSC1 Frequency
Octave [2[32'], 1[16'], +0[8'], +1[4']]
ThissetsthebasicpitchoftheOscillator,inoctaves.The
defaultis+0[8].Thestandardoctaveofamultisampleis+0
[8].
Transpose [12...+12]
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitones,overarangeof1
octave.
Tune [1200...+1200]
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1octave.A
centis1/100ofasemitone.
Frequency Offset [10.0Hz ... +10Hz]
Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1 Hz.Frequency
OffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,whenusedtodetune
thetwooscillators,itcancreateaconstantbeatfrequency
acrosstherangeofthekeyboard.
21b: Multisamples
Usetheslideronthelefttocheckthesettingsofeachdrum
sampleshowninabbreviatedform.Dragtheslidertoview
thesettings.
1: Multisample 1
Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupwithonlyasingle
Multisample,justsetupMultisample1asdesired,andthen
settheThresholdVelocityto1andtheCrossfade
(CrossfadeRange)toOff.
Multisample On/Off [Off, On]
Specifieswhetherthemultisample1willsound.
ItwillsoundifthisisOn.
21b
21a
21
Menu
Velocity Split
Program mode
18
Bank [Mono, Stereo, XL, M, XL, St]
ThisisdisplayedifMultisampleOn/OffisOn.
Youcanchoosebetweenlookingatmonoandstereo
Multisamples.
Mono,Stereo:Conventionalmonauralorstereo
multisamples.
XL.M(eXtraLargeMono),XL.St(eXtraLargeStereo):
Highcapacitymonauralorstereomultisamples.
NotethatstereoMultisampleswillrequiretwiceasmany
voicesasmonoMultisamples.
Multisample select [List of Multisample]
Thisspecifiesamultisample.
Somemultisampleshaveanupperlimit;notesplayed
abovethatlimitwillnotsound.
WhenyoupresstheMultisampleSelectpopupbutton,the
multisamplelistwillappear,allowingyoutoselecta
multisamplefromthelist.
Usethetabstoselectacategory,andselectamultisample
withinthecategory.
Youcansearchforamultisamplebyaportionofitsname
(seep.2).
PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmtheselection,ortheCancel
buttontocancel.
Rev (Reverse) [Off, On]
Thisplaystheselectedmultisampleinreversewithout
loopingit.
Note:Ifanindividualsamplewithinthemultisampleis
alreadysettoreverse,itwillplayinreversewithoutthis
setting.
On(checked):Themultisamplewillplayinreverse.
Forvelocityzonesthatarenotselected(shownasoneline),
RevOnisindicatedas[R].
Off(unchecked):Themultisamplewillplaynormally.
Offset (Start Offset) [Off, 1st...8th]
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthebeginning,
Multisamplescanhaveupto8differentpreprogrammed
alternatestartingpoints.
TheStartOffsetspecifieswhethertousethenormalstart
point(Off),ortouseoneofthealternatestartpoints(1st
8th).
SomeMultisamplesmayhavefewerthan8pre
programmedpoints,inwhichcaseonlytheavailablepoints
canbeselected.
Level [000...127]
Thissetsthebasicvolumelevelofthemultisample.The
Ampsectioncanmodifythisbasiclevelextensivelywith
envelopes,LFOs,keyboardtracking,andothermodulation;
formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP4:Amp/EQon
page 35.
Dependingonthemultisample,highLevelsettings
maycausedistortionwhenplayingmanynotesata
time.Ifthisoccurs,lowertheLevel.
2...8: (Multisample 2...8)
ThesearethemultisamplesettingsfortheMultisample28.
Theparametersareexactlythesameasthosefor
Multisample1.
Velocity Split
Thisshowsthevelocityzonesfortheoscillatorseight
multisamplesandforeachoscillator.
Themetertotheleftindicatesthenoteonvelocity.This
allowsyoutoverifythemultisamplesandoscillatorsthat
willsoundateachvelocity(See01e:VelocityMeteron
page 5.).
21c: OSC1 (Drum Kit Frequency)
Oscillator Mode Drums, Double Drums
Octave [2[32'], 1[16'], +0[8'], +1[4']]
Thisadjuststhepitchinoctaveunits.Whenusingadrum
kit,settheOctaveto8.
Wheneditingadrumprogram,youmustsetthis
parameterto8.Withothersettings,thesoundsofthe
drumkitwillbeassignedtothewrongnotesofthe
keyboard.
Thisadjuststhelocationoftheinstrumentsintheselected
drumkit.Unlessyouneedtochangethis,leaveitat0.
Tune [1200...+1200]
Thisadjuststhepitchinonecentunits.
ThepitchofeachdrumkitcanbeadjustedinGlobalP5:
Drumkit.
Freq. Offset (Frequency Offset)
[10.0Hz ... +10Hz]
Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1 Hz.Frequency
OffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,whenusedtodetune
thetwooscillators,itcancreateaconstantbeatfrequency
acrosstherangeofthekeyboard.
21c
21d
21
Menu
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch 22: OSC1 Velocity
19
21d: Drum Kit
TheseparametersappearwhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DrumsorDoubleDrums.
Drum Kit [000...031 (INT), 032...047 (USER),
048056 (GM)]
Thisselectsadrumkit.
Jump to Drum kit Edit Page button
PressingthisbuttonwilltakeyoudirectlytoGlobalP5:
DrumKitwhereyoucaneditthedrumkitselectedbyDrum
KitSelect.EvenifOscillatorModeissettoDoubleDrums,
youwillhearonlythekitthatwasselected.IftheGMdrum
kitwasselected,thelastselecteddrumkitwillbeselected.
Asdesired,useCopyDrumKittocopytheGMdrumkit
totheUSERbank.
V 21: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
22: OSC1 Velocity
Hereyoucanmakethefollowingsettings.
Velocityzoneforoscillator1
Themultisamplesvelocitysplitandcrossfadesettings
22a: OSC 1 Velocity Zone
Velocitycanbeusedtoswitchbetweensoundingoscillators
1and2.Hereyoucanspecifythevelocityzoneforoscillator
1.
Thisvelocityzonesettingtakespriorityoverthevelocity
settingsofmultisamples18.Thestatusofthesettingsis
indicatedbythegraphontherightsideofthescreen.This
letsyoumakesettingswhilecomparingthemwiththe
velocitysplitgraph.
Bottom [001...127]
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
Top [001...127]
ThissetsthehighestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
Note:TheOSC1Topvelocitymustbegreaterthanthe
OSC1Bottomvelocity.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevalueandvelocityvalueby
holdingdowntheeditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
anoteonthekeyboard(seeOGp.10).
22b: Multisample Velocity Zone
Hereyoucanspecifythevelocityzoneforeachofthe
oscillatorseightmultisamples.
Threshold Velocity [001...127]
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheMultisamplewill
sound.Multisample1sThresholdVelocitycanbeequalto,
butnotlowerthan,thatofMultisample2.
Crossfade (Crossfade Range) [Off, 001...127]
ThissetstherangeofvelocitiesoverwhichMultisample1
willfadeintoMultisample2,goingupfromtheThreshold
Velocity.
Forinstance,iftheThresholdVelocityissetto64,andthe
Crossfadeissetto20,MS2willstarttofadeinatvelocities
of84andbelow.
WhenvelocitiesarewithintheCrossfade,theOscillatorwill
usetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasitwouldnormally.
Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
Note:Youcantouchanddragtochangethisvalue(See*
EG,VelocitySplitonpage 6oftheOperationguide.).
Thisshowsthevelocityzone.
Curve [Linear, Power, Layer]
Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linearand
Power(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetunethewaythat
thetwoMultisamplesmixtogether;oneortheothermaybe
moreappropriateforagivenpairofMultisamples.Layer,
truetoitsname,letsyoulayerthetwoMultisamples
togetherwithoutanycrossfading.
Linearmeansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50%of
theirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,
thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;ifso,tryusing
Powerinstead.
Power,shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwosamples
willeachbeataround70%oftheirfullvolumeinthemiddle
ofthecrossfade.Sometimes,thismaycreateabumpinthe
volumelevel,inwhichcaseyoumighttryselectingLinear
instead.
LayermeansthatthetwoMultisampleswillbelayered
together,bothatfullvolume,fortheentirerangeofthe
crossfade.
23a
23b
23c
23
Menu
23d
Bottom Velocity = 64
84
Xfade Range = 20
Curve = Linear
Select
Program mode
20
Crossfade Curves
Velocity Split Zone
Thisspecifiesthevelocityzoneforeachoftheoscillators
eightmultisamples.Themetershowsthenoteonvelocity
value.
Velocity Split
Thisshowsthevelocityzonesfortheoscillatorseight
multisamplesandforeachoscillator.
Themeterattheleftindicatesthenoteonvelocity.This
allowsyoutoverifythemultisamplesandoscillatorsthat
willsoundateachvelocity(See01e:VelocityMeteron
page 5.).
22c: OSC1 Velocity
Oscillator Mode Drums, Double Drums
Velocitycanbeusedtoswitchbetweenthedrumkits
soundedbyoscillators1and2.Hereyoucanspecifythe
velocityzoneforoscillator1.Thestatusofthesettingswill
beindicatedinthegraphontherightsideofthescreen.This
letsyoueditsettingswhilecomparingthemwiththe
velocitysplitgraph.
Bottom [001...127]
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
Top [001...127]
ThissetsthehighestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
TheOSC1TopvelocitymustbegreaterthantheOSC1
Bottomvelocity.
Velocity Split
Thisshowsthevelocityzonefortheoscillator.
Themeterontheleftshowsthenoteonvelocityvaluesfor
theglobalMIDIchannel.Thisletsyouverifythe
multisamplesthatwillsoundateachvelocity(See01e:
VelocityMeteronpage 5.).
Jump to Drum kit Edit Page button
SeeJumptoDrumkitEditPagebuttononpage 19.
V 22: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
23: OSC1 Pitch
ThispagecontainsallofthesettingsforOscillator1spitch
modulation.Forexample,youcan:
SpecifypitchbendcontrolledbythejoystickX(oran
incomingpitchbendmessage)settoindependentBend
UpandBendDown,orcontrolledbyanincoming
messageCC#16(theribboncontrolmessageetc).
UsePitchSlopetocontrolhowthepitchchangeswhen
youplayupanddownthekeyboard.
AssignAMSmodulationforpitch.
SetupinitialamountsofpitchmodulationfromthePitch
EGandLFO1/2,aswellasAMSmodulationofLFOand
EGamounts.
SetupPortamento.
23a: Pitch
Pitch Slope [1.0...+2.0]
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.0.
Xfade
Power
Xfade
Layer
Linear
Volume
MS1
MS2
Velocity
Volume
MS1
MS2
Velocity
Volume
MS1
MS2
Velocity
Xfade
22c
21
Menu
23a
23b
23c
23
Menu
23d
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch 23: OSC1 Pitch
21
Pitch Slope, pitch, and note
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplayhigher
onthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescausethepitchto
fallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthekeyboard
wontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasifyourealways
playingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecialeffectssounds,for
instance.
Ribbon [12...+12]
SpecifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenCC#16
isreceived.
Withapositive(+)setting,thepitchwillrisewhenthevalue
ofCC#16ishigherthanthecentervalueof64.Witha
negative()setting,thepitchwillfall.
JS (+X) [60...+12]
Specifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenthe
joystickismovedtotheright(orwhenapitchbendmessage
isreceived).Fornormalpitchbend,setthistoapositive
value.
Forexample,ifyousetthisto+12andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheright,thepitchwillriseoneoctaveabovethe
originalpitch.
JS (X) [60...+12]
Specifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenthe
joystickismovedtotheleft(orwhenapitchbendmessage
isreceived).Fornormalpitchbend,setthistoanegative
value.
Forexample,ifyousetthisto60andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheleft,thepitchwillfallfiveoctavesbelowthe
originalpitch.Youcanusethistocreateguitarstyle
downwardswoops.
AMS (Pitch) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsaAMSsourcetocontrolthepitch.Foralistof
AMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(AlternateModulation
Source)Listonpage 340.
Intensity [12.00...+12.00]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitch
modulation,insemitones.
ForexampleifyousetAMS(Pitch)toJS+Y:CC#01andthen
movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,thepitchwillriseif
thisparameterissettoapositive(+)value,orfallifthis
parameterissettoanegative()value.
23b: Pitch EG
Intensity [12.00...+12.00]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectofthePitchEGonOscillator
1sfrequency,inhalfsteps,beforeanyAMSmodulation.
ThePitchEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to99.
WhentheIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,positive
valuesfromtheEGraisethepitch,andnegativevalues
lowerthepitch.
WhentheIntensityissettoanegative()value,theeffectof
theEGisreversed;positiveEGvaluesmeanlowerpitches,
andnegativeEGvaluesmeanhigherpitches.
AMS (Pitch EG) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscaletheamount
ofthePitchEG.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Intensity [12.00...+12.00]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitchEGAMS
modulation.TheAMSmodulationandtheinitialIntensity
areaddedtogethertodeterminethePitchEGsfinaleffect.
Withpositive(+)values,greatermodulationwillincrease
theeffectofthePitchEG,asshowninexampleBbelow.
Withnegative()values,greatermodulationwillintroduce
theoppositeeffectofthePitchEGlikeinvertingthepolarity
oftheenvelope.Youcanusethisinseveraldifferentways:
YoucansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththeIntensity
parameter,andthenreducethisamountwithAMS.In
thiscase,thefinaleffectoftheEGissimplydiminished,
andnotactuallyinverted,asshowninexampleC.
YoucanalsosettheAMSIntensityamounttobegreater
thantheinitialIntensity.Inthiscase,theEGwillhavea
positiveeffectwithlowmodulationamounts,andan
invertedeffectathighermodulationamountsasshownin
exampleD.
Pitch EG AMS
23c: Portamento
Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetweennotes,
insteadofchangingabruptly.
Enable [Off, On]
On(checked):TurnsonPortamento,sothatpitchglides
smoothlybetweennotes.
Off(unchecked):TurnsoffPortamento.Thisisthedefault
state.
Fingered [Off, On]
ThisparameterallowsyoutocontrolPortamentothrough
yourplayingstyle.Whenitsenabled,playinglegatowill
turnonPortamento,andplayingdetachedwillturnitoff
again.
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnableis
turnedon.
On(checked):TurnsonFingeredPortamento.
Off(unchecked):TurnsoffFingeredPortamento.
Mode [Rate, Time]
RatemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystakethesame
amountoftimetoglideagivendistanceinpitchfor
instance,onesecondperoctave.Putanotherway,gliding
Pitch
Note on keyboard
2oct
1oct
1oct
C4 C5
+2
+1
0
1
Change
to Pitch
Change
to Pitch
A. Original EG B. Intensity = +6.00
C. Intensity = 3.00 D. Intensity = 24.00
Program mode
22
severaloctaveswilltakemuchlongerthanglidingahalf
step.
TimemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystakethesame
amountoftimetoglidefromonenotetoanother,regardless
ofthedifferenceinpitch.Thisisespeciallyusefulwhen
playingchords,sinceitensuresthateachnoteinthechord
willenditsglideatthesametime.
Time [000...127]
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Highervaluesmean
longertimes,forslowerchangesinpitch.
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnableis
turnedon.
Assigning SW1 or SW2 to Portamento On/Off
Youcanturnportamentoon/offbyusingthetwoassignable
switchesSW1andSW2.
Todoso:
1. GototheProgP1:Basic/ControllersControllersSetup
page.
2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,seteitherSW1orSW2to
Porta.SW(CC#65).
Now,theselectedswitchwillenableanddisable
Portamento.
IfyouassignportamentotoSW1/2,MIDIportamento
controller#65willbetransmittedeachtimeyouusethe
switch.Youcanalsoturnportamentoon/offby
receivingMIDIcontroller#65.
23d: LFO1/2
LFO1andLFO2canbothcontrolthepitch.Youcancontrol
thestrengthofeachLFOsmodulationinthreedifferent
ways:
SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingtheLFO1
Int.,LFO2Int.parameters.
UseJS+YInt.toadjusttheamountofLFOproducedby
JS+Yoperations.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheLFO.
TheresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethetotalLFO
effect.
LFO1
LFO1 Int. (LFO1 Intensity) [12.00...+12.00]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonthepitch,in
semitones,beforeanyJS+YInt.orAMSmodulation.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
JS+Y Int. (LFO1 JS+Y Intensity) [12.00...+12.00]
SpecifythedepthofpitchmodulationproducedbyOSC1
LFO1whenthejoystickismovedinthe+Y(away)direction
(orwhenCC#1isreceived).(Joystickcontrolinthe+Y
directioniscalledJS+Y.)
ThisparametersetsthemaximumamountofLFO
modulationaddedbyJS+Y,insemitones.
Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe+Y
directionwillcausetheOSC1LFO1toproducedeeperpitch
modulation.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.You
canalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountoftheLFO,as
setbyLFO1Int.,above.Forexample:
1. SetLFO1Int.to+7.00.
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthepitch,
bendingitbyaperfect5th.
2. SetJS+YInt.Intensityto7.00.
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickup,theeffectoftheLFOwill
fadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayatthetopofits
range,theLFOwillbecompletelycancelledout.
AMS (LFO1) [List of AMS Sources]
oftheLFOappliedtopitch.
Intensity [12.00...+12.00]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(LFO1)
modulationforpitch.
Withasettingof0,modulationwillnotbeapplied.Witha
settingof12.00,theOSC1LFO1willapplyamaximumof
+/1octaveofpitchmodulation.
ForexampleifAMS(LFO1)issettoJS+Y:CC#01andyou
movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,pitchmodulationfrom
OSC1LFO1willbeappliedinpositivephaseifthisisa
positive(+)value,orappliedinnegativephaseifthisisa
negative
()value.
LFO1Int.,JS+YInt.,andAMS(LFO1)settingsaresummed
todeterminethedepthanddirectionofpitchmodulation
producedbyOSC1LFO1.
LFO2:
TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothoseforLFO1.For
moreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunderLFO1,
above.
V 23: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
25: OSC2 Setup
Onthispageyoucanspecifythebasicoscillatorpitchfor
oscillator2,andassignthemultisamples.
ItisavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleor
DoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunder21:OSC1Setuponpage 17.
26: OSC2 Velocity
Onthispageyoucanspecifythevelocityzonesforoscillator
2itselfandforthemultisamples.
describedunder22:OSC1Velocityonpage 19.
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch 27: OSC2 Pitch
23
27: OSC2 Pitch
ThispagecontrolsthepitchsettingsforOscillator2.
describedunder23:OSC1Pitchonpage 20.
210: Pitch EG
ThePitchEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreate
complex,timevaryingchangestothepitchofOscillators1
and2.Theparametersonthispagecontroltheshapeofthe
EG.Forinstance,youcan:
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsandtimes
ofeachsegment.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,forsubtle
controloverthemodulationtimeoftheEG.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes.
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestarttheEG.
TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthepitch,usethe
PitchEGparametersontheP2:OSC/PitchOSC1Pitchpage
andOSC2Pitchpage,asdescribedunder23b:PitchEG
onpage 21.
Differences from the other EGs
ThePitchEGisdifferentfromtheFilterandAmpEGsin
severalways:
ThesinglePitchEGissharedbybothOscillator1and
Oscillator2.
TheSustainlevelisalways0.
TheLevelmodulationhastwoAMSsourcesinsteadof
one,andtheTimemodulationhasoneAMSsource
insteadofthree.
Pitch EG is also an AMS source
YoucanusethePitchEGasanAMSsourcetomodulate
otherparameters,justlikethekeyboardtrackingandLFOs.
SimplyselectthePitchEGintheAMSlistforthedesired
parameter.
210a:EG Reset
AMS (EG Reset AMS) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestartpoint.
Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFOtotriggerthe
EGinarepeatingrhythm.Thisresetisinadditiontothe
initialnoteon,whichalwayscausestheEGtostart.
Threshold [99...+99]
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset.
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjusttheexact
pointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbereset,
effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstotherrhythmic
effects.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.Whenthe
thresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhenpassingthrough
thethresholdmovingdownwards.
210a
210c
210b
210
Menu
Program mode
24
Note:ForseveralLFOwaveformtypes,oriftheLFOcycleis
fast,theLFOoutputmaynotalwayskeepupwithhigh
valuessuchas+99or99.
Inthiscase,settingtheThresholdtothesevaluesmaycause
inconsistentbehavior,ormaymeanthattheEGwillnot
resetatall.Ifthishappens,reducetheThresholduntilthe
EGtriggersconsistently.
210b:Envelope
Pitch EG
Theenvelopemovestoaspecifiedleveloverthespecified
time,andthenmovestothenextspecifiedleveloverthe
specifiedtime.Itproducesamodulationsignal
correspondingtothismovement.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfourlevels,theamountof
timeittakestogofromeachofthelevelstothenext,andthe
shape(fromlineartocurved)ofeachtransition.
Level
Eachofthefourlevelscanbeeitherpositiveornegative.
Positivelevelswillmakethepitch(orotherAMS
destination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue;negative
levelswillmakeitgodown.
Notethat,unliketheFilterandAmpEGs,thePitchEGs
SustainLevelisalways0.
Start [99...+99]
Thissetstheinitiallevelatnoteon.
Attack [99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
Break [99...+99]
Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendofthe
Decaytime.
Release [99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
Time
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
Attack [00...99]
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStartlevel
totheAttacklevel.
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansettheStart
levelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstartinstantaneouslyat
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay [00...99]
ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevelto
theBreaklevel.
Slope [00...99]
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheBreak
leveltotheSustainlevel(whichforthePitchEGisalways0).
OnceitreachestheSustain,theEGwillstaythereuntilnote
off,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Release [00...99]
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromtheSustain
leveltotheReleaselevel.
Note:Youcantouchanddragtochangethisvalue
(See*EG,VelocitySplitonpage 6oftheOperationguide.).
Curve
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraightlines.
Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelytobemade
outofcurves.
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchangequicklyat
first,andthenslowdownasitapproachesthenextpoint.
Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,linearsegments.
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurvedshapes
naturally.TheKROMEgoesastepfurtherthanvintage
synths,however,andletsyoucontroltheamountof
curvatureseparatelyforeachofthefourenvelopesegments.
Pitch EG Curve
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremainthe
same.However,greatercurvaturewilltendtosoundfaster,
becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyatthebeginning.
Different curve settings for up and down
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare
suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegmentswhichgo
down.
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments,suchas
DecayandRelease.
Attack [0L (Linear), 1...9, 10E (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthetransition
fromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel.
Decay [0L (Linear), 1...9, 10E (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthetransition
fromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel.
EG Value Actual Time
10 10ms
20 44ms
30 104ms
40 224ms
50 464ms
60 944ms
70 1.8seconds
80 3.8seconds
90 10.9seconds
99 87.3seconds
Note-on or reset
Attack
Time
Star t
Level
Decay
Time
Release
Time
Release
Level
Attack
Level
Change to
Pitch
Sustain Level
(Always 0)
Time
Break
Level
Slope
Time
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
PROG P2: OSC/Pitch 210: Pitch EG
25
Slope [0L (Linear), 1...9, 10E (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthetransition
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel(whichforthePitch
EGisalways0).
Release [0L (Linear), 1...9, 10E (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe
transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
210c:EG Level/Time Modulation
Level
ThesesettingsletyouusetwodifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheLevelparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthetwo
AMSsources,theStart,Attack,Decay,andBreaklevelseach
havetheirownmodulationintensities.
Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels,you
cancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestotheEGshape,
asshownbelow.
Note:OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo
points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.This
includesboththetimeofthesegment,andthelevelreached
attheendofthesegment.
Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecaytime,
youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecaytimeorthe
Breaklevel.
ThisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,Attacklevel,
orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthatarealready
sounding,unlesstheEGisthenrestartedviaEGReset.
Pitch EG Level Modulation
AMS1
AMS1 [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
parameters.
St (Start) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheStartlevel.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMS1sourcetoVelocityandset
Stto+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplayharder.If
youinsteadsetStto99,theStartlevelwilldecreaseasyou
playharder.
At (Attack) [99...+99]
modulationfortheAttacklevel.
Br (Break) [99...+99]
modulationfortheBreaklevel.
AMS2
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsourceforcontrollingtheEGs
Levelparameters.TheStart,Attack,Decay,andBreaklevels
sharethissource,buteachhasitsownmodulationintensity.
TheparametersofAMS2areidenticaltothoseofAMS1,
above.
Time
ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontroltheTime
parametersoftheEG.TheAttack,Decay,andSlopetimes
sharethisAMSsource,buteachhasitsownmodulation
intensity.
Pitch EG Time Modulation
AMS
AMS [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbeuseful
here,forinstance.
At (Attack) [99...+99]
modulationfortheAttacktime.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityandset
Attackto+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerathigher
velocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,theAttacktime
willgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvalueforinstance,
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmaketheAttack
timealmosttwiceaslong,andasettingof8willcutthe
Attacktimealmostinhalf.
Dc (Decay) [99...+99]
modulationfortheDecaytime.
Sl (Slope) [99...+99]
modulationfortheSlopetime.
V 210: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
Original Shape
Positive AMS on Start and Break,
Negative AMS on Attack
Negative AMS on Start,
Attack, and Break
Positive AMS on Start,
Attack, and Break
AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value
Attack= +
Decay= +
Slope= +
Attack= +
Decay= +
Slope= +
Attack=
Decay=
Slope=
Softly played note.
Original Shape.
Strongly played note.
Times are longer.
Reaches Sustain more
slowly.
Times are shorter.
quickly.
Note-on Note-on Note-on
Program mode
26
PROG P3: Filter
Filteringcanmakesubtleordramaticchangestothe
oscillatorstimbre.Eachoscillatorhastwomultimode
resonantfilters,AandB,aswellasadedicatedfilter
envelopeandkeyboardtrackinggenerator.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolallaspectsofthefilters.Among
otherthings,youcan:
Makebasicsettingsforeachoscillatorsfilters,including
routing,modes,cutoff,resonance,etc.
Setupfiltermodulation,includingkeyboardtracking,the
filterenvelope,LFOmodulation,andAMScontrol.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,only
Oscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepagesforOscillator2s
filterswillbegrayedout.
31: Filter1
ThispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsforOscillator1s
FilterAandFilterB.Forexample,youcan:
Setupthefilterstoproduceasingle12 dB/octfilter,dual
12 dB/octfiltersineitherserialorparallelrouting,ora
single24 dB/octfilter.
SeteachofthetwofilterstoLowPass,HighPass,Band
Pass,orBandRejectmodes.
Setthecutoff,resonance,andinputandoutputlevelsof
eachfilter,includingmodulationofresonanceandoutput
level.
31a: Filter Routing
Filter Routing
[Single, Serial, Parallel, 24dB(4Pole)]
Eachoscillatorhastwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.This
parametercontrolswhetheroneorbothofthefiltersare
used,andifbothareused,itcontrolshowtheyare
connectedtoeachother.
Single.ThisusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole,12 dB/
octavefilter(6 dBforBandPassandBandReject).Whenthis
optionisselected,thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayedout.
Serial.ThisusesbothFilterAandFilterB.Theoscillator
firstgoesthroughFilterA,andthentheoutputofFilterAis
processedthroughFilterB.
Parallel.ThisalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.The
oscillatorfeedsbothfiltersdirectly,andtheoutputsofthe
twofiltersarethensummedtogether.
24dB/oct.Thismergesbothfilterstocreateasingle4pole,
24 dB/octavefilter(12 dBforBandPassandBandReject).In
comparisontoSingle,thisoptionproducesasharperrolloff
beyondthecutofffrequency,aswellasaslightlymore
delicateresonance.Manyclassicanalogsynthsusedthis
generaltypeoffilter.
When24 dB/octisselected,onlythecontrolsforFilterAare
active;thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayedout.
Serial and Parallel Routing
12db/oct / 24db/oct
31b: Filter A
Filter Type
[Low Pass (12dB/oct), High Pass (12dB/oct),
Band Pass (6dB/oct), Band Reject (6dB/oct)]
Thefilterwillproduceverydifferentresultsdependingon
theselectedfiltertype.Theselectionswillchangeslightly
accordingtotheselectedFilterRouting,toshowthecorrect
cutoffslopeindBperoctave.
LowPass(12dB/oct).Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesound
whicharehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe
mostcommontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright
timbressounddarker.
HighPass(12dB/oct).Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesound
whicharelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethis
tomaketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy.
BandPass(6dB/oct).Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,
bothhighsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff
frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow
frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramaticallydependingon
thecutoffsettingandtheoscillatorsmultisample.
Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBandPassfilter
tocreatetelephoneorvintagephonographsounds.With
higherresonancesettings,itcancreatebuzzyornasal
timbres.
BandReject(6dB/oct).Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotch
filtercutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe
cutofffrequency.TrymodulatingthecutoffwithanLFOto
createphaserlikeeffects.
31a
31
Menu
31c
31b
Filter A (Low Pass) Oscillator Filter B (High Pass)
Oscillator
Filter A (Low Pass)
Filter B (High Pass)
Low Pass:
12dB/oct
Low Pass:
24dB/oct
PROG P3: Filter 31: Filter1
27
Filter Types and Cutoff Frequency
Bypass [Off, On]
ThisletsyoubypassFilterAcompletely.
IfBypassisOff,FilterAfunctionsnormally.
WhenBypassisOn,FilterAwillhavenoeffect.
Frequency [00...99]
ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofFilterA,inincrements
of1/10ofanoctave.Thespecificeffectofthecutoff
frequencywillchangedependingontheselectedFilter
Type.
Trim [00...99]
Thisadjuststhevolumelevelattheinputtothefilter.Ifyou
noticethatthesoundisdistorting,especiallywithhigh
Resonancesettings,youcanturntheleveldownhere,orat
theOutput.
Resonance [00...99]
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthecutoff
frequency.
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,andfrequencies
beyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminishsmoothly.
Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbreof
thefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormoreextreme.
Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbeheardasa
separate,whistlingpitch.
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,pleasesee
KeyFollowonpage 29.
AMS (Resonance) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsaAMSsourcetocontroltheResonanceamount.
AMS Int. [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheResonance
modulation.
Forexample,ifVelocityhasbeenselected,changesin
keyboardvelocitywillaffecttheresonance.Withpositive(+)
values,theresonancewillincreaseasyouplaymore
strongly,andasyouplaymoresoftlytheresonancewill
approachthelevelspecifiedbytheResonancesetting.With
negative()values,theresonancewilldecreaseasyouplay
morestrongly,andasyouplaymoresoftlytheresonance
willapproachthelevelspecifiedbytheResonancesetting.
TheresonancelevelisdeterminedbyaddingtheResonance
andAMSInt.values.
Output [00...99]
ThiscontrolstheoutputlevelofFilterA.Youcanusethisto
balancethevolumesofFiltersAandBwhentheRoutingis
settoParallel,ortoturndownthevolumetoavoidclipping
laterinthesignalchain.
AMS (Output AMS) [List of AMS Sources]
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheoutputlevel
ofFilterA.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS
(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
AMS Int. [99...+99]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheoutputlevel
modulation.
31c: Filter B
FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissettoSerial
orParallel.Otherwise,theparametersinthissectionwillbe
grayedout.
TheparametersforFilterBareidenticaltothoseforFilterA.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunder
FilterA,above.
V 31: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
Low Pass
High Pass
Band Pass
Band Reject
Low resonance value High resonance value
Resonance
Program mode
28
32: Filter1 Keyboard Track
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sfilter
keyboardtrack.Amongotherthings,youcan:
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapes,andcontrol
howthetrackingaffectsfiltercutoff.
orParallel.Otherwise,theparametersforFilterBwillbe
grayedout.
32a: Keyboard Track
Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplayhigher
pitches.Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingrecreatesthis
effectbyraisingthelowpassfiltercutofffrequencyasyou
playhigheronthekeyboard.Usually,someamountofkey
trackingisnecessaryinordertomakethetimbreconsistent
acrosstheentirerange.
TheKROMEkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuchmore
complex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferentratesof
changeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.For
instance,youcan:
Makethefiltercutoffincreaseveryquicklyoverthe
middleofthekeyboard,andthenopenmoreslowlyor
notatallinthehigheroctaves.
Makethecutoffincreaseasyouplayloweronthe
keyboard.
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlikeeffects.
How it works: Keys and Ramps
Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps,or
slopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.Thebottomand
topkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopoftheMIDIrange,
respectively.YoucansettheotherthreekeysnamedKey
Low,Center,andKeyHightobeanywhereinbetween.
ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchangebetween
eachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLoCent(LowCenter)
Rampissetto0,thevaluewillstaythesamebetweenthe
KeyLowkeyandtheCenterkey.
TheKeyvaluewillbethebreakpoint,andtheslopeofthe
lowerandhigherregionsonthekeyboardisspecifiedbythe
Ramp.
AttheCenterkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtracking
hasnoeffect.
Intensity to A [99...+99]
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwillaffect
FilterAscutofffrequency.TheoveralleffectoftheKeyboard
TrackisacombinationofthisIntensityvalueandtheoverall
KeyboardTrackshape.
Withpositivevalues(+),theeffectwillbeinthedirection
specifiedbykeyboardtracking;iftherampgoesup,the
filtercutoffwillincrease.
Withnegativevalues(),theeffectwillbeintheopposite
direction;iftherampgoesup,thefiltercutoffwilldecrease.
Keyboard Track Shape and Intensity
Intensity to B [99...+99]
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwillaffect
FilterBscutofffrequency.
Key
Key Low [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenoteatwhichthetwoslopedlinesinthe
lowerrangewillbeconnected.
Center [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointforthe
centerofkeyboardtracking.Atthiskey,thekeyboard
trackinghasnoeffectonthefiltercutoff,oronanyAMS
destinations.
Key High [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenoteatwhichthetwoslopedlinesinthe
upperrangewillbeconnected.
Ramp
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtracking
outputincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenterKey;
negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases.
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegativeramp
settingswillchangedependingonwhethertherampisto
theleftorrightoftheCenterKey.
BtmLo(BottomLow)andLoCent(LowCenter):negative
rampsmakethekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyou
playloweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
outputgohigher.
CentHi(CenterHigh)andHiTop(HighTop):negative
playhigheronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
outputgoup.
Theeffectonthefiltercutoffisacombinationoftheramp
values,assetbelow,andtheIntensitytoA(B)parameters.
WhenIntensitytoA(B)issetto+99,arampof50changes
thefilterfrequencyby1octaveforeveryoctaveofthe
keyboard,andarampof+99changesthefrequencyby2
octavesforeveryoctaveofthekeyboard.
32a
32
Menu
Low Break Key Center Key High Break Key
Intensity = +99 (Original Shape)
Intensity = 99 (Inverted)
PROG P3: Filter 33: Filter1 Modulation
29
Btm Lo (Bottom-Low) [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDInote
rangeandtheKeyLowkey.Fornormalkeytrack,use
negativevalues.
Lo Cent (Low-Center) [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyLowandCenterkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
Cent Hi (Center-High) [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandKeyHighkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
Hi Top (High-Top) [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyHighkeyandthetopof
theMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositive
values.
+Inf and Inf ramps
+InfandInfarespecialsettingswhichcreateabrupt
changesforsplitlikeeffects.Whenarampissetto+Infor
Inf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgotoitsextremehighestor
lowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
+Inf and Inf Ramps
Note:ifyousettheCentHirampto+InforInf,theHiTop
parameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,ifyousettheLo
Centrampto+InforInf,theBtmLorampwillbegrayed
out.
Key Follow
TocreatetheclassicKeyFolloweffect,inwhichthefilter
frequencytracksthepitchofthekeyboard:
1. SettheFilterFrequencyto30.
2. SettheKeyboardTrackIntensityto+99.
3. SettheBtmLoandLoCentrampsto50.
4. SettheCentHiandHiToprampsto+50.
5. SettheCenterKeytoC4.
ThesettingsfortheKeyLowandKeyHighkeysdont
matterinthiscase.
Filter Keyboard Track is also an AMS source
YoucanusethefilterkeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand
LFOs.SimplyselectFilterKTrkintheAMSlistforthe
desiredparameter.
V 32: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
33: Filter1 Modulation
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sfilter
modulation.Amongotherthings,youcan:
ControltheeffectoftheFilterEnvelopeonfiltercutoff.
AssignAMSmodulationforfiltercutoff.
grayedout.
33a: Filter EG
TheFilterEGmodulatestheFilterAandBcutoff
frequenciesovertime.YoucancontrolhowstronglytheEG
willaffectthefiltersinthreedifferentways:
SetaninitialamountofEGmodulation,usingthe
IntensitytoAandBparameters.
UsevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheEGappliedtothe
filter.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheEG
appliedtothefilter.
Youcanuseallthreeoftheseatonce,andtheresultsare
addedtogethertoproducethetotalEGeffect.
TosetuptheEGitself,includingattackandreleasetimes,
levels,andsoon,pleasesee35:Filter1EGonpage 31.
Velocity to A [99...+99]
ThisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheFilterEG
appliedtoFilterA.
Velocity control of Filter EG
Withpositive(+)values,playingmorestronglywill
increasetheeffectoftheFilterEG,asshowninexampleB
above.
Withnegative()values,playingmorestronglywill
introducetheoppositeeffectoftheFilterEGlikeinverting
thepolarityoftheenvelope.Youcanusethisinseveral
differentways:
Ramp = Inf
Ramp = +Inf
Ramp = 50
Key Low Center Key High
33a
33b
33
Menu
B. Velocity to A = +50
C. Velocity to A = 25 D. Velocity to A = 99
In all examples below, Intensity to A = +50
Original
Original
A. Original EG
Program mode
30
YoucansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththeIntensity
toA/Bparameters,andthenreducethisamountwith
velocity.Inthiscase,thefinaleffectoftheEGissimply
diminished,andnotactuallyinverted,asshownin
exampleCabove.
YoucanalsosettheVelocitytoA/Bamountssothatthey
aregreaterthantheinitialamountsofIntensitytoA/B.In
thiscase,theEGwillhaveapositiveeffectatlow
velocities,andaninvertedeffectathighvelocitiesas
showninexampleD.
Velocity to B [99...+99]
ThisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheFilterEG
appliedtoFilterB.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
VelocitytoAabove.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilterAs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMSmodulation.
TheFilterEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to99.
Positivevaluesincreasethecutofffrequency,andnegative
valuesdecreasethecutofffrequency.Forinstance,pleasesee
thegraphicVelocitycontrolofFilterEGabove.TheEG
shapeinexampleArisesupatfirst,andthenfallsbelow0
towardstheend.
WhenIntensitytoAissettoapositive(+)value,theEGs
effectwillmatchitsshape.WhentheEGrisesabove0,the
cutofffrequencywillincrease.
Withnegative()values,theeffectwillbeintheopposite
direction;whentheEGrisesabove0,thefiltercutoffwill
decrease.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilterBs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMSmodulation.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIntensitytoAabove.
AMS (Filter EG AMS) [List of AMS Sources]
oftheFilterEGappliedtoFiltersAandB.Thetwofilters
shareasingleAMSsource,withseparateintensitysettings.
Otherwise,theAMSmodulationwillworkinthesameway
astheVelocitytoAparameter,describedabove.
Int to A (AMS Intensity to A) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMS
modulationforFilterA.
Int to B (AMS Intensity to B) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMS
modulationforFilterB.
33b: Filter A/B Modulation
ThissectionletsyouassignanytwoAMSsourcestocontrol
FilterA,andanothertwoAMSsourcestocontrolFilterB.
ThismodulationisaddedtothebasicFilterAandBcutoff
frequencies,assetontheFilter1page.
Filter A
AMS1 (Filter A AMS1) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrollingFilter
Ascutofffrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,pleasesee
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Intensity (AMS1 Intensity) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS1.
AMS2 (Filter A AMS2) [List of AMS Sources]
Thisselectsthesecondmodulationsourceforcontrolling
FilterAscutofffrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,please
seeAMS(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Intensity (AMS2 Intensity) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS2.
Filter B
TheparametersforFilterBareidenticaltothoseforFilterA.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunder
FilterA,above.
V 33: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
34: Filter1 LFO Mod.
LFO1,LFO2,andtheCommonLFOcanallmodulateFilter
AandBscutofffrequencies.Youcancontrolthestrengthof
eachLFOsmodulationindependentlyforeachfilter,in
threedifferentways:
SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingthe
IntensitytoAandBparameters.
UseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFO.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamounttheLFO.
Youcanuseeachofthesemethodsforeachofthethree
LFOs,anddososeparatelyforbothFilterAandFilterB.
TheresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethetotalLFO
effect.
34a: LFO 1/2
LFO1
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterAscutoff
frequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation.
canproduceinterestingeffectsbyusingthesameLFOto
modulatetwodifferentparameters(suchasFilterAand
FilterB),butwithonesettoapositiveintensity,andthe
othersettoanegativeintensity.
34a
34b
34
Menu
PROG P3: Filter 35: Filter1 EG
31
LFO modulation of Filter Cutoff
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterBscutoff
frequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation.
JSY Intensity to A [99...+99]
ThisadjuststhedepthbywhichtheLFOwillmodulatethe
cutofffrequencyoffilterAwhenyoumovethejoystickfrom
thecenterintheYdirection(towardyourself)(orwhen
CC#2isreceived).(JoystickcontrolintheYdirectionis
calledJSY.)
canalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountoftheLFO,as
setbyIntensitytoA,above.Forexample:
1. SetIntensitytoAto+50.
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthefilter
cutoff.
2. SetJSYIntensitytoAto50.
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickdown,theeffectoftheLFO
willfadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayatthe
bottomofitsrange,theLFOwillbecompletelycancelled
out.
JSY Intensity to B (LFO1) [99...+99]
ThisletsyouuseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFOapplied
toFilterB.
oftheLFOappliedtoFiltersAandB.Thetwofilterssharea
singleAMSsource,butwithseparateintensitysettings.
Intensity to A (LFO1) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS
modulationforFilterA.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positivesettings
meanthatYS+YwillincreasetheamountofLFO1appliedto
FilterA.
Intensity to B (LFO1) [99...+99]
modulationforFilterB.
LFO 2
above.
34b: Common LFO
TheparametersfortheCommonLFOareidenticaltothose
forLFO1.Formoreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptions
underLFO1,above.
NotethatwhileLFO1andLFO2areseparateforeachvoice,
theCommonLFOissharedbyallvoicesintheProgram.
Thismakesitusefulwhenyouwantallofthevoicestohave
anidenticalLFOeffect.
V 34: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
35: Filter1 EG
TheFilterEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreate
complex,timevaryingchangestothecutofffrequenciesof
FiltersAandB.Theparametersonthispagecontrolthe
shapeoftheEG.Amongotherthings,youcan:
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsandtimes
ofeachsegment.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,forsubtle
controloverthemodulationshapeoftheEG.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes.
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestarttheEG.
TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthefilters,usethe
FilterEGparametersontheP3:FilterModulationpage,as
describedunder33a:FilterEGonpage 29.
Filter EG is also an AMS source
YoucanusetheFilterEGasanAMSsourcetomodulate
otherparameters,justlikethekeyboardtrackingandLFOs.
SimplyselecttheFilterEGintheAMSlistforthedesired
parameter.
35a: EG Reset
effects.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.Whenthe
thresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhenpassingthrough
thethresholdmovingdownwards.
Note:WithsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFOspeeds,
theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextremevaluesof+99or
Low setting High setting
35a
35b
35
Menu
Program mode
32
99.Inthiscase,settingtheThresholdtothesevaluesmay
causeinconsistentbehavior,ormaymeanthattheEG
doesntresetatall.Ifthishappens,reducetheThreshold
untiltheEGtriggersconsistently.
35b: Envelope
Filter EG
Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymovingfrom
oneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,andthenmoving
toanotherleveloveranotherperiodoftime,andsoon.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfivelevels,theamountof
timeittakestogofromeachofthelevelstothenext,andthe
shape(fromlineartocurved)ofeachtransition.
Level
Eachofthefivelevelscanbeeitherpositiveornegative.
Positivelevelswillmakethecutofffrequency(orotherAMS
destination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue;negative
levelswillmakeitgodown.
Start [99...+99]
ThissetstheinitialEGlevelatnoteon.
Attack [99...+99]
Break [99...+99]
Decaytime.
Sus (Sustain) [99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnote
off,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Release [99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
Time
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
Attack [00...99]
totheAttacklevel.
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay [00...99]
theBreaklevel.
Slope [00...99]
leveltotheSustainlevel.OnceitreachestheSustainlevel,
theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff(unlessitisresetvia
AMS).
Release [00...99]
leveltotheReleaselevel.
Note:Youcantouchanddragtochangethisvalue
(See*EG,VelocitySplitonpage 6oftheOperation
guide.).
Curve
outofcurves.
Filter EG Curve
down.
DecayandRelease.
10 10ms
20 44ms
30 104ms
40 224ms
50 464ms
60 944ms
70 1.8seconds
80 3.8seconds
90 10.9seconds
99 87.3seconds
Note-on or reset
Attack
Time
Star t
Level
Decay
Time
Release
Time
Release
Level
Attack
Level
Change to
Sustain
Level
Time
Break
Level
Slope
Time
Curve=0L (Linear)
Curve=0L (Linear)
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
PROG P3: Filter 35: Filter1 EG
33
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
35c: EG Level/Time Modulation
Level
ThesesettingsletyouuseanyAMSsourcetocontrolthe
LevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,andBreak
levelsshareasingleAMSsource,butcaneachhavedifferent
modulationintensities.
asshownbelow.
Once an EG segment begins, it cant be modulat-
ed
OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwopoints,that
segmentcannolongerbemodulated.Thisincludesboththe
timeofthesegment,andthelevelreachedattheendofthe
segment.
Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecaytime,
youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecaytimeorthe
Breaklevel.
Asanotherexample,letssaythatyouveassignedthe
CommonLFOtomodulateBreakLevel.TheLFOmaybe
movingallthetime,buttheBreakLevelisonlyaffectedby
theLFOsvalueattheinstantthattheDecaysegmentstarts.
Afterthat,thelevelisfixed.
Finally,thisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,
Attacklevel,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthatare
alreadysounding,unlesstheEGisthenresetviaAMS.
Filter EG Level Modulation
SelectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevelparameters.
St (Start) [99...+99]
St(Start)to+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplay
harder.IfyouinsteadsetSt(Start)to99,theStartlevelwill
decreaseasyouplayharder.
At (Attack) [99...+99]
Br (Break) [99...+99]
Time
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthethree
AMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,andReleasetimes
eachhavetheirownmodulationintensities.
Filter EG Time Modulation
SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
here,forinstance.
At (Attack) [99...+99]
At(Attack)to+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerat
highervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAt(Attack)to99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmaketheAttack
Attacktimealmostinhalf.(Seepage 342)
Dc (Decay) [99...+99]
Sl (Slope) [99...+99]
Rl (Release) [99...+99]
modulationfortheReleasetime.
AMS2 and AMS3
TheseselectthesecondandthirdAMSsources,respectively,
forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.Eachhasitsown
intensitiesforAttack,Decay,Slope,andRelease.The
parametersofbothAMS2andAMS3areidenticaltothoseof
AMS1,above.
Original Shape
Attack, and Break
Attack, and Break
Note-on Note-on Note-on
Attack=+, Decay=+,
Slope=+, Release=+
Softly played note.
Original Shape
Attack=+, Decay=+,
Slope=+, Release=+
Stongly played note.
Times are longer.
Reaches Sustainmore
slowly.
Attack=, Decay=,
Slope=, Release=
Stongly played note.
Times are shorter.
Reaches Sustainmore
quickly.
Program mode
34
V 35: Menu Command
5:SyncBothEGsseep.66
Commandonpage 64.
36: Filter2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasicfilter2settings.Itis
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleor
describedunder31:Filter1onpage 26.
37: Filter2 Keyboard Track
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator2skeyboard
track.Amongotherthings,youcan:
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapes,andcontrol
howthetrackingaffectsfiltercutoff.
ControltheeffectoftheFilterEnvelopeonfiltercutoff.
AssignAMSmodulationforfiltercutoff.
grayedout.
38: Filter2 Modulation
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfiltermodulation.Itis
availablewhentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleor
describedunder33:Filter1Modulationonpage 29.
39: Filter2 LFO Mod.
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sLFOfiltermodulation.Itis
describedunder34:Filter1LFOMod.onpage 30.
310: Filter2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sFilterEG.Itisavailable
whentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleorDouble
Drums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
describedunder35:Filter1EGonpage 31.
PROG P4: Amp/EQ 41: Amp1/Driver1
35
PROG P4: Amp/EQ
Oscillators1and2haveseparatecontrolsforvolume(also
calledamplitude,orampforshort);pan;andDrive;as
wellasdedicatedampenvelopesandkeyboardtracking
generators.Additionally,bothOscillatorsshareathreeband
EQ.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolalloftheserelatedparameters.
SetuptheDrivercircuit,whichaddssaturationandbass
boosttothetimbre.
Setthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
Controlamplevelandmodulation,includingkeyboard
tracking,theampenvelope,LFOmodulation,andAMS
control.
SetupthethreebandTrackEQ.
Oscillator1samp,pan,anddriveparametersareactive;the
pagesforOscillator2willbegrayedout.
41: Amp1/Driver1
ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsfortheAmp/EQsection.
Here,youcan:
SetuptheDrivercircuit.
Settheinitialvolumelevel.
Controlthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
41a: Driver
TheDriveraddssaturationandoverdrivetothesound,for
everythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrasticdistortion.Unlike
anoverdriveeffect,theDriverprocesseseachvoice
individually,sothetimbrestaysthesameregardlessofhow
manyvoicesarebeingplayed.
Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work
togethertocreatetheoverallDrivereffect.Drivecontributes
edgeandbite,andLowBoostprovidesthebodyaswellas
boostingthebass.
Bypass [Off, On]
On(checked):theDriveriscompletelyremovedfromthe
signalpath.
Drive [00...99]
Thiscontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthetimbre.Low
settingswillproducemildsaturation,andhighersettings
createmoreobviousdistortion.
Often,itsusefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwiththe
Drive.
Note:EvenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,theDriver
circuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisacompletely
pristinesound,usetheBypasscontrolinstead.
AMS (Drive) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetocontroltheDrive
amount.
Intensity [99...+99]
modulationforDrive.
Low Boost [00...99]
ThislowfrequencyEQcontrolsthebodycharacterofthe
sound.ThespecificEQfrequenciesaffectedwillchange
withtheDrivesetting.
Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso
intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter.
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetocontroltheLow
Boostamount.
modulationforLowBoost.
41b: Amp Level
Amp Level [000...127]
ThiscontrolsthebasicvolumelevelofOscillator1,before
keyboardtracking,velocity,andothermodulation.
Mixer, DrumTrack and volume
YoucancontroltheOscillatorvolumedirectlyfromthe
slidersinthe03Mixer&DramTrackpage.Thisisa
separateparameter,inadditiontoAmpLevel.
MIDI and volume
YoucancontroltheProgramsoverallvolumeviaMIDI
usingbothVolume(CC#7)andExpression(CC#11).
Whenusedoneatatime,thetwocontrollersworkin
exactlythesameway:aMIDIvalueof127isequalto
theAmpLevelsetting,andlowervaluesreducethe
volume.
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously,the
onewiththelowervaluedeterminesthemaximum
volume,andtheonewiththehighervaluescalesdown
fromthatmaximum.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
41a
41b
41c
41
Menu
Program mode
36
41c: Pan
Pan [Random, L001...C064...R127]
ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator1.AsettingofL001
placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,andR127
tothefarright.
WhenthisissettoRandom,thepanpositionwillbe
differentforeachnoteon.
YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).
ACC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft,
64placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythePan
parameter,and127placesthesoundatthefarright.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global1
1a).
Note:RandomcannotbeselectedviaaMIDIcontrolchange.
Youllneedtoselectithere.
AMS (Pan) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.
modulationforPan.
Forexample,ifPanissettoC064andAMSissettoNote
Number,positive(+)intensitieswillcausethesoundto
movetowardtherightasyouplayhigherthanC4,and
towardtheleftasyouplaylowerthanC4.Negative()
intensitieswillhavetheoppositeeffect.
Use DKit Setting [Off, On]
ThisoptionisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeis
settoDrumsorDoubleDrums.
UnlikestandardPrograms,DrumKitscanhaveadifferent
pansettingforeverynote.Thisparameterletsyouchoose
whethertousetheDrumKitpansettings,ortousethe
Programspansettinginstead.
On(checked):TheProgramwillusetheDrumKitspernote
pansettings;panAMSwillstillapply(Global55b).Thisis
thedefaultsetting.
Off(unchecked):TheProgramwillignoretheDrumKits
settings,andusetheProgrampaninstead.
AllkeysofthedrumkitwillusethePansetting.
V 41: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
42: Amp1 Modulation
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sAmplevel
modulation.Amongotherthings,youcan:
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapestocontrolthe
Amplevel.
AssignAMSmodulationfortheAmplevel.
ControltheeffectoftheLFOsontheAmplevel.
Thetotaleffectofthemodulationcanincreasethevolumeto
amaximumoftwotimeslouderthantheAmpLevelsetting.
42a: Keyboard Track
Keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythevolumeasyouplayup
anddownthekeyboard.Usually,someamountofkey
trackingisnecessaryinordertomakethevolumeconsistent
acrosstheentirerange.
KROMEskeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeoverupto
fourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance,youcan:
Makethevolumeincreaseveryquicklyoverthemiddle
ofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemoreslowlyornotat
allinthehigheroctaves.
Makethevolumeincreaseasyouplayloweronthe
keyboard.
Key:
Key Low [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpoint
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthelowregion.
Center [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointinthe
trackinghasnoeffectonthevolume,oronanyAMS
destinations.
Key High [C1...G9]
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthehighregion.
Ramp:
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegativeramp
42a
42b
42
Menu
PROG P4: Amp/EQ 42: Amp1 Modulation
37
BtmLo(BottomLow)andLoCent(LowCenter):negative
playlower,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgohigher.
CentHi(CenterHigh)andHiTop(HighTop):negative
playhigher,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgoup.
Differences from other Keyboard Tracks
ThereareseveraldifferencesbetweentheAmpkeyboard
trackingandtheFilterandCommonkeyboardtracking.
Forexample,theresultsoftheRampvaluesaredifferent.As
showninthegraphicAmpKeyboardTracking,below,
negativeslopesaremoresteepthanpositiveslopes.
Also,theampdoesnothaveseparatecontrolofIntensity.
Instead,Intensityisalwaysfixedatthemaximumamount,
allowingkeyboardtrackingtochangethevolumefrom
completesilencetotwiceasloudastheprogrammedlevel.
Btm Lo (Bottom-Low) [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
rangeandtheKeyLowkey.Fornormalkeytrack,use
negativevalues.
Lo Cent (Low-Center) [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyLowandCenterkeys.
Cent Hi (Center-High) [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandKeyHighkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
Hi Top (High-Top) [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyHighkeyandthetopof
theMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositive
values.
+Inf and Inf ramps
Whenarampissetto+Inf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgoto
itshighestvalue(doubletheprogrammedvolume)overa
singlehalfstep.
Similarly,whenarampissettoInf,thekeyboardtracking
willgotoitslowestvalue(completesilence)overasingle
halfstep.
Note:IfyousettheCentHi(CenterHigh)rampto+Infor
Inf,theHiTop(HighTop)parameterwillbegrayedout.
Similarly,ifyousettheLoCent(LowCenter)rampto+Inf
orInf,theBtmLo(BottomLow)rampwillbegrayedout.
Amp KTrk is also an AMS source
YoucanusethekeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand
LFOs.SimplyselectAmpKTrkintheAMSlistforthe
desiredparameter.
42b: Amp Modulation
YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelbybothvelocityandan
AMSsource.
ThismodulationscalesthebasicAmplevelandAmpEGlevel
parameters.Theresultingvolumeisdeterminedbymultiplying
thevolumechangesoftheampEGbyothervaluessuchas
AMS.Iftheseoriginallevelsarelow,themaximumvolume
availablewithmodulationwillalsobereduced.
Velocity Intensity [99...+99]
Withpositive(+)values,thevolumewillincreaseasyou
playharder.
Withnegative()values,thevolumewilldecreaseasyou
playharder.
Velocity modulation of Amp level, with Amp EG
Ramp Change in level
Inf Silentinonehalfstep
99 Silentinonewholestep
95 Silentinoneoctave
48 Silentintwooctaves
25 Silentinfouroctaves
00 nochange
+25 x2infouroctaves
+50 x2intwooctaves
+99 x2inoneoctave
+Inf x2inonehalfstep
99 97 95 48 25
+99 +50 +25
High Break: C4 Low Break: D1 Center: G2
Change to
Ramp values:
Ramp values:
Amp Keyboard Tracking
Louder x2
Silence
No change
Volume
Low velocity High velocity
Time
Volume
Time
Program mode
38
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
Amp1level.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positive(+)
valuesofthisparameterwillmakethevolumeincrease
whenmovethejoystickinthe+Ydirection.
Notethatiftheothermodulationsettingshavealready
raisedthevolumetoitsmaximumlevel(doubletheAmp
LevelandAmpEGlevelsettings),thevolumecannotbe
increasedanyfurther.
LFO 1/2
YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelwithbothLFO1andLFO2.
LFO1
Intensity (LFO1) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofLFO1seffectonthe
oscillatorsvolume.
Negative()valueswillinverttheLFOwaveform.
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetoscaletheamount
oftheLFO1appliedtotheAmplevel.
modulationfortheAmplevel.
LFO2
above.
V 42: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
43: Amp1 EG
Theseparametersletyoucreatetimevaryingchangesinthe
volumeofoscillator1.
43a: EG Reset
Note:OncetheAmpEGisinitsReleasesegment,itcannot
bereset.(Otherwise,thesoundmightkeepplayingforever!)
effects.Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggers
whenpassingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.
Whenthethresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards.
Note:WithsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFOspeeds,
theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextremevaluesof+99or
99.Inthiscase,settingtheThresholdtothesevaluesmay
causeinconsistentbehavior,ormaymeanthattheEG
doesntresetatall.Ifthishappens,reducetheThreshold
untiltheEGtriggersconsistently.
43b: Envelope
Theseparametersspecifyhowtheamp1EGwillchange
overtime.
Amp EG
Level
Start [00...99]
Thissetstheinitialvolumelevelatnoteon.
Attack [00...99]
43a
43c
43b
43
Menu
Attack
Time
Decay
Time
Release
Time
Attack
Level
Sustain
Level
Break
Level
Slope
Time
Start
Level
Note-on or reset Note-of
Volume
Time
PROG P4: Amp/EQ 43: Amp1 EG
39
Break [00...99]
Decaytime.
Sustain [00...99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff
(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
Time
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow.
Attack [00...99]
totheAttacklevel.
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay [00...99]
theBreaklevel.
Slope [00...99]
leveltotheSustainlevel.OnceitreachestheSustainlevel,
theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff(unlessitisresetvia
AMS).
Release [00...99]
leveltosilence.
Curve
outofcurves.
Amp EG Curve
down.
DecayandRelease.
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
43c: EG Level/Time Modulation
Level
ThesesettingsletyouuseanyAMSsourcetocontrolthe
LevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,andBreak
levelsshareasingleAMSsource,butcaneachhavedifferent
modulationintensities.
asshownbelow.
Once an EG segment begins, it cant be modulat-
ed
OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwopoints,that
segmentcannolongerbemodulated.Thisincludesboththe
timeofthesegment,andthelevelreachedattheendofthe
segment.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOnceanEGsegment
begins,itcantbemodulatedonpage 33.
10 10ms
20 44ms
30 104ms
40 224ms
50 464ms
60 944ms
70 1.8seconds
80 3.8seconds
90 10.9seconds
99 87.3seconds
Curve=0L (Linear)
Curve=0L (Linear)
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
Program mode
40
Amp EG Level Modulation
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
parameters.
St (Start) [99...+99]
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityandsetSt
(Start)to+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplayharder.
IfyouinsteadsetSt(Start)to99,theStartlevelwill
decreaseasyouplayharder.
At (Attack) [99...+99]
Br (Break) [99...+99]
Time
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthethree
AMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,andReleasetimes
eachhavetheirownmodulationintensities.
Amp EG Time Modulation
SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
here,forinstance.
At (Attack) [99...+99]
At(Attack)to+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerat
highervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAt(Attack)to99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmakethesegment
segmenttimealmostinhalf.
Dc (Decay) [99...+99]
Sl (Slope) [99...+99]
Rl (Release) [99...+99]
modulationfortheReleasetime.
AMS2 and AMS3
TheseselectthesecondandthirdAMSsources,respectively,
forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.Eachhasitsown
intensitiesforAttack,Decay,Slope,andRelease.The
parametersofbothAMS2andAMS3areidenticaltothoseof
AMS1,above.
V 43: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
45: Amp2/Driver2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasiclevel,pan,anddriver
settings.ItisavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DoubleorDoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayed
out.
describedunder41:Amp1/Driver1onpage 35.
46: Amp2 Modulation
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampmodulation.Itis
describedunder42:Amp1Modulationonpage 36.
47: Amp2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampEG.Itisavailable
describedunder43:Amp1EGonpage 38.
Original Shape
Attack, and Break
Volume
Time
Volume
Time
Volume
Time
Volume
Time
Attack, and Break
Note-on Note-of Note-on Note-of Note-on Note-of
Attack= +, Decay= +,
Slope= +, Release= +
Softly played note.
Original Shape.
Attack= +, Decay= +,
Slope= +, Release= +
Times are longer.
Reaches Sustain
more slowly.
Attack=, Decay=,
Slope=, Release=
Times are shorter.
quickly.
PROG P4: Amp/EQ 410: EQ
41
410: EQ
ThisthreebandEQ,withsweepablemid,issharedbyboth
oftheProgramsoscillators1,2.
InCombinationsandSequencers,eachtimbreandtrackhas
itsownindividualEQ.YoucanimporttheProgramsEQ
settingsintoTracksandTimbresbyusingtheCombination
andSequencerAutoLoadProgramEQoptions.
410a:3 Band Parametric EQ
Bypass [On, Off]
On(checked):AlloftheEQwillbedisabled,includingthe
InputTrim.
BypassisusefulforcomparingtheresultsoftheEQwiththe
originalsignal.
Input Trim [00...99]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Thesetting
correspondstothevolume;50correspondsto12dB,and25
correspondsto24dB.
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrolscan
causesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.Youcan
compensateforthisbyturningdowntheinputtrim.
Low Gain [18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5dB.
Mid Frequency [100(Hz)...10.00k(Hz)]
Mid Gain [18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
0.5dB.
High Gain [18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5dB.
V 410: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
410a
410
Menu
Program mode
42
PROG P5: LFO
EachoftheOscillators1,2hastwoLFOs,whichyoucanuse
tomodulatethefilter,amp,pitch,andmanyother
parameters.
ThetwoOscillatorsalsoshareasingleCommonLFO,
similartotheglobalLFOonsomevintageanalogsynths.
Thesepagesletyousetupalloftheparametersforallfive
LFOs.
51: OSC1 LFO1
ThispagehasallofthecontrolsforthefirstLFOof
Oscillator1.Forinstance,youcan:
SelecttheLFOsbasicwaveform,andmodifyitwiththe
Shapeparameter.
ControltheLFOsfrequency,andassignAMScontrollers
tomodulatethefrequency.
UsetheKeySyncparametertochoosewhethertheLFO
runsseparatelyforeachvoice,orissynchronizedacross
allofthevoices
UsetheFadeandDelayparameterstocontrolhowlong
theLFOwaitstostartafternoteon,andwhetheritstarts
abruptlyorfadesinslowly.
SettheLFOtosynctoMIDItempo.
51a: OSC 1 LFO 1
Waveform [Triangle...Random6 (Continuous)]
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform,asshowninthe
graphicbelow.
Mostofthewaveformsshouldbeselfexplanatory,butafew
willbenefitfrommoredetails:
Guitarisintendedforguitarvibrato,anditsshapeis
specificallytunedforthispurpose.Thewaveformis
positiveonly,sothatwhenusedforpitch,itwillonlybend
up,andnotdown.
Random1(S/H)generatestraditionalsampleandhold
waveforms,inwhichthelevelchangesrandomlyatfixed
intervalsoftime.
Random2(S/H)randomizesboththelevelsandthetiming.
Random3(S/H)generatesapulsewavewithrandom
timing.Itstheoppositeoftraditionalsampleandhold;the
timingvaries,butthelevelsdont.
Random46(Continuous)aresmoothedversionsof
Random13,withrampsinsteadofsteps.Youcanusethem
tocreatemoregentlerandomvariations.
Phase [180...+180, Random]
Thiscontrolsthephaseofthewaveformatthestartofthe
note,instepsof5degrees.
IfKeySyncisOff,theStartPhasewillapplyonlytothefirst
noteofthephrase.
Frequency [00...99]
ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeanymodulation.
Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds,asshowninthetable
below.
ByusingAMSmodulation,youcanalsogetspeedsmuch
fasterandmuchslowerthanareavailablethroughthisbasic
setting.
Stop [Off, On]
On(checked):InsteadoftheLFOoperatingnormally,itwill
ignoretheFrequencysetting.TheLFOwillmaintainthe
initialvalue(determinedbythecombinationofWaveform,
Phase,Shape,andOffset)untilthenoteoff.
Sincethevaluewillchangeonlyatnoteon,usingaRandom
waveformwillproduceafixedvaluethatchangesrandomly
ateachnoteon(oratthefirstnoteon).
Off(unchecked):TheLFOwilloperatenormally.
Shape [99...+99]
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Asyoucansee
inthegraphicbelow,thiscanmakethewaveformseither
moreroundedormoreextreme.Itcanalsobeusefulto
emphasizecertainvalueranges,anddeemphasizeothers.
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFOto
modulatefiltercutoff.IfShapeemphasizesthehighvalue
range,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthehigher
51a
51c
51b
51
Menu
Square
Sine
Saw
Triangle Step Triangle-4
Step Saw-6
Step Saw-4
Step Triangle-6
Exponential
Saw Down
Exponential
Triangle
Guitar
Exponential
Saw Up
Random1
(S/H)
Random2
(S/H)
Random3
(S/H)
Random4
(Continuous)
Random6
(Continuous)
Random5
(Continuous)
LFO waveform
Frequency Value Frequency in Hz
00 0.014Hz
10 0.112Hz
20 0.422Hz
30 0.979Hz
40 1.79Hz
50 2.84Hz
60 4.14Hz
70 5.69Hz
80 7.49Hz
90 9.53Hz
99 26.25Hz
99+Fine99 32Hz
PROG P5: LFO 51: OSC1 LFO1
43
frequencies.Ifitemphasizesthelowrange,thefilterwill
spendmoretimeatthelowerfrequencies.
LFO Shape
Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3
waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or99.
Whentheseareselected,Shapeisgrayedout.
AMS (Shape) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsaAMSsourceforcontrollingtheLFOsShape.
Modulatingtheshapecandramaticallyaltertheeffectofthe
LFOtryitout!
AMS Int (Intensity) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(Shape)
modulation.
Key Sync. [Off, On]
On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,theLFOstartseach
timeyoupressakey,andanindependentLFOrunsforeach
note.Thisisthenormalsetting.
Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,theLFOstarts
fromthephasedeterminedbythefirstnoteinthephrase,so
thattheLFOsforallnotesbeingheldaresynchronized
together.TheFadeandDelaysettingswillonlyapplytothe
firstnotesLFO.
NotethatevenifKeySyncisOff,eachnotesLFOspeedmay
stillbedifferentifyoumodulatetheFrequencybynote
number,velocity,keyscaling,orothernotespecificAMS
sources.
Offset [99...+99]
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsarecentered
around0,andthenswingallthewayfrom99to+99.This
parameterletsyoushifttheLFOupanddown,sothatfor
instanceitscenteredon50,andthenswingsfrom49to
+149.
Forexample,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOforvibrato.If
theOffsetis0,thevibratowillbecenteredonthenotes
originalpitch,bendingitbothupanddown.
IftheOffsetis+99,ontheotherhand,thevibratowillonly
raisethepitchabovetheoriginalnote.
Offset settings and pitch change produced by vibrato
TheoneexceptiontothisistheGuitarwaveform,whichis
designedtoemulatebendingastringonaguitarsothatthe
pitchonlygoesup,andnotdown.Becauseofthis,the
waveformiscenteredon50,andnoton0.Ofcourse,youcan
alwaysuseanegativeOffsettoshiftitbackdownbelow0
again!
SinceOffsetaffectstheoutputvaluesoftheLFO,its
importanttonotethatitaffectsthesignalaftertheShape
function,asshownbelow:
How the LFO signal is affected by Shape and Offset
Fade [00...99]
TheLFOcanfadeingradually,insteadofsimplystarting
immediatelyatfullstrength.Thisparameterspecifiesthe
timefromwhentheLFObeginstoplayuntilitreachesits
maximumamplitude.
IftheDelayparameterisbeingused,thenthefadewill
beginafterthedelayiscomplete.
WhenKeySyncisOff,thefadewillapplyonlytothefirst
noteinthephrase.
LFO Fade and Delay
Delay [00...99]
ThissetsthetimefromnoteonuntiltheLFOstarts.
WhenKeySyncisOff,thedelayappliesonlytothefirst
noteofthephrase.
51b: Frequency Modulation
Youcanusetwoalternatemodulationsources(AMS)to
adjustthespeedoftheLFO.
AMS1 (Frequency) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsourcefortheLFO1sfrequency.
NotethatyoucanuseLFO2tomodulateLFO1sfrequency.
ThissetstheinitialamountofAMS1(Frequency).TheInt
ModAMSthenaddstothisinitialamount.
WhenAMSisatitsmaximumvalue(forexamplebymoving
thejoystickfullyawayfromyourself),theAMSaffectsthe
frequencyasshownbelow:
+99
0
99
Shape = 0 (original waveform)
Shape = +99
Shape = 99
Pitch
Intensity Change to LFO Frequency
+99 64x
Faster
+82 32x
+66 16x
+49 8x
+33 4x
+16 2x
16 1/2x
Slower
33 1/4x
49 1/8x
66 1/16x
82 1/32x
99 1/64x
Shape Waveform
Fade Delay
Note-on
Program mode
44
Int Mod AMS (Intensity Mod AMS)
[List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsasecondaryAMSsourcetoscaletheintensityof
AMS1.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntModAMS.
EvenifthemainAMS1Intensityissetto0,IntModAMS
canstillcontrolthefinalamountofAMSAoverthefull+/
99range.
Forexample,ifAMS1issettothePitchEG,andIntMod
AMSissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positivesettingsmeanthatYS+Y
willincreasetheintensityofthePitchEGmodulationof
LFOFrequency.
AMS2 (Freq. AMS2) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsourcefortheLFO1s
frequency.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS
ThiscontrolstheamountofmodulationfromAMS2(Freq.
AMS2).
51c: Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync.
MIDI/Tempo Sync. [Off, On]
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn,theLFOwillsynchronizeto
thesystemtempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDI
Clock.TheLFOspeedwillbecontrolledbytheBaseNote
andTimesparameters,below.AllsettingsforFrequency
andFrequencyModulationwillbeignored.
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOff,theFrequencyand
FrequencyModulationsettingswilldeterminethespeedof
theLFO,andthetemposettingswillhavenoeffect.
Base Note (Sync. Base Note) [, ... ]
ThissetsthebasicspeedoftheLFO,relativetothesystem
tempo.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoawholenote,
includingtriplets.
Times (Sync. Times) [01...32]
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.Forinstance,if
theBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,andTimesissetto
03,theLFOwillcycleoveradottedeighthnote.
V 51: Menu Command
3:SwapLFO1&2seep.66
Commandonpage 64.
52: OSC1 LFO2
ThisisOscillator1ssecondLFO.Itsparametersareexactly
thesameasthoseforthefirstLFO,asdescribedunder51:
OSC1LFO1onpage 42exceptthatLFO1cannotmodulate
LFO2.
55: OSC2 LFO1
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfirstLFO.Itisavailable
describedunder51:OSC1LFO1onpage 42.
56: OSC2 LFO2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2ssecondLFO.Itisavailable
ItsparametersareexactlythesameasthoseforthefirstLFO,
asdescribedunder51:OSC1LFO1onpage 42except
thatLFO1cannotmodulateLFO2.
PROG P5: LFO 510: Common LFO
45
510: Common LFO
Thisisasingle,CommonLFO,globalforallvoicesinthe
ProgramlikethemodulationLFOsinsomevintageanalog
synths.
Differences from LFO1/2
TheCommonLFOstartsrunningassoonasyouselectthe
Program,andonlyresetswhenyoutellittodosoexplicitly
viatheResetSourcecontrol,below.Thisisdifferentfrom
LFO1/2sKeySyncparameter,whichresetswheneverall
notesarereleased.
TheCommonLFOspersistencecanbehandyifyouwantto
createaconstantrhythmwithanLFO,andthenplay
underneaththatrhythmwithoutretriggeringit.For
instance,youcanuseaMIDIcontrollerinyoursequencerto
resettheCommonLFOeveryfewbars,regardlessofwhat
notesarebeingplayed.
TheCommonLFOhasmostofthesamecontrolsasLFO1/2.
However,itdoesnotincludetheDelay,Fade,andKeySync
settings,sincetheseonlymakesenseforpervoiceLFOs.
510a:Common LFO
Waveform [Triangle...Random6 (Continuous)]
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform.Foracompletelistof
thewaveformsandmoredetails,pleaseseetheentryunder
LFO1Waveformonpage 42.
Phase [180...+180, Random]
TheResetAMS,describedabove,letsyouresetthe
CommonLFO.ThisisthephasefromwhichtheLFOwill
startwhenitisreset.
Frequency [00...99]
ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeanymodulation.
Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds.Foracomplete
description,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1Frequency
onpage 42.
Stop [Off, On]
On(checked):InsteadoftheLFOoperatingnormally,itwill
ignoretheFrequencysetting.Instead,theLFOsimply
generatesasinglevaluewhentheProgramisselected,and
thenholdsthatvalueuntilyouselectanotherProgram,or
untilyouresettheLFOviaAMS.
Note:ThisisdifferentfromLFO1/2,inwhichthevalueis
resetwitheverynoteon.
YoucanusethisinconjunctionwiththeRandomwaveforms
tocreatestatic,randommodulation,withthevalue
changingonlywhenyoufirstselecttheProgram.
Off(unchecked):WhenStopisOff,theLFOwillfunction
normally.
Shape [99...+99]
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Formore
details,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1Shapeon
page 42.
Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3
waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or99.
AMS (Shape) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsaAMSsourceforcontrollingtheLFOsShape.
Modulatingtheshapecandramaticallyaltertheeffectofthe
LFOtryitout!
AMS Int (AMS Intensity) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(Shape)
modulation.
Reset AMS [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheLFOtotheStart
Phase.TheLFOresetswhentheAMSvaluepassesthe
halfwaymark:+50formostAMSsources,or64forMIDI
controllers.
TocreateaneffectsimilartothepervoiceLFOsKeySync.
setting,setthistoGate2+Damper.
Offset [99...+99]
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsarecentered
around0,andthenswingallthewayfrom99to+99.This
parameterletsyoushifttheLFOupanddown,sothatfor
instanceitscenteredon50,andthenswingsfrom49to
+149.
Foracompletedescription,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1
Offsetonpage 43.
510b:Frequency Modulation
TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequencyModulation
settingsforLFO1,asdescribedunder51b:Frequency
Modulationonpage 43.
510c:Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync
TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequencyMIDI/
TempoSyncforLFO1,asdescribedunder51c:Frequency
MIDI/TempoSync.onpage 44.
V 510: Menu Command
2:SwapLFO1&2seep.66
Commandonpage 64.
58a
58c
58b
58
Menu
Program mode
46
PROG P6: AMS/Common Key Track
(AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track)
EachOscillatorhastwoAMSMixers,whicharesimplebut
powerfultoolsforcombiningandmodifyingAMSsignals.
ThetwoOscillatorsalsosharetwoCommonkeyboard
trackinggenerators,inadditiontothededicatedkeyboard
trackingfortheFilterandAmp.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolallofthesemodulationsources.
Oscillator1sAMSMixersareactive;thepagesforOscillator
2willbegrayedout.
61: OSC1 AMS Mix1
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,or
processanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomethingnew.
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether,oruse
oneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.Youcanalso
usethemtochangetheshapesofLFOsandEGsinvarious
ways,modifytheresponseofrealtimecontrollers,andmore.
YoucanselecttheoutputoftheAMSmixersasanAMS
sourceinthesamewayasanLFOorEQ.
Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputstothe
AMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,ifyou
useLFO1asaninputtoanAMSMixer,youcanusethe
processedversionoftheLFOtocontroloneAMS
destination,andtheoriginalversiontocontrolanother.
Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether,by
usingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2.
61a: AMS Mixer 1
Mixer Type [A+B, Amt AxB, Offset, Smoothing,
Shape, Quantize, Gate Control]
ThiscontrolsthetypeofprocessingperformedbyAMS
Mixer1.EachoftheMixerTypesisdiscussedindetailover
thenextseveralpages.
A+BaddstwoAMSsourcestogether.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeA+Bonpage 46.
AmtAxBscalestheamountofoneAMSsourcewiththe
other.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAmtAxBon
page 47.
OffsetaddsorsubtractsaconstantvaluetoorfromanAMS
source.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOffsetonpage 47.
Smoothingspecifiesthesmoothnessofmovementbetweentwo
values.Youcanusethistosmoothsuddenchangessuchasan
abruptmovementofthejoystickorsharpangleoftheLFO.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeSmoothingonpage 48.
ShapeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.Formore
information,pleaseseeShapeonpage 48.
Quantizeturnssmoothtransitionsintodiscretesteps.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeQuantizeonpage 49.
GateControlusesathirdAMSsourcetoswitchbetween
twoAMSinputs(orafixedvalue).Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeGateControlonpage 49.
A+B
AMS Mixer, Type = A+B
A+BmergestwoAMSsourcesintoone.Thiscanbehandy
whenyouneedtoaddonemoremodulationsourcetoa
parameter,butyouvealreadyusedupalloftheavailable
AMSslots.
Forinstance,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOtomodulate
FilterResonance,andthenyoudecidethatitwouldbe
interestingtoscalethatparameterwithanEGaswell.
ResonancehasonlyasingleAMSinput,butyoucaneasily
mergetheLFOandtheEGtogetherusingtheA+BAMS
Mixer:
1. AssigntheLFOtoAMSA.
2. AssigntheEGtoAMSB.
3. AssigntheAMSMixerastheFilterResonanceAMS
source.
AMS Mixer A+B example
AMS A [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstAMSinput.
AMS A Amount [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSAinput.
AMS B [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthesecondAMSinput.
AMS B Amount [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSBinput.
61a
61b
61
Menu
AMS A
AMS B
Amt A
Amt B
Output
AMS A: LFO
AMS B: EG
A+B Output
PROG P6: AMS/Common Key Track (AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track) 61: OSC1 AMS Mix1
47
Amt AxB
AMS Mixer, Type =Amt A x B
ThisMixerTypeusesAMSBtoscaletheamountofAMSA.
Forinstance,youcancontroltheamountofLFO1withthe
FilterEG,orcontroltheamountofthePitchEGwiththe
joystick.
AMS Mixer Amt AxB example
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsource,whichcanthenbescaled
byAMSB.
ThiscontrolstheinitialamountofAMSA,before
modulationfromAMSB.InputfromAMSBthenaddsto
thisinitialamount.
EvenifAmountAissetto0,AMSBcanstillcontrolthefinal
amountofAMSAoverthefull+/99range.
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsource,toscaletheamountof
AMSA.
AMS B Amount [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSB
modulationofAMSA.
Forexample,ifAMSAissettoLFO1andAMSBissetto
theFilterEG,positivesettingsmeanthattheEGwill
increasetheamountofLFO1.
Tip: use SW 1/2 to turn an AMS source on and off
YoucanuseAmtAxBtogateanAMSsource:
1. SetAMSAtothedesiredsource,andsettheAMSA
Amountto0.
2. SetAMSBtoSW1or2,andAMSBAmountto+99.
Now,SW1or2willturnAMSAonandoff.
Offset
AMS Mixer, Type = Offset
Thissimpleprocessoraddsaconstantoffsettotheinput,
andalsoallowsyoutodoublethegainofanAMSsource.
Forinstance,youcanusethistoconvertabipolarLFO(both
negativeandpositive)toaunipolarLFO(positiveonly).To
dothis:
1. SelecttheLFOastheAMSAinput.
2. SettheAMSAAmountto50.
ThiscutstheoverallleveloftheLFOinhalf,sothatinstead
ofswingingbetween99and+99,itonlyswingsbetween
50and+50.
3. SettheAMSAOffsetto50.
Thisadds50totheLFOlevel,sothatitnowswingsbetween
0and+99,asshownbelow.
AMS Mixer Offset examples
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobeoffset.
ThiscontrolsthebasiclevelofAMSA.
+199doublestheoriginalsignallevel,while199doubles
theoriginalsignallevelandinvertsthephase.Thevalues
areclippedonlyattheoutput;internally,theycanbegreater
thanthenormalrangeof99to+99.
AMS A Offset [199...+199]
ThiscontrolstheamountofoffsetforAMSA.
SettingOffsetto+199shiftsanAMSinputof99alltheway
to+99.InconjunctionwithhighAMSAAmountvalues,
thiscanbeusefulforcreatingclippedshapes,suchasshown
inthelastoftheAMSMixerOffsetexamplesabove.
AMS A
AMS B
Amt B
Output
Amt A
AMS A: LFO
AMS B: EG
Amt A*B Output
AMS A
Amt A
Output
AMS A: LFO
+99
0
99
Ofset = +50, Amount = 50
+99
0
99
Ofset = 99, Amount = +199
Clipped
at Output
+99
0
99
Program mode
48
Smoothing
ThisMixerTypesmoothsouttheAMSinput,creatingmore
gentletransitionsbetweenvalues.Youhaveseparatecontrol
oftheamountofsmoothingduringtheattack(whenthe
signalisincreasing)anddecay(whenitsdecreasing).
ThehighertheAttackandDecaysettings,themorethe
inputwillbesmoothed.
Lowsettingsprovidesubtlecontrollersmoothing,creating
moregradualaftertouch,forinstance.Highersettingscreate
autofadeeffects,transformingaquickgestureintoalonger
fadeinand/orfadeoutevent.
Smoothingcanalsobeusedtoaltertheshapeof
programmablemodsources,suchasLFOsandEGs.For
instance,youcanturnablipintoasimpleenvelopeshape,
asshownbelow.
AMS Mixer Smoothing examples
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobesmoothed.
AMS A Attack [00...+99]
Thiscontrolstheattacktimeofthesmoother,orhowlongit
takesthesmoothertoreachanew,highervalue.
HigherAttacksettingsmeanlongertimes.
DependingonhowquicklytheAMSinputvalueis
changing,highAttacksettingsmaymeanthatthevalueis
neverquitereached,asshowninAMSMixerShape
examplesabove.
AMS A Decay [00...+99]
Thiscontrolsthedecaytimeofthesmoother,orhowlongit
takesthesmoothertoreachanew,lowervalue.
HigherDecaysettingsmeanlongertimes.
Shape
ThisMixerTypeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.This
appliesdeformationtotheAMSinput.Youcanusethisto
customizeacontrollercurve,suchastheexponentialcurve
ofthejoystickorthelogarithmiccurveofvelocitycontrol.It
canalsoaltertheshapeofprogrammablemodulation
sources,suchasEGsandLFOs.
Note:ShapeonlyaffectsAMSsignalswhichalreadyhave
someamountofslope,suchasEGs,triangleandsineLFOs,
andsoon.Itdoesnotaffectsignalswhichonlycontain
abrupttransitions,suchassquarewaves.
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobeshaped.
Shape [99...+99]
Thiscontrolstheamountofcurvature,andwhetherthe
curvesareconcaveorconvex.Asyoucanseeinthegraphic
examples,theshapewilltendtoemphasizecertainvalue
ranges,anddeemphasizeothers.
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFO,
throughShape,tomodulatefiltercutoff.IfShape
emphasizesthehighvaluerange,thefilterwillspendmore
timeatthehigherfrequencies.Ifitemphasizesthelow
range,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthelower
frequencies.
Mode [Symmetric, Asymmetric]
ThisselectswhethertheShapeparameterwillproduceone
ortwocurves.ThegraphicAMSMixerShapeexamples
mayhelptovisualizehowthisworks.
Asymmetricwillproduceasinglecurve,extendingfrom
99to+99.
Symmetricwillproducetwomatchingcurvesextending
outwardsfrom0to99and+99,respectively.
Bipolar and Unipolar AMS sources
TounderstandShape,ithelpstounderstandthedifference
betweenbipolarandunipolarAMSsources.
Bipolarsourcescanswingallthewayfrom99to+99,with
0inthemiddle.MostLFOsarebipolar,forinstance;sois
PitchBend.
Generally,bipolarAMSsourceswillworkbetterwiththe
Asymmetricmode,butSymmetricmayalsoproduce
interestingresults.
Unipolarsourcesonlygofrom0to99,with50inthe
middle.MIDIcontrollers,suchasJS+Y(CC#1),areall
unipolar.Inpractice,EGsareusuallyprogrammedtobe
unipolar,eventhoughtheFilterandPitchEGsdoallow
bothpositiveandnegativelevels.
Withunipolarsources,itsalmostalwaysbettertousethe
Symmetricmode.TheAsymmetricmodecancauseoffsets
andotherstrangeresults.
Original AMS A: Smoothing with Long Attack
and Short Decay:
Smoothing with Short Attack & Long Decay:
49
AMS Mixer Shape examples
Quantize
ThisMixerTypechangestheinputfromacontinuoussignal
intoaseriesofdiscretesteps.Insteadofmovingsmoothly
betweenvalues,itwillsnapimmediatelyfromonevalueto
another.
YoucanusethistochangetheshapeofLFOsorEGs,orto
forceacontrollertolandonafewspecificvalues.
AMS Mixer Quantize examples
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobequantized.
Number Of Steps [2...32]
Thiscontrolstheseverityoftheeffect.Thelowerthenumber
ofsteps,themoresteppytheoutputwillbe.
Forinstance,whenthisissetto2,therewillbestepsat0,
50,and99.WithabipolarAMSinput,therewillalsobe
stepsat50and99.
Asanotherexample,whenitissetto5,therewillbestepsat
0,20,40,60,80,and99(aswellas20,40,60,80,and99
forbipolarinputs).
Tip: Quantized Joystick Pitch Bend
Youcanusethejoysticktocreatequantizedpitchbendsthat
simulateslidingacrossthefretsofaguitar,orjumpbend
soundscausedbydifferencesinthelengthofthetubeofa
trumpet.Todoso:
1. SelecttheAMSMixerastheOscillatorPitchAMS
input.
2. SetthePitchAMSIntensitytoanyexacthalfstep
value,suchas+5.00,+7.00,etc.
3. SettheJS(+X),JS(X)amountto0.00.
4. IntheAMSMixer,selecttheJSXasAMSA.
5. SettheNumberOfStepstothesamenumberyouused
inStep2.
Now,playingthejoystickwillcreatequantizedpitchbends.
JSXwillstillproducesmoothpitchbends,asusual,soyou
canusebothtechniquestogether.
Gate Control
AMS Mixer, Type = Gate Control
ThisMixerTypeletsyousetuptwodifferentAMSsources
(orfixedAMSamounts),andthenswitchbetweenthetwo
usingathirdAMSsource.
Itssimilartoanaudiogatewithasidechain,butwitheven
moreflexibilitysinceyougettochoosewhathappenswhen
thegateisclosed(belowthethreshold),aswellaswhenits
open(abovethethreshold).
Youcanalsochoosewhetherthegatewillbeabletoopen
andclosecontinuouslyinresponsetothecontrolsource,or
whetheritonlyopensorclosesatthebeginningofthenote,
andthenstaysthatwayoverthenotesentireduration.
YoucanusetheGateto:
Useafootswitch(orothercontroller)toapplypitchbend
orothereffectstosomenotes,butnottoothers
Theparameterwillbeappliedwhenthecontroller
reachesaspecificthreshold.Forexample,thevelocity
valuecouldcontrolthefilterresonanceonlyifthevelocity
valueexceeds90.
Usethejoystick,switches,orcontrollerstochange
betweentwoseparateLFOs(orotherAMSsources).
+99
0
99
+99
0
99
+99
0
99
Symmetric
Asymmetric
Bipolar Triangle Wave
Symmetric Asymmetric
Bipolar Sawtooth Wave
Shape = 0 (original waveform)
Shape = +99
Shape = 99
+99
0
99
Asymmetric
(not recommended)
Unipolar Triangle Wave
Symmetric
+99
0
99
+99
0
99
+99
0
99
Unipolar (e.g., JS+Y) Bipolar (e.g., LFO)
Original
AMS A
Quantize
Steps = 8
Quantize
Steps = 16
Control
Below
At & Above
Fixed Value
AMS
Fixed Value
AMS
Program mode
50
Gate Control:
Source [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontrolthegate.
Control At Note-On Only [Off, On]
Whenthisisenabled(checked),thevalueoftheControl
Sourceatnoteonwillselecttheoutput(BelowThreshold
orAt&AboveThreshold).Theselectedoutputwillthen
remainactivethroughoutthedurationofthenote,
regardlessofanysubsequentchangeintheControlSources
value.
Notethattheoutputvalueitselfcancontinuetochange;
onlytheselectionofBeloworAt&Aboveisfixed.
ThissetsthevalueoftheControlSourceatwhichthegate
opensorcloses.
Gate Output:
IfthevalueoftheControlSourceislessthantheThreshold,
theGateoutputsthepresetvalueorAMSsourceselected
underBelowThreshold.
IfthevalueoftheControlSourceisgreaterthanorequalto
theThreshold,theGateoutputsthepresetvalueorAMS
sourceselectedintheAt&AboveThresholdparameter.
Below Threshold [Fixed Value, AMS A]
ThisselectswhetherBelowThresholdusesapresetvalue,
ortheselectedAMSsource.
Fixed Value [99...+99]
Thisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhenthe
ControlSourceislessthantheThreshold.Thisonlyapplies
whenBelowThresholdissettoFixedValue.
ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughtheGate
whentheControlSourceislessthantheThreshold.This
onlyapplieswhenBelowThresholdissettoAMSA.
At & Above Thresh (At & Above Threshold)
[Fixed Value, AMS B]
ThisselectswhetherAt&AboveThresholdusesapreset
value,ortheselectedAMSsource.
Fixed Value [99...+99]
Thisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhenthe
ControlSourceisgreaterthanorequaltotheThreshold.
ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&AboveThresholdissetto
FixedValue.
ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughtheGate
whentheControlSourceisgreaterthanorequaltothe
Threshold.ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&AboveThreshold
issettoAMSB.
Tips on using the Gate
Selective pitch-bend, using a switch
YoucanuseControlAtNoteOnOnlytoapplyaneffectto
somenotes,butnotothers,basedonthestateofanAMS
sourceatthestartofthenote.Forinstance:
1. SettheControlSourcetoFootSW:CC#82
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn(checked).
3. SettheThresholdto50.
4. SetBelowThresholdtoaFixedValueof+00.
5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoAMSB:JSX.
6. OntheOSCPitchpage,assigntheAMSMixertocon
trolthepitch.
7. Turnoffthefootswitch,andwhileholdingdowna
chord,movethejoystickintheXdirection.Thepitch
willnotchange.
(Ifthepitchchanges,gototheOSCPitchpageandsetPitch
JS(+X)andJS(X)to+00.)
8. Turnonthefootswitch,andaddanewnotetothepre
viouschord.
9. MovethejoystickintheXdirection;pitchbendwillbe
appliedonlytothenewlyplayednote.
Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played
beforeyoupressedonthefootswitch)willnot.
Selective pitch-bend, using only the joystick
YoucanalsouseasingleAMSsourceasboththeControl
Sourceandavaluesource:
1. SettheControlSourcetoJSX.
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn(checked).
3. SettheThresholdto00.
4. SetBelowThresholdtoAMSA:JSX.
5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoaFixedValueof00.
6. OntheOSCPitchpage,assigntheAMSMixertocon
trolthepitch.
7. Withthejoystickinthecenter,playachord,andholdit
throughstep9.
8. Bendthejoysticktotheleft,andthenplayanewnote
abovethechord.
(Ifthepitchchanges,gototheOSCPitchpageandsetPitch
JS(+X)andJS(X)to+00.)
9. Usethejoysticktobendthepitchofthenewnote.
Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played
beforeyoubentthejoystickdown)willnot.Thismethodis
particularlygoodforbendingthetopnoteofachordupto
pitch.
Generating a static value
Sometimes,itcanbehandytohaveapresetvalueasan
AMSsource.TheGateisonewaytocreatethis.Todoso:
1. SetbothBelowThresholdandAt&AboveThreshold
toFixedValue,andenterthesamevalueintoeach.
Now,theAMSmixerwillalwaysgeneratethisstaticvalue.
V 61: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
51
62: OSC1 AMS Mix2
ThisisthesecondAMSMixerforOscillator1.The
parametersareexactlythesameasthoseforAMSMixer1,
asdescribedunder61a:AMSMixer1onpage 46.
64: OSC 2 AMS Mix1 ,
65: OSC 2 AMS Mix2
ThispagecontrolsthetwoAMSMixersforOscillator2.
TheseareavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DoubleorDoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayed
out.
describedunder61:OSC1AMSMix1onpage 46.
69: Common KeyTrk 1
(Common Keyboard Track 1)
ThetwoOscillatorssharetwoCommonkeyboardtracking
generators,inadditiontoeachOscillatorsdedicated
keyboardtrackingfortheFilterandAmp.Youcanusethese
CommonkeytracksasAMSsourcesformodulatingmost
AMSdestinations.
TheCommonKeyboardTrackparametersaresharedbythe
entireProgram,buttheactualAMSvaluesarecalculated
individuallyforeachvoice.
What does Keyboard Tracking do?
Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythe
modulationamountasyouplayupanddownthekeyboard.
Thiscanbeusefulformakingthetimbreconsistentacross
theentirerange,oradjustingparametersaccordingtopitch.
TheKROMEkeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeoverupto
fourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance,youcan:
Makethemodulationincreaseveryquicklyoverthe
middleofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemoreslowlyor
notatallinthehigheroctaves.
Makethemodulationincreaseasyouplayloweronthe
keyboard.
Common Keyboard Tracking
Formoreinformation,pleasesee32:Filter1Keyboard
Trackonpage 28.
69a
69
Menu
Low Break Center High Break
+99
+50
00
50
99
Ramp:
+99
+99
99
0
99
Ramp:
AMS
AMS
Ramp = +99
Ramp = 50
At the Center Key, the AMS value is always 0.
Program mode
52
69a: Keyboard Track 1
Key
Low Break [C1...G9]
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthelowregion.
Center [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointinthe
trackinghasnoeffectontheAMSdestinations.
High Break [C1...G9]
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthehighregion.
Ramp
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegativeRamp
BottomLowandLowCenter:negativerampsmakethe
keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayloweron
thekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgo
higher.
CenterHighandHighTop:negativerampsmakethe
keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayhigheron
thekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgoup.
Bottom-Low [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
rangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkeytrack,use
negativevalues.
Low-Center [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenterkeys.
Center-High [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
High-Top [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthetop
oftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositive
values.
ThetablebelowshowshowtheRampsaffecttheAMS
output:
+Inf and Inf ramps
+Inf and Inf Ramps
Note:IfyousettheCenterHighrampto+InforInf,the
HighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,ifyouset
theLowCenterrampto+InforInf,theBottomLowramp
willbegrayedout.
V 69: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
610: Common KeyTrk 2
(Common Keyboard Track 2)
Hereyoucanmakesettingsforthesecondcommon
keyboardtrack.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee69:CommonKeyTrk1
(CommonKeyboardTrack1)onpage 51.
Ramp value AMS change
Inf goesto99in1halfstep
99 20peroctave
50 10peroctave
0 nochange
+50 +10peroctave
+99 +20peroctave
+Inf goesto+99in1halfstep
Ramp = Inf
Ramp = +Inf
Ramp = 50
Key Low Center Key High
PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 71: ARP Setup
53
PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track)
Hereyoucanmakesettingsforthearpeggiatorusedbythe
program.
Youcanmakesettingssothatwhenyouselectaprogram,
thesearpeggiatorsettingswillautomaticallyswitchtothe
arpeggiatorsettingsthatarememorizedintheselected
program.(GlobalP0:01cLoadARPwhenchanging
Programonpage 195)
Thearpeggiatorcanbeswitchedon/offbytheARPbutton.
Whenon,thekeyLEDwilllightup.
ThesettingsoftheARPbutton,TEMPO,arpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATE,VELOCITY,SWINGandSTEPknobscanbe
savedforeachprogram.
Note:Theparametersbelowthataremarkedwith*can
alsobeeditedinP0:PlayArpeggiator.
ThesesettingswillbevalidwhenLoadARPwhen
changingProgram(Global01c)ischecked.
Youcancontrolthearpeggiatorfromanexternal
sequencer,orrecordnotedatageneratedbythe
arpeggiatorontoanexternalsequencer.(SeeOG
page 96)
Note:Pattern,Resolution,Octave,Sort,Latch,KeySync.,
Keyboard,and, (Tempo)canalsobesetfromtheP0:Play,
Arpeggiopage.
71: ARP Setup
71a: Tempo
, (Tempo)* [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Setsthetempo,expressedasbeatsperminute.
YoucanalsoadjustthisbyturningthefrontpanelTEMPO
knob.Alternatively,youcansetthetempobypressingthe
TAPbuttonatthedesiredinterval.
WhenMIDIClock(GlobalP1:11b)issettoeither
ExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,thisparameterwill
indicateEXT,andthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizeto
theMIDIClockreceivedfromanexternalMIDIdevice.
IfMIDIClockissettoAuto,thisindicationwillbe
shownonlyifMIDIclockdataisbeingreceivedfrom
anexternaldevice.WhentheEXTindicationisshown,
thearpeggiatoretc.willsynchronizetoMIDIclockdata
fromtheexternalMIDIdevice.
71b: Arpggiator Setup
Pattern* [P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Selectsthearpeggiopattern.
Note:U0000(INT)U1027(USER)arerewritable.UseGlobal
P6:ArpeggioPatterntocreatearpeggiopatterns.
Example: Preset pattern
Thewayinwhichthepatternisplayedwilldependon
settingssuchasOctaveandSort.P0P4inthefollowing
diagramsshowhowthearpeggiowillbeplayedwhen
Octaveissetto1,andSortischecked.P4:RANDOMisonly
onepossibility.
P0: UP
P1: DOWN
P2: ALT1
P3: ALT2
P4: RANDOM
Octave* [1, 2, 3, 4]
Specifiesthenumberofoctavesinwhichthearpeggiowill
beplayed.
Ifauserarpeggiopatternisselected,therangeofthe
arpeggiowilldependontheOctaveMotion(GlobalP6:
61b)setting.
71a
71b
71
Menu
Preset/User No Contents
P0...P4 Presetarpeggiopatterns
U0000(INT)...U0899(INT) Preloadedarpeggiopatterns
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER) Userarpeggiopatterns
UP
DOWN
ALT1
ALT2
RANDOM
Program mode
54
Resolution* [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Specifiesthetimingresolutionofthearpeggio.Thenotesof
thearpeggiowillbeplayedattheintervalyouspecify:, , , ,
,,, ,, ,, ,, ,or, .Thespeedofthearpeggiopatternis
determinedbytheArpeggiator,(Tempo)andthe
Resolution.
TurningthearpeggiocontrolARPSTEPknobtowardthe
rightwillshortenthespacingofthearpeggiatednotes
(Resolution)inincrementsofhalvingthespacing.Turning
theknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthelengthofthe
pattern(Length)inincrementsofhalvingthelength.When
theknobisinthecenterposition(12oclock),thevalueswill
beasspecifiedbytheLengthandResolutionsettings
(GlobalP6:ArpeggioPatternSetuppage).
Gate [000...100(%), Step]
Specifiesthelength(gatetime)ofeachnoteinthearpeggio.
000100(%):Eachnotewillbeplayedwiththespecifiedgate
time.
Step:Thisisavailablewhenauserarpeggiopattern
U0000(INT)U1027(USER)isselectedforPattern.When
thisisselected,thegatetimespecifiedforeachstepwillbe
used.
Thegatetimecanalsobecontrolledbythearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATEknob.Rotatingtheknobtowardtheleftwill
shortenthegatetime,androtatingittowardtherightwill
lengthenthegatetime.Whentheknobisatthe12oclock
position,thegatetimewillbeasspecifiedhere.
Velocity [001...127, Key, Step]
Specifiesthevelocityofthenotesinthearpeggio.
001127:Eachnotewillsoundwiththespecifiedvelocity
value.
Key:Eachnotewillsoundwiththevelocityvalueatwhichit
wasactuallyplayed.
Step:Thisisavailablewhenanuserarpeggiopattern
U0000(INT)U1027(USER)isselectedforPattern.When
thisisselected,thevelocityspecifiedforeachstepwillbe
used.
Thevelocitycanalsobecontrolledbythearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)VELOCITYknob.Rotatingtheknobtowardtheleft
willdecreasethevelocity,androtatingittowardtheright
willincreasethevelocity.Whentheknobisatthe12oclock
position,thevelocitywillbeasspecifiedhere.
Whenapreloaduserarpeggiopatternisselected,settingthe
GateorVelocitytoStepwilladdasenseofgroovetothe
arpeggiopattern.
Swing [100...+100(%)]
Thisparametershiftsthetimingoftheoddnumberednotes
ofthearpeggio.
Thiscanalsobecontrolledbythearpeggiocontrol(ARP)
SWINGknob.Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwilladjust
thetiminginthedirection,andturningittowardthe
rightwilladjustthetiminginthe+direction.
Sort* [Off, On]
Thisspecifiestheorderinwhichthenotesyoupresswillbe
arpeggiated.
On (checked):Noteswillbearpeggiatedintheorderoftheir
pitch,regardlessoftheorderinwhichyoupressedthem.
Off (unchecked):Noteswillbearpeggiatedintheorderin
whichyoupressedthem.
Latch* [Off, On]
Specifieswhetherornotthearpeggiowillcontinueplaying
afteryoutakeyourhandoffofthekeyboard.
On(checked):Thearpeggiowillcontinueplayingafteryou
removeyourhandfromthekeyboard.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiowillstopwhenyouremove
yourhandfromthekeyboard.
Key Sync.* [Off, On]
Specifieswhetherthearpeggiopatternwillbeginwhenyou
pressakey,orwhetheritwillalwaysfollowthe, (Tempo)
(Prog01a).
On(checked):Thearpeggiopatternwillstartplayingfrom
thebeginningwhenanoteonoccursfromacondition
wherenokeysarepressed.Thissettingissuitablewhenyou
areplayinginrealtimeandwantthearpeggiotoplayfrom
thebeginningofthemeasure.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiopatternwillalwaysplay
accordingtothe, (Tempo).
Keyboard* [Off, On]
Thisspecifieswhetherthenotesyouplayonthekeyboard
willbesoundedasusualinadditiontobeingsoundedas
partofthearpeggio.
On(checked):Thenotesyouplaywillbesoundedontheir
own,inadditiontobeingsoundedaspartofthearpeggio.
Forexampleifyousimultaneouslypresstwoormorenotes,
theywillbesoundedasusualinadditiontobeingplayedas
arpeggiatednotes.
Off(unchecked):Onlythearpeggiatednoteswillbeheard.
Note:YoucanusethemenucommandCopyArpeggiatorto
copyarpeggiatorsettingsfromanotherprogramor
combination(seepage 66).
Thisshowsagraphicofthestepsoftheuserarpeggio
pattern.
V 71: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
Octave: 4
UP
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Swing
50 25 +25 +50
When Resolution =
ON, UP
Sort
OFF, UP
Sort
PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 72: ARP Scan Zone
55
72: ARP Scan Zone
72a: Arpeggiator Tempo
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee,(Tempo)*onpage 53.
72b: Zone Map
ThisshowstheScanZone.
72c: Scan Zone
ThisshowstheScanZonesetting.
Top Key [C1G9]
Bottom Key [C1G9]
Theseparametersspecifytherangeofnotes(keys)forwhich
thearpeggiatorwillfunction.TopKeyistheupperlimit,
andBottomKeyisthelowerlimit.
Thearpeggiatorwilloperatewhenyouplaykeyswithinthe
specifiedrange.Keysoutsideofthisrangecanbeplayedin
thenormalmanner,andwillnotbeaffectedbythe
arpeggiatoron/off.
ForexampleifyousetPatterntoP0:UP,checkLatch,set
TopKeytoB3,andBottomKeytoC1,playinganoteB3or
lowerwilltriggerthearpeggiator.SinceLatchison,the
arpeggiowillcontinueevenafteryoureleasethekeys.You
canusetheC4andhigherkeystoplayconventionallyalong
withthearpeggiosoundedbytheB3andlowerkeys.To
changethearpeggio,playkeysintherangeofB3andbelow.
Top Velocity [001127]
Bottom Velocity [001127]
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesforwhichthearpeggiator
willfunction.TopVelocityistheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityisthelowerlimit.
Thearpeggiatorwilloperatewhenyouplaynoteswitha
velocity(playingstrength)thatiswithinthespecifiedrange.
Notesplayedwithavelocityoutsidethisrangewillbe
soundednormally,withoutregardtothearpeggiatoron/off.
V 72: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
74: Drum Track Pattern
Hereyoucanselectadrumtrackpatternandspecifyhowit
willsound.
InProgrammode,thedrumtrackpatternsare
triggeredontheGlobalMIDIchannel.TheMIDI
transmitchannelisspecifiedbytheDrumTrackProg
MIDICh(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasic).Usethe
DrumTrackProgMIDIOut(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDI
Basic)settingtospecifywhetherthepatternwill
transmitMIDInotedata.Thedefaultsettingischannel
10.
Thedrumtrackprogramwillnottransmitorreceive
MIDIprogramchanges.
74a: Drum Pattern
Pattern [Preset, User]
[(Preset): P000...605, (User): U000...U999]
Thisselectsthedrumpattern.
U000U999canbewritten.Patternsyoucreatein
Sequencermodecanbeconvertedintouserdrum
patterns.(Seepage 188)
Shift [24...+00...+24]
Thistransposesthedrumpatterninsemitonesteps.This
meansthattheinstrumentsofthedrumkitwillchange.
72a
72b
72c
72
Menu
Key zone of arpeggiator
Velocity zone of
arpeggiator
C1 G9
Preset/User No. Contents
P000 Off
P000...P605 Presetdrumpatterns
U000...U999 Foruser/preloadeddrumpatterns
74a
74b
74
Menu
Program mode
56
74b: Trigger
Trigger Mode [Start Immediately, Wait KBD Trig]
StartImmediately:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACK
buttontoturniton(LEDlit),thedrumtrackpatternwill
startaccordingtotheSyncsetting.Whenyouturniton,the
drumtrackpatternwillstop.
WaitKBDTrig:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACKbutton
toturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillwaittostart.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,orwhenaMIDInoteonis
received,thedrumpatternwillstartaccordingtotheSync
setting.
IfyouveselectedStartImmediately,theDRUM
TRACKbuttonwillalwaysbesavedintheOFFstate.
Sync [Off, On]
Off:Thedrumpatternwillnotsynchronizetothecurrently
runningarpeggiator,butwillstartimmediately.
On:Thedrumpatternwillsynchronizetothecurrently
runningarpeggiator.
Note:UseP71:ArpeggiatorSetupKeySynctospecify
whetherthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothecurrently
runningdrumpattern.
Latch [Off, On]
Thisspecifieswhetherthedrumtrackwillcontinueplaying
evenafteryoutakeyourhandoffthekeyboard.
ThissettingisavailableifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBD
Trig.
Off:Thepatternwillstopwhenyoutakeyourhandoffthe
keyboard(i.e.,whenallnotesareoff).
On:ThepatternwillcontinueplayinguntiltheDRUM
TRACKbuttonisturnedoff(LEDunlit),regardlessof
whetheryouareperformingviathekeyboardorviaMIDI.
Zone:
Keyboard
Bottom [C1...G9]
Top [C1...G9]
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.
Itspecifiestherangeofkeysthatwillstartthedrumpattern.
Velocity
Bottom [001...127]
Top [001...127]
Itspecifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwillstartthedrum
pattern.
V 74: Menu Command
3:CopyDrumTrackseep.65
4:EraseDrumTrackPatternseep.66
Commandonpage 64.
75: Drum Track Program
75a: Drum Track Parameters
Program Select [Drum Category Programs]
Hereyoucanselectthedrumprogramthatwillbeusedby
thedrumtrack.
Note:OnlyprogramsoftheDrumcategorycanbeselected.
Ifdataisloadedorasystemexclusivemessageis
receivedsothattheselectedprogramisnolongera
Drumcategoryprogram,itwillbereplacedwiththe
firstprogramoftheDrumcategory.
Thedrumtrackprogramwillnottransmitorreceive
MIDIprogramchanges.
Volume [000...127]
Thisadjuststhevolumeofthedrumtrackprogram.
Play/Mute [Mute, Play]
Thismutesthedrumtrackprogram.Thesettingwill
alternateeachtimeyoupressthePlay/Mutebutton.
Mute:Thedrumtrackprogramwillnotbeheard(Mute).
Play:Thedrumtrackprogramwillbeheard(Play).
Using the Mixer & Drum Track page to make Drum
Track settings
YoucanusetheP03:Mixer&DrumTrackpagetoeditthe
Play/Mute,SoloOn/Off,andVolumesettingsofthedrum
track.(See03a:OSC/DrumTrackMixeronpage 5.)
Detune [1200...+1200]
Thisadjuststhepitchinonecentsteps.Onecentis1/100th
ofasemitone.
ThepitchofeachdrumkitisspecifiedinGlobalP5:Drum
Kit.
YoucancontrolthisusingRPNs.
75b: EQ
Auto Load Program EQ [Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchthedrumtrackprogram,
the3bandEQvaluesspecifiedfortheprogramwill
automaticallybeloaded.Normallyyouwillleavethis
checked.
Youarefreetoeditthe3bandEQvaluesthatare
automaticallyloaded.Youwillbemakingchangesbasedon
thesettingsoftheoriginalprogram.
Off(unchecked):The3bandEQvaluesspecifiedforthe
programwillnotbeloadedwhenyouswitchthedrumtrack
program.
Bypass [On, Off]
WhenBypassischecked,alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingtheInputTrim.
75a
75b
75
Menu
75c
PROG P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 75: Drum Track Program
57
Bypasscanbeconvenientforcomparingtheresultsofthe
EQwiththeoriginalsignal.
Input Trim [00...99]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.This
settingcorrespondstothevolume;avalueof50corresponds
to6dB,andasettingof25correspondsto12 dB.
High Gain [18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Mid Frequency [100Hz...10k(Hz)]
Mid Gain [18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
0.5 dB.
Low Gain [18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
incrementsof0.5 dB.
75c: Bus
Bus Select [Dkit, L/R, IFX1...5, Off]
Thisspecifiesthebusthatwilloutputthedrumtrack
program.
Dkit:TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1
(toMFX1),andSend2(toMFX2)settings(Global55b)for
eachkeyofthedrumkitusedbytheselecteddrumtrack
programwillbevalid.Choosethissettingifyouwantto
applyseparateinserteffectstoeachdruminstrument.
Note:WhenmakingDkitsettings,youwillnormallyuse
IFX.Patchtospecifytheoutputdestination.
L/R:OutputtotheL/Rbus.
IFX1,2,3,4,5:OutputtotheIFX15bus.
Off:ThesoundwillnotbeoutputtotheL/Rbus,orIFX15
bus.UsetheOffsettingifyouhaveconnectedthedrum
trackprogramoutputinseriestoamastereffect.UseSend1
(toMFX1)orSend2(toMFX2)toadjustthesendlevel.
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2]
ThissendstheoutputofthedrumtrackprogramtotheFX
Controlbus(twomonochannelsFXCtrl1,2).
TheFXControlbusisusedwhenyouwanttouseanother
audiosignaltocontroltheinputofaneffect.Youcanusethe
twoFXControlbuses(twomonochannels)tofreelycontrol
theeffectsinavarietyofways.Formoreinformation,please
seeFXControlBusesonpage 238.
Send 1 [000...127]
Send 2 [000...127]
Thesespecifythesendlevelatwhichtheoutputofthedrum
trackprogramwillbesenttoeachmastereffect.
Send1:Sendthesignaltomastereffect1.
Send2:Sendthesignaltomastereffect2.
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,thesendlevelsto
themastereffectsaresetbythepostIFX15Send1and
Send2(Prog82a).
YoucanuseCC#93tocontrolSend1,andCC#91to
controlSend2.
IFX. Patch:
IFX1 [L/R, IFX1...5, Off]
Here,youcanpatchtheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsetting
specifiedforeachkeyofthedrumkit,temporarilychanging
itsconnectiondestinationfromtheoriginallyspecified
inserteffecttosomeotherdestination.Thiscanbeexecuted
onlyifthedrumtrackprogramsBus(IFX/Output)Selectis
settoDKitandtheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)
foreachkeyofthedrumkitissettoIFX15.
Asthepatchdestination,chooseaninserteffectorL/R,
IFX15,orOffastheoutputbus.
Note:Ifyouwanttoreturnthedrumkittoitspreviousstate,
changethesesettingstoIFX1IFX1,IFX2IFX2,
IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,andIFX5IFX5.
Forthepreloadedkits,snaresoundsarenormallysentto
IFX1,kicksoundstoIFX2,andothersoundstoIFX3.Insuch
casesifyousetBusSelecttoDkit,thesesoundswillbesent
toIFX1,IFX2,andIFX3,butIFX1andIFX2aresetfornormal
(nondrum)programs.Insuchcases,youcanuseIFX.Patch
toroutethesedrumsoundstounusedIFX;forexample,you
mightsendthesnaresoundstoIFX3,kicksoundstoIFX4,
andothersoundstoIFX5.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
EffectGuideonpage 235.
V 75: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
Program mode
58
PROG P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect)
Here,youcanmakesettingsfortheinserteffects.For
instance,youcan:
Sendtheoutputofaoscillatortoaninserteffect
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect
Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 235.
81: Routing
81a: Routing Map
Thisgraphicshowsanoverviewoftheinserteffects.
Hereyoucanviewthestatusoftheinputbustotheinsert
effectBus(IFX/Output)Select,theeffectyoureediting,and
itson/offstatusandchainstatus.
Thispageletsyouadjusttheroutingoftheoscillatorstothe
inserteffects.Toadjusttheothersettingsshowninthis
graphic,pleasesee82:InsertFXSetuponpage 59.
81b: Bus Select (All OSCs to)
Bus (IFX/Output) Select [L/R, IFX1...5, Off]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforoscillators1and2.
L/R:TheoscillatorswillbeoutputtotheL/Rbus.Normally
youwillchooseL/R.
IFX15:OutputtotheIFX15busses.
Off:TheoscillatorwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,or
IFX15busses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwantthe
programoscillatoroutputofthetimbretobeconnectedin
seriestoamastereffect.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
MFX2)tospecifythesendlevels.
Sendstheoutputoftheoscillator1,2toanFXControlbus
(twochannelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbusseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
tocontroltheaudioinputofaneffect.YoucanusetwoFX
Controlbusses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
effectsinvariousways.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuseson
page 238.
81c: Use Dkit Setting
Use DKit Setting [Off, On]
ThisisshownifOscillatorMode(Prog11a)issettoDrums
orDoubleDrums.IfOscillatorModeissettoSingleor
Double,thissettingisignored.
On(checked):TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControl
Bus,Send1,andSend2settings(Global55b)foreachkey
oftheselecteddrumkitwillbeused.Checkthisifyouwant
toapplyanindividualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
Tip:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedruminstrumentshave
thesameBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingsaccordingtotheir
type,asfollows.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Off(unchecked):TheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b),
FXControlBus(Prog81b),OSCMFXSend(Prog81d)
settingswillbeused.Alldruminstrumentswillbesentto
thespecifiedbus.
81d: OSC MFX Send
OSC1:
OSC1 Send1 (to MFX1) [000...127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofoscillator
1willbesenttomastereffect1.ThisappliesonlywhenBus
(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b)issettoL/RorOff.
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX1IFX5,thesend
levelstomastereffects1and2aresetbySend1andSend2
(Prog82a)afterpassingthroughIFX15.
OSC1 Send2 (to MFX2) [000...127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofoscillator
1willbesenttomastereffect2.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeOSC1Send1(toMFX1)onpage 58.
OSC2:
OSC2 Send1 (to MFX1) [000...127]
OSC2 Send2 (to MFX2) [000...127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofOSC2
willbesenttomastereffects1and2.Theseparameterswill
bevalidwhenOscillatorModeissettoDoubleorDouble
DrumsandBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff.
CC#93controlsOSC1/2sSend1level,andCC#91
controlstheSend2level.Thesearecontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Theactualsend
levelisdeterminedbymultiplyingthesevalueswith
thesendlevelsofeachoscillator.
V 81: Menu Command
3:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
4:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
Commandonpage 64.
81a
81b
81d
81
Menu
81c
PROG P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 82: Insert FX Setup
59
82: Insert FX Setup
82a: Insert Effect
Here,youcanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1through
5,itson/offstatus,chaining,andadjustthepostIFXmixer
settings.
Forinserteffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalwaysstereoin
andout.Theinput/outputconfigurationoftheeffectsound
(Wet)dependsontheeffecttype.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1
IFX5)onpage 240.
Insert Effect:
IFX1...4 [000...193]
IFX5 [000...171]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect.
IFX5cannotusedoublesizeeffects(172193).Ifyouusea
doublesizeeffect,thenextinserteffectwillbeunavailable.
ForexampleifyouselectadoublesizeeffectforIFX1,you
wontbeabletouseIFX2.
Category/IFX Select menu
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/IFXSelect
menuwillappear,lettingyouselecteffectsbycategory.Use
thetabstoselectacategory,andthenselectaneffectwithin
thatcategory.PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteyourselection,
orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
IFX1...5: IFX On/Off [Off, On]
Switchestheinserteffecton/off.
Ifthisisoff,theinputwillsimplybepassedtotheoutput.
(When000:NoEffectisselected,theresnodifference
betweenOnandOff.)
Thesettingwillalternatebetweenonandoffeachtimeyou
pressthebutton.
Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanuseMIDICC#92
(ontheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a))toturnall
inserteffectsoff.Avalueof0turnsthemoff,andvalues
of1127restoretheoriginalsetting.
Chain:
IFX1: Chain to [IFX2...IFX5]
Youcanchainuptofiveinserteffectstogetherinseries,to
createmorecomplexeffects.Setupthechainusingthis
parameter,andthenenableitusingtheChaincheckbox,
below.
Effectsmustbechainedinascendingnumericorder.For
example,IFX1canbechainedtoanyofIFX2throughIFX5,
andIFX2canbechainedtoIFX3throughIFX5.
Youcanchaintwoormoreeffectsintothesamedown
streameffect.Forinstance,bothIFX1andIFX2canbe
chainedtoIFX5.
Effectscanalsojoinachaininthemiddle.Forinstance,you
canchainIFX3toIFX4toIFX5,andthenchainIFX2toIFX5
aswell.
ThePan:#8,Bus(BusSelect),Ctrl(FXControlBus),and
Send1/2settingsapplyonlytothelasteffectinthechain.
However,anyeffectinthechaincanbesenttotheFX
Controlbuses.
IFX1: Chain [Off, On]
Thisenablesthechain,assetupbytheChaintoparameter,
above.
Pan:#8:
Pan: #8 (Post IFX PanCC#8) [L000...C064...R127]
Specifiesthepanningimmediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
YoucanuseCC#8tocontrolthis.
Bus Sel.:
Bus Sel. (Bus Select) [Off, L/R]
Specifiesthebustowhichthesignalwillbesent
immediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
L/R:ThesignalwillbesenttotheL/Rbus,whichpasses
throughTFXandthengoestotheAUDIOOUTPUTL/R
outputs.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Off:ThesignalwillnotbesentdirectlytotheL/Routputs.
Thissettingisusefulifyouwantto:
UseSend1or2toroutethesignalentirelythroughthe
mastereffects,withoutsendingthedrysignaltothe
outputs.
UsetheFXControlBustoroutethesignaltoaneffectsside
chain,suchasagateorvocoder,withoutbeingheard
directlyattheoutputs.
FX Ctrl:
FX Ctrl (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2]
SendsthepostIFXsignaltotheFXControlbusses.Formore
information,pleaseseeFXControlBusonpage 58.
IfyoureusingCtrl(FXControlBus)asaninputsignal
forVocoderetc.,afeedbackloopwilloccurifyou
outputtothesamebusasspecifiedhere,andoscillation
willoccur.Setthiswithcaretoavoidcreatingaloop.
Send1/2:
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
TheseadjustthelevelatwhichthepostIFXsignalissentto
mastereffects1and2.ThisisvalidifBus(BusSelect)isset
toL/RorOff.
YoucanuseCC#93tocontroltheSend1level,and
CC#91tocontroltheSend2level.TheglobalMIDI
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a)is
usedforthesemessages.
82a
82
Menu
Program mode
60
V 82: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
83: IFX1
83a: Insert Effect 1 (IFX1)
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheinserteffectyou
selectedintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Formore
information,pleaseseeDynamicModulationSource
Listonpage 346.
IFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
Thisturnstheinserteffectonandoff.Itislinkedwiththe
on/offsettingintheInsertFXSetuppage.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthesettings
foranindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16userpresets
foreacheffecttype,inadditionto15rewritablefactory
presets.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
Combination,andSequencer).
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
storedwiththeProgramyoudontneedtostorethemasan
EffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhileworkingon
aparticularProgram,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
PresetinadifferentProgram,Combination,orSong.
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFXSetup
page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
P01P15:Presetdataissavedinthisarea.Werecommend
thatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyourown
settings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect,
writtenaProgram,orselectedanewProgram.Selectingthis
settingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Programssavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
dontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffectPreset.Ifyou
selectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheProgram,theEffect
Presetsettingwillrevertto.
Using Effect Presets
1. SelectaneffectintheInsertFXSetuppage.
2. TheP00:InitialSetsettingswillberecalled.
P(EffectPreset)willindicate.
3. UseP(EffectPreset)toselectaneffectpreset:P00
P15orU00U15.
Thestoredparameterswillberecalled.Notethatthiswill
overwriteallparametersoftheeffect.
4. Edittherecalledparametersasdesired.
5. Ifyouvecomeupwithsettingsyoulikeandwantto
savethemasanewpreset,usetheWriteFXPreset
menucommand.
IFX1 Parameters:
IFX1 Parameters
ThistabshowstheparametersforIFX1,asselectedonthe
InsertFXSetuppage.
Fordetailsonthespecificparametersofeacheffect,please
seeInsertEffects(IFX1IFX5)onpage 240.
V 83: Menu Command
5:WriteFXPresetseep.67
Commandonpage 64.
84: IFX2, 85: IFX3, 86: IFX4,
87: IFX5
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersfortheinserteffects
selectedintheInsertFXSetuppage.
TheparametersforIFX2IFX5arethesameasforIFX1.
83a
83
Menu
PROG P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO) 91: Routing
61
PROG P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO)
Here,youcanmakesettingsforthemastereffectsandtotal
effect.Forinstance,youcan:
Routeasoundtoanmastereffectsandtotaleffect
MakecommonLFOsettingsforeffects
Makedetailedsettingsformastereffectsandtotaleffect
page 235.
91: Routing
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsandtotal
effect,andturnthemon/off.
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotaleffectis
insertedintotheL/Rbus.
91a: MFX1, 2
Themastereffectdoesnotoutputthedirectsound(Dry).
AdjusttheReturn1andReturn2returnlevelstoreturnthe
signaltotheL/RbusandmixitwiththeL/Rbussignal.
Themastereffectsarestereoin/out,butdependingonthe
selectedeffecttype,theoutputmaybemonaural.Formore
information,pleaseseeIn/Outonpage 240.
MFX1:
MFX1 [000...193]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeformastereffect1.Youcanuse
anyoftheavailableeffects,withoutlimitation.Ifyouchoose
000:NoEffect,theoutputfromthemastereffectismuted.
Category/MFX Select menu
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/MFXSelect
menuwillappear,lettingyouselecteffectsbycategory.Use
thetabstoselectacategoryinthemenu,andthenselectan
effectwithinthatcategory.PresstheOKbuttontoexecute
yourselection,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
MFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
Switchesthemastereffect1on/off.Whenoff,theoutputwill
bemuted.Thiswillalternatebetweenonandoffeachtimeit
ispressed.
Tip:Aneasywaytodisablethemastereffectsistoturnoff
thefrontpanelMASTERFXbutton.MFX1/2willbe
temporarilydisabled,andwillstayoffevenifyouswitch
programsormodes.Whenyouturntheswitchon,the
mastereffectswillbeenabled,andyouwillobtainthe
effectsspecifiedbytheprogramorcombination.
Note:TheMASTERFXbuttonislinkedwithGlobalP01
EffectGlobalSWEnableMFX1&2(seep.5).
Separatelyfromthesettingshere,youcanusecontrol
change#94toturnmastereffects1and2off.Avalueof
0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127restorethe
originalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannelspecifiedby
MIDIChannel(Global11a)isusedforthismessage.
Return 1 [000...127]
ThisspecifiesthereturnlevelfromthemastereffecttotheL/
Rbus.
Note:TheL/RbusissenttoTFX,andthenoutputtothe
mainL/MONOandRoutputjacks.
MFX2:
MFX2 [000...171]
Return 2 [000...127]
Theseparametersspecifytheeffecttypeformastereffect2,
itson/offstatus,andthereturnlevelfrommastereffect2to
theL/Rbus.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMFX1:
above.
MFX2cannotusedoublesizeeffects(172193).
Additionally,ifyouselectadoublesizeeffectforMFX1,you
wontbeabletouseMFX2.
Chain:
Chain On/Off [Off, On]
On(checked):Chain(seriesconnection)willbeturnedon
forMFX1andMFX2.
Chain Direction [MFX1...MFX2, MFX2...MFX1]
SpecifiesthedirectionoftheconnectionwhenMFX1and
MFX2arechained.
MFX1MFX2:ConnectfromMFX1toMFX2.
MFX2MFX1:ConnectfromMFX2toMFX1.
Chain Level [000...127]
WhenchainisOn,thissetsthelevelatwhichthesoundis
sentfromthefirstmastereffecttothenextmastereffect.
Ifyouselectadoublesizeeffect,theChainsettingswill
beignored.
91b: TFX
Thesearetheparametersforthetotaleffect,whichisplaced
atthefinalstageoftheL/Rbus.Afterpassingthroughthe
totaleffect,thesoundisoutputtoAUDIOOUTPUTL/
MONOandR.
Forthetotaleffect,thedirectsound(Dry)isalwaysstereo
in/out.Theinput/outputconfigurationoftheeffectsound
(Wet)willdependontheselectedeffecttype.
Thetotaleffectisstereoinandstereoout,buttheoutput
maybemonauraldependingonthetypeofeffectyouselect.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIn/Outonpage 240.
TFX:
TFX [000...171]
Thisselectstheeffecttypefortotaleffect.]
TFXcannotusedoublesizeeffects(172193).
Category/TFX Select menu
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/TFXSelect
menuwillappear,lettingyouchooseeffecttypesby
category.Usethetabstoselectaneffectcategoryinthe
91a
91b
91
Menu
Program mode
62
menu,andthenchooseaneffectwithinthatcategory.Press
theOKbuttontoexecuteyourchoice,orpresstheCancel
buttontocancel.
TFX On/Off [Off, On]
Thisturnstotaleffecton/off.Ifthisisoff,theinputwillbe
passeddirectlythrough.Thesettingwillalternatebetween
on/offeachtimeyoupressthis.
Tip:Aneasywaytodisablethetotaleffectistoturnoffthe
frontpanelTOTALFXbutton.TFXwillbetemporarily
disabled,andwillstayoffevenifyouswitchprogramsor
modes.Whenyouturntheswitchon,thetotaleffectwillbe
enabled,andyouwillobtaintheeffectspecifiedbythe
programorcombination.
Note:TheTOTALFXbuttonislinkedwithGlobalP01
EffectGlobalSWEnableTFX(seep.5).
Alternatively,youcansendcontrolchange#95toturn
thetotaleffectoff.Avalueof0turnsthetotaleffectoff,
andvaluesof1127restoretheoriginalsetting.The
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel
(Global11a)isusedforthismessage.
91c: Master Volume
Master Volume [000...127]
Thisspecifiesthefinalleveloftheaudiooutputthathas
passedthroughtotaleffect,andoutputfromAUDIO
OUTPUTL/MONOandR.
V 91: Menu Command
3:CopyMFX/TFXseep.67
4:SwapMFX/TFXseep.67
Commandonpage 64.
92: MFX1
92a: MFX1
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheeffectyouchoosefor
MFX1intheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Formore
information,pleaseseeDynamicModulationSource
Listonpage 346.
Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Itislinkedwiththeon/off
settingintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
ThesettingwillalternatebetweenOnandOffeachtimeyou
pressthis.
Alternatively,youcanuseCC#94toturnMastereffects
1/2off.CC#95willturntheTotaleffectoff.Avalueof0
isOff,andavalueof1127selectstheoriginalsetting.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannelspecified
byMIDIChannel(Global11a).
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
Thisselectstheeffectpreset.Formoreinformation,please
seeP(EffectPreset)onpage 60.
MFX1 Parameters
Here,youcanedittheparametersofthemastereffect
selectedintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Fordetailsonthemastereffects,pleaseseeMasterEffects
(MFX1,2)onpage 245.
V 92: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
93: MFX2, 94: TFX
ThesepagesletyouedittheparametersofMasterEffect2
andTotalEffect.Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheP9:
MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
TheparametersforMFX2,TFXisthesameasforMFX1.For
moreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1onpage 62.
92a
92
Menu
PROG P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO) 95: Common FX LFO
63
95: Common FX LFO
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronizeLFO
basedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchasphasers,
flangers,filters,andsoon.
TheCommonLFOscontrolonlythefrequency,MIDI
synchronization,andresetoptions;eachindividualeffect
stillhasitsownsettingsfortheLFOwaveformandphase.
Withintheindividualeffects,youcanchoosewhethertouse
oneoftheCommonLFOs,ortousetheindividualeffects
frequency,sync,and/orresetsettingsinstead.Thisisdone
viatheeffectsLFOTypeparameter;selectIndividualtouse
theeffectssettings,orCommon1or2tousetheCommon
LFOs.
Dmod(DynamicModulation)iscontrolledonthe
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedinGlobalmodeP1.
95a: Common FX LFO1
Sync (Reset) [Off, On]
ThisspecifieswhethertheCommonFXLFOwillbereset.
Ifthisison,operatingtheSource(below)willresetthe
phaseoftheLFO.
Source (Dmod Source) [List of Dmod Sources]
IfSync(Reset)ison,thisselectstheDmodsourcethatwill
resettheCommonLFO.ForacompletelistofDmod
sources,pleaseseeDynamicModulationSourceListon
page 346.
Thiswillbeoffwhenthemodulationsourcespecified
bySourcehasavaluebelow64,andonwhenthevalue
isabove64.TheLFOwillberesetwhenthisvaluerises
fromalevelbelow64toalevelhigherthan64.
Frequency [0.02...20.00 (Hz)]
ThisspecifiesthefrequencyoftheCommonFXLFO.Higher
valuesmaketheLFOfaster.
MIDI/Tempo Sync [Off, On]
Off(unchecked):ThespeedoftheCommonFXLFOwillbe
determinedbytheFrequencysetting.
On(checked):ThespeedoftheCommonFXLFOwillbe
determinedbytheBPM,BaseNote,andTimessettings(see
below).
BPM [MIDI, 40.00...300.00]
Base Note [, , , _ , , , , _ , , , , _ , , , _ , , ]
Times [01...32]
ThefrequencyoftheCommonFXLFOwillbethelengthof
theBaseNotenotevaluemultipliedbytheTimesvalue,
relativetothetempospecifiedbytheBPMvalue.IfBPMis
settoMIDI,thiswilloperateaccordingtothe, (Tempo)
(Prog01a)setting.IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issetto
External,thiswillfollowtheMIDIclockofthemaster
device.
95b: Common FX LFO2
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforCommonFXLFO1,
asdescribedunder95a:CommonFXLFO1above.
V 95: Menu Command
Commandonpage 64.
95a
95b
95
Menu
Stereo Flanger Common FX LFO1
Common FX LFO
Stereo Phaser
Stereo Auto Pan
Waveforem = Triangle
Generate original LFO waveform
Frequency[Hz]
Reset
Waveforem = Sine
Waveforem = Sine
LFO Type = Common1
Program mode
64
Program: Menu Command
ENTER + 09: shortcuts for menu com-
mands
Eachpagehasasetofmenucommands,whichprovide
accesstodifferentutilities,commands,andoptions,
dependingonthepageyourecurrentlyon.Youcanusethe
menucommandsentirelyfromthetouchscreen,by
pressingthemenubuttonintheupperrighthandcornerof
thescreenandthenselectinganoptionfromthemenuthat
appears.
Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownuniquemenu
commands,themenusarestandardizedasmuchas
possible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthefirst
menuiteminProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes.
Youcantakeadvantageofthisstandardizationbyusinga
shortcuttoaccessanyofthefirsttenmenuitems:
1. HolddowntheENTERbutton.
2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadtoselect
thedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0.
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1forthe
second,andsoon.
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthecommand
callsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappearonthedisplay,
andyoucanproceedjustasifyoudselectedthecommand
fromthetouchscreen.
Tip:Whilethiscommandisopen,theENTERbuttonwill
operateastheOKbuttonandtheEXITbuttonwilloperate
astheCancelbutton.
Procedure for menu commands
1. Selectthemenucommand.
2. Makesettingsinthedialogbox.
Fordetailsonthecontentofeachdialogbox,refertothe
explanationofeachcommand.
3. Toexecute,presstheOKbutton.Tocancelwithoutexe
cuting,presstheCancelbutton.
Write Program
ThiscommandwritesaneditedProgramintotheKROME
internalmemory.ItisavailableoneverypageinProgram
mode.
WriteProgramletsyou:
Saveyouredits
RenametheProgram
AssigntheProgramtoaCategory
CopytheProgramtoadifferentBankandnumber
BesuretoWriteanyProgramthatyouwishtokeep.An
editedProgramcannotberecoveredifyoudonotwrite
itbeforeturningoffthepowerorselectinganother
Program.
Note:Youcanalsoaccessandexecutethiscommandby
pressingtheWRITEbutton.
1. TheupperlineofthedialogshowstheBank,number,
andProgramname.
Ifyouwishtomodifytheprogramname,pressthetextedit
buttontomovetothetexteditdialogbox,andenterthe
desiredprogramname.
2. InCategoryandSubCategory,specifythecategoryof
theprogramthatyouarewriting.
ThecategorycanbeusedtofindthisProgramwhen
selectingaprograminProgram,Combination,orSequencer
modes.
Note:YoucaneditthesecategorynamesintheGlobalP4:
Categorypage.Formoreinformation,pleasesee41:
ProgramMainand42:ProgramSubonpage 204.
3. PressToProgramtospecifythedestinationBankand
number.
YoucanalsousetheBANKAFbuttonstoselectabank.
YoucannotsavetobanksGg(d).Ifyouveeditedaprogram
frombanksGg(d)andwanttosaveit,savetheedited
programtoabankAF.
Exclusive Solo
ThebehavioroftheSolofunctionwillalternateeachtime
youselectExclusiveSolo.
TheSolofunctioncanoperateinoneofthefollowingtwo
ways.
MultipleSolo
ThespecifiedOSC1,OSC2,ordrumtrackwillbesoloed.The
soloon/offsettingwillalternateeachtimeyoupresstheSolo
button.
ExclusiveSolo
OnlyonesourceOSC1,OSC2,orthedrumtrackwillbe
soloed.
Note:SolooperationscanbeperformedintheP03:Mixer&
DrumTrackpageofeachmode.
Note:TheSolofunctionappliestoeachmode.Allsources
arehandledasasinglegroup.InthecaseofExclusiveSolo,
allothersourceswillbeoffifevenonesourceisbeing
soloed.
1. UsethemenutoselectExclusiveSolo.
Whenyouselectthisitem,acheckmarkwillbeaddedatthe
leftofExclusiveSolointhemenu.Thecheckmarkwill
appearordisappeareachtimeyouselectthisitem.
Nocheckmark:MultipleSolo
Checkmark:ExclusiveSolo
Alternatively,youcanturnthissettingon/offbyholding
downtheENTERbuttonandpressingnumerickey1.
Program: Menu Command Auto Song Setup
65
Auto Song Setup
Thiscommandautomaticallycopiesthesettingsofthe
programorcombinationtoasong,andenablestherecord
standbycondition(SeeTip:AutoSongSetuponpage 2.).
pressingtheREC()button.
Copy Tone Adjust
ToneAdjusttaboftheplaypage.
ThiscommandreplacesthecurrentToneAdjustsettings
withthoseofanyotherProgram,CombinationTimbre,or
SongTrack.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcemode,
bank,andnumber.
YoucanusethefrontpanelBANKbuttonstoselectthe
desiredbank.
2. IntheTimbrefield(ifyouveselectedaCombination)
orTrackfield(ifyouveselectedaSong),selectthe
TimbreorTracktocopyfrom.
3. SelecteitherAllorAssignmentsOnlytospecifythe
ToneAdjustparametersyouwanttocopy.
All:ThiscopiesboththeToneAdjustparameter
assignmentsandvalues.
AssignmentsOnly:ThiscopiesonlytheToneAdjust
parameterassignments,withoutthevalues.
Reset Tone Adjust
ToneAdjusttaboftheplaypage.
ThiscommandresetstheToneAdjustsettingsforallofthe
displayedSwitchesandSliderstotheirdefaultvalues.
1. UsetheTofieldtospecifyhowtheSwitches18and
Sliders18parameterswillbereset.
AllOff:AllwillberesettoOff.
DefaultSetting:Theparameterswillberesettothedefault
values.
Copy Oscillator
CopyOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQ,AMS/CommonKeyTrackpages.
Thiscommandisusedtocopythesettingsfromone
oscillatortoanother.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselecttheoscillatorthatyouwant
tocopy.
2. UseProgramtoselectthebankandnumberofthe
copysourceprogram.
YoucanpressaBANKSELECTbuttontoselectthedesired
bank.
3. InTo,specifythecopydestinationoscillator.
Swap Oscillator
SwapOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQ,AMS/CommonKeyTrackpages.
Thiscommandexchangesthesettingsofoscillators1and2.
Note:ThiscanbeselectedonlyifOscillatorMode(Prog1
1a)isDoubleorDoubleDrums.
Copy Drum Track
CopyDrumTrackisavailableontheDrumTrkPatterntab
orDrumTrkProgramtaboftheARP/DTpage.
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromthespecifiedprogram,
combination/timbre,orsong.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthemode,bank,andnum
berofthedesiredcopysource.YoucanpressaBANK
buttontoselectthedesiredbank.
2. IfyouexecutethiscommandinProgrammode,and
selectPrograminFrom,theadditionalfieldProgram
Settingstoowillappear.
On(checked):TheparametersettingsoftheDrumTrack
PatternpageandDrumTrackProgrampagewillbecopied.
Off(unchecked):TheparametersettingsoftheDrumTrack
Patternpagewillbecopied.
IfyouexecutethiscommandinCombinationorSequencer
mode,theparametersettingsoftheDrumTrackProgram
pagewillbecopied.However,theMIDIChannelsetting
willnotbecopied.
Program mode
66
Erase Drum Track Pattern
EraseDrumTrackisavailableontheDrumTrkPatterntab
orDrumTrkProgramtaboftheARP/DT.
Thiserasesthedrumtrackpatternyouspecify.
1. Selecttheuserdrumtrackpatternyouwanttoerase.
2. IfyoucheckAllDrumTrackPatterns,alluserdrum
trackpatternswillbeerased.
Sync Both EGs
SyncBothEGsisavailableontheFilter1/2EGandAmp1/2
EGpages.
ThisoptionallowsyoutoedittheEGsofOscillator1and
Oscillator2together.Whenitischecked,editingtheFilter
EGofeitherOscillator1or2willchangebothFilterEGs
simultaneously.Similarly,editingtheAmpEGofeither
OscillatorwillchangebothAmpEGs.
ThisoptionisavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DoubleorDoubleDrums.
1. SelectSyncBothEGs.
ThedisplaywillindicateSYNCBOTHEGsandthetwo
EGswillbesynchronized.
2. IfyounolongerwanttheEGstobesynchronized,
selectSyncBothEGsonceagain.
Theindicationwilldisappearfromthedisplay.
Swap LFO 1&2
SwapLFO1&2isavailableonalloftheLFOpages,except
fortheCommonLFOtab.
ThiscommandcopiesthesettingsofLFO1toLFO2,and
viceversa.
Note:IfLFO2isbeingusedtomodulateLFO1,this
commandwillerasethatmodulationrouting.
Copy Arpeggiator
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheArpAtabandArpB
tabofPlay/RECControlpageorSetuptab,ArpAtab,ArpB
tab,ScanZonetaboftheARP/DTpage.
Thiscommandcanbeusedtocopyarpeggiosettingsfrom
anotherlocationtothecurrentprogram.
1. UsetheFromfieldspecifythesourceofthearpeggio
settings(mode,bank,number)thatyouwishtocopy.
2. IfyouarecopyingfromCombination,orSong,specify
whetheryouwishtocopyfromAorB.
Copy Insert Effect
CopyInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
Thiscommandcopieseffectssettingsfromwithinthe
currentProgram,fromotherPrograms,Combinations,or
Songs.
ToexecutetheCopyInsertEffectcommand,presstheOK
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Ifyourecopyingfromamastereffect,theresultwill
notbeidenticalduetodifferencesintheroutingand
levelsettingsofthemastereffects.
From (Mode) [Program, Combination, Song]
ThisselectswhetheryoullcopyfromaProgram,a
Combination,oraSong.
From (Bank and Number) [Bank and Number]
ForProgramsandCombinations,thisselectstheBankand
Numberfromwhichtocopy.Whenthisparameteris
selected,youcanalsousethefrontpanelBANKbuttonsto
selectBanks.
(Effects slot select) [IFX 15, MFX 1&2, TFX]
Selectwhichoftheeffectsyouwishtocopy.
Youcanalsocopyfromamastereffectandtotaleffect.
All [check-box]
Whenthisisenabled,thesettingsofallinserteffects(the
contentsoftheInsertFXpageandtheeffectparametersof
IFX15,butnotCtrlCh)willbecopied.
To [IFX 15]
Thisselectstheinserteffectcopydestination.
Post IFX Mixer Settings [check-box]
Whenthisischecked,thePan,Bus(BusSelect),Ctrl(FX
ControlBus),andSends1and2settingsthatfollowthe
copysourceinserteffectwillalsobecopied.
Whenthisisnotchecked,onlytheeffecttypeandits
parameterswillbecopied.
Program: Menu Command Swap Insert Effect
67
Copying 000: No Effect
Copyingasingleeffectsetto000:NoEffectwillnotwork:
nodatawillbecopied.
IfeitherAllorAllusedisselected,and000:NoEffect
existswithinachain,itwillbecopied.However,iftheentire
chainconsistsof000:NoEffect,nothingwillbecopied.
Swap Insert Effect
SwapInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
Thiscommandexchangestheeffects,andtheirinternal
parameters,betweentwoIFXslots.
AlloftheparametersshownontheIFX15pageswillbe
copied.
OtherIFXslotparameterswillnotbeaffected,including
Pan,Sends1and2,Chain,AUXBus,andFXControlBus.
1. InSource1andSource2,selecteachoftheinsert
effectsthatyouwishtoswap.
Copy MFX/TFX
CopyMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX/LFO
pages.
Thiscommandletsyoucopyanydesiredeffectsettingsfrom
Program,Combination,orSong.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcemode,
bank,andnumber.
YoucanalsousetheBANKbuttonstoselectthedesired
bank.
2. Selecttheeffectthatyouwanttocopy.
YoucancopyfromaninserteffectbyselectingIFX15.
Ifyoucopyfromaninserteffect,theresultmaynotbe
exactlythesame,duetodifferencesinroutingandlevel
settings.
IfyouselectMFX1orMFX2,theReturnlevelwillbecopied
atthesametime.
YoucancopysettingsfromatotaleffectbyselectingTFX.
IfyoucheckAllMFXs,allmastereffectsettingswillbe
copied.
IfyoucheckTFX,alltotaleffectsettingswillbecopied.
MasterVolumesettingswillnotbecopied.
3. InTo,specifythecopydestinationmastereffectsor
totaleffect.
Swap MFX/TFX
SwapMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX/LFO
pages.
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)settingsbetweenMFX1,
MFX2,TFX.
1. UseSource1andSource2toselectthemastereffect(s)
ortotaleffect(s)thatyouwanttoswap.
Write FX Preset
WriteFXPresetisavailableonalloftheeffectsparameter
editingpages,includingIFX15,MFX1and2,andTFX.
ThiscommandsavestheeditedeffectintotheKROMEs
internalmemory.
1. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetexteditdialog
box,andinputanamefortheeffectpreset.
2. UsetheTofieldtoselectthewritingdestination.We
recommendthatyouuseU00U15.
Program mode
68
69
Combination mode
COMBI Page Select
Youcanusethefollowingwaystoselectthepagesin
Combinationmode.
1. PressthePAGEbuttontoaccessPageSelect.
Alternatively,pressthemodebuttonontheupperleftside
ofthedisplay,andthenpresstherightsideofthemenu.
ThepageinwhichyouwerepriortopressingthePAGE
buttonisshowninlightblue.
HolddownthePAGEbuttonandpressanumerickeys,
09,tospecifyapagenumber;youwillmovetothe
correspondingpage.
ForexampleifyouwanttoaccesstheP3:TimbreParam
page,holddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumeric
key3.
PressingtheEXITbuttonwilltakeyoutotheP0:Play
page.IfapageotherthantheProgramT0108pageis
selected,pressingtheEXITbuttonwilltakeyoutothe
ProgramT0108page.
Page Main content
P
L
A
Y
P0:Play
Selectandplaycombinations.(seep.70)
Programselectionforeachtimbre.(see
p.71)
Panandvolumesettingsetc.foreach
timbre.(seep.73)
EditingfromtheToneAdjust(seep.75)
E
D
I
T
P1:Controllers
SW1,2,andknobfunctionsettings.(see
p.78)
P2:EQ EQsettingsforeachtimbre.(seep.79)
P3:TimbreParam
Variousparametersettingsforeach
timbre(MIDIchannel,OSCselection,
Pitchsetting,etc.)(seep.81)
P4:Zone/Delay
Keysplitandlayersettings.
(Keyzoneandvelocityzone)(seep.84)
Timedelayfromnoteontobeginningof
sound.(seep.86)
P5:MIDIFilter
MIDItransmit/receivefiltersettings.(see
p.87)
A
R
P
&
D
R
U
M
T
R
A
C
K
P7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack
E
F
F
E
C
T
P8:Routing/IFX
settings.(seep.97)
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
settings.(seep.99)
p.100)
Combination mode
70
COMBI P0: Play
ThisisthemainpageofCombinationmode.Amongother
things,youcan:
Selectcombinations
Selectaprogramforeachtimbre,andspecifyitsPlay/
MuteandSoloOn/Offstatus.
EdittheArpeggiatorinsimpleways
UsetheToneAdjustfunctiontomakesimpleeditsfor
programparameters
Tip: Auto Song Setup
TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrentProgramor
CombinationintoaSong,andthenputstheKROMEin
recordreadymode.
Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhileyoure
playing,youcanusethisfunctiontostartrecording
immediately.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAutoSongSetupon
page 106.
01: Program T0108,
02: Program T0916
Thisisthemainpageforselectingandplaying
Combinations.YoucanalsosettheProgram,Play/Mute,and
SoloOn/OffforeachoftheTimbres18and916.
01(2)a:Combination Select
Bank [A...D]
Thisindicatesthecurrentlyselectedcombinationbank.
PressoneoftheBANKADbuttonstoselectthedesired
bank.
Eachbankcontainsrewritablecombinationprogramareas
for128combinations(atotalof512).
Note:PressingoneoftheBANKAFbuttonswhilethe
ProgramSelectparameterisselectedwillchangethetimbre
programbank(ratherthanthecombinationbank).
Combination Select [000...127]
HereyoucanselectthedesiredCombination.
To switch combinations
ChooseCombinationSelect,usenumerickeys09to
inputthedesiredcombinationnumber,andpressthe
ENTERbutton.
ChooseCombinationSelectandturntheVALUEdialor
usetheINC/DECbuttons.
Ifthe01a:CombinationSelectparameterisselected,
theBANKADbuttonswillswitchcombinationbanks.
PresstheCombinationSelectPopuptoviewandselect
fromtheBank/CombinationSelectmenuorganizedby
bank.
PresstheCategoryPopuptoviewandselectfromthe
Category/CombinationSelectmenuorganizedby
category.
Youcanuseafootswitchtoselectcombinations.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseetheGlobalparameter
FootSwitchAssignonpage 202.Foralistofthe
functionsthatcanbeassignedtothefootswitch,please
seeFootSwitchAssignmentsonpage 349.
YoucantransmitMIDIprogramchangesfroma
connectedexternalMIDIdevice.
Bank/Combination Select menu:
1. PressthepopupbuttonlocatedattheleftofCombina
tionSelecttoaccesstheBank/CombinationSelect
menu.
2. Pressoneofthetabsatleftorrighttoselectabank.
3. Selectacombinationfromthelist.Youcandirectly
pressyourchoicewithinthelist,orusetheINC/DEC
buttons.
Ifthescreencannotdisplayalloftheavailableitems,usethe
scrollbar.
Note:Ifyouwanttosearchforasoundbyitscombination
name,usetheFindfunction(seep.2).
Bank/Combination Select menu
Bank No. Description
A,B,C 000127 Preloadedcombinations
D 000127 Usercombinations
01a
01b
01
Menu
Mode
Bank
Combination Select Popup Combination Select
Category Popup
Stop Watch
Page Menu
Tempo
Tab
Scroll bar
COMBI P0: Play 01: Program T0108, 02: Program T0916
71
Category [00...17/00...07]
Here,youcanselectthecombinationcategory.
Allprogramsareclassifiedusingeighteenmaincategories
andeightsubcategories.Youcanselectacategory,andthen
selectacombinationwithinthatcategory.Whenyoupress
thepopupbutton,theCategory/CombinationSelectmenu
willappear.
Category/Combination Select menu:
Youcanselectcombinationsbycategoryandsubcategory.
Allcombinationsareorganizedintouptoeighteen
categories,andeachcategoryisfurtherorganizedintoeight
subcategories.Youcanusethesecategoriesandsub
categoriestoselectcombinations.
1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton(abovetheCombina
tionSelectparameter)toopentheCategory/Combina
tionSelectmenu.
2. Pressoneofthetabsontheleftandrighttoselectthe
desiredcategory.
Note:Youcannotselectthecategorytabofacategoryto
whichnocombinationshavebeenassigned.
3. Selectacombinationfromthelist.Youcandirectly
pressyourchoicewithinthelist,orusetheINC/DEC
buttons.
Iftherearemorecombinationsthancanbeshowninthe
screen,usethescrollbartoseetheremainingcombinations.
Note:Ifyouwanttosearchforasoundbyitscombination
name,usetheFindfunction(seep.2).
Category/Combination Select menu
4. Toselectfromasubcategory,presstheJumptoSub
buttontoaccessSubCategory/ProgramSelect.
Pressoneofthelefttabstoselectasubcategory.
Note:Subcategoriesnotassignedtoanyprogramscannot
beselectedfromthetabs.
PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection,orpressthe
Cancelbuttontocancelit.Youwillreturntothemain
categories.
Note:Thecategoryofeachcombinationcanbespecifiedin
theWriteCombinationdialogbox.
, (Tempo) [40.00... 300.00, EXT]
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentCombination,which
appliestotemposyncedLFOsandeffects,arpeggiator,and
temposyncedeffects.
040.00300.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoinBPM,
with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousingthestandard
dataentrycontrols,youcanusetheTEMPOknobtoadjust
thebpm,orjustplayafewquarternotesontheTAPbutton.
IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoExternalMIDIor
ExternalUSB,EXTisshown.ThisisalsoshownifMIDI
ClockisAutoandMIDIclockdataisbeingreceivedfroman
externaldevice.IftempoisEXT,arpeggiatoretc.will
synchronizetoMIDIclockdatafromanexternalMIDI
device.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIClock(MIDI
ClockSource)onpage 199.
Mode, Stop Watch
Seea:Modebuttononpage 4oftheOperationguide.
Seel:Stopwatchbuttononpage 5oftheOperationguide.
01(2)b: Timbre Program Select
Selected Timbre Info
Thisareashowsinformationonthetimbreselectedfor
editing.T:Timbrenumber/programbank/number/name,
Ch:MIDIchannel/number.
Timbre Number
Thisindicatesthetimbrenumber.Beloweachtimbre
numberareshownvariousparameterswhichyoucanedit
forthattimbre.
Timbre 01 (Timbre Number):
Category (Timbre Program) [00...17/00...07]
Here,youcanselecttheprogramusedbyeachtimbreby
programcategoryandsubcategory.Allprogramsare
organizedintouptoeighteencategoriesandeightsub
categories.
PressthispopupbuttontogettheCategory/Timbere
ProgramSelectmenu,thenselectthedesiredcategoryand
subcategory,andfinallyselectthedesiredprogram.
Category/Timbre Program Select menu:
Hereyoucanselecttheprogramforeachtimbrebymain
categoryandsubcategory.Allprogramsareclassifiedintoa
maximumofeighteenmaincategories,andeachcategoryis
classifiedintoeightsubcategories.Youcanselectprograms
usingthesemaincategoriesandsubcategories.
PressCategoryandusetheCategory/TimbreProgram
Selectmenutoselectaprogram.
Fortheprocedure,pleaseseeCategory/CombinationSelect
menu:above.
Category
tab
Scroll bar
Sub-category
tab
Select Timbre Info
Timbre No.
Category/Timbre
Program Select
Play/Mute
Solo On/Of
Bank/Timbre
Program Select
Program Select
Combination mode
72
Program Select
[A...F: 000...127, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 001...128]
Here,youcanselecttheprogramusedbyeachtimbre.The
lowerlinedisplayspartoftheprogramname.
To switch the program of a timbre
ChooseProgramSelect,usenumerickeys09toinputthe
programnumber,andpresstheENTERbutton.
ChooseProgramSelectandturntheVALUEdialoruse
theINC/DECbuttons.
IftheProgramSelectparameterischosen,theBANKAF
buttonswillswitchprogrambanks.(IfTimbreProgram
Selectisselected,theBANKbuttonLEDoftheprogram
bankselectedforthattimbrewilllightup.)
YoucanusethenumerickeystoswitchtheGMbank(see
p.2).
FromtheBank/ProgramSelectmenuyoucanviewand
selectprogramsarrangedbybank.
FromtheCategory/ProgramSelectmenuyoucanview
andselectprogramsbycategory.
YoucanchooseaprogrambytransmittingMIDIprogram
changesfromaconnectedexternalMIDIdevice.
TheKROMEscombinationsandtimbreprogramscan
beswitchedfromanexternalMIDIdevicebyusing
MIDIbankselectandMIDIprogramchangemessages.
Bydefault,thecombinationbankandnumberwill
changewhenabankselectorprogramchangemessage
thatmatchestheKROMEsglobalMIDIchannelis
received.(GlobalMIDIchannel;seep.198Global11a
MIDIChannel(GlobalMIDIChannel))
However,ifthechanneloftheincomingmessageis
differentthantheKROMEsglobalMIDIchannel,the
programbankandnumberwillchangeonlyfortimbres
thatmatchtheMIDIchannelofthemessage.
Tip:EvenfortheglobalMIDIchannel,youcanchangethe
settingfromthedefaultsothatthetimbreprogram
ratherthanthecombinationwillbeswitched.(see
p.201Global12bMIDIFilterCombinationChange)
Tip:SwitchingthetimbreprograminresponsetoMIDI
receptioncanbedisabledforspecifictimbres.(seep.87
MIDIFilter51c/52cEnableProgramChange)
Whenyouswitchcombinationsbyoperatingthe
KROME,thebankandnumberofthecombinationyou
selectaretransmittedasbankselectandprogram
changemessagesontheglobalMIDIchannel.
Atthistime,ifanyofthetimbreshavethetimbrestatus
EXTorEX2,thebankandnumberoftheirtimbre
programswillbetransmittedasbankselectandprogram
changemessagesonthetimbrechannel.(TimbreStatus;
seep.81TimbreParam31c/32cStatus)
Bank/Timbre Program Select menu:
PressthepopupbuttonlocatedattheleftofProgram
Select,andchooseaprogramfromtheBank/Program
Selectmenu.
Fortheprocedure,pleaseseeBank/ProgramSelectmenu:
onpage 2.
Play/Mute [Play, Mute]
Thissettingmutesatimbre.
Play:Thetimbrewillproducesound.
Mute:Thetimbrewillbemuted(silent).
Solo On/Off [On, Off]
TurnstheSolofunctionon/offforeachtimbre.
TheSolofunctionoperatesdifferentlydependingonthe
settingoftheExclusiveSolomenucommand.
IfExclusiveSoloisoff,youcanturnSoloonformorethan
onetimbre.Thesettingwillalternateeachtimeyoupress
theSoloOn/Offbutton.
IfExclusiveSoloison,pressingaSolobuttonwillturnSolo
onforonlythattimbre.
Note:TheSoloOn/Offstatusisnotpreservedwhenyou
writethecombination.
Exclusive Solo
thatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff(unchecked),
youcansolomultipleTimbresatonce.
WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyoneTimbrecan
besoloedatatime.Inthismode,pressingaSolobutton
Tip:YoucanalsotoggleExclusiveSolobyholdingENTER
andpressing1onthenumerickeypad.
Velocity Meter
ThisindicatesthenoteonvelocityvaluesontheMIDI
channelofeachtimbre,producedbythekeyboard,MIDI
IN,arpeggiator,ordrumtrack.(Ifmultiplenoteon
messagesarereceivedsimultaneously,thehighest
velocitywillbedisplayed.)
Timbre 02...08, 09...16 (Timbre Number):
Hereyoucanspecifytheprogram,Play/Mutestatus,and
SoloOn/Offstatusfortimbres28and916.Thesearethe
sameasfortimbre01.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Timbre01(TimbreNumber):above.
V 01(2): Menu Command
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
COMBI P0: Play 03: Mixer T0108, 04: Mixer T0916
73
03: Mixer T0108,
04: Mixer T0916
Thisisthemainpageforselectingandplaying
Combinations.
Youcanalsosetthepan,andvolumeforeachoftheTimbres
18and916.Formoreinformation,pleasesee01:
ProgramT0108,02:ProgramT0916onpage 70.
03(4)a: Combination Select
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Combination
Selectonpage 70.
03(4)b: Pan, Volume
Thisareashowsinformationonthetimbreselectedfor
editing.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:TimbreProgram
Selectonpage 71.
Category [Category Name]
Thisindicatesthecategory.
Pan [RND, L001...C064...R127]
Thisspecifiesthepanofeachtimbre.
L001C064R127:AsettingofL001isfarleftandR127is
farright.AsettingofC064willreproducethepansettingof
theProgrammode.
Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumakehere
willbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan:#8parameterinP8:
Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppagewilladjustthepanningof
thesoundaftertheinserteffect(Mixeronpage 243).
RND:Theoscillatorpanwillchangerandomlyateachnote
on.
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)issettoINT,CC#10(pan)
messagescanbereceivedtocontrolthesetting.CC#10
valuesof0or1willplacethesoundatfarleft,64at
center,and127atfarright.(excludeRND)Pancanbe
controlledbymessagesreceivedontheMIDIChannel
(Combi31(2)c).
Volume [000...127]
Adjuststhevolumeofeachtimbre18.
Thevolumeofeachtimbreisdeterminedby
multiplyingthisvolumevaluewiththeMIDIvolume
(CC#7)andexpression(CC#11).
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)hasbeensettoINT,incoming
MIDICC#7orCC#11messageswillcontrolthevolume
ofatimbre.(Howeverthesemessageswillnotaffectthe
settingofthisparameter.)
IfStatusisEXTorEX2,thevalueofthisparameterwill
betransmittedasMIDICC#7whenthecombinationis
changed.Howeverthiswillnotbetransmittedbya
timbrethatissettothesameMIDIchannelastheglobal
MIDIchannel.ThismessageistransmittedontheMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c)specifiedforeachtimbre.
Hold Balance [Off, On]
On(checked):Whenanyoneofthevolumeslidersis
moved,thevolumeoftheothertimbreswillchangeaswell.
Thevolumebalanceoftimbres116willbemaintained.This
isusefulwhenyouwishtoadjusttheoverallvolume.
Timbre 02...08 (Timbre Number):
Hereyoucanspecifytheprogrametc.foreachTimbre2
through8.Thesearethesameasfortimbre01.Formore
information,pleaseseeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):
above.
Commandonpage 101.
03a
03b
03
Menu
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L001
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R127 Left Center Right
Pan (CC#10)
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
Left Center Right
Left Center Right
OSC1 OSC2 OSC1 OSC2 OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L032
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R096
Pan (CC#10)
C064
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=C064
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=C064 Left Center Right
Pan (CC#10)
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC1 OSC2
Combination mode
74
05: ARPEGGIATOR A,
06: ARPEGGIATOR B
Here,youcanmakearpeggiatorsettingsforthe
combination.Acombinationcanruntwoarpeggiators
simultaneously.
ArpeggiatorparameterscanbeeditedinP7:ARP/DT,but
certainmajorparameterscanbeeditedinthesepagesas
well.Youcanedittheseparametersinrealtime,forexample,
bychangingthearpeggiopatternwhileplayinginCombi
P0:Play.
YoucanalsousetheTEMPOknobandthearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATEknob,VELOCITYknob,SWINGknob,and
STEPknobtocontrolthearpeggiatorinrealtime.
Tosavetheeditsyoumake,useWriteCombination.
05(6)a: Combination Select, Tempo
Bank, Combination Number & Name
Thesearethebank,number,andnameofthecurrent
Combination.Here,youcanalsoselectacombination.
Selectonpage 70.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee,(Tempo)onpage 71.
05(6)b: ARP Controls
assignmentsoftheREALTIMECONTROLSknobs.
[GATE] [64...+00...+63]
[VEL. (Velocity)] [64...+00...+63]
[SWING] [64...+00...+63]
seep.6,p.54
[STEP] [64...+00...+63]
seep.6
05(6)c: Arpeggiator Run A/B,
Timbre assign
Arpeggiator Run A, B
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)youchecked
herewillruniftheyareassignedtoatimbrebyArpeggiator
Assign(71(2)c).
Whenthearpeggiatorison,thesecheckboxesletyouturnA
andBon/off.
ThisparametercanalsobesetfromP7:Arpeggiator/Drum
TrackpageArpeggiatorRunA,B.
Timbre assign
ThisindicatesthearpeggiatorAandBassignmentstatusfor
eachtimbre18.ThesesettingsaremadeinArpeggiator
Assign(71(2)c).
05(6)d: Arpeggiator A (B)
Pat (Pattern) [P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
Resolution [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Sort [Off, On]
Latch [Off, On]
Key Sync. [Off, On]
Keyboard [Off, On]
Setthevariousparametersofthecombinationarpeggiator.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCOMBIP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)onpage 91.
Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom73(4):Arpeggiator
A(B)Setup.
Commandonpage 101.
05a
05b
05c
05
Menu
COMBI P0: Play 07: Tone Adjust
75
07: Tone Adjust
ToneAdjustprovidestwoimportantfeatures
simultaneously:
YoucanusetheToneAdjustparameterstoeditthemost
importantprogramparameters.
ItletsyoumodifyProgramsforusewithinaspecific
Combinationincludingeverythingfromsubtletweaks
(likechangingLFOspeeds)todramaticchanges(suchas
selectingadifferentMultisample).Anychangesthatyou
makearestoredwiththeCombination,anddonotalter
theoriginalProgram.
EachofthesixteenTimbreshasitsownsetoftoneadjust
parameters.
Formoreinformation,see:
Absolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameteron
page 7
ToneAdjustandMIDISysExonpage 7
InteractionbetweenToneAdjustandMIDICCson
page 8
InProgrammode,whenyoumakeeditsviaToneAdjust
andthensavetheresults,theProgramdataischangedjust
asifyoudeditedtheinternalparametersdirectly.Formore
information,pleaseseeSavingToneAdjustEditson
page 7.
InCombinationmode,however,allToneAdjusteditsare
storedwithintheCombination;theProgramitselfisnot
changed.ThisletsyoualterthewaythataProgramsounds
inonespecificCombiwithoutaffectingthewaythatit
soundsinProgrammode,orinanyotherCombinationsor
Songs.
07a: Combination Select, Tempo
Combination.Hereyoucanalsoselectacombination.
Selectonpage 70.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
07b: Timbre select, Selected parameter
information
Timbre select
Timbre [116]
ThisselectsthetimbrethatwillbecontrolledviatheTone
Adjustparameters.Youcanswitchbackandforthbetween
thedifferenttimbresasmuchasyoulike,withoutlosing
youredits.
Auto Load (Auto Load PRG) [Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTimbre,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsToneAdjust
settingswillbeloadedaswell.
Theparametersettingsassignedtotheslidersandswitches
inthedisplayandtheon/offsettingsassignedtothe
Absoluteparameterswillbeloaded.
OncetheProgramhasbeenloaded,youcanchangeanyor
alloftheToneAdjustsettingsasdesired,includingboth
assignmentsandvalues.Allsucheditsarestoredinthe
Combination,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
IfAutoLoadPRGisOn,ToneAdjustsettingswillbe
automaticallyloadedalongwiththeProgram.
IfAutoLoadPRGisOff,theToneAdjustsettingsofthe
replacementprogramwillnotbeloaded;theprogram
settingspriortoreplacementwillremain.
Control [SW18, SL18]
Thisistheswitchorsliderinthedisplaythatisassignedto
ToneAdjustparameters.
Assignment [List of Tone Adjust assignments]
Thisisthefullnameoftheparameterassignedtotheswitch
orsliderinthedisplay.Youcanchangethisusingthe
Assignparameter,below.
Value
switchorslider.
Thisshowsthetypeoftheparameter,whichrelatestohow
editstotheparameteraresaved.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeAbsolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameter
onpage 7.
Stored Value
Ifyouunassignaparameterfromacontrol,itwillrevertto
thisvalue.
07c: Tone Adjust
Here,youcanassignToneAdjustparameterstotheswitches
Switches 1...8
ToneAdjustswitchesactalittledifferentlythanswitchesin
thedisplay.
07c
07b
07a
07
Menu
Combination mode
76
theparametervalue:
SwitchOn=On
SwitchOff=Off
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheswitchesinthe
display.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,pleasesee
CommonToneAdjustParametersonpage 9andTone
AdjustParametersonpage 10.
Sliders 18
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheslidersinthe
Assignments are exclusive
thenewslider.
Value
slider.
V 07: Menu Command
5ResetToneAdjustseep.103
Commandonpage 101.
Controls
REALTIMECONTROLSletsyouuseknobs[1][4]to
modifytheparametersofthecombinationortheeffects.You
canalsousetheseknobstocontrolthearpeggiators.When
youuseaknob,thedisplaywillshowthecontrollers
functionandvalue.UsetheSELECTbuttontochangethe
knobfunctions.
InTONE,thefunctionsassignedtoknobs14arefixed.
InUSER,youcanassignavarietyofmodulationfunctions
toknobs14.Toassignfunctions,usetheP1:Controllers
Setuppage(page 78).
Realtime Controls
TheRealtimeControlsTONEknobfunctions(CUTOFFEG
RELEASE)arefixed.Youcanassignavarietyoffunctionsto
RealtimeControlsUSERknobs14(USER[1]USER[4]).
MIDIcontrolchangesareassignedforeachfunction.
MIDICC.
ThiswillcontroltimbresontheglobalMIDIchannel.
Mostofthesefunctionsadjust(scale)theparametersettings
ofthetimbreprograms.Unlessotherwisenoted,scaling
meansthattheparametersareattheirprogrammedvalues
whenthecontrollerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe
controllerisat0,andattheirmaximumwhenthecontroller
isat127.Foranotherlookatthis,pleaseseethediagram
below.
CC parameter scaling
TONE [Cut Off]: Flt Fc (Cutoff) [000...127]
ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAandB,
TONE [RESONANCE]: Flt Reso (Resonance)
[000...127]
ThisknobscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and
TONE [EG INTENSITY]: Flt EG (Filter EG Intensity)
[000...127]
ThisknobscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
MIDICC#79.
TONE [RELEASE]: EG Rel (EG Release) [000...127]
ThisknobscalesthereleasetimeoftheFilterandAmpEGs,
USER [1][4] [000...127]
Thesearethecurrentvaluesandassignedfunctions(MIDI
CC)fortheRealtimeControlsUSERknobs.
Assign
On/Of
Value
99
00
64 0 127
CC Value
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
COMBI P0: Play Controls
77
IntheP1:ControllersControllersSetuppageyoucan
assignavarietyofmodulationfunctionstoRealtime
ControlsUSERknobs14.
messagesusuallyCCs.
Arpeggiator
Arpeggiocontrolletsyouusethefourknobstocontrolthe
twoarpeggiatorsinrealtime.
pitchrange,andthelengthofthearpeggiopattern.
ARP [GATE] [64...+00...+64]
(SeeGateonpage 54).
ARP [VELOCITY] [64...+00...+64]
onpage 54).
ARP [SWINGH] [64...+00...+64]
Swingonpage 54).
ARP [STEP] [64...+00...+64]
Thisaffectsthelengthandresolutionofthearpeggio
pattern.
Combination mode
78
COMBI P1: Controllers
11: Controllers Setup
Here,youcanassignthefunctionsperformedbySW1and
SW2,andbyknobs14whenRealtimeControlsUSERis
selected.
Note:ThePanelSwitchAssignsettingoftheprogram
assignedtoeachtimbrewillhavenoeffect.
11a: Combination, Tempo
Combination.
Selectonpage 70.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
11b: Panel Switch 1/2 Assign
SW (SW1 Assign) [Off, ..., JS-Y Lock]
off.
Note:Iftheon/offstatusofthefrontpanelSW1,SW2
switchesismemorizedwhenyousavethecombination.
switch.
Toggle:ThestatewillalternatebetweenOnandOffeach
Momentary:ThestatewillremainOnonlywhileyou
assignedtoSW2arethesameasforSW1,withthe
substitutionofSW2Mod.(CC#81)insteadoftheSW1sSW1
Mod.(CC#80).
11c: Realtime Controls Knob Assign
Hereyoucanselectthefunctions(mainlytypesofcontrol
change)thatareassignedtoknobs14whentheSELECT
buttonhasselectedUSER(SeeRealtimeControlsKnobs1
4Assignmentsonpage 348)
USER [1] [Off, ..., MIDI CC#119]
V 11: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
11a
11b
11c
11
Menu
COMBI P2: EQ 21: EQ Trim T0108, 22: EQ Trim T0916
79
COMBI P2: EQ
21: EQ Trim T0108,
22: EQ Trim T0916
Here,youcansetthesignallevelthatenterstheEQof
timbres18and916.
21(2)a: Combination Name, Tempo
Combination.
Selectonpage 70.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
21(2)b: Timbre Info
Selected Timbre Info:
Thisareadisplaysinformationaboutthetimbreselectedfor
editingT:timbrenumber/programbank/number/name,
Ch:MIDIchannelnumber.
Timbre Number:
Thisindicatesthetimbrenumber.Thevariousparameters
beloweachtimbrenumbermakesettingsforthe
correspondingtimbre.
Timbre Category:
ThisshowstheabbreviatedcategorynameoftheProgram
assignedtotheTimbre.
21(2)c: Trim
Auto Load Prog EQ [Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTimbre,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsEQsettingswillbe
loadedaswell.
alloftheEQsettingsasdesired.Allsucheditsarestoredin
theCombination,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
Regardlessofthissetting,subsequenteditstothePrograms
EQinProgrammodewillnotaffecttheCombination.
On(checked):Whenyouswitchthetimbresprogram,the
currentEQsettingswillbecleared,andthe3bandEQ
valuesspecifiedbytheprogramwillbeloaded
automatically.Normallyyouwillleavethischecked.The
timbresprogramcanbeswitchedbyusingProgramSelect
(Combi01(2)b)orbyreceivingaMIDIprogramchange.
Youarefreetoeditthe3bandEQsettingsthathavebeen
automaticallyloaded.Makeadjustmentsforeachtimbre
relativetothesettingsoftheprogram,andthensavethe
combination.
Off(unchecked):TheProgramsEQsettingswontbe
loaded.UsethisifyouvesetuptheEQinaspecificway,
andthenwantittostayunchangedwhileyoutryout
differentPrograms.
Bypass [On, Off]
IfthisisOn(checked),alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingInputTrim.Bypassisusefulforcomparingthe
resultsoftheEQwiththeoriginalsignal.
Input Trim [0099]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Notethat
thisparameterusesalinearscale;50isequivalentto6 dB,
25isthesameas12 dB,andsoon.
Here,youcanmakesettingsfortimbres28and916.They
arethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,please
seeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):above.
Commandonpage 101.
21a
21c
21
Menu
21b
Select Timbre Info
Timbre Number
Timbre Category
Combination mode
80
23: EQ Gain T0108,
24: EQ Gain T0916
TheseparametersadjustthethreebandEQ(withsweepable
midrange)fortimbres18and916.
23(4)b: Timbre Info
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:EQTrimT0108,22:
EQTrimT0916onpage 79.
23(4)c: 3 Band Parametric EQ
High Gain [dB] [18.0+00.0+18.0]
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Mid Freq [Hz] (Mid Frequency) [10010k]
Mid Gain [dB] [18.0+00.0+18.0]
0.5 dB.
Low Gain [dB] [18.0+00.0+18.0]
incrementsof0.5 dB.
midrange)fortimbres28and916.Theyarethesameas
fortimbre1.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTimbre01
(TimbreNumber):above.
Commandonpage 101.
23a
23c
23
Menu
23b
COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) 31: MIDI T0108, 32: MIDI T0916
81
COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters)
31: MIDI T0108,
32: MIDI T0916
Here,youcanmakeMIDIsettingsfortimbres18and916.
31(2)b: Timbre Info
31(2)c: MIDI
Status [Off, INT, EXT, EX2]
ThissetswhethertheTimbrecontrolstheinternalsounds,or
externalMIDIdevices.
WhencontrollingexternalMIDIdevices,youcanchoose
betweenusingtheinternalBankSelectnumbers(assetby
thefrontpanelbuttons),orusingcustomBankSelect
settingstomatchtheexternaldevice.
Off:UsethistodisabletheTimbre.Withthissetting,the
TimbresProgramwillnotsound,andMIDIdatawillnotbe
transmitted.
INT:Thetimbrewillsound,andwillalsosoundinresponse
toMIDImessagesfromanexternalMIDIdevice.MIDIdata
willnotbetransmitted.
EXT:Thetimbrewillnotsoundevenifitreceivesmessages
fromacontroller,butMIDIdatawillbetransmittedto
externaldevices.
EX2:UsethistoplayanexternalMIDIdevice,withcustom
setBankSelectviatheBankSelect(WhenStatus=EX2)LSB
andMSBparameters,ontheMIDItaboftheTimbre
Parameterspage.Inallotherways,thisisthesameasEXT.
MIDI Channel [01...16, Gch]
SetstheMIDItransmit/receivechannelforeachtimbre.
Gch:Thetimbrewillusethechannelthathasbeenselected
astheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a).
WhenStatusisINT,MIDImessageswillbereceivedonthe
channelyouspecifyhere.Ifthissettingisthesameasthe
globalMIDIchannel,theinternaltonegeneratorwillsound
accordingtotheinternalsettings.IfthisissettoEXTorEX2,
playingtheKROMEwilltransmitMIDImessagesonthe
MIDIchannelspecifiedhere.(Messageswillalsobe
transmittedsimultaneouslyontheglobalMIDIchannel.)
Bank Select (When Status = EX2) MSB [000...127]
Bank Select (When Status = EX2) LSB [000...127]
Specifiesthebanknumberthatwillbetransmittedwhen
StatusissettoEX2.TheupperlineistheMSB,andthe
lowerlineistheLSB.ThissettinghasnoeffectifStatusis
otherthanEX2.
ThesearetheMIDIrelatedsettingsfortimbres28and9
16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):above.
31(2): Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
33: OSC T0108,
34: OSC T0916
Thesesettingsspecifyhowtimbres18and916willbe
played.
33(4)b: Timbre Info
31a
31c
31b
31
Menu
MIDI IN/
USB B
INT
MIDI OUT/
USB B
EXT, EX2
Tone
generator
33a
33b
33c
33
Menu
Combination mode
82
33(4)c: OSC
Force OSC Mode [PRG, Poly, MN, LGT]
ThisletsyouoverridetheProgramsstoredVoiceAssign
Modesettings,ifdesired.
PRG:TheProgramsstoredProgP1:Basic/Controllers
ProgramBasicVoiceAssignModesettingswillbeused.
Poly:Thetimbrewillplaypolyphonically,regardlessofthe
Programssettings.
MN(Mono):Thetimbrewillplaymonophonically,
regardlessoftheProgramssettings.
LGT(Legato):Thetimbrewillsoundmonophonically,and
willplaylegatoaccordingtotheProgramsModesetting
(Prog11b).
WiththeMNorLGTsettings,theProgramsPrioritysetting
(Prog11b)willdeterminethepriorityofthenotethat
soundswhenyouplaytwoormorenotes.
OSC Select [BTH, OS1, OS2]
SpecifieswhetherthetimbresprogramwillplayOSC1,
OSC2,orboth.
ForprogramswhoseOscillatorMode(Prog11a)isDouble
orDoubleDrums,thissettingletsyouspecifythatonly
OSC1orOSC2willsound.
BTH(Both):OSC1and2willsoundasspecifiedbythe
settingsoftheprogram.
OS1:OnlyOSC1willsound.
OS2:OnlyOSC2willsound.Programswillnotsoundif
OscillatorModeissettoSingleorDrums.
Portamento [PRG, Off, 001...127]
Makeportamentosettingsforeachtimbre.
PRG:Portamentowillbeappliedasspecifiedbythe
programsettings.
Off:Portamentowillbeoff,eveniftheoriginalprogram
settingsspecifiedPortamentotobeon.
001127:Portamentowillbeappliedwiththeportamento
timeyouspecifyhere,evenifitisturnedoffbytheprogram
settings.
IftheStatus(Combi31(2)c)issettoINT,CC#05
(portamentotime)andCC#65(portamentoswitch)
messageswillbereceivedandwillcontrolandchange
thesesettings.(IfthesettingisPRG,CC#05,portamento
timewillnotbereceived.)Thesemessageswillbe
receivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbre
byMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c).
Hereyoucanmakevoiceassignmentsettingsfortimbres2
8and916.Thesettingsarethesameasfortimbre1.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeTimbre01(Timbre
Number):above.
Commandonpage 101.
35: Pitch T0108,
36: Pitch T0916
Here,youcanmakepitchrelatedsettingsfortimbres18
and916.
35(6)b: Timbre Info
35(6)c: Pitch
Transpose [60+00+60]
Adjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinsemitonesteps.
12unitsequaloneoctave.
WhenStatus(Combi31(2)c)isINT,thisparameter
willaffectthepitchessoundedbytheKROME.When
StatusisEXT,thisparameterwillaffectthenote
numbersoftheMIDInotemessagesthatare
transmitted.
Forexampleifyoumakesettingsof+04and+07
respectivelyfortwotimbresthataresettoEXT,playing
theCkeywilltransmitaCnotenumberontheglobal
MIDIchannel,andatthesametimewillalsotransmitE
andGnotenumbersontheMIDIchannelsofthose
timbres.
Detune (Use BPM Adjust in Menu)
[1200...+0000...+1200]
Adjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinonecentunits.
+0000:Normalpitch.
Note:YoucanalsousetheDetuneBPMAdjustmenu
commandtoalteraloopstempoviadetuning.Sincethis
willalterthepitchoftheloopalongwiththetempo,its
generallysuitedonlytounpitchedpercussiveloops.
TransposeandDetunecanbecontrolledviaMIDIRPN
messages.Thewaythatthisworksdependsonwhether
ornottheTimbreusesaDrumProgram.
IftheTimbredoesnotuseaDrumProgramfor
example,ifitusesaSingleorDoubleProgramthen
MIDIRPNCoarseTunewillcontrolTranspose,and
RPNFineTunewillcontrolDetune.
IftheTimbreusesaDrumProgram,MIDIRPNCoarse
TuneandFineTunewillbecombinedtocontrol
Detune.Theoverallrangeis1octaveforcoarsetune
andfinetunetogether.
35a
35b
35c
35
Menu
COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) 37: Scale T0108, 38: Scale T0916
83
Bend Range [PRG, 24...+00...+24]
Specifiesthemaximumamountofpitchchange(in
semitones)thatwilloccurwhenthepitchbenderis
operated.
PRG:Thepitchrangespecifiedbytheprogramwillbeused.
24+24:Thissettingwillbeusedregardlessofthesetting
intheprogram.
TheMIDIRPNPitchBendChangemessagecanbe
receivedtocontrolthisandchangethesetting.
(Howeveritwillnotbereceivedifthisparameterisset
toPRG.)ThismessageisreceivedontheMIDIchannel
foreachtimbresetbyMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c).
Thesearethepitchrelatedsettingsfortimbres28and916.
Thesettingsarethesameasfortimbre1.Formore
above.
4:DetuneBPMAdjustseep.103
Commandonpage 101.
37: Scale T0108,
38: Scale T0916
Here,youcanmakesettingsforthescaleoftimbres18and
916.
37(8)b: Timbre Info
37(8)c: Scale
Use Programs Scale [Off, On]
TimbrecanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale(Prog1
2b).
On(checked):Thescalespecifiedbytheprogramwillbe
used.
Off(unchecked):ThescalespecifiedbyType(Combis
Scale)(Combi37(8)c)willbeused.
Here,youcanmakesettingsforthescaleofeachtimbre28
and916.Thesettingsarethesameasfortimbre1.Formore
above.
Scale:
Thisspecifiesthescalethatthecombinationwilluse.For
moreinformation,pleasesee12d:Scaleonpage 15.
Type (Combis Scale)
[Equal Temperament...User Octave Scale15]
Selectsthescale.
Key [CB]
Selectsthetonickeyoftheselectedscale.
Random [07]
Asthisvalueisincreased,anincreasinglyrandomdeviation
willbeaddedtothepitchateachnoteon.
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)isINT,thissettingwillaffect
thepitchproducedbytheKROME.IfStatusisEXT,this
settingwillaffectthenotenumberofthenotemessages
transmittedviaMIDI.
Commandonpage 101.
37a
37b
37c
37
Menu
Combination mode
84
COMBI P4: Zone/Delay
41: Key Zone T0108,
42: Key Zone T0916
(Keyboard Zones T0108, T0916)
Thesesettingsspecifythekeyboardrangeinwhichtimbres
18and916willsound.
Thetop/bottomkeyparametersspecifytherangeofnotesin
whichtimbres18and916willsound,andthetop/bottom
slopeparametersspecifytherangeoverwhichtheoriginal
volumewillbereached.
KeySplit:Bysettingtimbresofdifferentsoundstoranges
thatdonotoverlap,youcanplaydifferentsoundsin
differentrangesofthekeyboard.
Layer:Bysettingtherangestooverlap,youcanplaytwoor
moresoundswithasinglenote.
PositionalCrossfade:Ifyousettheslopes(thegrayed
portion)tooverlap,thesoundswilloverlap,andthe
proportionoftheoverlapwillchangeaccordingtothe
keyboardlocation.
41(2)a:Zone Map
Thisareaindicatesthenoteandvelocityrangesinwhich
eachtimbrewillsound.
Thedisplayuseslinestoindicatetherangeofnotesand
velocitiesthatwillsound,andshowtheslopeportion.
41(2)b: Combination Name, Tempo
41(2)c: Timbre Info
41(2)d:Keyboard Zones
Top Key [C1...G9]
Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundeachtimbre.
Top Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)overwhichthe
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthetopkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthetopkey.
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplay
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctave
belowthetopkey.
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctaves
belowthetopkey.
Bottom Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthebottomkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthebottom
key.
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplayupward,
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctaveabovethe
bottomkey.
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctavesabovethe
bottomkey.
Bottom Key [C1...G9]
Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundeachtimbre.
41a
41c
41b
41d
41
Menu
Timbre 1
1 16
Timbre
Velocity zone display
Timbre 16
C1
G9
E1
Key zone display
Bottom Key
Bottom Slope Top Slope
Top
Velocity
Bottom
Velocity
Top
Slope
Bottom
Slope
Top Key
Zone Map
Bottom Key Top Key
Key
Volume
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
How volume will change according to keyboard location
COMBI P4: Zone/Delay 43: Vel Zone T0108, 44: Vel Zone T0916 (Velocity Zones T0108, T0916)
85
akey(seeOGp.10).
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomkeyabovethetopkey
ofthesametimbre.Norisitpossibleforthetopand
bottomslopestooverlap.
Thesearethekeyzonesettingsfortimbres28and916.
Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,
Commandonpage 101.
43: Vel Zone T0108,
44: Vel Zone T0916
(Velocity Zones T0108, T0916)
SetstheTop/BottomVelocityparameterstospecifythe
rangeofvelocitiesthatwillsoundforeachtimbre18and9
16,andsettheTop/BottomSlopeparameterstospecifythe
rangeoverwhichthevolumewillchange.
Velocityswitch:Ifyousetdifferentvelocityzonesfor
multipletimbressothattheydonotsoundtogether,youcan
playseparatesoundsbyvaryingplayingdynamics.
Layer:Ifyousettwoormoretimbrestovelocityzonesthat
overlap,thesoundswillbeheardtogether.
VelocityCrossfade:Ifthesloperanges(grayline)overlap,
differentsoundswillbesoundedtogether,andyourplaying
dynamicswilldeterminetheproportionofeachsound.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomvelocitygreaterthan
thetopvelocityforthesametimbre,norcanthetop
slopeandthebottomslopeoverlap.
43(4)a: Zone Map
eachtimbrewillsound.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee41(2)a:ZoneMapon
page 84.
43(4)b: Combination Name, Tempo
43(4)c: Timbre Info
43(4)d: Velocity Zones
Top Velocity [001127]
Specifiesthemaximumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
timbre.
Top Slope [000120]
Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichthe
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheTop
Velocity.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthetop
velocity.
120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocityapproachesthe
topvelocity.
Bottom Slope [000120]
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheBottom
Velocity.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthebottom
velocity.
bottomvelocity.
Specifiestheminimumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
timbre.
akey(seeOGp.10).
Thesearethevelocityzonesettingsfortimbres28and9
16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,
Commandonpage 101.
43
Menu
43a
43c
43b
43d
Bottom Velocity Top Velocity
Velocity
Volume
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Combination mode
86
45: Delay T0108,
46: Delay T0916
Thisspecifiesthetime(delay)fromwhenthetimbres18
and916receiveanoteonuntilthesoundbegins.
45(6)b: Timbre Info
45(6)c: Delay
Delay Time [ms] [00005000ms, KeyOff]
Specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetimbre
beginstoproducesound,inunitsofms(1/1000thofa
second).ThissettingisavailableifMIDI/TempoSync.isset
toOff.
KeyOff:Thenotewillbeginsoundingatnoteoff.Inthis
case,thesoundwillnotdieawayifthesustainlevelofthe
programsampEGisotherthan0.Thissettingisusedwhen
creatingharpsichordsounds.
Normallyyouwillsetthisto0000.
Thetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetimbre
producessoundwillbespecifiedinnotelengthunits
relativetothe, (Tempo).
On(checked):SpecifythedelaytimeintermsofaBase
NoteandTimesrelativetotheTempo.ForexampleifBase
Note=,,Times=01,andTempo=60BPM,thedelaytime
willbeequivalentto1000ms.
Off(unchecked):ThedelaytimewillbesetbytheDelay
Timesetting.
Base Note [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Times [01...32]
Itspecifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthe
timbrebeginstoproducesound,intermsofanotevalue
relativetothe, (Tempo)(Combi01(2)a).
UseBaseNotetospecifythedesirednotevalue,anduse
Timestoextendthatnotevaluebythespecifiedmultiple.
ForexampleifyousetBaseNotetoaquarternote( , )and
Timesto02,thattimbrewillsoundwithadelayofahalf
note( ).Evenifyouchange, (Tempo)(Combi01(2)a),the
delaytimewillalwaysbeahalfnote( ).Ifyouusethese
parameterstospecifyadelayofahalfnote( ).Inthiscase,a
Tempoof60.00BPMwillproducea2000msdelay,anda
Tempoof120.00BPMwillproducea1000msdelay.
Thesearethedelaytimesettingsfortimbres28and916.
Commandonpage 101.
45a
45b
45c
45
Menu
COMBI P5: MIDI Filter 51: <1> T0108, 52: <1> T0916
87
COMBI P5: MIDI Filter
ThesesettingsallowyoutoapplyfilterstotheMIDIdata
thatwillbetransmittedandreceivedbyeachtimbre116.
Forexampleeveniftwotimbresarebeingplayedbythe
sameMIDIchannel,youcanmakesettingssothatthe
damperpedalwillapplytoonebutnottheother.
On(checked):Transmissionandreceptionorreception
(AfterTouch)ofMIDIdataisenabled.
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)isINT,theeffectsofthechecked
itemswillbeappliedtothetimbresprogramwhenthe
controllersoftheKROMEareoperatedorwhenMIDIdata
isreceived.(EffectDynamicModulationisnotaffectedby
thesesettings.)
InthecaseofEXTorEX2,operatingacontrolleronthe
KROMEwilltransmitMIDIdataonthechannelofthat
timbre.MIDItransmission/receptionsettingsfortheentire
KROMEcanbemadeinMIDIFilter(Global12b).
TheMIDIFilter<4>and<5>containMIDIfiltersfor
assignablecontrollers(whosefunctioncanbesetbythe
user),andiftheseareassignedtoMIDIcontrolchanges,the
filtersettingswillaffectthosecontrolchanges.Inthiscase,if
thesamecontrolchangehasbeenassignedinMIDIFilter
pages<1><3>,thesettingsinMIDIFilterpages<1>through
<3>willtakepriority.Also,ifthesamecontrolchangeis
assignedtotwoormorecontrollersintheMIDIFilterpages
<4>and<5>,checkinganyoneofthemwillenablethat
controlchange.
Off(unchecked):TransmissionandreceptionofMIDIdata
isdisabled.
Note:MIDICC#=MIDIcontrolchangemessagenumbers.
51: <1> T0108,
52: <1> T0916
51(2)b: Timbre Info
51(2)c: MIDI Filter1
Enable Program Change [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIprogramchangemessages
willbetransmittedandreceived.
Enable After Touch [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIaftertouchmessageswillbe
received.
Enable Damper [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#64hold(damperpedal)
messageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
Enable Portamento SW [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#65portamentoon/off
messageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
ThesearetheMIDIFilter1settingsfortimbres28and916.
Commandonpage 101.
51a
51
Menu
51b
51c
Combination mode
88
53: <2> T0108,
54: <2> T0916
53(4)b: Timbre Info
Enable JS X as AMS [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIpitchbendmessages(theX
axisofthejoystick)willbereceivedtocontroltheAMS
effectassignedtoJSX.(ThisisnotafilterforMIDIpitch
bendmessagereception.)Formoreinformation,pleasesee
AlternateModulationSources(AMS)onpage 339.
Enable JS+Y [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthejoystick,or
aRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbetransmitted
andreceived.
Enable JSY [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthejoystick,or
aRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbetransmitted
andreceived.
Enable Ribbon CC#16 [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#16(specifiedasthe
assignmentofaRealtimeControlsknob)willbetransmitted
orreceived.
Commandonpage 101.
55: <3> T0108,
56: <3> T0916
Here,youcanspecifywhethertheeffectofknobs14(when
theSELECTbuttonselectionisRealtimeControlsTONE)
willbetransmittedandreceived.TheMIDIcontrol
messagesassignedtoknobs14whenRealtimeControls
TONEisselectedarefixed.
55(6)b: Timbre Info
Enable Realtime ControlsCUTOFF [Off, On]
EnablesordisablestransmissionandreceptionofMIDI
CC#74(theKROMEsfiltercutofffrequency).Thisis
assignedtoknob1whenRealtimeControlsTONEis
selected.
Enable Realtime ControlsRESONANCE [Off, On]
CC#71(theKROMEsfilterresonancelevel).Thisisassigned
toknob2whenRealtimeControlsTONEisselected.
Enable Realtime ControlsEG INTENSITY [Off, On]
CC#79(theKROMEsfilterEGintensity).Thisisassignedto
knob3whenRealtimeControlsTONEisselected.
Enable Realtime ControlsRELEASE [Off, On]
CC#72(theKROMEsfilter/ampEGreleasetime).Thisis
assignedtoknob4whenRealtimeControlsTONEis
selected.
Commandonpage 101.
53a
53
Menu
53b
53c
55
Menu
55a
55b
55c
COMBI P5: MIDI Filter 57: <4> T0108, 58: <4> T0916
89
57: <4> T0108,
58: <4> T0916
Here,youcanenableordisabletransmissionandreception
forthefunctionsofknobs14whentheSELECTbuttonis
settoRealtimeControlsUSER.UsetheP1:Controllers
ControllersSetuppagetoassignthefunctionsthatknobs1
4willperformwhenRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
57(8)b: Timbre Info
Enable Realtime Controls USER 1 [Off, On]
Thesesettingsenableordisabletransmissionandreception
oftheMIDImessagesassignedtoknobs14whenRealtime
ControlsUSERisselected.
Commandonpage 101.
59: <5> T0108,
510: <5> T0916
59(10)b: Timbre Info
Enable SW1 [Off, On]
ThesesettingsspecifywhetherSW1Mod(CC#80)andSW2
Mod(CC#81)willbetransmittedandreceivediftheyare
assignedtotheSW1andSW2buttons.
Note:IfPortamentoSW(CC#65)isassignedtoSW1orSW2,
theEnablePortamentoSWsettingontheMIDI<1>pagewill
takepriority.
Note:ThefunctionsofSW1andSW2areassignedontheP1:
ControllersSetuppage(seep.78).
Enable Foot Switch [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheASSIGNABLE
SWITCHwillbetransmittedandreceived.Thefunctionis
assignedinGlobalP2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchangeis
assigned.
Enable Foot Pedal [Off, On]
PEDALwillbetransmittedandreceived.Thefunctionis
assignedinGlobalP2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
assigned.
59(10): Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
57a
57
Menu
57b
57c
59a
59
Menu
59b
59c
Combination mode
90
511: <6> T0108,
512: <6> T0916
511(12)b: Timbre Info
Enable Other Control Change Messages [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIcontrolmessagesnotcovered
intheprecedingitemsMIDIFilterwillbetransmittedand
received.
Enable Waveform SysEx [Off, On]
ThisenablesordisablesreceptionofMIDIsystemexclusive
messagesthatfreelyswitchthemultisampleusedbyan
oscillatorwhiletheprogramissounding.
Commandonpage 101.
511a
511
Menu
511b
511a
COMBI P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 71: Setup T0108, 72: Setup T0916
91
COMBI P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track)
Theseparametersspecifyhowthearpeggiatorwillfunction
withinthecombination.Twoarpeggiatorscanrun
simultaneously.
Thisoffersavarietyofpossibilities,suchasapplying
separatearpeggiopatternstotwosoundsthathavebeen
assignedasakeyboardsplit,orusingvelocitytoswitch
betweentwoarpeggiopatterns.
71: Setup T0108,
72: Setup T0916
Combination Name
Name,Tempoonpage 79.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
71(2)b: Timbre Info
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSelectedTimbreInfoon
page 71.
71(2)c: Arpeggiator Assign,
Arpeggiator Run
Arpeggiator Assign [Off, A, B]
AssignsarpeggiatorAorBtoeachtimbre18and916.
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiatorspecifiedfor
eachtimbrewilloperateaccordingtoArpeggiatorRunA,B
andthesesettings.
Off:Thearpeggiatorwillnotoperate.
A:ArpeggiatorAwilloperate.Usethesettingsinthe
ArpeggiatorApagetoselectthearpeggiopatternandtoset
parameters.
B:ArpeggiatorBwilloperate.Usethesettingsinthe
ArpeggiatorBpagetoselectthearpeggiopatternandtoset
parameters.
IftheStatus(Combi31(2)c)ofthetimbreisINT,each
timbre116willbesoundedbythenotedatagenerated
bytheassignedarpeggiator,regardlessoftheMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c)settingofthetimbre.Ifa
timbreissettoEXTorEX2,MIDInotedatawillbe
transmittedontheMIDIChannelofthattimbre.
Inthiscase,arpeggiatorA(orB)willbetriggered
(operated)byallMIDIchannelsspecifiedfortheMIDI
Channelparameterofanytimbre116assignedto
arpeggiatorAorB.
IfLocalControl(LocalControlOn,GlobalP1:11a)is
OFF,thekeyboardwillnottriggerthearpeggiator.The
arpeggiatorwillbetriggeredviaMIDIIN.TurnLocal
ControlOFFifyouhaverecordedonlythetriggernotes
onanexternalsequencer,andwishtoplaybackthe
externalsequencertotriggertheKROMEsarpeggiator.
Ifyouwanttorecordthenotedatageneratedbythe
arpeggiatortoanexternalsequencer,turnLocal
ControlON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionon
yourexternalsequencer.
Youcancontrolthearpeggiatorfromanexternal
sequencer,oruseanexternalsequencertorecord
arpeggionotedata.(Seepage 367)
Example1)
SettheMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)oftimbres1and2
toGch,andsetStatus(Combi31(2)c)toINT.Assign
arpeggiatorAtotimbre1andarpeggiatorBtotimbre2,
andcheckArpeggiatorRunA,B(Combi05(6)a).
WhentheARPbuttonisoff,timbres1and2willsound
simultaneously(layered)whenyouplaythekeyboard.
WhentheARPbuttonisturnedon,timbre1willbe
playedbyarpeggiatorA,andtimbre2willbeplayedby
arpeggiatorB.
Example2)
TheMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)oftimbres1,2,3,4,
and5aresetrespectivelytoGch,Gch,02,Gch,and03.
TheirStatus(Combi31(2)c)issetrespectivelytoINT,
Off,INT,Off,andINT.AssignarpeggiatorAtotimbres
2and3,assignarpeggiatorBtotimbres4and5,and
checkArpeggiatorRunA,B(Combi05(6)a).
WhentheARPbuttonisoff,playingthekeyboardwill
soundonlytimbre1.(Timbres2and4arereceivingthe
Gch,buttheywillnotsoundsincetheirStatusisOff.)
WhenyouturnontheARPbutton,arpeggiatorAwill
playtimbres2and3,andarpeggiatorBwill
independentlyplaytimbres4and5.(ArpeggiatorsAand
BaretriggeredbynotedatareceivedfromanyMIDI
channelofanassignedtimbre.However,inthisexample,
theyarebeingtriggeredfromtheGch.)
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,arpeggiatorAwillplay
timbres2and3,butonlytimbre3,whoseStatusisINT
willsoundfromthekeyboard.Similarly,arpeggiatorB
willplaytimbres4and5,butonlytimbre5,whoseSta
tusisINTwillsoundfromthekeyboard.
Inthisway,youcanmakesettingssothatatimbreis
silentwhenthearpeggiatorisoff,andsoundsonlywhen
thearpeggiatorison.
Thistypeofsettingisusedinpreloadedcombinations
whichsoundthedrumsonlywhenthearpeggiatorison.
71a
71
Menu
71b
71c
Timbre 1 MIDI Ch=Gch Status=INT
Timbre 2 MIDI Ch=Gch Status=INT
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
Arpeggiator
Assign
A
B
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Trigger
= Gch
Trigger
= Gch
Pattern - B
Pattern - A
Timbre 2 MIDI Ch=Gch Status=Of
Timbre 3 MIDI Ch=2ch Status=INT
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
Arpeggiator
Assign
A
A
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Trigger
= Gch, Ch2
Trigger
= Gch, Ch3
Timbre 4 MIDI Ch=Gch Status=Of B
Timbre 5 MIDI Ch=3ch Status=INT B
Of Timbre 1 MIDI Ch=Gch Status=INT
Sounded by normal
keyboard playing
Does not sound
Does not sound
Combination mode
92
Arpeggiator Run A, B [Off, On]
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)checkedhere
willruniftheyareassignedtoatimbrebyArpeggiator
Assign.
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
Commandonpage 101.
73: Arpeggiator A,
74: Arpeggiator B
73(4)b: Arpeggiator-A(B) Setup
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Octave* [1, 2, 3, 4]
Resolution* [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Gate [000...100%, Step]
Swing [100...+100%]
Sort* [Off, On]
Latch* [Off, On]
Keyboard* [Off, On]
Theseparametersarethearpeggiatorsettingsforthe
combination.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP7:ARP/DT
* Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom05(6)d:
ArpeggiatorA(B).
Commandonpage 101.
73a
73
Menu
73b
COMBI P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 75: ARP Scan Zone
93
75: ARP Scan Zone
Thesesettingsspecifythenoteandvelocityrangesthatwill
triggerarpeggiatorsAandB.
75a: Combination Name, Tempo
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombinationSelecton
page 70.
75b: Zone Map
ThisshowstheScanZoneforeacharpeggiator,AandB.
75c: Scan Zone A/B
A: , B:
Top Key [C1...G9]
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)thatwilltrigger
arpeggiatorA/B.TopKeyspecifiestheupperlimit,and
BottomKeyspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Top Velocity [001...127]
Bottom Velocity [001...127]
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwilltriggerarpeggiator
A/B.TopVelocityspecifiestheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)andvelocitiesthatwill
triggerarpeggiatorA/B.
akey(seeOGp.10).
V 75: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
77: Drum Track
Here,youcanselectadrumtrackpatternandspecifyhowit
willsound.
Note:InCombinationmode(unlikeProgrammode)thereis
nodedicatedtimbreforthedrumtrack.Youcanassignthe
drumtrackprogramtobeanytimbre116.Thedrumtrack
programwillbeplayedwhenthedrumtracksMIDI
channelOutputmatchesthetimbresMIDIChannel.
InCombinationmode,thedrumtrackpatternsaretriggered
ontheGlobalMIDIchannel.
MIDI transmission and reception for the drum
track
InCombinationmode,theDrumTrackfunctiontransmits
andreceivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:Ifyourecontrollingthetriggeringbyplayingthe
keyboard,thedrumtrackwillreceiveontheglobalMIDI
channel.
Transmit:ThedrumtrackwilltransmitontheMIDIchannel
specifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsettingofeach
combination.
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthetimbreyouve
specifiedforthedrumprogram.
IfthetimbresStatusisEXTorEX2,thenotedataetc.ofthe
DrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.
Iflocalcontrol(LocalControlOnGlobalP1:11a)ison,
playingtheKROMEskeyboardwillnotmaketheinternal
soundgeneratorproducesound,norcanthekeyboard
triggerthearpeggiatorordrumtrack.However,theycanbe
triggeredbynoteonmessagesfromMIDIIN.
77a: Drum Pattern
[(Preset): P000...P605, (User): U000...U999]
U000U999canbewritten.Patternsyoucreatein
Sequencermodecanbeconvertedintouserdrum
patterns(seepage 188).
Shift [24...+00...+24]
meansthattheinstrumentsofthedrumkitwillchange.
75a
75
Menu
75b
75c
C1 G9
Key zone of arpeggiator A
Velocity zone of
arpeggiator A
Velocity zone of
arpeggiator B
Key zone of arpeggiator B
P000 Off
P000...P605 Presetdrumpatterns
77a
77
Menu
77b
Combination mode
94
MIDI Channel
Output [01...16, Gch]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwilltransmittheMIDI
dataofthedrumpattern.Thedrumpatternwilltriggerthe
programofthetimbrethatissettothissameMIDIchannel.
Gch:Thedatawillbesenttothechannelspecifiedbythe
globalMIDIchannelMIDIChannelsetting(Global11a).
Whetherthepatterndatawillbeoutputtoanexternal
devicewilldependontheStatussettingofthetimbrethat
matchestheOutputMIDIchannel.
77b: Trigger
buttontoturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillstart
accordingtotheSyncsetting.Whenyouturnitoff(LED
dark),thedrumpatternwillstop.
toturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillwaittostart.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,orwhenaMIDInoteonis
received,thedrumpatternwillstartaccordingtotheSync
setting.
Sync [Off, On]
runningarpeggiator.
Note:UseP73(4)c:ArpeggiatorA(B)SetupKeySyncto
specifywhetherthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyrunningdrumpattern.
Latch [Off, On]
Thisspecifieswhetherthedrumtrackwillcontinueplaying
evenafteryoutakeyourhandoffthekeyboard.
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig.
Off:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboard(noteon).The
patternwillstopwhenyoureleasethekeyboard(noteoff).
On:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillcontinuewhenyoureleasethekeyboard(note
off).ThepatternwillstopwhenyouturntheDRUM
TRACKbuttonoff(LEDdark).
Zone:
Keyboard
Bottom [C1...G9]
Top [C1...G9]
Velocity:
Bottom [001...127]
Top [001...127]
pattern.
V 77: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
COMBI P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 81: Routing1 T0108, 82: Routing1 T0916
95
COMBI P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect)
Youcanalsospecifythebusroutingfortheprogramused
byeachofthetimbres,116.Forinstance,youcan:
Sendtheoutputofatimbretoaninserteffect
FormoredetailsontheInsertEffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Guideonpage 235.
81: Routing1 T0108,
82: Routing1 T0916
Specifiesthebustowhichtheprogramoscillator(s)usedby
timbres18and916willbesent.Youcanalsosetthesend
levelstothemastereffectsfromthispage.
81(2)a: Routing Map
Thisshowsthestatusoftheinserteffects.
Thisareashowstheinserteffectrouting(Bus(IFX/Output)
Select),thenameoftheassignedeffect,theon/offstatus,
chaining,andtheoutputbusthatfollowstheinserteffect.
Thetypeofinserteffect,theon/offstatus,andthechain
settingscanbeeditedinthe83:InsertFXSetuppage.
81(2)b: Combination Name
81(2)c: Timbre Info
81(2)d: Routing
Bus (IFX/Output) Select [DKit, L/R, IFX1...5, Off]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetimbresprogram
oscillator.
IFX15:OutputtotheIFX15buses.
Off:ThetimbrewillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,or
IFX15buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwantthe
programoscillatoroutputofthetimbretobeconnectedin
seriestoamastereffect.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
MFX2)tospecifythesendlevels.
Tip:Youcancreateawidevarietyofroutingsbyusingeach
timbresBus(IFX/Output)SelectandtheChaintoand
Chainsettings(Combi83b)thatfollowtheinserteffect.
Example: Inserting a single IFX into multiple timbre
Example: Inserting a separate IFX into each timbre, and then in-
serting an IFX at the final stage
Example: Sharing a portion of a timbres IFX chain with another
timbre
DKit:Thiscanbeselectedonlyifthetimbresprogramisa
drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrumsorDoubleDrums).
TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1,and
Send2(Global55b)settingsforeachkeyoftheselected
Dkitwillbeused.Checkthissettingifyouwanttoapplyan
individualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
type,asfollows.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Ifyouwanttoedittheseroutings,usetheDrumkitIFX
Patchmenucommand.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 104.
81a
81
Menu
81d
81b
81c
Combination mode
96
Send1 (MFX1) [000...127]
Send2 (MFX2) [000...127]
Foreachtimbre,theseparameterssetthesendlevelto
mastereffects1and2.ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBus
(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff.WhenIFX15are
selected,thesendlevelstomastereffects1and2aresetby
theSend1andSend2parametersoftheInsertFXSetup
page,afterthesoundhaspassedthroughIFX15.
ControlchangeCC#93canbeusedtocontroltheSend1
level,andCC#91tocontroltheSend2,andmodifytheir
respectivesettings.Thesemessageswillbereceivedon
theMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbreintheP2:
MIDIchannelpage.
Theactualsendlevelsaredeterminedbymultiplying
thisvaluewiththesendlevelSend1andSend2(Prog
81d)foreachoscillatoroftheprogramselectedforthe
timbre.
5:DrumKitIFXPatchseep.104
Commandonpage 101.
83: Insert FX Setup
83a: Combination Name
83b: Insert Effect
Here,youcanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1through
settings.Forinserteffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalways
stereoinandout.Theinput/outputconfigurationofthe
effectsound(Wet)dependsontheeffecttype.
Fordetailedexplanationsoftheindividualeffects,please
seetheEffectGuideonpage 235.
ThefollowingparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee82:InsertFXSetupon
page 59.
However,unlikeinProgrammode,youcanuseadifferent
MIDIchanneltomodulateeacheffect,ifdesired.This
includesthepostIFXPan:#8,Send1,andSend2settings,as
wellastheeffectsdynamicmodulation(Dmod).Tosetthe
MIDIchannel,usetheChparameterontheIFX15page
(Combi84a).
Insert Effect:
IFX1...4 [000...193]
IFX5 [000...171]
Chain:
Pan:#8:
Bus:
Bus (Bus Select) [Off, L/R]
Ctrl (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2]
Send1/2:
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
page 59.
V 83: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
83a
83
Menu
83b
COMBI P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 84: IFX1
97
84: IFX1
Thispageletsyoueditthedetailedparametersofthefive
inserteffects.UsethetabsatlefttoselectIFX1throughIFX5.
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheInsertFXSetup
page.Formoreinformation,pleasesee83:InsertFX
Setuponpage 96.
IFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
Turnstheinserteffecton/off.Thisislinkedwiththeon/off
settingintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
Ch (Control Channel) [Ch01...16, G ch, All-R]
ThisparameterspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillbeused
tocontroleffectdynamicmodulation(Dmod),pan
followingtheinserteffect(CC#8),Send1,andSend2.
ThechannelnumberofthetimbreroutedthroughthisIFX
willbefollowedbya*displayedattherightofCh0116.
IftwoortimbreswithdifferentMIDIchannelsettingsare
routedthroughthesameIFX,thisparameterspecifieswhich
ofthesechannelswillbeusedtocontroltheeffect.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a)willbeused
tocontroltheeffect.NormallyyouwillsetthistoGch.
AllR(AllRouted):Thechannelofanytimbrerouted
throughthiseffectcanbeusedtocontroltheeffect.
(Channelsofeachroutedtimbrewillbeindicatedby*.)
Drum Kits and the MIDI Control Channel
IfaTimbreisusingaDrumKit,andtheTimbresBus(IFX/
Output)Select(Combi81(2)d)isDKit,thiseffectsthe
MIDIControlChannelaswell.Inthiscase,theTimbres
MIDIchannelwillbeusedtocontrolanyeffectwhoseChis
settoAllR,regardlessoftheBus(IFX/Output)Select
(Global55b)settingsorthesettingsoftheDrumkitIFX
Patchmenucommand.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
presets.
Combination,Sequencer).
storedwiththeCombiyoudontneedtostorethemasan
favoritesettings.
aparticularCombination,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
settings.
writtenacombination,orselectedanewCombination.
Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Combissavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
selectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheCombination,the
EffectPresetsettingwillrevertto.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
IFX1 Parameters:
IFX1 Parameters
Here,youcansettheeffectparametersoftheinserteffect
youchoseintheInsertFXSetuppage.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1IFX5)on
page 240.
V 84: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
85: IFX2, 86: IFX3, 87: IFX4,
88: IFX5
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersforinserteffects25
Formoreinformation,pleasesee84:IFX1above.
81
4a
81
4
Menu
Combination mode
98
89: FX Control T0108,
810: FX Control T0916
Hereyoucanspecifytheprogramoscillatoroutputbus,and
effectcontrolbusfortimbres18and916.
89(10)a: Routing Map,
89(10)b: Combination Name,
89(10)c: Timbre Info
Formoreinformation,pleasesee81:Routing1T0108,8
2:Routing1T0916onpage 95.
89(10)d: Routing2
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetimbresprogram
oscillator.Thisisthesameparameterasinthe81:IFX
Routing1T0108andT0916pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBus(IFX/Output)Select
onpage 95.
SendstheoutputofthetimbretoanFXControlbus(two
channelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbuseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
Controlbuses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
page 238.
Commandonpage 101.
89a
89
Menu
89d
89b
89c
COMBI P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO) 91: Routing
99
COMBI P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO)
Here,youcanmakesettingsforthemastereffectsandthe
totaleffect.Forinstance,youcan:
Routeasoundtothemastereffectsandthetotaleffect
Makedetailedsettingsformastereffectsandtotaleffect
page 235.
91: Routing
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffects1,2and
totaleffect,andturnthemon/off.
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotaleffect
isinsertedintotheL/Rbus.
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.For
moreinformation,pleasesee91:Routingonpage 61.
91a: Combination Name
Combination.Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:
CombinationSelectonpage 70.
91b: MFX1, 2
MFX1:
MFX1 [000...193]
Return 1 [000...127]
MFX2:
MFX2 [000...171]
Return 2 [000...127]
Chain:
Chain Direction [MFX1MFX2, MFX2MFX1]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1onpage 62.
91c: TFX
TFX:
TFX [000...171]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP9:MFX/TFX/LFO
(Master/TotalEffect/LFO)onpage 61.
91d: Master Volume
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91c:MasterVolumeon
page 62.
V 91: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
92: MFX1
Here,youcanedittheparametersoftheeffectyouselected
forMFX1intheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
92a: MFX1
Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Thisislinkedwiththeon/
offsettingintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Ch (Control Channel) [Ch01...16, G ch]
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
modulation(Dmod)forthemastereffect.
Ch01Ch16:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeusedfor
control.
forcontrol.NormallyyouwillusetheGchsetting.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
WithEffectPresets,youcaneasilystoreandrecallallofthe
settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16user
presetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15rewritable
factorypresets.
91a
91b
91c
91
Menu
91d
92a
92
Menu
Combination mode
100
Combination,Sequence).
storedwiththeCombinationyoudontneedtostorethemas
anEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheP9:MFX/TFX/
LFORoutingpage.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
settings.
writtenaCombination,orselectedanewCombination.
Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Combinationssavetheeffectsparametersettings,but
theydontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffectPreset.If
youselectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheCombination,
theEffectPresetsettingwillrevertto.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
MFX1 Parameters
youchoseintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Fordetailsonthemastereffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Guideonpage 235.
V 92: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
93: MFX2, 94: TFX
andtheTotalEffect.Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usethe
P9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
TheparametersforMFX2,TFXisthesameasforMFX1.For
moreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1above.
95: Common FX LFO
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronizeLFO
basedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchasphasers,
LFOs.
95a: Common FX LFO1
Ctrl Ch (Control Channel) [Ch01...Ch16, G ch]
modulation(Dmod)forCommonLFO1and2.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a)willbeused
forcontrol.Thisisthedefault.
Frequency [0.02...20.00 (Hz)]
BPM [MIDI, 40.00...300.00]
Base Note [, , , _ , , , , _ , , , , _ , , , _ , , ]
Times [01...32]
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.For
moreinformation,pleasesee95:CommonFXLFOon
page 100.
95b: Common FX LFO2
TheseparametersarethesameasforCommonFXLFO1.
V 95: Menu Command
Commandonpage 101.
95a
95
Menu
95b
Combination: Menu Command Write Combination
101
Combination: Menu Command
ENTER + 09: shortcuts for menu com-
mands
Eachpagehasasetofmenucommands,whichprovide
accesstodifferentutilities,commands,andoptions,
dependingonthepageyourecurrentlyon.Youcanusethe
menucommandsentirelyfromthetouchscreen,by
pressingthemenubuttonintheupperrighthandcornerof
thescreenandthenselectinganoptionfromthemenuthat
appears.
Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownuniquemenu
commands,themenusarestandardizedasmuchas
possible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthefirst
menuiteminProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes.
Youcantakeadvantageofthisstandardizationbyusinga
shortcuttoaccessanyofthefirsttenmenuitems:
1. HolddowntheENTERbutton.
2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadtoselect
thedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0.
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1forthe
second,andsoon.
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthecommand
callsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappearonthedisplay,
andyoucanproceedjustasifyoudselectedthecommand
fromthetouchscreen.
astheCancelbutton.
Write Combination
ThiscommandwritesaneditedCombinationintothe
KROMEinternalmemory.Itisavailableoneverypagein
Combinationmode.
Thisletsyou:
Saveyouredits
RenametheCombination
AssigntheCombinationtoaCategory
MarktheCombinationasaFavorite
CopytheCombinationtoadifferentBankandnumber
BesuretoWriteanyCombinationthatyouwishtokeep.If
youturnoffthepower,orselectanotherCombination
beforewritinganeditedCombination,itcannotbe
recovered.
IfyouuseCategory,orSubCategorytospecifyacategory
forthecombinationyouarewriting,youwillbeableto
selectthatcombinationbyitscategoryorsubcategoryin
CombiP0:Play.
ThenamesofthecombinationcategoriescanbeeditedinP4:
CategoryCombinationMainandCombinationSubpage.
Exclusive Solo
ThiscommandisavailableoneverypageinCombination
mode.WhenExclusiveSoloisOn,onlyoneTimbreis
soloedatatime;whenitisOff,multipleTimbrescanbe
soloedtogether.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeExclusiveSoloon
page 64.
Auto Setup Song
Thiscommandautomaticallycopiesthesettingsofthe
programorcombinationtoasong,andenablestherecord
standbystatus(SeeTip:AutoSongSetuponpage 70.).
Copy from Program
ThiscommandisavailableoneverypageinCombination
mode.ItcopiesEffectssettingsfromaselectedProgramto
thecurrentCombination.ThisletstheProgramsoundthe
sameasitdidinProgrammode.
1. UseProgramtoselectthecopysourceprogram.
2. SelecttheIFXsused,MFXs,andTFXoptionstospecify
which,ifany,oftheProgramseffectssettingstocopy.
IFXs:Thesettingsofallinserteffectsettings(thecontentsof
theInsertFXsetuppageandtheIFX15effectparameters)
ofthecopysourceprogramwillbecopied.
MFXs:Allmastereffectsettingsofthecopysourceprogram
willbecopied.
TFX:Alltotaleffectsettingsofthecopysourceprogramwill
becopied.
Combination mode
102
AbouttheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Combi81(2)d,83b)
setting
RegardlessoftheIFXsused,MFXs,andTFXsettings,will
besettoDKitifthecopysourceprogramsUseDKit
Settingischecked.Inconjunctionwiththis,theDrumKit
IFXPatchsettingwillberesettothedefaultsetting.
IfIFXsischecked,theBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingof
thecopysourceprogramwillbecopied.Ifthecopy
destinationtimbreBus(IFX/Output)Selectwassetto
IFX1IFX5,itwillautomaticallybesettoL/R.Ifyoucheck
IFXAllused,theroutingwillbeautomaticallysetto
matchthecopysourceprogram.
IfIFXsusedisunchecked,thenthecopysourceBus(IFX/
Output)Selectsettingwillbeignored.oriftheBus(IFX/
Output)Selectofthecopysourceprogramandcopy
destinationtimbreissettoIFX1IFX5,itwill
automaticallybesettoL/R.
3. IfyoucheckArp,theProgramsarpeggiatorsettings
willalsobecopied.
IfthisisOn(checked),thearpeggiatorsettingsofthecopy
sourceprogramwillbecopiedtotheArpyouspecifyin
step8,andthatarpeggiatorsArpeggiatorRunsettingwill
beturnedonandassignedtothecopydestinationtimbre
(ArpeggiatorAssign).
4. IfyoucheckwithDrumTrack,theDrumTrackPat
ternsettingsofthecopysourceprogramwillalsobe
copied.
IfthisisOn(checked),theDrumTrackPatternsettingsof
thecopysourceprogramwillbecopiedtotheDrum
Trackyouspecifyinstep9.
TheMIDIchannelspecifiedfortheDrumTrackcopy
destinationtimbrewillbeused.
5. UsetheTofieldtospecifythecopydestinationtimbre.
Theparametersforeachtimbrewillbeinitialized.Thecopy
sourceprogramwillbeassignedtoProgram(see01(2)b:
ProgramSelectonpage 72).
TheMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)settingwillnot
changeifArpischecked.IfArpisunchecked,MIDI
ChannelwillbeautomaticallysettoGch.
TheBankSelect(WhenStatus=EX2)(Combi31(2)c)
settingwillnotchange.
TheStatus(Combi31(2)c)settingwillautomaticallybe
settoINT.
TheP1:Basic/ControllersControllersSetupsettingsof
thecopysourceprogramwillbecopied.
6. UsetheArpfieldtoselectthecopydestination
arpeggiator;eitherA,B,C,orD.
7. UsetheDrumTracktospecifythedestinationtimbre
towhichthedrumtrackprogramwillbecopied.
Copy Tone Adjust
ThiscommandreplacestheToneAdjustsettingsofthe
selectedTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack(Sequencer
mode)withthoseofanyotherProgram,Timbre,orTrack.
1. SelecttheTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack
(Sequencermode)whoseToneAdjustsettingsyou
wanttoreplace.
Foratimbre,accesstheCombiP0:PlayToneAdjustpage,
andselecttheTimbre.
Foratrack,accesstheSeqP02:Play/RECToneAdjust
page,andselecttheTrack.
2. SelectCopyToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
3. UsetheFromfieldtoselecttheProgram,Combination,
orSongfromwhichtocopy.
YoucanalsousethefrontpanelBANKbuttonstoselectthe
desiredbank.
4. IfyouveselectedaCombinationorSong,selectaspe
cificTimbreorTrackaswell.
5. ChooseeitherAllorAssignmentsOnlytoselectthe
ToneAdjustparametersthatyouwanttocopy.
All:ThiscopiesboththeToneAdjustparameter
assignmentsandvalues.
AssignmentsOnly:ThiscopiesonlytheToneAdjust
parameterassignments,withoutthevalues.
Combination: Menu Command Reset Tone Adjust
103
Reset Tone Adjust
ResetToneAdjustisavailableontheToneAdjusttabofthe
playpage.
ThiscommandaffectsonlytheselectedTimbreorTrack,as
opposedtotheentireCombinationorSong.Itresetsthe
ToneAdjustsettingsforalloftheTrack/Timbres,Switches,
andSliderstotheirdefaultvalues.
1. SelecttheTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack
(Sequencermode)toreset.
Foratimbre,accesstheCombiP0:PlayToneAdjustpage,
andselecttheTimbre.
Foratrack,accesstheSeqP02:Play/RECToneAdjust
page,andselecttheTrack.
2. SelectResetToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
3. UsetheTofieldtospecifyhowtheToneAdjustparam
eterswillbereset.
AllOff:AllparameterswillberesettoOff.
DefaultSetting:Theparameterswillberesettothedefault
settingsforthecorrespondingprogramtype.
Copy Drum Track
Thiscommandcopiesthedrumtracksettingsofthe
specifiedProgram,Combination,orSong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyDrumTrackon
page 65.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEraseDrumTrack
Patternonpage 66.
Copy Arpeggiator
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheARPSetupT0108
ScanZonetabsoftheARP/DTpage.
Thiscommandcancopyarpeggiatorsettingsfromanother
locationtothecurrentCombi.
1. InFrom,selectthesource(mode,bank,number)ofthe
arpeggiatoryouwishtocopy.
IfyouarecopyingfromaCombinationorSong,selecteither
AorB,ifyouwishtocopysettingsfromonlyone
arpeggiator,orselectA&Bifyouwishtocopythesettingsof
botharpeggiators.
2. IfyouarecopyingfromaProgram,orarecopying
eitherAorBfromaCombination,orSong,selecteither
AorBastheTocopydestination.
Detune BPM Adjust
DetuneBPMAdjustisavailableonthePitchtabofthe
TimbreParameterspage.
Thiscommandchangesaloopstempobychangingthe
TimbresDetuneparameter.Themultisampledataitselfis
notaltered.Sincethisaltersthepitchoftheloopalongwith
thetempo,itsgenerallyintendedforunpitchedpercussive
loops.
Note:UsingDetuneBPMAdjustwilloverwriteany
previousDetunesettings.
1. GotothePitchtaboftheTimbreParameterspage.
2. SelecttheDetuneparameterforthedesiredTimbre.
DetuneBPMAdjustisavailableonlywhentheDetune
parameterhasbeenselected.Otherwise,themenuselection
willbegrayedout.
3. InFrom,specifytheloopsoriginalBPMvalue.
IgnoreanypreviouschangesfromusingDetuneBPM
adjust.
4. InTo,specifythedesiredBPMvalue.
TheappropriateDetunevaluewillbecalculated
automaticallyfromthesetwovalues.
Forexample,ifyousetFromto60bpmandToto120bpm,
Detunewillbesetto+1200(oneoctaveup).
Note:Sincethiscommanddoesnotaffectthemultisample
dataitself,andalwaysoverwritesthepreviousDetune
amount,usingitrepeatedlyhasnocumulativeeffect.
Combination mode
104
Copy Insert Effect
ThiscommandcopieseffectssettingsfromProgram,
Combination,orSong.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
CopyInsertEffectonpage 66.
Note:TheslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedbytheCh
parameterontheP8:Routing/IFXIFX15pages,willnotbe
copied.
Swap Insert Effect
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)inserteffectsettings.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeSwapInsertEffecton
page 67.
parameterontheP8:Routing/IFXIFX15pages,willnotbe
swapped.
DrumKit IFX Patch
ThispatchestheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingsforeach
keyofadrumkit,temporarilychangingtheinserteffect
connectiondestinations.
Youcanexecutethiscommandiftheprogramassignedto
thetimbreisadrumprogramandBus(IFX/Output)Select
issettoDKit.TheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsetting(Global
55b)ofeachkeyinthedrumkitmustbesettooneofIFX1
5.
1. IntheRouting1pageorRouting2page,selectthetim
breforwhichyouwanttomakesettings.(Selectatim
breparameterorTimbreNumber.)
2. SelectDrumKitIFXPatchtoopenthedialogbox.
3. IntheDrumKitIFXpopup,selecttheoutputbusto
whichyouwanttopatchthesignal:aninserteffector
L/RorOff.
Note:Torestoretheconditionofthedrumkit,execute
IFX1IFX1,IFX2IFX2,IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,
IFX5IFX5(seepage 95).
Copy MFX/TFX
pages.
ThiscommandcopieseffectsettingsfromProgram,
Combination,orSong.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
CopyMFX/TFXonpage 67.
parameterontheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1andTFXpage,
willnotbecopied.
Swap MFX/TFX
pages.
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)inserteffectsettings.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeSwapMFX/TFXonpage 67.
parameterontheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1andTFXpage,
willnotbecopied.
Write FX Preset
ThiscommandsavestheeditedeffectintotheKROMEs
internalmemory.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWriteFXPreseton
page 67.
105
Sequencer mode
An overview of Sequencer mode
SequencerModeletsyourecordandplaybackMIDIdataon
sixteenMIDItracksandonemastertrack(containingtempo
data,etc.),usingtheinternalsoundgeneratororexternal
soundmodules.
Thedualarpeggiator,drumtrackfunction,RPPRfunction;
thesophisticatedeffects,controllers,andthenumerous
otherfunctionsoftheKROMEcanbeusedtogethertogive
youawiderangeofpossibilitiesformusicproductionor
liveperformance.
Whenyouturnoffthepower,theSequencermode
settings,thesongsyouverecorded,thecuelist,andthe
userpatterndatawilldisappear.Ifyouneedtokeep
thisdata,youmustsaveittoanSDcardoradatafiler
(viaMIDIDataDump)beforepoweringoff.
Ifyouwishtosavetheprograms,trackparameters,and
effects,settingsetc.selectedforasongasatemplate
song,usethemenucommandSaveTemplateSong.
WhenyouinitiallypoweruptheKROME,itwillnot
containanycuelistandsongdata,soifyouwishto
playbackasongonthesequencer,youmustfirstload
data(SeeLoadPreload/DemoDataonpage 216.).
MIDI sequencer
Thesequencercanrecordamaximumof210,000MIDI
events,upto128songs,andasmanyas999measuresper
song.
Upto20cuelistscanbecreated.
Acuelistisanarrangementofupto99songsthatwillbe
playedasachain.Youcanspecifythenumberoftimes
thateachsongwillrepeat.Acuelistcanalsobeconverted
intoasinglesong.
Timingresolutionisamaximumof,/480.
TherearesixteentracksforMIDIperformancedata,anda
mastertrackthatcontrolsthetimesignatureandtempo.
Thearpeggiatorcanbeusedduringplaybackor
recording.
YoucanperformorrecordusingtheDrumTrack
function.
TheRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Recording)functioncan
beusedduringplaybackorrecording.
AthreebandEQisprovidedoneachMIDItrack.
Foreachsong,youcanusefivestereoinserteffects,two
stereomastereffects,andonestereototaleffect.
Sixteendifferenttemplatesongsarebuiltin,andcontain
programandeffectsettingssuitableforvariousmusical
styles.Uptosixteenoriginaltemplatesthatyoucreatecan
besavedasusertemplatesongs.
Atrackplayloopfunctionletsyouloopspecified
measuresindependentlyforeachtrack.
Presetpatternsidealfordrumsarebuiltin.Inaddition,
youcancreateupto100userpatternsforeachsong.
Thesepatternscanbeusedasmusicaldatawithinasong,
orcanbeplayedbythedrumtrackorthedrumtrack
and/orRPPRfunction.
MIDI recording features
Variousmethodsofrecordingaresupported,including
realtimerecording,inwhichyourperformanceonthe
keyboardandcontrollers(includingMIDIcontrolevents)
isrecordedasyouplay,andsteprecording,inwhichthe
timing,length,andvelocityofeachnotecanbespecified
inthedisplayasyouinputthepitchesfromthekeyboard.
Themusicaldataandcontroleventsthatyourecorded
canbeeditedinvariousways(includingeventediting
andmanyothereditcommands).
MIDISystemExclusive(SysEx)messagescanberecorded
andplayedback.SysExmessagesreceivedfroman
externalMIDIdeviceorparameterchangesproducedby
editingtrackparametersoreffectparameterscanbe
recordedinrealtimeonanydesiredtrack.
Parameter-related features
WhentheStatusofatrackissettoINTorBTH,an
externalsequencercanbeusedtoplaytheKROMEasa
multitimbraltonegenerator.WhentheStatusofatrack
issettoBTH,EXT,orEX2,thesequencerofKROMEcan
playexternaltonegenerators.
ToneAdjustparametersletyoumaketemporary
adjustmentstothesoundoftheprogramusedbyatrack,
whileleavingtheoriginalprogramunchanged.While
creatingasong,youcanusethiscapabilitytomake
changesinrealtimeby(forexample)softeningthetoneof
thebasssoundorsharpeningtheattackofthestrings
withouthavingtoreturntoProgrammodetoeditthe
programitself.
KROMEsAMS(AlternateModulation)capabilitylets
youusecontrolchangesforRealtimeControlsofthe
parametersoftheprogramsusedinaprogram.ItsMIDI
SyncabilitiesletyousynchronizetheLFOspeedto
changesinthetempo.
Dmod(DynamicModulation)functionalityletsyou
controleffectparametersinrealtime.Youcanalsouse
MIDISynctosynchronizetheLFOspeedordelaytimeto
changesinthetempo.
TheMIDIclockmastercanbesettoInternal,External,or
Auto,allowingsynchronizedperformancewithan
externalMIDIdevice.
Editing and operation features
TheAutoSongSetupfunctionletsyouinstantlysetup
programorcombinationsettingsofProgrammodeor
Combinationmodeasasong,sothatyoucanstart
recordingsimplybypressingtheSTART/STOP( )
button.SinceperformancesusingtheDrumTrack
functionorArpeggiatorinProgramorCombination
modeareseamlesslyintegratedwithsongproduction,
anyinspirationorideasforphrasesandsongsthatoccur
toyouwhileplayingcanbeimmediatelybeturnedintoa
song.
ProgramandCombinationsettingscanbecopiedtoa
song.
Sequencerdatasuchasasongthatyoucreatecanbe
savedintheKROMEsnativeformat,ortransmittedasa
MIDIdatadump.
AsongyoucreatedcanbeconvertedintoSMF(Standard
MIDIFile)data.SMFsongscanalsobeloaded.
ThePlay/Rec/MuteandSoloOn/Offbuttonsletyou
instantlyplay/muteanydesiredtrackonthefly.
YoucanrewindorfastforwardMIDITrackswhile
listeningtothesound.
Sequencer mode
106
Youcanassignnamesnotonlytothesong,butalsoto
eachpatternandtrack.
TheLOCATEbuttonletsyoumovequicklytoadesired
location.
Youcanconvertuserpatterndataforuseinthedrum
track.Theconvertedpatterncanbeusedasadrumtrack
patternineachmode.Thisdatawillremainevenafterthe
poweristurnedoff(unlikeuserpatternsinSequencer
mode).
Youcandragwithinthedisplaytospecifyarangeof
measures,ortomove,copy,ordelete.Thisletsyoueditin
amoreintuitiveway(TrackViewediting).
Inthepianorollscreen,youcannoweditdatasuchas
note,velocity,andcontrolchange.Byselectinganevent
anddraggingityoucanmodifythepitchortiming,delete
it,oraddanewevent(PianoRollediting).
YoucaneditMIDIsystemexclusivedata.
Noteonvelocityvaluesareshowninrealtimeusinga
meter.Thisisaconvenientwaytoverifythetimbreor
trackthatiscurrentlysounding.
Setup parameters & Musical data
EachsongconsistsofMIDItracks116,amastertrack,
varioussongparameterssuchasthesongname,settingsfor
thearpeggiator,drumtrackfunction,effectsettings,RPPR
functionparameters,and100userpatterns.
Upto128suchsongscanbecreatedintheKROME.
MIDItracks116eachconsistoftrackparametersthat
specifythestartingstateofthetrack,andplaybackdata.
Themastertrackconsistsoftempoandtimesignaturedata.
MIDI tracks 116
Setup parameters
Bank/ProgramNo.*,Play/Rec/Mute,Pan*,Volume*
TrackPlayLoop,LoopStartMeasure,LoopEndMeasure,
PlayIntro,EQ(Bypass,LowGain,MidFrequency,Mid
Gain,HighGain)Status,MIDIChannel,BankSelect(When
Status=EX2),ForceOSCMode,OSCSelect,Portamento*,
Transpose**,Detune**,BendRange**,UseProgramsScale,
Delay(Mode,Time,BaseNote,Times),MIDIFilter,
KeyboardZone,VelocityZone,TrackName,Bus(IFX/
Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1(MFX1)*,
Send2(MFX2)*,DrumKitIFXPatch
Musical data
NoteOn/Off
ProgramChange(includingBankSelect)
PitchBend
AfterTouch
ControlChange
PatternNo.
ExclusiveMessage
Master track
Setup parameters/Musical data
Timesignature*,Tempo*
* Whenyouchangethesettingduringrealtimerecording,
thiswillberecordedasmusicaldata(Programchange
andControlchangemessages).Thisallowsthestarting
settingstobemodifiedduringtheplayback.
** Musicaldata(MIDIRPNdata)canbeusedtochangethe
startingsettingsduringplayback.
Otherparameters:Youcanadjustparametersduring
realtimerecordingandrecordthesechangesasMIDI
SystemExclusivemessages.Thismeansthatthesettings
atthestartofplaybackcanchangeasthesongpro
gresses.
FordetailsonControlChangemessagesandRPN,please
seeControlchangeonpage 361,andUsingRPN
(RegisteredParameterNumbers)onpage 365.
FordetailsonMIDISystemExclusivemessages,please
seeSystemExclusiveeventssupportedinSequencer
modeonpage 191.
The Global mode SEQ Mode setting
InSequencermode,youwillnormallyusetheinternal
sequencerasthemasterthatcontrolstheinternalsound
generatororexternalMIDIsoundmodules.However,you
canalsousetheKROMEasamultitimbralsoundmodule
thatcansimultaneouslyplaymultipletracksofperformance
datafromanexternalMIDIsequencer.(Normally,youlluse
CombinationmodeifyouwanttousetheKROMEasa
masterkeyboard.)
YoucanswitchtheKROMEssettingasappropriateforthese
twopurposes.ThissettingismadeinGlobalP1:MIDI
MIDIBasicpageSEQModeTrackMIDIOut.
forMasteristheappropriatesettingifyouwanttousethe
KROMEsinternalsequencertocontrolanexternalsound
module,orusetheKROMEinSequencermodeasamaster
keyboard.Inthiscasewhenyouswitchsongsonthe
KROME,trackswhoseStatusissettoEXTorBTHcan
transmitMIDImessagessuchasprogramchangestosetup
yourexternalMIDIsoundmodule.
forExternalSequenceristheappropriatesettingifyou
wanttousetheKROMEasamultitimbralsoundmodule
foryourexternalsequencer.Whenyouswitchsongsonthe
KROME,MIDImessagessuchasprogramchangeswillnot
betransmitted(bytrackswhoseStatusisEXTorBTH).This
ensuresthatechobackfromyourexternalMIDIsequencer
willnotcauseKROMEtracksofthecorrespondingMIDI
channeltoswitchtheirprogram,pan,orvolumesettings.
Auto Song Setup
TheAutoSongSetupfunctioncopiesthesettingsofa
programorcombinationtoasong,andputsyouinrecord
readymode.ThenyoucansimplypresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontobeginrecordingimmediately.Thislets
youseamlesslymovefromplayingaprogramor
combinationtoproducingasong.Forexample,ifyouve
beenusingthedrumtrackorarpeggiatorandhavecomeup
withaphraseoranidea,thisfunctionletsyoueasilyturn
yourinspirationintoasong.
Procedure (example: Combination mode)
1. EnterCombinationmode.
2. InP0:Playpage,selectthedesiredcombinationand
edittheArpeggiatoretc.asdesired.
Note:Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedstateofthecombination,
usetheWriteCombinationmenucommands.
3. PresstheREC()button.Alternatively,selectthepage
menucommandAutoSongSetup.
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear.
4. ToexecutetheAutoSongSetupfunction,pressthe
REC()buttonortheOKbutton.Ifyoudecidenotto
execute,presstheCancelbutton.
YouwillautomaticallymovetoSequencermode,andthe
settingsofthecombinationwillbecopiedtothesong.
Thefirstunusedsongwillbethecopydestinationsong.
An overview of Sequencer mode
107
Contents automatically copied from a combination
Thecopiedcontentswillbethesameaswhenyouexecute
themenucommandCopyFromCombiwiththefollowing
settingsinthedialogbox.(seep.166)
IFXs,MFXs,TFXchecked
AutoAdjustArpsettingforMultiRECchecked
Contents automatically copied from a program
Thecopiedcontentswillbethesameaswhenyouexecute
themenucommandCopyFromProgramwiththefollowing
settingsinthedialogbox.(seep.101)
IFXs,MFXs,TFXchecked
Arpchecked
TosettoTrack01
ArpsettoA
withDrumTrackchecked
To:DrumTracksettoTrack10
CheckRecordingSetupMultiREC
SetthePlay/Rec/MutesettingtoRECfortracks01and10
(seep.112).
5. TheKROMEwillautomaticallyenterrecordready
mode,andthemetronomewillsoundaccordingtothe
Metronomesetting(Seq08c).
6. PresstheSTART/STOP( )buttontobeginreal
timerecording.Tostoprecording,presstheSTART/
STOP( )buttononceagain.
The Compare function
Whenyouperformrealtimerecording,steprecording,or
trackediting,thisfunctionallowsyoutomakebeforeand
aftercomparisons.
IfyoucontinueeditingwhentheCOMPAREbuttonislit,
theswitchwillgodark.Thisnowbecomesthemusicaldata
thatwillbeselectedwhentheCOMPAREbuttonisdark.
Operations for which Compare is available
Ingeneral,trackandpatterneventdatacannotbereturned
toitsoriginalstate.
Comparingsongparametersispossibleonlyduringsong
editing(whenexecutingamenucommand).
RecordingtoaMIDItrack
TrackEdit
AllcommandsexceptforthemenucommandsMemory
Status,ExclusiveSolo,FF/REWSpeedandSetLocation
oftheP6:TrackEditTrackEditpage.
Recordingtoapattern
PatternEdit
AllcommandsexceptforthemenucommandsMemory
Status,ExclusiveSolo,ConverttoDrumTrkPattern,
EraseDrumTrackPattern,andFF/REWSpeedofthe
P10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage.
SongEdit
P0P5pages:menucommandsDeleteSongandCopy
FromSong
TheprogramwillnotbeaffectedbytheCompare,and
willnotreturntoitspriorstate.
Operations for which Compare is not available
Editingsongparameters
Menucommandsotherthanthoselistedunder
OperationsforwhichCompareisavailableabove.
Sequencer mode
108
SEQ Page Select
Youcanusethefollowingwaystoselectthepagesin
Sequencermode.
1. PresstheSEQbutton,andthenpresstheMENUbutton
toaccessPageSelect.
Thepageshowningreyisthepageselectedjustpriorto
pressingthePAGEbutton.
HolddownthePAGEbuttonandpressoneofthe
numerickeys,09,tospecifyapagenumberandtoaccess
thecorrespondingpage.
Forexample,ifyouwanttoaccesstheP3:TrackParam
page,holddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumeric
key3.
PressingtheEXITbuttonwilltakeyoutotheP01:Play/
RECpage.IfapageotherthantheProgramT0108page
isselected,pressingtheEXITbuttonwilltakeyoutothe
ProgramT0108page.
Page Main content
P
L
A
Y
P0:Play/REC
Songselection,playback,andrecording.
(seep.109)
Programselectionforeachtrack.(see
p.111)
Panandvolumesettingsetc.foreach
track.(seep.113)
ToneAdjustediting.(seep.115)
Recordingmethodselection.(seep.116)
Trackplaybackloopsettings.(seep.119)
E
D
I
T
P1:Controllers SW1,2,andknobsettings.(seep.122)
P2:EQ EQsettingsforeachtrack.(seep.141)
P3:TrackParam
Variousparametersettingsforeachtrack
(MIDIchannel,OSCselection,Pitch
setting,etc.)(seep.125)
P4:Zone/Delay
Keysplitandlayersettings.
(Keyzoneandvelocityzone)(seep.129)
Timedelayfromnoteontobeginningof
sound.(seep.131)
P5:MIDIFilter
MIDItransmit/receivefiltersettings.(see
p.133)
P6:TrackEdit
Steprecording.
Pianorolledit.
Eventrecording.
Copy,delete,andothertrackediting.(see
p.137)
A
R
P
&
D
R
U
M
T
R
A
C
K
P7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack
E
F
F
E
C
T
P8:Routing/IFX
settings.(sseep.148)
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
settings.(seep.152)
p.152)
P
A
T
T
E
R
N
&
C
U
E
P10:Pattern/
RPPR
Patternrecordingandediting.(seep.155
RPPRsettings.(seep.158)
Convertingapatterntoadrumtrack
pattern.(seep.188)
P11:CueList
Cuelistsettings.
Consecutiveplaybackofmultiplesongs.
Convertingtoasong.(seep.160)
SEQ P0: Play/REC 01: Program T0108, 02: Program T0916
109
SEQ P0: Play/REC
01: Program T0108,
02: Program T0916
Here,youcanmakebasicsettingsforMIDItrackrecording
andplayback,andcanselecttheprogramthatwillbeused
byeachtrack.
01(2)a: Location, Meter, Tempo, Tempo
Mode, Song Select, Track Select,
Reso, RPPR
Location [001:01.000999:16.479]
Thisdisplayshowsthecurrentpositioninthesong.
Fromtheleft,thenumbersarethemeasure(001999),beat
(0116),andclock(000479).Whenyoumodifythesevalues,
thecurrentlocationwillchange.
Duringplaybackandrecording,thenumberofremaining
measureswillbedisplayedwhenyouapproachtheendof
thesong(thelast9measuresorfewer).
Thesongpositionbarwillshowthepositionofthecurrent
measure.
WhenMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoInternal(or
Auto,ifnoMIDIclocksarebeingreceived),the
KROMEwilltransmitSongPositionPointermessages
whentheLocationischanged.
Also,iftheMIDIClockparameterissettoExternal
MIDI(orAuto,ifMIDIclocksarecurrentlybeing
received),andReceiveExt.RealtimeCommands
(Global11a)ison,theLocationwillchangein
responsetoreceivedSongPositionPointermessages.
Therangeinwhichthebeatandclockcanbemodified
willdependonthecurrentlyspecifiedtimesignature.
Meter [**/**, 1/416/4, 1/8...16/8, 1/16...16/16]
Thisisthetimesignatureatthecurrentlocationofthesong.
Thetimesignaturecanbechangedateachmeasure.
**/**:ThiswillbedisplayedwhenyoupresstheREC( )
button.Specifythiswhenyouwishtousethetimesignature
thatisalreadyrecordedforthatmeasure,andwishtorecord
withoutchangingthetimesignature.
SetTrackSelecttoaTrackfrom0116,presstheREC( )
button,andspecifythetimesignaturehere.
WhenyoupresstheSTART/STOP( )buttontobegin
recording,thetimesignatureyouspecifywillberecorded
ontheMasterTrackandonpreviouslyrecordedtracks.
BeawarethatifyoupresstheSTART/STOP( )button
duringtheprecounttostoprecording,thetimesignature
willnotberecorded.
Normally,youwillspecifythetimesignaturewhenyou
recordthefirsttrack,andselect**/**whenrecording
subsequenttracks.
Changing the time signature in the middle of a
song
Changingthetimesignaturebeforedataisrecorded:
Ifyouknowthelocationatwhichyouwishtochangetime
signatures,usetheInsertMeasuremenucommandto
specifyandinsertthetimesignaturewhereverdesired,and
thenrecordyourmusicaldata.
Changingthetimesignatureafterdatahasbeenrecorded:
Ifyouwishtochangethetimesignatureinthemiddleofa
songwhichalreadycontainsmusicaldata,useTrackSelect
tospecifytheMasterTrack(oranyTrack0116which
containsdata),andusetheEventEditmenucommandto
modifythetimesignatureoftheBarevent.
Ifthenumberofbeatsinameasureincreaseswhenyou
modifythetimesignature,restswillbeinsertedinthe
portionthatwasadded.Converselyifthenumberofbeats
decreases,thatportionwillnotbeplayed.Howeverifyou
returntotheoriginaltimesignature,thedatathathadbeen
hiddenwillonceagainbeplayed.(Thedataitselfwillnotbe
erased.)
01a
01b
01
Menu
Transport Popup
Location
Song Select
Song
Select
Popup
Song Position
Meter
Tempo
Tempo Mode
Track Select Resolution RPPR
1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) Track 1 3 (4/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) Track 1 3 (4/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) Track 2 3 (4/4)
1 (4/4) Track 2 Recording
1 (4/4) 2 (3/4)
Track 1
3 (4/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) Track 1 3 (7/8)
1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) Track 2 3 (7/8)
3 (4/4)
4 (7/8)
Recording 1 (4/4)
Track 2
4 (7/8)
when Meter = **/** when Meter =7/8
Recording from measure 2 of track 2
Rest is inserted
Not played
Sequencer mode
110
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Thisspecifiesthetempoofthesong.Thistempoappliesto
songplayback,arpeggiatoranddrumtrackfunction,etc.
040.00300.00:WhentheTempoModeisManu(Manual),
thistempowillbeusedforrecordingandplayback.When
TempoModeisREC,thistempowillberecordedonthe
mastertrack.
EXT:ThiswillappearwhenMIDIClock(Global11a)isset
toeitherExternalMIDI,ExternalUSBorAuto.Thetempoof
theinternalsequencerwillsynchronizewithMIDIClock
messagesreceivedfromanexternalsequencerorotherMIDI
device.
IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoInternal,theabove
temposetting(040.00300.00)isused.Ifyouveselected
Auto,operationwillautomaticallyswitchfromInternalto
ExternalifMIDIClockdataisreceivedfromanexternal
MIDIdevice.Thisindicationwillappear.
Note:YoucanalsoadjustthisbyturningtheTEMPOknob.
Alternatively,youcansetthetempobypressingtheTAP
buttonatthedesiredinterval.
Note:IfTempoisselectedasanalternatemodulationsource,
, =120.00willbethebasevalue.
To record tempo changes
First,setTrackSelecttoaMIDITrack.
PresstheREC( )buttontoenterrecordingstandby
mode,youwillbeabletoselectREC.
SetTempoModetoREC,startrecording,andchangethe
, (Tempo)valueeitherbyturningtheTEMPOknob,orusing
numerickeys09toenteravalueandthenpressingthe
ENTERbutton.Youcanalsovarythetempobyhittingthe
TAPbuttonatthedesiredtiming.
ThiscannotbeselectedwhenthePreferencespageitem
RecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks.
Whenyouchangethe,(Tempo)valuewhilerecording,the
tempochangeswillberecorded,causingthetempoto
changeasthesongprogresses.
TempochangescanalsobecreatedusingtheEventEditor
CreateControlDatamenucommands.
Note:Ifyouwishtorecordonlythetempochanges,set
RecordingSetup(Seq08b)toOverdub,andthetempowill
berecordedonthemastertrackwithoutbeingaffectedby
themusicaldataofTrackSelect.
Tempo Mode [Auto, Manual, REC]
Auto:ThetempowillfollowthetempooftheMasterTrack.
Thetempoofthemastertrackcanbespecifiedbyusingthe
EventEditmenucommand,withtheMasterTrackchosenin
TrackSelect,orbytheRECoperationdescribedbelow.
WhenAutoisselected,itwillnotbepossibletomodifythe
, (Tempo)settingwhileasongisplayingorrecording(or
duringstandby).
Manu(Manual):The, (Tempo)settingwillbeused.
REC:TempochangeswillberecordedontheMasterTrack.
Song Select [000127]
Selectthesongthatyouwanttorecordorplayback.
Eitherselectthesongnamefromthepopupmenu,oruse
numerickeys09tospecifythesongnumberandthenpress
theENTERbutton.
Creating a new song
Chooseanumberfromthepopupmenuwhosesongname
isblank,orusethenumerickeys09tospecifythesong
numberandpresstheENTERbuttontoopenthedialogbox.
ThenselectSetLengthtospecifythenumberofmeasuresin
thesong,andpresstheOKbutton.
Note:Ifyouwanttochangethelengthofasongafter
creatingit,usethemenucommandSetSongLength.When
creatinganewsong,youcanspecifythelengthtobe
somewhatlongerthannecessary,andafteryouhave
finishedrecordingandediting,useSetSongLengthto
specifythecorrectlength.
ASongSelectmessageistransmittedwhenyouswitch
songsontheKROME.Youcanswitchsongsonthe
KROMEremotely,bysendingaSongSelectmessage
fromanexternalMIDIdevice.
IfTrackMIDIOut(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasic)isset
toforMaster,andthesongisswitched,trackswhose
trackstatus(Status31(2)a)isEXT,EX2,orBOTHwill
transmitBankSelect,ProgramChange,Volume,
Panpot,Portamento,Send1/2,PostIFXPan,andPost
IFXSend1/2messagesontheMIDIchannelofthat
track.ThesemessageswillnotbetransmittedifTrack
MIDIOutissettoforExternalSequencer.
Track Select [Track01Track16, Master Track]
Track01Track16:SelecttheMIDItrackthatyouwantto
record.Thisisalsowhereyoumakeyourselectionwhen
editingaMIDItrackinP6:TrackEdit.
WhenMultiRECisoff,thisalsoselectstherecordenabled
track.
WhenMultiREC(Seq08b)ison,thePlay/Rec/Mute
buttons(Seq01(2)b)selecttherecordenabledtracks,
regardlessoftheTrackSelectsetting.
UseTrackName(Seq62)togivethetrackadescriptive
name.
IfothertracksaresettothesameMIDIchannelasthe
selectedtrack,andtheirStatusissettoINTorBTH,
theyllbecontrolledbythekeyboardaswell.
Additionally,othertrackssettothesameMIDIchannel
astheselectedtrack,andtheirStatussettoEXT,EX2,or
BTH,willtransmitMIDItoexternaldevices.For
anotherlookatthis,pleaseseethetablebelow.
IfyouveselectedMasterTrack,thesettingsofthemost
recentlyselectedMIDItrackwillbeused.
MasterTrack:Selectthemastertrackifyouwanttousethe
P6:TrackEditmenucommandstoeditthemastertrack.You
cannotperformrealtimerecordingorsteprecordingonthe
mastertrackbyitself.
MIDI Channel Status
Keyboard
plays Internal
Sounds
Keyboard
Transmits MIDI
Out
Sameasthe
selectedMIDI
Track
OFF No No
INT Yes No
EXT No Yes
EX2 No Yes
BTH Yes Yes
Different
fromthe
selectedMIDI
Track
Any
setting
No No
SEQ P0: Play/REC 01: Program T0108, 02: Program T0916
111
Resolution (Realtime REC Quantize Resolution)
[Hi, ,_ , , , ,_ , ,, ,_ , ,, , ]
Withrealtimerecording,thetimingoftheMIDIdatayou
playcanbecorrected.
Hi(HighResolution):Timingwillnotbecorrected.Data
willberecordedatthemaximumresolution(,/480).
,_,:Datawillbecorrectedtothenearestintervalofthe
specifiedtimingasitisrecorded.Forexampleifyouselect
,_,datawillbecorrectedtothenearest32ndnotetriplet
interval.Ifyouselect,,datawillbecorrectedtothenearest
quarternoteinterval.
BecausealltheMIDIdatabeingrecordedwillbecorrected
tothespecifiedtimingresolution,coarsesettingsofthis
parameterwillcausecontinuouscontrollerssuchaspitch
bendtoberecordedinstairstepfashion.
Insuchcases,useasettingofHitorecord,andthenusethe
Quantizemenucommandtocorrectonlythedesiredtypeof
data(notesetc.).Toavoidastifffeel,avoidrecordingata
lowresolutiontobeginwith.
RPPR [Off, On]
ThisturnstheRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Recording)
functionon/off.RPPRletsyouassignapatterntoeachnote
ofthekeyboard,sothatthepatternwillplayback(orbe
recorded)whenyoupresstheappropriatekey.
On(checked):TheRPPRfunctionwillbeon.Ifapatternhas
beenassignedtoeachkeyintheP5:RPPRSetuppage,
pressingthatkeywillperformtheassignedpattern.For
moreinformation,pleasesee103:RPPRSetupon
page 157.
Mode, Stop Watch
Transport
Thetransportpanelwillappearwhenyouslidethe<
popupbutton(locatedonthelowerrightsideofthedisplay)
towardtheleft.Thisletsyoucontroltransportoperations
suchasplaybackandrecordingfromwithinthedisplay.To
hidethetransportpanel,pressandmovethe>popup
buttontowardtheright.
01(2)b: Track Program Select
Selected Track Info
Thispagedisplaysinformationaboutthetrackyoure
editing.T:indicatestheMIDItracknumber/programbank/
number/name.Ch:indicatestheMIDIchannelnumber,and
RPPR(Assign):indicatesthekeynumberthatwillstartthe
RPPRassignedtothetrack.
RPPR(Assign)willnotshowalloftheassignmentsifthere
aremanyRPPRassignments.TheP10:Pattern/RPPR
PatternEditpageletsyouseealloftheassignments.
Track Number:
Asexpected,thisindicatesthetracknumber.Beloweach
tracknumberareitscorrespondingtrackparameters.
Track Category:
ThisshowstheabbreviatedcategorynameoftheProgram
assignedtothetrack.
Track 01 (Track Number):
ThisshowstheMIDItracknumber.Theparametersbelow
thisletyousettheparametersforthetrack.
Category (Track Program) [00...17/00...07]
Here,youcanselectacategoryandsubcategorytochoose
theMIDItracksprogram.Allprogramsareorganizedinto
upto18categoriesand8subcategories.Choosethedesired
categoryandsubcategorytoselecttheprogramyoudesire.
PressthispopupbuttontoaccesstheCategory/Program
Selectmenu,andchooseaprogram.
Category/Track Program Select menu:
Here,youcanselecttheprogramforeachtrackbymain
categoryandsubcategory.Allprogramsareclassifiedintoa
maximumofeighteenmaincategories,andeachcategoryis
classifiedintoeightsubcategories.Youcanselectprograms
usingthesemaincategoriesandsubcategories.
PressCategoryandusetheCategory/TrackProgram
Selectmenutoselectaprogram.
Fortheprocedure,pleaseseeCategory/ProgramSelect
menu:onpage 3.
,
, , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , ,
With a setting of ,
Set Location REC <<REW PAUSE
LOCATE START/STOP FF>>
Select Track Info
Track No.
Category/Track
Program Select
Play/Mute
Velocity Meter
Solo On/Of
Bank/Track
Program Select
Program Select
Sequencer mode
112
Program Select [A...F: 000...127
GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 001...128]
SelectstheprogramthatwillbeusedbyeachMIDItrack.
Thelowerlinedisplayspartoftheprogramname.
Theprogramyouselectherewillbeusedwhenthesongis
playedorrecordedfromthebeginning.Iftheprogramis
changedwhilerecording,theprogramchangewillbe
recordedasMIDIdata,andtheprogramwillchangeduring
playback.Youcanalsochangetheprogrammanually
duringplayback.However,theprogramwillchangeatany
pointwhereprogramchangedataisalreadyrecorded.
IftheStatus(Seq31(2)c)iseitherINTorBTH,
programscanbeselectedbyreceivingMIDIprogram
changemessages.Also,whenthesongischangedor
whenthesongreturnstothebeginning,trackswhose
StatusisEXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmitthebankand
programnumbersviaMIDI.TrackswhoseStatusis
EX2willshowBankasandwilltransmitthebank
numberthatwasselectedintheBankSelect(Seq3
1(2)c)parameter.(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQMode
TrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
Various ways to change the program for a track
ChooseProgramSelect,usenumerickeys09toinputa
programnumber,andpresstheENTERbutton.
ChooseProgramSelect,andturntheVALUEdialoruse
theINC/DECbuttons.
IfyouvechosenProgramSelect,thefrontpanelBANK
AFbuttonswillchangetheprogrambankforthe
selectedtrack.TheBANKbuttonforthebankcontaining
theselectedprogramwilllightup.
YoucanusethenumerickeystoswitchtheGMbank(see
p.2).
UsetheBank/ProgramSelectmenutoviewandselect
programsbybank.
UsetheCategory/ProgramSelectmenutoviewandselect
programsbycategory.
TransmitMIDIprogramchangemessagesfroma
connectedexternalMIDIdevice(ifthetrackStatusisINT
orBTH).
Youcanalsousetheabovemethodstoswitchprograms
whileasongisplaying.Ifyouswitchprogramswhile
recording,theprogramchangedatawillberecorded,and
theprogramwillswitchatthatpointinthesongduring
playback.YoucanalsousethemenucommandEvent
Edittoaddprogramchangedatatoatrack.
Play/Rec/Mute [Play, Rec, Mute]
UsethistomuteaMIDItrack,ortoselecttherecording
tracksformultitrackrecording.
Duringplayback,orforsingletrackrecording(normal
recording),youcanonlyselectPlayorMutefortracks
withtheexceptionoftherecordingtrack.Formultitrack
recording,trackscanbesettoPlay,Rec,orMute.
EachtimeyoupressthePlay/Rec/Mutebutton,itwilltoggle
betweenthosefunctions.
Play:Thetrackwillplay.
Rec:Forsingletrackrecording,theselectedtrackwillbeset
toRECwhenyoupresstheREC( )button.RECcannot
bemanuallyselected.
Formultitrackrecording(thePreferencespageMultiREC
ison),selectRECforthetracksthatyouwishtorecord.
Mute:Thetrackwillbemuted(silent).
Solo On/Off [On, Off]
TurnstheSolofunctionon/offforeachtrack.
OnlytrackswithSoloOnwillsound.Othertrackswillbe
muted.
Thesettingwillalternateon/offeachtimeyoupresstheSolo
button.
TheoperationwilldependontheExclusiveSolosetting.
ExclusiveSolooff:Multipletrackscanbesoloed.Thesolo
settingofeachtrackwillchangeeachtimeyoupressitsSolo
On/Offbutton.
ExclusiveSoloon:WhenyoupressaSoloOn/Offbutton,
onlythattrackwillbesoloed.
IfMIDItrackswhoseStatus(Seq31(2)c)isBTH,EXT,
orEX2aremutedbyMuteorbytheSolofunction,note
on/offmessageswillnotbetransmittedontheMIDI
channelselectedforthosetracks.
Solosettingsarenotsavedwiththesong.
Exclusive Solo
thatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff(unchecked),
youcansolomultipleTracksatonce.Thesolosettingofeach
trackwillchangeeachtimeyoupressitsSoloOn/Offbutton.
WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyoneTrackcanbe
soloedatatime.Inthismode,pressingaSolobutton
Tip:Onmostpages,youcanalsotoggleExclusiveSoloon/
offbyholdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressing
numerickey1.
Velocity Meter
ThisindicatesthenoteonvelocityvaluesontheMIDI
channelofeachtrack,producedbythekeyboard,MIDI
IN,arpeggiator,drumtrack,orsequencer.(Ifmultiple
noteonmessagesarereceivedsimultaneously,the
highestvelocitywillbedisplayed.)
Track 02...08, 09...16 (Track Number):
Here,youcanspecifytheprogram,Play/Mutestatus,and
SoloOn/OffstatusforTracks28and916.Thesearethe
sameasforTrack01.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Track01(TrackNumber):above.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P0: Play/REC 03: Mixer T0108, 04: Mixer T0916
113
03: Mixer T0108,
04: Mixer T0916
Here,youcansetthepanandvolumeofeachMIDItrack.
03(4)a:Location, Meter, Tempo, Tempo
Reso, RPPR
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01:ProgramT0108,02:
ProgramT0916onpage 109.
03(4)b: Pan, Volume
Thepanandvolumethatyouspecifyherewillbeused
whenyouplaybackorrecordfromthebeginningofthe
song.Ifyouchangethesettingsduringrecording,the
changeswillberecordedasMIDIdata,andpanandvolume
willchangeduringplayback.Youcanalsochangethe
settingsduringplayback.However,whenthesongreachesa
locationwherepanorvolumedatawasrecorded,the
settingswillchangeaccordingly.
Selected Track Info
ThisareashowsinformationontheMIDItrackselectedfor
editing.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:TrackProgram
Selectonpage 111.
Thisindicatesthecategory.
Pan [RND, L001...C064...R127]
Here,youcansetthepanofeachMIDItrack.
L001C064R127:AsettingofL001isfarleftandR127is
farright.AsettingofC064willreproducetheoscillatorpan
settingoftheProgrammode.
Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumakehere
willbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan:#8parameterinP8:
Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppagewilladjustthepanning
ofthesoundaftertheInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeMixeronpage 243..
RND:Thepanpositionwillchangerandomlyateachnote
on.
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTH,CC#10Pancanbe
receivedtocontrolthepanning.WhenreceivingCC#10,
avalueof0or1isfarleft,64iscenter,and127isfar
right.Whenyouchangethesongorreturntothe
beginningofthesong,trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2
orBTHwilltransmitthepanyouspecifyhereasaMIDI
message(exceptforRND).(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQ
ModeTrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
Volume [000...127]
Here,youcansetthevolumeofeachMIDItrack.
WhenStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTH,CC#7Volume
canbereceivedtocontrolthevolume.Thevolumeofa
trackisdeterminedbymultiplyingtheMIDIVolume
(CC#7)andExpression(CC#11)values.Whenyou
changethesongorreturntothebeginningofthesong,
trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmit
thevolumeyouspecifyhereasaMIDIVolume
message.(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDI
Outonpage 200)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTrack01(Track
Number):above.
seep.164
03b
03a
03
Menu
Selected Track Info
Track Number
Track Category
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L001
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R127 Left Center Right
Pan (CC#10)
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
Left Center Right
Left Center Right
OSC1 OSC2 OSC1 OSC2 OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L032
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R096
Pan (CC#10)
C064
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=C064
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=C064 Left Center Right
Pan (CC#10)
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC1 OSC2
Sequencer mode
114
Commandonpage 163.
05: Arpeggiator A,
06: Arpeggiator B
Here,youcanmakearpeggiatorsettingsforthesong.A
songcanruntwoarpeggiatorssimultaneously.
ArpeggiatorparameterscanbeeditedinP7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack,butcertainmajorparameterscanbeeditedin
thesepagesaswell.Youcanedittheseparametersin
realtime,forexamplebychangingthearpeggiopattern
whileplayinginSequencerP01:Play/REC.
YoucanalsousetheTEMPOknobandthearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATEknob,VELOCITYknob,SWINGknob,and
STEPknobtocontrolthearpeggiatorinrealtime.
05(6)a: Track Select, Tempo, RPPR
Track Select [Track0116, Master Track]
, (Tempo) [040.00300.00, EXT]
RPPR [Off, On]
Here,youcanselectthetrack,specifythetempothatwill
controlthesongorarpeggiatoretc.,andturnRPPRon/off.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
05(6)b: Arp Controls
assignmentsoftheREALTIMECONTROLknobs.The
arpeggiocontrolsallowyoutousethefourknobstocontrol
thetwoarpeggiatorsinrealtime.
[GATE]Knob 1: Gate [64...+00...+63]
[VEL.]Knob 2: Velocity (Velocity) [64...+00...+63]
[SWING]Knob 3: Length [64...+00...+63]
seep.6,p.54
[STEP]Knob 4: Octave64...+00...+63]
seep.6
05(6)c: Arpeggiator Run, Track assign
Arpeggiator Run A, B
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)youchecked
herewillruniftheyareassignedtoatimbrebyArpeggiator
Assign(71(2)c).
Whenthearpeggiatorison,thesecheckboxesletyouturnA
andBon/off.
ThisparametercanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DTpage
ArpeggiatorRunA,B.
Track assign
ThisindicatesthearpeggiatorAandBassignmentstatusfor
eachtrack18.ThesesettingsaremadeinArpeggiator
Assign(Seq71(2)c).
05(6)d: Arpeggiator A (B)
Pat (Pattern) [P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
Reso (Resolution) [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Sort [Off, On]
Latch [Off, On]
Key Sync. [Off, On]
Keyboard [Off, On]
Setthevariousparametersofthecombinationarpeggiator.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCOMBIP7:ARP/DT
Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom73(4):Arpeggiator
A(B)Setup.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
05c
05d
05a
05
Menu
05b
SEQ P0: Play/REC 07: Tone Adjust
115
07: Tone Adjust
ToneAdjustprovidestwoimportantfeatures:
TheToneAdjustparameterletsyouedittheprincipal
Programparameters.
ItletsyoumodifyPrograms,includingeverythingfrom
subtletweaks(likechangingLFOspeeds)todramatic
changes(suchasselectingadifferentMultisample).Any
changesthatyoumakearestoredwiththeSong,anddo
notaltertheoriginalProgram.
Eachofthesixteentrackshasitsownsetoftoneadjust
parameters.
Absolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameteron
page 7
ToneAdjustandMIDISysExonpage 7
InteractionbetweenToneAdjustandMIDICCson
page 8
InProgrammode,whenyoumakeeditsviaToneAdjust
andthensavetheresults,theProgramdataischangedjust
asifyoudeditedtheinternalparametersdirectly.Formore
information,pleaseseeSavingToneAdjustEditson
page 7.
InSequencermode,however,allToneAdjusteditsare
storedwithintheSong;theProgramitselfisnotchanged.
ThisletsyoualterthewaythataProgramsoundsinone
specificSongwithoutaffectingthewaythatitsoundsin
Programmode,orinanyotherCombisorSongs.
07a: Track Select, Tempo, RPPR
07b: Track Select, Selected parameter
information
Track select
Track [116]
ThisselectsthetrackwhoseToneAdjustparametersyou
wishtoadjust.Youcanswitchbackandforthbetweenthe
differenttracksasmuchasyoulike,withoutlosingyour
edits.
Auto Load (Auto Load PRG) [Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoatrack,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsToneAdjust
settingswillbeloadedaswell.
Thesesettingsincludetheparametersassignedtoeach
sliderandswitchinthedisplay,alongwiththeon/offstate
assignedtoAbsoluteparameters.
TheresultingeffectofToneAdjustsettingsthatweresaved
inProgrammodeissavedwiththeprogram,regardlessof
theAutoLoadPCGsetting.Theprogramwillsound
accordingtoitssettings,regardlessofwhetherToneAdjust
settingsweresaved.
alloftheToneAdjustsettingsasdesired.Allsucheditsare
storedintheSong,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
IfAutoLoadPRGisOn,ToneAdjustsettingswillbe
automaticallyloadedalongwiththeProgram.
IfAutoLoadPRGisOff,theToneAdjustsettingsofthe
programwillnotbeloaded;theprogramsettingspriorto
editingtheToneAdjustsettingswillremain.
Control [SW18, SL18]
Thisistheswitchorsliderinthedisplaythatisassignedto
ToneAdjustparameters.
Assignment [List of Tone Adjust assignments]
Thisisthefullnameoftheparameterassignedtotheswitch
orsliderinthedisplay.YoucanchangethisusingtheAssign
parameter,below.
Value
switchorslider.
Thisshowsthetypeoftheparameter,whichrelatestohow
editstotheparameteraresaved.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeAbsolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameter
onpage 7.
Stored Value
Ifyouunassignaparameterfromacontrol,itwillrevertto
thisvalue.
07c: Tone Adjust
Here,youcanassignToneAdjustparameterstotheswitches
Switches 1...8
ToneAdjustswitchesactalittledifferentlythanslidersin
thedisplay.
theparametervalue:
SwitchOn=On
SwitchOff=Off
07a
07b
07c
07
Menu
Sequencer mode
116
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheswitchesinthe
Sliders 18
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheslidersinthe
Assignments are exclusive
thenewslider.
Value
control.
V 07: Menu Command
seep.164
13:ResetToneAdjustseep.167
Commandonpage 163.
08: Preferences
Here,youcanspecifytherealtimerecordingmethod,adjust
levelsandmakeothersettingsforaudiorecording,and
adjustthemetronomesettings.
08a: Location, Meter, Tempo, Tempo
Reso, RPPR
Selected Track Info:
ThisdisplaysinformationaboutthecurrentlyselectedMIDI
track.(See01(2)a)
08b: Recording Setup
Selectsthemethodofrealtimerecording.
Overwrite
Whenrecordingforthefirsttime,youwillnormallyselect
thismethod.
Ifyouusethismethodtorecordonatrackonwhichdata
hasalreadybeenrecorded,allpreviousdatawillbereplaced
fromthemeasureatwhichyoubeganrecordingthroughall
subsequentmeasures.
Withthismethod,thenewlyrecordeddataoverwrites
musicaldatapreviouslyrecordedonthattrack.
Normallyyouwillusethismethodtorecord,andthen
modifytheresultsbyusingothertypesofrealtime
recordingorMIDIeventediting.
1. UseTrackSelecttochoosethetrackthatyouwantto
record.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.
3. InLocation,specifythelocationatwhichyouwishto
beginrecording.
4. PresstheREC( )button,andthenpresstheSTART/
STOP( )button.
IftheMetronomeSetupisstillsettothedefaultsettings,the
metronomewillsoundforatwomeasureprecount,and
thenrecordingwillbegin.
Playthekeyboardandmovethecontrollers(suchasthe
joystick)torecordyourperformance.
5. Whenyoufinishplaying,presstheSTART/STOP( )
button.
Recordingwillend,andthelocationwillreturntothepoint
atwhichyoubeginrecording.
Assign
On/Of
Value
08b
08a
08c
08
Menu
SEQ P0: Play/REC 08: Preferences
117
IfyoupressthePAUSE( )buttoninsteadoftheSTART/
STOP( )button,recordingwillpause.Whenyou
pressthePAUSE( )buttononceagain,recordingwill
resume.Whenyouarefinished,presstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontostoprecording.
Overdub
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoadddatatoa
previouslyrecordedtrack.
Withthismethod,thenewlyrecordedmusicaldataisadded
totheexistingdata.
Whenyouperformoverdubrecordingonapreviously
recordedtrack,thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeaddedtothe
previouslyrecordeddata.
Itisbesttoselectthismodeifyouwillberecording
additionalcontroldata,recordingadrumpattern,or
recordingthetempointhemastertrack.Withthismode,
datacanbeaddedwithouterasingtheexistingperformance
data.
record.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverdub.
3. Fortherestoftheprocedure,pleaseseesteps35of
Overwrite.
Manual Punch In
SelectthismethodwhenyouwishtousetheREC( )
buttonorafootswitchtorerecordselectedportionsofa
previouslyrecordedtrack.
Whilethesongisplaying,youcanpresstheREC( )
buttonoraconnectedpedalswitchatthedesiredlocationto
startorstoprecording.Withthismethod,themusicaldata
previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewlyrecorded
data.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwantto
record.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoManualPunchIn.
3. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasuresear
lierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecord
ing.
4. PresstheSTART/STOP( )button.
Playbackwillbegin.
5. Atthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecording,
presstheREC( )button.
Recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboardandoperate
controllerssuchasthejoysticktorecordyourperformance.
6. Whenyoufinishrecording,presstheREC( )button.
Recordingwillend(playbackwillcontinue).
Note:InsteadofpressingtheREC( )buttoninsteps5
and6,youcanuseafootswitchconnectedtothe
ASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
SettheGlobalP2:ControllerspageFootSwitchAssignto
SongPunchIn/Out.
Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothelocationthat
youspecifiedinstep3.
Auto Punch In
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoautomaticallyre
recordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecordedtrack.
Recordingwilloccuronlyoverthespecifiedarea,rewriting
itwiththenewlyrecordeddata.
Firstyoumustspecifytheareathatwillbererecorded.
Thenrecordingwillautomaticallystartandendwithinthe
specifiedarea.Withthismethod,themusicaldata
previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewlyrecorded
data.
record.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoAutoPunchIn.
3. InM(AutoPunchInStartMeasure),M(AutoPunch
InEndMeasure)specifytheareathatyouwishto
record.
Forexample,ifyouspecifyM005M008,recordingwill
occuronlyfrommeasure5tomeasure8.
4. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasures
beforethepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecording.
STOP( )button.
Playbackwillbegin.
Whenyoureachthestartinglocationyouspecifiedinstep3,
recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboardandoperate
controllerssuchasthejoysticktorecordyourperformance.
Whenyoureachtheendinglocationyouspecifiedinstep3,
recordingwillend.(Playbackwillcontinue.)
Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothelocationyou
specifiedinstep4.
Auto Punch In Start Measure [M001M999]
Auto Punch In End Measure [M001M999]
WhenRecordingSetupissettoAutoPunchIn,specifythe
measuresatwhichrecordingwillstartandend.
Loop All Tracks
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtorepeatedlyrecorda
specifiedareaofatrack,andcontinueaddingdata.Thisis
suitableforcreatingdrumpatterns,etc.
IfMultiRECischecked,thisparameterwillnotbe
available.
Thismethodletsyoucontinuerecordingasyouaddmusical
data.
Thespecifiedregioncanberecordedrepeatedly.Thisis
idealwhenrecordingdrumphrases,etc.
UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwanttorecord.
1. SettheRecordingSetuptoLoopAllTracks.
2. IfMultiRECischecked,itwillnotbepossibletoselect
LoopAllTracks.
3. InM(LoopStartMeasure),M(LoopEndMeasure)
specifytheareathatyouwishtorecord.
Forexample,ifyouspecifyM004M008,recordingwill
occurrepeatedly(asaloop)frommeasure4tomeasure8.
Sequencer mode
118
4. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasuresear
lierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecord
ing.
STOP( )button.
Playbackwillbegin.Whenyoureachthestartinglocation
youspecifiedinstep3,recordingwillbegin.Playthe
keyboardandoperatecontrollerssuchasthejoystickto
recordyourperformance.
Whenyoureachtheendinglocationyouspecifiedinstep3,
youwillreturntothestartinglocation,andcontinue
recording.
6. Themusicaldatathatislooprecordedwillbeaddedto
thepreviouslyrecordeddata.
Youcanalsoerasespecificdatawhileyoucontinueloop
recording.Thisisusefulif,forexample,youneedtodeletea
mistakewithoutinterruptingtheflowoftherecording.
IfyoupresstheREC( )buttonduringlooprecording,all
musicaldatawillberemovedfromthecurrentlyselected
trackaslongasyoucontinuepressingtheswitch.
BycheckingtheRemoveDatacheckboxyoucaneraseonly
thespecifieddata.Duringlooprecording,pressthenote
thatyouwishtodelete,andonlythedataofthatnote
numberwillbedeletedfromthekeyboardaslongasyou
continuepressingthatnote.
Similarly,benderdatawillbedeletedaslongasyoutiltthe
joystickintheX(horizontal)direction,andaftertouchdata
willbedeletedaslongasyouapplypressuretothe
keyboard.
Whenyouareonceagainreadytorecordmusicaldata,
unchecktheRemoveDatacheckbox.
Playbackwillend,andyouwillreturntotherecordingstart
locationthatyouspecifiedinstep4.
IfLoopAllTracksisselected,normalplaybackwillbe
loopedaswell.
Loop Start Measure [M001M999]
Loop End Measure [M001M999]
Specifiestherangeofmeasuresoverwhichrecordingwill
repeatwhenRecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks.
Remove Data [Off, On]
UsethistodeleteunwantedMIDIdatathatyourecorded
whileusingLoopAllTracks.Thisisavailablewhen
RecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks.
On(checked):YoucandeleteunwantedMIDIdatawhile
recordingwithLoopAllTracks.Duringrecording,pressthe
key(notenumber)thatcorrespondstotheMIDInotedata
youwishtodelete.Alloccurrencesofthatnotenumberwill
bedeletedforthetimethatyoucontinueholdingdownthe
key.
Controllerdatacanalsobeerasedinasimilarway.For
examplewhileyoumoveandholdthejoystickintheX
(horizontal)direction,benderdatawillbeerased.This
appliestoJoystick+Y(CC#01)/Y(CC#02),JoystickX(Pitch
Bend),andDamper(CC#64).
Also,youcanpressandholddowntheREC( )buttonto
deleteallMIDIdataforaslongasthekeyisheld.
Multi REC [Off, On]
On(checked):Multitrackrecordingsetupisenabled.Select
thisifyouwanttorecordtwoormoretracks
simultaneously.
UseMIDImultitrackrecordingifyouwantto
simultaneouslyrecordmultipleMIDItracksofdifferent
channels,suchaswhenrecordingtheoutputofthedrum
track,arpeggiatororRPPRfunctions,orwhenrecordingthe
outputofanexternalmultitracksequencer.
IftheMultiRECboxischecked,thePlay/Rec/Mutestatusof
thetrackyouselectinTrackSelectwillbesettoREC;press
thePlay/Rec/Mutebuttonofthetrack(s)youwanttorecord
sothattheyindicateREC.(Thebuttonindicationwill
changeintheorderofPlayRecMute.)
RegardlessoftheTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a)setting,data
willberecordedontheMIDItracksthataresettoREC.
MIDIdatawillberoutedtothetrackswithacorresponding
MIDIchannel.
Fordetailsonhowtorecordfromthearpeggiatororan
externalmultitracksequencerontomultipletracksof
differentMIDIchannels,pleaseseeSynchronizingthe
playbackoftheArpeggiator,DrumTrackfunctionor
sequenceronpage 367.
Note:Ifyourerecordingdatafromanexternalmultitrack
sequencer,setMIDIClock(Global11a)toExternalMIDI
sothattheKROMEwillsynchronizetoyourexternal
sequencer.Tempochangescannotberecorded.
Off(unchecked):Singletrackrecordingsetupwillbe
selected.RecordingwilloccuronthetrackselectedbyTrack
Select.
MultiREC.cannotbeselectedifRecordingSetupisset
toLoopAllTracks.
1. MakethedesiredRecordingSetupsettings.
YoucanrecordusingOverwrite,Overdub,ManualPunch
In,orAutoPunchIn.
2. InRecordingSetup,checkMultiREC.
3. UseLocationtospecifythemeasureatwhichrecord
ingwillbegin.
4. PresstheREC( )button.
5. Forthetrackyouwanttorecord,pressPlay/Rec/Muteto
makeitindicateRec.
WiththedefaultsettingsforMetronomeSetup,the
metronomewillsoundforatwomeasureprecount,and
thenrecordingwillbegin.Nowyoucanperformonthe
keyboardandcontrollers,andusethearpeggiatororRPPR
functionsifdesired.
Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothelocation
specifiedinstep3.
SEQ P0: Play/REC 09: Play Loop T0108, 010: Play Loop T0916
119
08c: Metronome Setup
Here,youcanmakemetronomesettings.
Sound [Only REC, REC & Play, Off]
OnlyREC:Themetronomewillsoundonlyduring
recording.
REC&Play:Themetronomewillsoundduringrecording
andplayback.
Off:Themetronomewillnotsoundduringplaybackor
recording.However,theprecountmetronomewillsound
beforerecordingbegins.
Level [000127]
Setsthevolumeofthemetronome.
Bus (Output) Select [L/R, L, R]
Selectstheoutputdestinationofthemetronomesound.
L/R:OutputfromAUDIOOUTPUTL/MonoandR.
L:OutputfromAUDIOOUTPUTL/Mono.
R:OutputfromAUDIOOUTPUTR.
Precount [Measure] [02]
Specifiestheprecountthatwilloccurbeforerecording
begins.
Withasettingof0,recordingwillbegintheinstantyou
presstheSTART/STOP( )button(afterfirstpressing
theREC( )button).
V 08: Menu Command
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
09: Play Loop T0108,
010: Play Loop T0916
Whenplayingorrecordingasong,youcanindependently
looptheMIDItracks.
Mode, Song Select, Track
Select, Reso, RPPR
09(10)b: Play Loop
Selected Track Info
ThisdisplaysinformationaboutthecurrentlyselectedMIDI
track.Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:Track
ProgramSelectonpage 111.
Indicatesthecategory.
Track Play Loop [Off, On]
SpecifiesloopingforaMIDItrack.
On(checked):ThattrackwillloopbetweenLoopStart
MeasureandLoopEndMeasure.
Loop Start Measure [001...999]
Specifiesthefirstmeasureoftheloop.
Loop End Measure [001...999]
Specifiesthelastmeasureoftheloop.
Play Intro [Off, On]
On(checked):AfterthemeasuresbeforethespecifiedLoop
StartMeasureareplayedonce,theregionofLoopStart
MeasureLoopEndMeasurewillbeplayedrepeatedly.
Forexample,youcanusethisonadrumtracktomakeit
playafillinandthenbeginlooping.
Off(unchecked):PlaybackwillbeginfromtheLoopStart
Measure,andwillbeginloopingimmediately.
ThiswillbevalidifTrackPlayLoopischeckedand
LoopStartMeasureissettootherthan001.
09a
09b
09
Menu
Sequencer mode
120
Example)
When Play Intro is checked
Track1willloopasfollows.
M001M002M003M004M003M004M003
M004
When Play Intro is not checked
Track1willloopasfollows.
M003M004M003M004M003M004M003
M004
Inthisway,youcanuseTrackPlayLooptomakethe
realtimerecordingprocessmoreefficient.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTrack01(Track
Number):above.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
Controls
REALTIMECONTROLSletsyouuseknobs[1][4]to
modifytheparametersofthetracksprogramortheeffects.
Youcanalsousetheseknobstocontrolthearpeggiators.
Whenyouuseaknob,thedisplaywillshowthecontrollers
functionandvalue.UsetheSELECTbuttontochangethe
knobfunctions.
InTONE,thefunctionsassignedtoknobs14arefixed.
InUSER,youcanassignavarietyofmodulationfunctions
toknobs14.Toassignfunctions,usetheP1:Controllers
Setuppage(seep.122).
Realtime Controls
TheRealtimeControlsTONEknobfunctions(TONE
[CUTOFF]TONE[RELEASE])arefixed.Youcanassigna
varietyoffunctionstoRealtimeControlsUSERknobs14
(USER[1]USER[4]).MIDIcontrolchangesareassignedfor
eachfunction.
MIDICC.
Whenyouoperateaknob,thecorrespondingMIDIcontrol
changemessagewillbetransmittedontheTrackSelect
MIDIchannel.
Mostofthesefunctionsadjust(scale)theparametersettings
ofthetrackprograms.Unlessotherwisenoted,scaling
meansthattheparametersareattheirprogrammedvalues
whenthecontrollerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe
controllerisat0,andattheirmaximumwhenthecontroller
isat127.Foranotherlookatthis,pleaseseethediagram
below.
CC scaling of parameters
TONE [CUTOFF]: Flt Fc (Cutoff ) [000127]
ThissliderscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAandB,
TONE [RESONANCE]: Flt Reso (Resonance)
[000127]
ThissliderscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and
TONE [EG INT]: Flt EG (Filter EG Intensity)
[000127]
ThissliderscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
MIDICC#79.
TONE [RELEASE]: EG Rel (EG Release) [000127]
ThissliderscalesthereleasetimeoftheFilterandAmpEGs,
99
00
64 0 127
CC Value
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
SEQ P0: Play/REC Controls
121
USER [1]...USER[4] [000...127]
YoucansetRealtimeControlsUSERknobs14toawide
varietyofmodulationfunctions,usingtheP1:Controllers
ControllersSetuppage.
messagesusuallyCCs.
Arpeggiator
Arpeggiocontrolletsyouusethefourknobstocontrolthe
twoarpeggiatorsinrealtime.
swing,andthestep.
ARP [GATE] [64...+00...+63]
(SeeGateonpage 54).
ARP [VELOCITY] [64...+00...+63]
onpage 54).
ARP [SWING] [64...+00...+63]
Swingonpage 54).
ARP [STEP] [64...+00...+63]
Thisaffectsthelengthandresolutionofthearpeggio
pattern.
Sequencer mode
122
SEQ P1: Controllers
11: Setup
Here,youcanassignthefunctionsperformedbySW1and
SW2,andbyknobs14whenRealtimeControlsUSERis
selected.
Whenyouoperatetheseknobsduringrecording,theMIDI
messagesassignedtothemwillberecorded.
Note:ThePanelSwitchAssignsettingoftheprogram
assignedtoeachtrackwillhavenoeffect.
11a: Track Select, Tempo, RPPR, Track
Info, Selected Track Info
, (Tempo) [040.00300.00, EXT]
RPPR [Off, On]
controlthearpeggiatoretc.,andturnRPPRon/off.
onpage 109.
Selected Track Info
Thisareashowsdetailedinformationaboutitstrack
assignments.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSelectedTrackInfoon
page 111.
11b: Panel Switch 1/2 Assign
SW (SW1 Assign) [Off, ..., JS-Y Lock]
off.
Note:Iftheon/offstatusoftheSW1,SW2switchesis
memorizedwhenyousaveit.
switch.
Toggle:Thefunctionwillalternatebetweenonandoffeach
Momentary:Thefunctionwillbeononlywhileyou
assignedtoSW2arethesameasforSW1,withthe
substitutionofSW2Mod.(CC#81)insteadoftheSW1sSW1
Mod.(CC#80).
11c: Realtime Controls Knob Assign
Here,youcanassignthefunctions(mainlytypesofcontrol
change)thatknobs14willhavewhenRealTimeControls
USER.(SeeRealtimeControlsKnobs14Assignmentson
page 348.)
V 11: Menu Command
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
11c
11b
11a
11
Menu
SEQ P2: EQ 21: Trim T0108, 22: Trim T0916
123
SEQ P2: EQ
21: Trim T0108,
22: Trim T0916
Here,youcansetthesignallevelthatenterstheEQoftracks
18and916.
, (Tempo) [040.00300.00, EXT]
RPPR [Off, On]
controlthearpeggiatoretc.,andturnRPPRon/off.
onpage 109.
21(2)b: Track Info
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:TrackProgram
Selectonpage 111.
21(2)c: Trim
Auto Load Prog EQ [Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTrack,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsEQsettingswillbe
loadedaswell.
alloftheEQsettingsasdesired.Allsucheditsarestoredin
theSong,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
Regardlessofthissetting,subsequenteditstothePrograms
EQinProgrammodewillnotaffecttheSong.
On:theProgramsEQsettingswillbeloadedautomatically
alongwiththeProgram.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Off:theProgramsEQsettingswontbeloaded.Usethisif
youvesetuptheEQinaspecificway,andthenwantitto
stayunchangedwhileyoutryoutdifferentPrograms.
Bypass [Off, On]
IfthisisOn(checked),alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingInputTrim.Bypasscanbeconvenientfor
comparingtheresultsoftheEQwiththeoriginalsignal.
Input Trim [0099]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Notethat
thisparameterusesalinearscale;50isequivalentto6 dB,
25isthesameas12 dB,andsoon.
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGain(Seq23(4)a)
controlscancausesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.
Youcancompensateforthisbyturningdowntheinputtrim.
Here,youcansettheparametersforMIDItracks28and9
16.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNumber):above.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
21c
21b
21a
21
Menu
Sequencer mode
124
23: EQ T0108,
24: EQ T0916
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforthemidsweepable
threebandEQforeachMIDItrack.
23(4)b: Track Info
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:TrimT0108,22:
TrimT0916onpage 123.
23(4)c: 3 Band Parametric EQ
High Gain [dB] [18.0+00.0+18.0]
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Mid Freq [Hz] (Mid Frequency) [10010k]
Mid Gain [dB] [18.0+00.0+18.0]
0.5 dB.
Low Gain [dB] [18.0+00.0+18.0]
incrementsof0.5 dB.
midrange)forMIDItracks28and916.Theyarethesame
asfortrack1.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTrack01
(TrackNumber):above.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
23c
23a
23b
23
Menu
SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters) 31: MIDI T0108, 32: MIDI T0916
125
SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters)
31: MIDI T0108,
32: MIDI T0916
Here,youcanmakeMIDIrelatedsettingsforeachMIDItrack.
Reso, RPPR
31(2)b:Track Info
onpage 109.
31(2)c: MIDI
Status [Off, INT, BTH, EXT, EX2]
ThissetswhethertheTrackcontrolstheinternalsounds,
externalMIDIdevices,orboth.
WhencontrollingexternalMIDIdevices,italsoallowsyou
tochoosetheinternalBankSelectnumbers(assetbythe
frontpanelbuttons),orusecustomBankSelectsettingsto
matchtheexternaldevice.
Off:UsethistodisabletheTrack.Withthissetting,theTracks
Programwillnotsound,andMIDIdatawillnotbetransmitted.
INT:Thetrackwillsoundwhenyouplaybackthe
performancedatarecordedontheMIDItrack.Ifyouuse
TrackSelect(Seq01(2)a)toselectaMIDItrackthatissetto
INT,theKROMEssoundgeneratorwillproducesound
whenplayed.MIDIdatawillnotbetransmittedtoan
externaldevice.
BTH:BothINTandEXTareoperative.Whenthemusicaldata
recordedintheMIDItrackisplayedback,orwhenyouselecta
MIDItrackthatissettoBTHandplaythecontrollersofthe
KROME,theinternaltonegeneratoroftheKROMEwillsound,
andMIDIdatawillalsobetransmittedtoanexternaldevice.
EXT:WhenthemusicaldatarecordedintheMIDItrackis
playedback,orwhenyouselectaMIDItrackthatissetto
EXTandplaythecontrollersoftheKROME,MIDIdatawill
betransmittedtoanexternaldevice,buttheinternaltone
generatoroftheKROMEwillnotsound.
Whenyouselectanothersongorreturntothebeginningof
thesong,theprogramchange,volume,panpot,portamento,
sends1and2,postIFXpan,andpostIFXsends1and2of
eachMIDItracksettoEXTwillbetransmittedviaMIDI.
(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDIOuton
page 200)
EX2:ThisenablesyoutospecifyaparticularMIDIBank
SelectmessagefortheTrack,insteadofautomaticallyusing
theBankoftheselectedKROMEProgram.Usethe
parametersbelow,labeledBankSelectMSB(WhenStatus
=EX2),tosettheBankSelectmessageasdesired.Inother
respectsthisisthesameasEXT,describedabove.
MIDIdataistransmittedandreceivedontheMIDI
channelthatisspecifiedseparatelyforeachMIDItrack
bytheMIDIChannel.
MIDI Channel [0116]
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthattheMIDItrackwilluseto
transmitandreceivemusicaldata.TheMIDIchannelyou
specifyherewillbethereceivechannelwhenStatusisINT,
thetransmitchannelwhenitisEXTorEX2,andthereceive/
transmitchannelwhenitisBTH.TrackssettoINTwhich
havethesameMIDIchannelwillsoundandbecontrolled
identicallywhentheyreceiveMIDIdataordatafromthe
sequencertracks.
Bank Select MSB (When Status=EX2) [000...127]
Bank Select LSB (When Status=EX2) [000...127]
WhenStatusissettoEX2,thissetsthebanknumberthat
willbetransmitted.WhenStatusisotherthanEX2,this
settinghasnoeffect.
ThesearetheMIDIrelatedsettingsforMIDItracks28and
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
31c
31a
31b
31
Menu
Status
Keyboard,
Sequencer, & MIDI In
play Internal Sounds
Keyboard & Sequencer Transmit
MIDI Out
OFF No No
INT Yes No
EXT No
Yes(usingtheBankSelect
messageofthetracksProgram)
EX2 No
Yes(usingtheBankSelect
messagespecifiedontheMIDI
taboftheTrackParampage)
BTH Yes Yes
Sequencer mode
126
33: OSC T0108,
34: OSC T0916
TheseparametersspecifyhoweachMIDItrackwillbe
sounded.
Reso, RPPR
33(4)b:Track Info
onpage 109.
33(4)c: OSC
Force OSC Mode [PRG, Poly, MN, LGT]
ThisletsyouoverridetheProgramsstoredVoiceAssign
Modesettings,ifdesired.
PRG:TheProgramsstoredProgP1:Basic/Controllers
ProgramBasicVoiceAssignModesettingswillbeused.
Poly:Thetrackwillplaypolyphonically,regardlessofthe
Programssettings.
MN(Mono):Thetrackwillplaymonophonically,regardless
oftheProgramssettings.
LGT(Legato):Thetrackprogramwillsound
monophonically,andwillplaylegatoaccordingtothe
ProgramsModesetting(Prog11b).
WiththeMNorLGTsettings,theProgramsPrioritysetting
(Prog11b)willdeterminethepriorityofthenotethat
soundswhenyouplaytwoormorenotes.
OSC Select [BTH, OS1, OS2]
SpecifieswhethertheMIDItracksprogramwillplayOSC1,
OSC2,orboth.
ForprogramswhoseOscillatorMode(Prog11a)isDouble
orDoubleDrums,thissettingletsyouspecifythatonly
OSC1orOSC2willsound.
BTH(Both):OSC1and2willsoundasspecifiedbythe
settingsoftheprogram.
OS1:OnlyOSC1willsound.
OS2:OnlyOSC2willsound.PCMprogramswillnotsound
ifOscillatorModeissettoSingleorDrums.
Portamento [PRG, Off, 001...127]
MakeportamentosettingsforeachMIDItrack.
Theportamentosettingyoumakeherewillbeusedwhen
thesongisplayedorrecordedfromthebeginning.Ifyou
changethesettingwhilerecording,itwillberecordedas
partofthemusicaldata.(HoweverifyousetthistoPRG,it
willnotberecorded.)Youcanchangethissettingduring
playback.HoweverifyouplaybackanyPortamentoOn/Off
dataorPortamentoTimedatathatwaspreviouslyrecorded,
thesettingswillchangeaccordingly.
WhenthetrackwhoseStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTH,
MIDIcontrolchangeCC#05(PortamentoTime)andCC#65
(PortamentoSwitch)canbereceivedtocontrolthisand
changethesetting.(IfthesettingisPRG,CC#05Portamento
Timewillnotbereceived.)
Whenyouswitchsongsorreturntothebeginningofthe
song,trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2willtransmit
thissettingviaMIDI.IfthisisOff,CC#65withavalueof0
willbetransmitted.Ifthisis001127,aCC#65of127and
CC#05of1127willbetransmitted.
IfthisissettoPRG,nothingwillbetransmitted.
ThisdataistransmittedandreceivedontheMIDIchannel
specifiedforeachtrackbyMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c).(See
GlobalP1:MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
Here,youcanmakeOSCsettingsforMIDItracks28and9
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
33c
33a
33b
33
Menu
SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters) 35: Pitch T0108, 36: Pitch T0916
127
35: Pitch T0108,
36: Pitch T0916
Here,youcanmakepitchrelatedsettingsforeachMIDI
track.
Mode, Song Select, Track Select, Reso,
RPPR
35(6)b: Track Info
onpage 109.
35(6)c: Pitch
Transpose [60...+00...+60]
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinsemitonesteps.
12unitsequaloneoctave.
Detune (Use BPM Adjust in Menu)
[1200...+0000... +1200]
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinonecentunits.
+0000:Normalpitch.
Note:YoucanalsousetheDetuneBPMAdjustmenu
command(seepage 103)toautomaticallymakeadetune
settingfromacalculationinBPMunits.
TransposeandDetunedonotaffectthenotes
transmittedviaMIDIOut.TransposeandDetunecan
becontrolledviaMIDIRPNmessagesreceivedonthe
TracksMIDIchannel.Thewaythatthisworksdepends
onwhetherornottheTrackusesaDrumProgram.
IftheTrackdoesnotuseaDrumProgramforexample,
ifitusesaSingleorDoubleProgramthenMIDIRPN
CoarseTunewillcontrolTranspose,andRPNFine
TunewillcontrolDetune.
IftheTrackusesanDrumProgram,MIDIRPNCoarse
TuneandFineTunewillbecombinedtocontrol
Detune.Theoverallrangeis1octaveforcoarsetune
andfinetunetogether.
Bend Range [PRG, 24...+00...+24]
Specifiestheamountofpitchchangethatwilloccurwhen
thepitchbenderisoperated,insemitoneunits.
PRG:Thepitchrangespecifiedbytheprogramwillbeused.
24+24:Thissettingwillbeusedregardlessofthesetting
intheprogram.
AslongasthissettosomethingotherthanPRG,you
cancontroltheBendRangeusingMIDIRPNPitch
BendChangemessages.
Here,youcanmakepitchrelatedsettingsforMIDItracks2
8and916.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.Formore
information,pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNumber):above.
seep.164
12:DetuneBPMAdjustseep.103
Commandonpage 163.
35c
35a
35b
35
Menu
Sequencer mode
128
37: Scale T0108,
38: Scale T0916
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforthescaleforeachMIDI
track.
RPPR
37(8)b: Track Info
onpage 109.
37(8)c: Scale
Use Programs Scale [Off, On]
MIDItrackcanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale(Prog
12b).
On(checked):Thescalespecifiedbytheprogramwillbe
used.
Off(unchecked):ThescalespecifiedbyScalewillbeused.
Here,youcansettheparametersforthescaleofeachtrack
28and916.Thesettingsarethesameasfortrack1.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNumber):
above.
Scale:
Thisspecifiesthescalethatthesongwilluse.Formore
information,pleasesee12d:Scaleonpage 15.
Type (Songs Scale)
[Equal Temperament...User Octave Scale15]
Selectsthescale.
Key [CB]
Random [07]
Asthisvalueisincreased,anincreasinglyrandomdeviation
willbeaddedtothepitchateachnoteon.
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINT,thissettingwillaffectthe
pitchproducedbytheKROME.IfStatusisEXT,this
settingwillaffectthenotenumberofthenotemessages
transmittedviaMIDI.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
37c
37a
37b
37
Menu
SEQ P4: Zones/Delay 41: Key Zone T0108, 42: Key Zone T0916 (Keyboard Zones T0108, T0916)
129
SEQ P4: Zones/Delay
41: Key Zone T0108,
42: Key Zone T0916
(Keyboard Zones T0108, T0916)
Here,youcanspecifythekeyzonesinwhichMIDItracks1
8and916willsound.
Thetop/bottomkeysettingsspecifythezoneinwhichMIDI
tracks18and916willsound,andthetop/bottomslope
settingsspecifythekeyrangeoverwhichthevolumewill
changestartingfromthetop/bottomkey.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee41:KeyZoneT0108,4
2:KeyZoneT0916(KeyboardZonesT0108,T0916)on
page 129.
ThesesettingsdonotaffectMIDItransmission/
reception.Allnotedatathatisreceivedwillberecorded
intotheinternalsequencer,andallnotedatafromthe
internalsequencerorfromthekeyboardwillbe
transmitted.
41(2)a: Zone Map
eachMIDItrack(116)willsound.
Thedisplayuseslinestoindicatetherangeofnotesand
velocitiesthatwillsound,andshowtheslopeportionina
differentcolor.
41(2)b: Track Select, Tempo, RPPR
41(2)c: Track Info
41(2)d: Keyboard Zones
Top Key [C1...G9]
Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundforeachMIDItrack.
Top Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthetopkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthetopkey.
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctave
belowthetopkey.
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctaves
belowthetopkey.
Bottom Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthebottomkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthebottom
key.
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctaveabovethe
bottomkey.
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctavesabovethe
bottomkey.
Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundforeachMIDItrack.
41a
41b
41c
41d
41
Menu
1 16
MIDI Track
C1 G9 E1
MIDI
Track 1
Velocity zone display
MIDI
Track16
Key zone display
Bottom Key
Bottom Slope Top Slope
Top Velocity
Bottom Velocity
Top Slope
Bottom Slope
Top Key
Zone Map
Bottom Key Top Key
Key
Volume
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Sequencer mode
130
akey(seeOGp.10).
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomkeyabovethetopkey
ofthesametrack.Norisitpossibleforthetopand
bottomslopestooverlap.
ThesearethekeyzonesettingsforMIDItracks28and9
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
43: Vel Zone T0108,
44: Vel Zone T0916
(Velocity Zones T0108, T0916)
Here,youcansettheTop/BottomVelocityparametersto
specifytherangeofvelocitiesthatwillbesoundedbyMIDI
tracks18and916,andTop/BottomSlopespecifytherange
overwhichthevolumewillbeadjusted.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee43:VelZoneT0108,44:
VelZoneT0916(VelocityZonesT0108,T0916)on
page 130.
ThesesettingsdonotaffectMIDItransmission/
reception.Allnotedatathatisreceivedwillberecorded
intotheinternalsequencer,andallnotedatafromthe
internalsequencerorfromthekeyboardwillbe
transmitted.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomvelocitygreaterthan
thetopvelocityforthesametrack.Norcanthetop
slopeandthebottomslopeoverlap.
43(4)a: Zone Map
eachMIDItrackwillsound.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee41(2)a:ZoneMapon
page 129.
43(4)c: Track Info
43(4)d: Velocity Zones
Top Velocity [1127]
Specifiesthemaximumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
track.
Top Slope [0120]
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheTop
Velocity.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthetop
velocity.
topvelocity.
Bottom Slope [0120]
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheBottom
Velocity.
43a
43b
43c
43d
43
Menu
SEQ P4: Zones/Delay 45: Delay T0108, 46: Delay T0916
131
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthebottom
velocity.
bottomvelocity.
Specifiestheminimumvelocitythatwillbesoundedbyeach
MIDItrack116.
akey(seeOGp.10).
ThesearethevelocityzonesettingsforMIDItracks28and
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
45: Delay T0108,
46: Delay T0916
Thisspecifiesthetime(delay)fromwhentheMIDItracks1
8and916receiveanoteonmessageuntilthesoundbegins.
45(6)b: Track Info
45(6)c: Delay
Delay Time [ms] [00005000ms, KeyOff]
Specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntiltheMIDI
trackbeginstoproducesound,inunitsofms(1/1000thofa
second).ThissettingisavailableifMIDI/TempoSync.isset
toOff.
KeyOff:Thenotewillbeginsoundingatnoteoff.Inthis
case,thesoundwillnotdieawayifthesustainlevelofthe
programsampEGisotherthan0.Thissettingisusedwhen
creatingharpsichordsounds.
Normallyyouwillsetthisto0000.
Thetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetrackproduces
soundwillbespecifiedinnotelengthunitsrelativetothe
, (Tempo).
On(checked):SpecifythedelaytimeintermsofaBase
NoteandTimesrelativetotheTempo.ForexampleifBase
Note=,,Times=01,andTempo=60BPM,thedelaytime
willbeequivalentto1000ms.
Off(unchecked):ThedelaytimewillbesetbytheDelay
Timesetting.
Base Note [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Times [01...32]
Itspecifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetrack
beginstoproducesound,intermsofanotevaluerelativeto
the, (Tempo)(Seq01(2)a).
UseBaseNotetospecifythedesirednotevalue,anduse
Timestoextendthatnotevaluebythespecifiedmultiple.
ForexampleifyousetBaseNotetoaquarternote( , )and
Timesto02,thattrackwillsoundwithadelayofahalfnote
( ).Evenifyouchange, (Tempo)(Seq01(2)a),thedelay
timewillalwaysbeahalfnote( ).Ifyouusethese
parameterstospecifyadelayofahalfnote( ).Inthiscase,a
Tempoof60.00BPMwillproducea2000msdelay,anda
Tempoof120.00BPMwillproducea1000msdelay.
Bottom Velocity Top Velocity
Velocity
Volume
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
45c
45a
45b
45
Menu
Sequencer mode
132
ThesearethedelaytimesettingsforMIDItracks28and9
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P5: MIDI Filter 51: <1> T0108, 52: <1> T0916
133
SEQ P5: MIDI Filter
Here,youcanselectwhetherornottoapplyfilteringtothe
MIDIdatareceivedbyMIDItracks116.Forexampleeven
iftwotracksarereceivingthesameMIDIchannel,onecan
besettorespondtodamperpedalactivitywhiletheother
doesnot.
TheseMIDIfiltersettingshavenoeffectontheMIDI
messagesthathavealreadybeenrecorded.
ThesesettingsaffecttheMIDImessagesthatare
transmittedwhenyouadjustprogram,pan,volume,
portamentoandsend1/2parametersofatrackwhose
Status(Seq31(2)c)issettoBTH,EXT,orEX2.
On(checked):ReceptionofMIDIdataisenabled.Tracks
whoseStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTHwillreceivethese
typesofMIDImessagesontheirrespectivechannels.The
typeofeffectsthatarecheckedwillbeappliedtothe
programofeachtrackwhentheKROMEscontrollersare
operatedorwhenMIDIdataisreceived.(Theeffect
dynamicmodulationfunctionisnotaffectedbythese
settings.)
SettingsthatregulateMIDItransmission/receptionofthe
KROMEitselfaremadeinMIDIFilter(Global12b).
Iftheuserassignablecontrollersthatcanbefilteredinthe
MIDIFilter14and25pagesaresettoMIDIcontrol
changes,filteringwillbeperformedforthesecontrol
changes.Inthiscase,anycontrolchangefilteringthatis
beingperformedintheMIDIFilter11to13pageswillbe
givenpriority.Furthermore,ifthesamecontrolchangeis
assignedtomultiplecontrollersforwhichtherearefilter
settingsintheMIDIFilter14and25pages,checkingany
oneofthesewillenablethatcontrolchange.
Off(unchecked):ReceptionofMIDIdataisdisabled.
Note:MIDICC#=MIDIcontrolchangemessagenumbers.
51: <1> T0108,
52: <1> T0916
51(2)b: Track Info
51(2)c: MIDI Filter 1
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIprogramchangemessages
willbereceived.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIaftertouchmessageswillbe
received.
Enable Damper [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#64hold(damperpedal)
messageswillbereceived.
Enable Portamento SW [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#65portamentoon/off
messageswillbereceived.
ThesearetheMIDIFilter1settingsforMIDItracks28and
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
51c
51b
51a
51
Menu
Sequencer mode
134
53: <2> T0108,
54: <2> T0916
53(4)b: Track Info
Enable JS X as AMS [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIpitchbendmessages(theX
axisofthejoystick)willbereceivedtocontroltheAMS
effectassignedtoJSX.(ThisisnotafilterforMIDIpitch
bendmessagereception.)Formoreinformation,pleasesee
AlternateModulationSources(AMS)onpage 339.
Enable JS+Y [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthe
joystick,oraRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbe
received.
Enable JSY [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthe
joystick,oraRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbe
received.
Enable Ribbon [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#16(specifiedasthe
assignmentofaRealtimeControlsknob)willbetransmitted
orreceived.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
55: <3> T0108,
56: <3> T0916
Here,youcanspecifywhethertheeffectofknobs14when
theSELECTbuttonhasselectedRealtimeControlsTONE
willbetransmittedandreceived.TheMIDIcontrol
TONEisselectedarefixed.
55(6)b: Track Info
Enable Realtime ControlsCUTOFF [Off, On]
EnablesordisablesreceptionofMIDICC#74(theKROMEs
filtercutofffrequency),whichisassignedtoknob1when
RealtimeControlsTONEisselected.
Enable Realtime ControlsRESONANCE [Off, On]
filterresonancelevel),whichisassignedtoknob2when
Enable Realtime ControlsEG INTENSITY [Off, On]
filterEGintensity),whichisassignedtoknob3when
53c
53b
53a
53
Menu
55c
55b
55a
55
Menu
SEQ P5: MIDI Filter 57: <4> T0108, 58: <4> T0916
135
Enable Realtime ControlsRELEASE [Off, On]
filter/ampEGreleasetime),whichisassignedtoknob4
whenRealtimeControlsTONEisselected.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
57: <4> T0108,
58: <4> T0916
Here,youcanenableordisabletransmissionandreception
forthefunctionsofknobs14whentheSELECTbuttonis
settoRealtimeControlsUSER.UsetheP1:Controllers
ControllersSetuppagetoassignthefunctionsthatknobs1
4willperformwhenRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
57(8)b: Track Info
Enable Realtime ControlsUSER [1] [Off, On]
ThesesettingsenableordisablereceptionoftheMIDI
USERisselected.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
59: <5> T0108,
510: <5> T0916
59(10)b: Track Info
57c
57b
57a
57
Menu
59c
59b
59a
59
Menu
Sequencer mode
136
59(10)c: MIDI Filter
ThesesettingsspecifywhetherSW1Mod(CC#80)andSW2
Mod(CC#81)willbetransmittedandreceivediftheyare
assignedtotheSW1andSW2buttons.
Note:IfPortamentoSW(CC#65)isassignedtoSW1orSW2,
theEnablePortamentoSWsettingontheMIDI<1>pagewill
takepriority.
Note:ThefunctionsofSW1andSW2areassignedontheP1:
ControllersSetuppage(seep.122).
Enable Foot Switch [Off, On]
SWITCHwillbereceived.ThefunctionisassignedinGlobal
P2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
assigned.
Enable Foot Pedal [Off, On]
PEDALwillbereceived.ThefunctionisassignedinGlobal
P2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
assigned.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
511: <6> T0108,
512: <6> T0916
511(12)b: Track Info
Enable Other Control Change Messages [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIcontrolmessagesnotcovered
intheprecedingMIDIFilteritemswillbereceived.
Enable Waveform SysEx [Off, On]
ThisenablesordisablesreceptionofMIDIsystemexclusive
messagesthatfreelyswitchthemultisampleusedbyan
oscillatorwhiletheprogramissounding.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
5-11c
5-11b
5-11a
5-11
Menu
SEQ P6: Track Edit 61: Track Edit
137
SEQ P6: Track Edit
61: Track Edit
Here,youcaneditMIDItracks116,andthemastertrack.
WheneditingaMIDItrack,youcanmove,insert,anddelete
individualnoteeventsorcontrolchangedata,orcopy,
move,insert,anddeletemeasuresortracks.Youcanalso
performStepRecordinginthispage.
Wheneditingthemastertrack,youcaneditthetempoand
thetimesignature.
Note:Toperformtrackediting(orstepediting),useTrack
Selecttoselectthetrackyouwanttoedit,anduseFrom
MeasureandToEndofMeasureparameterstospecifythe
regionthatyouwanttoedit.Thenchooseacommandfrom
themenu,andexecutetheedit.Fordetailsonthespecific
commands,pleaseseeSequencer:MenuCommandon
page 163.
Reso, RPPR
61b: Track Info
(01(2)a:Location,Meter,Tempo,TempoMode,Song
Select,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPRonpage 109)
(23:EQT0108,24:EQT0916onpage 124)
61c: Track data Map, From Measure, To
End of Measure
Track data Map
Thisareashowsthepresenceorabsenceofperformance
data,andindicatestheeditrange,etc.Thecurrentlyselected
Trackwillbehighlighted.
From Measure [001999]
To End of Measure [001999]
Specifiestherangeofmeasuresthatyouwishtoedit(or
copyfrom)orsteprecord.
UseFromMeasuretospecifythestartingmeasure,andTo
EndofMeasuretospecifytheendingmeasure.
Link From Measure current location [Off, On]
Ifthischeckboxisselected,theFromMeasuresettingwill
belinkedtothecurrentlocation,andthelocationofthe
displayedtrackwillalsochange.Thelocationwillchangeto
followthisevenduringplaybackorrecording.
V 61: Menu Command
2:StepRecordingseep.167
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.171
5:SetSongLengthseep.176
6:EraseTrackseep.176
7:CopyTrackseep.176
8:BounceTrackseep.177
9:EraseMeasureseep.177
10:DeleteMeasureseep.177
11:InsertMeasureseep.178
12:RepeatMeasureseep.178
13:CopyMeasureseep.179
14:MoveMeasureseep.179
15:CreateControlDataseep.180
16:EraseControlDataseep.181
17:Quantizeseep.181
18:Shift/EraseNoteseep.182
19:ModifyVelocityseep.183
21:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.
164
22:CreateExclusiveDataseep.183
23:EraseExclusiveDataseep.184
Commandonpage 163.
61c
61b
61a
61
Menu
MIDI Track
Master Track
From Measure Master track data
Locations move in synchronization
MIDI data
Measure no.
Patterns used
To End of Measure
Sequencer mode
138
62: Track View
HereyoucaneditMIDItracks116andthemastertrack.
Thispageprovidesanoverallviewofeachtracksdatasuch
asnote,velocity,andcontrolchangedata.
Inthetrackviewareayoucandragtoselecttrackand
measureregions,andmove,copy,orerasetracks.Youcan
alsoeditinmeasureunits.
Youcanalsousevariousmenucommandstoedittheregion
youselectedbydragging.
Reso, RPPR
62b: Track Info
(01(2)a:Location,Meter,Tempo,TempoMode,Song
Select,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPRonpage 109)
(23:EQT0108,24:EQT0916onpage 124)
Track Select [Track01...Track16, Master Track]
Hereyoucanselectthetracktoedit.ThisTrackSelect
settingwillchangewhenyoupressthetrackviewarea.
Whenthetrackchanges,thedisplaywillbrieflyturnblue.
Thehighlightedportionthatshowstheselectedregionof
thetrackviewareawillalsochangewhenyouchangethe
trackhere.
62c: Track View Area
Track View Area
Thisshowseventinformationforeachtrack,suchasnote,
velocity,andcontrolchangedata.(seeillustrationbelow)
Thehighlightedmeasuresarethosethatwillbeedited.The
regionisindicatedbytheFROMMEASUREandTOENDof
MEASUREfieldsintheupperpartofthescreen.
Youcanmove,copy,ordeletemeasuresandtracksinunits
ofonemeasure.
Note:Youcantspecifyarangeofmeasuresunlessatoolin
theboxtoolisselected.
Track View Area Select
Thisshowstrackinformationforthetrackviewarea.The
barattheleftindicatesthefourtracksshowninthetrack
viewarea.Thehighlightedtracknumberisthetrackthat
willbeedited.
Thetrackdisplayregionwillchangewhenyoutouchthe
tracknumber.
IntheTrackViewSetupdialogboxyoucanchangetheorder
ofthetracks.
Scroll buttons
Thesescrollthetracksormeasuresshowninthetrack
viewarea.Pressthescrollbuttoninthedirectionthatyou
wanttomove.Youcanalsoscrollbypressinginsidethe
trackviewareaanddraggingtowardtheouteredgeof
thebutton.
Tool box
Start point select tool
Usethistospecifythestartingmeasure(FROMMEASURE)
oftherangeofmeasuresyouwanttoedit.
Choosethistool,andthenpressameasureinatrackto
specifythestartingmeasure(andthetrack).Continue
holdingdownthestartingmeasure,dragtotheright,and
releaseattheendofthedesiredselection.Whiledragging,
youcandragacrossascrollbuttontoscrollthroughthe
measureswhilemaintainingtheselection.
Ifmorethanonemeasureisselectedeventhoughyou
actuallywantedtoselectonlyonemeasure,simplycontinue
pressingforapproximatelyonesecond;thesinglemeasure
yourepressingwillbeselected.
62c
62a
62b
62
Menu
Track View area select
The bar at left indicates the four
tracks shown in the track view
area (in this example, tracks 14).
Setup
Press this button to open
the Track View Setup dialog
box.
( Track View Setup)
Displays note events
in a one-octave range
( Track View Setup)
Track name indication
Control message name indication
( Track View Setup)
Scroll button Displays the values for the
control message name
indicated in the left of the
screen ( Track View Setup)
Selected region
Velocity indication
( Track View Setup)
Scroll button
Scroll button
Note events
Location bar
Track view area
Indicate the selected region. Linked
with the identically-named parameter
of the Track Edit page.
Pattern
Tool box
SEQ P6: Track Edit 62: Track View
139
Note:Whenselecting,theupperlineFROMMEASUREor
ToENDofMEASUREwillbrieflyturnblue,andwill
indicatetheselectedmeasurenumber.
End point select tool
Usethistospecifythelastmeasure(ToENDofMEASURE)
oftherangeofmeasuresthatyouwanttoedit.
Choosethistool,andthenpressameasureinatrackto
specifytheendingmeasure(andthetrack).Continue
holdingdownthestartingmeasure,dragtotheleft,and
releaseattheendofthedesiredselection.Whiledragging,
youcandragacrossascrollbuttontoscrollthroughthe
measureswhilemaintainingtheselection.
Ifmorethanonemeasureisselectedeventhoughyou
actuallywantedtoselectonlyonemeasure,simplycontinue
pressingforapproximatelyonesecond;thesinglemeasure
yourepressingwillbeselected.
Note:Whenselecting,theupperlineFROMMEASUREor
ToENDofMEASUREwillbrieflyturnblue,andwill
indicatetheselectedmeasurenumber.
Example)
Using the Start Point Select tool to specify a region
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Pressthedesiredstartingmeasureforthetrackin
whichyouwanttoselectaregion.
3. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothelastmeasureof
thedesiredrange,andreleaseyourfinger.
Youcanscrollthemeasuredisplaybydraggingyourfinger
ontooracrossascrollbar.
Theeditregionwillbeselectedandhighlighted.
Example)
Using the End Point Select tool to specify a region
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Pressthedesiredendingmeasureforthetrackinwhich
youwanttoselectaregion.
3. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothefirstmeasureof
thedesiredrange,andreleaseyourfinger.
Youcanscrollthemeasuredisplaybydraggingyourfinger
ontooracrossascrollbar.
Theeditregionwillbeselectedandhighlighted.
Move tool
Usethistomovethemeasuresoftheregionyouvespecified.
Usethe or tooltoselecttheregionthatyouwantto
move,andthenchoosethistool.Pressthemovedestination
measureordragtheselectedregionofmeasurestomovethem.
Ifdataexistsatthemovedestination,theDragMovedialog
boxwillappear,allowingyoutoselectwhethertooverwrite
orkeepthedataatthedestination.
Note:ThisoperationisequivalenttoexecutingtheMove
MeasuremenucommandwithModesettoStay(seep.179).
Example)
Moving the events of measures 12 to measures 56
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Dragovermeasures12tospecifytheeditregion.
3. Pressthe tool.
4. Pressmeasure5(themovedestinationmeasure).Alter
natively,dragtheeditregiontomeasure5.
5. Inthisexample,aneventexistsinthemovedestination
measure,sotheDragMovedialogboxwillappear.
Overwritewilloverwritethesourcedataoverthedestination
data(replacingthedestinationdatawiththesourcedata).
Mergewillcombinethesourceanddestinationdata.
PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethemove.
Iftherearenoeventsinthemovedestinationmeasures,this
dialogboxwillnotappear;themovewilloccurimmediately.
1
2 Scroll button
3
Scroll button
1
2
3 4
Sequencer mode
140
Example)
Moving the data of an entire track
1. Returnthelocationtothebeginning.
2. Pressthe tool.
3. Presstheleftsideofmeasure1inthetrackyouwantto
move.
4. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothemovedestina
tiontrack,andrelease.
Ifthemovedestinationmeasurescontainevents,theDrag
Movedialogboxwillappear.
Overwritewilloverwritethesourcedataoverthe
destinationdata(replacingthedestinationdatawiththe
sourcedata).Mergewillcombinethesourceanddestination
data.PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethemove.
Iftherearenoeventsinthemovedestinationmeasures,this
dialogboxwillnotappear;themovewilloccurimmediately.
Copy tool
Usethistocopytheeventsoftheselectedmeasures.
Usethe or tooltoselecttheregionthatyouwantto
copy,andthenchoosethistool.Pressthecopydestination
measureordragtheselectedregionofmeasurestothe
desiredcopydestination.Thedataatthecopydestination
willalwaysbeoverwritten.
Note:ThisoperationisequivalenttoexecutingtheCopy
Measuremenucommand(seep.179).
Example)
Copying the events of measures 12 to measures 34
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Dragovermeasures12tospecifytheeditregion.
3. Pressthe tool.
4. Pressmeasure3(thecopydestinationmeasure).Alter
natively,dragtheeditregiontomeasure3.
Thecopywillbeexecuted.
5. Ifdesired,youcanpressanothercopydestinationto
copythedatarepeatedly.
Example) Copying the data of an entire track
Youcancopythedataofanentiretracktoanothertrack.
RefertoExample)Movingthedataofanentiretrack.In
step2,choosethe tool.
Erase tool
Usethistoerasetheeventsfromtheselectedmeasures.
Choosethistool,andpressthemeasuresyouwanttoerase.
Theeventsofthosemeasureswillbeerased.
ThisoperationisequivalenttoexecutingtheEraseMeasure
commandwithKindsettoAll(SeeEraseMeasureon
page 177.).
Example) Erasing events
1. Pressthe tool.
If you choose Overwrite
The destination is overwritten
by the source data
If you choose Merge The two sets of data are combined
2
3
4
1
2
3 4
5
SEQ P6: Track Edit 62: Track View
141
2. Pressthefirstmeasurecontainingtheeventsyouwant
toerase,anddragtothelastmeasure.Ifdesired,you
canselectmeasuresinadjacenttracksforerasure(See
TrackNo.).Alternatively,youcanpressindividual
measuresoneatatimeanderasethem.
Example) Erasing all data from a track
Youcanerasealldatafromanentiretrack.
Pressthe tool,andthenpresstheleftsideofthefirst
measureofthetrackyouwanttoerase.Thedatawillbe
erased.
Piano Roll jump
YoucanjumptoPianoRolleditingbypressingthisbutton
whenatrack116isselected.
Note:ThisoperationisequivalenttoselectingthePiano
Rollmenucommand(SeePianoRollonpage 171.).
Note:IfyoupressthisbuttonorselectthePianoRollmenu
commandtoopenthePianoRoledialogboxforatrackthat
containsnoevents,atrackofthesamelengthasthesong(64
measuresbydefault)willbecreatedbeforethePianoRoll
dialogboxopens.
Ifyouveselectedthemastertrack,thisbuttonwilltakeyou
toeventediting.
Scroll buttons
Bypressingthesebuttonsyoucanmovetotracksor
measuresthatarenotcurrentlydisplayed.Evenwithout
pressingdirectlyononeofthesebuttons,youcanscrollthe
displaybydraggingacrossascrollbuttonfrominsidethe
trackviewarea.
Thehorizontaldirectioninwhichthescrollbuttonsoperate
willdependonthePlayScrollsettingintheTrackView
Setupdialogbox.
Setup button
WhenyoupresstheSetupbutton,theTrackViewSetup
dialogboxwillappear,allowingyoutospecifyhow
informationwillbedisplayedinthetrackviewarea.
Track View Setup dialog box
Thesettingsinthisdialogboxwillbeinitializedwhen
youturnoffthepower.
Track No.
Thisspecifiestheorderofthedisplayedtracks.Normally,
Track01Track16areshownfor0116.Youcanusethisto
changetheorderifthetracksyouwanttoseearefarapart.
Note Display
[oct.Layer, All Notes, C-1
~
...G#8
~
, Auto]
Thisspecifieshownoteeventswillbedisplayed.
octLayer:Noteeventsofalloctaveswillbedisplayed
togetherinaoneoctaveregion.Forexample,noteevents
C4,C5,andC6(differentoctaves)willbeshownonthesame
dotline(attheCposition).
AllNotes:Onedotlinewillbeshownasoneoctave.For
example,noteeventsC4,E4,andG4(allinthesameoctave)
willbeshownonthesamedotline.
C1
~
...G#8
~
:Onlythenoteeventsoftheselectedoctavewill
beshown.Eachdotlinewillshowonenote.
Auto:Ifmostofthedisplayednoteeventsarewithinone
octave,theywillbedisplayedusingonedotlinepernote.If
thenotesextendmorethanoneoctave,theywillbe
displayedusingAllNotes.
shows:
Specifiesthetrackinformationthatisshownattheleftedge
andbottomofeachtrackviewarea.
Names [Off, On]
Ifthischeckboxisselected,tracknamesandthetypeof
selectedcontroleventwillbeshownattheleftofthetrack
viewscreen.
Velocity [Off, On]
Ifthischeckboxisselected,thevelocityvaluesofnote
eventswillbeshown.Inthecaseofachord,thehighest
valuewillbeshown.
and [none, PolyAfter, CC#000...CC#119 (*Y),
Program, AfterT, Bend, Exclusive]
Thisselectstheinformation(suchascontrolchanges)that
willbeshown.Ifyoudontwantanyofthesetobeshown,
choosenone.
Green:ControlChange,PolyAfter,AfterTouch
Thelocationofaneventisindicatedbyasolidlineorsolid
color,andbyashadedareaforthedurationthattheeffect
continues.Theshadedareaisnotshownifthelocation
containingtheeventisnotdisplayedinthetrackviewarea.
Yellow:Pitchbend
:Systemexclusivemessage
Red:Programchange
Time Scale [Close, Wide]
Thisspecifiesthescaleforthetimeaxisofthetrackview
area.
Close:Forexample,thescreenwillshow4or5measuresof
a4/4timesignature.
Wide:Forexample,thescreenwillshow8or9measuresof
a4/4timesignature.
Play Scroll [Sweep, Crawl]
Thisspecifieshowthetrackviewareawillscrollduring
playback.
Sweep:Whenthelocationbar(theverticalyellowline)
reachestheendofthetrackviewarea,thenextmeasureand
thelocationbarwillmovetotheleft.
Crawl:Thetrackviewareawillmovemeasurebymeasure.
Thelocationbarwillstayinafixedlocation.
Data exists No data
Sequencer mode
142
Note:Thissettingalsospecifieshowmovementwilloccur
whenyoupressthedisplayscrollbuttonsintheleft/right
directionwhileediting.
62: Menu Command
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.171
7:CopyTrackseep.176
17:Quantizeseep.181
21:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.
164
Commandonpage 163.
63: Track Name
Here,youcanassignanametoeachtrack.
Reso, RPPR
63b: Track Info
onpage 109.
63c: Track Names
T01...T16 [Track name]
Here,youcanrenametheMIDItracks.
Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthedialogbox,andinput
thedesiredcharacters.Youcanenterupto24characters.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEditingnameson
page 91oftheOperationguide.
V 63: Menu Command
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.171
7:CopyTrackseep.176
17:Quantizeseep.181
Commandonpage 163.
62c
62a
62b
62
Menu
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack) 71: ARP Setup T0108, 72: ARP Setup T0916
143
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)
Here,youcanspecifyhowthearpeggiatorwilloperatein
Sequencermode.Thesesettingscanbemadeforeachsong.
InSequencermode(asinCombinationmode),youcanrun
thetwoarpeggiatorssimultaneously.
Thisallowsyoutoapplydifferentarpeggiopatternstotwo
soundsthathavebeensplitacrossthekeyboard,oruse
velocitytoswitchbetweentwodifferentarpeggiopatterns,
etc.
InSequencermode,themusicaldatageneratedbythe
arpeggiatorduringsongtrackorpatternrealtimerecording
canberecorded.
Whendoingso,youcanmodifythearpeggiopatternor
parameterswhileyourecord,orusetheREALTIME
CONTROLSSELECTbuttontoselectARPandusethe
knobstovarythearpeggiopattern.
Itisnotpossibletosetindependenttemposforthe
arpeggiatorandthesequencer.
WhenMIDIClock(GlobalP1:11a)isInternal,the
arpeggiatorcanbesynchronizedtotheinternalsequencer.
WhenyouturnonthearpeggiatorandpresstheSTART/
STOP( )button,thearpeggiatorwillsynchronize
withthesequencer.
WhenyoupresstheSTART/STOP( )button,the
arpeggiatorandsequencerwillbothstop.Ifyouwishto
stoponlythearpeggiator,presstheARPbuttontoturn
off.
WhenthearpeggiatorKeySyncisoff,youcanturnonthe
ARPbuttonandplaythekeyboardtostartthearpeggiator
duringtheprecountbeforerealtimerecordingbegins.That
way,thearpeggiatorperformancewillberecordedfromthe
beginningofthepatternwhenrecordingstarts.
WhenMIDIClockissettoExternalMIDIorExternal
USB,clockmessagestransmittedfromanexternalMIDI
devicecanperformthesametypeofcontrol.
Eveninthiscase,youcanstart/stopusingtheKROMEs
START/STOP( )button.
71: ARP Setup T0108,
72: ARP Setup T0916
Reso, RPPR
71(2)b: Track Info
onpage 109.
71(2)c: Arpeggiator Assign, Arpeggiator
Run A, B
Arpeggiator Assign [Off, A, B]
ThisindividuallyassignsarpeggiatorAorarpeggiatorBto
eachtrack18,916.WhentheARPbuttonisturnedon,the
arpeggiatorspecifiedforeachtrackwillrun,subjecttothe
ArpeggiatorRunA,Bsettingsandthesettingsmadehere.
Off:Neitherarpeggiatorwilloperate.
A:EnablesArpeggiatorA.UsetheArpeggiatorApageto
selectthearpeggiopatternandsettheparameters.
B:EnablesArpeggiatorB.UsetheArpeggiatorBpageto
selectthearpeggiopatternandsettheparameters.
Fortracksthatyouwishtorecordinrealtime,selecteither
arpeggiatorAorB.Ifyouspecifyanarpeggiatorfortwoor
moretracks,thearpeggiatorwillplayeachofthetracksyou
specify.
YoucansetAandBtotwodifferentMIDIchannels,and
controlonefromthekeyboardandtheotherfroman
externalMIDIdeviceconnectedtoMIDIIN.Youcanalso
usemultitrackrecording(MultiREC)tosimultaneously
recordthenotedatathatisgeneratedfromthetwo
arpeggiators.
Example 1)
Ontracks1and2,setMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c)to01and
Status(Seq31(2)c)toINT.AssignarpeggiatorAtotrack1
andarpeggiatorBtotrack2,andcheckArpeggiatorRunA,
B.InTrackSelect,chooseTrack01.
WiththeARPbuttonoff,playthekeyboardandtracks1and
2willsoundsimultaneously.
WhenyouturnontheARPbuttonandplaythekeyboard,
arpeggiatorAwilloperatefortrack1andarpeggiatorBwill
operatefortrack2.
Example 2)
Fortracks1,2and3,settheMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c)to
01,02,and03respectively,andsetStatus(Seq31(2)c)to
INT.AssignarpeggiatorAtotracks1and2,andarpeggiator
Btotrack3.ChecktheArpeggiatorRunA,Bsetting.
InTrackSelect,chooseTrack01.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPbuttonisoffwill
playthesoundassignedtotrack1.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPbuttonisonwill
causearpeggiatorAtooperatefortracks1and2,and
producesoundforbothtracks.
causearpeggiatorAtooperatefortracks1and2,and
producesoundforbothtracks.
causearpeggiatorBtooperatefortrack3,andplaythe
soundassignedtotrack3.
71a
71b
71c
71
Menu
Track2 MIDI Ch=1ch Status=INT
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
Arpeggiator
Assign
A
B
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Trigger
= Ch1
Trigger
= Ch1
Sequencer mode
144
Alternatively,youcouldchooseTrack01inTrackSelect
torunarpeggiatorAfortracks1and2,andusean
externalMIDIdeviceconnectedtotheKROMEsMIDIIN
tosendnotedatatoMIDIchannel3toplayarpeggiatorB.
Thearpeggiatorcannotbetriggeredbythenotes
playedbythesequencer.
IfthetrackStatus(Seq31(2)c)issettoINTorBTH,
tracks116towhicharpeggiatorAorBareassigned
willbesoundedbythenotedatageneratedbythe
arpeggiator,regardlessoftheMIDIChannel(Seq3
1(2)c)settingofthattrack.IfthetrackStatusissetto
BTH,EXT,orEX2,thetrackwilltransmitMIDInote
dataontheMIDIChannelofthattrack.
Inthiscase,arpeggiatorAorBwillbetriggeredbythe
MIDIChannelofanytrack116towhichthe
correspondingarpeggiatorisassigned.
IftheLocalControlOn(GlobalP1:11a)isturnedOFF,
thearpeggiatorwillnotbetriggeredbynotedatafrom
thekeyboard.Itwillbetriggeredbynotedatareceived
atMIDIIN.Ifyouwishtorecordjustthetriggernotes
onanexternalsequencerandruntheKROMEs
arpeggiatorinthisway,turnLocalControlOFF.
Ifyouwantthenotedatageneratedbythearpeggiator
toberecordedontheexternalsequencer,turnLocal
ControlON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionofthe
externalsequencer.(seep.368)
Arpeggiator Run A, B [Off, On]
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)thatare
checkedherewillfunctionforthetrack(s)towhichtheyare
assignedbyArpeggiatorAssign.
Whenthearpeggiatorison,AandBcanbeturnedon/off
independently.
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
73: ArpeggiatorA,
74: ArpeggiatorB
RPPR
73(4)b: Track Info
onpage 109.
73(4)c: ArpeggiatorA(B) Setup
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Octave* [1, 2, 3, 4]
Resolution* [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Gate [000...100%, Step]
Swing [100...+100%]
Sort* [Off, On]
Latch* [Off, On]
Keyboard* [Off, On]
Thesearethearpeggiatorparametersforthesong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP7:ARP/DT
* Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom05(6)c:
ArpeggiatorA(B).
seep.164
Pattern - B
Pattern - A
Pattern - A Track2 MIDI Ch=2ch Status=INT
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
Arpeggiator
Assign
A
A
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Trigger
= Ch1, Ch2
Trigger
= Ch3
Track3 MIDI Ch=3ch Status=INT B
73a
73b
73c
73
Menu
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack) 75: ARP Scan Zone
145
Commandonpage 163.
75: ARP Scan Zone
Thesesettingsspecifythenoteandvelocityrangesthatwill
operatearpeggiatorsAandB.
Reso, RPPR
75b: Track Info
onpage 109.
75c: Zone Map
ThisshowstheScanZoneforeacharpeggiator,AandB.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee75b:ZoneMapon
page 93.
75d: Scan Zone
A:, B:
Top Key [C1...G9]
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)thatwilloperate
arpeggiatorA(B).TopKeyspecifiestheupperlimit,and
BottomKeyspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Top Velocity [001...127]
Bottom Velocity [001...127]
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwilloperatearpeggiator
A(B).TopVelocityspecifiestheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)andvelocitiesthatwill
operatearpeggiatorA/B.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenoteandvelocityvaluesby
akey(seeOGp.10).
V 75: Menu Command
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
77: Drum Track
TheparametersfortheDrumTrackfunctionarestructured
inthesamewayasinCombinationmode.AssigntheDrum
Trackprogramtothedesiredtrack116.
However,whileacombinationtriggerstheDrumTrack
patternontheglobalMIDIchannel,asongtriggersthe
DrumTrackpatternontheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyDrum
PatternInput.NormallyyoullsetthistoTch.WiththeTch
setting,theMIDIchannelofthetrackselectedbyTrack
Selectwillautomaticallybeusedasthetriggerchannel.
InSequencermodeyoucanusetheDrumTrackfunction
whilerealtimerecordingasongtrackorpattern.
Thenoteon/offdatatransmittedbytheDrumTrackpattern
canberecordedaseventsinatrackorpattern.
Youcantusenotedatafromtheinternalsequencerasa
triggertostartpatternsfortheDrumTrackfunction.
WhenyouveusedtheDrumTrackfunctionwithaprogram
orcombinationtocomeupwithanideaforasong,youcan
thenusetheAutoSongSetupfunctiontoimmediatelystart
realtimerecording(seep.106).
MIDI transmission and reception for the drum
track
InSequencermode,theDrumTrackfunctiontransmitsand
receivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:ThedrumtrackwillreceiveontheMIDIchannel
specifiedbytheDrumPatternInputsettingofeachsong.
NormallyyoullsetthistoTchandusetheKROMEs
keyboardtocontrolthetriggering.
Transmit:ThedrumtrackwilltransmitontheMIDIchannel
specifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsettingofeachsong.
75a
75b
75c
75d
75
Menu
11c
11b
11a
11
Menu
Sequencer mode
146
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchanneloftheMIDItrackfor
whichyouveassignedthedrumprogram.
IfthetracksStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2,notedataetc.ofthe
DrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.
Iflocalcontrol(LocalControlOnGlobalP1:11a)ison,
playingtheKROMEskeyboardwillnotmaketheinternal
soundgeneratorproducesound,norcanthekeyboard
triggerthearpeggiatorordrumtrack.However,theycanbe
triggeredbynoteonmessagesfromMIDIIN.
77a: Drum Pattern
[(Preset): P000...605, (User): U000...U999]
U000U999canbestoreuserpatterns.Patternsyoucreate
inSequencermodecanbeconvertedintouserdrum
patterns.(seep.188)
Shift [24...+00...+24]
meansthattheinstrumentsplayedbythepatternwill
change.
MIDI Channel
Input [01...16, Tch]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwilltriggerthedrum
pattern.
Tch:TheMIDIchannelthattriggersthedrumpatternwill
automaticallybesettotheMIDIchannel(Seq31(2)c)ofthe
trackchoseninTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).
IfTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig,andyousetTrackSelect
toatrackforwhichtheMIDIchannelyouspecifyhereis
selected,thekeyboardwilltriggerthedrumpattern.MIDI
INmessagesofthematchingMIDIchannelwillalsotrigger
thedrumtrack.
Output [01...16, Tch]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwilltransmittheMIDI
dataofthedrumpattern.Thedrumpatternwillsound
usingtheprogramofthetrackthatisassignedtothisMIDI
channel.
Tch:TheMIDIchanneloutputwillautomaticallybesetto
matchtheMIDIchannel(Seq31(2)c)ofthetrackselected
byTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).
Whetherthepatterndatawillbeoutputtoanexternal
devicewilldependontheStatussettingofthetrackthat
matchestheOutputMIDIchannel.
77b: Trigger
buttontoturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillstart
accordingtotheSyncsetting.WhenyoupressON/OFF
again,thedrumpatternwillstop.
toturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillwaittostart.If
yousetTrackSelecttoatrackthatmatchestheMIDI
ChannelInputsetting,andplaythekeyboard,orreceivea
MIDInoteononthesameMIDIchannel,thedrumpattern
willstartaccordingtotheSyncsetting.
Sync [Off, On]
runningarpeggiator.
Note:UseP73(4)c:ArpeggiatorA(B)SetupKeySyncto
specifywhetherarpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyrunningdrumpattern.
Latch [Off, On]
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig.
Off:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillstopwhenyoureleasethekeyboard(noteoff).
On:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillcontinuewhenyoureleasethekeyboard(note
off).ThepatternwillstopwhenyouturntheDRUM
TRACKbuttonoff(LEDdark).
Zone:
Keyboard
Bottom [C1...G9]
Top [C1...G9]
Velocity:
Bottom [001...127]
Top [001...127]
pattern.
akey(seeOGp.10).
V 77: Menu Command
seep.164
Commandonpage 163.
P000 Off
P000...605 Presetdrumpatterns
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack) Synchronizing the Drum Track function
147
Synchronizing the Drum Track function
The Trigger Sync parameter
Thetriggertimingofadrumtrackwilldependonthe
settingofitsTriggerSyncparameter.
On(checked):Thetriggertimingwillbequantizedtothe
nearestbeatrelativetothebasetempo.
Off(unchecked):IfTriggerModeisStartImmediately,
triggeringwilloccuratthemomentyoupresstheDRUM
TRACKbutton.IfthisissettoWaitKBDTrig,triggeringwill
occuratthemomentyouplaythekeyboard.
Synchronizing the drum track with the arpeggia-
tor function, Sequencer mode songs, patterns,
and RPPR performance
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackpatterntoplayorberecordedin
synchronizationwiththecurrentlyoperatingarpeggiator
function,currentlyplayingsong,pattern,orRPPR
performance,turnTriggerSyncon.
TriggerSyncOff:IftheTriggerModesettingisStart
Immediately,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggeredthe
momentyoupresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.Ifthisissetto
WaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggeredthe
momentyouplaythekeyboard.Itwillnotsynchronizeto
thecurrentlyoperatingarpeggiatorfunctionortothe
currentlyplayingsong,pattern,orRPPR.
TriggerSyncOn:Triggeringwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyplayingsong,patternorRPPRperformanceatthe
beginningofthenextmeasure.Triggeringwillsynchronize
tothecurrentlyoperatingarpeggiator(inSequencermodeif
thesongorpatternisstopped)onthenextbeat.
Note:Ifyouwanttosynchronizethearpeggiatortothe
currentlyrunningDrumTrackfunction,settheKeySync
parameter(Prog/Combi/SeqP7).
Note:IfyouwanttosynchronizetheRPPRpattern
performancetothecurrentlyrunningDrumTrackfunction,
settheSyncparameter(SeqP10:Pattern/RPPRRPPRSetup
page)toBeatorMeasure.
Synchronization with song stop
Synchronization with a song in Sequencer mode
WhenyoupresstheSTART/STOP( )button,the
DrumTrackfunctionandthesequencerwillstop.
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackfunctiontostart
simultaneouslywiththebeginningofrecording,pressthe
DRUMTRACKbuttonduringtheprecountbefore
recording(iftheTriggerModeissettoStartImmediately)
orplaythekeyboard(ifTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig).
TheDrumTrackswillnotbetriggeredimmediately,but
willbetriggeredinsynchronizationwiththesequencer
themomentrecordingstarts.
Slave operation
TheKROMEssequencercanbemadetorunin
synchronizationwiththeclockandrealtimecommands
receivedfromanexternalsequencer.ConnecttheMIDIOUT
ofyourexternalMIDIdevicetotheKROMEsMIDIIN,or
connecttheKROMEsUSBporttoyourcomputersUSB
port.
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI
devicesMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKROMEsUSBconnector
toyourcomputersUSBport.
SetMIDIClock(Global,seep.199)toExternalMIDIor
ExternalUSB.TheKROMEwillsynchronizetoMIDIClock
andrealtimecommandmessagesitreceivesfromthe
connectedMIDIdevice.
Note:IftheKROMEissettoMIDIClock=Auto,itwillalso
synchronizetotheexternalMIDIdeviceinthesamewayif
MIDIrealtimeclockmessagesarebeingreceivedfromthe
externaldevice.
Synchronization to MIDI clock
Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothetempocomingfrom
anexternalMIDIclocksource.
Synchronization with MIDI realtime commands
InSequencermode,theKROMEwillrespondtoSongStart,
Continue,andStopmessagesthatitreceivesjustasitdoes
whenusingthefrontpanelSTART/STOP( )button
tocontrolsongplaybackandrecording.Thearpeggiator
alsowillbecontrolledinthesameway.(See
Synchronizationwithsongstopabove)
Master operation
TheKROMEsequencersclockdataandstart/stop
operationscanbeusedtosynchronizeandcontrolan
externalsequencer.
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIOUTtoyourexternalMIDI
devicesMIDIIN,orconnecttheKROMEsUSBconnectorto
yourcomputersUSBport.
SetMIDIClock(Global11a)toInternal.Theconnected
externalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetotheKROMEs
MIDIClock.
Note:ThesameappliesifMIDIClock=AutoandMIDI
Clockmessagesarebeingtransmitted.Fordetails,pleasesee
MIDIClock(MIDIClockSource)onpage 199.
Synchronization via MIDI clock
TheconnectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetothe
MIDIclockoftheKROME.
Sync: Of
Sync: Beat
Sync: Measure
Key 1 on
Song
Key 2 on Key 1 of
Sync settings
Patterns 1 and 2 are set to
Mode=Manual, and have
identical Sync settings
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sequencer mode
148
SEQ P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect)
Youcanalsospecifythebusroutingfortheprogramused
byeachMIDItrack116.Forinstance,youcan:
Sendtheoutputofatracktoaninserteffect
FordetailsonInsertEffects,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 235.
81: Routing1 T0108,
82: Routing1 T0916
Specifiesthebustowhichtheprogramoscillator(s)usedby
MIDItracks18and916willbesent.Youcanalsosetthe
sendlevelstothemastereffectsfromthispage.
81(2)a: Routing Map
Thisareashowstheinserteffectrouting(BusSelect),the
nameoftheassignedeffect,theon/offstatus,chaining,and
theoutputbusthatfollowstheinserteffect.Thetypeof
inserteffect,theon/offstatus,andthechainsettingscanbe
editedinthe83:InsertFXSetuppage.
81(2)c: Track Info
81(2)d: Routing1
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetrackprograms
oscillator(s).
IFX1,2,3,4,5:OutputtotheIFX15buses.
Off:ThetrackwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,orIFX1
5buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwanttheprograms
oscillatoroutputofthetracktobeconnectedinseriestoa
mastereffect.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)to
specifythesendlevels.
Tip:Youcancreateawidevarietyofroutingsbyusingeach
tracksBus(IFX/Output)SelectandtheChaintoandChain
settings(Seq83b)thatfollowtheinserteffect.
DKit:Youcanselectthisonlyifthespecifiedprogramisa
drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrumsorDoubleDrums).
TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1,and
Send2settings(Global55b)foreachkeyoftheselected
drumkitwillbeused.Checkthissettingifyouwantto
applyanindividualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
type,asfollows.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Ifyouwanttoedittheseroutings,usetheDrumKitIFX
Patchmenucommand.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 104.
Send1 (MFX1) [000...127]
Send2 (MFX2) [000...127]
Foreachtrack,theseparameterssetthesendleveltomaster
effects1and2.ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBus(IFX/
Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff.WhenIFX15are
selected,thesendlevelstomastereffects1and2aresetby
theSend1andSend2parametersoftheIFXpage,andare
appliedafterthesoundhaspassedthroughIFX15.
TheSend1and2settingyouspecifyhereareusedduring
playbackorrecordingfromthebeginningofthesong.Ifyou
modifythesesettingsduringrecording,yourchangeswill
berecordedasperformancedata;thesendamountswill
changeaccordinglyduringplayback.Youcanalsomodify
thesesettingsduringplayback.HoweverifSend1and2
datahasbeenrecorded,thesettingswillchangeaccording
totherecordeddata.
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)iseitherINTorBTH,CC#93and
CC#91cancontrolsend1and2respectivelyandchange
theirsettings.Whenyouswitchsongsorreturntothe
beginningofasong,trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2or
BTHwilltransmitthesesettingsviaMIDI.Thisdatawill
betransmittedontheMIDIchannelofeachtrackasset
byMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c).Theactualsendlevelis
determinedbymultiplyingthevalueoftheseparameters
withthesendlevelsettingsoftheprogramusedbythe
track(Send1andSend2,Prog81d).(SeeGlobalP1:
MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
7:PutEffectSettingtoTrackseep.184
Commandonpage 163.
81a
81d
81
Menu
81b
81c
SEQ P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 83: Insert FX Setup
149
83: Insert FX Setup
83a: Track Select
83b: Insert Effect
Hereyoucanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1through
settings.Forinserteffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalways
stereoinandout.Theinput/outputconfigurationofthe
effectsound(Wet)dependsontheeffecttype.For
descriptionsoftheindividualeffects,pleaseseeEffect
Guide,beginningonpage 235.
ThefollowingparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
page 592.
However,unlikeinProgrammode,inserteffectdynamic
modulation(Dmod)andthepostIFXPan:#8,Send1,and
Send2arecontrolledontheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyCh
(Seq84(5)(6)(7)(8)a).Thecontrolchangesusedarethesame
asinProgrammode.
Thepan(CC#8),send1and2settingsyoumakeherewillbe
usedwhenthesongisplayedorrecordedfromthe
beginning.Ifyouchangethesettingswhilerecordinga
MIDItrack,thechangeswillberecordedaspartofthe
musicaldata,andthesettingswillchangewhenthedatais
playedback.Youcanalsochangethesesettingsduring
playback.Howeverifpan(CC#8),send1,or2datahasbeen
recorded,thesettingswillchangeaccordingly.
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)iseitherINTorBTH,CC#8,
CC#93,andCC#91canbereceivedtocontrolthepan
followingtheinserteffect,send1,orsend2
respectively,andchangetheirsettings.Whenyou
switchsongsorreturntothebeginningofthesong,
trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2willtransmit
thesesettingsviaMIDI.Thisdatawillbetransmitted
ontheMIDIchannelsspecifiedintheIFX15pages
(Seq84(5)(6)(7)(8)a).(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQMode
TrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
Insert Effect:
IFX1...4 [000...193]
IFX5 [000...171]
Chain:
Pan:#8:
Bus:
Bus (Bus Select) [Off, L/R]
Ctrl (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2]
Send1/2:
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
page 59.
V 83: Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
83b
83a
83
Menu
Sequencer mode
150
84: IFX1
Here,youcanedittheparametersoftheinserteffect1you
selectedintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
IFX On/Off [Off, On]
Turnstheinserteffecton/off.ThisislinkedwiththeOn/Off
settingintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
Ch (Control Channel) [Ch01...16, All-R]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
modulation(Dmod)fortheinserteffect.
Ch01...Ch16:Theinserteffectwillbecontrolledonthe
specifiedMIDIchannel.
AllR:Thechannelofanytrackroutedthroughthiseffect
canbeusedtocontroltheeffect.(Channelsofeachrouted
trackwillbeindicatedby*.)
Drum Kits and the MIDI Control Channel
IfaTrackisusingaDrumKit,andtheTracksBus(IFX/
Output)Select(Seq81(2)d)isDKit,thisaffectstheMIDI
ControlChannelaswell.Inthiscase,theTracksMIDI
channelwillbeusedtocontrolanyeffectwhoseChissetto
AllR,regardlessoftheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global5
5b)settingsorthesettingsoftheDrumKitIFXPatchmenu
command.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
presets.
Combination,Sequencer).
storedwiththeSongyoudontneedtostorethemasan
favoritesettings.
aparticularSong,andthenlaterusethesameEffectPreset
inadifferentProgram,Combination,orSong.
settings.
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffector
selectedanewSong.Selectingthissettingfromthemenu
willnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Songssavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
selectanEffectPreset,savetheSongtomedia,andthenre
loadtheSong,theEffectPresetsettingwillrevertto
.
page 60.
IFX1 Parameters:
IFX Parameters
youchoseintheP83:InsertFXSetuppage.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1
IFX5)onpage 240.
V 84: Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
85: IFX2, 86: IFX3, 87: IFX4,
88: IFX5
Here,youcanedittheeffectparametersforinserteffects25
Formoreinformation,pleasesee84:IFX1above.
89: FX Control T0108,
810: FX Control T0916
Here,youcanspecifythebuses,andeffectcontrolbus,for
theoutputsoftracks18and916.
89(10)a: Routing Map
89(10)c: Track Info
Formoreinformation,pleasesee81(2)a:RoutingMapon
page 148and21:TrimT0108,22:TrimT0916on
page 123.
84a
84
Menu
89a
89b
89c
89d
89
Menu
SEQ P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 89: FX Control T0108, 810: FX Control T0916
151
89(10)d: Routing2
Bus (IFX/Output) Select [L/R, IFX1...5, Off]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthe
oscillator(s).Thisisthesameparameterasinthe81:IFX
Routing1T0108andT0916pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBus(IFX/Output)Select
onpage 148.
SendstheoutputofthetracktoanFXControlbus(two
channelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbuseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
Controlbuses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
page 238.
Commandonpage 163.
Sequencer mode
152
SEQ P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO)
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforthemastereffectsand
thetotaleffect.Forinstance,youcan:
Routeasoundtothemastereffectsandthetotaleffect
Makedetailedsettingsforthemastereffectsandthetotal
effect
page 235.
91: Routing
Here,youcanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsandtotal
effect,andturnthemOn/Off.
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotaleffect
isinsertedintotheL/Rbus.
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91:Routingonpage 61.
91a: Track Select
91b: MFX1, 2
MFX1:
MFX1 [000...193]
Return 1 [000...127]
MFX2:
MFX2 [000...171]
Return 2 [000...127]
Chain:
Chain Direction [MFX1MFX2, MFX2MFX1]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1onpage 62.
91c: TFX
TFX:
TFX [000...171]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP9:MFX/TFX/LFO
(Master/TotalEffect/LFO)onpage 61.
91d: Master Volume
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91c:MasterVolumeon
page 62.
V 91: Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
9-1b
9-1a
9-1c
9-1b
9-1d
9-1
Menu
SEQ P9: MFX/TFX/LFO (Master/Total Effect/LFO) 92: MFX1
153
92: MFX1
Here,youcanedittheparametersoftheeffectyouselected
forMFX1intheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1page.
92a: MFX1
Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Thisislinkedwiththeon/
offsettingintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Ch (Control Channel) [Ch01...16, G ch]
modulation(Dmod)forthemastereffect.
Ch01Ch16:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeusedfor
control.
forcontrol.NormallyyouwillusetheGchsetting.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
presets.
Combination,Sequence).
storedwiththeCombinationyoudontneedtostorethem
asanEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheP9:MFX/TFX/
LFORoutingpage.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
settings.
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffector
selectedanewSong.Selectingthissettingfromthemenu
willnothaveanyeffect.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
MFX1 Parameters
Here,youcansettheeffectparametersoftheeffectyou
choseintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Fordetailsontheindividualeffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Guideonpage 235.
V 92: Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
93: MFX2, 94: TFX
andtheTotalEffect.Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usethe
P9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
TheparametersofMFX2,TFXarethesameasforMFX1.For
moreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1above.
92a
92b
92
Menu
Sequencer mode
154
95: Common FX LFO
ThetwoCommonFXLFO1,2allowyoutosynchronize
LFObasedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchasphasers,
LFOs.
95a: Common FX LFO1
Ctrl Ch (Control Channel) [Ch01...Ch16, Gch]
modulation(Dmod)forCommonLFO1and2.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a)willbeused
forcontrol.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Frequency [0.02...20.00 (Hz)]
BPM [MIDI, 40.00...300.00]
Base Note [, , , _ , , , , _ , , , , _ , , , _ , , ]
Times [01...32]
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee95a:CommonFXLFO1
onpage 63.
95b: Common FX LFO2
TheseparametersarethesameasforCommonFXLFO1.For
moreinformation,pleasesee95a:CommonFXLFO1
above.
V 95: Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
82
8a
82
8b
82
8
Menu
SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR 101: Pattern Edit
155
SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR
Here,youcanrecordandeditpatterns,assignpatternsto
tracksofasong,andmakeRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/
Recording)settings.Youcanalsoconvertdrumtrack
patternsforuseinProgram,orothermodes.
Youcanusepresetpatterns,anduserpatterns.
Presetpatternsprovidepatternsthataresuitablefor
drumtracks;youcanselectthesepatternsfromanysong.
Thereareonehundreduserpatternsforeachsong;you
cancreateandstoreyourownpatternsasdesired.
Youcancreatethedesiredperformancedataforatrack
byusingthemenucommandsPutToTrackorCopyTo
Tracktoplaceorcopypatternsintoatrack.Formore
information,pleaseseePutToTrackonpage 187.
TheRPPRfunctionletsyouassignpatternstodifferent
keysandthentriggerthesepatternsbypressingnoteson
thekeyboardandrecordtheresultontothetrackin
realtime.Formoreinformation,pleasesee103:RPPR
Setuponpage 157.
Youcancreateuserdrumtrackpatterns.
UserpatternsinSequencermodecanbeconvertedusing
themenucommandConverttoDrumTrkPattern.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeConverttoDrumTrk
Patternonpage 188.
Note:UserpatternsinSequencermodearenotsaved
internally;youmustsavethemonanSDcard,andload
themeachtimeafterpoweringon.Ifyouconvertuser
patternstouserdrumtrackpatterns,theywillbepreserved
ininternalmemoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff,
meaningthatyoucanmanagethemalongwithprograms
andcombinations.
101: Pattern Edit
Here,youcanrecordandeditpatterns,andassignthemto
tracksofasong.Thefollowingtypesofpatternoperations
areavailable.
Userpatternscanberecordedinrealtime(aswellas
recordedfromperformancesgeneratedbythe
arpeggiator),steprecorded,orcreatedusingtheGet
FromMIDITrackcommandorCopyPatterncommand.
Youcanalsocopyapresetpatterntoauserpatternand
editit.(Youcantdirectlyeditapresetpattern.)
Presetpatternsanduserpatternscanbeplacedinor
copiedintoatrack.
Youcanconvertuserpatternstodrumtrackpatterns.
101a: Location, Song Select, Track
Select
Location [01...99]
Displaysthecurrentmeasurelocationoftheselected
pattern.
Song Select [000...127: name]
Selectsasong.
Theuserpatternwillbecreatedinthesongyouselect.
Track Select [Track01...16, Master Track]
Selectsthetrackthatwillbeusedtorecord/playthepattern
data.Thepatterndatawillberecorded/playedusingthe
settingsofthetrackyouselect.Theareaattherightdisplays
theprogrambank,number,andnamefortheselectedtrack.
SettingsoftheMasterTrackwillbeignored.Themost
recentlyselectedTrack0116willbeused.
101b: Pattern (Pattern Bank), Pattern
Select, Tempo, Metronome, Reso,
Remove Data
How to record a user pattern
1. UseSongSelecttoselectthesonginwhichyouwantto
createauserpattern.
2. UseTrackSelecttochoosethesoundthatyouwill
record.
Thepatternyourecordwillplaybackaccordingtothe
soundyouchoseinTrackSelect.
3. UsePatternBankandPatternSelecttoselecttheUser
patternandthedesiredpatternnumber.
4. SelectthemenucommandPatternParameter,andin
thedialogbox,specifythenumberofmeasuresandthe
timesignatureofthepattern.
5. Checkthetempoin, .
6. Ifyouwanttorecordinrealtime,setResotospecifythe
resolution,andpresstheREC( )buttonandthenthe
START/STOP( )buttontobeginrecording.
Whenyoufinishrecordingtotheendofthemeasures
specifiedbythePatternParameter,youwillreturntothe
firstmeasure,andcancontinuerecordingwhileadding
morematerial.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeLoopAll
Tracksonpage 117.
Ifyouwanttoperformsteprecording,selectthemenu
commandStepRecording(LoopType)toopenthedialog
box,andrecord.Formoreinformationonsteprecording
procedure,pleaseseeStepRecordingonpage 167and
StepRecording(LoopType)onpage 186.
7. Afterrecording,usethemenucommandsasdesiredto
editthepatternortheeventsinthepattern.
10-1c
10-1b
10-1a
10-1
Menu
Location
Song Select
Popup
Pattern
Bank
Track
Select
Resolution
Tempo
Metronome
Pattern Select
Remove
Data
Sequencer mode
156
Control data in pattern recording
Torecordcontroldatainapattern,youshouldrestore
thecontroldatatoitsnormalvaluewithinthepattern.
Ifyoufailtorestorethenormalvalue,unnecessary
controldatamayremaininastuckpositionwhen
youplacethepatterninasongorusetheRPPR
functiontoplaythepattern.However,thefollowing
controldatawillbeautomaticallyresettothefollowing
valueswhenthesongorRPPRfunctionfinishes
playingthepattern,orwhenplaybackishalted.
Pattern (Pattern Bank) [Preset, User]
Selectsthetypeofpattern.
IfPresetisselected,itwillnotbepossibletorecord.Youwill
beabletoselectandexecutetheCopyPattern,Bounce
Pattern,PutToTrack,andCopyToTrackmenucommands.
Pattern Select [P000...605, U00...U99]
Selectsapattern.
UserpatternscanberenamedintheP10:Pattern/RPPR
PatternNamepage.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Specifiestheplaybacktempoofthepattern.Formore
information,pleasesee,(Tempo)onpage 110.
Metronome [Only REC, REC & Play, Off]
Specifieswhetherthemetronomewillsoundduring
recordingorplayback.Formoreinformation,pleasesee0
8c:MetronomeSetuponpage 119.
Reso (Realtime REC Quantize Resolution)
[Hi, ,_ , ]
Specifieshowthetimingofthedatabeingrecordedintothe
patternwillbecorrected.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Resolution(RealtimeRECQuantizeResolution)on
page 111.
Remove Data [Off, On]
On(checked):Unwantedperformancedatacanberemoved
duringpatternrecording.Theprocedureisthesameas
explainedinRemoveDataofLoopAllTracks.Formore
information,pleaseseeRemoveDataonpage 118.
101c: USED IN SONG TRACK,
USED IN RPPR
USED IN SONG TRACK
Thisareaindicatesthepatternusagestatusforthepatterns
selectedforthetrack.
USED IN RPPR
ThisareaindicatestheRPPRinwhichtheselectedpatternis
used.Theassignedkeyandthespecifiedtrackareshown.
V 101: Menu Command
2:StepRecording(LoopType)seep.186
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.186
5:PatternParameterseep.186
6:ErasePatternseep.186
7:CopyPatternseep.186
8:BouncePatternseep.187
10:PutToTrackseep.187
11:CopyToTrackseep.188
12:ConverttoDrumTrkPatternseep.188
13:LoadDrumTrackPatternseep.188
Commandonpage 163.
Controller Reset value
Modulation1(CC#01) 00(zero)
Modulation2(CC#02) 00(zero)
Expression(CC#11) 127(max)
Ribboncontroller(CC#16) 64(center)
Damperswitch(CC#64) 00(zero)
Sostenutoswitch(CC#66) 00(zero)
Softswitch(CC#67) 00(zero)
EGsustainlevel(CC#70) 64(center)
Resonancelevel(CC#71) 64(center)
EGreleasetime(CC#72) 64(center)
EGattacktime(CC#73) 64(center)
Lowpassfiltercutoff(CC#74) 64(center)
EGdecaytime(CC#75) 64(center)
LFO1speed(CC#76) 64(center)
LFO1depth(pitch)(CC#77) 64(center)
LFO1delay(CC#78) 64(center)
FilterEGintensity(CC#79) 64(center)
SW1modulation(CC#80) 00(zero)
SW2modulation(CC#81) 00(zero)
Channelaftertouch 00(zero)
Pitchbender 00(zero)
SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR 102: Pattern Name
157
102: Pattern Name
102a: Location, Song Select, Track
Select
102b: Pattern, Pattern Select, Tempo,
Metronome, Reso, Remove Data
Formoreinformation,pleasesee101a:Location,Song
Select,TrackSelectonpage 155and101b:Pattern
(PatternBank),PatternSelect,Tempo,Metronome,Reso,
RemoveDataonpage 155.
102c: User Pattern Names
Pattern name [U00...U99]
Here,youcanrenamethepattern.Pressthetexteditbutton
toopenthedialogbox,andinputthename.Youcanenter
upto24characters.SeeEditingnamesonpage 117ofthe
Operationguide.
V 102: Menu Command
2:StepRecording(LoopType)seep.186
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.186
5:PatternParameterseep.186
6:ErasePatternseep.186
7:CopyPatternseep.186
8:BouncePatternseep.187
9:GetFromTrackseep.187
10:PutToTrackseep.187
11:CopyToTrackseep.188
12:ConverttoDrumTrkPatternseep.188
13:LoadDrumTrackPatternseep.188
Commandonpage 163.
103: RPPR Setup
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsfortheRPPR(Realtime
PatternPlay/Recording)function.RPPRletsyouassign
patternstoindividualkeys,andthenplaybackpatterns
simplybypressingindividualnotesonthekeyboard.This
performancecanberecordedinrealtime.
Foreachsong,youcanassigneitherapresetpatternora
userpatterntoeachofthe72keysintherangeC#2C8.For
eachkey,youcanspecifythepattern,tracknumber,and
howthepatternwillbeplayed.
KeysusedtoplaypatternsviaRPPRcannotbeusedfor
thearpeggiator.IfRPPRison,keystowhichapatternis
notassignedwillplaytheprogramofthetrackthats
selectedinTrackSelect.Inthiscase,thearpeggiator
willoperateifArpeggiatorA,orBisactive,and
assignedtothetrack.Notesgeneratedbythe
arpeggiatorwillnottriggertheRPPRfunction.
WhenLocalControlisOFF(LocalControlOnGlobal
11a),thekeyboardwillnottriggerRPPRpattern
playback,exceptvianotesreceivedattheMIDIINthat
matchthecurrentlyselectedtrackschannel.Ifyouhave
recordedonlythetriggernotesonanexternal
sequencerandwishtousetheplaybackfromthe
externalsequencertotriggerRPPRpatternson
KROME,setLocalControlOFF.
IfyouwantthenotedatageneratedbyRPPRtobe
recordedbytheexternalsequencer,setLocalControl
ON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionoftheexternal
sequencer.SeeLocalControlOnsettingsonpage 359.
IntheRPPRSetuppage,RPPRisturnedon
automatically.Thiswillbethesameresultaswhenthe
RPPRcheckbox(Seq01(2)a)ineachpageischecked.
103a: Song Select, Track Select, Tempo
Song Select [000...127: name]
Selectsthedesiredsong.TheRPPRsettingswillbeassigned
tothesongyouselecthere.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Specifiestheplaybacktempoofthepatterns.(Seq01(2)a)
Track Select [Track01...16, Master Track]
WhenyouplayakeythatisnotassignedtoRPPR,itwill
soundusingthesettingsofthetrackthatsselectedinTrack
Select.Usethistoselectthetrackthatyouwanttoplay
togetherwithRPPR,ortoauditionapatternbeforeyou
assignit.Theprogrambank,number,andnameofthe
selectedtrackisshownattheright.
EachRPPRpatternwillbeginplayingwhenyoupressthe
assignedkey,regardlessoftheTrackSelectsetting.Itwill
soundusingthesettingsofthetrackselectedinTrack
Name.
TheMasterTracksettingisignored.Thelastselected
Track0116willbeused.
10-2a
10-2
Menu
10-3b
10-3a
10-3
Menu
Sequencer mode
158
Keyboard & Assigned Graphics
Thisshowstheselectedkey,andthekeystowhichapattern
hasbeenassignedbytheRPPRfunction.Seediagrambelow.
103b: RPPR Setup
KEY (Key Select) [C#2...C8]
SpecifiesthekeytowhichyouwanttoassignanRPPR
pattern.
Thefollowingparameterswillapplytothekeythatyou
selecthere.
akey(seeOGp.10).
Assign [Off, On]
On(checked):WhenyouplaythekeyspecifiedbyKEY,the
patternselectedinPatternwillbetriggered.
Off(unchecked):Thatkeywillsoundthecurrentlyselected
trackatthecorrespondingpitch,justasinnormalSequencer
mode.
Mode [Once, Manual, Endless]
Specifiesthewayinwhichthepatternassignedtothe
specifiedKEYwillbeplayed.
Once:Whenyoupressthekey,thecompletepatternwill
playoncetotheendandthenstop.
Manual:Thepatternwillcontinuerepeatingaslongasyou
continueholdingthekey,andwillstopassoonasyou
releasethekey.
Endless:Thepatternwillcontinuerepeatingevenafteryou
releasethekey.Tostopthepatternplayback,pressanynote
belowC2,orpressthesamekeyonceagain.
Shift [12...+12]
Adjuststheplaybackpitchofthepatternforthespecified
KEYinsemitonestepsoverarangeof1octave.
Withasettingof0,thepatternwillbeplayedatitsoriginal
pitch.
Sync [Off, Beat, Measure, SEQ]
Specifiesthewayinwhichthepatternplaybackwillbe
synchronizedwhenyoupressthespecifiedKEY.
Off:Thepatternwillbeginplayingatthemomentyoupress
thenote.
Beat:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothebeatoftheother
patternsthatarealreadyinplay.Thissettingissuitable
whenyouwishtoplayphrasepatternsinunison.
Measure:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothemeasuresof
thepatternthatwasstartedbythefirstkey.Thissettingis
suitableforrhythm,bassordrumpatterns.
SEQ:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothemeasuresofthe
sequencersong.
WhenBeatorMeasureareselected,patternplaybackwill
beginwhenyoupressthefirstkey.Thesecondand
subsequentpatternsthataretriggeredfromthekeyboard
willsynchronizetothepatternthatwasstartedbythe
firstkey;withasettingofBeattheywillsynchronizein
stepsofabeat,andwithasettingofMeasuretheywill
synchronizeinstepsofameasure.
WhenSEQisselected,thepatternwillplaybackin
synchronizationwiththemeasuresofthesequencersong.
Thepatternwillsynchronizewiththecurrentlyplaying
song,soyoumuststartthesongbeforeyouplaynoteson
thekeyboard.
Beat,Measure,andSEQwillcausethepatterntostart
immediatelyifyouplaythekeywithinathirtysecond
noteofthetimingoftherespectivebeatormeasure,butif
youplaythekeylaterthanthis,thestartofthepattern
willbedelayedbyabeat.
SetthistoSEQifyouwantpatternplaybackbyRPPRto
besynchronizedtothecurrentlyrunningarpeggiator.
Note:Ifyouwantthearpeggiatorperformanceto
synchronizetothecurrentlyrunningRPPRplayback,turn
OffthearpeggiatorsKeySync.Thearpeggiatorwill
synchronizetothebeatbasedontheRPPRplaybacktiming.
Note:Ifyouwantthedrumtrackpatternperformanceto
synchronizetothecurrentlyrunningRPPRplayback,turn
OnthedrumtrackfunctionsSync(ineachmode,theDrum
TrackpageTrigger).Thedrumtrackwillbetriggeredat
intervalsofonemeasureattheRPPRplaybacktiming.
Stopping RPPR pattern playback
YoucanstopallcurrentlyrunningRPPRpatternplayback
bypressingC2oranylowerkey.
PatternplaybackwillstopimmediatelyforkeyswhoseSync
parameterissettoOff,butpatternplaybackforotherkeys
willstopatthebeginningofthebeatormeasure.Youcan
immediatelystoppatternplaybackforkeyswhoseSyncis
OnbypressingC2oralowerkeytwiceinrapidsuccession.
Not assigned keys
Selected key
Key range Key range C4
Assigned keys
Non-assignable keys
Once
START STOP
Manual
START STOP
Endless
START STOP
Key-on Key-of
Same key, or C2
Key-on
Sync: Of
Sync: Beat
Sync: Measure
Sync: SEQ
Key 1 on
Song
Key 2 on Key 1 of
Sync settings
Patterns 1 and 2 are set to
Mode=Manual, and have
identical Sync settings
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
SEQ P10: Pattern/RPPR 103: RPPR Setup
159
Pattern Bank [Preset, User]
Pattern [P000...605, U00...99]
SelectstheRPPRpatternforthekeyselectedinKEY.Ifthe
selecteduserpatterncontainsnomusicaldata,therewillbe
nosoundwhenyoupressthatkey.
Track [Track 01...16]
SelectsthetrackthatwillbeusedfortheRPPRpattern
selectedfortheKEY.Whenyouplaythekey,thepatternwill
beplayedaccordingtothesettingsofthetrackyouselect
here.YoucanmaketracksettingsintheP0:Play/RECP5:
MIDIFilterpages.
WhenyourecordinrealtimewiththeRPPNfunction
turnedon,thedatawillberecordedonthetrackyouselect
here.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeRecordinganRPPR
performance.
Informationshowsthebank,name,andnumberofthe
programthatsselectedforTrack.
Information
Thisareashowsthebank,name,andnumberofthe
programthatsselectedforthetrack.
Revert
Whenyoupressthisbutton,thePattern(PatternBank),
PatternSelect,andTracksettingsofthelasteditedKEYfor
whichAssignwascheckedwillbecopiedtothese
parametersofthecurrentlyselectedKEY.
V 103: Menu Command
Commandonpage 163.
Sequencer mode
160
SEQ P11: Cue List
Thecuelistallowsplaybackofmultiplesongsinsuccession.
Youcanspecifyanumberofrepetitionsforeachsong.
TheKROMEallowsyoutocreatetwentycuelists.Asingle
cuelistcanholdupto99songs.
Eachunitinacuelistiscalledastep,andyoucanspecify
asongnumberandarepeat(numberofrepetitions)foreach
step.
Forexampleyoucouldcreateeachpartofasong(intro,
melodyA,melodyB,break,solobacking,endingetc.)asan
individualsong,anduseacuelisttoplaytheintrotwice,
melodyAfourtimes,melodyBfourtimes,thebreaktwice,
melodyAfourtimes...etc.toproducetheentiresong.In
caseswhenyouwishtochangethestructureofthesong,
thisCueListfunctioncanhelpyouworkmoreefficiently.
ThemenucommandConverttoSongletsyoutransformthe
songsinacuelistintoasinglesong.
Forexample,youcanuseacuelisttocreatethebacking,
convertthecuelisttoasong,andthenaddsolophraseson
unusedtracks.
111: Cue List
111a: Location, Meter, , , Tempo Mode,
Cue List Select, Track Select
Location [0001:01.0009999:16.191]
Thisdisplaysthecurrentlocationwithintheselectedcue
list.
Fromtheleft,thenumbersindicatethemeasure,beat,and
clock.Eachcanbesetseparately,andthiswillchangethe
currentlocationwithinthecuelist.
Therangeofthebeatandclockwilldependonthetime
signatureofthecorrespondingsong.
WhenMIDIClock(Global11a)isInternal,aSong
PositionPointermessagewillbetransmittedeachtime
youchangethelocationwithinthecuelist.IfMIDI
ClockissettoExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,Song
PositionPointermessagesfromthespecifiedsource
willcausethelocationtochange.
Meter (Time Signature) [1/4...16/16]
Thisdisplaysthetimesignatureofthecurrentlyplaying
song.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00]
Specifiesthetempoatwhichthesonginthecuelistwillbe
played).Formoreinformation,pleasesee,(Tempo)on
page 110.
Tempo Mode [Auto, Manu]
Auto:Playbackwillfollowthetempospecifiedbyeachsong
inthecuelist.Itwillnotbepossibletochangethe, (Tempo)
settingduringplayback.
Manu(Manual):Tempospecifiedinthesongwillbe
ignored,andplaybackwillusethetempospecifiedabove
for, (Tempo).
Cue List Select [C00...C19: name]
Selectsthecuelistthatyouwishtoplay.
Whenusingacuelisttoplaysongs,youmustfirstloadthe
necessarydataintointernalmemory,eitherfrommedia,or
byaMIDIdatadumpfromanexternalsequencer.
SelectingacuelistinthispagewillcauseaSongSelect
message(correspondingtothecuelistnumber)and
SongPositionPointermessagetobetransmitted.When
aSongSelectmessageisreceivedfromthespecified
source,thecuelistwillbeswitched.
Track Select [Track01...Track16: name]
Selectsthetrackthatyouwishtoplaymanuallyfromthe
keyboardalongwiththeplaybackofthecuelist.
Whileacuelistisplaying,youcanplayalongusingthe
tracksettingsandmusicaldataofthesongselectedbythe
currentStep(Seq111b).
Thetrackselectedherecanbespecifiedindependentlyfor
eachsonginthecuelist.
Whenyouareplayingbackdifferentsongsinsuccession,
andwanttoplayalongusingthesameprogramonthe
keyboard,setTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a)tothesametrack
andprogramforeachstep.
Attherightyoucanviewtheprogrambank,program
number,andnameoftheprogramselectedforTrackSelect.
111b: Cue List
Selected Step Information
Thisshowsinformationonthecurrentlyselectedorplaying
Step.
Step [01...99/01...99]
Theselectedstepnumberisshownattheleft,andthetotal
numberofsteps(notincludingthelaststep)isshownatthe
right.
Song [000...127]
Thisshowsthenumberandnameofthesongforthe
currentlyselectedstep.
Length [000...999]
Thisshowsthenumberofmeasuresinthesongforthe
currentlyselectedstep.
11-1b
11-1c
11-1a
11-1
Menu
Location Meter
Tempo
Tempo Mode
Track
Select
STEP/
SONG/
Length
Cue List
Select
Repeat
Step [Measure]
Song (Cue Edit-Song)
Load FX?
SEQ P11: Cue List What to do when playing back a cue list and the songs do not transition smoothly
161
Step, Song, Repeat, Load FX?
Step [Measure] [01...100 (M0001...M9999)]
Thisdisplaysthestepnumberanditsstartingmeasure.
Stepindicateseachstepnumber.TheStepindicatedbythe
symbolisthecurrentlyselectedorcurrentlyplayingstep.
ThiscanbedirectlyselectedbySong(Seq111b)orCurrent
Step(Seq111c).Whenstopped,pressingtheSTART/STOP
( )buttonwillcauseplaybacktobeginfromthisstep.
Measureindicatesthestartingmeasureofeachstep.This
cannotbeedited.
Song (Cue Edit-Song)
[S000...S127: name/End, Continue to Step01]
S000...S127:Specifiesasongforeachstep.Thiscannotbe
editedduringplayback.
EndandContinuetoStep01canbespecifiedonlyforthe
laststepofthecuelist.
End:Playbackwillstopatthelaststepofthecuelist.
ContinuetoStep01:Atthelaststepofthecuelist,playback
willreturntoStep01andthecuelistwillcontinueplaying
endlessly.Tostop,presstheSTART/STOP( )button.
Thesongpositionbaratthebottomindicatesthelocationof
thecurrentmeasurewithinthesongofthisstep.
Repeat [01...64, FS]
Specifiesthenumberoftimesthatthesongofthisstepwill
berepeated.
FS:Afootswitchconnectedtotherearpanelcanbeusedto
specifythepointatwhichthesongwillstoprepeating.When
youpressthefootswitch,thecurrentrepetitionofthesongwill
finishplaying.Playbackwillthenadvancetothenextstep.Set
FootSwitchAssign(Global21a)toCueRepeatControl.
Load FX? (Cue Edit-Load Fx) [Off, On]
Specifieswhethertheeffectsspecifiedbythesongassigned
toeachstepwillbeused.
On(checked):Theeffectsettingsofthesongspecifiedfor
thecurrentstepwillbeused.Whenplaybackmovestothe
nextstep,theeffectsettingswillalsochange.
Off(unchecked):Theeffectsettingswillnotchange.
Dependingontheeffectsettings,acertainamountof
timemayberequiredtoswitcheffects.Inthiscase,
playbackwillnotbesmoothfromsongtosong.
Ifyouwanttotransitionsmoothlyfromsongtosong
insideofacuelist,checkLoadFX?inStep01.Forthe
remainingsteps,donotcheckLoadFX?
Withthesesettings,theeffectswillbesetbefore
playbackbegins,sotherewillbenotimelagto
interruptthesmoothtransitionbetweensongs.
Althoughitisnotpossibletochangetheeffecttypesin
themiddleofacuelist,youcanusethedynamic
modulationfunctionorMIDIcontrolchanges(effect
control)toapplyreverbmoredeeplytocertainsongs,
orraisetheLFOspeedforothersongs,etc.
Whenusingacuelisttoconstructasong,we
recommendthismethod.Whenyouexecutethe
ConverttoSongmenucommand,theeffectsettingsof
theStep01songwillbespecifiedatthebeginningof
thesongthatiscreatedbytheconversion.
EvenwhenLoadFX?isnotchecked,theremaybeatime
laginthetransitionfromonesongtothenext,depending
onthemusicaldatainthesong.Theremayalsobecasesin
whichthemusicaldataatthetransitionbetweensongs
doesnotplayatthecorrecttiming.Tofixthis,youcanedit
themusicaldataofthesong,orconvertthecuelisttoa
singlesong.IfyouuseConverttoSongtoconvertthecue
listtoasong,therewillbenotimelagatthetransition,and
themusicaldatawillplayatthecorrecttiming.
111c: Insert, Cut, Copy, Current Step
Insert
WhenyoupresstheInsertbutton,thestepdatathatwas
temporarilysavedinthebufferbytheCopybuttonorCut
buttonwillbeinsertedattheCurrentStep.(Ifcopyorcut
hasnotbeenexecuted,defaultdatawillbeinserted.)
Cut
WhenyoupresstheCutbutton,theCurrentStepwillbe
cut,anditsdatawillbesavedtemporarilyinthebuffer.If
youInsertimmediatelyafteryoucut,thedatawillreturn
thestateinwhichitwasbeforeyoucut.
Copy
WhenyoupresstheCopybutton,thedataoftheCurrent
Stepwillbesavedtemporarilyinthebuffer.
PresstheInsertbuttontoinsertthecopiedstepintothe
CurrentStep.
Current Step [01...100]
Selectsthestepthatwillbeinserted,cutorcopied.
Ifyouwishtoplaybackfromastepinthemiddleofthecue
list,selectthedesiredstephere,andpresstheSTART/STOP
( )button.
SeeCreatingandplayingaCueListonpage 74ofthe
Operationguide.
What to do when playing back a cue list
and the songs do not transition smoothly
Differenteffectsettingsfromsongtosong,anddense
amountsofplaybackdatawithinthesong,maycauseatime
lagbetweensongsorcreatetimingproblemsduring
transitionsincuelistplayback.Insuchcases,useConvertto
Songtotransformthecuelistintoasinglesong.Whenyou
playbackthissong,therewillbenotimelagatthe
transition,andthedatawillplayatthecorrecttiming.
Iftheeffectsettingsdifferbetweensongs,andyouwantto
smooththetransitionbetweensongs,checkFXforStep01.
Thisway,theeffectsettingswillbemadebeforeplayback
begins,andtherewillbenotimelagwhencuelistplayback
isstartedorwhenswitchingfromsongtosong.Althoughit
willnotbepossibletochangeeffecttypeswithinthecuelist,
youcanusedynamicmodulationorMIDIcontrolchanges
suchasEffectControltocontroltheeffectswithinthecue
list,forexampleapplyingreverbmoredeeplyoncertain
songs,orraisingtheLFOspeedforaspecificsong.We
recommendthismethodifyouwillbeusingacuelistto
constructthesong.
WhenyouexecutethemenucommandConverttoSong,the
effectsettingsoftheStep01songwillbespecifiedforthe
songthatresultsfromtheconversion.
EvenifFXisnotchecked,theremaybecasesinwhichatime
laginthetransitionbetweensongs,dependingonthe
musicaldataofthesong.Also,theremaybecasesinwhich
themusicaldataisnotplayedatthecorrecttimingatsong
transitions.Ifthisoccurs,youcaneditthemusicaldataof
thesong,orconvertthecuelisttoasongforplayback.Ifyou
useConverttoSongtoconvertthecuelisttoasong,there
willbenotimelagduringplaybackatthetransitions,and
themusicaldatawillbeplayedatthecorrecttiming.
Whenyoucompleteacuelistandconvertitintoasong,
thetracksettings(e.g.,program,pan,volume)ofeach
songwillbeconvertedintoperformancedatasothat
theywillbereproducedcorrectly.However,itmaynot
bepossiblefortheplaybackresultofacuelisttobe
Sequencer mode
162
convertedtoasongifsettingssuchastheMIDIchannel
donotmatch.
Using a foot switch to switch the Step
YoucanuseafootswitchtoswitchtheStep.
IfyousetRepeattoFS,afootswitchconnectedtothe
ASSIGNABLESWITCHjackwillcontrolthetimingat
whichthesongstopsrepeating.SetFootSwitchAssign
(GlobalP2:Controllerspage)toCueRepeatControl.
Converting a cue list into a song
Althoughitisnotpossibletorecordadditionalmaterial
ontotracksinacuelist,youcanconvertacuelisttoasong,
andthenrecordsolosetc.onvacanttracks.Youwillalso
needtoconvertacuelisttoasongifyouwishtosaveitto
externalmediaasSMFdata.
1. SelectthemenucommandConverttoSong.
Adialogboxwillappear.
2. InToSong,specifythedestinationsongnumberfor
theconverteddata.
Thecuelistnamewillautomaticallybeassignedasthesong
nameoftheconverteddata.(Fordetailsandcautions
regardingConverttoSong,pleaseseeConverttoSong
(ConvertCueListtoSong)onpage 189.)
Inthedialogboxthatappears,itisnotnecessarytospecify
SetLengthwhenselectinganewsongastheconversion
destination.Thenumberofmeasuresintheconvertedsong
willbeused.PresstheOKbutton,andtheConvertCueList
dialogboxwillappear.
3. PresstheOKbutton.
Thecuelistwillbeconvertedintoasong.AccesstheP01:
Play/RECpage,selectthesongnumberthatyouspecifiedas
theconversiondestination,andchecktheresults.
V 111: Menu Command
2:RenameCueListseep.189
3:DeleteCueListseep.189
4:CopyCueListseep.189
5:ConverttoSong(ConvertCueListtoSong)seep.
189
6:CopySongseep.190
Commandonpage 163.
Sequencer: Menu Command Memory Status
163
Sequencer: Menu Command
Tip:Whilethiscommandisactive,theENTERbuttonwill
astheCancelbutton.
3. Toexecute,presstheOKbutton.Toexitwithout
executing,presstheCancelbutton.
Memory Status
Thisdisplaystheremainingamountofsequencermemory.
ItisavailableoneverypageinSequencermode.
Exclusive Solo
ThisspecifieshowtheSolofunctionwilloperate.Eachtime
youselectExclusiveSolo,thesettingwillalternatebetween
multiplesoloandexclusivesolo.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeExclusiveSoloonpage 64.
ItisavailableoneverypageinSequencermode.
Rename Song
RenameSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthePlay/
REC,Play/RECControl,Controllers,EQ,TrackParam,
Zone/Delay,MIDIFilter1,MIDIFilter2,andDrumTrack
pages.
Here,youcanrenametheselectedsong.Anameofupto24
characterscanbeinput.
page 91oftheOwnersmanual.
Delete Song
DeleteSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthePlay/
pages.
Thiscommanddeletesthecurrentlyselectedsong.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,themusicaldata,setting
data,andpatternsetc.ofthecurrentlyselectedsongwillbe
erased,andthememoryareaallocatedtothatsongwillbe
freed.
Copy From Song
CopyFromSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
Play/REC,Play/RECControl,Controllers,EQ,TrackParam,
pages.
Thiscommandcopiesallofthesettingdataandmusical
datafromthespecifiedsongtothecurrentlyselectedsong.
1. InFrom,specifythecopysourcesongnumber.
2. Selectthedatathatyouwishtocopy.
All:willcopyallsettingdataandmusicaldata(trackevents
andpatterns,etc.).
WithoutTrack/PatternEvents:willcopyonlythesetting
dataofsongs,exceptforPlayLoopandRPPRdata.
BeawarethatifyouexecuteAll,allsettingdataandmusical
dataofthecurrentlyselectedsongwillbeerasedand
rewrittenbythedatafromthecopysourcesong.Ifyou
executeWithoutTrack/PatternEvents,songsettingdata
(butnotPlayLoopandRPPR)willberewritten.
Load Template Song
LoadTemplateSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
pages.
Thiscommandloadsatemplatesong.
Thebuiltinsequencercontainssixteendifferentpreset
templatesongs(P0015)thatcontainsettingsforprograms
andeffectsappropriateforvariousmusicalstyles.Youare
alsofreetocreateyourownfavoritesettingsforprograms,
trackparameters,andeffects,andsavethemasoneof
sixteenusertemplatesongs(U0015).Formore
information,pleaseseeSaveTemplateSong(SaveasUser
TemplateSong)onpage 164.
1. InFrom,specifythetemplatesongthatyouwishto
load.
2. IfyoucheckCopyPatterntoTracktoo?,theCopyPat
ternToTrackdialogboxwillappearautomaticallyafter
LoadTemplateSonghasbeenexecuted.
Ifyouexecutewithoutcheckingthis,onlythetemplate
songyouspecifiedinstep2willbeloaded.
Whenyouexecute,songsettingsotherthanPlayLoopand
RPPRwillbecopied.
Sequencer mode
164
Ifinstep2youcheckedCopyPatterntoTracktoo?and
pressedtheOKbutton,theCopyPatternToTrackdialog
boxwillappear.
ThisdialogboxisthesameasinthemenucommandCopy
ToTrack.
3. InToTrack,selectthecopydestinationtrack.
InMeasure,specifythebeginningmeasureofthecopy
destination.
Note:Track1ofallsixteenpresettemplatecontainsadrum
categoryprogram.(InpresettemplatesongsP02,P04,P08,
andP15drumcategoryprogramsarespecifiedformultiple
tracks.)
Thepatternnamesofthepresetpatternsindicatethe
musicalgenreandpartoftheoptimaldrumcategory
program.
Byloadingthedrumtrackforthesepresettemplatesongs
andthecorrespondingpresetpatterns,youcanefficiently
setupadrumtrackthatissuitedtoeachpresettemplate
song.
Whenyouexecute,Measurewillcountupautomatically.
Youmaythencopypatternsaswell.Toexitthecommand,
presstheExitbutton.
Fordetailsonhowtocopypresetpatternstoasongalong
withthepresettemplatesong,pleaseseeUsingtemplate
songsonpage 58oftheOperationguide.
Save Template Song
(Save as User Template Song)
SaveTemplateSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
pages.
Thiscommandsavestheprogramselections,track
parameters,andeffectsettingsetc.ofthecurrentsongasa
usertemplatesongU0015.Thesettingsyousaveherecan
alsobeloadedinSongPlaymode.
1. InTo,specifytheusertemplatesong(U0015)inwhich
thedatawillbesaved.
Beawarethatwhenyouexecutethiscommand,allsettings
ofthedestinationTemplatewillbeerasedandrewritten
withthecurrentsettings.
Note:ThePlayLoopandRPPRsettingsarenotsaved.Ifyou
wanttosavethesesettingsandtheuserpatterns,execute
SaveSEQinMediamodeandsavethemtoanSDcard.
FF/REW Speed
FF/REWSpeedisavailableoneverypages,exceptforthe
Pattern/RPPRpageRPPRSetuptab.
Thisallowsyoutosetthespeedatwhichfastforwardor
rewindwilloccurwhenyoupresstheFFbuttonorREW
button.
1. InSpeed,specifythespeed(relativetotheplayback
tempo)atwhichfastforwardandrewindwilloccur.
TheSpeedsettingisinmultiplesoftheplaybacktempo.A
settingof1isthesamespeedastheplaybacktempo.
Settingsof24respectivelycorrespondtodouble,triple,or
quadruplespeedoftheplaybacktempo.
Note:Fastforwardandrewindspeedsmaybeslowerin
regionswithdenseperformancedata.Fastforwardand
rewindspeedswilldifferbetweenregionswherethe
performancedataisdenseorsparse.
2. IfIgnoreTempoischecked,theplaybacktempoand
notelengthwillbeignored,andfastforwardand
rewindoccurs.
Ifthisitemisunchecked,fastforwardandrewindwillbe
performedatthespeedyouspecifyforSpeed.
Set Location
(Set Location for Locate Key)
SetLocationisavailableoneverypages,exceptforthe
PatternRPPRpage.
WhenyoupresstheLOCATEbutton,youwillmovetothe
locationspecifiedhere.
1. InLocation,specifythelocationtowhichyouwill
movewhenyoupresstheLOCATEbutton.
Fromtheleft,thevaluesareMeasure(001999),Beat(01
16),andTick(000479).
Ifyouspecify001:01.000,youwillmovetothebeginningof
thesongwhenyoupresstheLOCATEbutton.
Note:Whenthisdialogboxisnotopen,youcanholddown
theENTERbuttonandpresstheLOCATEbuttontosetthe
currentlocationastheSetLocationvalue.
Sequencer: Menu Command GM Initialize
165
GM Initialize
GMInitializeisavailableonallofthetabsunderthePlay/
pages.
ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystemOnmessagetothe
Sequencermode,resettingalltrackstotheGMsettings.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeGMInitializeonpage 165.
InSequencermode,whenaGMSystemOnmessageis
receivedfromanexternaldevice,orifaGMSystemOn
messageisrecordedinthesequencedata,theKROME
willberesettosettingsappropriateforGMjustasif
youhadexecutedthiscommand.However,inthese
cases,thevariousP9:MFX/TFX/LFOparameterswill
notbereset.
GM Initialize List
Page Parameter Track 19, 1116 Track 10
P0
ProgramT0108,T0916
ProgramSelect G001 g(d)001
Play/Mute,Solo Settingremainsunchanged
MixerT0108,0916
Pan C064 C064
Volume 100 100
P2
EQTrimT0108,T0916
AutoLoadProgEQ On On
Bypass Off Off
InputTrim 99 99
EQGainT0108,T0916
HighGain[dB] +00.0 +00.0
MidFrequency[Hz] 3.20k 3.20k
MidGain[dB] +00.0 +00.0
LowGain[dB] +00.0 +00.0
P3
MIDIT0108,T0916
Status Settingremainsunchanged
MIDIChannel Settingremainsunchanged
BankSelectMSB/LSB 000 000
OSCT0108,T0916
ForceOSCMode Settingremainsunchanged
OSCSelect Settingremainsunchanged
Portamento Off Off
PitchT0108,T0916
Transpose +00 +00
Detune +0000 +0000
BendRange +02 +02
ScaleT0108,T0916 UseProgramsScale Settingremainsunchanged
P4
KeyZoneT0108,T0916 C1G9(Slope=000) C1G9
VelZoneT0108,T0916 001127(Slope=000) 001127
DelayT0108,T0916
MIDITempoSync. Off Off
Time 0000 0000
P5 MIDIFilter1,2 On On
P7
Arpeggiator Variousparameters Settingremainsunchanged
DrumTrack Variousparameters Settingremainsunchanged
P8
Routing1T0108,T09
16
Bus(IFX/Output)Select L/R L/R
Send1(MFX1) 0 0
Send2(MFX2) 40 40
InsertFXSetup
IFX15 Settingremainsunchanged
Pan:#8 Settingremainsunchanged
FXControlBus Settingremainsunchanged
Send1/2 Settingremainsunchanged
Otherparameter Settingremainsunchanged
Routing2T0108,T09
16
FXControlBus Off Off
CommonFXLFO Otherparameters Settingremainsunchanged
P9
Routing
MFX1 StereoChorus
MFX2 ReverbSmoothHall
Chain Off
ChainDirection 12
Level 127
Return1 127
Return2 50
OtherMFXparameters Settingremainsunchanged
TFX Settingremainsunchanged
MasterLevel Settingremainsunchanged
Sequencer mode
166
Copy From Combi (Copy from
Combination)
CopyFromCombiisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
pages.
Thiscommandcopiestheparametersofthespecified
combinationtothesettingdataofthecurrentlyselected
song.
Note:Onlythetimbresusedbythecombinationwillbe
copied.TimbresinthecombinationwhoseStatusisOffwill
notbecopied.IfanytimbresaresettoMute,the
correspondingtracksofthesongwillbesettoaStatusof
Off.
1. InCombination,selectthecopysourcedestination.
2. UsetheIFXs,MFXsandTFXcheckboxestospecify
whetheryouwanttheeffectsettingsofthecombina
tiontobecopiedaswell.
IFXs:Allinserteffectsettingsofthecopysource
combination(thecontentsoftheInsertFXSetuppageand
theIFX15effectparameters)willbecopied.
MFXs:Allmastereffectsettingsofthecopysource
combinationwillbecopied.
TFX:Alltotaleffectsettingsofthecopysourcecombination
willbecopied.
3. SpecifythedesiredAutoadjustArpsettingforMulti
RECsetting.
YouhavetheoptionofcheckingtheAutoadjustArpsetting
forMultiREC.Asnecessary,thisfunctionwilladjustthe
MIDIchanneletc.ofanytracksthatneedtobechanged,
and/oraddnewtracks,inordertoensurethatwhenyou
performmultirecordingwiththearpeggiatoron,thesame
soundwillbereproducedduringrecordingasduring
playback.
Note:Thisfunctionmakesadjustmentsdependingonthe
ARPstateofthecombination.Whenyoucopya
combinationthatwaswrittenwiththearpeggiatorturned
off,itisassumedthatyouwillleavethearpeggiatoroffin
thesong.Ifyouwanttousethearpeggiatorinthesong,you
shouldwritethecombinationwiththearpeggiatorturned
on,andthencopyittothesong.
Ifthisischecked,theMIDIchannelsetc.ofthetrackswillbe
corrected.MultiREC(Seq08b)andPLAY/MUTE/REC
(Seq01(2)a)willalsobesetautomatically.
Inaddition,RecordingSetup,Overwrite(Seq08b)willbe
selected.(NotethattheautomaticallysetMultiRECand
PLAY/MUTE/RECwillberesetwhenyoureselectthe
song.)
Note:Fordetailsonthedatathatwillbeadjusted,seebelow.
Thecontentdescribedherewillbecorrectedautomatically.
Dependingonthesettingsofthecombination,itmaybe
necessarytomakeadditionalchangestothetracksettingsin
additiontothesettingshere.
If the recorded performance is not reproduced
correctly during playback
IfyouusethemenucommandCopyFromCombitocopy
thesettingsofacombination,andthenperformmultitrack
recordingwiththearpeggiatorturnedon,theremaybe
casesinwhichtheperformanceduringrecordingisnot
reproducedcorrectlyduringplayback.
MultipletracksthataresettothesameMIDIchannelare
combinedintoasinglestreamofperformancedataduring
recording.IfthereisatrackwiththesameMIDIchannelas
thetrackbeingplayedbythearpeggiator,thedataplayed
bythearpeggiatorwillbecombinedwiththeperformance
datathatwasplayedmanually,andallofthisdatawillbe
soundedbyeachtrackofthesamechannel(ifStatusisINT).
Insuchcases,youcansolvetheproblembycreatingatrack
thatwilldrivethearpeggiatoronadifferentMIDIChannel.
Iftherecordedperformanceisnotreproducedbythe
playback,checkthefollowingconditions.
Thesesettingscanbeexecutedautomaticallyifyoucheck
AutoadjustArpsettingforMultiRECinthemenu
commandCopyFromCombi.Normally,youwillcheckthis
toexecutethesettings.Inthiscase,theseadjustmentswill
notbenecessary,butyoucanverifyherethattheautomatic
adjustmentshavebeenmade.
SEQP7:ARP/DTARPSetupT0108andT0916page
ArpeggiatorRunA,B,andArpeggiatorAssignsettings
SEQP3:TrackParamMIDIChT0108andT0916page
MIDIChannelsettings
IfArpeggiatorRunAandBarechecked,andthe
arpeggiatorisassignedtoatrack,makesurethatMIDI
Channel(GlobalP1:MIDI)issettootherthan01.
MakesurethattheglobalMIDIchannel(GlobalP1:MIDI,
MIDIChannel)issetto01.
ArpeggiatorRun MIDIChannel
a
Correction
IfeitherAorB
arechecked
01only Correctionrequired
0102,0103,etc. Nocorrectionrequired
Sequencer: Menu Command Copy from Program
167
Dependingonthecombinationsettings,itmayalsobe
necessarytochangethetracksettingsaswell.
Theprecedingillustrationshowstheexampleofcopyingthe
combinationB109:EchoJammwithAutoadjustArp
settingforMultiRECuncheckedinCopyFromCombi.
Selectanewsong,andexecutethecopytoseetheresult.
(Formoreaboutthearpeggiatorsettingsinthis
combination,seepage 91.)
Usingthesesettingsasanexample,determinewhether
correctionisnecessary,andifso,whatneedstobecorrected.
ArpeggiatorRunAandBarechecked,andMIDIChannel
01and02areselected.Correctionisnecessaryforoneofthe
arpeggiators.Ifyouperformmultitrackrecordingwith
thesesettings,theMIDIchannelsofT01,02,and03arethe
same,sothehighregisterguitar/piano/pad(T02,T03,and
T05),thelowregisterbass(T01),andthegutarriffplayedby
arpeggiatorB(T02)willhavetheirperformancedata
combinedintoonestream,andtheperformancewillnotbe
reproducedatplayback.(T16isadummytrackusedto
triggerarpeggiatorA.)
1. SothatthebassplayedbyarpeggiatorBcanbe
recordedseparately,changetheMIDIchannelofT02.
SelecttheSEQP3:TrackParamMIDIT0108page,and
changetheT02MIDIChannelto03.
2. AddsettingsfortriggeringarpeggiatorB.
SelecttheSEQP3:TrackParamMIDIT0916page,andfor
track8(oranyunusedtrack),turnStatusOff,andsetthe
MIDIChannelto01.(T08willbeadummytrackusedto
triggerarpeggiatorA.)
3. SelecttheSEQP7:ARP/DTARPSetupT0916page.
Setthetrack8AssigntoB.
Thiswillproducethefollowingsettings.
Thiscompletesthecorrections.IntheSequencerP0:Play/
RECPreferencepage,setTrackSelecttoanytrackwhose
MIDIchannelis01.ChecktheMultiRECcheckboxand
performmultitrackrecording.
Copy from Program
CopyfromProgramisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
pages.
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromtheprogramyouspecify
tothecurrentlyselectedsong.
ThisisthesamefunctionasinCombinationmode;for
details,pleaseseeCopyfromProgramonpage 101.
ThiscommandinSequencermodediffersfromitsbehavior
inCombinationmodeinthatthechannelsassignedtothe
tracksofthesongwillbepreservedregardlessofthewith
ArpsettingofthecopydestinationtracksMIDIChannel.
(Seestep4.)
Copy Tone Adjust
ToneAdjusttaboftheplay/RECpage.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyToneAdjuston
page 65.
Reset Tone Adjust
ToneAdjusttabofthePLAY/RECpage.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeResetToneAdjuston
page 65.
Copy Drum Track
CopyDrumTrackisavailableontheDrumTracktabofthe
ARP/DTpage.
Thiscommandcopiesthedrumtracksettingsofthe
specifiedProgram,Combination,orSong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyDrumTrackon
page 65.
EraseDrumTrackisavailableontheDrumTracktabofthe
ARP/DTpage.
Patternonpage 66.
Detune BPM Adjust
DetuneBPMAdjustisavailableonthePitchtabofTrack
Prampage.
Whentheprogramselectedforatrackusesaphrase,or
rhythmloopmultisample,youcanusethiscommandto
changetheBPMofthephraseorrhythm.TheBPMcanbe
adjustedbymodifyingthepitch.Thiscommandisavailable
whentheDetunesettingofthattrackisselected.Whenyou
executethiscommand,theselectedDetunevaluewillbe
adjusted.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDetuneBPMAdjuston
page 103.
Copy Arpeggiator
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheArpAtabandArpB
tabofPlay/RECControlpageorSetuptab,ArpAtab,ArpB
tab,ScanZonetaboftheARP/DTpage.
Thiscommandcanbeusedtocopyarpeggiosettingsfrom
anotherlocationtothecurrentprogram.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyArpeggiatoron
page 66.
Step Recording
StepRecordingisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
IfbothAandB
arechecked
01only Correctionrequired
0102,0103,etc.
Correctionrequiredfor
onlyone
010203,etc.
Nocorrectionrequired/
Correctionrequired
b
a. IftheMIDIChannelofmultipletracksoperatedbythe
arpeggiatorissetonlyto01,refertothelinesfor01
only.IftheMIDIChannelsettingsare01andoneother
channel,suchas01and02,thenrefertothelinesfor01
02,etc.IftheMIDIChannelsettingsare01and
multipleotherMIDIchannels,suchas01and02and03,
thenrefertothelinefor010203,etc.
b. Correctionisnecessaryonlyifthetracksoperatedbya
singlearpeggiatorareusingonlyMIDIChannel01.In
somecases,correctionmayalsobenecessaryifthetwo
arpeggiatorsusethesameMIDIchannel.
Track T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08 T16
Assign Off B Off A Off Off Off B A
Status INT INT INT INT INT INT Off Off Off
MIDICh. 01 03 01 02 01 01 10 01 01
Sequencer mode
168
Steprecordingallowsyoutospecifythelengthandvelocity
ofeachnotenumerically,andtoinputthepitchesfromthe
keyboard.YoucanusetheRestbuttonandTiebuttonto
inputarestortie.
Ifyouusesteprecordingtoinputdataintoatrackthat
alreadycontainssequencedata,alldatawillbeerased
fromtheFromMeasureandsubsequentmeasures.If
afterinputting,youdecidetoreverttothepriordata,
usetheComparefunction.
Toinputdatawithacontinuouslychangingvaluesuchas
pitchbend,itisbesttouseCreateControlData.Toinput
individualdataeventssuchasprogramchanges,useEvent
Edit.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackintowhichyouwish
toinputdata,anduseFromMeasure(Seq61c)tospec
ifythemeasureatwhichyouwishtobegininput.
2. SelectStepRecordingtoopenthedialogbox.
3. InMeter,setthetimesignature.
Thiswillshowthetimesignaturethathasalreadybeenset
forthemeasure.
Ifyouchangethetimesignaturesetting,thetimesignature
dataofthemeasuresyourecordwillchange,andalltracks
willchangetothetimesignatureyouspecified.
4. InStepTime,specifythelength(intermsofanote
value)ofthebasicintervalatwhichyouwillinput
data.
Fromthepopupmenuattheleft,selectthenotelengthina
rangeof(wholenote)through(32ndnote).
Ifyouwanttheselectednotevaluetobeadottednoteora
triplet,usethepopupmenuattherighttoselectadot
. (Dot)ortriplet3(Triplet).Tousetheunmodified
valueoftheselectednote,choose(Normal).
Thefollowingtableshowsthenumberofclocksrepresented
byeachStepTimeselection.
5. InNoteDuration,specifythelengththatthenotewill
actuallybeheld,relativetotheStepTime.
Ingeneral,100%willbetenuto,85%willbenormal,and
50%willbestaccato.
6. UseNoteVelocitytospecifythevelocityvalue(key
boardplayingstrength)ofthenotedata.
WiththePAUSE( )buttonpressed,youcanholddown
theENTERbuttonandplayanoteonthekeyboardto
specifythevelocityvalue.IfyousetNoteVelocitytoKey,
theactualvelocityatwhichyouplayedthekeywillbe
input.
7. Inputthenoteeventsdescribedbelowbyplayingnotes
onthekeyboardorbypressingthebuttonsinthelower
partofthedialogbox.
Inputting notes
Whenyoupressakeyonthekeyboard,thatnotenumber
willbeinputasanoteofthelengthspecifiedinstep4.
Whenyoupressachordonthekeyboard,thosenote
numberswillbeinputaschordsofthelengthspecifiedin
step4.Sinceeachofthenotenumbersyoupressbefore
releasingallofthekeyswillbeinputatthesamelocation,
thenoteswillbeinputasachordeveniftheyareactually
playedatdifferenttimes.
Eachtimeyoupressandreleasethekeyboard,thelocation
willadvancebythelengthspecifiedinstep4.
Inputting rests
PresstheRestbuttontoinputarestofthelengthspecified
instep4.
Inputting a tie
IfyoupresstheTiebuttonwithoutpressingthekeyboard,
thepreviouslyinputnotewillbetied,andlengthenedby
theamountspecifiedinstep4.
IfyoupresstheTiebuttonwhileholdingdownanote,the
noteyouareplayingwillbetied,andlengthenedbythe
amountspecifiedinstep4.
Youcaneveninputnotesasshowninthefollowing
diagram.
Deleting a note or rest
Todeleteanoteorrest,presstheStepBackbutton.The
locationwillmovebackwardbytheamountspecifiedin
step4,andthedatainthatintervalwillbedeleted.
Auditioning the next note before input
Ifyouwishtomakesureofthenextnotebeforeyouactually
inputit,pressthePAUSE( )button(theLEDwilllight
up).Nowwhenyoupressakey,youwillhearsoundbutthe
notewillnotbeinput.PressthePAUSE( )buttononce
again(theLEDwillgodark)tocancelthepausemodeand
resumeinput.
8. Whenyouarefinishedwithsteprecording,pressthe
Donebutton.
IfyoupresstheCOMPAREbutton,youwillreturntothe
conditionofbeforeyoubegansteprecording.
Note number
Location within the
measure (beat, clock)
Length (beats, clocks)
Time
signature
Velocity
3
(0:060) (0:120) (0:240) (1:000) (2:000) (4:000)
(0:090) (0:180) (0:360) (1:240) (3:000) (6:000)
(0:040) (0:080) (0:160) (0:320) (1:160) (2:320)
Step Time = Step Time = Step Time =
Tie

On
Press E and C
ON
Press G
Of
Release E (continue holding C)
Sequencer: Menu Command Event Edit
169
Event Edit
EventEditisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Here,youcaneditindividualeventsofMIDIdatathatwere
input.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwishto
edit,anduseFromMeasure(Seq61c)fieldtospecify
themeasureatwhichyouwishtobeginediting.
IfyouselectedTrack0116inEventEdit,selectingthis
commandwillopentheSetEventFiltersdialogbox.
IfyouselectedMasterTrackinTrackSelect,thisdialogbox
willnotappear.
IntheSetEventFiltersdialogboxyoucanselectthetypes
ofevents(musicaldata)thatwillappearandcanbeedited
intheeventeditwindow.
ForNoteyoucansetBottomandToptospecifytherangeof
notesavailableforediting.Normallyyouwillleavetheseset
atC1andG9.
ControlChangeletsyouspecifythecontrolchangenumber.
NormallyyouwillleavethissetatAll.
Youcanalsocheckvariousotherevents(PitchBend,
ProgramChange,AfterTouch,PolyAfterTouch,and
Exclusive).
2. PresstheOKbuttontoopentheEventEditdialogbox.
3. Intheupperpartofthedialogbox,MeasureandIndex
showthemeasurethatyouareeditingandtheeventsof
theindexnumberswithinthemeasure.
Youcantouchthescrollbarlocatedattherighttomoveto
theeventthatyouwishtoedit.
4. Selecttheeventthatyouwishtoedit,andusethe
VALUEcontrolleretc.tomodifyitsvalue(s).
BymodifyingthevalueoftheBeatTicklocationwithin
themeasure,youcanmovetheeventwithinthemeasure.
Youcanediteacheventbymodifyingitsdatavalue(s).
Whenyouselectanoteevent,itwillsound.
5. Youcanpressthebuttonslocatedatthebottomofthe
dialogboxtoediteventsasfollows.
Inserting an event
SelectthelocationBeatTickatwhichyouwishtoinsertan
event,andpresstheInsertbuttontoinsertanevent.
Deleting an event
Selecttheeventthatyouwishtodelete,andpresstheCut
buttontodeletetheevent.
Moving an event
YoucanusetheCutbuttonandInsertbuttontomovean
event(asincutandpaste).
UsetheCutbuttontodeletetheeventthatyouwishto
move,thenusetheInsertbuttontoinsertitatthedesired
location.
YoucanalsomoveaneventbymodifyingitsBeatTick
value.
Copying an event
Selecttheeventthatyouwishtocopy,andpresstheCopy
button.ThenselectthecopydestinationandpresstheInsert
buttontoinserttheeventatthatlocation.
Playing back an event
WhenyoupressthePlaybutton,adialogboxwillopenand
thesongwillbeginplaying.Usethistoauditiontheedits
youvemadeinEventEdit.
Playbackwillbeginfromthemeasurespecifiedby
Measure.
Playbackwilloccuraccordingtothesettingsofthesong.
(ThesongwillplaybackinthesamewayasintheP011:
Play/RECpage,etc.)
Ifyouwanttoplaybackonlythetrackyoureediting,exit
EventEditandsolothedesiredtrack.Alternatively,
mutetheothertracks.Thetrackbeingeditedisindicated
byabluerectangle.
IfyoupresstheExcl.Solobutton,theexclusivesolo
functionwillturnon.
Off:Multiplesolooperation
Thesoloon/offstatewillchangeeachtimeyoupressa
solobutton.Youcanturnsoloonformultipletracks.
On:Exclusivesolooperation
Solowillbeonforonlyoneofthesixteentracks.
ThissettingislinkedwiththeExclusiveSolomenucom
mand.
IfthemenucommandPanelSWSoloModeOnis
checked,switches18willcontrolsoloon/offifyouve
selectedControlAssignMIXERT18orT916,evenwhile
usingEventEditPlay.
IfyouveeditedtheMeter,thechangewillnotbe
reflectedintheplaybackuntilyouexitEventEdit.
WhenyoupresstheExitbutton,playbackwillstopand
youwillreturntotheEventEditdialogbox.
Editingsystemexclusivemessages
YoucaneditKROMEparameterchangemessagesand
universalsystemexclusivemessages.
Fortheapplicableparameters,refertothetableonp.634.
*Dump/Ext*isshowninthefollowingcases.
Exclusivedumpdata
Parameterchangemessagesnotsupportedbythe
KROME,suchasmessagesfromanexternalMIDI
device
Sequencer mode
170
ParameterchangemessagesofotherthanSequencer
mode
*Unavailable*isshowninthefollowingcases.
KROMEparameterchangemessagesthatcannotbe
realtimerecordedbytheKROME,suchasMIDIChannel,
Status,orKey/VelZone.(Thiscorrespondstoparameters
notinthetableonpage 191.Suchcasesmayarisewhen
theparametercannotberealtimerecordedbyoperatinga
parameterontheKROME,butcanberecordedwhen
receivedviaMIDI.)
KROMEparameterchangemessagesforwhichthereisno
supportedparameter,duetoaninputmistakeorsome
otherreason
Note:
IFX1,2,3,4,5,MFX1,MFX2,andTFXeffectparameters
Toneadjust
Theseparameternamesanddisplayedvaluesarethe
parameternamesandvaluesforthecorrespondingeffect.
(EffectparametersconsistingofParameteranda
numeral(e.g.,Parameter71)areparametersnotusedby
thecurrentlyselectedeffect.)
Ifyourerecordingparameterchangemessagestoswitchthe
effecttype,theparameternameswillnotbethe
correspondingparameternamesfortheeffectthatis
originallyselectedatsongplayback;rather,thedisplaywill
showtheparametersforthecurrentlyselectedeffect.Be
awareofthiswhenswitchingeffects,andwhencontrolling
theirparameters.
TheBinEditbuttonwillbeavailablewhenanexclusive
messageisselected.Pressingthisbuttonwillopenthe
BinaryEditordialogbox.
Here,asystemexclusivemessagestartingwithF0canbe
editedinhexadecimalform.Usethiswhenyouwantto
enterandeditasystemexclusivemessageforanexternal
device.
TheKROMEssystemexclusivemessageshavethe
followingformat.
F0:Exclusivestatus
42:KorgID
3n:n=0...FGlobalMIDIchannel
00:ModelIDbyte1
01:ModelIDbytes2
15:ModelIDbytes3
ff:functionID
([41][04]:Sequencermodeparameterchange)
...
F7:Endofexclusive
WhenyoupresstheTestbutton,thecurrentlyedited
systemexclusivemessagewillbetransmittedfromthe
MIDIOUTconnector,USBMIDIconnector,andEXFW
connector(ifoptionallyinstalled).Usethiswhenyou
wanttochecktheoperationofanexternaldevice.
Index[D]intheinformationboxindicatesthepositionof
theselecteddatawithinthemessageasanumberofbytes
fromthebeginningofthemessage.TakingthestartingF0
aszero,thisisshownas1,2,3,...etc.(adecimalvalue).
Size[D]isadecimalvalueindicatingthenumberofbytes
inthecurrentlyeditedsystemexclusive.16[D]indicates
thatthemessageissixteenbytes.
PresstheOKbuttontoapplythesettings.
Usethedataentrybuttonstoenterdataashexadecimal
values.Thevalues8,9,A,B,C,D,E,andFarevalidonly
whenenteringthelowerdigit,wherethesevaluesare
permitted.
YoucanusetheInsertbuttonandCutbuttontoinsertor
deletebytedata.
PresstheOKbuttontoapplythesettingsandreturnto
theeventeditpage.
6. Whenyouarefinishedeventediting,presstheDone
button.IfyoupresstheCOMPAREbuttonyouwill
returnthedatatotheconditioninwhichitwasbefore
youbeganeventediting.
Thefollowingtableshowsthetypesofmusicaldatathatcan
beeditedbyEventEditandtherangeoftheirvalues.
*1:Beawarethatbecausethetimesignatureisrecorded
inthemastertrack,modifyingitwithinanytrackwill
affectalltracksatthesamemeasure,causingthemallto
playbackwiththemodifiedtimesignature.
Note:*2:Youcanalsoenterthenotedataandvelocityvalues
byholdingdowntheENTERbuttonandplayingakey.
*3:YoucannotchangeExclusiveeventsintoadifferent
typeofevent(e.g.,aNoteorControlChangeevent).
Norcanyouchangeanyothertypeofeventintoan
Exclusiveevent.
Patternnumberswillbedisplayedinlocationsinwhicha
patternhasbeenput(placed).Attheendofthetrackthere
willbeanindicationofTrackEnd.
BAR (displayed only)
(Measure line)
Meter: 1/4...16/16 *1
(Time signature)
C1...G9*
2
(Notedata)
V:1...127*
2
(Velocity)
L:000.000...15984.000
(Length:beats,clocks)
PAFT
(Polyphonicafter
touch)
C1...G9
(Notenumber)
0...127
(Value)
CTRL
(Controlchange)
C:0...119
(Controlchange
number)
0...127
(Value)
PROG
(Program
change)
Bank:A...E
000...127,
GM,g(1)..g(9)g(d),
,
(Programbank)
P:0...127,
1...128(GM,
g(1)...g(d))
(Programnumber)
AFTT
(AfterTouch)
0...127
(value)
BEND
(Pitchbend)
8192...+8191
(value)
EXCL*
3
(Exclusive)
Sequencer: Menu Command Piano Roll
171
Piano Roll
ThePianoRolldialogboxprovidesadetailedgraphicview
ofeventdatasuchasnotes,velocities,andcontrolchanges.
Hereyoucanalsomodify,delete,orcreatetheseevents.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwantto
edit,anduseFromMeasure(Seq61c)tospecifythe
startingmeasurethatyouwanttoedit.Alternatively,
usetheTrackViewpage(Seq62)tospecifythetrack
andmeasuresforediting.
2. Fromthemenucommands,choosePianoRollor
choosethe toolintheTrackViewpage;thePiano
Rollwindowwillappear.(Seeillustrationbelow.)
3. Thenoteviewareaintheupperpartofthedialogbox
andthecontrolviewareainthelowerpartwillshow
theeventsthatcanbeedited.
Theeventsareshowninoneofthefollowingways.For
details,refertotheexplanationofeachitem.
Pressnoteviewareaselect,andusetheVALUE
controllerstooperateit.
Choosethe toolanddrag.
EnterMeasand#intheeventlist.
UsetheZoombuttonstozoomthedisplayin/out.
4. Choosethedesirededitingtoolfromthetoolbox,and
editthedata.Fordetails,refertoEditingnotesor
Editingcontroldata.
Note:Ifyoudecidetocancelaneditingoperation,pressthe
Undobutton.Thistakesyoubacktothestatepriortothe
mostrecentoperation.TheRedooperationcancelstheUndo
operation.Ifyouwanttoreturntothestatepriortoentering
thepianorolldialogbox,presstheDonebuttontostop
editing,andthenpresstheCOMPAREbutton.
5. Toplaybacktheevents,pressthePlaybutton.Adialog
boxwillopen,andthesongwillbeginplaying.Usethis
toheartheresultsofyourediting.
6. PresstheDonebuttonwhenyourefinishedediting.
Note view area
Hereyoucanedit,delete,oraddnoteevents.
Theverticalaxisofthegridindicatespitch,andthe
horizontalaxisisthelocation(ofthemeasures).Thegrid
intervalforthehorizontalaxisisspecifiedbythePianoRoll
SetupGridResolutionparameter.
Fornoteevents,theverticalaxisindicatesthepitch,andthe
lengthofthebarindicatesthedurationofthenote.Theleft
edgeofthebaristhebeginningoftheevent.
Measuresinwhichapatternhasbeenputareshadedin
purple.
Note view area select
Hereyoucanchangetherangeofpitchesthataredisplayed.
PressthisobjectandoperatetheVALUEcontrollers(VALUE
dial,IND/DECbuttons,etc.)changetherangeofdisplayed
pitches.Youcanalsomovethebarbydraggingitupor
down.
Thiswillbereleasedwhenyouselectaneventlistitemor
thecontrolviewselectsection.
Control view area
Thisshowsvelocityorcontroldata,andallowsyoutoedit,
delete,oraddthisdata.
Control view area select
Thisselectsthedatashowninthecontrolviewarea.Choose
fromthefollowing.
Vel:Velocity
PAft:Polyphonicaftertouch
CC#000...119:Controlchange000119
Aft:Aftertouch
Bnd:Pitchbend
Ifyouselectanoteinthenoteviewarea,velocitywillbe
shownautomatically.
*Programchangesandexclusiveeventsarenotshown.
Note view
area select
Control view area
Event list
Note view area
Control view select
Note events
View area
height select
Zoom
The selected note event
Press the Setup button to open
the Piano Roll Setup dialog box.
(Piano Roll Setup)
Plays back the song. Pressing
this button will open the Piano
Roll Edit Play dialog box.
(Piano Roll Edit Play)
Tool
box
Style
select
Press when youre fnished
Piano Roll editing.
Sequencer mode
172
Toolbox
Select Event tool
Usethistoselectaneventinthenoteviewareaorcontrol
viewarea.Youcanmoveaneventbydraggingit.
Length Edit tool: Only for Note view
Usethistooltomodifythelengthofanote;presstheevent
anddragit.
Put Event tool
Usethistocreateanevent.
Ifyoupressinsidethenoteviewarea,anotewillbeadded.
TheGridResolutionsettinginPianoRollSetupspecifies
thelengthoftheinsertednote.Thenotewillbeinserted
withavelocityof100.
Ifyoupressinsidethecontrolviewarea,acontrolevent
specifiedbythecontrolviewselectCtrlsettingwillbe
created.Youcancreatecontinuousdatabydragging.
However,PAft(polyphonicaftertouchevents)cannotbe
created.
Youcantcreateeventsinameasurewhereapatternhas
alreadybeenplaced.
Erase Event tool
Usethistoeraseanevent.
Ifyoupressinsidethenoteviewarea,thenotewillbe
erased.
Ifyoupresscontroldatainthecontrolviewarea,thatdata
willbeerased.Ifvelocityisdisplayed,thenoteeventwillbe
deletedatthesametime.
LimitedtoErase,youcanerasemultipleeventsinasingle
operation.Dragtoenclosetheeventsyouwanttoerase
(theywilllightblue),andthenrelease;theeventsinthe
specifiedregionwillbeerased.However,PAft(polyphonic
aftertouchevents)cannotbeerased.
Grab tool
Youcanmovethedisplayedregionbydraggingoverthe
noteviewareaorcontrolviewarea.
Style Select tool
Usethistoswitchthenoteeventdisplaybetween
theconventionaltypeandatypesuitableforadrum
kit.
View control
Zoom
Usethesebuttonstozoomin/outthedatashowninthenote
viewareaorcontrolviewarea.
Fromtheleft,thesebuttonszoomin(magnify)thevertical
axis,zoomout(shrink)theverticalaxis,zoomin(magnify)
thehorizontalaxis,andzoomout(shrink)thehorizontal
axis.
Verticalzoomin/outwillzoomcenteredontheselected
event.
Horizontalzoomin/outwillzoombasedonthemeasure
shownatthefarleft.
Scroll
Usethesebuttonstoscrollthenoteviewarea.
View area height select
Pressingthesebuttonswillchangethedisplayedsizeofthe
noteviewareaandthecontrolviewarea.
Editing notes
Note:Ifyoudecidetocancelachange,presstheDone
buttontofinishediting,andthenpresstheCOMPARE
button.Youwillreturntothestatepriortoopeningthe
PianoRolldialogbox.
Moving a note
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Pressthenoteeventthatyouwanttomove.
Thenotewilllightblue.Continuepressing,andevent
informationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft(orupper
right).
3. Continuingtopressthenote,dragitup/down/left/
right.
Draggingverticallywillchangethenotespitch,and
dragginghorizontallywillchangeitslocation.
1 2
3
3
173
Movinganotetoapreciselocation
YoucanusethePianoRollSetupSnaptoGridorMove
NoteResolutionsettingstoeasilyspecifyaprecise
location.Forexampleifyouwanttomoveanotetoa
precisetimingintervalsuchas, , ,,useGridResolution
tospecifytheunitandturnSnaptoGridon.Whenyou
draganoteevent,itwillsnaptothegrid.(SeePiano
RollSetupdialogboxonpage 175.)
Editingavalueintheeventlist
Choosethe tool,andthenpressthenoteeventthat
youwanttomove.Intheeventlistbelow,usetheVALUE
controllerstoenterthedesiredvalue.
Notedataandvelocityvaluescanalsobeenteredbyholding
downtheENTERbuttonandplayinganoteonthe
keyboard.
Changingthelengthofanote
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Pressneartherightendofthenoteeventwhoselength
youwanttochange.
Thenotewillbehighlighted.Continuepressing,andevent
informationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft(orupper
right).
Note:Ifyouselectanoteeventanditturnslightblue,a
squarewillbeshownattherightend.Thenotewillturn
greenifyoupressthissquare.
3. Continuingtopressthenote,dragitleft/right.
Thenotelengthwillchange.
IfthePianoRollSetupSnaptoGridsettingison,thelength
willchangeinincrementsoftheGridResolutionwhenyou
dragit.
Entering a note
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Pressthelocationatwhichyouwanttoenterthenote.
Anotewillbeentered.Continuepressing,andevent
informationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft;youcan
dragthenotetothedesiredlocation.Thenotewillbe
enteredwithavelocityof100.
Tospecifythelengthofthenotesthatareentered,setthe
desiredGridResolutioninthePianoRollSetupdialog
box.
Toalignthenotetoapreciselocation,setthedesired
GridResolutioninthePianoRollSetupdialogbox,and
turnSnaptoGridon.
Erasing a single note
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Pressthenotethatyouwanttoerase.Thedatawillbe
erased.
1 2
3
1
2
Sequencer mode
174
Erasing multiple notes
LimitedtotheEraseoperation,youcanselectmultiple
eventsanderasetheminasingleoperation.
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Dragtoenclosetheregionofnotesthatyouwantto
erase.Thenotestobeerasedwillbehighlighted.
Whenyourelease,thedatawillbeerased.
Editing control data
Editing a data value
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Choosethedatathatwillbeshowninthecontrolview
area.Ifyouveselectednoteevents,thisareawillshow
velocitydata.
3. Pressthesquareatthetopofthedatathatyouwantto
edit.
Theindicationwillbehighlighted.Continuepressing,and
eventinformationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft.
4. Dragup/downtochangethevalue.
Alternatively,youcanenterthedesiredvalueintheevent
list.
Creating continuously changing data values
1. Pressthe tool.
area.
3. Dragovertheregionwhosevaluesyouwanttochange.
Thepathonwhichyoudragisshownbyaline.When
yourelease,thevalueswillchangetofitthatline.
1 2
1
2
3
4
1 2 3
175
Entering data
1. Pressthe tool.
area.
3. Dragovertheregioninwhichyouwanttoenterdata.
Thepathonwhichyoudragisshownbyaline.When
yourelease,valueswillbeenteredtofitthatline.
Erasing data
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Choosethatdatathatwillbeshowninthecontrolview
area.
3. Pressonthedatathatyouwanttoerase,ordragacross
theregionthatyouwanttoerase.Whenyourelease,the
datawillbeerased.
Event list
UseMeas(Measure)and#(Index)todisplaythemeasure
thatyouwanttoeditandthedesiredindexnumberwithin
thatmeasure.
Ifyouchange#tochoosecontroldatasuchasAFTTor
CC#01inthelowerarea,thecontrolviewselectvaluewill
alsochange,andthosevalueswillbeshowninthecontrol
viewarea.
Whenyouselectaneventinthenote/controlviewarea,the
eventwillturnlightblueandthatvaluewillbeshowninthe
eventlist.Ifyouuse#toselectadifferentevent,the
selectedeventwillbeshownindarkblue,andthelightblue
eventwillturnred.
Selecttheeventthatyouwanttoedit,andusetheVALUE
controllerstoenterthedesiredvalues.
ByeditingtheBT(BeatTick)locationwithinthemeasure,
youcanmoveaneventwithinthatmeasure.
Youcanediteachtypeofeventdata.Whenyouselecta
noteevent,itwillsound.
Thefollowingtableshowsthetypesofdataandthe
availablevaluesthatyoucaneditinPianoRoll:Event
Edit.
*Notedataandvelocityvaluescanalsobeenteredby
holdingdowntheENTERbuttonandplayinganoteonthe
keyboard.
Undo, Redo button
YoucanpresstheUndobuttontocancelthemostrecent
edit.TheRedobuttonreturnstotheeditedstate.These
buttonsallowyoutoreturnonlytothestatepriortothe
singlemostrecentoperation.
Setup button
PresstheSetupbuttontoaccessthePianoRollSetupdialog
box,whereyoucanmakesettingssuchastheresolution
wheneditinginthenoteviewarea.
Piano Roll Setup dialog box
Move Note Resolution [Free, , , , , , , , , , ]
Whenyoudraganoteeventhorizontally,itwillmovein
unitsoftheresolutionyouspecifyhere.Forexampleifyou
setthisto,,dragginganeventatlocationBT:1.001toward
therightwillsuccessivelymoveittolocations2.01,3.001,
4.001,etc.Thisadjustmentwillnotoccurifyouchoosethe
Freesetting.
ThissettingisvalidifSnaptoGridisOff.
Snap to Grid [Off, On]
On:Whenyoudraganoteeventhorizontally,itwillsnapto
theresolutionspecifiedbyGridResolution.Forexampleif
GridResolutionissetto,,dragginganeventatlocation
BT:1.001towardtherightwillmoveittolocations2.000,
3.000,4.001,etc.Thelocationstowhichyoucanmoveanote
willbelimitedtoprecisequarternoteintervals.
Adottedgridisdisplayedinthenote/controlviewarea
accordingtotheGridResolutionsetting.
Off:Noteswillnotsnaptothegrid.Theywillmoveatthe
resolutionspecifiedbyMoveNoteResolution.
1 2 3
BAR(displayedonly)
(Measureline)
Meter:1/4...16/16
(Timesignature)
C1...G9*
(Notedata)
V:1...127*
(Velocity)
L:000.000...15984.000
(Length:beats,clocks)
PAFT
(Polyphonicafter
touch)
C1...G9
(Notenumber)
0...127
(Value)
CTRL
(Controlchange)
C:0...119
(Controlchange
number)
0...127
(Value)
AFTT
(AfterTouch)
0...127
(value)
BEND
(Pitchbend)
8192...+8191
(value)
Sequencer mode
176
Grid Resolution [, , , , , , , , , ]
Thisspecifiestheresolutionofthegrid.IfSnaptoGridis
On,noteswillsnaptotheresolutionyouspecifyhere.
NoteeventscreatedbythePutEventtoolwillalsohavethe
resolutionandlengthspecifiedhere.
Play Scroll [Sweep, Crawl]
Thisspecifieshowthenote/controlviewareawillscroll
duringplayback.
Sweep:Whenthelocationbarreachestheendoftheview
area,thenextmeasureandthelocationbarwillmovetothe
leftedge.
Crawl:Theviewareawillscrollmeasurebymeasure.The
locationbarwillnotmove.
Play button
WhenyoupressthePlaybutton,adialogboxwillopen,and
thesongwillbeginplayingback.
Playbackwillstartfromthebeginningofthemeasure
showninthenote/controlviewarea.
Piano Roll Edit Play
Solo buttons
EachtrackwillplaybackaccordingtothePlay/Muteand
SolosettingsinP0ProgramT0108andT0916.Thesolo
track(s)canalsobeswitchedusingthesixteenSolobuttons
inthePianoRollEditPlaydialogbox.Theupperrow
controlstracks18andthelowerrowcontrolstracks916.
Thetrackbeingeditedisenclosedinaframe.
Excl.Solo button
ThisturnsExclusiveSoloon.
Off:MultipleSolooperation
Eachtimeyoupressasolobutton,theSolosettingofthat
trackwillturnonoroff.YoucanturnSoloonformultiple
tracks.
On:ExclusiveSolooperation
Solocanbeturnedonforonlyoneofthe16tracksatatime.
ThissettingislinkedwiththeExclusiveSolomenu
command.
Play button
WhenyoupresstheStopbutton,playbackwillstopand
PianoRollEditPlaywillclose.Thenote/controlviewarea
willshowthebeginningofthemeasureatwhichyou
stopped.
Exit button
WhenyoupresstheExitbutton,playbackwillstopand
PianoRollEditPlaywillclose.Youwillreturntothe
measureinthenote/controlviewareawhereyoustarted
playback.
Set Song Length
SetSongLengthisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandchangesthelengthofthespecifiedsong.
Whenitisexecuted,thelengthofthemastertrackwill
change,andthenumberofmeasuresplayedwillchange.
1. InLength,specifythelengthofthesong.
AlldatafollowingthemeasurespecifiedbyLengthwill
bedeleted.
Erase Track
EraseTrackisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthespecifiedtrack.
However,itisnotpossibletoerasethemastertrackbyitself.
1. InTrackSelect,selectthetrackthatyouwishtoerase.
2. SelectEraseTracktoopenthedialogbox.
3. Selectthetrackwhosedatayouwanttoerase.
IfyoudontcheckAllTracks,thedatawillbeerasedonly
fromthetracksyouspecifyinTrackSelect.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,themusicaldataofalltrackswillbe
erased.
Copy Track
CopyTrackisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommandcopiesmusicaldatafromthecopysource
tracktothespecifiedtrack.
Beawarethatthetrackdataofthecopydestinationwillbe
erasedwhenyouexecutetheCopyTrackoperation.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(Track0116)
thatyouwanttocopy.
2. SelectCopyTracktoopenthedialogbox.
3. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcetrack,and
Totoselectthecopydestination.
(Bydefault,thetrackyouchooseinTrackSelectwillbe
specifiedforFrom.)
Sequencer: Menu Command Bounce Track
177
Bounce Track
BounceTrackisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommandcombinesthemusicaldataofthesourceand
destinationtracks,andplacesthecombineddatainthe
bouncedestination.Allmusicaldatainthesourcetrackwill
beerased.
IfMIDIcontroldataexistsinboththesourcetrackand
destinationtrack,unexpectedresultsmayoccurduring
playbackafterthebouncecommandisexecuted.Toprevent
thisfromhappening,useEventEditorEraseControlData
toedittheMIDIcontroldataofthetwotracksbeforeyou
useBounceTrack.
thatyouwanttobounce.
2. SelectBounceTracktoopenthedialogbox.
3. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthesourcetrack,andToto
selectthedestinationtrack.
(Bydefault,thetrackyouchooseinTrackSelectwillbe
specifiedforFrom.)
InthecaseofBounceTrack,thesourcetrackdatawillbeset
tozero.
Erase Measure
EraseMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommanderasesthespecifiedtype(s)ofmusicaldata
fromthespecifiedrangeofmeasures.
TheEraseMeasurecommandcanalsobeusedtoremove
onlyaspecifictypeofdata.UnliketheDeleteMeasure
command,executingtheEraseMeasurecommanddoesnot
causethesubsequentmeasuresofmusicaldatatobemoved
forward.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(Track0116),
mastertrackthatcontainsthemeasuresofdatayou
wanttoerase.
2. SelectEraseMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
3. InFromMeasureselectthefirstmeasuretobeerased,
andinToEndofMeasureselectthelastmeasuretobe
erased.
(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbe
settotherangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. IfyouareerasingMIDIdata,useKindtospecifythe
typeofdatathatwillbeerased.
Allwillerasealltypesofdatainthattrack,Notewillerase
notedata,ControlChangewillerasecontrolchangedata,
AfterTouchwillerasebothchannelpressureandpolykey
pressuredata,PitchBendwillerasepitchbenddata,
ProgramChangewilleraseprogramchangedata,and
Exclusivewilleraseexclusivedata.
5. Specifythetrack(s)onwhichyouwanttoexecutethe
command.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,thecommand
willbeexecutedonlyonthedataofthetrackyouselectedin
TrackSelect
IfyoucheckAllTracks,thecommandwillbeexecutedon
thedataofalltracks.
Ifcontroldataextendsacrossmeasuresthatwere
erasedandmeasuresthatwerenoterased,onlythe
datawithinthespecifiedrangewillberemoved.
Howeverifnotedataextendsacrosstwoormore
measures,deletinganyoftheinterveningmeasureswill
deletethatnotedatafromthefollowingmeasuresas
well.
Note:NotedatacanalsobeerasedusingShift/EraseNote.
Usethiscommandwhenyouwishtoeraseaspecificrange
ofnotes,ortoerasenotesfromaspecificBeat.Tick.
Note:ControlChangedatacanalsobeerasedusingErase
ControlData.Usethiswhenyouwishtoeraseaspecific
typeofcontrolchange,ortoerasecontrolchangedatafrom
aspecificBeat.Tickrange.
Delete Measure
DeleteMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommanddeletesthespecifiedmeasures.
WhentheDeleteMeasurecommandisexecuted,the
musicaldatafollowingthedeletedmeasureswillbemoved
towardsthebeginningofthesequence.
thatcontainsthemeasuresyouwanttodelete.
2. SelectDeleteMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
3. InFromMeasure,selectthefirstmeasurethatyouwish
todelete,andinToEndofMeasure,selectthelastmea
surethatyouwishtodelete.
therangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
command.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,thecommand
willbeexecutedonlyonthedataofthetrackyouselectedin
TrackSelect.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,thecommandwillbeexecutedon
thedataofalltracks.
2 1 5 4 3
No data
2 1 5 4 3
Before Erase
After Erase
Example: If measures 23 are erased, measures 23 will be blank.
Sequencer mode
178
Ifinstep4youuncheckAllTracksandexecutethis
operation,themeasureswillnotbedeletedfromthe
mastertrack.Timesignatureandtempodatawill
remainunchanged,andthetimesignatureandtempo
ofthemeasuresthatweremovedforwardasaresultof
theDeleteoperationwillchange.
Ifinstep4youcheckAllTracksandexecutethis
operation,thespecifiedmeasuresofmusicaldatawill
bedeletedfromalltracksincludingthemastertrack,
andthetimesignatureandtempowillalsomove
forwardbythenumberofmeasuresthatweredeleted.
Ifcontroldataextendsacrossalinebetweenmeasures
thatweredeletedandmeasuresthatwerenotdeleted,
onlythedatawithintherangebeingdeletedwillbe
erased.
Insert Measure
InsertMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandinsertsthespecifiednumberofmeasures
intothespecifiedtrack.
WhenyouexecutetheInsertMeasurecommand,the
musicaldatafollowingtheinsertlocationwillbemoved
backward.
Ifyouinsertmeasuresbetweennoteeventsthatare
connectedbyatie,anoteoffwillbecreatedimmediately
beforetheinsertedmeasure,andthesubsequentportion
willbedeleted.
inwhichyouwanttoinsertdata.
2. SelectInsertMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
3. InAtMeasure,specifythemeasurelocationatwhich
thedatawillbeinserted.
(ThemeasureyouspecifiedinTrackEditpageFrom
Measurewillbesetasadefault.)
4. InLength,specifythenumberofmeasuresthatwillbe
inserted.
5. InMeter,specifythetimesignatureofthemeasures
thatwillbeinserted.
Ifyouwanttheinsertedmeasurestomatchtheexistingtime
signature,specify**/**.Withanysettingotherthan**/**,the
timesignatureoftheinsertedmeasureswillchange,andthe
specifiedtimesignaturewillapplytoalltracksforthose
measures.
6. Specifythetrack(s)forwhichyouwanttoexecutethe
command.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,themeasureswill
beinsertedintothetrackthatsselectedinTrackSelect.Be
awarethatatthistime,theplaybackdatathatfollowsthe
insertlocationwillmovetowardtheendofthesong
accordingtothenumberofinsertedmeasures,butthetime
signatureandtempowillnotmove.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,themeasureswillbeinsertedinto
alltracksincludingtheMasterTrack.Theplaybackdatain
subsequentmeasureswillplayjustasitdidbeforethis
commandwasexecuted.
Repeat Measure
RepeatMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandrepeatedlyinsertsthespecifiedmeasuresfor
thespecifiednumberoftimes.
WhenyouexecutetheRepeatMeasurecommand,the
measureswillbeinsertedfollowingthemeasurespecified
byToEndofMeasure,andmusicaldatafollowingthe
inserteddatawillbemovedbackward.Itisconvenientto
usethiscommandwhenyouhaveasongthatyouplayback
withTrackPlayLoop(SeqP09(10)b)turnedon,andwish
toexpanditintomusicaldata.
1. UseTrackSelecttochoosetheMIDItrack(Track0116)
thatyouwanttoinsertdatainto.
2. SelectRepeatMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
3. InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specifythe
rangeofmeasuresthatwillberepeated.
settotherangeyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 1
7 8
5 4 3
Before
Delete
After
Delete
Example: When measures 35 are deleted, measures 68 are moved forward.
Track 2 2 (3/4) 1 (4/4) 3 (3/4)
Track 1 2 (3/4) 1 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (4/4) 5 (4/4)
1 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 5 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 4 (4/4) Track 2
1 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 5 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 4 (4/4) Track 1
Before Delete
After Delete
Example: When measures 2 and 3 (3/4 time) of track 2 are deleted, the measures that were
at 4 and 5 are moved forward, and their time signature will change to 3/4.
Track 2 5 (2/4) 4 (5/4) 1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) 3 (7/8)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (3/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (3/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (7/8)
Track 2
5 (2/4) 4 (5/4) Track 2 1 (4/4) 2 (4/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (3/4)
3 (3/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (3/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (3/4) Track 1
Track 1
Track 1
Track 2
Track 1
Time signature = **/**
Time signature = 7/8
Before Insert
After Insert
Before Insert
After Insert
Insert two measures
Measures 4 and 5 will use the previously specifed
time signature.
Measures 2 and 3 will be 7/8, and measures 4 and 5
will be the previously specifed time signature.
Insert two measures
Sequencer: Menu Command Copy Measure
179
4. InTimes,specifythenumberofrepetitions.
ForexampleifyousetFromMeasureto001,ToEndof
Measureto004,andTimesto2,themusicaldataof
measures14willbeinsertedintomeasures58.Theresult
willbethatmeasures14willbeplayedtwice.
command.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,theperformance
datawillbeinsertedintothetrackyouspecifiedinTrack
Select.Beawarethatinthiscase,theperformancedata
followingtheinsertpositionwillmovebackward(i.e.,
towardtheendofthesong)bythenumberofinserted
measures,butthetimesignatureandtempowillnotmove.
IfyouexecutewithAllTrackschecked,theperformance
datawillbeinsertedintoalltracks,includingthemaster
track.Theperformancedatafollowingtheinserted
measureswillplaybackinthesamewayasitdidbefore.
Copy Measure
CopyMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommandcopiesthemeasuresofmusicaldata
specifiedastheFromsourcetothebeginningofthemeasure
specifiedastheTolocation.
WhenyouexecutetheCopyMeasurecommand,theexisting
trackdataatthecopydestinationwillberewritten.
1. Selectthecopysourcesong.
2. SelectCopyMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
3. InFrom:Trackselectthecopysourcetrack.
(Bydefault,thiswillbethetrackyouselectedinTrack
Select.)
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,onlytheselected
trackwillbecopied.Notethatthetimesignatureandtempo
willnotbecopied.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,themusicaldataofalltracks
includingthemastertrackwillbecopied.
rangeofcopysourcemeasures.
5. UseTo:Songtospecifythecopydestinationsong,
Track(ifAllTracksisunchecked)tospecifythecopy
destinationtrack,andMeasuretospecifythestarting
measureatwhichthecopieddatawillbeinserted.
Move Measure
Thiscommandmovesthespecifiedmeasuresof
performancedatatoanothermeasure.
1. SelectMoveMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
2. InFrom:Trackselectthemovesourcetrack.
(Bydefault,thiswillbethetrackyouselectedinTrack
Select.)
IfAllTracksunchecked,onlydatafromtheselectedtrack
willbemoved.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,musicaldataofalltracksincluding
themastertrackwillbemoved.
rangeofmeasuresthatwillbemoved.
4. InTo:Track(ifAllTracksisunchecked)tospecifythe
movedestinationtrack,andMeasuretospecifythe
measureatwhichthedatawillbeinserted.
IfyouexecutethiswithModeStay,playbackdatalocated
afterthemovesourcemeasuresandplaybackdatalocated
afterthemovedestinationmeasureswillnotmove;itwill
staywhereitis.
IfyouexecutethiswithModeShift,playbackdatalocated
afterthemovesourcemeasureswillmovetowardthe
beginningofthesongbythenumberofmeasuresthatwere
moved.Playbackdatalocatedafterthemovedestination
measureswillmovetowardtheendofthesongbythe
numberofmeasuresthatweremoved.
5. SetOverlaptospecifywhatwillhappenifthereis
datainthemovedestinationmeasuresandyouve
specifiedModeStay.IfyouchooseMerge,themove
sourcedataandmovedestinationdatawillbecom
bined.IfyouchooseOverwrite,themovesourcedata
willoverwrite(replace)themovedestinationdata.
Beawarethattimesignatureandtempodatawillnotbe
moved.
6. ToexecutetheMoveMeasurecommand,presstheOK
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
2 (4/4) 1 (4/4) 5 (3/4) 4 (3/4) 3 (4/4) 6 (3/4) 7 (4/4)
2 (4/4) 1 (4/4) 5 (3/4) 4 (3/4) 3 (4/4) 6 (3/4) 7 (4/4)
Track 1
(source)
Track 2
(destination)
Example: When you copy measures 57 of track 1 to the third measure of track 2,
measures 35 of track 2 will be rewritten.
Sequencer mode
180
Create Control Data
CreateControlDataisavailableonallofthetabsofthe
TrackEditpage.
Thiscommandcreatesthespecifiedtypeofdata(control
change,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempo)intheselected
regionofatrack.
1. InTrackSelect,selecttheMIDItrackonwhichyou
wishtoperformtheCreateControlDatacommand.
Ifyouwishtomodifytempodata,selectMasterTrackasthe
track.Inthiscase,thestep4itemKindwillbesettoTempo.
2. SelectCreateCtrlDatatoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytherangeintowhichthecontroldatawillbe
inserted.
InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specifythe
measures,andinBeat.Tick,specifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbesetto
therangeyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. SetKindtothetypeofmusicaldata(event)thatyou
wishtocreate.
Controlchange:Controlchangedatawillbeinserted.Inthis
case,use#tospecifythecontrolchangenumber.
AfterTouch:Aftertouchdatawillbeinserted.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbeinserted.
Tempo:Tempodatawillbeinserted(ifyouveselectedthe
mastertrack).
5. InStartValue,selectthestartingvalueofthecontrol
data.InEndValue,selecttheendingvalueofthecon
troldata.
Bydefault,theStartValuewillbesettothevalueofthe
existingdataatthestartlocation.Ifyouwishtocreate
controldatathatchangessmoothlyfromthestarting
location,youcanleavetheStartValueunchanged,andset
onlytheEndValue.
WhenyouexecuteCreateControlData,alargeamountof
sequencermemorywillbeconsumed.Forthisreasonit
maynotbepossibletoexecutethiscommandifthereisa
limitedamountofmemoryremaining.Insuchcases,first
useQuantizetoquantizethedataandremoveunnecessary
controldata.Alternatively,youcouldquantizethedata
thatwasinsertedbytheCreateControlDatacommand.
Example Move measures 3-4 of track 1 to measures 3-4 of track 2.
Track 1
Before Move
2 (Tr1) 1 (Tr1) 5 (Tr1) 4 (Tr1) 3 (Tr1)
Track 2 2 (Tr2) 1 (Tr2) 5 (Tr2) 4 (Tr2) 3 (Tr2)
After Move
Mode: Stay
Mode: Shift
Track 1
Overlap: Merge
2 (Tr1) 1 (Tr1) 5 (Tr1)
Track 2 2 (Tr2) 1 (Tr2) 5 (Tr2) 4 (Tr1+2) 3 (Tr1+2)
No data No data
After Move
Track 1
Overlap: Overwrite
2 (Tr1) 1 (Tr1) 5 (Tr1)
Track 2 2 (Tr2) 1 (Tr2) 5 (Tr2) 4 (Tr1) 3 (Tr1)
No data No data
After Move
Track 1
Track 2
Track 1
Before Move
Track 2
2 (Tr1) 1 (Tr1) 3 (Tr1)
2 (Tr2) 1 (Tr2) 5 (Tr2) 4 (Tr1) 7 (Tr2) 6 (Tr2) 3 (Tr1)
No data No data
2 (Tr1) 1 (Tr1) 5 (Tr1) 4 (Tr1) 3 (Tr1)
2 (Tr2) 1 (Tr2) 5 (Tr2) 4 (Tr2) 3 (Tr2)
0
3:00 3:24 3:48 3:72 4:00 4:24 4:48
127
100
Location
After touch
Previous data
Start location End location
End Value
Start Value
default value
Example: The controller is aftertouch. Starting location is 3:48, ending location is
4:24, and end value is set to 100. This will cause the aftertouch value to begin
changing from 3:48, and reach a value of 100 at 4:24.
Sequencer: Menu Command Erase Control Data
181
Erase Control Data
EraseControlDataisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommanderasesdatasuchascontrolchanges,after
touch,pitchbend,ortempointhespecifiedrange.
1. InTrackSelect,selectthetrackfromwhichyouwishto
erasecontroldata.
Ifyouwishtoerasetempodata,selectMasterTrack.Inthis
case,theKinditeminstep4willbeTempo.
2. SelectEraseCtrlDatatoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytherangefromwhichyouwishtoerasecontrol
data.
InFromMeasuretoToEndofMeasurespecifythe
measures,andinBeat.Tickspecifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbethe
rangethatwasspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. SetKindtothetypeofmusicaldata(event)thatyou
wishtoerase.
Controlchange:Controlchangedatawillbeerased.Inthis
case,use#tospecifythecontrolchangenumber.
AfterTouch:Aftertouchdatawillbeerased.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbeerased.
Tempo:Tempodatawillbeerased.(Ifyouveselectedthe
mastertrack)
Note:Ifyouwishtoeraseallcontrolchangedatafrom
specifiedmeasures,youcanalsouseEraseMeasureandset
KindtoControlChange.However,thisEraseControlData
commandallowsyoutospecifytherangeusingBeat.Tick,
andalsotoeraseonlyspecifictypesofcontrolchangedata.
Quantize
QuantizeisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
ThiscommandcorrectsthetimingofMIDIdataofthetype
youspecify(notedata,controlchange,aftertouch,pitch
bend,programchange,etc.)inthetrack.
WhenyouexecutetheQuantizeoperation,themusicaldata
willbeaffectedasfollows:
WhenyouexecuteQuantizeonnotedata,thetimingof
thenoteonwillbecorrected,butthelength(durationof
thenote)willnotbeaffected.
IftheQuantizeresolutionissettoHi,thetimingwillbe
adjustedtounitsofthebaseresolution(,/480),sonote
datawillnotbeaffected.However,continuouscontroller
datasuchasjoystickoraftertouchwhichoccupiesalarge
amountofmemorywillbeprocessedsothattwoormore
dataeventsofanidenticaltypeexistingatasingle
intervalofthetimingresolutionwillbecombinedintoa
singleevent,thusconservingmemory.
Similarly,twoormoreidenticaldataeventsexistingatthe
exactsametimewillbecombinedintoone,alsoconserving
memory.
1. InTrackSelect,specifythetrack.
2. SelectQuantizetoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytherangethatwillbequantized.
measures.InBeat.Tickspecifythebeatandclock.(By
rangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. InKind,selectthetypeofmusicaldata(events)that
youwishtoquantize.
All:QuantizationwillbeappliedtoallperformanceMIDI
data.
Note:Quantizationwillbeappliedonlytonotedata.Use
BottomandToptospecifytherangeofnotes.Bottom
specifiesthelowestnotethatwillbeaffected,andTop
specifiesthehighestnote.Youcanusethiswhenyouwant
toquantizeonlyaspecificnoteornotes(forexample,just
thesnaresoundsofadrumtrack).Ifyouwanttoquantize
allnotes,settheseparametersC1andG9respectively.
ControlChange:Quantizationwillbeappliedtocontrol
changes.Ifyouwanttoquantizeonlyaspecificcontrol
change,specifythenumber(No.).Ifyouwanttoquantizeall
controlchanges,selectAll.
AfterTouch:QuantizebothChannelPressureand
PolyphonicKeyPressuremessages.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbequantized.
ProgramChange:Programchangedatawillbequantized.
5. InResolution,specifythetimingresolutiontowhich
thedatawillbecorrected.
Sequencer mode
182
Bysettingalowerresolutionyoucansavemorememory,
butthetimingoftheplaybackmaynotbeacceptable.
6. InOffset,specifythenumberofclockticksbywhich
thedatawillbemovedforwardorbackwardrelativeto
thestandardtiming.
Asettingof240willbe,,and120willbe,.Positive(+)
settingswilladjustthedataforward,andnegative()
settingswilladjustthedatabackward.Thisallowsyouto
simulatepushingordraggingthebeat.
7. InIntensity,specifythedegreeofsensitivitytowhich
thetimingwillbecorrected;i.e.,howclosetotheloca
tionsspecifiedbysteps5and6thedatawillbemoved.
Withasettingof0,nocorrectionwilltakeplace.Witha
settingof100,thedatawillbemovedallthewaytothe
timingintervalsspecifiedbysteps5and6.
8. UseSwingtoaddasenseofswingtotherhythm.For
example,thisprovidesaneasywaytogiveaslight
shufflegroovetoasquare16beatrhythm.
Settingsotherthan0%willaddasenseofswingby
adjustingthepositionofthenotesatevennumberedbeats
relativetothespecifiedResolution.Withasettingof+100%,
thesenoteswillbemovedonethirdofthewaytoward
intervalsofthespecifiedResolution.Withasettingof
+300%,notesofevennumberedbeatswillbemovedallthe
waytothenextevennumberedbeat.
* ByvaryingtheOffsetandIntensitysettingsyoucan
createquantizeeffectssuchasthefollowing.
* ByvaryingtheSwingsettingsyoucancreateeffectssuch
asthefollowing.
Shift/Erase Note
Shift/EraseNoteisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandshifts(moves)orerasesspecifiednote
numbersinaselectedtrackandoverarangeofmeasures.
1. InTrackSelect,choosetheMIDItrackonwhichyou
wishtoexecutetheShift/EraseNotecommand.
2. SelectShift/EraseNotetoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytherangeinwhichyouwishtoshiftorerase
notenumbers.
measures.InBeat.Tick,specifythebeatandclock.(By
rangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. Specifytherangeofnotesthatyouwishtoshiftor
erase.
NoteRange:Bottomspecifiesthelowerlimit,andTop
specifiestheupperlimit.Ifyouwishtoeditallnotes,set
BottomtoC1andToptoG9.
Shifting notes
5. InShiftNote,specifytheamountbywhichyouwishto
movethenote.
Theamountofshiftissetinsemitonestepsoverarangeof
127to+127.+1willshiftthenoteasemitoneupward.
6. SelecteitherReplacetomovethenotenumbers,orCre
atetogenerateadditionalnotes.
Forexampleifyouareeditingatrackthatusesadrum
program,youcanuseReplacetoexchangethecurrentsnare
soundforadifferentsnaresoundassignedtoadifferentkey,
oruseCreatetoaddasoundeffectatadifferentnote#tothe
snaresound.Alternatively,youcanuseCreatetoaddan
octavedoublingtoanexistingguitarphrase,etc.
7. ToexecutetheShiftNotecommand,presstheOKbut
ton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Erasing notes
8. CheckEraseNote.
Ifyouwishtoeraseallnotedatainthespecifiedrangeof
measures,youcanalsousetheEraseMeasurecommand
andsetKindtoNote.However,thisShift/EraseNote
commandletsyouspecifytheBeat.Tickrange,andtoerase
onlyspecificrangesofnotedata.
Original
Quantize Resolution =
Ofset = 0, Intensity = 100%
Quantize Resolution = ,
,
Ofset = +120, Intensity = 100%
Ofset = +120, Intensity = 75%
, , , , ,
100%
100%
50% 50%
100%
75%
100%
100% 100%
75% 75%
100% 100%
100%
100%
50% 50%
100%
+120 +120 +120 +120
75%
100%
+120 +120
60 60 60
+120 +120
100% 100%
+120 +120 +120 +120
75% 75%
100% 100%
+100%
0%
+200%
+300%
100%
WhenResolution = ,
beat 1 beat 2 beat 3 beat 4
Swing = 0%
Swing = +100%
Swing = 100%
Swing = +200%
Swing = +300%
Sequencer: Menu Command Modify Velocity
183
Modify Velocity
ModifyVelocityisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandmodifiesthevelocityvaluesofnotesinthe
specifiedareasothattheywillchangeovertimeaccording
toaselectedcurve.
1. InTrackSelect,specifythetrackwhosevelocitywillbe
modified.
2. SelectModifyVelocitytoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytherangeinwhichnotevelocitywillbemodi
fied.
FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurespecifythemeasure,
andBeat.Tickspecifythebeatandclock.(Bydefault,From
MeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbesettotherange
thatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. Specifytherangeofnotesthatwillbeaffectedbythe
ModifyVelocitycommand.
NoteRange:Bottomisthelowerlimit,andTopistheupper
limit.Ifyouwishtoeditallnotes,setBottomtoC1andTop
toG9.
5. InVelocityStartValue,specifythevalueatwhichthe
velocitydatawillstart,andinEndValue,specifythe
finalvelocityvalue.
6. InIntensity,specifythedegreetowhichthevelocity
datawillbeadjustedtowardthecurveyouspecifyin
step7.
Withasettingof0[%],thevelocitywillnotchange.Witha
settingof100[%],thevelocitywillbeexactlyasdescribedby
thecurve.
7. Curveletsyouselectfromsixtypesofcurvetospecify
howthevelocitywillchangeovertime.
* Thesixcurvesareasfollows.
Create Exclusive Data
Thiscommandcreatesuniversalsystemexclusivemessages
orKROMEparameterchangemessagesinthespecified
regionofaMIDItrack.
1. UseTrackSelecttospecifytheMIDItrackinwhichyou
wanttocreateexclusivedata.
2. ChooseCreateExclDatatoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytheregionintowhichyouwanttoinsertuni
versalsystemexclusivemessagesorKROMEparameter
changemessages.
UseFromMeasureandToMeasuretospecifythemeasures,
andBeat.Ticktospecifythebeatandclock.(Bydefault,
FromMeasureandToMeasurewillbesettotheregionyou
specifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. UseKindtospecifythetypeofuniversalsystemexclu
sivemessageorKROMEparameterchangemessage
thatyouwanttocreate.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUniversalsystem
exclusiveonpage 365.
5. UseStartValuetospecifythestartingvalueoftheuni
versalsystemexclusivemessageorKROMEparameter
changemessage,andEndValuetospecifytheending
value.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCreateExclusive
Dataoperation.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
127
Velocity
1
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Curve 1
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Curve 2
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Curve 3
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Curve 4
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Curve 5
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Rndm
RANDOM
127
Velocity
1
127
Velocity
1
127
Velocity
1
127
Velocity
1
127
Velocity
1
For a Start Velocity of 1 and End Velocity of 127
3:00 3:24 3:48 3:72 4:00 4:24 4:48
Location
EQ High Gain
Previous data
Start location End location
End Value
Start Value
default value
Example: The parameter is EQ High Gain. Starting location is 3:48, ending location is 4:24,
and end value is set to +12.0. This will cause the EQ High Gain value to begin
changing from 3:48, and reach a value of +12.0 at 4:24.
-18.0
0
+18.0
+12.0
Sequencer mode
184
Erase Exclusive Data
Thiscommanderases(deletes)universalsystemexclusive
messagesorKROMEparameterchangemessagesfromthe
specifiedregion.
1. UseTrackSelecttospecifytheMIDItrackfromwhich
youwanttoeraseexclusivedata.
2. ChooseEraseExclDatatoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytheregionfromwhichyouwanttoeraseuni
versalsystemexclusivemessagesorKROMEparameter
changemessages.
Note:UseFromMeasureandToMeasuretospecifythe
measures,andBeat.Ticktospecifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToMeasurewillbesettothe
regionyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. UseKindtospecifythetypeofuniversalsystemexclu
sivemessageorKROMEparameterchangemessage
thatyouwanttoerase.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUniversalsystem
exclusiveonpage 365.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheEraseExclusiveData
operation.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel
button.
Ifyouwanttoerasealluniversalsystemexclusivemessages
orKROMEparameterchangemessagesfromspecified
measuresinasingleoperation,youcanuseEraseMeasure
withKindsettoExclusive;howeverinthatcase,youwont
beabletouseBeat.Tickwhenspecifyingtherangefor
erasure.
Copy Insert Effect
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyInsertEffecton
page 66.
However,theMIDIcontrolchannelspecifiedinCtrlChof
theIFX15pagewillnotbecopied.
Swap Insert Effect
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapInsertEffecton
page 67.
theIFX15pagewillnotbeswapped.
DrumKit IFX Patch
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDrumKitIFXPatchon
page 104.
Copy MFX/TFX
pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyMFX/TFXon
page 67.
theMFX1TFXpagewillnotbecopied.
Swap MFX/TFX
pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapMFX/TFXon
page 67.
theMFX1TFXpagewillnotbeswapped.
Write FX Preset
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWriteFXPreseton
page 67.
Put Effect Setting to Track
PutEffectSettingtoTrackisavailableonalloftheIFXand
MFX/TFX/LFOpages.
Thiscommandinsertseffectsettingsintoatrackasexclusive
events.Youcanusethistomaketheeffectsettingschange
duringasong.
WhenyouuseSystemExclusivemessagestochange
effectsettings,acertainamountoftimewillberequired
fortheeffecttoswitch.Also,ifanoteisplaying,the
soundmaynotchangesmoothly.Youshouldtakeinto
accountthetimingofthemusicaldatawhenchoosing
wheretoinsertSystemExclusivemessages.
Note:Ifyouswitcheffectsduringasong,youshouldalso
usethiscommandtoinsertaneffectchangeatthebeginning
ofthetrack(Measure001,Beat.Tick01.000)toselectthe
effectthatwillbeusedfromthebeginning.
1. UseP8:Routing/IFXorP9:MFX/TFX/LFOtoeditthe
effectsettingsthatyouwanttoinsert(IFX1IFX5,
MFX1,MFX2,TFX),anddeterminethesong,track,mea
sure,beat,andclockatwhichyouwillinserttheexclu
siveevent.
TheillustrationbelowshowstheexampleofswitchingIFX4
(usedbytrack2)atthebeginningofmeasure9.
2. SelectPutEffectSettingtoTracktoopenthedialog
box.(Thevaluesinthedialogboxaresettingsforthe
exampledescribedinstep1.)
Sequencer: Menu Command Put Effect Setting to Track
185
3. UseEffecttoselectthedesiredeffect.
4. UseTo:Songtospecifythesongintowhichthesettings
willbeinserted,Tracktospecifytheinsertdestination
track,MeasuretospecifythemeasureandBeat.Tickto
specifythebeatandclockatwhichthesettingswillbe
inserted.
Theinsertedeventsareonlytheeffecttypeandeffect
parameters.Settingssuchaseffecton/offandbypass
mustberecordedinrealtime.
Note:TurnbacktheLocation,andplaythesongtoverify
thattheeffectisswitchedasyouintend.
YoucanalsousetheP6:TrackEditmenucommandEvent
EdittoverifythataparameterchangeSystemExclusive
message(Exclusive)hasbeeninserted.
Note:Ifapatternhadbeeninsertedatthesamelocation
(whereyouinsertedtheexclusivedata),thatpatternwillbe
expandedtonotedata.
Using Put Effect Setting to Track to switch ef-
fects
ThePutEffectSettingtoTrackmenucommandinserts
effectsettingsintoatrackasexclusiveeventdata.Well
explainthisusingtwomethodsasexamples.
1) Inserting effect settings at the beginning and in the mid-
dle of a song
WellsetthingssothatMIDItrack2usestheinserteffect
(IFX3)035:StereoPhaserfrommeasures1through8,and
switchesto032:StereoFlangerfrommeasure9.
UsethemenucommandPutEffectSettingtoTracktoinsert
aMIDIparameterchangeSystemExclusivemessage.
1. InP01:Play/RECProgramT0108,selectthedesired
programforMIDItrack2.
IfyousetTrackSelecttoTrack02,youllbeabletomonitor
it.
2. InP8:Routing/IFXRoutingT0108,sendMIDItrack2
toIFX3.
3. Specifytheeffectthatyouwanttousefrommeasure1.
InP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetup,select035:Stereo
PhaserforIFX3.PresstheOn/OffbuttontoturnontheIFX3.
InP8:Routing/IFXIFX3,settheparametersasdesired.
4. MakesurethatyouveselectedTrack02inTrackSelect,
andrecordasdesired.
5. IntheP8:Routing/IFXpage,selectthemenucommand
PutEffectSettingtoTracktoaccessthedialogbox.
6. Specifythelocationatwhichtheexclusivemessagefor
theeffectwillbeinserted.
8. Specifytheeffectthatyouwanttouseformeasure9
andfollowing.
GototheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXsetup,andchoose032:
StereoFlangerforIFX3.
IntheP8:Routing/IFXIFX3,settheparametersasdesired.
9. IntheP8:Routing/IFX,choosethePutEffectSettingto
Trackmenucommandtoopenthedialogbox.
10. Specifythelocationatwhichtheexclusivemessagefor
theeffectwillbeinserted.
12. Whenyouplaybackafterexecutingthesecommands,
theeffectontrack3willchangeto032:StereoFlanger
atmeasure9.
13. IfyoupresstheCOMPAREbutton(itwilllightup)and
playback,theplaybackwilloccurasitdidbeforeyou
executedPutEffectSettingtoTrack.
14. IntheP6:TrackEditTrackEditpage,setTrackSelect
toTrack03,andchoosetheEventEditmenucommand
toaccesstheeventeditscreen.(IntheSetEventFilters
dialogbox,checkExclusive.)
NoticethataMIDIparameterchangeSystemExclusive
messageisinsertedatthebeginningandatmeasure9of
track3.
2) Using the songs own effect settings from the beginning
of the song, and inserting effect settings from elsewhere
into the middle of the song
Inthisexample,wellapplyaninserteffect(IFX3)toMIDI
track3,andsetourparameterssothatituses035:Stereo
Phaserfromthebeginningofthesong.Atmeasure9,well
insertaMIDIparameterchangeSystemExclusivemessage
tomakeIFX3switchtothe032:StereoFlangereffectsettings
thatwerecreatedforadifferentsong.
1. SelectadesiredprogramforMIDItrack3,andsendit
toIFX3.
MakethefollowingsettingsforMIDItrack3.
TrackSelect:Track03(P0)
Bus(IFX/Output)Select:IFX3(P8)
IntheP01:Play/RECProgramT0108page,assigna
programtotrack3.ThenusetheP8:InsertEffectpageto
routetrack3totheeffect,andmakeeffectsettings.
2. MakesurethatyouveselectedTrack03inTrackSelect,
andrecordonit.
3. Onaseparatesongyoucopied,maketheeffectsettings
thatyouwantstartusingatmeasure9.
1)CreatesongS001.
Effect:IFX3
To:Song:000
Track:03
Measure:001
Beat.Tick:01.000
Effect:IFX3
To:Song:000
Track:03
Measure:009
Beat.Tick:01.000
Sequencer mode
186
2)UsetheCopyFromSongmenucommandtocopyfrom
S000.
Insong001,maketheeffectsettingsthatyouwanttouse
frommeasure9.GototheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetup,
andchoose032:StereoFlangerforIFX3.
IntheP8:Routing/IFXIFX3,settheparametersasdesired.
4. SelectPutEffectSettingtoTracktoopenthedialog
box.
5. Inserttheeffectsettingsyoucreatedinsong001into
song000.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand.
7. Afterexecution,selectsong000andplayitback.The
effectfortrack3willchangeto032:StereoFlangerat
measure9.
8. Insong000,youcanpresstheCOMPAREbutton(it
willlightup)andplaybacktohearthesongasitwas
beforeyouexecutedPutEffectSettingtoTrack.
YoucanusetheCOMPAREbuttontocomparethestateof
thetrackbeforeandafterexecution.
Note:IntheP6:TrackEditTrackEditpageofsong000,set
TrackSelecttoTrack03andchoosetheEventEditmenu
commandtoaccesstheEventEditscreen.(IntheSetEvent
Filtersdialogbox,checkExclusive.)
NoticethataMIDIparameterchangeSystemExclusive
messageisinsertedatmeasure9oftrack3.
Step Recording (Loop Type)
Here,youcanperformsteprecordingintoapattern.
Thisisavailablewhenauserpatternisselected.
1. InPattern(PatternBank)andPatternSelect,specifythe
pattern.
Bydefault,thepatternlengthisonemeasure.Ifyouwishto
changethenumberofmeasuresinthepattern,setthe
PatternParameter.
2. SelectStepRecording(LoopType)toopenthedialog
box.
3. Theremainingstepsarethesameaswhensteprecord
ingonatrack.
Refertosteps3andfollowinginStepRecording(seeStep
Recordingonpage 167).However,steprecordingapattern
differsfromsteprecordingatrackinthatwhenyoureach
theendofthepattern,youwillreturntothebeginningand
continuerecording,inthiswaycontinuingtoaddmore
data.
Event Edit
Here,youcaneditindividualeventsofthemusicaldataina
pattern.
UsePatternandPatternSelecttospecifythepattern,and
thenselectthiscommand.
TheremainingstepsarethesameaswhenEventEditinga
track.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEventEditon
page 169.
Piano Roll
Thisisthepianorolldialogboxforenteringapattern.The
PianoRolldialogboxprovidesadetailedgraphicviewof
eventdatasuchasnotes,velocities,andcontrolchanges.
Hereyoucanalsomodify,delete,orcreatetheseevents.
Pattern Parameter
Thiscommandspecifiesthenumberofmeasuresandthe
timesignatureoftheselectedpattern.
1. UsePatternandPatternSelecttospecifythepattern.
2. SelectPatternParametertoopenthedialogbox.
3. InLength,specifythenumberofmeasuresinthepat
tern.
4. InMeter,specifythetimesignatureofthepattern.
However,thistimesignatureisonlytemporary,andwhen
youputorcopythepatterninatrackofasong,the
patternwillplayaccordingtothetimesignatureofthat
measure.
Erase Pattern
Thiscommanderasesthedatafromtheselectedpattern.
2. SelectErasePatterntoopenthedialogbox.
3. IfyoucheckAllPatterns,alluserpatternsinthesong
willbeerased.
IfAllPatternsisnotchecked,onlythepatternspecifiedin
step1willbeerased.
Copy Pattern
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsandmusicaldataofthe
selectedpatterntoanotherpattern.
Userpatternsbelongtoaparticularsong,butyoucanuse
theCopyPatterncommandtousethesamepatternin
anothersong.
Althoughpresetpatternscannotbeedited,youcancopya
presetpatterntoauserpattern.There,youcaneditandsave
Effect:IFX3
To:Song:000
Track:03
Measure:009
Beat.Tick:01.000
Note number
Location within the
measure (beat, clock)
Length
(beats, clocks)
Time
signature
Velocity
Sequencer: Menu Command Bounce Pattern
187
itasauserpattern.Beawarethatwhenyouexecutethe
CopyPatternoperation,thepatternsettingsandmusical
dataofthecopydestinationwillbeerased.
1. InFrom(Song***):Pattern,specifythecopysourcepat
tern.(Bydefault,thiswillbethesongandpatternthat
wasselectedinthePatternEditpage.)
2. InTo:SongandPattern,specifythecopydestination
songandpattern.
ForPattern,onlyuserpatternsU00U99canbespecified.
Bounce Pattern
Thiscommandcombinesthemusicaldataofasource
patternandadestinationpattern,andplacesthecombined
musicaldatainthedestination.Thetimesignatureand
lengthofthepatternfollowingexecutionwillbeaccording
tothesettingsofthedestinationpattern.UnliketheTrack
Bounceoperation,themusicaldataofthebouncesourcewill
notbeerased.
IfMIDIcontroldataexistsintheselectedpatternandinthe
bouncedestinationpattern,theresultingplaybackfollowing
thebounceoperationmayproduceunexpectedresults.We
recommendthatyouuseEventEdittopreparetheMIDI
controldataofthetwopatternsbeforeexecutingtheBounce
Patterncommand.
1. PatternandPatternSelecttospecifythebouncesource
pattern.
2. SelectBouncePatterntoopenthedialogbox.
3. InFrom(Song***)Pattern,selectthebouncesourcepat
tern.(Bydefault,thesongandpatternthatareselected
inthePatternEditpagewillbechosen.)
4. InTo:SongandPattern,selectthebouncedestination
songandpattern.ForPattern,onlyuserpatternsU00
U99canbespecified.
Get From Track
Thiscommandtakesmusicaldatafromatrackandloadsit
intothespecifiedpattern.
2. InPatternParameter,specifythepatternlengthofthe
getdestination.
3. SelectGetFromTracktoopenthedialogbox.
4. InSong,selectthegetsourcesong.
5. InTrack,selectthegetsourcetrack.
6. InMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureoftheget
source.
Put To Track
Thiscommandplacesapatternintoatrack.
UnliketheCopytoTrack,thiscommandonlyplacesthe
patternnumberinthesong,sothatwhenplaybackreaches
thatpoint,thepatternwillberecalled.Themusicaldataof
thepatternwillnotactuallyexistinthetrack.
Bycreatingpatternsthatcontainfrequentlyusedphrasesor
drumpatterns,andthenplacingthemonthetracks,youcan
conservememory.
Beawarethatwhenyoueditapattern,alllocationsinthe
songwherethatpatternhasbeenplacedwillbeaffected.
WhenyouexecutethePuttoTrackcommand,themusical
datawillbeaffectedasfollows.
Musicaldatapreviouslyexistingattheputdestination
willbeerased.
Thepatternthatyouputwillplaybackaccordingtothe
timesignaturethatisspecifiedbythemeasuresofthe
putdestination.
Controldatasuchaspitchbendetc.previouslyexistingin
thetrackwillberesetimmediatelybeforethemeasureat
whichthepatternwasput.Ifyouwishtousecontrol
datasuchaspitchbendinthemeasuresinwhicha
patternisput,youmustfirstwritethecontroldatainto
thepattern(seeControldatainpatternrecordingon
page 156).
Todeleteapatternthathasbeenplacedinatrackyoucan
useEraseMeasure,specifyingtheareainwhichthepattern
wasput,andsettingKindtoAll.
1. SelectPutToTracktoopenthedialogbox.
2. InPatternandPatternSelect,selecttheputsource
pattern.(Bydefault,thiswillbethepatternselectedin
thePatternEditpage)
3. InTo:Track,selecttheputdestinationtrack.
1 2
Track 10
(Drums)
3 4 5 6
Pattern 20
Example: Pattern 20 has been Put at measures 2, 4, and 6 of track 10. When those
measures are reached, pattern 20 is called and its data is played.
Sequencer mode
188
4. InMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureoftheputdesti
nation.
Whenyouexecutethecommand,Measurewill
automaticallyupdate.Ifyouwishto,youcancontinue
puttingthepattern.Toexitthecommand,presstheExit
button.
Copy To Track
Thiscommandcopiesthespecifiedareaofmusicaldata
fromthespecifiedpatterntoatrackasmusicaldata.
UnlikethePutToTrackcommand,thiscommandactually
writesthemusicaldataofthepatternintothetrack,sothat
youcaneditthecopieddatainthetrack.Evenifyoulater
editthecopysourcepattern,themusicaldataofthesong
willnotbeaffected.
WhenyouexecutetheCopytoTrackcommand,themusical
datawillbeaffectedasfollows.
Musicaldatapreviouslyexistinginthecopydestination
measureswillbeerased.
Themusicaldatathatiscopiedwillplaybackaccording
tothetimesignaturespecifiedatthecopydestination
measures.
TheprocedureisthesameasforthePuttoTrackcommand.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePutToTrackon
page 1879.
Convert to Drum Trk Pattern
Thiscommandconvertsauserpatternintoauserdrum
trackpattern.Thisconversionletsyouuseauserpatternin
thedrumtrackofthevariousmodes.Thedrumtrack
patternyouconvertherewillbepreservedintheKROMEs
memoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff,soyoucan
manageittogetherwiththeprogramsandcombinations.
Preparing a user pattern
Youllfirstneedtopreparetheuserpatternthatyouwantto
converttoaDrumTrackpattern.
Tocreateauserpattern,youcanrealtimerecorditintheSeq
P10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage,orsteprecordit(see
OGp.71,andpage 198).
Alternatively,performancedatafromatrackcanbe
importedintoapattern,meaningthatperformancedata
youvecreatedinatrackorSMFdatayouveloadedin
Mediamodecanbeusedasauserpattern.Todothis,
executetheGetFromTrackmenucommandintheSeqP10:
Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage(seep.155).
Converting to a Drum Track pattern
1. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode.
2. AccesstheSeqP10:Patern/RPPRPatternEditpage.
3. UsePatternandPatternSelecttoselecttheconversion
sourcepattern.
4. SelectConverttoDrumTrkPatterntoopenthedia
logbox.
5. UsetheToDrumTrackPatternSelectfieldtospecify
thedestinationuserdrumtrackpatternnumber.When
youexecutethiscommand,thedatawillbeoverwritten
ontothecopydestinationnumber.
6. IfyouchecktheAllPatternsavailableinSong***item,
allpatternsinthesongthatcontainnoteeventswillbe
copied,startingatthenumberyouspecifiedinstep3.
7. IfyouexecutewithNoteOnlychecked,onlythenote
eventswillbecopied.
PresstheOKbuttonortheENTERbuttontoexecute.Ifyou
decidenottoexecute,presstheCancelbuttonortheEXIT
button.
AsdescribedinDrumTrackfunctionsettingsinProgram
modeonpage 100oftheOperationguide,settheDrum
TrackPatternBanktoUser,andsetPatternNo.totheuser
DrumTrackpatternyouconverted.ThenplaytheDrum
Trackpattern.
Ifthereisinsufficientdrumpatternmemoryor
insufficientpatternlocations,anerrormessageofNot
enoughDrumTrackpatternmemoryorNotenough
DrumTrackpatternlocationsavailablewillappear,
andthecommandcannotbeexecuted.
Tip:Itsagoodideatoconvertdrumpatternsthatyouuse
frequently.UseLoadDrumTrackPatterntoloadthem.
Load Drum Track Pattern
Thiscommandloadsauserdrumtrackpatternintoauser
pattern.
Ifyouwanttoeditauserdrumtrackpattern,youmustfirst
loaditintoapatterninthesong,andtheneditit.After
editing,youcanuseConverttoDrumTrkPatterntosaveit
asauserdrumtrackpattern.
1 4 3 2
1 4 3 2
Pattern 41
Example: Copy the musical data of pattern 41 to measure 2.
Before Copy
After Copy
Internal memory (saved inside the M50)
Song
Drum Track
Track/RPPR
Program
/Combination
Drum Track
Convert to
Drum Track Pattern
100
User
Pattern
Preset
Pattern
User
Drum Track
Pattern
Sequencer memory
(Not saved internally;
save on SD card.)
Sequencer: Menu Command Erase Drum Track Pattern
189
1. UseSelectRangeFrom(DrumTrack)andTo(Drum
Track)tospecifythecopysourceuserdrumtrackpat
tern.
TheuserdrumtrackpatternsbetweenFromandTowillbe
loaded.Ifyouwanttoloadonlyonepattern,setFromand
Totothesamepatternnumber.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thedatawillbe
overwrittenontothecopydestinationnumber.
2. UseLoadto(Song***)tospecifytheloaddestination
userpatternnumber.
Patternonpage 66.
Rename Cue List
Thiscommandrenamestheselectedcuelist.Anameofup
to24characterscanbeinput.Formoreinformation,please
seeEditingnamesonpage 91oftheOwnersmanual.
Delete Cue List
Thiscommanddeletesthecurrentlyselectedcuelist.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thedataofthecurrently
selectedcuelistwillbedeleted.
Copy Cue List
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanothercuelisttothe
currentlyselectedcuelist.
1. InFrom,specifythecopysourcecuelist.
Whenyouexecute,thesettingdataoftheselectedcuelist
willbedeleted,andreplacedbythecopysourcedata.
Convert to Song
(Convert Cue List to Song)
Thiscommandconvertsacuelistconsistingofmultiple
songstoasinglesong.Althoughitisnotpossibletorecord
additionaltracksintoacuelist,youcanconvertthecuelist
toasong,andthenrecordsolosetc.ontoopentracks.
Youwillneedtoconvertacuelisttoasongifyouwishto
writeittoanSDcardasSMFdata.Duringtheconversion,
thetrackandeffectsettingsofthesongspecifiedforStep01
willbecopiedtothebeginningoftheresultingsong,andall
trackandeffectsettingsofsubsequentsongswillusetheset
tingsofthesongforStep01.
SettingsoftheToneAdjustfunctionwillnotbe
reflectedinthisconversion.
1. Selectthecuelist(C00C19)thatyouwanttoconvertto
asong.
2. SelectConverttoSongtoopenthedialogbox.
3. InToSong,specifytheconversiondestinationsong
number.
Ifyouselectanewsong,aconfirmationdialogboxwill
appear.
PresstheOKbuttontocreateanewsong,intowhichthecue
listwillbeconverted.
Ifyouselectedasongthatalreadycontainssettingsand
performancedata,executingthiscommandwillerasethe
dataofthatsongandreplaceitwiththedatathatwas
convertedfromthecuelist.Usethiscommandwithcaution.
Afterexecutingthiscommand,youcanpressthe
COMPAREbuttontoreturntothestatepriortoexecution.
TheConverttoSongcommandconvertsacuelisttoasong
asdescribedbelow.
Song/TrackparametersettingsforStep01
Song/TrackparameterswillusethesettingsoftheStep
01song.
TheMIDIchannelofeachtrackwillbeassigned
accordingtothesettingsoftheStep01song.IfStep02
andfollowingsongshavedifferentsettings,itmaynot
bepossibletoachieveanacceptableplaybackresult
afterconversion.Asfaraspossible,trytokeepthe
MIDIchannelassignmentsconsistentbetweensongs
youintendtouseinaplaylistthatwillbeconverted
intoasong.
Thefollowingtrackparameterswillnotbereflectedinthe
conversion.AswiththeMIDIchannels,werecommendthat
youkeepthesesettingsconsistentbetweenallsongsinthe
cuelist.
ConvertingSong/Trackparametersintotrackevents
SecondandsubsequentrepeatsoftheStep01song,and
thesettingsofStep02andfollowingsongswillallbe
convertedintotrackevents(musicaldata).
Thefollowingdatawillbeconverted.
IfPan(Seq03(4)b)isRDN,itwillbeconvertedtoC064.
IfPortamento(Seq33(4)c)isPRG,orifBendRange
(Seq35(6)c)isPRGoranegativevalue,thesewillnotbe
reflectedintheconversion.
Inthecaseofadrumprogram,Detune(35(6)c)willbe
dividedintoRPNFineTuningandCoarseTuning,and
SOLOON/OFF,Status,MIDIChannel,BankSelect(When
Status=EX2),ForceOSCMode,OSCSelect,UseProgramsScale,
MIDIFilter,KeyZone,VelocityZone,Delay,andthetrackEQ
settings
Track116
ProgramSelect,Pan,Volume,Portamento,
Detune,BendRange
MasterTrack Tempo,Meter
Sequencer mode
190
convertedtotheseevents.Forexample,iftheDetune
settingof+600,FineTuningwillbe00andCoarse
Tuningwillbe6.FineTuningwillmodifytheplayback
pitch(Detune).CoarseTuningwillchangethenotes
thatareplayedback(Transpose).Incasesotherthana
drumprogram,thepitchsettingwillbeappliedby
shiftingthenotenumbersinthetrackandaddingan
RPNFineTuningevent.
PLAY/MUTE(P01(2):ProgramT0108,T0916Play/Rec/
Mute)
ThePlay/Mutetrackparameterswillbereflectedinthe
song.SoloOn/Offwillnotbereflected.
TrackPlayLoop(P09(10):PlyLoopT0108,T0916
page)
IfTrackPlayLoopison,theareafromLoopStartto
LoopEndwillbeexpandedasfarasthelastmeasurein
themastertrack.
(Example)
IfTrackPlayLoopisM005M008,andthemastertrack
contains10measures,thedatawillbeexpandedfromthe
beginningofthetrackasM005,6,7,8,M005,6,7,8,
M005,6.
PlayIntro(P09(10):PlyLoopT0108,T0916page)
IfTrackPlayLoopison,thedatawillbedeveloped
accordingtothePlayLoopsettinguntilthelastmeasure
ofthemastertrack.
IfPlayIntroischecked,thedatafromthebeginningof
thetrackuntilLoopEndwillbedeveloped,andthenthe
datafromLoopStartuntilLoopEndwillbedeveloped
untilthelastmeasureofthemastertrack.
ForexampleifTrackPlayLoopisM005M008andthe
mastertrackendsatmeasure10,checkingPlayIntrowill
causethedatatobedevelopedfromthebeginningofthe
trackasM001,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,M005,6,7,8,M005,6.
IfPlayIntroisnotchecked,pleaseseetheexamplein
TrackPlayLoop.
Patterns
PatternsintheStep01songwillbecopiedaspatternsof
theconvertedsong.
IfthereisasecondorsubsequentrepeatforStep01,orif
thetracksofStep02andsubsequentsongscontainpat
terns,theywillbeexpandedintotrackevents(musical
data).
Transpose
IftheTranspose(Seq35(6)c)ofthetracksinStep02and
subsequentsongsdifferfromthesettingsoftheStep01
song,thenotenumbersofthenotedatawillbeshifted.
Example)
IfStep01,Transpose=+1andStep02,Transpose1,the
actualnotenumbersoftheStep02tracknotedatawillbe
shifteddownwardby2.
RepeatFS(FootSwitch)Repeat1
IfRepeatissettoFS(FootSwitch),itwillbeconverted
asRepeat1.
WhenyouexecuteConverttoSongtoconvertacuelist
toasong,therepeatsettingswithinthecuelistandthe
patternandtrackplayloopsettingsofthesongsusedby
thecuelistwillallbeconvertedintoeventssuchasnote
data.Forthisreason,theamountofdatawillincrease
significantly,andinsomecasestheremaynotbeenough
internalmemorytoperformtheconversion.Inparticular
ifthecuelistuseslongsongs,orifnumerousrepeats
havebeenspecified,orifmanypatternsareusedbythe
songs,youshouldtryexecutingtheConverttoSong
commandfromtimetotimeasyoucreatethecuelist,in
ordertoverifytheamountofmemorythatwillbe
requiredfortheconversion.
Acuelistthatislongerthan999measurescannotbecon
vertedintoasong.
Copy Song
Thiscommandcopiesaportion(anumberofmeasures)of
thesongspecifiedbyStep,andmakesitintoasong.Thisis
convenientwhenyouwanttomodifythestructureor
developmentofthesongsinacuelist.
Forexampleifyouhaveaneightmeasuresongandwantto
repeatmeasures58,youcanusethiscommandtocreatea
fourmeasuresongoutofthatportion.Thenyoucanassign
theresultingsongtoastepinacuelist,andrepeatit.
1. InCurrentStep,orSongselectthedesiredstep.
2. SelectCopySongtoopenthedialogbox.
3. InFromMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureinthecopy
sourcesong.InToEndofMeasure,specifythelast
measure.
4. InToSong,specifythesongintowhichthedatawillbe
converted.
Ifyouselectanewsong,adialogboxwillaskyoufor
confirmation.PresstheOKbuttontocreateanewsongand
copythedatatothatsong.
Ifyouselectanexistingsongthatalreadycontainssettings
and/ormusicaldata,executingthiscommandwillerasethe
dataofthatsongandrewriteitwiththedatafromthecopy
source.Beforeyouexecute,besurethatyouwillnotbe
losingimportantdata.
5. IfyoucheckReplacetooriginalSonginCueListand
executethiscommand,theCurrentStepsongwillbe
replacedbythenewlycreatedsong.
Ifyouexecutewithoutcheckingthisbox,thenewlycreated
songcanbeselectedlaterforthedesiredstepofthecuelist.
System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode Copy Song
191
System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode
YoucanrecordandplaybackSystemExclusiveevents,andedittracksthatcontainSystemExclusiveevents.
SysEx messages that can be recorded in real-time
Thefollowingexclusivemessagescanberecordedinrealtime:
ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDIdevice
ParameterchangesinSequencermode(seetablebelow)
MasterVolumeuniversalexclusivemessagesassignedtothefootpedaloraRealtimeControlsknob
Parameter change messages that you can realtime-record in Sequencer mode
*1: SoloOn/Offisalwayscontrolledbyeventsinthetrack,
regardlessoftheplay/mutestatusofthattrack.
Themaximumamountofexclusivedatathatcanbe
recordedatonceisapproximately320Kbytes.Thissize
willdecreaseifothereventsexistwithinthesame
measure.
Youcannotsimultaneouslyrecordexclusivemessages
receivedfromanexternalMIDIdeviceandparameter
changesproducedbyediting.
Theeventsthatwillberecordedarecontrolledbythe
GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicsettingsSEQMode
Param.MIDIOut.ForControlChange,onlycontrol
changemessageswillberecorded.ForSysEXParam
Change,onlyparameterchangesandexclusive
messageswillberecorded(seeParam.MIDIOuton
page 200).
Realtimerecordingwillnotrecordparametereditsthat
youperformbyexecutingmenucommandsinthe
variouspages,norchangesyoumakebyusingthe
EffectPresetfunctiontorecalleffectparameters.
Front panel/Page Parameter
Frontpanel
ARP
ARPbutton,SELECTbutton,REALTIMECONTROLS14knobs(GATE,VELOCITY,SWING,
STEP)
DrumTrack DRUMTRACKbutton
RealtimeControls
SELECTbutton,REALTIMECONTROLS14knobs(TONE[CUTOFF],[RESONANCE],
[SWING],[STEP],USER[1],[2],[3],[4])
P0:Play/REC,Arp
A/B
Program,Mixer ProgramSelect,Pan,Volume,PLAY/MUTE,SoloOn/Off
*1
ToneAdjust AllToneAdjustparameters
P1:Controllers ControllersSetup AllPanelSwitchAssign,RealtimeControlsknobAssignparameters
P2:EQ EQTrim AutoLoadProgEQ,Bypass,InputTrim,HighGain,MidFrequency,MidGain,LowGain
P3:TrackParam
OSC ForceOSCMode,OSCSelect,Portamento
Pitch Transpose,Detune,BendRange
Scale UseProgramsscale,Type,key,Random
P4:Zone/Delay Delay DelayTime[ms],MIDI/TempoSync.,BaseNote,Times
P7:ARP/DT
ARPSetup Allparameters
ArpeggiatorA/B Allparameters
ARPScanZone Allparameters
DrumTrack AllDrumTrackparameters
P8:Routing/IFX
Routing1/2 Bus(IFX/Output)Select,Send1,Send2,FxControlBus
InsertFXSetup IFX,IFXOn/Off,Chainto,Chain,Pan,BusSel,FXControlBus,Send1,Send2
IFX15 Alleffectparameters
CommonFXLFO AllCommonFXLFO1,2parameters
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
Routing
MFX,MFXOn/Off,Chain,ChainDirection,ChainLevel,Return1,Return2,TFX,TFXOn/Off,
MasterVolume
MFX1/2 Alleffectparameters
TFX Alleffectparameters
Sequencer mode
192
KROME sequencer file formats
TheKROMEsequencersupportsboththeproprietary
KROMESongformat,andStandardMIDIFiles.
Ifyoulike,youcanconvertdatabetweenthetwoformats,
simplybyloadingthedatainoneformatandthensavingit
intheother.
Fordetails,pleasesee22)LoadStandardMIDIFileon
page 230,andSaveSEQonpage 232.
KROME Song format
ThisisthenativeKROMEsequencerformat,whichis
requiredtoensurethatallKROMEspecificdataissaved
correctly.
Standard MIDI Files
YoucanalsoloadandsaveStandardMIDIFiles(SMF),for
compatibilitywithothersequencers.Notethatsome
KROMEspecificdatamaynotbemaintainedwheninSMF
files.
GM, XG, and GS System Exclusive Data
TheKROMEsequencercanrecordSystemExclusive
messages,includingXGorGSdata.Fordetails,pleasesee
SystemExclusiveeventssupportedinSequencermodeon
page 191.
NotethatGM,XG,andGSexclusivemessagesdonot
affecttheKROMEwhentheyareplayedback.
193
Global mode
InGlobalmode,youcanmakesettingsthataffecttheentire
instrument,suchasmastertuning,MIDI,andmemory
protect.
Youcanalsoedituserscales,drumkits,anduserarpeggio
patternsetups.
IfyouwantthesettingsyoumakeinGlobalmodetobe
backedupwhenthepoweristurnedoff,youmust
writethemintomemory.FromP5:DrumKit,youllbe
abletoselectthemenucommandWriteDrumKits.
FromP6:ArpeggioPattern,youllbeabletoselect
WriteArpeggioPatterns.Fromtheotherpagesof
Globalmode,youllbeabletoselectWriteGlobal
Setting.
Thesecommandscanalsobeselectedbypressingthe
WRITEbutton.
Global Page Select
PresstheGLOBALbuttontoaccessGlobalmode.
YoucanusethefollowingwaystoselectthepagesinGlobal
mode.
1. PressthePAGEbuttontoaccessPageSelect.
ThepageaccessedpriortopressingthePAGEbuttonis
showningrey.
HolddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumerickeys06
tospecifyapagenumber;youwillaccessthe
correspondingpage.
Forexample,ifyouwanttoaccesstheP3:Scalespage,
holddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumerickey3.
PresstheEXITbuttontoreturntotheP0:BasicSetup
page.IfsomethingotherthantheBasicpageisselected,
pressthe[EXIT]buttontoaccesstheBasicpage.
Page Main content
G
L
O
B
A
L
P
A
R
A
M
E
T
E
R
S
P0:BasicSetup Basicoverallsettings.(seep.194)
P1:MIDI MIDIsettingsforKROME.(seep.198)
P2:Controllers
Controllersettingssuchasthepedals
connectedtotherearpanel.(seep.202)
CC#assignmentsforArpeggio
controllers.(seep.202)
P3:Scales
Scalesettingscreatedbytheuser.Youcan
specify16typesofoctavescale,andone
fullrangescale.(seep.203)
P4:Category
Editcategorynamesforprogramsand
combinations.(seep.204)
D
R
U
M
K
I
T
P5:DrumKit Editdrumkits.(seep.205)
A
R
P
P
A
T
T
E
R
N
P6:Arpeggio
Pattern
CreatingArpeggiopattern.(seep.211)
Global mode
194
Global P0: Basic Setup
01: Basic
Here,youcanmakemastertunesettings,turnalleffectson/
off,andmakeon/offsettingsforthearpeggiatoranddrum
track.
01a: Basic
Master Tune
[50cent (427.47Hz)...+50cent (452.89Hz)]
ThisadjuststheoveralltuningoftheentireKROMEinone
centunits(semitone=100cents),overarangeof50cents.
Withasettingof0,thefrequencyofA4willbe440Hz.
TheA4pitchgivenhereiswhenEqualTemperamentis
selectedasthescale.Ifadifferentscaleisselected,A4
maynotbe440Hz.
Key Transpose [12...+00...+12]
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitonestepsovera1octave
range.
Thissettingisappliedatthelocation(PreMIDIorPostMIDI)
specifiedbyConvertPosition(Global11a).
MIDI note number transmitted by the KROME
Note:IfConvertPositionissettoPreMIDI,theMIDInote
numberstransmittedfromtheKROMEwillbeaffectedby
KeyTransposesetting.
MasterTunecanbecontrolledbytheMIDIuniversal
SystemExclusivemessageMasterFineTuning(F0,7F,
nn,04,03,vv,mm,F7:nn=MIDIchannel,vv/mm=
value).
KeyTransposecanbecontrolledbytheMIDIuniversal
SystemExclusivemessageMasterCoarseTuning(F0,
7F,nn,04,04,vv,mm,F7:nn=MIDIchannel,vv/
mm=value).
ThesemessagesarereceivedontheglobalMIDI
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a).
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,MIDI
RPNmessagescanbereceivedtocontrolthetuning
andtranspositionoftheprogramortimbre
(Combinationmode)ortrack(Sequencermode).
IncomingMIDIRPNFineTunemessageswillmake
relativeadjustmentstothetuningspecifiedbythe
MasterTunesetting.
MIDIRPNCoarseTunemessageswillmakerelative
adjustmentstothepitchspecifiedbytheKey
Transposesetting.InProgrammode,thesemessages
willbereceivedontheglobalMIDIchannelspecified
byMIDIChannel(Global11a),andinothermodes
theywillbereceivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedfor
eachtimbreortrack.(Transpose,Detune,Combi3
5(6)c,Seq35(6)c)
Velocity Curve [19]
Thisspecifiesthewayinwhichthevolumeand/ortonewill
changeinresponsetovariationsinkeyboardplaying
dynamics(velocity).
ThecurvesyoucanselectwilldependontheConvert
Position(Global11a)setting.IfthesettingisPreMIDI,the
curveisappliedimmediatelyafterthekeyboard.Ifthe
settingisPostMIDI,thecurveisappliedimmediatelybefore
thesoundgenerator.
InthecaseofPreMIDI,yourkeyboardplayingdynamicsare
modifiedasshownbytransmissioncurves19(lowerleft
diagram),andreceptionisfixedatcurve4linear(diagramat
lowerright).
InthecaseofPostMIDI,yourkeyboardplayingdynamics
aretransmittedaccordingtotransmissioncurve4linear
(lowerleftdiagram),andwillbeinterpretedaccordingto
receptioncurve19(lowerrightdiagram).
IfyoureusingtheKROMEasaMIDIsoundmodule,and
wanttoadjusttheoverallbrightnessofthesound,set
ConvertPosition(Global11a)toPostMIDIandselectthe
appropriatevelocitycurve.
1,2,3:Stronglyplayednoteswillbeaffected.
4(Normal):Thenormalcurve
5,6:Producesaneffectevenifyoudonotplayverystrongly.
7:Thiscurveproducesarelativelyconsistenteffectforsoftly
playednotes.
8:Thiscurveproducesanevenmoreconsistenteffect.
Eachcurvehasitsowncharacteristics,soyoushouldselect
thecurvethatbestsuitsyourownplayingstyleandthe
resultsyouwanttoobtain.
9:Comparedwiththestandardcurve#4,thiscurvesoftens
theresponseofgentlyplayednotes.Thisallowsvelocity
controlwithbroaderdynamicsforsoundssuchasacoustic
piano.Thissettingisparticularlyrecommendedforthe
KROME88.
Keys\Transpose 12 0 +12
61keys
2484
(C1C6)
3696
(C2C7)
48108
(C3C8)
73keys
1284
(C0C6)
2496
(C1C7)
36108
(C2C8))
88keys
996
(A1C7)
21108
(A0C8)
33120
(A1C9)
01a
01b 01c
01
Menu
1
MAX
127
Velocity
efect
Velocity (MIDI InTG)
1
8
6
5
4
3
2
7
Soft
127
Strong
1
Velocity (KBDMIDI Out)
1
2
3
8
6
5
4
7
Received Table
Curve 4
Curve 19
Transmitted Table
Curve 19
PreMIDI
Global Convert Position
KBD
MIDI
Curve 4
TG
PostMIDI
9
9
For a setting of PostMIDI For a setting of PreMIDI
Global P0: Basic Setup 01: Basic
195
Aftertouch Curve (MIDI IN) [18]
Thisspecifiesthewayinwhichincomingaftertouchdata
willaffectthevolumeortonewhenConvertPosition
(Global11a)issettoPostMIDI.
ThissettinghasnoeffectwhenConvertPosition
(Global11a)issettoPreMIDI.
Thiscurveisappliedimmediatelybeforethetonegenerator.
TheaftertouchCurvesettingselectsthecurvethatis
appliedtotheincomingaftertouch.
1,2:Thiscurveproduceschangewhenstrongaftertouch
pressureisapplied.
3(Normal):Thenormalcurve.
4,5:Thiscurveproduceschangeevenwhenlightpressureis
applied.
6,7:Thesecurvesproducechangein24or12steps.Curve
number7allowschangeovertwelvesteps,sowhenusing
aftertouchtomodifythepitch,youcansettherangeof
modificationtooneoctave,anduseaftertouchtovarythe
pitchinsemitonesteps.
8:Thisisarandomcurve.Usethiswhenyouwishtocreate
specialeffects,ortouseaftertouchtoapplyunpredictable
modulation.
Withasettingofaftertouch,thesettingyoumakehere
willbeappliedimmediatelybeforetheKROMEs
internaltonegenerator,meaningthatitwillaffectthe
datareceivedviaMIDI,butwillnotaffectthe
transmitteddata.
01b: Effect Global SW
Enable IFX 15 [Off, On]
Off(unchecked):AllinserteffectsIFX15willbeoff.
On(checked):TheP8:InsertEffectsettingsforeachIFXOn/
OffinProgram,Combination,andSequencermodeswillbe
valid.
Enable MFX1&2 [Off, On]
Off(unchecked):MasterEffect1and2(MFX1,2)willbeoff.
On(checked):TheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOsettingMFX1On/Off,
andMFX2On/Off,inProgram,Combination,and
Sequencermodeswillbevalid.
Thison/offsettingislinkedwiththefrontpanelMASTER
FXbutton.
Enable TFX [Off, On]
Off(unchecked):Totaleffect(TFX)willbeoff.
On(checked):TheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOsettingTFXOn/Off,
inProgram,Combination,andSequencermodeswillbe
valid.
Thison/offsettingislinkedwiththefrontpanelTOTALFX
button.
Thesesettingswillalwaysbeturnedonwhenyou
powerontheKROME.
WhenEnableIFX,EnableMFX1&2,orEnableTFX
settingsareswitched,controlchangemessagesCC#92
(effectcontrol2),CC#94(effectcontrol4),andCC#95
(effectcontrol5)willbetransmittedrespectively.The
transmitteddatawillbe0foroff,and127foron.
01c: ARP/Drum Track
All ARP/DT Off [Off, On]
On(checked):AllarpeggiatorandDrumTrackfunctions
willbeoff.ThearpeggiatorwillnotoperateeveniftheARP
buttonison.TheDrumTrackfunctionwillnotoperateeven
iftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison.
Off(unchecked):ThearpeggiatorsettingsandARPbutton
settingsinProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes
willbeused.TheDrumTrackfunctionwilloperate
accordingtothesettingsineachmodeandthestateofthe
DRUMTRACKbutton.
Load ARP when changing:
Program [Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchprograms,thearpeggiator
settingsstoredinthatprogramwillbeused.Normallyyou
willusetheOnsetting.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiatorsettingswillnotchange
evenifyouswitchprograms.Usethissettingifyouwantto
switchProgramsoundswithoutchangingthephrasesfrom
thearpeggiator.
Combination [Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchcombinations,the
arpeggiatorsettingsstoredinthatcombinationwillbeused.
NormallyyouwillusetheOnsetting.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiatorsettingswillnotchange
evenifyouswitchcombinations.Usethissettingifyouwant
onlytoswitchcombinationsoundswithoutchangingthe
phrasesfromthearpeggiator.
Mode, Stop Watch
V 01: Menu Command
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
1:LoadPreload/DemoDataseep.216
2:Changeallbankreferencesseep.216
3:DisplaySetupseep.216
4:TouchPanelCalibrationseep.217
5:HalfDamperCalibrationseep.217
6:UpdateSystemSoftwareseep.218
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
1
0
MAX
127
After Touch (MIDI InTG)
3
4
5
7
2
6
8:RANDOM
Aftertouch
efect
Global mode
196
02: System Preference
Here,youcanmakeoverallsettingsfortheentiresystem
suchasbankmap,andmemoryprotect.
02a: System Preference
Bank Map [KORG, GM(2)]
Thisspecifiesthemappingofprogramsandcombinations
relativetoBankSelectcontrolchangemessages(CC#0upper
byteandCC#32lowerbyte).
Thebankselectmessagesshowninthetablebelowwillbe
received(R)andtransmitted(T)forProgrambanksAF,
GM,g(1)g(9),g(d)andCombinationbanksAD.
Power-On Mode [Reset, Memorize]
Specifiestheconditionatpoweron.
Reset:TheKROMEwillbeinProgrammodeP0:Play,and
ProgramA000willbeselected.
Memorize:Thelocation(modeandpage)whichyoumost
recentlyaccessedwhenyoulastpoweredofftheKROME
willberecalled.IfyouwereinProgramorCombination
mode,theprogramorcombinationbank/numberatpower
offwillberecalled.
Beforeturningoffthepower,besuretowriteyourdata
orsaveitinMediamode.Thisfunctiondoesnot
memorizethecontentsofanyparametersthatwere
edited.
Auto Power-Off
[30 minutes, an hour, 4 hours, Disabled]
TheKROMEwillautomaticallyturnoffitsownpowera
certainlengthoftimeafteritskeyboard,display,buttons,or
knobswerelastused.(Withthefactorysettings,thepower
willturnoffinapproximatelyfourhours.)
*MovingtheVOLUMEknobisnotconsideredusagefor
thispurpose.Evenifyouusetheseknobs,thepowerwill
stillturnoffwhenthespecifiedtimehaselapsedifnoother
userinputhasbeenperformed.
Evenwhensongsordemosongsarebeingplayedback
consecutively,thepowerwillautomaticallyturnoffifthe
specifiedtimeelapseswithoutanysoundatallbeing
produced.
Hereyoucanspecifythetimewhenautopoweroffwill
occur.Youcanalsopreventthepowerfromturningoff.
Whenthepowerturnsoff,thesettingsyouhadbeen
editingwillbelost.Youshouldsaveanysettingsthat
youwanttokeep.
30minutes,anhour,4hours:Thepowerwillautomatically
turnoffifthespecifiedtimeelapseswithoutanyuserinput
beingperformedontheKROMEskeyboardorbuttons.The
availablesettingsare30minutes,1hour,and4hours.
Ifyouvechosenoneofthesesettings,adialogboxwill
appearwhenthesystemstartsup,informingyouofthe
lengthoftimeafterwhichautopoweroffwilloccur.
Ifyouwanttochangetheautopoweroffsetting,pressthe
ChangeSettingbuttoninthisdialogboxandchangethe
settingasdesired.
Severalminutesbeforethepowerturnsoff,adialogboxwill
appearwithacountdownindicatingthetimeuntilthe
powerturnsoff.Ifyoudontwantthepowertoturnoff,
presstheKROMEsdisplayorkeyboard,oruseabuttonor
knob.Autopoweroffwillbereset,andthesamemessage
willappearonceagainifnouserinputisperformedforthe
specifiedlengthoftime.
Disable:Autopoweroffwillbedisabled.Thepowerwill
notturnoffautomatically.
Changesyoumaketothissettingarealwayssaved.
ThereisnoneedtoexecuteWriteGlobalSetting.
Beep Enable [Off, On]
On(checked):Abeepwillbeheardwhenyoupressan
objectinthedisplay.
Off(unchecked):Nobeepwillbeheard.
Animation [Off, On]
On(checked):Enablesananimationeffectwhendisplaying
menus,pads,ordialogboxes.
Off(unchecked):Disablestheanimationeffect.
Bank Bank Map: KORG Map: GM(2)
A 00.00R/T 63.00R/T
B 00.01R/T 63.01R/T
C 00.02R/T 63.02R/T
D 00.03R/T 63.03R/T
E 00.04R/T 63.04R/T
F 00.05R/T 63.05R/T
GM, 121.00R/T,56.00R 121.00R/T,56.00R,00.00R
g(1)...g(9) 121.01...09R/T 121.01...09R/T
g(d) 120.00R/T,62.00R 120.00R/T,62.00R
02a
02b
02
Menu
Global P0: Basic Setup 02: System Preference
197
Insomecases,theanimationwillbedisabled
automaticallywhenlargeamountsofperformancedata
isbeingprocessedbythedrumtrackorsequencer.
Value Entry Pop-up [Off, On]
On(checked):Apopupwillappearwhenyouholddown
orpresstwiceonaneditcell,knob,orslider.
Off(unchecked):Apopupwillnotappear.
REALTIME CONTROLS Pop-up [Off, On]
On(checked):Apopupwillappearwhenyouoperatethe
frontpanelREALTIMECONTROLSknob.
Off(unchecked):Apopupwillnotappear.
Insomecases,popupdisplaywillbedisabled
automaticallywhenlargeamountsofperformancedata
isbeingprocessedbythedrumtrackorsequencer.
02b: Memory Protect
Program [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalprogrammemory.
On(checked):Internalprogrammemorywillbeprotected,
andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Writingaprogram
Loadingpreloadedprogramdata
Loadingprogramdatafrommedia
ReceivingprogramdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernalprogram
memory.
Combination [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalcombinationmemory.
On(checked):Internalcombinationmemorywillbe
protected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbe
performed.
Writingacombination
Loadingpreloadedcombinationdata
Loadingcombinationdatafrommedia
ReceivingcombinationdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernal
combinationmemory.
Song [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalsongmemory.
However,whenthepoweristurnedoff,thesongdatain
songmemorywillbelostregardlessofthissetting.
On(checked):Internalsongmemorywillbeprotected,and
thefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Recordingtothesequencer
Loadingpreloadedsongdata
Loadingsongdatafrommedia
ReceivingsongdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernalsong
memory.
Drum Kit [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternaldrumkitmemory.
On(checked):Internaldrumkitmemorywillbeprotected,
andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Writingadrumkit
Loadingpreloadeddrumkitdata
Loadingdrumkitdatafrommedia
ReceivingdrumkitdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernaldrumkit
memory.
Arpeggio User Pattern [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternaluserarpeggiopattern
memory.
On(checked):Internaluserarpeggiopatternmemorywill
beprotected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbe
performed.
Writingauserarpeggiopattern
Loadingpreloadarpeggiopatterndata
Loadinguserarpeggiopatterndatafrommedia
ReceivinguserarpeggiopatterndataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernaluser
arpeggiopatternmemory.
V 02: Menu Command
1:LoadPreload/DemoDataseep.216
2:Changeallbankreferencesseep.216
3:DisplaySetupseep.216
4:TouchPanelCalibrationseep.217
5:HalfDamperCalibrationseep.217
6:UpdateSystemSoftwareseep.218
onpage 216.
Global mode
198
Global P1: MIDI
11: MIDI Basic
Here,youcanmakeMIDIrelatedsettingsthataffectthe
entireKROME.
Note:TotransmitMIDIexclusivedumpdata,youllusethe
menucommandsofthisP1:MIDIpage.
11a: MIDI Setup
Basic:
MIDI Channel (Global MIDI Channel) [116]
SetstheglobalMIDIchannel.
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedinthefollowingcases.
Whentransmittingandreceivingperformancedatain
Programmode(ProgP0:Play).
WhenselectingcombinationsviaMIDIinCombination
mode(CombiP0:Play).
Whentriggeringthedrumtrack(withTriggerModeset
toWaitKBDTrig)inProgramorCombinationmode.
Whencontrollingtimbresoreffectsthathavebeensetto
Gchinvariousmodes
WhentransmittingandreceivingSystemExclusive
messages
MIDI received
InProgrammode(P0:Play),MIDIdataisreceivedonthe
globalMIDIchannel,butinCombinationmode(P0:Play)or
Sequencermode,MIDIdataisreceivedontheMIDIchannel
specifiedforeachtimbreortrack.
InCombinationmode(P0:Play),programchangesreceived
ontheglobalMIDIchannelwillswitchthecombination
(Global12b:MIDIFilter).
UsetheglobalMIDIchanneltoswitchIFX15(CC#92),
MFX1&2(CC#94)andTFX(CC#95)on/off.
TocontrolthepanfollowingIFX,sends1/2,MFX1/2and
TFX,usetheglobalMIDIchannelwhenintheProgram
mode;whileintheCombination,orSequencermodes,use
thechannelspecifiedseparatelybyCtrlChforIFX15,
MFX1&2,andTFX.BysettingCtrlChtoGch,youcan
controltheseparametersfromtheglobalMIDIchannel.
MIDI output when playing the KROME
InProgrammode,thisdatawillbetransmittedontheglobal
MIDIchannel.InCombinationmode,datawillbe
transmittedsimultaneouslyontheglobalMIDIchanneland
ontheMIDIchannelsoftimbreswhoseStatus(Combi3
1(2)c)issettoEXTorEX2.
InSequencermode,musicaldatawillbetransmittedonthe
channelspecifiedforthecurrentlyselectedtrack(Seq3
1(2)c)(whoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2).
Note Receive (Note Receive Filter) [All, Even, Odd]
Thissettingspecifieswhetherevennumbered,odd
numbered,orallnotenumberswillbesoundedwhennote
dataisreceivedfromtheKROMEskeyboardorfroman
externalMIDIdevice.ByconnectingtheKROMEtoanother
KROMEandsettingoneinstrumenttoEvenandtheotherto
Odd,youcaneffectivelydoublethepolyphonybydividing
thenotesbetweenthetwoinstruments.
All:Allnotenumberswillbereceived.Normallyyouwill
leavethissettoAll.
Even:Evennumberednotes(C,D,E,F#,G#,A#)willsound.
Odd:Oddnumberednotes(C#,D#,F,G,A,B)willsound.
ThissettinghasnoeffectontheMIDIdatathatis
received.
Local Control On [Off, On]
LocalControlOn(checked):TheKROMEsknobs,andthe
keyboard,joystick,SW1,andSW2willcontroltheKROMEs
soundgenerator.Leavethissettingcheckedifyoureplaying
theKROMEbyitself.
LocalControlOff(unchecked):TheKROMEsknobs,the
keyboard,joystick,SW1,andSW2willbedisconnectedfrom
theKROMEssoundgenerator.
ThismeansthatoperatingtheKROME(playingits
keyboardandusingthejoystick,orplayingbackthe
sequencer)willnotsounditsinternaltonegenerator.
TurnLocalControlOffifloopbackfromanexternal
sequencercausesduplicatenotes.
IfLocalControlisOff,MIDItransmission/reception
willoccurnormally.Playingthekeyboardwillcause
thecorrespondingnotedatatobetransmitted,and
receivednotedatawillplaytheKROMEsinternal
sounds.
Note:EvenifLocalControlisOn,notesplayedbackbythe
internalsequencerwillnottriggerthearpeggiator.
Convert Position [PreMIDI, PostMIDI]
ThissettingspecifiesthelocationatwhichtheTranspose
andVelocityCurvesettingswillbeapplied.Thissettingwill
affecttheMIDIdatathatistransmittedandreceived,and
thedatathatisrecordedontheinternalsequencer.
WhenusingtheKROMEskeyboardtoplaytheinternaltone
generator,theTranspose,VelocityCurve,andaftertouch
11a
11
Menu
ODD EVEN
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
Another KROME
Using a KROME to play another connected KROME unit
MIDI keyboard etc.
ODD
KROME
Playing two connected KROME units from an external keyboard
MIDI OUT MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
EVEN
Another KROME
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI Patchbay
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Record
Sequencer
OFF
ON
Trigger
Tone
generator
Arpeggiator
Local
Control
Local
Control
OFF
ON
Global P1: MIDI 11: MIDI Basic
199
Curvesettingswillalwaystakeeffectregardlessofthis
setting.
PreMIDI:VelocityCurve,andTransposewillbeappliedto
thedatathatistransmittedfromtheKROMEskeyboard.
ThismeansthattheVelocityCurve,andTransposesettings
willaffectthedatathatistransmittedfromMIDIOUTwhen
theKROMEskeyboardisplayed,andthedatathatis
recordedontheinternalsequencer.
MIDIdatareceivedfromMIDIINorthedataplayedback
bytheinternalsequencerwillnotbeaffected.
PostMIDI:VelocityCurve,aftertouchCurve,andTranspose
willbeappliedtodatabeforeitentersthetonegenerator.
ThismeansthattheVelocityCurve,aftertouchCurve,and
Transposesettingswillaffectthedatathatissenttothe
internaltonegeneratorwhenyouplaytheKROMEs
keyboard,whentheinternalsequencerisplayedback,or
whendataisreceivedfromMIDIIN.
Thissettingwillnotaffectthedatathatistransmittedfrom
MIDIOUTorrecordedontheinternalsequencerwhenyou
playtheKROMEskeyboardorplaybackthesequence.
MIDI Clock:
MIDI Clock (MIDI Clock Source)
[Internal, External MIDI, External USB, Auto]
UsethissettingtosynchronizetheKROMEsarpeggiator
andinternalsequencerwithanexternalMIDIdevice(e.g.,
sequencerorrhythmmachine)andcomputer.
Internal:Thearpeggiatorandtheinternalsequencerwill
operateaccordingtotheinternalclock.
SelecttheInternalsettingwhenusingtheKROMEbyitself,
orwhenyouwanttheKROMEtobethemaster(controlling
device)sothatconnectedexternalMIDIdeviceswill
synchronizetotheKROMEMIDIClock.
ExternalMIDI:Thearpeggiatorandinternalsequencerwill
operateinsynchronizationtotheMIDIClockinputfroman
externalMIDIdevice.
ExternalUSB:Thearpeggiatorandinternalsequencerwill
operateinsynchronizationwiththeMIDIClockfroma
computer(forexampleasequencerorDAWapplication),
connectedtotheUSBconnector.
Auto:Normallytheoperationwillbethesameasthe
Internalsetting.IfexternalMIDIClockmessagesare
receivedfromtheMIDIINorUSBconnector,theKROME
willautomaticallyswitchtoExternalMIDIandExternal
USB.
Note:IfyouselectAutowhenanexternalMIDIsequencer
andcomputerisconnected,theKROMEwillautomatically
switchtoInternaloperationiftheexternalsequencerisnot
transmittingMIDIClockmessages,allowingthearpeggiator
tooperateandparametersforwhichMIDI/TempoSyncis
turnedontofunction.
Note:IfafterreceivingaMIDIClock,Start,orContinue
messagefromtheMIDIINorUSBconnector,nonewMIDI
Clockmessageisreceivedwithinanintervalof500ms,orif
youstarttheKROMEssequencerfromthefrontpanel
withouthavingreceivedaMIDIClock,Start,orContinue
messagefromtheMIDIINandUSBconnector,theKROME
willautomaticallyswitchtoInternaloperation.
Receive Ext. Realtime Commands [Off, On]
Off(unchecked):EvenifMIDIClockissettoExternal
MIDI,orifsettoAutoandtheKROMEissynchronizedto
externalMIDIClockmessages,MIDICommonmessages
andRealtimemessages(SongPositionPointer,Start,
Continue,Stop)willnotbereceived.(SongSelectmessages
willbereceived.)
Note:Usethissettingiftheabovemessagesfromanexternal
MIDIsequencerareinadvertentlyresettingtheKROMEs
songsettings.
On(checked):TheaboveCommonmessages(including
SongSelect)andRealtimemessageswillbereceived.
ThisparametercannotbesetifMIDIClockisInternal.
Velocity
Curve=4
Aftertouch
Curve=3
Tone
generator
Play
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Transmitted Table
Record
Sequencer
No
Transpose
Scale
KROME
Velocity
Curve
Note number
change
Transpose
Received Table
Velocity
Curve
Aftertouch
Curve
Tone
generator
Play
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Record
Sequencer
Transpose Scale
Pitch change
KROME
Velocity
Curve=4
No
Transpose
Transmitted Table Received Table
Global mode
200
SEQ Mode:
Track MIDI Out
[for Master, for External Sequencer]
ThissettingspecifieswhatwillbetransmittedviaMIDI
whenyouswitchsongsinSequencermode.
forMaster:NormallyinSequencermode,theinternal
sequencercanrecordorplaybackaperformanceonthe
KROMEskeyboard.Inthiscase,tracksthataresettoEXTor
BTHwillcontrolexternalMIDIsoundmodules.Youcan
makesettingsinasongsothatwhenyouselectthatsongon
theKROME,tracksthataresettoEXTorBTHwilltransmit
programchangesorotherMIDImessages*tosetupyour
externalMIDIsoundmodules.
forExternalSequencer:Choosethissettingifyouwantto
usetheKROMEinSequencermodeasamultitimbral
soundmoduledrivenbyanexternalsequencer.Withthis
setting,eventhetracksthataresettoEXTorBTHwillnot
transmitprogramchangesorotherMIDImessages*when
youswitchsongsontheKROME.Inthiscase,echoback
fromtheexternalMIDIsequencerwillnotswitchprograms
orotherparameterstotheidenticalsettingsoneachtrack
thatissettothesameMIDIchannel.
*Applicableparameters
ProgramSelect:CC#00bankselect(LSB),CC#32bank
select(MSB),programchange
Pan:CC#10pan
Volume:CC#7volume
Portamento:CC#65portamentoOn/Off,CC#5portamento
time
Send1/2:CC#93send1level,CC#91send2level
(PostFX)Pan:CC#8postinserteffectpan
Param. MIDI Out
[Control Change, SysEx-Param Change]
ThissettingspecifieswhethercontrolchangesorSystem
Exclusivemessageswillbetransmittedwhenyouedita
parameterinSequencermode.
ControlChange:Datafortheeditedparameterwillbe
transmittedasacontrolchange.
SysExParamChange:Datafortheeditedparameterwillbe
transmittedasaparameterchange.
Note:Forthesetooperate,EnableControlChangeor
EnableExclusive(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIRouting)mustbe
checkedrespectively.
*Applicableparameters
Pan:CC#10pan
Volume:CC#7volume
Send1/2:CC#93send1level,CC#91send2level
Drum Track:
DrumtrackprogramsinProgrammodewillbetriggeredon
theglobalMIDIchannelifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBD
Trig.TheMIDItransmitchannelisspecifiedbytheDrum
TrackProgMIDICh.UsetheDrumTrackProgMIDIOut
tospecifywhethertheMIDInotedataofthepatternwillbe
transmitted.
DrumtrackprogramsdonottransmitorreceiveMIDI
programchanges.
Prog MIDI Ch [0116]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelfordrumtracktransmission
andreceptioninProgrammode.IfProgMIDIOutis
checked,drumpatternnotedatawillbetransmittedonthis
MIDIchannel.Thedefaultsettingischannel10.
Prog MIDI Out [Off, On]
On(checked):Thenotedataofthedrumtrackpatternwill
betransmittedonthechannelspecifiedbyProgMIDICh.
Off(unchecked):Thenotedataofthedrumtrackpattern
willnotbetransmitted.
V 11: Menu Command
1:DumpProgramseep.218
2:DumpCombinationseep.218
3:DumpDrumKitseep.218
4:DumpArpeggioPatternseep.218
5:DumpGlobalSettingseep.218
6:DumpSequencerseep.218
7:DumpDrumTrackPatternseep.218
onpage 216.
12: MIDI Routing
Here,youcanmakeMIDIRoutingandMIDIFiltersettings
fortheentireKROME.
Note:TotransmitMIDIexclusivedumpdata,youllusethe
menucommandsoftheP1:MIDIpage.
12a: MIDI Routing
ARP Controllers MIDI Out
[Control Change, SysEx-Param Change]
ThisspecifiestheMIDImessagesthatwillbetransmitted
whenyouoperatetheARPbuttonorwhenyouoperate
knobs14withARPselectedbySELECTswtich.
ControlChange:OperatingtheARPbuttonorknobs14
willtransmittheMIDIcontrolchangemessagesthatare
assignedinGlobalP22:Controllers(SW)ARPON/OFF
and(ARPCONTROL)GATE(ARPCONTROL)STEP.
SysExParamChange:OperatingtheARPbuttonorknobs
14willtransmitMIDISystemExclusiveparameterchange
messagesfortheparameters(arpeggiatoron/off,Gate,
Velocity,Swing,Step)assignedtothebuttonandknobs.
12b: MIDI Filter
On(checked):Programchangeswillbetransmittedand
received.
InProgrammode(P0:Play),theprogramwillbeswitched
whenaprogramchangemessageisreceivedontheglobal
MIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a).
Whenyouswitchprograms,aprogramchangemessagewill
betransmittedontheglobalMIDIchannel.
12a
12b
12
Menu
Global P1: MIDI 12: MIDI Routing
201
InCombinationmode(P0:Play),thecombinationwillbe
switchedwhenaprogramchangemessageisreceivedon
theglobalMIDIchannel.However,itispossibletosetthe
EnableCombinationChangeparametersothatthe
combinationisnotswitched.Whenaprogramchangeis
receivedonthechannelspecifiedforeachtimbrebyMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c),theprogramofthattimbrewillbe
switched.However,theprogramchangesforeachtimbre
willbeaffectedbythesettingoftheEnableProgram
Changeparameter(Combi51(2)c).
Whenyouswitchcombinations,aprogramchangemessage
willbetransmittedontheglobalMIDIchannel,andalso
transmittedsimultaneouslyonthechanneloftimbreswhose
Status(Combi31(2)c)issettoEXTorEX2.
InSequencermode,incomingprogramchangemessageson
achannelthatcorrespondstoatrackwhoseStatus(Seq3
1(2)c)issettoINTorBTHwillswitchprogramsonthat
track.
Whenyouselectasongorplaybacksequencerdata,
programchangeswillbetransmittedonthechannelsof
trackswhoseStatusissettoBTH,EXT,orEX2.
Off(unchecked):Programchangeswillnotbetransmitted
orreceived.
Bank Change [Off, On]
On(checked):TheBankSelectcontrolchangemessagewill
betransmittedtogetherwithprogramchangemessages.
ThisisvalidwhenEnableProgramChangeischecked.
Off(unchecked):BankSelectmessageswillnotbe
transmittedorreceived.
Whenrecordingontheinternalsequencer,bankselect
messageswillberecordedregardlessofthissetting.
Howeverforplayback,thissettingwillapply.
Combination Change [Off, On]
On(checked):WheninCombiP0:Play,anincoming
programchangemessageontheglobalMIDIchannelsetby
MIDIChannel(Global11a)willswitchcombinations.
ThisisvalidwhenEnableProgramChangeischecked.
Anincomingprogramchangeonachannelotherthanthe
globalMIDIchannelwillswitchtheprogramofanytimbre
thatmatchesthatMIDIchannel.
Off(unchecked):Anincomingprogramchangemessageon
theglobalMIDIchannelwillswitchtheprogramofany
timbrewhoseMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)matchesthe
globalMIDIchannel.Thecombinationwillnotbeswitched.
Theprogramchangesforeachtimbrewillbeaffectedbythe
settingoftheEnableProgramChangeparameter(Combi5
1(2)c).
On(checked):MIDIaftertouchmessageswillbetransmitted
andreceived.
Off(unchecked):MIDIaftertouchmessageswillneitherbe
transmittednorreceived.
Thissettinghasnoeffectwhenyouusetheinternal
sequencertoplaybacksequencedatathatwasrecordedwith
aftertouchdata;i.e.,aftertouchwillbetransmittedviaMIDI.
PerformingontheKROMEskeyboardwilltransmitneither
channelaftertouchnorpolyphonicaftertouch.However,
sincetheKROMEdoessupportaftertouchasanAlternate
ModulationSource(AMS),itcanreceiveaftertouchto
control.
Enable Control Change [Off, On]
On(checked):Controlchangemessageswillbetransmitted
andreceived.
Off(unchecked):Controlchangemessageswillneitherbe
transmittednorreceived.
Thissettinghasnoeffectwhenyouusetheinternal
sequencertoplaybacksequencedatathatwasrecorded
withcontrolchangedata;i.e.,thecontrolchanges
previouslyrecordedintothesequencerwillbetransmitted
viaMIDI.
Enable Exclusive [Off, On]
On(checked):SystemExclusivedatawillbetransmitted
andreceived.
CheckthisifyouwanttoedittheKROMEfromaconnected
computer,orifyouwanttoallowbidirectionalediting.
Off(unchecked):SystemExclusivedatawillnotbe
transmitted.Normallyyouwillleavethisunchecked.
However,SystemExclusivedatawillbetransmittedand
receivedwhilethemenucommands(Dump Program
DumpDrumTrackPattern)ofthispagearedisplayed.
V 12: Menu Command
1:DumpProgramseep.218
2:DumpCombinationseep.218
3:DumpDrumKitseep.218
4:DumpArpeggioPatternseep.218
5:DumpGlobalSettingseep.218
6:DumpSequencerseep.218
7:DumpDrumTrackPatternseep.218
onpage 216.
Global mode
202
Global P2: Controllers
21: Foot Controllers
21a: Foot Switch & Pedal/Damper
Foot Switch Assign [List of Foot Switch Assign]
Selectsthefunctionthatwillbecontrolledbyapedalswitch
(suchastheoptionalKorgPS1orPS3)connectedtothe
ASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
Foracompletelistofpossibleassignments,pleaseseeFoot
SwitchAssignmentsonpage 349.
Foot Pedal Assign [List of Foot Pedal Assign]
Selectsthefunctionthatwillbecontrolledbyafootvolume
pedal(XVP10orEXP2option[soldseparately])connected
totheASSIGNABLEPEDALjack.
Foracompletelistofpossibleassignments,pleaseseeFoot
PedalAssignmentsonpage 350.
Damper Polarity [() KORG Standard, (+)]
Setthistomatchthepolarityofthedamperpedalconnected
totheDAMPERjack.Ifthepolaritydoesnotmatch,
operatingthedamperpedalwillnotproducethecorrect
result.Ifnodamperpedalisconnected,setthisto()KORG
Standard.
()KORGStandard:Usethissettingforopentype
damperpedals,suchastheoptionalKorgDS1H.
(+):Usethissettingforclosedtypepedals.
Foot Switch Polarity [() KORG Standard, (+)]
Setthistomatchthepolarityofthefootswitchconnectedto
theASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.Ifthepolaritydoesnot
match,operatingthedamperpedalwillnotproducethe
correctresult.Ifnodamperpedalisconnected,setthisto()
KORGStandard.
()KORGStandard:Usethissettingforopentype
footswitches,suchastheoptionalKorgPS1orPS3.
(+):Usethissettingforclosedtypepedals.
V 21: Menu Command
onpage 216.
22: MIDI CC# Assign
22a: ARP Controllers
ThisspecifiestheMIDImessagesthatwillbetransmitted
whenyouoperatetheARPbuttonorwhenyouoperate
knobs14withARPselectedbySELECTbutton.
Here,youcanassigncontrolchangemessagestothe
arpeggiatorswitchesandknobs14whenARPisselected
bytheSELECTbutton.
Whenyouoperateaswitchorknobs14whenARPis
selectedbytheSELECTbutton,theassignedcontrolchange
messagewillbetransmittedfromtheMIDIOUTconnector.
Theassignedcontrolchangemessagescanalsobereceived
fromanexternalMIDIdeviceconnectedtotheMIDIIN
connector,andusedtocontrolthecorresponding
arpeggiator.
Thedefaultsettingsofeachparameterareasshowninthe
displayabove.
(SW) ARP (ON/OFF) [Off, 000...119]
AssignsacontrolchangemessagesentbytheARPbutton.
ThedefaultsettingisCC#14.
(ARP CONTROL) GATE [Off, 000...119]
Assignsthecontrolchangemessagesentbyknob1when
ARPisselectedbytheSELECTswtich.Thedefaultsettingis
CC#22.
(ARP CONTROL) VELOCITY [Off, 000...119]
CC#23.
(ARP CONTROL) SWING [Off, 000...119]
CC#24.
(ARP CONTROL) STEP [Off, 000...119]
CC#25.
V 22: Menu Command
1:ResetControllerMIDIAssignseep.220
onpage 216.
21a
21
Menu
22a
22
Menu
Global P3: Scales 31: Scales
203
Global P3: Scales
31: Scales
Here,youcanmakesettingsforsixteendifferentUser
OctaveScalesandoneUserAllNotesScale.
Theuserscalesyoucreateherecanbeselectedfromthe
followingpages.
ProgP1:Basic/ControllersNoteon/Scale
CombiP3:TimbreParamScaleT0108/T0916
SeqP3:TrackParamScaleT0108/T0916
Note:Toeditascale,usetheProgrammodepagelisted
abovetoselectthescalethatyouwanttoedit,andthen
movetothispage.
Note:Thekeycanalsobeselectedbyholdingdownthe
ENTERbuttonandplayinganote.Alternatively,youcan
presstheKeyboardLockbuttonandplayanotetoselectthe
key.Selectthescalethatyouwanttoedit.
Note:ByexecutingtheCopyScalemenucommand,youcan
copythesettingsofapresetscale(otherthanStretch)orof
anotheruserscale,andtheneditthesettingsofthecopied
scale.
Ifyouwishtokeepanediteduserscaleafterthepower
isturnedoff,besuretowrite(save)yoursettings.
PressthepagemenuortheWRITEbuttontoaccessthe
WriteGlobalSettingmenucommandandsaveyour
settings.
31a: User Octave Scale
User Octave Scale [User Octave Scale 00...15]
SelectstheUserOctaveScalethatyouwanttoedit.
Tune [99+99]
Makespitchsettingsforeachnoteintheoctave.
Whenyouadjustthepitchofeachnoteintheoctave(CB)
inonecentsteps,yoursettingswillbeappliedtoalloctaves.
Thisadjustmentisrelativetoequaltemperament.
Asettingof99lowersthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
belownormalpitch.
Asettingof+99raisesthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
abovenormalpitch.
ByexecutingthemenucommandCopyScale,youcancopy
settingsfromapresetscale(otherthanStretch)orfrom
anotheruserscale.
31b: User All Notes Scale
Tune [99+99]
Makesindependentpitchsettingsforeachofthe128notes.
Adjustthepitchofeachofthe128notes(C1G9)inone
centsteps.Thisadjustmentisrelativetoequaltemperament.
Asettingof99lowersthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
belownormalpitch.
Asettingof+99raisesthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
abovenormalpitch.
Usethehorizontalscrollbartomovetothekeyrangethat
youwanttoset,andselectthekeythatyouwanttospecify.
ByexecutingthemenucommandCopyScale,youcancopy
settingsfromapresetscale(includingStretch)oranother
userscale.
Keys Lock [Off, On]
IfthisisOn,youcanusetheKROMEskeyboardtoselect
keysofthescale.SelectthekeyforUserOctaveScaleorUser
AllNotesScale,andthenusethekeyboardtomakeyour
selection.
V 31: Menu Command
1:CopyScaleseep.220
onpage 216.
31a
31b
31
Menu
Keyboard Lock
Global mode
204
Global P4: Category
Programs,andCombinationsareorganizedintocategories
andsubcategories.
Categoriesmakeiteasytofindaparticulartypeof
instrument,suchaskeyboard,bass,ordrums,oraspecific
typeofsound,suchasarpeggiosorgatedpatterns.
Eachmaincategoryalsohasupto8subcategories,forfiner
degreesoforganization.Forinstance,theProgramkeyboard
categoryhassubcategoriesforacousticpianos,realelectric
pianos,synthelectricpianos,andclavsandharpsichords.
WhereveryoucanselectProgramsorCombinationsbybank
andnumber,youcanalsoselectthemfromthecategory
popup.
Whenshippedfromthefactory,thereare16presetProgram
andCombinationcategories,with2moreleftopenforyour
use(initiallynamedUser16andUser17).
Onthesepages,youcan:
Changethenamesofanyofthecategoriesandsub
categories,includingboththefactoryandusercategories
Addsubcategoriestothefactorycategories(uptothe
limitof8Percategory.
YoucanassignaProgramorCombinationtoacategoryand
subcategoryduringtheWriteprocess.Formore
information,pleaseseeWriteProgramonpage 64,and
WriteCombinationonpage 101.
Tosavechangestocategorynames,youllneedtowrite
theGlobalsettings.
WriteGlobalSettingmenucommandandsaveyour
settings.
Note:DrumtrackprogramsinProgrammodeareselected
fromprogramsassignedheretoprogrammaincategory
15(defaultsettingDrums).
41: Program Main
41a: Program Main
00...17:
Main Category Edit [Text Editor]
Here,youcaneditthemaincategorynamesforprograms.
Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetexteditdialogbox,
andenteraname.Youcanenterupto24characters.(SeeOG
p.117)
Youcannameeachoftheeighteencategories.
V 41: Menu Command
onpage 216.
42: Program Sub
42a: Program Sub
Main Category [00...17]
Here,youcanselectthemaincategoryforwhichyouwill
editsubcategorynames.
00...07:
Sub Category Edit [Text Editor]
Here,youcaneditthesubcategorynamesforprograms.
First,selectMainCategorytoaccessthecategorythat
includesthesubcategorynamethatyouwanttoedit.After
choosingthemaincategory,pressthetexteditbutton
adjacenttothesubcategorynamethatyouwanttoedit.The
texteditdialogboxwillopen,andyoucanenteraname.
Youcanenterupto24characters.(SeeOGp.117)
Youcannameeachoftheeightcategories.
V 42: Menu Command
onpage 216.
43: Combination Main,
44: Combination Sub
Thispageletsyouassignthemaincategoryandsub
categorynamestoCombinations.Formoreinformation,
pleasesee41:ProgramMain,42:ProgramSubabove.
V 43, 4: Menu Command
onpage 216.
41a
41
Menu
42a
42
Menu
Global P5: Drum Kit 43: Combination Main, 44: Combination Sub
205
Global P5: Drum Kit
Here,youcancreatedrumkitsbyassigningadrum
instrument(drumsample)toeachkey.
Adrumkityoueditherecanbeusedinthesamewayasa
multisampleoscillator(whenOscillatorModeisSingleor
Double)andprocessedthroughthefilter,amp,andeffects
etc.Todothis,settheOscillatorModetoDrumsorDouble
DrumsintheProgrammodeP1:Basic/ControllersProgram
Basicpage,andselectingthedrumkitasanoscillatorinthe
P2:OSC/PitchOSC1SetuppageandOSC2Setuppage.
Getting ready to edit
MakesurethatintheGlobalP0:BasicSetupSystem
Preferencepage,MemoryProtectDrumKitisoff
(unchecked).Ifthisischecked,youwontbeabletosave.
Whenyouwishtoeditadrumkit,enterProgrammode,
selectaprogramthatusesadrumkit(i.e.,whose
OscillatorModeisDrumsorDoubleDrums),andthen
movetothispage.Aprogramthatusesadrumkitwill
alreadyhavefilter,amp,andeffectsettingsetc.suitable
fordrumsounds.
YoumustsetOctave(Prog21a)to+0[8].Withany
settingotherthan+0[8],thekeylocationsanddrum
soundswillnotcorrespondcorrectly.
Moving to the Global P5: Drum Kit page
IntheProgrammodeP2:OSC/PitchOSC1SetuporOSC2
Setuppage,presstheJumptoDrumKitEditbutton.
YouwilljumptoGlobalP5:DrumKit.Thedrumkit
selectedinDrumKitSelectofOSC1or2willbeselected.
IfOscillatorModeissettoDoubleDrums,onlythe
selecteddrumkitwillproducesound.IfaGMdrumkitis
selected,thelastselecteddrumkitwillbeselected.Use
CopyDrumkittocopytheGMdrumkittotheUSER
bankasnecessary.
IfyouwanttoeditadrumkitthatisassignedtoOSC2
ofDoubleDrums,usetheJumptoDrumKitEdit
buttonofOSC2toselectthispage.
Ifyoumovedfromanotherprogramormode,theOSC1
drumkitthatwasselectedmostrecentlyfortheprogram
willberecalled.
EvenifaprogramwithanOscillatorModeofSingleor
DoubleisselectedinProgrammode,theprogramwill
soundusingitsownfilterandampsettingsetc.
Effectswillsoundaccordingtothesettingsofthe
programyouselected.
Editing a Drum Kit
Fordetailedstepbystepinstructionsoncreatingdrumkits,
pleaseseeEditingaDrumKitonpage 106ofthe
Operationguide.
IfEnableExclusive(Global12b)ischecked,thedrum
kitcanbeeditedusingexclusivedata.
Saving Drum Kits
WriteDrumKitsdialogbox,andexecutethesave
operation;alldrumkitswillbesaved.
Unlikewheneditingaprogramorcombination,your
editedcontentwilltemporarilyremainevenifyou
selectadifferentdrumkit,butwillbelostwhenyou
turnoffthepower.
Ifyouwanttokeepthesettingsofanediteddrumkit
evenafterpoweroff,youmustexecuteWriteDrum
Kits.
Editingadrumkitwillaffectallprogramsthatusethe
editeddrumkit.Wheneditingapreloadeddrumkit,
itsagoodideatocopythedrumkittoanemptyareain
theuserbankbeforeeditingit.
Global mode
206
51: Sample Setup
Here,youcanselectadrumkitandspecifyDrumsample1
8asthedrumsamplesassignedtoeachkey.Here,youcan
alsoeditdrumsampleparametersforeachDrumsample.
51a: Drum Kit, Key Select, Assign
Drum Kit Select [00(INT)...47(USER)]
Selectsthedrumkitthatyouwishtoedit.
KEY [C1...G9]
Selectsthekeytowhichthedrumsample(anditssettings)
willbeassigned.
IfyoucheckAssignforthekeyyouselecthere,the
Drumsample18,VoiceAssignMode,andMixer
parameters(seebelow)willbeused.
Assign [Off, On]
On(checked):Thedrumsamplesyouassignedfor
Drumsample18willsound.Normallyyouwillcheckthis
parameter.
Off(unchecked):Theselecteddrumsampleswillbe
invalid,andthedrumsamplesofthekeytotherightwill
sound.Atthistime,thepitchwillbeasemitonelowerthan
thepitchofthekeytotheright.Uncheckthisparameter
whenyouwishtoplayadrumsampleatdifferingpitches.
51b: Drumsample
Youcanspecifyuptoeightdrumsamples.
Bydraggingthesliderattheleft,youcanselectthevelocity
zonetobeedited.Youcanalsomakethisselectionby
directlypressingthedesiredzone.
1: (Drumsample1)
Thesearethesettingsforthefirst(High)velocityzone.
Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupusingonlyonedrum
sample,maketheappropriatesettingsinDrumsample1,
andthensetThresholdVelocityto1andXfdtoOff.
Drumsample 1 On/Off [Off, On]
On(checked):CheckthisifyouwanttouseDrumsample1.
Theselecteddrumsamplewillsound.
Off(unchecked):Drumsample1willnotbeused.Thedrum
samplewillnotsound.
Note:Normally,youwillstartbyusingDrumsample1
(beforeusingDrumsample18).Ifyoudontwanttoswitch
drumsamplesbyvelocity,turnononlyDrumsample1.If
youreusingmultiplevelocityswitcheddrumsamples,
makesettingsasfollows.
Onevelocityzone
Drumsample1:On,Drumsample28:Off
Twovelocityzones
Drumsample1,2:On,Drumsample38:Off
Eightvelocityzones
Drumsample18:On
Bank [Mono, Stereo, XL.M, XL.St]
Drumsample Select
[List of installed Drumsample]
SpecifytheDrumsample1drumsamplebybankanddrum
samplenumber.
BankselectseitherMonoorStereodrumsamples.However,
stereodrumsampleswillusetwiceasmanyvoicesasmono
drumsamples.
Mono,Stereo:Conventionalmonauralorstereodrum
samples.
XL.M(eXtraLargeMono),XL.St(eXtraLargeStereo),
VM.M(VirtualMemoryMono),VM.St(VirtualMemory
Stereo):Highcapacitymonauralorstereodrumsamples.
WhenyoupresstheDrumsampleSelectpopupbuttona
drumsamplelistwillappear,allowingyoutochoosedrum
samplesfromthelist.
Usethetabstochooseacategory,andthenchooseadrum
samplefromwithinthecategory.PresstheOKbuttonto
execute,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
Itisnotpossibletoeditthecategorynamesofdrum
samples,ortoreassignthecategory.
IfyouchooseBankMono:
Monodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.TheLchannelorR
channelofthestereodrumsamplesselectableviaBank:
Stereocanalsobeselectedasmonodrumsamples.Inthese
cases,LorRisshownfollowingthedrumsampleofthe
samename.
IfyouchooseBankStereo:
Onlystereodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.
Rev (Reverse) [Off, On]
Thisletsyouplaytheselecteddrumsamplebackwards,
withoutlooping.However,somepresetdrumsamples
cannotbereverseplayed,andconsequently,theycannotbe
selected.
No. (Bank) Contents
00(INT)...31(INT) KROMEpreloadeddrumkits
32(USER)...47(USER) Userdrumkits
51a
51b
51
Menu
Velocity Split
Drum Kit, Key Select, Assign
C4 key
Drum Kit KEY Assign
KEY: The selected key is shown in blue.
You can select a key by holding down the ENTER switch and playing
the desired note.
Global P5: Drum Kit 52: Sample Parameters
207
On(checked):Thedrumsamplewillplaybackinreverse.
Thelocationatwhichreverseplaybackstartsandendsis
alreadyspecifiedforeachdrumsample.
Forunselectedvelocityzones(shownasasingleline),Rev
Onisindicatedas[R].
Off(unchecked):Thedrumsamplewillplaybacknormally.
Start Offset [Off, 1st8th]
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthebeginning,
drumsamplescanhaveupto8differentpreprogrammed
alternatestartingpoints.However,youcantselectdrum
samplesforwhichstartandoffsetarenotspecified.
Withdrumsamples,theStartOffsetspecifieswhethertouse
thenormalstartpoint(Off),ortouseoneofthealternate
startpoints(1st8th).
Somedrumsamplesmayhavefewerthan8pre
programmedpoints,inwhichcaseonlytheavailablepoints
canbeselected.
L (Amp Level) [99...+99]
Specifiesthevolume.
Keysforwhichavalueof+99isspecifiedwillsoundata
volumetwiceashighastheampleveloftheprogramwhich
usesthatdrumkit.Keysforwhichavalueof0isspecified
willsoundatthevolumeoftheampleveloftheprogram
whichusesthatdrumkit.Keysforwhichavalueof99is
specifiedwillnotsound.
2...8: (Drumsample2...8)
ThesearethesettingsfortheDrumsample28velocity
zones.
TheparametersforDrumsample8areexactlythesameas
thoseforDrumsample1,asdescribedabove.
TheparametersforDrumsample8arealsosimilartothose
forDrumsample1,exceptthatDrumsample8hasno
settingsforThresholdVel.(whichisalwaysfixedat1),Xfd,
orCurve.
Velocity Split
Thisindicatesthevelocityzonesoftheoscillatorseight
multisamples.
Themeterontheleftindicatesthenoteonvelocityvalues.
Thisletsyouverifythemultisamples(s)thatwillbesounded
byeachvelocity(See01e:VelocityMeteronpage 5.).
51c: Return to OSC
ThisbuttonwillbeshownifyoujumpedtoGlobalP5:Drum
KitbypressingtheProgrammodeJumptoDrumKitEdit
button.Youcanpressthisbuttontojumpbacktothe
originalpage.
V 51: Menu Command
0:WriteDrumKitsseep.220
1:RenameDrumKitseep.220
2:CopyDrumKitseep.220
3:CopyKeySetupseep.220
4:SwapKeySetupseep.220
onpage 216.
52: Sample Parameters
Here,youcanadjustthetranspose,tune,attack,decay,filter
cutoff,andresonancesettingsforeachdrumsample.These
areoffsetsthatareaddedtothesettingsoftheprogram.
52a: Parameters
(Drumsample Parameters)
1: (Drumsample 1)
Thisparameterislinkedwith51b:Drumsample
Drumsample1.
samplewillnotsound.
Adjuststhepitchinsemitonesteps.
+12isoneoctaveup,and12isoneoctavedown.
Tune [99...+99]
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1octave.A
centis1/100ofasemitone.
Attack (Amp EG Attack) [64...+63]
Adjuststheattacktimeofthevolume(Amplifier).The
attacktimeforeachkeyisdeterminedbyaddingthisvalue
totheampEGAttackTimeoftheprogramthatusesthis
drumkit.
Decay (Amp EG Decay) [64...+63]
Adjuststhedecaytimeofthevolume(Amplifier).Thedecay
timeforeachkeyisdeterminedbyaddingthisvaluetothe
ampEGDecayTimeoftheprogramthatusesthisdrumkit.
Cutoff (Filter Cutoff) [64...+63]
Adjustthecutofffrequencyofthefilter.Thecutoff
frequencyforeachkeyanddrumsampleisdeterminedby
addingthisvaluetothefilterFrequency(Prog31b)ofthe
programthatusesthisdrumkit.
Reso (Filter Resonance) [64...+63]
Thisadjuststhefilterresonance.Thisoffsetvalueforeach
keyanddrumsampleisappliedtothefilterResonance
(Prog31b)oftheprogramsthatusethisdrumkit.
Here,youcaneditthesampleparametersforDrumsample
28.Formoreinformation,pleasesee1:(Drumsample1)
above.
V 52: Menu Command
51a
52a
52
Menu
Global mode
208
onpage 216.
53: Driver/EQ
Here,youcanadjustthedriveandthegainofthethree
bandEQforeachdrumsample.Theseareoffsetsthatare
addedtothesettingsoftheprogram.
53a: Driver/EG
1: (Drumsample 1)
Drumsample1.
samplewillnotsound.
Drive [99...+99]
Thisadjuststhedrivelevel.Thisoffsetvalueforeachkey
anddrumsampleisappliedtothedriverDrive(Prog41a)
settingoftheprogramsthatusethisdrumkit.
Low Boost (Driver Low Boost) [99...+99]
Thisadjuststhelowboostlevelofthedriver.Thislowboost
settingforeachkeyanddrumsampleisappliedtothe
driverLowBoost(Prog41a)settingoftheprogramsthat
usethisdrumkit.
3 Band Parametric EQ [dB]
Low [36.0...+36.0]
Mid [36.0...+36.0]
High [36.0...+36.0]
Theseparametersadjustthegainforeachbandofthethree
bandparametricEQ.Thegainsettingsforeachkeyand
drumsampleareappliedtotheLowGain,MidGain,and
HighGain(Prog48a)settingsoftheprogramsthatusethis
drumkit.
above.
V 53: Menu Command
onpage 216.
51a
53a
53
Menu
Global P5: Drum Kit 54: Velocity Split
209
54: Velocity Split
UseThresholdVel.andCrossfadetospecifythevelocity
zonessoundedbyDrumsample18.
54a: Velocity Split
1: (Drumsample1)
Drumsample1.
samplewillnotsound.
Threshold Vel. (Threshold Velocity) [1127]
Thissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichthedrumsamplewill
sound.Drumsample1sThresholdVel.canbeequalto,but
notlowerthan,thanthatofDrumsample2.
YoucanchangetheThresholdVel.valuebytouchingthe
graphicattherightanddraggingit(See*EG,Velocity
Splitonpage 6oftheOperationguide.).
Crossfade (Crossfade Range) [Off, 1127]
ThisspecifiesthevelocityrangestartingatThresholdVel.
overwhichDrumsample1willfadeoutandDrumsample2
willfadein.
Forinstance,iftheThresholdVel.issetto64,andthe
Crossfadeissetto20,Drumsaple2willstarttofadeinat
velocitiesof84andbelow.
WhenvelocitiesarewithintheCrossfade,theOscillatorwill
usetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasitwouldnormally.
Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
Curve (Crossfade Curve) [Linear, Power, Layer]
Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linearand
Power(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetunethewaythat
thetwodrumsamplesmixtogether;oneortheothermaybe
moreappropriateforagivenpairofdrumsamples.Layer,
truetoitsname,letsyoulayerthetwodrumsamples
togetherwithoutanycrossfading.
Linearmeansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50%of
theirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,
thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;ifso,tryusing
Powerinstead.
Power,shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwosamples
willeachbeataround70%oftheirfullvolumeinthemiddle
ofthecrossfade.Sometimes,thismaycreateabumpinthe
volumelevel,inwhichcaseyoumighttryselectingLinear
instead.
Layermeansthatthetwodrumsampleswillbelayered
together,bothatfullvolume,fortheentirerangeofthe
crossfade.
Crossfade Curves
above.
TheparametersforDrumsample8arealsosimilartothose
forDrumsample1,exceptthatDrumsample8hasno
settingsforTheshold(whichisalwaysfixedat1),Crossfade,
orCurve.
V 54: Menu Command
onpage 216.
51a
55a
55b
55
Menu
Select
Threshold
Velocity
Xfade
Range
Crossfade
/Curve
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
Volume
Volume
Volume
Global mode
210
55: Voice/Mixer
Specifythevoiceassign,pan,andeffectroutingetc.foreach
keyofthedrumkit.
55a: Voice Assign Mode
Single Trigger [Off, On]
On(checked):Evenwhenthesamekey(note)isplayed
repeatedly,thepreviousnotewillbehaltedbeforethenew
noteisbegun,sothatthenoteswillnotoverlap.Normally
youwillleavethisunchecked.
Exclusive Group (Exclusive Assign) [Off, 001...127]
001127:Thisallowsyoutoassignkeystoanyof127groups.
Keysassignedtothesamegroupwillbetreatedasasingle
group,andwillbeplayedmonophonicallywithlastnote
priority.Forexampleyoumightassignclosedandopenhi
hatsoundstothesamegroupsothattwoormorehihat
soundscannotsoundsimultaneously.
Off:Keyswillnotbegrouped.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Enable Note On Receive [Off, On]
On(checked):Noteonmessageswillbereceived.Normally
youwillcheckthis,butyoucanuncheckitifyoudonot
wantspecificnotestosound.
Enable Note Off Receive [Off, On]
On(checked):Noteoffmessageswillbereceived.Normally
youwilluncheckthis.ThisparameterisvalidwhenHold
(Prog12a)ischecked(HoldOn).Inthecaseofadrum
program,youwillnormallyselectHoldOn.Inthiscaseif
EnableNoteOffReceiveischecked,noteoffmessageswill
bereceived,andthesoundwillstop(thereleasesegmentof
theEGwillbegin)whenthekeyisreleased.
55b: Mixer
InProgrammode,Drumkitswillsoundusingthe
settingsoftheselectedprogram.PanisvalidifUse
DKitSetting(Prog41c)ischecked.Bus(IFX/Output)
Select,FXControlBus,andSend1/2arevalidifUse
DKitSetting(Prog81c)ischecked.Beawarethat
whileeditingadrumkit,theeditedresultswillnotbe
reflectedunlessthesesettingshavebeenmade.
Pan [Random, L001...C064...R127]
Specifiesthepanningforeachkey.
L001placesthesoundatfarleft,andR127placesthesignal
atfarright.WithasettingofRandom,thedrumsamplewill
bepannedrandomlyateachnoteon.
Bus (IFX/Output) Select [L/R, IFX 1...5, Off]
Foreachkey,specifythebustowhichthesoundwillbesent.
Forexample,youmightsendSnaresoundstoIFX1andKick
soundstoIFX2toapplyseparateinserteffects,andsendthe
remainingsoundstoL/Rwithoutapplyinginserteffects.
Tip:Inmostofthepreloadeddrumkits,thefollowingtypes
ofdruminstrumenthavethesameBus(IFX/Output)Select
settings.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Foreachkey,youcanselectwhetherthesignalwillbesent
toFXControlbus(stereotwochannel)FXCtrl1or2.
Normallyyouwillleavethisoff,butyoucanusethissetting
ifyouwanttocontrolaneffectbyplayingaspecifickey.
Youcanusethiswiththefollowingeffects:
Vocoders:
174:Vocoder
Compressorandgatetypeeffects:
003:StereoLimiter
006:StereoGate
Example: Gated Reverb
Thisisanexampleofapplyingagatedreverbtoaspecific
snaresound.Whenusingagateeffectonreverb,youmay
notbeabletocontrolthegatingtimingcorrectlyifyouuse
theextendedreverberantsoundtocontrolthegate.
Normally,youwillcontrolthegateusingsoundfrombefore
reverbisapplied.
Forthekeyforwhichyouveselectedthesnaresample,set
Bus(IFX/Output)SelecttoIFX4.AlsouseFXControlBusto
sendthesignaltoFXControlBus1.InIFX5:StereoGate,
chooseFXControl1astheEnvelopeSource.Nowyoucan
useasignalotherthantheinput(reverberantsound)to
controlthegate.
Send1 (to MFX1) [000...127]
Send2 (to MFX2) [000...127]
Foreachkey,specifythesendlevelstomastereffects1and
2.
ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBus(IFX/Output)Selectisset
toL/RorOff.IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,the
sendleveltomastereffects1and2willbedeterminedby
theProgram,Combination,orSequencermodeP8:Routing/
IFXInsertFXSetuppageparametersSend1andSend2
whicharelocatedafterthesoundpassesthroughIFX15.
V 55: Menu Command
onpage 216.
51a
55a
55
Menu
IFX4
084: Reverb Hall
IFX5
006: Stereo Gate KEY: D3
(Snare)
Bus Select
: IFX4
Chain to
: IFX4
FX Control Bus: 1
Envelope Source
: FX Control 1
Gated Reverb Example
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1)
Global P5: Drum Kit ProgramP4, P8: Use DKit Setting = On
Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern 61: Pattern Setup
211
Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern
Here,youcancreateuserarpeggiopatterns.
Inthispage,theKROMEwillcontinuetosoundasitdid
beforeenteringGlobalmode.
IfyouenteredGlobalmodefromProgrammode:Your
editingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternthatisselectedby
theprogram.Evenifthepreviouslyselectedprograms
arpeggiatoristurnedoff,itcanbeturnedonbytheARP
button.
IfyouenteredGlobalmodefromCombinationmode:
Youreditingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternthatis
selectedbythecombination.Evenifthepreviouslyselected
combinationsarpeggiatoristurnedoff,itcanbeturnedon
bytheARPbutton.
However,itisnotpossibletoturnonanarpeggiatorfor
whichtheArpeggiatorRun(CombiP0:05(6)a,P7:71(2)c)
parameterAorBisnotchecked.Additionally,the
arpeggiatorwillnotoperateifithasnotbeenassignedtoa
timbreinArpeggiatorAssign(CombiP7:71(2)c).
IfyouenteredGlobalmodefromSequencermode:Your
editingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternspecifiedforthe
selectedsong.EvenifyouenteredGlobalmodefrom
settingsinwhichthearpeggiatorwasturnedoff,youcan
usetheARPbuttontoturniton.
However,itisnotpossibletoturnonanarpeggiatorfor
whichtheArpeggiatorRun(SeqP7:71(2)c)parameterAor
Bisnotchecked.Additionally,thearpeggiatorwillnot
operateifithasnotbeenassignedtoatrackinArpeggiator
Assign(SeqP7:71(2)c).
Ineachoftheabovecases,youcanmodifythesettingsofthe
arpeggiopatternevenifthearpeggiatorisnotturnedon.
Wheneditingapattern,itisagoodideatoturnonthe
arpeggiatorandmakesurethatitisthepatternthatyou
wishtoedit.
Ifyouwanttheediteduserarpeggiopatternsettingsto
bebackedupevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff,you
mustwritethemintomemory.SelecttheWrite
ArpeggioPatternmenucommandtoaccesstheWrite
ArpeggioPatterndialogbox.Alternatively,pressthe
WRITEbuttontoaccesstheUpdateArpeggioPatterns
dialogbox.ThenpresstheOKbuttontowritethe
editeddata.
Whenyoueditauserarpeggiopattern,youreditswill
affectallprogramsandcombinationsthatusethe
editedpattern.Ifyouwanttoeditoneofthepreload
arpeggiopatterns,itsagoodideatocopythatarpeggio
patterntoanunusedareaintheuserbankbeforeyou
editit.
Fordetailsoncreatinganarpeggiopattern,seeOGp.91.
61: Pattern Setup
61a: Arpeggio Select, , , Pattern, Length
Arpeggio Select [A, B]
IftheKROMEwaspreviouslyinCombinationorSequencer
modeandyouwanttoeditanarpeggiopattern,youmust
selecteitherarpeggiatorAorBasthepatterntoedit.Your
editingwillapplyonlytotheselectedone.Bwillnotbe
displayedifthepreviousmodewasProgrammode.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Specifiesthetempo.
ThiscanalsobeadjustedbytheTEMPOknob.Youcanalso
usethe[TEMPO]knobtoadjustthetempo.IfMIDIClock
(Global11a)issettoAutoandMIDIclockdataisbeing
receivedfromanexternaldevice,orifExternalMIDIor
ExternalUSBisselected,thisparametersvalueisshownas
EXT,andthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetotheincoming
MIDIclockdatafromtheexternalMIDIdevice.
Pattern [P0: UP...P4: RANDOM,
U0000(INT)...U1027(USER)]
Selectsthepatternthatyouwanttoedit.
Note:Ifyouwanttoeditanarpeggiopattern(suchasa
preloadedarpeggiopattern)thatisalsousedbyanother
program,itisagoodideatousethemenucommandCopy
ArpeggioPatterntocopythearpeggiopatterntoanunused
numberU0900(USER)...U1027(USER),andthentoeditthe
copy.
Note:Ifyouwanttoeditthearpeggiopatternname,execute
themenucommandRenameArpeggioPattern.
Length (Pattern Length) [01...48]
Specifiesthelengthofthearpeggiopattern.Thearpeggio
patternwillplaythenumberofstepsyouspecifyhereatthe
notevalueintervalspecifiedbyResolution,andwillthen
beginagain.Thisisnotvalidforpresetarpeggiopatterns
P0P4.
Thisshowsagraphicrepresentationofthestepsintheuser
arpeggiopattern.
IfArpeggioToneModeissettoFixedNote,thestep
graphicsareshownashollowcircles.
(Arpeggio Pattern Edit Jump)
ThisopenstheArpeggioPatternEditdialogbox.
P0:UP...P4:RANDOM Presetarpeggiopatterns
U0000(INT)...U0899(INT) Preloadedarpeggiopatterns
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER) Userarpeggiopatterns
61a
61b
61c
61
Menu
Global mode
212
61b: Octave, Resolution, Sort, Latch,
Key Sync., Keyboard
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
Resolution [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Sort [Off, On]
Latch [Off, On]
Key Sync. [Off, On]
Keyboard [Off, On]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee71:ARPSetupon
page 53.
Pattern,,(Tempo),Octave,Resolution,Sort,Latch,
KeySync.,andKeyboardareparametersthatcanbe
setinProgram,Combination,Song,andSongPlay
modes,butyoucanalsosetthemhere.
IfyoumoveherefromProgramorCombinationmode
andsettheseparameters,youmustreturntotheorigi
nalmodeandwritethem.Theseparameterscannotbe
writtenbytheWriteArpeggioPatternscommandin
thispage.
61c: Arpeggio Pattern Setup
TheseparametersarenotvalidforpresetpatternsP0
P4.
Arpeggio Tone Mode [Normal, Fixed Note]
ThisselectstheTonetypeofthearpeggiopattern.
Normal:Thisistheconventionalarpeggiatortype.Each
Toneinthearpeggiowillplaybasedonthenotenumberof
thekeysthatyouarepressingonthekeyboard.
FixedNote:Thenotenumberofeachtoneisfixed.Thenote
numbersplayedonthekeyboardwillbeignored,andthe
arpeggiowillsoundusingspecifiedpitches.Notenumbers
fromthekeyboardwillonlycontrolthetriggertimingofthe
arpeggiator.FixedNotemodeisidealforarpeggiopatterns
thatyouareusingasdrumpatterns.
IntheP6:UserArpeggio,PatternEditpage,theTone
indicatorswillbewhenNormalisselectedhere,or
whenFixedNoteisselected.
Arpeggio Type [As PlayedUp&Down]
Specifiestherelationshipbetweenthearpeggionotes
specifiedfromthekeyboardandtheToneateachstep.
AsPlayed:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thosesteps
willnotsound.
AsPlayed(Fill):IftherearemoreTonesinastepthan
arpeggionotesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),the
lastplayednote(SortisOff),orthehighestnote(SortisOn)
willsoundforthosesteps.
RunningUp:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thearpeggio
willreturntothefirstnote(ifSortisOff),orthelowestnote
(ifSortisOn)andsoundit.
Up&Down:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thearpeggio
willreturninreversedirectionfromthelastarpeggionote
backtowardthefirst.
Example)
IfyousetLengthto04,StepNo.01toTone0,StepNo.02
toTone1,StepNo.03toTone2,StepNo.04toTone3,and
simultaneouslyplaythreenotestoproduceanarpeggio,
thefollowingresultswillbeproduceddependingonthe
ArpeggioType.
AsPlayed:012rest012rest0...
AsPlayed(Fill):012201220...
RunningUp:012001200...
Up&Down:012101210...
Octave Motion [Up, Down, Both, Parallel]
SpecifiestheoperationwhenOctaveissetto24octaves.
Up:Noteswillrepeatedlyascendwithinthespecifiedrange
ofoctaves.
Down:Noteswillrepeatedlydescendwithinthespecified
numberofoctaves.
Both:Noteswillrepeatedlyascendanddescendwithinthe
specifiednumberofoctaves.
Parallel:Thenotesofthespecifiedoctaveswillsound
simultaneously.
Fixed Note Mode
[Trigger As Played, Trigger All Tones]
WhentheArpeggioToneModeisFixedNote,specifiesthe
conditionthatwilltriggertheTones.
TriggerAsPlayed:TheToneswillbetriggeredaccordingto
thenumberofkeyspressed.
TriggerAllTones:Pressingasinglekeywilltriggerall
Tones.
Example)
WewilluseanArpeggioToneModeFixedNotepattern
ondrums.Tone0isassignedanotenumberthatwill
soundakick,Tone1asnare,andTone2ahihat.
WithasettingofTriggerAsPlayedandArpeggioTypeis
AsPlayed,pressingonekeywillsoundonlyTone0
(kick).PressingtwokeyswillsoundTone0(kick)and
Tone1(snare).Pressingthreekeyswillsoundallthree
Tones02(kick,snare,hihat).IftheVelocityofeach
ToneissettoKey,eachTonewillbesoundedattheveloc
itywithwhicheachkeywasplayed.
WithasettingofTriggerAllTones,playingonekeyis
sufficienttosoundallthree;Tone0(kick),Tone1(snare),
andTone2(hihat).IftheVelocityofeachToneissetto
Key,theToneswillbesoundedatthecorresponding
velocityeachtimeakeyispressed.
(Fixed Notes) Setup
ThisopenstheFixedNotesdialogbox.Hereyoucanspecify
thenotesthatwillbeusedwhenArpeggioToneModeisset
toFixedNote.
Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern Arpeggio Pattern Edit
213
Arpeggio Pattern Edit
HereyoucaninputTones011foreachStep0148.There
canbeupto48steps,andthetonesrepresentthenotesof
thescale(amaximumof12notes)thatyoucanpress
simultaneouslyateachstep.IftheSortcheckbox(Global6
1a)isselected,thenotesyoupresssimultaneouslywillbe
sortedfromlowtohigh,andassignedto0,1,...11.Ifthe
Sortcheckboxisnotselected,thenoteswillbeassignedto0,
1,...11intheorderinwhichyoupressthem.
TheseparametersarenotvalidforpresetpatternsP0
P4.
6-1f: Tempo, Length, Zoom Scroll, VIEW,
Overview
(See61a:ArpeggioSelect,,,Pattern,Lengthonpage 211.)
Length (Pattern Length) [01...48]
(SeeLength(PatternLength)onpage 213.)
Zoom Scroll
Usethesetomovethezoomedareahorizontally(Steps)or
vertically(Tones),inincrementsofhalfthearea.Tomake
approximatemovements,touchanddragtheoverview.To
makefineadjustments,usethezoomscrollbuttons.
VIEW [32, 26, 42, 48]
Thisspecifiesanapproximatelimitfortheareaofthe
overviewdisplay.Ifyousetthisappropriatelyforthe
selectedLengthandResolution,itmaybeeasiertoselect
thezoomarea.
Overview
Thearpeggiopatternisshownassymbols.Theregionthat
iszoomedinthetouchgridishighlighted.Toselectthis,use
thezoomscrollbuttonslocatedabove,ortouchanddragthe
overview.
61g: Resolution
SeeResolution*onpage 54.
6-1h: Touch Grid
Tone Panel
YoucaninsertordeleteTonesbypressingthetonepanel
gridintheupperpartofthisarea.UsetheToneInputMode
(61i)buttonstoselecttheinputmethod.
Ontheleft,tonenumbersareshownifArpeggioTone
ModeisNormal,ornotenamesareshowniftheArpeggio
ToneModeisFixedNote.
Parameter Panel
Theparameterpanelinthelowerpartofthisareashowsa
graphicrepresentationoftheselectedstepparameter(61j).
Youcantouchanddragtoeditthis.
Youcanselectastepbypressingthepanel.
Step Parameters Select button
Thisbuttonselectsthespecificstepparameterthatwillbe
shownintheparameterpanelbelow.
Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,thedisplayedstep
parameterwillcyclethroughthefollowingchoices:Pitch
(PitchOffset)GateVel.(Velocity)FlamPitch...
6-1i: Tone Input Mode
Usethesebuttonstoselectthemodeyoullusetoenternotes
inthetonepanel.
Alternate mode
Toneswillbeinsertedordeleted.
Pen mode
Toneswillbeinserted.
Eraser mode
Toneswillbedeleted.
Tool mode
OpenstheToolTablet,allowingyoutospecifyaregionand
delete,insert,orcopydata.
6-1j: Step Parameters
Step (Step Number) [01...48]
Usethistoselectthestepthatyouwanttoedit.
IfStepisselected,youcanalsoentertonesbypressingthe
numerickeys.[0][9]correspondtotones09,[]
correspondstotone10,and[.]correspondstotone11.The
numerickeyswillentertonesasprescribedbythetone
inputmodeyouselected.
Ifthe buttonattheleftison,thisfieldwillbe
synchronizedwiththestepofthearpeggiatorwhenitis
running.
Pitch Offset [48...+48]
Foreachstep,thepitchcorrespondingtotheTonecanbe
raisedorloweredinsemitonesteps.Thisletsyoumake
settingsforthesametoneineachsteptocreateamelody,or
tomakesettingsfortwoormoretonesineachsteptoplay
parallelchords.
Gate [Off, 001...100%, Legato]
Off:Evenifatonehasbeenentered,itwillnotsoundatthat
step.Youcanalsousethistostopalegatotonethatwas
previouslysounding.
Legato:Thetonewillcontinuesoundinguntilthesametone
isplayedagain(includingGate:Off)orthepatternreturns
toitsbeginning.
TheLegatosettingisvalidiftheGateparameter(ProgP7:7
1b,CombiP7:73(4)c,SeqP7:73(4)c)ofeachprogram,
combination,orsongissettoStep.IfyouspecifyLegato,
makesurethattheGateofthepreviousmodeissettoStep.
6-1f
6-1g
6-1i
6-1j 6-1h
6-1k
Global mode
214
Velocity [001...127, Key]
Key:TheToneofthestepwillsoundwiththevelocityat
whichthekeywasplayed.
001127:Thespecifiedvelocityvaluewillalwaysbeused.
ThissettingisvalidwhentheProgram,Combination,or
SongparameterVelocity(ProgramP7:71b,Combination
P7:73(4)c,SequencerP7:73(4)c)issettoStep.
Whenmakingthissetting,makesurethatVelocityissetto
Stepinthepreviousmodebeforeenteringthispage.
Flam [99...+99]
Specifieshowthenotetimingwillbeskewedwhentwoor
moreTonesarespecifiedinthesamestep.
00:AllToneswillsoundsimultaneously.
+01+99:Thetimingofthenoteswillbeskewedintheorder
oftheTonenumber.(WhenSortisON,fromlownoteto
highnote.WhenSortisOFF,intheorderinwhichkeys
werepressed.)
0199:Thetimingofthenoteswillbeskewedinthe
oppositedirectionas+.
Tosimulatechordsstrummedonaguitar,trysetting+
valuesforoddnumberedstepsandvaluesforeven
numberedsteps.
ThisisnotvalidforpresetpatternsP0P4.
6-1k: Fixed Note Setup
ThisbuttonopenstheFixedNotesdialogbox.Hereyoucan
selectthenotesusedwhenArpeggioToneModeissetto
FixedNote.
Tool Tablet
Toopenthetooltablet,pressthetoolmodebuttoninthe
toneinputmodearea.ThistabletcontainsanAreaToolstab
andaCopyToolstab.
6-1l: Tempo, Length, VIEW, Overview
(See61f:Tempo,Length,ZoomScroll,VIEW,Overview
onpage 213.)
6-1m: Area Tools/Copy Tools
Select an area [01...48, 00...11]
UseSelectanareatospecifytheareawhereyouwantto
executeacommand.Theparameterstotheleftandright
specifytherangeofsteps,andtheparametersaboveand
belowspecifytherangeoftones.
Youcanalsoselectanareabytouchinganddragginginthe
overview.
Undo, Redo
Thesebuttonsundoorredoacommandyouexecuted.Undo
willcanceltheresultofthecommandthatyoupreviously
executed.Redowillonceagainexecutethecommandthat
wascancelledbyUndo.Theseactionsalsoaffecttoneinput
inArpeggioPatternEdit.
Close
PresstheClosebuttontoclosethetooltablet.
Area Tools
Erase
Erasesalltonesintheselectedarea.(Thevariousstep
parametervalueswillbepreserved.)
Fill
Insertsalltonesintheselectedarea.(Thevariousstep
parametervalueswillbepreserved.)
Invert
Invertstheinserted/deletedstateofthetonesintheselected
area.(Thevariousstepparametervalueswillbepreserved.)
Unlikethecommandslistedabove,executingthefollowing
commandswillcausetonestomove.Normallyyoull
executethefollowingcommandsonaspecifiedregionof
tones0011.
Space
Insertsblankspaceintheselectedarea.Stepparameterswill
besettotheirdefaultvalues.
Whentheblankspaceisinserted,tonesfollowingthat
locationwillmovetotheright.
Ifthewithstepparametersoptionisselected,thestep
parametervalueswillalsomove.
6-1l
6-1m
Global P6: Arpeggio Pattern Tool Tablet
215
Delete
Deletestheselectedregion.
Datatotherightoftheselectedregionwillmovetowardthe
lefttofillthegap.
parametervalueswillalsomove.
<<, >>
Cyclesthetoneswithintheselectedregion.
parametervalueswillalsobecycled.
with step parameters
Ifthisoptionisselected,thestepparameterswillalsobe
affectedwhenyouexecutetheSpace,Delete,<<,or>>
commands.
Copy Tools
Local:
Copy
Copiestheselectedregiontothecopybuffer.
Cut
Copiestheselectedregiontothecopybuffer,andthen
deletesit.
Paste
Thiscommandisavailableifthereisdatainthecopybuffer.
Specifyaregion,andthenpaste(overwrite)thedatafrom
thecopybuffer.
Ifthew/stepparam(withstepparameter)optionis
selected,thestepparametervalueswillalsobepasted.
Thedatafromthecopybufferwillbepastedsothatthe
lowerleftpointoftheregionspecifiedwhencopyingwillbe
atthelowerleftpointoftheregionyouspecifybefore
executingthePastecommand.
w/step parameters (with step parameters)
Ifthisoptionisselected,thestepparameterswillalsobe
copiedwhenyouexecutethePastecommand.
limit by selected
Ifthisoptionisselected,thedatafromthecopybufferwill
bepastedonlytotheextentoftheregionyouspecifybefore
executingthePastecommand.
Ifthisoptioniscleared,allofthedatafromthecopybuffer
willbepasted.
Example) Moving the tones of the first and second beats
1. InSelectanarea,specifytheareaas11/00(vertical)
01/16(horizontal),andthenpresstheCutbutton.
2. Specifytheareaas11/01(vertical)01/16(horizontal),
andthenpressthePastebutton.
Thefirsthalfwillmoveupward.
External:
Hereyoucancopythesettingsofadifferentuserarpeggio
pattern.
Byusinglimitbyselected,youcancreatepatchworkedits
thataremoresophisticatedthansimplyusingCopy
ArpeggioPattern.
(Copy From)
Selectsthecopysourcearpeggiopattern.
*Thisfunctionisnotavailableifthecopysourcearpeggio
patternisthesameasthecurrentlyeditedpattern.
limit by selected
Ifthisoptionisselected,onlythespecifiedregionofthe
copysourcearpeggiopatternwillbecopied.
Ifthisoptioniscleared,theentirepatternwillbecopiedjust
aswhenusingCopyArpeggioPattern.
Print
Insertstheselectedarpeggiopattern.
V 61: Menu Command
0:WriteArpeggioPatternsseep.221
1:RenameArpeggioPatternseep.221
2:CopyArpeggioPatternseep.221
onpage 216.
Global mode
216
Global: Menu Command
Tip:Ineachpage,youcanaccess(orswitchon/off)uptothe
firsttenmenucommandsbyholdingdowntheENTER
buttonandpressingthecorrespondingnumerickey,09.
astheCancelbutton.
followingexplanationsofeachcommand.
Write Global Setting
WriteGlobalSettingisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
BasicSetup,MIDI,Controllers,Scales,andCategorypages.
ThiscommandwritesGlobalmodesettings(exceptfor
DrumKitsandArpeggioPatterns).
Note:Tosavethedrumkit,executetheP5menucommand.
(WriteDrumKits)
Note:Tosavethearpeggiopattern,executetheP6menu
command.(WriteArpeggioPatterns)
TheEffectGlobalSWsettingwillnotbesaved.
Load Preload/Demo Data
LoadPreload/DemoDataisavailableontheBasicSetup
page.
Thiscommandloadsthepreloadeddataanddemosong
dataintotheKROME.
Beforeyoucanloadthisdata,youmustnavigateto
MemoryProtect(Global01b)andunchecktheprotect
settingforthetypeofdatayouwanttoload.Ifyou
executethisoperationwiththeprotectsettingchecked,
thedisplaywillindicateMemoryProtected,andthe
datawillnotbeloaded.
1. UseKindtoselectthetypeofdatayouwanttoload.
2. IfyouselectedProgram,Combination,DrumKit,or
ArpeggioPatternastheKind,specifytherangeofdata
thatyouwanttoload.
All:loadalldata
Bank:loadanindividualbank
Single:loadoneitemofdata
3. IfyoureloadingBankorSingle,useTotospecifythe
loadingdestination.
Change all bank references
ChangeallbankreferencesisavailableontheBasicSetup
page.
Thiscommandchangesallprogrambanksspecifiedfor
timbresincombinationsortracksofsongs.
1. Ifyouwishtochangebankreferencesforcombina
tions,checkCombination.
Ifyouwishtochangebankreferencesforsongs,checkSong.
2. InProgramBank,specifythereplacementforeach
bank.
Ifyouchangetwoormoredifferentbankstothesame
bank,itwillnotbepossibletousethisfunctionto
changethembacktodifferentbanks.Becarefulthatthe
changedestinationbanksdonotoverlap.
Display Setup
Thisletsyouadjustthebrightnessofthedisplay.
1. ChooseDisplaySetuptoopenthedialogbox.
2. AdjusttheBrightnessasdesired.
Brightness:010(10isthedefault)
Kind Content
All(PreloadPCG
andDemoSongs)
AllPCG(Program,Combination,Global
settings,drumkit,,arpeggiopattern),and
demosongdata
AllPreloadPCG AllPCGdata
AllDemoSongs Alldemosongdata
Program Programdata
Combination Combinationdata
DrumKit Drumkitdata
ArpeggioPattern Arpeggiopatterndata
GlobalSetting Globalsettingdata
Global: Menu Command Touch Panel Calibration
217
Touch Panel Calibration
Ifyourinputinthedisplayisnotdetectedasyouexpect,or
iftheeditcellmovestoalocationinthedisplayotherthan
whereyoupressed,youshouldcalibratethedisplayas
follows.
Toensureoptimalcalibration,touchthecenterofeach
symbol(calibrationtarget)showninthecornersofthe
displayasaccuratelyasyoucan.
1. ChooseTouchPanelCalibrationtoaccessthedialog
box.
Ifyoureunabletochoosethiscommandfromthepage
menu,youcanaccessitbyholdingdowntheENTER
buttoninP0andpressingthe3button.
2. Lightlypressthecenterofthetargetthatappearsinthe
upperleftofthescreen.
Ifyoudecidetocanceltheoperation,presstheEXITbut
ton.
Whenyourtouchonthetargethasbeendetected,thetar
getwillmove.
3. Lightlypressthecenterofthetargetthatappearsinthe
lowerrightofthescreen.
Ifyoudecidetocanceltheoperation,presstheEXITbut
ton.
Whenyourtouchonthetargethasbeendetected,the
touchscreenwillbecalibrated,andthescreenwillask
youtoverifytheresult.
4. Touchthethreetargetstoverifythatcalibrationwas
successful.
Whenyoutouchatarget,aballshapedsymbolwill
appear.
Thecloserthecenteroftheballistothecenterofthetar
get,themoreaccuratelycalibrationwasperformed.You
canpressthetargetagainasmanytimesasyoulike.
5. Ifdesired,youcanpresstheRedobuttontoreturnto
step2andperformthecalibrationagain.
6. Ifyouaresatisfiedwiththetouchresponse,pressthe
OKbutton(ortheENTERbutton)toendtheprocedure.
7. PresstheEXITbutton,andyouwillreturntothestate
priortoexecutingthecalibrationfunction.
Ifinsteps2or3youpressedascreenlocationthatwas
significantlydistantfromthecenterofthe+target,
thedetectionpointsfortheRedobuttonandOKbutton
willalsobeskewed.Ifyoureunabletopressthese
buttonssuccessfully,trypressingtheareaaroundthem.
Alternatively,presstheEXITbuttontoexitthe
procedure,andthenperformtheTouchPanel
Calibrationoperationonceagain.
Half Damper Calibration
HalfDamperCalibrationisavailableontheBasicSetup
page.
Ifadamperpedalthatsupportshalfdamper(theDS1H
option)isconnectedtotheDAMPERjack,hereshowyou
canadjustthesensitivityifthedampereffectisnotapplied
appropriately.
Sincethehalfdamperpedalishighlysensitive,please
usetheoptionalDS1H.Otherpedalsmaynotproduce
theappropriateeffect,ormaybeimpossibletocalibrate
correctly.
1. ConnectahalfdamperpedaltotheDAMPERjack.
2. SelectHalfDamperCalibrationtoopenthedialog
box.
3. Pressthehalfdamperpedal,andthenreleaseyourfoot
fromthepedal.
4. PresstheDonebutton.
Iftheadjustmentcouldnotbeperformedcorrectly,anerror
messagewillbedisplayed.Pleaseperformtheprocedure
onceagain.
Global mode
218
Update System Software
UpdateSystemSoftwareisavailableontheBasicSetup
page.
Here,youcanupdatetheKROMEsystem.
Youcandownloadthelatestsystemfileontoyourcomputer
fromtheKorgwebsite(http://www.korg.com/).Fordetails,
pleaseseetheKorgwebsite.
Beforeyoubeginthesystemupdate,youshouldback
upyourimportantdataonanSDcard.
1. InserttheSDcardcontainingthesystemfileintothe
SDcardslotoftheKROME.
Note:FordetailsonhowtocopythesystemfiletoyourSD
card,pleaseseetheexplanationonthedownloadpageof
theKorgwebsite.
2. AccesstheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage.
3. SelectUpdateSystemSoftwaretoopenthedialog
box.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheupdate.
Adialogboxwillaskyouforconfirmation.PresstheOK
buttontobeginupdatingthesystemsoftware.
Note:IfanerrormessageofFile/pathnotfoundappears,
presstheOKbuttonandproceedagainfromstep1.
Whilethesystemisbeingupdated,donottouchthe
KROMEswitches,andneverturnoffthepower.Ifthe
powerisaccidentallyturnedoffwhilethesystemis
beingloaded,theKROMEmaybecomeinoperable.If
thisoccurs,pleasecontactyourlocalKorgdistributor.
5. Whentheupdatehasbeencompleted,adialogbox
withthefollowingmessagewillappear.
Thesystemupdatehasnowbeeninstalled.Tocompletethe
process,youmustnowrestarttheKROME.Pleaseturnthe
poweroff,andthenonagain.
6. PowerofftheKROME.Waitforseveralseconds,and
thenturnthepoweronagain.
Afteryouturnthepoweroff,waitforseveralseconds
beforeyourestarttheKROME.
Thesystemversionnumberisshowninthelowercenterof
theopeningscreen.Verifythatitmatchesthenewsystem
softwareversion.
Dump:
Dump Program
Dump Combination
Dump Drum Kit
Dump Arpeggio Pattern
Dump Global Setting
Dump Sequencer
Dump Drum Track Pattern
ThesecommandsareavailableontheMIDIpage.
ThesecommandsallowtheKROMEinternaldatatobe
transmittedtoanotherKROME,MIDIdatafiler,or
computerintheformofMIDISystemExclusivedata.
Selectthedesiredcommand(pleaseseethefollowingtable),
andadialogboxwillappear.
Then,selectthebankortimbreetc.ofthedatatobe
dumped,andpresstheOKbutton.
Sending SysEx data dumps
DonottouchtheKROMEsswitchesorturnoffthe
powerwhileSysExdataisbeingtransmitted.
Sending a data dump
1. ConnecttheKROMEtothedevicethatwillreceivethe
datadump.
Ifyouwanttotransmitthedatatoacomputerthatisableto
receiveSysExmessages,connecttheKROMEsUSB
connectortoyourcomputersUSBconnector.
IfyouwanttotransmitthedatatoanotherKROMEortoa
MIDIdatafiler,connecttheKROMEsMIDIOUTconnector
totheMIDIINconnectorofthereceivingdevice.
2. SelectGlobalP1:MIDIpage.
3. Thefollowingillustrationshowsthedialogboxthat
willappearwhenDumpProgramisselected.
IfTodumponebankselectBank,ortodumponeprogram
selectSingle.
DumpProgram
Programsofallbanks,programsofone
bank,oneprogram
Dump
Combination
Combinationsofallbanks,combinationsof
onebank,onecombination
DumpDrumKit Alldrumkits,onedrumkit
DumpArpeggio
Pattern
Allarpeggiopatterns,onearpeggiopattern
DumpGlobal
setting
Globalsettings(exceptfortheDrumKits
andArpeggioPatternsofGlobalmode)
DumpSequencer Allsongdataandcuelistdata
DumpDrumTrack
Pattern
Alldrumtrackuserpattern,onedrumtrack
userpattern
Global: Menu Command Dump Drum Track Pattern
219
4. UsetheTofieldtoselecttheoutputconnectorthatwill
transmitthedata.
MIDIOUT:MIDIOUTconnector
USB:USBconnector
5. PresstheOKbuttontotransmitthedata.
Whilethedataisbeingtransmitted,thedisplaywillindicate
NowTransmittingMIDIData.
Thesizeofthedataandthetimerequiredfortransmission
willdependonthetypeofdata.
Thefollowingtableshowsthesizeofeachdatadump,and
thetimerequired(MIDI).
*1: TheUSBMIDIdumptimeslistedhereareforwhenthe
KROMEisconnectedtoacomputerwithaUSB1.1port.
Thetimerequiredwillchangedependingonthe
computersystemyoureusing.
Note:Moretimewillberequiredifthesongdatacontains
SystemExclusiveevents,sincethesemustbeconverted.
WhenperformingadatadumpfromtheKROMEonto
aMIDIdatafiler,donottransmitmultipledatadumps
together.Ifmultipledataissavedtogether,thenwhen
thedataisretransmittedfromthedatafiler,the
KROMEwillhavelessthantherequiredtimetowrite
thedataintomemory,andwillbeunabletoreceiveall
ofthedatacorrectly.
Receiving SysEx data dumps
DonottouchtheKROMEsswitchesorturnoffthe
powerwhileSysExdataisbeingreceived.
BeforereceivingMIDIdata,werecommendthatyou
closeanyopendialogboxormenu,withtheexception
oftheMediamodemenucommandSaveExclusive
(ReceiveandSaveMIDISystemExclusiveData)
dialogbox.Also,datadumpscannotbereceivedwhile
intheSequencermodeP6:TrackEditTrackViewpage.
Pleasemovetoanotherpage,suchasP0,before
receivingadatadump.
Afteradatadumpisreceived,theKROMEwillrequire
approximatelyonesecondtoprocessthedataandwrite
itintomemory.Duringthistime,thedisplaywillshow
themessage,Nowwritingintointernalmemory.
Whilethismessageisshown,youmustunderno
circumstancesturnoffthepoweroftheKROME.Ifthe
poweristurnedoffduringthistime,theKROMEmay
failtooperatecorrectlywhenthepoweristurnedon
again.
Inthiscase,holddowntheEXITbuttontogetherwith
PAGEbutton,andturnonthepower.However,this
willinitializethecontentsofmemory.
TransmissionandreceptionofanyotherMIDIdatais
alsoimpossibleduringthistime.Whenreceiving
multipledatadumpsinsuccession,youmustallow
enoughtimebetweeneachdatadumpforthemessage
todisappearfromthescreen.(seetablebelow)
Processing time (MIDI) for writing into memory
MIDIcannotbetransmittedorreceivedwhiledatais
beingwrittenintointernalmemory.Also,transmission
ofActiveSensing(FEh)fromtheMIDIOUTconnector
andUSBconnectorwillbehalted.
Receiving a data dump
1. ConnecttheKROMEwiththedevicethatwilltransmit
thedatadump.
Ifyouretransmittingdatafromacomputer,connectthe
KROMEsUSBconnectortoyourcomputersUSBconnector.
IfyouretransmittingdatafromanotherKROMEorfroma
MIDIdatafiler,connectthetargetKROMEsMIDIIN
connectortotheMIDIOUTconnectorofthetransmitting
device.
2. SettheMIDIchannelofthetransmittingdeviceto
matchtheKROMEsglobalMIDIchannelMIDIChan
nel(Global11a).
IfyouwanttheKROMEtoreceivedatathatwaspreviously
transmittedtoaMIDIdevice,youmustsettheglobalMIDI
channeloftheKROMEtothesameglobalMIDIchannelthat
wasusedwhenthedatawastransmitted.
TosettheMIDIchannelofthetransmittingdevice,please
seetheownersmanualforthatdevice.
3. EithercheckEnableExclusive(Global12b),ordisplay
oneofthemenucommandsofthispage.
Whenoneofthesemenucommandsisdisplayed,data
dumpscanbereceivedregardlessoftheEnableExclusive
setting.
4. Transmitthedatafromtheotherdevice.Fortheproce
dure,pleaseseetheownersmanualforthedeviceyou
areusing.
Whilethedataisbeingreceived,thedisplaywillindicate
NowreceivingMIDIdata.
Type of data to be
dumped
Data size
(Bytes)
Time
required
MIDI (Sec.)
Time
required
USB-MIDI
(Sec.)
*1
ProgramAll 1307910 418.5 13.6
ProgramBank 261582 83.7 2.7
ProgramSingle 2067 0.7 0.02
CombinationAll 1537848 492.1 16
CombinationBank 384462 123 4
CombinationSingle 3027 1 0.04
DrumKitAll 704122 225.3 7.3
DrumKitSingle 14679 4.7 0.4
ArpeggioPatternAll 498163 159.4 5
ArpeggioPatternSingle 508 0.2 0.005
GlobalSetting 19835 6.4 0.3
Sequencer
23409...
1966831
7.5...629.4 0.3...20.5
DrumTrackPatternAll
50060...
795060
16.0...254.4 1...9
DrumTrackPattern
Single
60...740080 0.02...236.8 0.001...8.4
Type of data dumped Processing time for writing into memory
AllPrograms
Approximately1second(eachbank
received)
AllCombinations
Approximately1second(eachbank
received)
AllDrumKits Approximately1second
AllArpeggioPattern Approximately1second
GlobalSetting Approximately1second
Sequencer Approximately1second
DrumTrackPattern Approximately1second
Global mode
220
Reset Controller MIDI Assign
ResetControllerMIDIAssignisavailableontheMIDICC#
AssigntaboftheControllerspage.
ThisautomaticallyassignstheMIDIcontrolchange
messagesforeachcontrolleroftheP2:ControllersMIDI
CC#Assignpage.
1. SettheTofieldtothedesiredresetmethod.
AllOff:AllsettingswillbeOff.
DefaultSetting:ThecontrolllerswillallbesettoOff;theX
YcontrolwillbesettoitsdefaultCCs.
CCDefault:Theparameterswillberesettothetypical
settings,includingthestandardsettingsforthecontrolllers.
IfyouwanttousethecontrollerswithanexternalMIDI
device,werecommendusingthissetting.
(YouarealsofreetoassigndifferentMIDIcontrolchange
messagestothecontrollers,ifyouwish.)
Thedefaultvaluesareshowninthetablebelow.
Reset Controller MIDI Assign Default
Copy Scale
CopyScaleisavailableontheScalespage.
Thiscommandcopiesdatafromapresetscaletoauserscale
orcopiesauserscaletoanotheruserscalelocation.For
detailsonthepresetscales,pleaseseeType(Prog12d).
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcescale.
IfyouselectPureMajororPureMinor,specifytheKey
(locatedattheright)aswell.
StretchcannotbeselectedifToisUserAllNotesScale.
2. InTo,selectsthecopydestinationscale.
Write Drum Kits
WriteDrumKitsisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thissavesalldrumkits00(INT)47(USER).
Youmustwriteanediteddrumkitifyouwanttokeepit.
Editeddrumkitscannotberecoveredifyouturnoffthe
powerbeforesavingthem.
Rename Drum Kit
RenameDrumKitsisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thisrenamesadrumkit.
Copy Drum Kit
CopyDrumKitsisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanotherdrumkittothe
currentlyediteddrumkit.
Note:Drumkits48 (GM)56 (GM)cannotbeedited,butyou
maycopythemtoanotherdrumkitandtheneditthem.
Selectthecopysourcedrumkit(From).
WhenyouexecuteCopyDrumKit,thesettingsofthe
currentlyselecteddrumkitwillbeoverwritten.
Copy Key Setup
CopyKeySetupisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanindividualkeyto
anotherkey.Youcanalsocopysettingsfromtwoormore
contiguouskeysatonce.
1. IntheFromKeyfields,selecttherangeofkeysthatyou
wishtocopy.
2. IntheToKeyfield,selectthecopydestinationkey.If
youselectedtwoormorekeysintheFromKeyfield,
theirsettingswillbecopiedtothekeysstartingatthe
ToKeyandcontinuingupward.
Swap Key Setup
SwapKeySetupisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thiscommandexchanges(swaps)thesettingsofonekey
withthesettingsofanotherkey.
UseSourceKey1andSourceKey2tospecifythekeys
whosesettingsyouwanttoswap.
Controllers \ to Default Setting CC Default
ARPControllers
On/Off CC#14 (CC#14)
Knob1 CC#22 (CC#22)
Knob2 CC#23 (CC#23)
Knob3 CC#24 (CC#24)
Knob4 CC#25 (CC#25)
Global: Menu Command Write Arpeggio Patterns
221
Write Arpeggio Patterns
WriteArpeggioPatternsisavailableontheArpeggiopage.
ThiscommandwritesuserarpeggiopatternsU0000(INT)
U1027(USER).
Pattern,,(Tempo),Octave,Resolution,Sort,Latch,
KeySync,andKeyboardareparametersthataresetin
Program,Combination,andSong.TheWriteoperation
executedheredoesnotsavetheseparameters.
IfyoumoveherefromProgramorCombinationmode
andsettheseparameters,youmustreturntothe
originalmodeandwritethem.
Rename Arpeggio Pattern
RenameArpeggioPatternisavailableontheArpeggio
page.
Thiscommandrenamestheselecteduserarpeggiopattern.
PresetpatternsP0P4cannotberenamed.
Copy Arpeggio Pattern
CopyArpeggioPatternisavailableontheArpeggiopage.
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanotheruserarpeggio
patterntothecurrentlyselectedarpeggiopattern.
ItisnotpossibletocopyfromapresetarpeggiopatternP0
P4.
SelectthecopysourcearpeggiopatternFrom.
BeawarethatwhenyouexecuteCopyArpeggio
Pattern,allsettingsofthecurrentlyselectedarpeggio
patternwillbeoverwritten.
Global mode
222
223
Media mode
Inthismode,youcansaveinternalmemorydatatoan
insertedSDcard,orloaddatafrommediaintointernal
memory.Youcanalsocopyordeletefiles,orformatmedia.
Thefollowingmediacanbeused.
SD cards
SDandSDHCmemorycardssupportingMSDOSformat
FAT16orFAT32aresupported.
SDXCmemorycardsarenotsupported.
FormoreinformationabouthandlingtheSDcard,please
seetheInserting/removingacardintheSDcardslot
sectiononpage 118oftheOperationGuide.
Files, directories, and icons
TheKROMEmanagesdataonmediainahierarchicalman
ner,usingfilesanddirectories.Thecontentsofafile
(whetheritisafileoradirectory)areindicatednotonlyby
thename,butalsographically,byanicon.Filesanddirecto
rieshavedifferentlyshapedicons.
TheKROMEcollectivelyreferstofilesanddirectoriesrecog
nizablebyMSDOS(readablebyanMSDOScomputer),as
DOSfilesandDOSdirectories.DifferenttypesofDOS
filearedistinguishedbytheextensionaddedtotheirfile
name.
InthecaseofaDOSfilewithanextensionotherthanlisted
below,selectingLoadselectedtoaccessthedialogboxwill
causethefiletobeconsideredtobeaStandardMIDIFile
(SMF).However,youcantloadfilesthatarenotinSMF
format0/1.
WhenKROMEdataissaved,oneofthesefilename
extensionswillbeaddedautomatically,accordingtothe
typeofdata.Ifthesefilenameextensionsaremodifiedona
computer,thefilewillbetreatedasanundefinedfilewhen
itisreloadedbackintotheKROME,andwillbehandledasa
StandardMIDIFile.
FileshandledbytheKROMEhavetheshowninthe
structure(seenextpage).Since.PCGand.SNGfilescanbe
openedtodividetheircontents,theyaredisplayedas
directoryicons.
Extension Type
.PCG
Programs,combinations,drumkits,globalsettings,
arpeggiopatterns,drumtrackpatterns(dedicated
KROMEformat)
.SNG Song,cuelist(dedicatedKROMEformat)
.MID StandardMIDIFile(SMFformat0/1)
.EXL MIDIExclusivedata
Media mode
224
Files that can be loaded
Undefned DOS fle
All user
arpeggio patterns
1 user
arpeggiopattern
bank INT, USER
.PCG fle
DOS fles
All programs 1 program
bank A...F
1 program
All combinations 1 combination
bank A...D
1 combination
1 drum kit
1 drum track
pattern
All track
All drum track
patterns
Global settings
All drum kits
User
1 drum kit
bank INT, USER
DOS directory
DOS fles
.MID fle
.EXL fle
.SNG fle
1 song
(S000-127)
1 user pattern
(U0099)
Cue list
Media: File 01: Load
225
Media: File
01: Load
Here,youcanloadtheselectedfileordirectoryintointernal
memory.UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttonstoselectthe
desiredfileordirectory,andpresstheLoadbuttontoloadit.
YoucanalsoloaddatabyusingtheLoadselectedmenu
command.
01a: Media Select, Command buttons
SD Card
Thisshowsthetypeandvolumelabeloftheinserteddevice.
Volume label:
NoLabel:Mediathathasnovolumelabel
Unformatted:Mediathathasnotbeenformatted
NoMedia:Mediaisnotinsertedinthecardslot.
Thevolumelabeldisplaywilldependontheinsertedmedia
andthepage.
Open
WhenyoupresstheOpenbutton,thedirectorywillopen,
andthecurrentdirectorywillmoveoneleveldownward.
Thiscanbeusedwhenadirectoryhasbeenselectedinthe
directorywindow.
Up
WhenyoupresstheUpbutton,thedirectorywillmoveone
levelupward.
Load
Thiscommandloadsthefileordirectorythatwasselectedin
theDirectoryWindow(Media01c)intotheinternal
memory.
WhenyoupresstheLoadbutton,adialogboxwillappear.
Thespecificcontentsofthedialogboxwilldependonthe
fileyouareloading.ThisisthesamefunctionastheLoad
selectedmenucommand.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeLoadselectedon
page 227.
PCG Preview
Ifyouselectedjustasingleprogram,combination,ordrum
kitfromwithina.PCGfile(i.e.,fromanopenedbank),you
canlistentothesounddirectlyfromthemediawithout
havingtoloadthefile.Ifyouveselectedacombination,the
timbresinthecombinationwillusetheKROMEsinternal
programs.Inthecaseofauserdrumkit,thesound
parametersoftheprogramthatwasselectedbeforeentering
Mediamodewillbeused.
01b: Current Directory
Current Directory
Thedirectorycurrentlyselectedforprocessingisreferredto
asthecurrentdirectory.
Thedisplaywillshowthefullpathnameofthedirectory.A
slash/characterisusedasthedelimiterbetweendirectory
levels.Tochangethecurrentdirectory,usetheOpenbutton
andUpbutton(Media01a).
01c: Directory Window
Thisshowsfileinformationforthecurrentdirectory.You
canselectafileordirectoryinthiswindow.
Type
Theiconindicatesthetypeoffile.
Fordetailsonhowtheiconscorrespondtothedifferentfile
types,pleaseseethediagramFilesthatcanbeloadedon
page 224.
Lock [Lock, Unlock]
Filesanddirectorieswiththissymbolarelocked,andcannot
beoverwritten,copied,ordeleted.UsetheLock/Unlock
selectedmenucommandtolockorunlockafileordirectory.
Note:Ifthewriteprotectswitchofthemediaitselfis
enabled,theLocksymbolwillbeshownforallfilesand
directories.
File
ThisisthelowlevelDOSfilename.
Size
Thisisthesizeofthefile,inbytes.
Date
Thisisthedateandtimeatwhichthefilewassaved.From
theleft,thisisshownasday,month,year,hoursandmin
utes.
HoweversincetheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcal
endarorclock,youmustuseUtilitymenucommandSet
Date/Timetosetthedateandtimebeforesavingthefile.
Mode, Stop Watch
V 01: Menu Command
0:Hideunknownfilesseep.227
1:Lock/Unlockselectedseep.227
2:Sortseep.227
3:Loadselectedseep.227
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMedia:MenuCommand
onpage 227.
01a
01b
01c
01
Menu
Type Date Size File
Media mode
226
02: Save
Here,youcansavevariousdatatypesfrominternalmemory
tomedia.
UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontomovetothedesired
directory(i.e.,changethecurrentdirectory),andthenselect
thedesiredmenucommand.
WhenyouexecuteaSaveoperation,thedatawillbesaved
inthesamelevelofthehierarchyasthefilesthatare
displayed.
TheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcalendaror
clock,youmustuseUtilitymenucommandSetDate/
Timetosetthedateandtimebeforesavingthefile.
V 02: Menu Command
2:Sortseep.227
3:SaveAll(PCG&SEQ)seep.231
4:SavePCGseep.232
5:SaveSEQseep.232
6:SavetoStandardMIDIFileseep.232
7:SaveExclusiveseep.232
onpage 227.
03: Utility
Here,youcanrename,copy,ordeletetheselectedmediaor
file,createanewdirectory,format,andsetthedateand
time.
Afterselectingmediaorafile,selectthedesiredmenu
command.
V 03: Menu Command
2:Sortseep.227
3:Renameseep.233
4:Copyseep.233
5:Deleteseep.234
6:CreateDirectoryseep.234
7:SetDate/Timeseep.234
8:Formatseep.234
onpage 227.
08: Media Information
TheMEDIAscreenshowsinformationaboutthemedia.
08a: Media Information
VolumeLabel:Thevolumelabelofthemedia.
FormatType:Thetypeofformat.Ifnotformatted,thiswill
indicateUnformatted.
TotalSize:Thecapacityofthemedia(inbytes).
FreeSize:Thefreecapacityofthemedia(inbytes).
WriteProtect:Thewriteprotectstatusofthemedia.This
willindicateOnifprotected,orOffifnotprotected.
01a
01b
01c
02
Menu
01a
01b
01c
03
Menu
01a
08a
Media: Menu Command Hide unknown files
227
Media: Menu Command
Tip:Ineachpage,youcanaccess(orswitchon/off)uptothe
firsttenmenucommandsbyholdingdowntheENTER
buttonandpressingthecorrespondingnumerickey09.
astheCancelbutton.
01: Load Menu Command
Hide unknown files
HideunknownfilesisavailableontheLoadtab,Savetab,
andUtilitytab.
IfyouselectHideunknownfiles,acheckmarkwillappear
attheleftofHideunknownfiles.Inthisstate,undefined
fileswillnotbeshowninthedirectorywindow.However,
thisisvalidonlyifthereareDOSfilesinthecurrent
directory.
Lock/Unlock selected
Lock/UnlockselectedisavailableontheLoadtab,Savetab,
andUtilitytab.
Thislocks/unlocksthefileordirectorythatsselectedinthe
directorywindow(Media01c).Ifyoulockthefileor
directory,thelockicon(Lock)willappear,and
overwriting,copying,ordeletingwillnotbepossible.
1. Inthedirectorywindow(Media01c),selectthefileor
directorythatyouwanttolockorunlock.
2. SelectLock/Unlockselected;theselectedfileordirec
torywillalternatelybelockedorunlocked.
Sort
SortisavailableontheLoadtab,Savetab,andUtilitytab.
Thisfunctionsortsthefilesinthecurrentdirectory.
UseTypetoselecthowthefileswillbesorted,anduse
Ordertospecifythedirection.
Load selected
LoadselectedisavailableontheLoadtab.
Thisloadsthefileordirectoryselectedinthedirectory
window(Media01c)intointernalmemory.
1. Inthedirectorywindow(Media01c),selectthefileor
directorythatyouwanttoload.
2. SelectLoadselected.
Adialogboxwillappear.Thedialogboxthatappearswill
dependonthefileyouareloading.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseepage 228.
Specifythevariousitemsasnecessary.
Note:Youcanalsoaccessthesamedialogboxbypressing
theLoadbuttoninsteadofLoadselected.
If a file to be loaded cannot be found
Ifanecessaryfilecannotbefoundinthecurrentdirectoryor
inalowerdirectorywhenloading.PCG,or.SNGfiles,a
dialogboxlikethefollowing(Whereisa)willappear.
Thisdialogboxwillappearinthefollowingcases.
Whenloadinga.PCGfilethatwassplitacrosstwoor
morevolumesofmedia,whenthefirstvolumehasbeen
loadedandthesecondmediavolumeisnowrequired.
Whenloadinga.PCGfilesimultaneouslywitha.SNG
file,iftheidenticallynamed.SNGfileisnotfoundinthe
currentdirectoryafterloadingthe.PCGfile.
Ifthisdialogboxappears,takethefollowingaction.
1. Selectthedirectorythatcontainsthefileindicatedby
Whereisa
Ifthespecifiedfileislocatedonanothermediavolume,
exchangemedia.Thenpressthedirectorywindowinthe
displaytomaketheKROMErecognizethemedia,andselect
theappropriatedirectory.
Itisnotpossibletoopen.PCG,or.SNGfilesinthe
Whereisadialogbox.TheOpenbuttoncannotbe
usedfor.PCG,or.SNGfiles.
2. PresstheSelectbuttontoresumeloading.
LoadingwillbeabortedifyoupresstheCancelbutton.If
youwanttoaborttheloadingprocess,presstheOKbutton.
IfyoupresstheSkipbutton,theindicatedfilewillbe
skipped,andthenextfilewillbeloaded.
Exceptforspecialsituationssuchaswhenthemedia
containingtheindicatedfilehasbeendamagedorcannotbe
found,youshouldusetheSelectbuttontocontinuethe
loadingprocess.
Type Order
Noorder Unsorted
Name
(Directory
First)
Ascent
Sortinalphabeticalorder,first
directoriesandthenfiles
Descent
Sortinreversealphabeticalorder,first
directoriesandthenfiles
Name
Ascent Sortalphabetically
Descent Sortinreversealphabetical
Size
Ascent Sortinascendingorderofsize
Descent Sortindescendingorderofsize
Date
Ascent Sortinascendingorderofdate
Descent Sortindescendingorderofdate
Type Order
Media mode
228
1) Load .PCG
Datainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
1. IfaSNGfileofthesamefilenameexistsinthe.PCG,
youcanselecttheLoad********.SNGtoocheckbox.
Ifthisfiledoesnotexistinthecurrentdirectory,loaditas
describedintheaboveprocedureIfafiletobeloaded
cannotbefoundonpage 227.
2. IfLoad********.SNGtooischecked,youcanuse
Select.SNGAllocationtospecifyhowsongdata
withinthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Append:Themultidatawillbeloadedstartingatthe
numberthatfollowsthelastsongdatainmemory.Thesong
datawithinthe.SNGfilethatisbeingloadedwillbepacked
intotheavailablelocations.(Seediagrambelow)
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoloadsongdatafrom
mediawithouterasingthesongdatathatisalreadyin
memory.Cuelistdatawillnotbeloaded.
Clear:Erasesallcuelistdataandsongdatafrominternal
memory,andloadthecuelistdatatogetherwiththestateof
thesongdataasitwaswhensaved(Seediagrambelow).
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoreproducethesavedstate
immediatelyafterpoweron,etc.
.SNG Allocation
2) Load Programs
Allprogramdatafroma.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
3) Load Program Bank [Bank A...F]
Allprogramdataoftheselectedbankwillbeloadedintothe
bankyouspecify.
InTo,selecttheloadingdestinationbank.
4) Load a Program
Datafortheselectedprogramwillbeloadedintothe
programnumberyouspecify.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadaprogramotherthantheone
alreadyselected,usethesourceProgram(upperfield)
toselecttheprogramthatyouwishtoload.
Note:Theselectedprogramcanbeplayedfromthe
keyboardevenbeforeyouloadit.Thisisconvenientwhen
youwanttoauditiontheprogrambeforeloading.Formore
information,pleaseseePCGPreviewonpage 225.
2. InToProgram,(lowerfield)selectthebankandpro
gramintowhichthedatawillbeloaded.Whenyou
pressthepopupbutton,theBank/ProgramSelectwin
dowwillappear.
5) Load Combinations
Allcombinationsinthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
6) Load Combination Bank [Bank A...D]
Allcombinationsintheselectedbankwillbeloadedintothe
bankyouspecify.
7) Load a Combination
ThisloadstheselectedCombinationintoaspecifiedBank
andnumberininternalmemory.
SNG000
SNG001
SNG005
SNG003
SNG000
SNG002
SNG003
SNG000
SNG002
SNG005
SNG003
SNG000
SNG001
SNG005
SNG003
SNG004
SNG007
SNG006
SNG000
SNG001
SNG005
SNG003
SNG000
SNG002
SNG003
Append
Clear
.SNG fle to load
Internal memory of
the M50 before loading
Internal memory of
the M50 after loading
Media: Menu Command Load selected
229
1. Ifyouwishtoloadacombinationotherthantheone
alreadyselected,useCombination(upperfield)to
selectthecombinationthatyouwishtoload.
Note:Theselectedcombinationcanbeplayedfromthe
youwanttoauditionthecombinationbe
foreloadingit.Formoreinformation,pleaseseePCG
Previewonpage 225.
2. InToCombination(lowerfield),selectthebankand
combinationintowhichthedatawillbeloaded.
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theBank/Combination
Selectwindowwillappear.
8) Load Drum Kits
Alldrumkitsinthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
9) Load Drum Kit
[000031(INT), 032047(USER)]
Thiscommandloadsalldrumkitdatafromtheselected
drumkitbankintothedrumkitbankthatyouspecifyasthe
loaddestination.
Ifyouveselected(USER)astheloaddestinationforthe
selecteddrumkitbank(INT),000015willbeloaded.If
youveselected(INT)astheloaddestinationfor
(USER),thedatawillbeloadedinto000015.
10) Load a Drum Kit
Theselecteddrumkitwillbeloadedintothedrumkit
numberyouspecifyastheloadingdestination.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadadrumkitotherthantheone
alreadyselected,useDrumKit(upperfield)toreselect
thedrumkityouwishtoload.
Note:Theselecteddrumkitcanbeplayedfromthe
youwanttoauditiondrumkitsbeforeloading.Formore
information,pleaseseePCGPreviewonpage 225.
2. InToDrumKit(lowerfield),selecttheloadingdestina
tiondrumkit.
11) Load Arpeggio Patterns
Alluserarpeggiopatterndatainthe.PCGfilewillbe
loaded.
12) Load Arpeggio Pattern
[U0000-0899(INT), U0900-1027(USER)]:
Alluserarpeggiopatterndataintheselecteduserarpeggio
patternbankwillbeloadedintotheuserarpeggiopattern
bankyouspecifyastheloadingdestination.
InTo,selecttheloadingdestinationuserarpeggiopattern
bank.
IfyouexecutethiscommandwithU09001027(USER)
specifiedastheloadingdestinationfortheselecteduser
arpeggiopatternbank00000899(INT),userarpeggio
patterns00000127willbeloaded.Ifyouselect0000
0899(INT)astheloadingdestinationforU09001027(USER),
thedatawillbeloadedintouserarpeggiopatterns0000
0127.
13) Load an Arpeggio Pattern
Theselecteduserarpeggiopatterndatawillbeloadedinto
theuserarpeggiopatternnumberthatyouspecifyasthe
loadingdestination.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadauserarpeggiopatternotherthan
thecurrentlyselectedone,useArpPattern(upper
field)toreselecttheuserarpeggiopatternthatyou
wishtoload.
Theselecteduserarpeggiopatterncanbeplayedfromthe
youwanttoauditiontheuserarpeggiopatternyouwishto
load.
2. InToArpPattern(lowerfield)specifytheloading
destinationuserarpeggiopattern.
14) Load Drum Track Patterns
Thiscommandloadsalldrumtrackuserpatternsfromthe
.PCGfile.
15) Load a Drum Track Pattern
Thiscommandloadstheselectedsingledrumtrackuser
patterndataintothedrumtrackuserpatternlocationthat
youspecifyastheloaddestination.
Media mode
230
1. Ifyouwanttoloadapatternotherthantheselectedpat
tern,usePattern(theupperfield)toreselectthepat
ternthatyouwanttoload.
2. UsetheToPatternfield(thelowerfield)tospecify
theloaddestinationpattern.
16) Load Global Setting
Globalsettingdatainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
ThisincludesGlobalmodeparametersotherthandrumkits
andarpeggeiopatterns.
MemoryprotectandEffectGlobalSWsettingswillnot
beloaded.
17) Load .SNG
Alldatainthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
1. UseSelect.SNGAllocationtospecifyhowthesong
datafromthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Append:Thesongwillbeloadedafterthelastsongdata
thatalreadyexistsininternalmemory.Atthistime,thesong
datainthe.SNGfilebeingloadedwillbepackedforward.
(Seediagramin.SNGAllocationonpage 228)
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoaddsongdatafrommedia
withouterasingthesongdatathatcurrentlyexistsin
internalmemory.Cuelistdatawillnotbeloaded.
Clear:Allcuelistdataandsongdatacurrentlyexistingin
internalmemorywillbeerased,andthecuelistandsong
datawillbeloadedinthestateinwhichitwassaved(See
diagramin.SNGAllocationonpage 228).
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoreproducethesavedstate
immediatelyafterpoweron,etc.
2. Ifa.PCGfileofthesamefilenameexistsinthecurrent
directory,youcanselecttheLoad********.PCGtoo
checkbox.
Seestep1ofthe1)Load.PCGonpage 228.
18) Load Cue Lists
Thecuelistdatainthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
19) Load a Song
Datafortheselectedsongwillbeloadedintothesong
numberyouspecifiedastheloaddestination.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadasongotherthantheselectedsong,
useSong(upperfield)toreselectthesongtobe
loaded.
2. InToSong(lowerfield),selecttheloadingdestination
song.
20) Load Tracks
Theeventdataofalltracksintheselectedsongwillbe
loadedintothesongyouspecifyastheloadingdestination.
However,itisnotpossibletospecifyanuncreatedsongas
theloadingdestination.
InSong,specifytheloadingdestinationsong.
21) Load Pattern Data
Theselecteduserpatternwillbeloadedintoauserpattern
oftheselectedloadingdestinationsong.However,itisnot
possibletospecifyanuncreatedsongastheloading
destination.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadauserpatternotherthantheone
alreadyselected,usePattern(upperfield)toreselect
theuserpatternthatyouwishtoload.
2. InToSongandPattern(lowerfield),selectthe
loadingdestinationsonganduserpattern.
22) Load Standard MIDI File
TheselectedStandardMIDIFilewillbeloadedintothesong
numberyouselectastheloadingdestination.
1. InSong,selecttheloadingdestinationsong.
2. IfyouturnExclusiveOff(unchecked),anySystem
ExclusivemessagesorUniversalExclusivemessages
includedintheSMFdatawillnotbeloaded.
IfthisisOn(checked),SystemExclusivemessagesand
UniversalExclusivemessagesincludedintheSMFdatawill
beloadedasSystemExclusiveevents.
TheGS/XGsoundmapsandmessagesarenot
supported.Dependingonthecontentofthedata,it
maynotplaybackcorrectly,butthedataitselfwillbe
maintainedifExclusiveischecked.
IfyouselectanundefinedfileandchooseLoad
selected,thefilewillbeassumedtobeaStandardMIDI
File,andtheLoadStandardMIDIFiledialogboxwill
appear.Whenyouexecuteloading,thefilewillbe
loadedintothesongthatwasspecifiedastheloading
Media: Menu Command Save All (PCG & SEQ)
231
destination.Howeverifthefileformatisinappropriate,
theoperationwillbeinvalidandanerrormessagewill
bedisplayed.
Theprogrambankandprogramnumbersloadedinto
thesongwillfollowtheBankMap(Global02a)
setting.IfBankMapisKORG,bankAwillbeselected
forbankselect00.00(MSB.LSB).IfBankMapisGM(2),
bankGwillbeselected.
23) Load and Transmit MIDI Exclusive Data
Alldatainthe.EXLfilewillbeloaded,andtransmittedfrom
MIDIOUTortheUSBconnector.
Ifthe.EXLfilecontainstwoormoreExclusivedataitems,
useTransmitIntervalTimetospecifythetimeintervalthat
willbeinsertedbetweeneachitemofExclusivedata.
IfyouaretransmittingthedatatoanotherKROME,the
requiredtimeintervalwilldependonthetypeofdata.After
transmittingallprogramdata,youmustallowanintervalof
approximately1second.FordetailspleaseseetheGlobal
modesectiononDumpProgramDumpDrumTrack
Pattern(seep.218).ForotherMIDIdevices,pleaseseetheir
ownersmanual.
02: Save Menu Command
Cautions regarding Save
WhensavingcombinationswithSaveAll(PCG&
SEQ),SavePCG,orSaveSEQ,youshouldalsotryto
savetheprogramsusedbyeachtimbreortrack(and
thedrumkitsusedbytheprogram),userarpeggio
patterns,anddrumtrackuserpatternsatthesame
time.
Similarly,whensavingprograms,youshouldalsosave
thedrumkits,userarpeggiopatterns,anddrumtrack
userpatternsusedbytheprogramatthesametime.
If the data being saved does not fit on one volume
of media
Whensavinga.PCG,or.SNGfile,andthedatadoesnotfit
ononevolumeofmedia,thedisplaywillreadNospace
availableonmedia.
Eitherdeleteunneededfilestocreatefreespaceonthe
mediabeforesaving,orsavethedatatoothermedia.
Save All (PCG & SEQ)
SaveAll(PCG&SEQ)isavailableontheSavetab.
Thiscommandsavesallprograms,combinations,drumkits,
globalsettings,userarpeggiopattern,anddrumtrackuser
patternsfrominternalmemorytomediaasa.PCGfile.
Songsandcuelistsaresavedtomediaasa.SNGfile.
Thiscommandisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectoryisa
DOSdirectory.
1. Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinputdialog
box,andspecifythefilename.(SeeOGpage 117)
Forexample,ifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecutethesave
command,filesnamedNEWFILE.PCG,andNEWFILE.SNG
willbesavedtothemedia.
2. Selectthebank(s)thatyouwanttosave.
Programs,combinations,drumkits,anduserarpeggio
patternscanbesavedinunitsofbanks.Informationonthe
banktobesavedisdisplayedbeloweachSelectionbutton.
Banksthatarecheckedwillbesaved.
Ifyouwanttomodifytheselections,presstheSelection
buttontoopenthedialogbox,andcheckthecheckboxesfor
thedatayouwanttosave.
Media mode
232
Example: when the Selection button for Program is pressed
IfyoupresstheAllbutton,allbankswillbechecked.
IfyoupresstheNothingbutton,allbankswillbe
unchecked.
PresstheOKbuttontochangetheselectionsasspecified,or
presstheCancelbuttontodiscardyourchanges.
TospecifywhetherGlobalSettings,andDrumTrack
UserPatternwillbesaved,usethecheckboxinstep1.
IfNospaceavailableonmediumdialogboxwillappear.
Eitherdeleteunneededfilestocreatefreespaceonthe
mediabeforesaving,orsavethedatatoothermedia.
Whenyousave,fileswillbecreatedinthecurrentdirectory.
Save PCG
SavePCGisavailableontheSavetab.
Thiscommandsavesallprograms,combinations,drumkits,
globalsettings,userarpeggiopattern,anddrumtrackuser
patternsfrominternalmemorytomediaasa.PCGfile.
DOSdirectory.
ForexampleifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecutethesave
command,filesnamedNEWFILE.PCGandNEWFILE.SNG
willbesavedtothemedia.
2. Selectthebank(s)thatyouwanttosave.
Fortheprocedure,pleasesee02:SaveAllstep3.
Save SEQ
SaveSEQisavailableontheSavetab.
Thiscommandsavesallsongsandcuelistsfrominternal
memoryasa.SNGfile.
DOSdirectory.
Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinputdialogbox,
andspecifythefilename.(SeeOGpage 117)
Forexample,ifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecutethesave
command,afilenamedNEWFILE.SNGwillbesavedtothe
media.
Save to Standard MIDI File
SavetoStandardMIDIFileisavailableontheSavetab.
Thiscommandsavestheselectedsongfrominternal
memorytostoragemediaasa.MIDfile(StandardMIDI
File).
DOSdirectory.
1. InSong,choosethesongthatyouwishtosave.
2. IfExclusiveisOn(checked),SystemExclusiveevents
andUniversalExclusiveeventsincludedinthesong
datawillbesavedasExclusivemessages.
IfthisisOff(unchecked),SystemExclusiveeventsand
UniversalExclusiveeventsincludedinthesongdatawill
notbesaved.
box,andspecifythefilename.
Bydefault,thefirsteightcharacters(uppercase)ofthesong
namewillbeassignedautomatically.
4. Usetheradiobuttonstospecifytheformat.
Format0willsavesixteenchannelsofMIDIdatatogetherin
asingletrack.
Format1willsaveeachMIDIchanneltoaseparatetrack.
Thesongdatayousaveherecanbeplayedbackonadevice
thatsupportsStandardMIDIFiles.Howeverifyouintendto
playbackthedataontheKROME,werecommendthatyou
useSaveSEQtosavethedata,sincethiswillbemore
easilyrecreated.
Save Exclusive
SaveExclusiveisavailableontheSavetab.
AccumulatesthereceivedExclusivedataininternal
memory,andthensavesthedatatomediaasan.EXLfile.
DOSdirectory.
1. WhenyouselectSaveExclusive,theKROMEwillwait
forExclusivedatatobereceived.Thefollowingdialog
boxwillappear.
Media: Menu Command Rename
233
2. TransmittheExclusivedatathatyouwishtosavetothe
KROME.
Whilethedataisbeingreceived,thedisplaywillindicate
Status=RECEIVINGMIDIDATA.
Whenreceptionends,thesizeofthereceiveddataandthe
sizeoftheremainingfreeareawillberewritten.Thedisplay
willchangetoStatus=AWAITINGMIDIDATA,andyou
cancontinuetransmittingExclusivedatatotheKROME.
Duringreception,theCancelbuttonandtheOKbutton
cannotbepressed.
03: Utility Menu Command
Rename
RenameisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommandrenamestheselectedfileordirectory.
ThiscommandisvalidonlywhenaDOSfileoraDOS
directoryisselected.
1. Selectthefileordirectorywhosenameyouwantto
edit.
2. SelectRenametoopenthedialogbox.
3. Pressthetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinputdialog
box,andmodifythename(SeeOGpage 117).
Copy
CopyisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommandcopiestheselectedfileordirectory.
ThiscommandisvalidonlywhenaDOSfileoraDOS
directoryisselected.
1. Selectthefileordirectorythatyouwanttocopy.
2. SelectCopytoopenthedialogbox.
3. Copywillshowthenameoftheselectedfileordirec
tory.
Ifyouwishtochangethefileordirectorythatwillbe
copied,usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinput
dialogbox,andspecifythefilenamethatyouwishtocopy.
(SeeOGpage 117)
Using[*/?]asaWildcard:Whenyouusethetexteditbutton
toaccessthetextinputdialogboxandspecifythenameof
thefileordirectorytobecopied,youcanuse*and?
charactersaswildcards.Forexample,ifintheabove
exampleyouspecifyPRELOAD1.*(insteadof
PRELOAD1.PCG),allfilenamesofPRELOAD1.withany
filenameextensionwillbecopiedatthesametime:i.e.,
PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD1.SNG,...
Example)
PRELOAD1.*:PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD1.SNG,...
PRELOAD?.PCG:PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD2.PCG,
PRELOAD3.PCG,...
Whenwildcardsareused,onlyfileswillbesubjectto
copying.Directorieswillnotbecopied.
4. UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontoselectthecopy
destinationdirectory.
Media mode
234
5. Ifyouwishtocopythefileordirectorywithadifferent
name,usethetexteditbutton(inthelowerfield)to
accessthetextinputdialogbox,andspecifythenew
nameforthefileordirectorytobecopied.
Ifyoureusingwildcardstocopymultiplefiles
simultaneously,youwontbeabletochangefilenames.
Note:Ifyoudecidenottocopy,presstheAbortbutton.
Delete
DeleteisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommanddeletestheselectedfileordirectory.
ThiscommandisvalidonlyifaDOSfileordirectoryis
selected.
1. Selectthefileordirectorythatyouwanttodelete.
2. SelectDeletetoopenthedialogbox.
3. Deletewillindicatethenameoftheselectedfileor
directory.
Ifyouwishtochangethefileordirectorythatistobe
deleted,usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinput
dialogbox,andspecifythenameofthefileordirectorythat
youwishtodelete.(SeeOGpage 117)
Using[*/?]asaWildcard:Whenyouusethetexteditbutton
toaccessthetextinputdialogboxandspecifythenameof
thefiletobedeleted,youcanusethe*or?charactersas
wildcards.Thisallowsyoutosimultaneouslydelete
multiplefileswithidenticalfilenamesanddifferent
extensions,orfileswhosenamesarepartiallyidentical(see
Copyonpage 233).
Whenwildcardsareused,onlyfileswillbesubjectto
deletion.Directorieswillnotbedeleted.
Create Directory
CreateDirectoryisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommandcreatesanewdirectorywithinthecurrent
directory.
Usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinputdialogbox,
andspecifythenameofthenewdirectory(SeeOG
page 117).
Set Date/Time
SetDate/TimeisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thisisthedateandtimeatwhichthefilewassaved.
TheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcalendaror
clock,youmustuseUtilitymenucommandSetDate/
Timetosetthedateandtimebeforesavingthefile.
Format
FormatisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommandformatsthemediathatsinsertedinthe
KROME.Thevolumelabel(anamefortheentiremedia)
youspecifywillbeassignedtothemedia.Thevolumelabel
youassignherewillbedisplayedintheSDCard(Media0
1a).Thevolumelabelcanbeamaximumofeleven
characters.
Afterformatting,itisnotpossibletopressthe
COMPAREbuttontoundoformatting.
1. Makesurethatthemediayouwanttoformatis
inserted.
2. SelectFormattoopenthedialogbox.
3. InVolumeLabel,usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthe
textinputdialogbox,andspecifythevolumelabel(See
OGpage 117).
Thepreviouslyspecifiedvolumelabelwillbedisplayed.If
novolumelabelhadbeenspecifiedforthemedia,orifa
nonDOSmediawasinserted,thiswillindicateNEW
VOLUME.
4. Specifytheinitializationformat.
QuickFormat:NormallyyoushoulduseQuickFormatto
initializethemedia.
FullFormat:Allblocksinthemediawillbeerased.
NormallythereisnoneedforyoutoexecuteFullFormat.
YoushouldexecuteQuickFormatinstead.
Year 19802079
Month 112
Day 131
Hour 023
Minute 059
Second 059
235
Effect Guide
Overview
TheKROMEprovidesfiveinserteffects,twomastereffects,
andatotaleffect,togetherwithamixersectionthatcontrols
theroutingoftheseeffects.
Foreachoftheseeffectprocessors,youcanchoosefrom193
differenttypesofeffects,groupedintothefollowing
categories:
Classification of 193 effects
Effect Preset
presets.
Combination,andSequencer).
storedwiththeProgramyoudontneedtostorethemasan
favoritesettings.
aparticularProgram,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
P01P15:Presetdataissavedinthisarea.
WerecommendthatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
settings.
writtenaProgram,orselectedanewProgram.Selectingthis
settingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Programssavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
selectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheProgram,theEffect
Presetsettingwillrevertto.
page 60.
Effects in each mode
Program mode
WithPrograms,youcanuseinserteffectstoprocessthefinal
soundinthesamewaythatyouusetheFilter,Driver,
Amplifier,andEQ(equalizer)toprocessthesoundfromthe
oscillators(OSC1&2).Thenthemastereffectsareusedto
createoverallambiencesuchasreverb,andusethetotal
effecttomakefinaladjustments.Allofthesesettingscanbe
madeindependentlyforeachprogram.
Combination, Sequencer mode
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusethetrackEQ
andinserteffectstoprocesstheprogramsoundofeachtimbre/
track.Youcanthenusethemastereffectstocreateoverall
ambience,andusethetotaleffecttomakefinaladjustments.
InCombinationmodeyoucanmakethesesettingsforeach
combination,andinSequencermodeyoucanmakethemfor
eachsong.
InSequencermode,youcanswitchbetweeneffectsor
modifytheeffectparametersandrecordthesechanges,so
thateffectswillswitchautomaticallyoreffectparameters
willbemodifiedautomaticallyasthesongplaysback.
Effect type Contents
Dynamics:
000...006
Effectswhichcontrolvolume,suchas
compressors,limiter,andgates
EQ/Filter:
007...019
Effectswhichcontrolfrequencycontent,suchas
EQ,multimodefilter,exciter,andwah
Overdrive/
Amp/Mic:
020...028
Overdriveandampmodelingeffectssuchas
guitar/bassampsandmics
Chorus/
Flanger/
Phaser:
029...048
Pitchandphasemodulationeffectssuchas
chorusandflanger
Modulation/
PitchShift:
049...067
Othermodulationeffectssuchastremoloand
rotaryspeaker,andpitchshifters
Delay:
038...083
Delays
Reverb/ER:
084...094
Reverbandearlyreflections
MonoMono
Serial:
095...126
Mono&Monochaineffectsthatinternally
connecttwomonoeffectsinseries
Mono//Mono
Parallel:
127...171
Mono&Monoparalleleffectsthatallowtwo
monoeffectstobeappliedtoLandR
independently
DoubleSize:
172...193
Doublesizeeffects
Oscillator1 Filter1 Driver1 Amplifer1
Oscillator2 Filter2 Driver2 Amplifer2 EQ
EQ
Insert Efect 15
Drum Track
Total Efect
Master Efect 1, 2
Return
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Send
Program mode
Combination mode, Sequencer mode
Timbre 1 /MIDI Track 1 EQ
Timbre 16 /MIDI Track 16 EQ
Insert Efect 15 Total Efect
Master Efect 1, 2
Return
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Send
Effect Guide
236
Dynamic modulation (Dmod)
and Tempo Synchronization
Dynamic modulation (Dmod)
Dynamicmodulationletsyoucontrolcertaineffects
parametersinrealtime,usingeitherthebuiltincontrollers
orMIDI.Theseeffectparametersaremarkedwiththelogo
.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDynamicModulation
Sources(Dmod)onpage 346.
Tempo Synchronization
Youcansynchronizesomeeffectsparameters,suchasLFO
speedsanddelaytimes,tothesystemtempo.Thisletsyou
synctheeffectstoProgramLFOs,DrumTrack,Arpeggiator,
theinternalsequencer,oranexternalMIDIclock.
Theseeffectsparametersaremarkedwiththelogo .
Synchronizing LFOs
MosteffectswithLFOs,suchas011:StereoWah/AutoWah,
canbesynchronizedtotempo.Thisappliestotheindividual
effectsLFOs,andalsotheCommonFXLFO.
TosetupLFOstosynchronizetotempo:
1. SetMIDISynctoOn.
2. SettheBPMasdesired.
Tosynchronizetothesystemclock,setBPMtoMIDI.
TosettheLFOtoaspecifictempo,separatefromthesystem
clock,setBPMtothedesiredtempo(between40.00and
300.00BPM).
3. UsetheBaseNoteandTimes(x)parameterstosetthe
rhythmicvalueoftheLFO.
Forinstance,ifyousetBaseNoteto1/8andTimes(x)to2,
eachcycleoftheLFOwilllastforaquarternote(twoeighth
notes).
Synchronizing Delay Times
DelayswithBPMintheirtitlewillsynctotempo.
Forinstance,youmightsetupeffect078:StereoBPMDelay
asfollows:
1. SetLDelayBaseNoteto1/8,andTimes(x)to1
2. SetRDelayBaseNoteto1/16,andTimes(x)to3
Thismeansthattheleftchannelwillbedelayedbyan
eighthnote,andtherightchannelwillbedelayedbya
dottedeighthnote(threesixteenthnotes).
3. SettheBPMasdesired.
Tosynchronizetothesystemclock,setBPMtoMIDI.
Tosetthedelaystoaspecifictempo,separatefromthe
systemclock,setBPMtothedesiredtempo(between40.00
and300.00BPM).
Ifthecombinationofthetempo,BaseNote,andTimes(x)
settingsinconjunctionwouldexceedthemaximumdelay
time,awarningsuchasTimeOver?>OVER!willappear
inthedisplay.Ifthishappens,justreducethedelaytime.
Notethatthemaximumdelaytimedependsonwhichdelay
effectyoureusing.Forinstance,themaximumdelaytime
for079:StereoBPMDelayis2,730msec,whilethemaximum
delaytimefor192:St.BPMLongDlyis5,460msec.
Dynamic modulation to control an effect parame-
ter in realtime
Asanexample,letssetupdynamicmodulationtocontrol
aneffectparameterinrealtime.
1. AsdescribedintheprocedureforProgramEffectsset
tingsonpage 79oftheOperatinguide,setIFX1to078:
L/C/RBPMDelay.Verifythatyourehearingadelay
effect.
2. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFXIFX1page.
Now, we can set the Dmod to change the delay level via the
Joystick
3. SetInputLevelDmodto+100.
4. SetSourcetoJS+Y:#01.
Thedelaysoundwilldisappear.
Theinputleveltotheeffectcanbecontrolledbythejoystick.
Asyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourself,thedelay
soundwillgraduallyincrease.
In addition, we can use Dmod to change the feedback level
via SW1
5. IntheP1:Basic/ControllersControllersSetuppage,set
theSW1functiontoSW1Mod.CC#80,andtheModeto
Toggle.
ChooseP8:Routing/IFXpage.SettheFeedbackSrctoSW1:
#80,andsetAmtto+30.
Whenyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourselfandpress
theSW1switch,thefeedbacklevelwillincrease,andthe
BPM/MIDI Sync: LFO
LFO
BPM/MIDI Sync: Delay Time
Lch
Rch
Dry Wet
Dry Wet
Overview Common FX LFOs
237
delaysoundwillcontinueforalongertime.TheAmtsetting
specifiesthefeedbacklevelthatwillbeineffectwhenthe
SW1switchispressed.IfAmtissetto10,pressingtheSW1
switchwillreducethefeedbacklevelto0.
Finally, we can use the MIDI/Tempo Sync function
to synchronize the delay time to the arpeggiator
tempo.
6. SetBPMtoMIDI.
7. ForL,C,andR,settheDelayBaseNoteandTimesas
desired.
Forthisexample,setDelayBaseNoteto, andTimestox1
sothattheeffectwillbeeasilyunderstandable.Thedelay
timewillrepeatatanintervalofa8thnote.
8. RotatetheTEMPOknob,andthedelaytimewill
change.
Whenyou(pushthejoystickawayfromyourselfand)press
theSW1switch,thefeedbacklevelwillrise,andthedelays
willbecomelonger.
9. WhenyouturnontheARPbutton,arpeggiatorwill
beginplaying.
Selectanydesiredarpeggiator.WhenyourotatetheTEMPO
knob,thedelaytimewillchangeinsynchronizationwiththe
changingtempoofthearpeggiator.
Dependingonthespecificdelayeffect,youmayhear
someunexpectednoiseifyouchangethetempowhile
thedelayissounding.Thisisbecausethedelaysound
becomesdiscontinuous,andisnotamalfunction.
Forsomeeffects,youcansynchronizetheLFO
frequencytothetempo.SettheeffectparametersMIDI
SynctoOn,andBPMtoMIDI.Fordetails,pleasesee
TempoSynchronizationonpage 236.
Common FX LFOs
Normally,LFObasedeffectssuchaschoruses,flangers,
phasers,filters,andautopaneachhavetheirown
independentLFO.TheKROMEeffectssupportthis
standardmechanism,butaddanewone:CommonFX
LFOs.
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronize
multipleLFObasedeffectstogether.Theyreavailablein
mostLFObasedeffects,inadditiontotheindividualLFOs,
providing:
MastersourcesoffrequencyandphaseforallLFObased
effects
LFOspeedsetbyeitherfrequencyortempo
ResetfromDmodsources,foreitherrealtimeperformance
orsynchronizingtoadownbeatinasequence
WhenusingtheCommonFXLFOs,youcanstillcontrolthe
LFOphaseindividuallyforeacheffect,andoftenchangethe
waveformindividuallyaswell.
YoucanedittheCommonFXLFOparametersontheP8
CommonFXLFOpagesofProgram,Combination,
Sequencermodes.
Stereo Flanger Common FX LFO1
Common FX LFO
Stereo Phaser
Stereo Auto Pan
Waveforem = Triangle
Generate original LFO waveform
Frequency[Hz]
Reset Phase Ofset = 0 [deg]
Waveforem = Sine
Phase Ofset = 0 [deg]
Waveforem = Sine
Phase Ofset = +90 [deg]
LFO Type = Common1
Effect Guide
238
FX Control Buses
TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreateeffectssidechains.
Sidechainsletyoucontrolaneffectwithoneaudiosignal
(thesidechain),whiletheeffectprocessesacompletely
differentaudiosignal.
Thisisconvenientforusewithvocodersandlimiters,gates,
etc.Youcanuseavoicetypetimbretomodulateasynth
typeinput,oruseadrumtracketc.tocreaterhythmic
vocodereffects.Limiterorgatetypeeffectsareoftenusedto
controlaninputusingadifferentsound.
KROMEincludestwotruestereoFXControlBuses,which
canbeusedwiththefollowingeffects:
Vocoder
174:Vocoder
Limiter, and gate effects
003:StereoLimiter
006:StereoGate
Example: Gated Reverb (Program mode)
Ifyouprocessreverberantsoundthroughagateeffect,the
gatingmaynotoccurasdesiredsincethereverbextendsthe
durationofthesound.Normally,youwillusetheun
reverberatedsoundtocontrolthegate,asshowninthe
diagram.UseBus(IFX/Output)SelecttosendOSC1and2
toIFX1andalsoviaFXControlBusto1.SettheIFX2:Stereo
GateEnvelopeSourcetoFXControl1.Thisletsyoucontrol
thegateusingadifferentsignalthantheinput(inthis
example,thereverberatedsound).
Example: Limiter (Combination)
Compressortypeeffectsusetheleveloftheaudioinputto
controlthelevelgainoftheaudiooutput.
Fortheseeffects,theenvelopedetectionsourcecanbeeither
theaudioinputitself(theusualmethod)orFXControlBus1
or2.
Theexampleshowninthediagramisofasplitcombination
inwhichtheleveloftimbre1(Pad,playedfromthelowkey
range)isbeingcontrolledbytimbre2(Guitar,withIFX2
OD/HiGainWahinserted,playedfromthehighkeyrange).
Youcanmakesettingssothatwhenyouplaytheguitar
sound,thevolumeofthepadwilldecreaseautomatically.
SendthepostIFX2signalviaFXControlBustoFXCtrl1,
andsettheIFX1:StereoLimiterEnvelopeSourceparameter
toFXControl1.
Example: Vocoder (Combination)
Vocodereffectsproducetheirdistinctivesoundbyusingan
audiosignal(themodulator)tomodulateadifferentaudio
signal(thecarrier).
Asshownintheillustration,usingtheoutputoftimbre1as
thecarrierandthevoicetypeoutputoftimbre2asthe
modulatorallowsyoutocreatedistinctivetalkingeffects.
Example: Rhythmic Vocoder (Program)
Vocodereffectsproducetheirdistinctivesoundbyusingone
audiosignal(themodulator)tomodulateadifferentaudio
signal(thecarrier).
Youcanalsouseadrumpatternorsimilarsignalasthe
modulator,producingarhythmvocodereffect.
Intheexampleshowninthediagram,adrumpattern
generatedbyArpeggiatorandDrumTrackfunctionissent
totheFXControlbusandusedasthemodulatorforthe
vocoder.
Foroscillator1(thecarrier),setBus(IFX/Output)Selectto
IFX1,sendingthesignaltoIFX1:Vocoder.Fordrumtrack
wereusingasthemodulator),setFXControlBusto1,
sendingthesignaltoFXCtrl1bus.ForIFX1:Vocoder,set
ModulatorSourcetoFXControl1sothatthedrumtrack
signalwillbethemodulatorforthevocoder.
IFX1
084: Reverb Hall
IFX2
006: Stereo Gate OSC1&2
Bus Select
: IFX1
Chain to
: IFX2
FX Control Bus
: FX Ctrl1
Envelope Source
: FX Control1
Gated Reverb (Program)
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1)
IFX1
003: Stereo Limiter
Timbre1
: Pad
Bus Select
: IFX1
Ctrl Bus
(FX Control Bus)
: 1
Envelope Source
: FX Control 1
Limiter (Combination)
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1) Timbre2
: Guitar
split
IFX2
020: OD/
Hi.Gain Wah
Bus Select
: IFX2
Bus Select
: L/R
Program
B
Program
A
IFX1
174: Vocoder
Timbre1
: Pad
Bus Select
: IFX1
FX Control Bus
: 1
Modulator Source
: FX Control1
Vocoder (Combination)
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1)
(Carrier)
(Modulator)
Timbre2
: Voice
IFX1
174: Vocoder
OSC1
: Synth/
Single wave
Drum
Track
Bus Select
: IFX1
FX Control Bus
: 1
Modulator Source
: FX Control1
Rhythmic Vocoder (Program)
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1)
(Carrier)
(Modulator)
Drum pattern/
Drum Track
Overview Effect I/O
239
Effect I/O
Toachievethebesttonalquality,signalssenttotheeffects
shouldbeatthemaximumlevelbelowclipping.Also,use
theWet/DryparameterfortheInsertEffects,TotalEffectand
theWet/DryorReturn1,2parameterfortheMasterEffects
toadjusttheeffectoutputlevel.
Iftheinputlevelistoolow,theSNratiomaydecrease.
Ontheotherhand,iftheinputlevelistoohigh,
clippingmayoccur.
Thefollowingtableshowstheparametersrelatedtothe
levelsettings:
Program mode
Combination mode/Sequencer mode
*1
Someeffectsmaynothavetheseparameters.
Input
OSC1/2Volume,DrumTrackVolume(P0)
OSC1/2MS1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8Level(P2)
Filter1/2Trim(P3)
Filter1/2Output(P3)
Driver1/2Drive(P4)
Amp1/2AmpLevel(P4)
EQInputTrim(P4)
Send1/2(P8)
EffectTrimparameter
*1
(P8,P9)
Output
EffectWet/Dryparameter(P8,P9)
Return1,2(P9)
MasterVolume(P9)
Input
Volume(P0)
Timbre/TrackEQInputTrim(P2)
Send1/2(P8)
EffectTrimparameter
*1
(P8,P9)
Output
EffectWet/Dryparameter(P8,P9)
Return1,2(P9)
MasterVolume(P9)
Effect Guide
240
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5)
In/Out
InsertEffects(IFX15)haveastereoinputandastereo
output.IfyousettheWet/DryparametertoDry(noeffect),
theinputsignalwillbepassedthrough,instereo,without
beingprocessedbytheeffect.IfyouselectWet(effect
applied),theprocessedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthe
followingways:
MonoMono Parallel Effects
127: P4EQ // P4EQ 171: BPM Dl // BPM Dl
Theseeffectsaretypicallystereoin/stereoout,buttheyhave
aspecialstructure.TheLchannelandRchannelofthe
stereoinputeachhavetheirownindependentmonoeffect.
Eachmonooutputcanthenbepannedtothedesired
positioninthestereofield.
Track1:Piano,Pan=L001,Bus(IFX/Output)Select=IFX1
Track2:E.Piano,Pan=R127,Bus(IFX/Output)Select=IFX1
Sothatyoudontmixthesoundofthetwotracksthatare
beinginput,settheP0:Play/RECPanparametertoL001and
R127respectively.
Example: IFX1: 134: P4EQ // Phaser
Track1:PianoissenttotheLchannelP4EQ,andTrack2:
E.PianoissenttotheRchannelPhaser.UsetheP8:Routing/
IFXIFX1pagePanparametertosettheoutputpositionof
eachsound.Inthisexample,botharesettoC064.Seethe
diagrambelow.
IFX1: 134: P4EQ // Phaser
Input/outputvariationsforeacheffectareshowninupper
leftoftheblockdiagramsstartingonpage 320.
Ifyouselect000:NoEffect,stereoinputsignalsareoutput
instereowithoutbeingprocessed.
PressingtheOn/OffbuttonofIFX1IFX5intheP8:Routing/
IFXInsertFXSetuppagesineachmodewilltoggle
betweenOnandOff.WhenOffisselected,theeffectwillbe
bypassed,andthestereoinputsignalwillbeoutputin
stereowithoutbeingprocessed.
TheKROMEcanalsoturnIFX1IFX5offseparately
fromthesettingoftheOn/OffbuttonbyreceivingMIDI
controlchangemessageCC#92.Value0willturnthem
off,andvalue1127willturnthemon.
YoucanalsouseEffectGlobalSW(Global01b)to
turnIFX15onandoff.ThisMIDIcontrolisperformed
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
Double-size effects
Doublesizeeffects(172:St.MltbandLimiter193:Early
Reflections)usetwiceasmuchspaceasothereffects.
YoucanusedoublesizeeffectsforinserteffectsIFX1IFX4
andmastereffectMFX1.However,theeffectofthenumber
thatfollowsitwillbeunavailable.Forexampleifyouve
selectedadoublesizeeffectforIFX1,youwontbeableto
useIFX2.IfyouveselectedadoublesizeeffectforMFX1,
youwontbeabletouseMFX2.
An example of when a double-size effect is selected for IFX1 and
IFX4
Routing
Youcanuseuptofivechannels(IFX15)fortheInsert
Effectsinanymode.
Program mode
UseBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b)tosetthe
destinationbusoftheoscillatoroutput.
L/R:SendtheoutputtotheL/Rbus.Instead,itissentto
AUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandRaftertheTFX.
IFX15:ThesignalissenttoInsertEffectsIFX15.
Off:TheoutputwillnotbesenttotheL/Rbus,orIFX15
buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwanttoconnectthe
oscillatoroutputtoamastereffectinseries.UseSend1(to
MFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)toadjustthesendlevel.
UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)(Prog81d)to
specifythesendlevelfortheMasterEffects.Thissettingis
effectiveifBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b)issettoL/R
orOff.
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,useSend1and
Send2(Prog82a)tospecifythesendlevelofthepostIFX
signal.
Send1respondstoCC#93,andSend2respondsto
CC#91.Atthistime,theactualsendlevelusesthevalue
oftheSend1and2settingsforOscillators1and2,
multipliedbytheSend1and2valuesreceivedvia
MIDI.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Mono In - Mono Out
Mono In - Stereo Out
Efect
Efect
Efect +
Efect +
Wet
Mono In/Out Efect
Mono In/Out Efect Pan
Pan
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5) Routing
241
Intheexampleshowninthenextdiagram,Oscillators1and
2outputsbeingsenttoIFX1.
IfyouareconnectingtheInsertEffectsinseries,checkthe
Chainbox(Prog82a).UseChainto(Prog82a)tospecify
thedestinationtowhichthesignalwillbechained.
IfyouchecktheIFX1checkbox,theoutputofIFX1willbe
senttotheinputoftheIFXyouspecifyinChainto.Effects
canbechainedonlyinascendingorderoftheirnumber;for
exampleIFX1canbechainedtoIFX2throughIFX5,and
IFX2canbechainedtoIFX3throughIFX5.Youcancreatea
chainofuptofiveinserteffectsinseries,IFX1throughIFX5.
WhentheInsertEffectsareconnectedinseries,thevaluesof
thePan:CC#8,Bus,Send1,andSend2parametersforthe
postIFXsignalwillbeused.
Intheexampleshowninthenextdiagram,theChaincheck
boxischecked,andeachChaintoparameterissettothe
subsequenteffect,creatingaseriesconnectionofIFX1
IFX2IFX3IFX4IFX5.ThepostIFX5settingsforPan:
CC#8,Bus,Send1,andSend2willbeused.
Settings for drum programs
IfyouhaveselectedDrumsforOscillatorMode(Prog1
1a)ofaProgram,theUseDKitSettingbox(Prog81c)
becomesavailable.Formoreinformation,pleaseseenext
diagram.
Ifyoucheckthisbox,Bus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControl
Bus,Send1,andSend2(Global55b)foreachkeyofthe
selectedDrumkitbecomeseffective.Forexample,youcan
sendasnaresoundtoIFX1toapplytheGateeffect,akick
soundtoIFX2toapplyEQ,andothersoundstoAUDIO
OUTPUTL/MONOandRwithoutapplyinganyInsert
Effects.
Tip:Inmostofthepreloadeddrumkits,thefollowingtypes
ofdruminstrumenthavethesameBus(IFX/Output)Select
settings.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Ifyoudeselectthebox,alldruminstrumentoutputsare
senttothebusspecifiedbyBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog
81b).YoumayapplyanyInsertEffectstoalldrum
instruments,regardlessoftheDrumkitsettings.
Combination and Sequencer modes
UseBus(IFX/Output)Select(Combi/Seq81(2)d)for
timbres(Combination)andtracks(Sequencer)toselectan
InsertEffecttoapplytothecorrespondingtimbresand
tracks.Youcanroutemultipletimbresandtrackstoasingle
InsertEffect.
Tip:Youcanuseeachtimbre/tracksBus(IFX/Output)
Select,postIFXChaintoandChainparameters(Combi/
Seq83b)tocreateavarietyofroutings.
Example: Inserting one IFX into two or more timbres
Example: Inserting a separate IFX into each timbre, and inserting
another IFX later
Example: Sharing part of a timbres IFX chain with another tim-
bre
AswithProgrammode,selectL/R,IFX15,orOffforeach
timbreandtrack.
Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)becomeavailableif
Bus(IFX/Output)SelecthasbeensettoL/RorOff.Ifyouve
setBus(IFX/Output)SelecttoIFX15,useSend1and
Send2(Combi/Seq83b)followingtheinserteffecttoadjust
thesendlevels.
CC#91.Atthistime,theactualsendlevelusesthevalue
oftheSend1and2settingsforOscillators1and2ofthe
Programs(selectedforthetimbresandtracks),
multipliedbytheSend1and2valuesreceivedvia
MIDI.
ThefollowingdiagramshowsanexampleofCombination
mode.TheTimbre1outputissenttoIFX1andtheTimbre2
outputissenttoIFX2accordingtotheBus(IFX/Output)
Selectsetting.OthertimbresaresenttoL/R.Theoutput
signalpassesthroughtheTFX,thengoestoAUDIO
OUTPUTL/MONOandR.
Effect Guide
242
Inthenextdiagram,IFX1sChaincheckboxischeckedand
ChaintosettoIFX2,sendingtheoutputofIFX1toIFX2.
Timbre1isbeingprocessedbyIFX1:StereoCompressorand
IFX2:038:StereoFlangereffects.Timbre2isbeingprocessed
bytheIFX2:038:StereoFlangereffect.TheRoutingMap
areaofthenextdiagramshowsthesesettings.(Withthese
settings,IFX35arenotbeingused.)
Drum Programs in Combination and Sequencer
modes
Ifyouveselectedadrumprogram(OscillatorMode=
DrumsorDoubleDrums)foratimbre(inCombination
mode)ortrack(inSequencermode),theDKitsettingwillbe
availableasachoiceforBus(IFX/Output)Select(seethe
followingdiagram).
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoDKit,ofeachkeyinthe
drumkit,lettingyouspecifythebustowhicheachdrum
instrumentwillbesent.Forexampleyoucansendsnare
soundstoIFX1,kicksoundstoIFX2,andotherdrumsounds
toL/MONOandR.
Ifthischeckboxisunchecked,alldruminstrumentswillbe
outputaccordingtotheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingof
eachtimbre/track(Combi/Seq81(2)d).Thisletsyouapply
aninserteffecttoallofthedruminstrumentsinthatdrum
kit.
Drum Kit IFX Patch
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoDKit,youllbeableto
selectthemenucommandDrumKitIFXPatch.
ThisoptionallowsyoutochangetheroutingoftheInsert
EffectstemporarilybychangingBus(IFX/Output)Selectfor
eachkey.
Forexample,assumethattheDrumkitkeyassignmentisset
sothatasnaresoundisroutedtoIFX1andakicksoundis
routedtoIFX2etc.,IFX13.Inthiscase,ifyouwishtoassign
IFX1and2totheProgramsusedbyothertimbresand
tracks,youcanviewtheroutingsothattheseDrumkit
soundsareroutedtoIFX3andIFX5respectively.
PatchingispossibleonlyiftheBus(IFX/Output)Select
(Global55b)settingofeachkeyinthedrumkitisassigned
toaninserteffect.Thestateofthesesettingsisalsoshownin
theRoutingMap.MakethedesiredsettingsforDrumKit
IFXPatch,andpresstheOKbuttontoexecute.
Ifyouwanttoreverttotheoriginalsettingsofthedrumkit,
executeDrumKitIFXPatchwiththesettingsIFX1IFX1,
IFX2IFX2,IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,andIFX5IFX5.
Inthefollowingdiagram,DrumProgramisassignedto
Timbre1,andnormalProgramsareassignedtoTimbres2
and3.Bus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoDKitforTimbre1,
IFX1forTimbre2,andIFX2forTimbre3.WithTimbre1,the
Bus(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)forDrumkitsetting
becomeseffective.
DrumKit IFX Patch dialog
UsetheDrumKitIFXPatchmenucommandifyouwantthe
drumprogramtouseeffectsotherthantimbres2and3.
ChooseDrumKitIFXPatchfromthepagemenu,and
temporarilysendthedrumkitIFX1toIFX3,IFX2toIFX4,
andIFX3toIFX5.Executingwiththesesettingswill
temporarilychangetheeffectstowhichthedrumkitis
beingsent(seethefollowingdiagram).
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5) Mixer
243
Mixer
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,theP8
InsertFXSetuppageletsyousetthePan:CC#8(postIFX
panning),BusSel.(BusSelect),CtrlBus(FXcontrolbus),
andtheSend1andSend2levelstothemastereffects.
IfyouhavecheckedtheChaintoconnecttheInsertEffects
inseries,theseparametersPan:CC#8Send2forthepost
IFX(lastInsertEffectinthechain)signalbecomeeffective.
Pan: CC#8
ThisparameterenablesyoutosetthepanofthepostIFX
signal.
Ifyouareusingthestereoin/stereooutInsertEffects,set
thisparametertoC064toenablethePansettingsforthe
oscillators(Prog41c,45),timbres(Combi03(4)b),tracks
(Seq03(4)b).
Ifyouareusingmonoin/stereooutormonoin/monoout
InsertEffects,thePansettingsfortheoscillators,timbres,
andtracksareignored,andtheyaresettoCenter.Usethe
Pan:CC#8parameter(Prog82a,Combi/Seq83b)tosetthe
pan.L000ishardleft,andR127ishardright.
Formoreabouteffecttypessuchasstereoin/stereoout,
seeIn/Outonpage 240.
YoucancontroltheseparametersviaCC#8.
Bus Sel. (Bus Select)
Thisparameterenablesyoutospecifythedestinationbus
forthepostIFXsignals.
L/RisacommonsettingtosendsignalstotheTotalEffect
(TFX)beforetheyareroutedtotheAUDIOOUTPUTL/
MONOandRoutputs.
IfsettoOff,thesignalwillnotbesenttotheL/Rbus.
ChoosethissettingifyouwanttousetheSend1orSend2
levelstoroutethesignalthroughamastereffectinseries
(i.e.,notasasendeffect).
FX Ctrl (FX Control Bus)
ThisspecifiestheFXControlbusthatfollowstheinsert
effect.TheFXControlbuses(FXControl1,2)aremonotwo
channelbuses.
TheKROMEprovidestwo(monotwochannel)effect
controlbuses,givingyouawiderangeofwaystocontrol
effects.
FXControlbusescanbeusedwithvocoder,limiter,and
gatetypeeffects.
FordetailsontheeffectsthatbeusedwithFXControlbuses,
seeFXControlBusesonpage 238.
Asanexample,hereshowyoucanusetheFXControlbus
followinganinserteffect.
Example: Gated Reverb
Whenusingagateeffectwithareverberantsound,usingthe
reverberantsoundtocontrolthegatemaynotproducethe
desiredresultsbecausethereverbextendsthedurationof
thesound.Normally,youwillusetheunreverberated
soundtocontrolthegate,asshowninthediagrambelow.
Inthisexample,wesendthesoundfromtheOSCetc.to
IFX1andprocessitthroughanequalizer.IFX1issentvia
ChaintoIFX2andalsosentviaCtrlBus(FXControlBus)to
1.TheEnvelopeSourceofIFX3:StereoGateissettoFX
Control1.Thisallowsthegattobetriggeredbyasignal
otherthanitsinput(thereverberantsound).
Send1, Send2
Theseparametersenableyoutosetthesendlevelofthe
signalsroutedtoMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2.Thesignal
issentinstereotomastereffectsMFX1andMFX2.Thisis
validwhenBus(BusSelect)isL/RorOff.
IfyouarenotusinganyInsertEffects,useSend1andSend2
oftheP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpageinProgram,
Combination,Sequencer,andSongplaymodestosetthe
MasterEffectsendlevel.
Send1respondstoCC#93andSend2respondsto
CC#91.
Insert Efect = Stereo In Stereo Out
OSC1: Amp1 Pan = L001
OSC2: Amp2 Pan = R127 Left Center Right
Post IFX Pan: CC#8
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
Left Center Right
Left Center Right
OSC1 OSC2
OSC2: Amp2 Pan = R096
Post IFX Pan: CC#8
C064
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC2: Amp2 Pan = R127 Left Center Right
Post IFX Pan: CC#8
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC1 OSC2
Insert Efect = Mono In - Stereo Out
Mono In - Mono Out
IFX2
084: Reverb Hall
IFX3
006: Stereo Gate OSC1&2
Timbre/Track
Bus Select
: IFX1
Chain to
: IFX3
FX Control Bus
: 1
Envelope Source
: FX Ctrl1
Gated Reverb Example
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1)
IFX1
008: St.Graphic
7EQ
Chain to
: IFX2
Effect Guide
244
Controlling the Insert Effects
via MIDI
UsingtheDynamicModulation(Dmod)functionenables
youtocontrolalleffectparametersinrealtimeduring
performancefromthecontrollersoftheKROMEora
connectedMIDIsequencer.YoucanalsocontrolthePan:
CC#8,Send1,andSend2parametersinthesameway.
Program mode
YoucancontroltheparametersontheglobalMIDIchannel
(Global11a).
Combination mode
TheP8:Routing/IFXIFX15pageletsyouspecifythe
controlchannelCh(ControlChannel)forIFX15.Youcan
choosefromCH0116,Gch,orAllR(AllRouted).
Ch0116:Selectthiswhenyouwanttocontroleachinsert
effectfromadifferentchannel.An*symbolwillbe
displayedattherightoftheMIDIchannelCh0116ofthe
timbrethatisroutedtoeachinserteffect.Iftherouted
timbreshavedifferentMIDIchannelsettings,thisparameter
isusedtospecifythechannelthatwillcontroltheinsert
effect.
Gch:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontroltheparameters
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).Thisisacommon
setting.
AllR:Selectthisoptiontocontroltheparametersonallthe
channels(channels116thathavea*mark)thatare
routedtothecorrespondingInsertEffects.
IfyouveselectedadrumprogramforaCombination
modetimbreoraSequencermodetrack,andsetitsBus
(IFX/Output)SelecttoDKit(81(2)d),theMIDI
channelofthattimbre/trackwillbevalidifanyoneof
IFX15issettoAllR,regardlessofthedrumkitsBus
(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)settingorthemenu
commandDrumKitIFXPatchsetting.
Sequencer mode
UseChparametersoftheP8:Routing/IFXIFX1IFX5
pagestosetupthecontrolchannelsforIFX15.Selectan
appropriateoptionfromCh0116andAllRouted.
Ch0116:Selectthiswhenyouwanttocontroleachinsert
effectfromadifferentchannel.An*symbolwillbe
displayedattherightoftheMIDIchannelCh0116ofthe
trackthatisroutedtoeachinserteffect.Iftwoormoretracks
withdifferingMIDIchannelsCh0116arebeingsenttoa
singleinserteffect,thisparameterisusedtospecifytheone
trackthatwillcontroltheinserteffect.
AllR:Selectthisoptiontocontroltheparametersonallthe
channels(channels116thathavea*mark)thatare
routedtothecorrespondingInsertEffects.AllRisatypical
option.Ifyouwishtocontroltheparametersonasingle
channel,youmayselectitfromCh0116.
Note:SinceSequencermodeletsyourecordandplay
exclusivemessagesandedittracksthatincludeSystem
Exclusiveevents,youcanusethemtoswitcheffectsor
modifyeffectparametervaluesduringsongplayback.
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) In/Out
245
Master Effects (MFX1, 2)
In/Out
TheI/OsofMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2arestereoin/
stereoout.Send1andSend2determinethesendleveltothe
MasterEffects.(ForSend1and2,seeRoutingand
Mixer.)
MastereffectswillnotoutputtheDry(unprocessed)signal
specifiedinWet/Dry(P9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1,2page).
OnlytheWet(processed)signalwillbeoutput.Theoutput
signalsfromtheMasterEffectsareroutedtotheL/Rbus
withtheoutputlevelspecifiedbyReturn1andReturn2.
Theseoutputsignalsaremixedwiththeoutputsignalsfrom
thebusspecifiedbyBus(P8:Routing/IFXRoutingpagein
eachmode)L/R,orwiththeoutputsignalsfromthebus
specifiedbyBus(IFX/Output)Select(InsertFXSetup
pageineachmode)L/R,thenroutedtotheMasterEQ.
Selecting000:NoEffectwillmutetheoutput.The
processedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowingways,
accordingtothetypeofeffects001193.
MonoMono Parallel
127: P4EQ//P4EQ171: BPM Dl//BPM Dl
Theseeffectsaretypicallystereoin/stereoout,buttheyhave
aspecialstructure.TheLchannelandRchannelofthe
stereoinputeachhavetheirownindependentmonoeffect.
Eachmonooutputcanthenbepannedtothedesired
positioninthestereofield.Normally,youwillusetheseas
inserteffects,butyoucanalsousethemasmastereffects.
Fordetails,seeMonoMonoParallelEffectsonpage 240.
PressingtheOn/OffbuttonforMFX1and2oftheP9:MFX/
TFX/LFORoutingpageineachmodewilltogglebetween
OnandOff.WhenOffisselected,theoutputsignalswillbe
muted.
SeparatelyfromthesettingofthisOn/Offbutton,MFX1
andMFX2canbeswitchedoffbyreceivingaMIDI
controlchangeCC#94.Value0willturnthemoff,and
value1127willturnthemon.Youcanalsousethe
frontpanelMFXbuttonorEffectGlobalSW(Global0
1b)toturnMFX1and2onandoff.ThisMIDIcontrolis
performedontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
Double-size effects
Reflections)usetwiceasmuchspaceasothereffects.
YoucanuseadoublesizeeffectformastereffectMFX1.If
youveselectedadoublesizeeffect,MFX2wontbe
availableforuse.
Routing
IfyouarenotusinganyInsertEffectsinanymode,the
MasterEffectssendlevelsaredeterminedbytheSend1(to
MFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)parametersspecified
independentlyfortheoscillators(Programmode),timbres
(Combinationmode),tracks(Sequencermode).
Forexample,sinceyoucanadjustthemastereffectsend
levelsforeachtimbre/track,youcanmakesettingssothat
reverbisapplieddeeplytothepiano,lightlytothestrings,
andnotatalltothebass.
Ifyoureusinginserteffects,usethepostIFXSend1and
Send2toadjustthesendamounts.
Program mode
UsetheSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)parameters
oftheP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpage,ortheSend1and
Send2parametersoftheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetup
pageforthepostIFX15signals,tosettheMasterEffect
sendlevel.
IfyouhavesetBus(IFX/Output)SelecttoL/RorOff,Send1
(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)oftheRoutingpageare
effective.Theseparameterscanbesetforoscillators1and2
individually.
IfyouhavesetBus(IFX/Output)SelecttoIFX15,Send1
andSend2oftheInsertFXpageforthepostP8:Routing/
IFXIFX15signalsareeffective.IfyouareusingtheInsert
Effectsinchain(series),theSend1andSend2parameters
forthepostIFX(lastIFX)areeffective.
Send1respondstoCC#93andSend2respondstoCC#91
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).Atthistime,
theactualsendlevelusesthevalueoftheSend1and2
settingsforOscillators1and2,multipliedbytheSend1
and2valuesreceivedviaMIDI.
IfyouhaveselectedDrumsforOscillatorMode(Prog1
1a)ofaProgram,theUseDKitSettingbox(Prog81b)
Mono In - Mono Out
Efect
Efect
Efect +
Efect +
Wet
Mono In/Out Efect
Mono In/Out Efect Pan
Pan
Effect Guide
246
becomesavailable.Ifyoucheckthisbox,Send1andSend2
levelsforeachkeyoftheselectedDrumkitbecomeeffective.
IfBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)issettoL/RorOff
foradruminstrumentkey,Send1(toMFX1)and
Send2(toMFX2)(Global55b)becomeeffective.
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,thepostIFX15
Send1andSend2(Prog85a)becomeeffective.
Ifthisisunchecked,Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)
(Prog81d),andthepostIFX15Send1andSend2(Prog8
2a)willbevalidforalldruminstruments,inthesameway
aswhenOscillatorModeisSingleorDouble.
UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)(P8:Routing
page)fortimbres(Combination)andtracks(Sequencer)to
settheSend1and2levelsforeachtimbreandtrack.Aswith
Programmode,ifBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/Ror
Off,Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)become
effective.
TheactuallevelsusetheseSend1and2levelvalues,
multipliedbythesendlevelvaluesofoscillators1and2of
theProgP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpage.
Send level
ForexampleifyousettheprogramsOSC1Send1(toMFX1)
to127,Send2(toMFX2)to064,OSC2Send1(toMFX1)to
064,Send2(toMFX2)to127,andthecombinationsSend1
(toMFX1)to064andSend2(toMFX2)to127,theactual
sendlevelsofthecombinationwillbeasfollows.
OSC1Send1=127(100%)*064(50%)=064(50%)
OSC1Send2=064(50%)*127(100%)=064(50%)
OSC2Send1=064(50%)*064(50%)=032(25%)
OSC2Send2=127(100%)*127(100%)=127(100%)
IfIFX15isselectedforBus(IFX/Output)Select,usethe
Send1andSend2parametersforthepostIFXsignals.
CC#91.IfSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(MFX2)foreach
timbre/trackareeffective,theparameterwillbe
controlledontheMIDIchannelssetforthe
correspondingtimbresandtracks.IftheSend1and
Send2parametersforthepostIFX15signalsare
effective,theycanbecontrolledontheMIDIchannels
assignedtoIFX15.
AnexampleforCombinationmodeisgivenbelow.Inthe
followingdiagram,Bus(IFX/Output)Selectissetsothat
Timbre1isroutedtoIFX1,Timbre2toIFX2,Timbres3and
4toIFX3,Timbres516toL/R.
Inthiscase,useSend1andSend2forthepostIFX1(001:
StereoCompressor)signaltosetthesendleveloftheTimbre
1routedtotheMasterEffect.(Inthisexampletheyaresetto
032and127.)Inthesameway,useSend1andSend2forthe
postIFX2signaltosetthesendlevelsofTimbres2,anduse
theSend1andSend2parametersforthepostIFX3signalto
setthesendlevelsofTimbres3and4.ForTimbres58,the
settingsofSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)willbe
effective(forTimbres916,usetheRouting1T0916page).
(Atthistime,theactualsendlevelsusetheseSend1and2
valuesmultipliedbytheSend1and2settingsforProgram
oscillators1and2.)
BusSelectDKitisvalidifyouveselectedadrumtrackfor
aTimbre(Combination)orTrack(Sequencer).
IfyouselectDKit,theBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global5
5b)settingsforeachkeybecomeeffective,andeachdrum
instrumentsoundwillberoutedtothecorrespondingbuses.
Atthistime,theactualsendlevelsusetheseSend1and2
values,multipliedbytheSend1and2settingsforeach
Drumkitkey.
IfadrumkitsBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff,
thelevelswillbetheseSend1and2settingsmultipliedby
thesendlevelsyouspecifyinProgP8:Routing/IFX
RoutingpageforOSC1Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
MFX2)(Prog81d),justasinothercases(OscillatorMode
SingleorDouble).
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,useSend1and
Send2forthepostIFXsignal.
InMediamode,effectswillusethesettingsofthemode
inwhichyoupreviouslywere.
Mixer
Theinputlevelstothemastereffectsaredeterminedbythe
sendlevels.IntheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpageofeach
mode,youcanspecifytheoutputlevelandchaining(series
connection)betweenthetwomastereffects.
1. Return1, Return2
Theseadjusttheamountofsignalthatisreturnedfromthe
mastereffectsMFX1andMFX2outputstotheL/Rbus.
TheleftsidevalueoftheWet/DryparameterfortheMFX1
or2effectistheoutputlevelofthatmastereffect.(Inother
wordsifWet/Dryis25:75,theoutputlevelis75%.Itis100%
ifWet,and0%ifDry.)TheWet/Dryvaluemultipliedbythe
Return1orReturn2valueissenttotheL/Rbusandmixed
withtheP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpageBus(IFX/Output)
SelectL/RorInsertFXSetuppageBusL/Routput.
Forexample,withMFX1Wet/Drysetto50:50(50%)and
Return1setto64(50%),theresultanteffectlevelwillbe25%.
2
3
4
1
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) Controlling the Master Effects via MIDI
247
Theeffectlevelismaximum(100%)whenWet/Dryissetto
WetandReturn1issetto127.
2. Chain check box
PressthisboxtochainMFX1andMFX2toeachother.
Intheexampleshownintheprecedingpage,theoutputof
MFX1:029:StereoChorusisaddedtotheinputofMFX2:084:
ReverbHall.
3. Chain Direction
IfyouhavecheckedtheChainbox,youcansetthedirection
oftheconnectionhere.Youcanalsovisuallyconfirmthe
directiononthedisplay.
4. Chain Level
Thisparameterdeterminesthelevelofsignalsroutedfrom
oneMFXtotheotherMFXinachainconnection.
Controlling the Master Effects
via MIDI
Inthesamewayasforinserteffects,parametersofthe
mastereffectscanalsobecontrolledinrealtimeviaDynamic
Modulation(Dmod)fromtheKROMEscontrollersoran
externalMIDIdeviceduringperformanceorfromthe
sequencer.
Program mode
EffectparametersarecontrolledontheglobalMIDI
channel(Global11a).
InCombinationandSequencermodes,thecontrolchannel
forMFX1andMFX2arespecifiedbytheCh(Control
Channel)settingintheMFX1and2pages.Youcanchoose
Ch0116orGch.
Ch0116:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontrolthe
parametersforeachMasterEffectondifferentchannels.
Gch:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontroltheparameters
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).Thisisthe
normalsetting.
Note:SinceSequencermodeletsyourecordandplay
exclusivemessagesandedittracksthatincludeSystem
Exclusiveevents,youcanusethemtoswitcheffectsor
modifyeffectparametervaluesduringsongplayback.
Effect Guide
248
Total Effect (TFX)
In/Out
ThetotaleffectTFXisstereoinandstereoout.TheDry
(unprocessed)sideoftheWet/Dryparametersendsthe
stereoinputsounddirectlytothestereooutput.Thewayin
whichtheWet(processed)sideisoutputdependsonthe
typeofeffect,asfollows.
MonoMono Parallel
127: P4EQ // P4EQ 171: BPM Dl // BPM Dl
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMonoMonoParallel
Effectsonpage 240.
Ifyouselect000:NoEffect,thestereoinputwillbepassedto
thestereooutputwithoutanyprocessing.
Youcanswitchtheeffectson/offusingtheMFX1or2ON/
OFFbuttonsortheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingsettingsin
eachmode.Whenoff,theeffectwillbebypassed.Thestereo
inputwillbepassedtothestereooutputwithoutany
processing,justasif000:NoEffectisselected.
SeparatelyfromthisOn/Offbutton,MIDIcontrol
changeCC#95canbereceivedtoturnTFXoff.Acontrol
changevalueof0turnsthemoff,andavalueof1127
restoresthemtothepriorsetting.Youcanalsousethe
frontpanelTFXbuttonorEffectGlobalSW(Global0
1b)toturnoffTFXinthesameway.Thisiscontrolled
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
Double-size effects
Reflections)cantbeusedforthetotaleffect.
Routing
ThetotaleffectTFXiaplacedimmediatelybeforethe
AUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandRoutputs.Effect(TFX)is
availableinallmodes.
IftheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingforanoscillator
(Programmode),timbre(Combinationmode),track
(Sequencermode),orthepostinsertBus(IFX/Output)
SelectissettoL/R,thesignalwillbeoutputfromthe
AUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandRjacks.
ThesoundfromMFX1and2isroutedthroughTFX,and
thenoutputtoAUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandR.
Mixer
MASTER (Master Volume)
Thissetsthelevelofthefinaloutputafterpassingthrough
thetotaleffect.
Using MIDI to control the Total
Effect
InthesamewayasforInsertandMasterEffects,theTotal
EffectcanbecontrolledinrealtimeviaDynamicModulation
(Dmod).YoucanuseeitherthebuiltinKROMEscontrollers
oranexternalMIDIdevice,duringliveperformanceorfrom
asequencer.
Program mode
EffectparametersarecontrolledontheglobalMIDI
channel(Global11a).
InCombinationandSequencermodes,thecontrolchannel
forTFXisspecifiedbytheCh(ControlChannel)settingin
theTFXpage.YoucanchooseCh0116orGch.
Ch0116:Choosefromthesesettingsifyouwanttocontrol
eachtotaleffectonaseparatechannel.
Gch:Choosethissettingifyouwanttocontrolthetotal
effectontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
Note:InSequencermode,youcanrecordandplayback
exclusivemessages,andedittracksthatincludeSystem
Exclusiveevents.Thisletsyouswitcheffectsorvarythe
valueofeffectparameterswhileasongplays.
Outputs
Main Outputs
ThemainL/MONOandRoutputsoftheKROMEareoutput
fromtheAUDIOOUTPUTL/MONO,Rjacks,andthe
headphonejack.
Mono In - Mono Out
Efect
Efect
Efect +
Efect +
Wet
Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams Main Outputs
249
Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams
Program mode
P
a
n

O
s
c
i
l
l
a
t
o
r

1
S
e
n
d
1
S
e
l
e
c
t
f
r
o
m
:
L
/
R

I
F
X
1
I
F
X
2
I
F
X
2

B
u
s
I
F
X
2
I
F
X
1

B
u
s
I
F
X
1
C
h
a
i
n

&

C
h
a
i
n

t
o
M
F
X
2
M
F
X
1
R
e
t
u
r
n
1

/

2
A
U
D
I
O

O
U
T
P
U
T
L
/
M
o
n
o
,

R
I
F
X
4

B
u
s
I
F
X
4
I
F
X
3

B
u
s
I
F
X
3
I
F
X
5
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

O
f

O
s
c
i
l
l
a
t
o
r

2
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
s
t
e
r
e
o
I
n
s
e
r
t

E
f
e
c
t
s
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
P
a
n
:

C
C
#
8
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
S
e
l
e
c
t
f
r
o
m
:
L
/
R
S
e
n
d
2
s
t
e
r
e
o
M
a
s
t
e
r

E
f
e
c
t
s
L
/
R
B
u
s
s
t
e
r
e
o
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

I
F
X
1
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
C
h
a
i
n

E
f
e
c
t

/

M
i
x
e
r

B
l
o
c
k

D
i
a
g
r
a
m

i
n

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

M
o
d
e
P
8
:

R
o
u
t
i
n
g
/
I
F
X
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
S
e
n
d
1

/

2
P
9
:

M
F
X
/
T
F
X
/
L
F
O
D
r
u
m
T
r
a
c
k
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

L
/
R
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

L
/
R
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
T
F
X
M
a
s
t
e
r

L
e
v
e
l
I
F
X
3

I
F
X
4

I
F
X
5
O
f
s
t
e
r
e
o
T
o
t
a
l

E
f
e
c
t
O
f
F
X
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
B
u
s
m
o
n
o
x
2
I
F
X
5

B
u
s
Effect Guide
250
Combination mode, Sequencer mode
P
a
n
T
i
m
b
r
e
/
T
r
a
c
k

1
S
e
n
d
1
S
e
l
e
c
t
f
r
o
m
:
L
/
R

I
F
X
1
I
F
X
2
I
F
X
2

B
u
s
I
F
X
2
I
F
X
1

B
u
s
I
F
X
1
C
h
a
i
n

&

C
h
a
i
n

t
o
M
F
X
2
M
F
X
1
R
e
t
u
r
n
1

/

2
A
U
D
I
O

O
U
T
P
U
T
L
/
M
o
n
o
,

R
I
F
X
4

B
u
s
I
F
X
4
I
F
X
3

B
u
s
I
F
X
3
I
F
X
5

B
u
s
I
F
X
5
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

O
f
T
i
m
b
r
e
/
T
r
a
c
k

2
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
s
t
e
r
e
o
I
n
s
e
r
t

E
f
e
c
t
s
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
P
a
n
(
C
C
#
8
)
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
S
e
l
e
c
t
f
r
o
m
:
L
/
R
S
e
n
d
2
s
t
e
r
e
o
M
a
s
t
e
r

E
f
e
c
t
s
L
/
R
B
u
s
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
C
h
a
i
n

E
f
e
c
t

/

M
i
x
e
r

B
l
o
c
k

D
i
a
g
r
a
m

i
n

C
o
m
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
/
S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

M
o
d
e
P
8
:

R
o
u
t
i
n
g
/
I
F
X
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
S
e
n
d
1

/

2
P
9
:

M
F
X
/
T
F
X
/
L
F
O
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

L
/
R
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
T
F
X
M
a
s
t
e
r

L
e
v
e
l
I
F
X
3

I
F
X
4

I
F
X
5
O
f
s
t
e
r
e
o
T
o
t
a
l

E
f
e
c
t
O
f
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

L
/
R
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

I
F
X
1
T
i
m
b
r
e
/
T
r
a
c
k

3
T
i
m
b
r
e
/
T
r
a
c
k

4
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

I
F
X
4
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

O
f
T
i
m
b
r
e
/
T
r
a
c
k

1
6
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=
L
/
R
F
X
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
B
u
s
m
o
n
o
x
2
Dynamics (Dynamic) 000: No Effect
251
Dynamics (Dynamic)
000: No Effect
Selectthisoptionwhenyoudonotuseanyeffects.The
InsertEffect/TotalEffectsectionoutputsunprocessed
signalsandtheMasterEffectsectionmutestheoutput.
001: Stereo Compressor
Thiseffectcompressestheinputsignaltoregulatethelevel
andgiveapunchyeffect.Itisusefulforguitar,piano,and
drumsounds.Thisisastereocompressor.Youcanlinkleft
andrightchannels,oruseeachchannelseparately.
a: Envelope Select
Thisparameterselectswhethertheleftandrightchannels
arelinkedtocontrolbothsignalssimultaneously,orwhether
eachchanneliscontrolledindependently.
b: Sensitivity
g: Output Level (Level)
TheSensitivityparametersetsthesensitivityofthe
compressor.Ifthisparameterissettoahighervalue,lower
levelsoundswillbeboosted.WithahigherSensitivity,the
overallvolumelevelishigher.Toadjustthefinalvolume
level,usetheOutputLevelparameter.
c: Attack
Thisparametercontrolstheattacklevel.
002: Red Comp
Whenplayingchordsonanelectricpianoorsimilar
instrument,itshelpfultouseacompressortokeepeach
notesmoothandwellbalanced.Inadditiontoadistinctive
percussiveaccent,itwillalsoprovidealongsustain.This
effectmodelsapopularcompressorwithacleansound
thatsperfectforpopandfunkmusic.
a
Envelope
Select
L/R Mix,
L/R Individ-
ually
Determines whether the left and
right channels are linked or used
separately
b Sensitivity 1...100 Sets the sensitivity
c Attack 1...100 Sets the attack level
d EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
e
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Selects the cutoff frequency (low
or mid-low) of the low-range
equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Selects the cutoff frequency
(high or mid-high) of the high-
range equalizer
f
Pre LEQ Gain
[dB]
15.0...+15.0 Sets the gain of the Low EQ
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
15.0...+15.0 Sets the gain of the High EQ
g
Output Level 0...100
Sets the output level of the
compressor
Src Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source
for the compressor output level
Amt 100...+100
Sets the modulation amount for
the compressor output level
h
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance between the
effect and the dry input
Src Off...Tempo
Selects a modulation source for
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
LEQ HEQ
Compressor
Compressor
Envelope Select
Output Level
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
a Sensitivity 1...100 Sets the sensitivity p.251
b Attack 1...100 Sets the attack level p.251
c
Level 0...100
compressor p.251
Src Off...Tempo
for Level
Amt 100...+100
Level
d
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
for Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Sensitivity=100
Sensitivity=40
Dry
Wet
Time
Level
Compressor - Sensitivity
L
o
u
d
e
r

Dry
Wet
Time
Level
Attack=80
Attack=20
Compressor - Attack
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Envelope - Control
Output Level
Compressor
252
003: Stereo Limiter
TheLimiterregulatestheinputsignallevel.Itissimilarto
theCompressor,exceptthattheLimitercompressesonly
signalsthatexceedthespecifiedleveltolowerunnecessary
peaksignals.TheLimiterappliesapeakingtypeEQtothe
triggersignal(whichcontrolsthedegreeoftheLimiter
effect),allowingyoutosetanybandwidthtobecovered.
Thiseffectisastereolimiter.Youcanlinkleftandright
channels,oruseeachchannelindividually.
a: Envelope Source
ByselectingFXControl1orFXControl2youcanusethe
signalofFXControlBus1or2asthetriggersignal.
Forinstance,youmightuseadifferent,unprocessedsound
asthetrigger,orapplyalimitertriggeredbyadifferent
timbre(Combination)ortrack(Sequence).Formore
information,pleaseseeFXControlBusesonpage 238.
b: Envelope Select
WhenL/RMixisselectedforthisparameter,theleftand
rightchannelsarelinkedtocontroltheLimiterusingthe
mixedsignal.IfLOnly(orROnly)isselected,theleftand
rightchannelsarelinked,andtheLimiteriscontrolledvia
onlytheleft(orright)channel.
WithL/Rindividually,theleftandrightchannelscontrolthe
Limiterindividually.
c: Ratio
d: Threshold [dB]
f: Gain Adjust [dB]
ThisparametersetsthesignalcompressionRatio.
Compressionisappliedonlywhenthesignallevelexceeds
theThresholdvalue.
AdjusttheoutputlevelusingtheGainAdjustparameter,
sincecompressioncausestheentireleveltobereduced.
e: Attack
e: Release
Theseparameterssettheattacktimeandreleasetime.A
higherattacktimewillcausethecompressiontobeapplied
moreslowly.
g: Trigger Monitor
SettingthisparameterOnwillcausethetriggersignaltobe
output,insteadoftheeffectsound.Usethisparameterto
checkthetriggersignalwithEQapplied.Usually,setthisto
Off.
g: Side PEQ Insert
h: Side PEQ Cutoff [Hz]
h: Q
h: Gain [dB]
TheseparametersareusedtosettheEQappliedtothe
triggersignal.
TheLimiterdetermineswhetherthecompressionisapplied
ornot,basedonthepostEQtriggersignal.Settingthe
a
Envelope
Source
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Selects the trigger source to use:
the input signal, FX Control Bus
1, or FX Control Bus 2 p.252
FX Ctrl Trim 0...100
Sets the trigger input level from
FX Control Bus 1/2
b
Envelope
Select
L/R Mix,
L Only, R
Only, L/R
Individually
Selects from linking both
channels, controlling only from
left channel, only from the right
channel, or controlling each
channel individually p.252
c Ratio
1.0 : 1
50.0 : 1,
Inf : 1
Sets the signal compression ratio
p.252
d
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
Sets the level above which the
compressor is applied p.252
e
Attack 1...100 Sets the attack time p.252
Release 1...100 Sets the release time p.252
f
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Sets the output gain p.252
Src Off...Tempo
for the output gain
Amt 63...+63
Sets the modulation amount of
the output gain
g
Side PEQ
Insert
Off, On
Toggles between on/off of the
trigger signals EQ p.252
Trigger
Monitor
Off, On
Switches between effect output
monitor and trigger signal
monitor p.252
h
Side PEQ
Cutoff [Hz]
20...12.00k
Sets the EQ center frequency for
the trigger signal p.252
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the EQ bandwidth for the
trigger signal p.252
Gain [dB] 18.0...+18.0
Sets the EQ gain for the trigger
signal p.252
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Limiter
Envelope Source
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Trigger Monitor
+
Envelope Select
Input Level
Output Level
Threshold
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Ration=Inf : 1
Louder
L
o
u
d
e
r

Time
Level
Threshold
Ratio=Inf : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Dry Ratio=1.0 : 1
Limiter - Threshold / Ratio
Threshold
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack=1
Release=1
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack=100
Release=100
Dry
Wet
Wet
Release
Attack
Limiter - Attack / Release
Dynamics (Dynamic) 004: Multiband Limiter
253
equalizerallowsyoutosettheLimitertorespondtoany
frequencyband.
004: Multiband Limiter
ThiseffectappliestheLimitertothelowrange,midrange,
andhighrangeoftheinputsignal.Youcancontrol
dynamicsforeachrangetoadjustthesoundpressureofthe
lowrange,midrange,andhighrangeinadifferentway
fromtheEQ.
e: Low Offset [dB]
f: Mid Offset [dB]
g: High Offset [dB]
Theseparameterssetthegainofthetriggersignal.
Forexample,ifyoudonotwanttoapplycompressiontothe
highrange,reducetheHighOffsetvaluedownbelowthe
Thresholdlevel.Inthisway,thehighrangelimiterwillnot
respond,andcompressionwillnotbeapplied.
005: St.MasteringLimtr (Stereo
Mastering Limiter)
Thisisastereolimiterthatisoptimizedformasteringsongs.
006: Stereo Gate
Thiseffectmutestheinputsignalwhenitfallsbelowa
specifiedlevel.Youcanalsoinverttheon/offstatusofthe
gate,orusenoteon/offmessagestoturnthegateon/off
directly.
a Ratio
1.0 : 1...50.0 : 1,
Inf : 1
p.252
b
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
c Attack 1...100 Sets the attack time p.252
d Release 1...100 Sets the release time p.252
e
Low Offset
[dB]
40...0
Gain of the low-range trigger
signal p.253
f
Mid Offset
[dB]
40...0
Gain of the mid-range trigger
signal p.253
g
High Offset
[dB]
40...0
Gain of the high-range trigger
signal p.253
h
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Src Off...Tempo
for the output gain
Amt 63...+63
the output gain
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Gain Adjust
Mid Ofset
Low Ofset
High Ofset
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Low
Mid
High
Band-Pass Filters
+ Limiter
Limiter
Limiter
a
Threshold
[dB]
30.0...0.0
b
Out Ceiling
[dB]
30.0...0.0 Sets the output gain
c
Release
[msec]
0.50...1000.0 Sets the release time p.252
d
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Envelope
Source
D-mod,
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Selects the source to control the
gate: D-mod control, or use the
input signal or FX Control Bus 1
or 2 as a trigger
p.252
Fx Ctrl Trim 0...100
Sets the trigger input level from
FX Control Bus 1/2
b
Envelope
Select
L/R Mix,
L Only,
R Only
Selects the control signal: left
and right linked, left only, or right
only p.252
Src Off...Tempo
Selects the source that will
control the gate when Envelope
Src = D-mod
c
Threshold 0...100
Sets the level at which gating is
applied p.254
Polarity +,
Switches the polarity of gating
p.254
d
Attack 1...100 Sets the attack time p.254
e
Delay Time
[msec]
0...100
Sets the delay time for the gate
input p.254
f
Side PEQ
Insert
Off, On
Switches the trigger signal
equalizer on/off p.252
Trigger
Monitor
Off, On
Switches between monitoring
the effect output and the trigger
signal p.252
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Limiter
Out Ceiling
Out Ceiling
Envelope - Control +
Left
Right
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Envelope Source
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Trigger Monitor
+
Envelope Select
Gate Delay
Gate Delay
D
-mod
254
c: Threshold
d: Attack
d: Release
Thresholdspecifiesthelevelatwhichgatingoccurswhen
EnvelopeSelectissettoL/RMix,LOnly,orROnly.
AttackandReleasespecifytheattacktimeandreleasetime
ofthegate.
c: Polarity
Thisinvertsthepolarityofthegateon/offoperation.With
thesetting,thegatewillclosewhentheinputsignal
exceedsthespecifiedlevel.Thedirectioninwhichthe
modulationsourceopensorclosesthegatewillalsobe
reversed.
e: Delay Time [msec]
Thissetsthedelaytimefortheinputtothegate.Whenusing
shorterAttackTimesettings,youcanlengthentheDelay
Timesothatthesoundisinputafterthegateopens.
g
Side PEQ
Cutoff [Hz]
20...12.00k
Sets the center frequency of the
equalizer for the trigger signal
p.252
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the bandwidth of the
equalizer for the trigger signal
p.252
Gain [dB] 18.0...+18.0
Sets the gain of the equalizer for
the trigger signal p.252
h
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Input Level
Output Level
Threshold
Louder
L
o
u
d
e
r

Threshold
Attack=1
Release=1
Attack=100
Release=100
Dry
Wet
Wet
Attack Release
Gate - Attack / Release
Gate - Threshold
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) 007: St.Parametric4EQ (Stereo Parametric 4-Band EQ)
255
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter)
007: St.Parametric4EQ (Stereo
Parametric 4-Band EQ)
Thisisastereo4bandparametricequalizer.Youcanselect
peakingtypeorshelvingtypeforBand1and4.Thegainof
Band2canbecontrolledbydynamicmodulation.
b: Band1 Type
c: Band4 Type
SelectsafiltertypeforBand1and4.
e, f, g, h: Q
Theseparameterssetthebandwidthofeachequalizer.The
higherthevalue,thenarrowerthebandbecomes.
d: Band2 Dynamic Gain Src
d: Amt [dB]
YoucancontrolthegainofBand2usingthemodulation
source.
008: St. Graphic 7EQ (Stereo
Graphic 7-Band EQ)
Thisisastereo7bandgraphicequalizer.Thebargraphof
thegainsettingforeachbandgivesyouaclear,visualidea
offrequencyresponses.Youcanselectacenterfrequency
settingforeachbandfromtwelvetypes,accordingtothe
sound.
a: Type
Thisparameterselectsacombinationofcenterfrequencies
foreachband.Thecenterfrequencyofeachbandisshown
intherightofthescreen.
a Trim 0...100 Sets the input level
b Band1 Type
Peaking,
Shelving-Low
Selects the type of Band 1
p.255
c Band4 Type
Peaking,
Shelving-
High
Selects the type of Band 4
p.255
d
Band2
Dynamic
Gain Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source of
the Band 2 gain p.255
Amt [dB] 18.0...+18.0
Band 2 gain p.255
e
Band1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center frequency of
Band 1
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the bandwidth of Band 1
p.255
Gain [dB] 18.0...+18.0 Sets the gain of Band 1
f
Band2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...10.00k
Band 2
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
g
Band3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Band 3
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
h
Band4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Band 4
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4
PEQ PEQ PEQ PEQ
LEQ
LEQ
HEQ
HEQ
PEQ PEQ PEQ PEQ
Trim
Trim
D
-mod
3dB
3dB
Band1 Cutof Band4 Cutof
0dB
+Gain
Gain
Band1 Type=Peaking
Band1 Type=Shelving Low
Band4 Type=Peaking
Band4 Type=Shelving High
Parametric 4EQ - Band1, Band4 Type
a Type
1:Wide 1,
2:Wide 2,
3:Wide 3,
4:Half Wide 1,
5:Half Wide 2,
6:Half Wide 3,
7:Low,
8:Wide Low,
9:Mid,
10:Wide Mid,
11:High,
12:Wide High
Selects a combination of center
frequencies for each band p.255
b Trim 0...100 Sets the input level
c Band1 [dB] 18.0...+18.0 Sets the gain of Band 1
d Band2 [dB] 18.0...+18.0 Sets the gain of Band 2
e Band3 [dB] 18.0...+18.0 Sets the gain of Band 3
f Band4 [dB] 18.0...+18.0 Sets the gain of Band 4
g Band5 [dB] 18.0...+18.0 Sets the gain of Band 5
h Band6 [dB] 18.0...+18.0 Sets the gain of Band 6
i Band7 [dB] 18.0...+18.0 Sets the gain of Band 7
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Band2 Cutof
Band2 Cutof
0dB
+6dB
+15dB
Band2 Gain[dB]= +6.0
Band2 Gain Mod Amount[dB]= +9.0
D
-mod
0dB
+6dB
9dB
Band2 Gain[dB]= +6.0
Band2 Gain Mod Amount[dB]= 15.0
D
-mod
Parametric 4EQ - Band2 Gain Mod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4
Trim
Trim
Band5 Band6 Band7
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7
256
Youcanconfigurea21BandGraphicEQrangingfrom80
Hzto18kHzifyouroutethreeGraphic7BandEQeffectsin
series,withasettingof7:Low,9:Mid,and11:Highforeach
EQ.
009: St.Exciter/Enhncr (Stereo
Exciter/Enhancer)
ThiseffectisacombinationoftheExciter,whichaddsa
punchtothesoundandtheEnhancer,whichaddsspread
andpresence.
a: Exciter Blend
Thisparametersetsthedepth(intensity)oftheExcitereffect.
Positivevaluesgiveafrequencypattern(tobeemphasized)
differentfromnegativevalues.
b: Emphasis Frequency
Thisparametersetsthefrequencytobeemphasized.Higher
valueswillemphasizelowerfrequencies.
c: Enhancer Delay L [msec]
d: Enhancer Delay R [msec]
TheseparameterssetthedelaytimefortheEnhancerleft
andrightchannel.Specifyingaslightlydifferentdelaytime
fortheleftandrightchannelwilladdastereoimage,depth,
andwidthtothesound.
010: Stereo Isolator
Thisisastereoeffectthatseparatestheinputsignalintolow,
mid,andhighfrequencybands,andcontrolsthevolumeof
eachbandindependently.Forexampleyoucanseparately
boostorcutthekick,snare,andhihatsoundsfromadrum
signalinrealtime.
a
Exciter Blend 100...+100
Sets the intensity (depth) of the
Exciter effect p.256
Src Off...Tempo
the Exciter intensity
Amt 100...+100
the Exciter intensity
b
Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
Sets the frequency to be empha-
sized p.256
Src Off...Tempo
the frequency to be emphasized
Amt 70...+70
Sets the amount of modulation
of the frequency to be empha-
sized
c
Enhancer
Delay L
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time for the
Enhancer left channel p.256
d
Enhancer
Delay R
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time for the
Enhancer right channel p.256
e
Enhancer
Depth
0...100
Sets the determines to what
degree the Enhancer effect is
applied
Src Off...Tempo
the Enhancer width
Amt 100...+100
the Enhancer width
f EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the 2-band EQ input level
g
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
range equalizer
h
Pre LEQ Gain
[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
EQ Trim
Delay
Delay
Depth
D
-mod
Exciter
Exciter
Enhancer
b Low/Mid [Hz] 100...500
Sets the frequency at which the
low and mid bands are divided
c
Mid/High
[Hz]
2000...6000
mid and high bands are divided
d
Low Gain [dB]
Inf,
59...+12
Sets the low-frequency gain
Src Off...Tempo
modulate low-frequency gain
Amt 72...+72
Sets the amount by which the
low-frequency gain will be
modulated
e
Mid Gain [dB]
Inf,
59...+12
Sets the mid-frequency gain
Src Off...Tempo
for mid-frequency gain
Amt 72...+72
mid-frequency gain will be
modulated
f
High Gain
[dB]
Inf,
59...+12
Sets the high-frequency gain
Src Off...Tempo
for high-frequency gain
Amt 72...+72
high-frequency gain will be
modulated
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
D
-mod
D
-mod
D
-mod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Trim
Isolator
Low
Mid
High
Trim
Low
Mid
High
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) 011: St. Wah/Auto Wah (Stereo Wah/Auto Wah)
257
011: St. Wah/Auto Wah (Stereo
Wah/Auto Wah)
Thisstereowaheffectallowsyoutocreatesoundsfrom
vintagewahpedalsimulationtoautowahsimulation,and
muchbroaderrangesettings.
a: Frequency Bottom
a: Frequency Top
Thesweepwidthanddirectionofthewahfilterare
determinedbytheFrequencyTopandFrequencyBottom
settings.
b: Sweep Mode
Thisparameterchangesthewahcontrolmode.Setting
SweepModetoAutowillselectanautowahthatsweeps
accordingtoenvelopechangesintheinputsignallevel.
Autowahisfrequentlyusedforfunkguitarpartsandclav
sounds.
WhenSweepModeissettoDmod,youcancontrolthe
filterdirectlyviathemodulationsourceinthesamewayasa
wahpedal.
WhenSweepModeissettoLFO,theeffectusesLFOto
sweepincycle.
c: Envelope Sens
Thisparametersetsthesensitivityofautowah.Increasethe
valueiftheinputsignalistoolowtosweep.Reducethe
valueiftheinputsignalissohighthatthefilterisstopped
temporarily.
c: Envelope Shape
Thisparameterdeterminesthesweepcurveforautowah.
d: LFO Frequency [Hz]
e: MIDI Sync
WhenMIDISync=Off,theLFOspeedusestheLFO
Frequencyparametersetting.WhenMIDISync=On,the
LFOspeedfollowstheBPM,BaseNote,andTimessettings.
e: BPM
e: Base Note
e: Times
OnecycleofLFOsweepisobtainedbymultiplyingthe
lengthofanote(,)(selectedforBaseNote,inrelationto
thetempospecifiedinBPM,ortheMIDIClocktempoif
BPMissettoMIDI)bythenumberspecifiedintheTimes
parameter.
f: LFO Type
f: Common LFO Offset [deg]
IfTypeissettoCommon1orCommon2,modulationwill
beappliedusingtheCommonFXLFOratherthantheLFO
withintheeffectitself.SincethisletsyouusethesameLFO
formultipleeffects,itsusefulwhenyouwanttoapply
varioustypesofmodulationinsynchronization.
a
Frequency
Bottom
0...100
Sets the lower limit of the wah
center frequency p.257
Frequency
Top
0...100
Sets the upper limit of the wah
b
Sweep Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
Selects the control from auto-
wah, modulation source, and
LFO p.257
Src Off...Tempo
for the wah when Sweep
Mode=D-mod
Response 0...100
Sets the response speed when
Sweep Mode = Auto or D-mod
c
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Sets the sensitivity of auto-wah
p.257
Envelope
Shape
100...+100
Sets the sweep curve of auto-
wah p.257
d
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00 Sets the speed of the LFO p.257
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
e
MIDI Sync Off, On
When this is on, the LFO speed is
set by BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of Frequency
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the system tempo;
40300 sets the tempo manually
for this individual effect p.257
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of notes that
specify the LFO speed p.257
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of notes that
f
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Selects either (individual) LFO,
Common FX LFO1, or Common
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase offset when Type
= Common 1 or Common 2
p.257
g
Resonance 0...100 Sets the resonance amount
Low Pass
Filter
Off, On
Switches the wah low pass filter
on and off
h
Sets the output level of the effect
sound
Src Off...Tempo
that will control the effect output
level
Amt 100...+100
the effect output level
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
D
-mod
Envelope Sens
Envelope Shape
Response
Wet / Dry
Wah
Sweep Mode
D-mod
Auto
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
LFO
Wah
+
Max
D
-mod
Frequency
Bottom=25
Top=75
H
i
g
h
e
r
Max Zero
Higher D
-mod
Frequency
Bottom=60
Top=30
H
i
g
h
e
r
Zero
Higher
Frequency
Bottom=25
Top=75
H
i
g
h
e
r
Frequency
Bottom=75
Top=25
H
i
g
h
e
r
Sweep Mode=Auto
Envelope Envelope Time
Wah
Woo Woo
Woo
Envelope
Wah Wah
Time
Woo
Woo
Wah
Wah
Sweep Mode=D-mod
Time
Level
Envelope
value = 0...100
value = 0...+100
Envelope Shape
258
CommonLFOOffsetspecifiesthephasedifferencerelative
totheCommonFXLFO.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
CommonFXLFOsonpage 237.
012: St. Vintage Wah (Stereo
Vintage/Custom Wah)
Thiseffectsimulatesthetonalcharacterofavintagewah
pedal.Youcancustomizethetoneandrangesettings.
a: Shape
Thisparameterspecifiesthesweepcurveofthewah.It
appliestoallcontrolviaautowah,modulationsource,and
LFO,andletsyouadjustsubtlenuancesofthewaheffect.
a: Mode
b: Frequency Bottom
b: Frequency Top
c: Resonance Bottom
c: Resonance Top
IfMode=Preset,thissimulatesavintagewahpedal.Inthis
case,internallyfixedvaluesareusedforFrequencyBottom/
TopandResonanceBottom/Top,andthesesettingswillbe
ignored.ThesettingsforFrequencyBottom/Topand
ResonanceBottom/ToparevalidifMode=Custom.
013: VOX Wah
ThismodelsthelegendaryVOXV847andV848Clyde
McCoywahpedals.Itsdistinctivetone,soundingasthough
itwerewrungfromthethroat,madethispedalafavoriteof
manypromusicians.
a
Mode
Preset,
Custom
Selects either preset or custom
settings p.258
Shape 100...+100
Sets the curve of the sweep
p.258
Invert Off, On Inverts the polarity of the sweep
b
Frequency
Bottom
0...100
center frequency when Mode =
Custom p.258
Frequency
Top
0...100
center frequency when Mode =
Custom p.258
c
Resonance
Bottom
0...100
Sets the lower limit of resonance
amount when Mode=Custom
p.258
Resonance
Top
0...100
Sets the upper limit of resonance
amount when Mode=Custom
p.258
d
Sweep Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
LFO p.257
Src Off...Tempo
Mode=D-mod
Manual 0...100
Sets the center frequency when
Sweep Mode=D-mod and
Source=Off
e
Envelope
Sens
0...100 Sets the auto-wah sensitivity
Response 0...100
Sets the speed of response when
Sweep Mode=Auto or D-mod
f
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
g
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
h
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
Mode
Preset Setting
CustomParameters
D
-mod
Envelope Sens
Shape / Invert
Response
Wet / Dry
Wah
Sweep Mode
D-mod
Auto
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
LFO
Wah
+
i
Sets the output level of the effect
sound
Src Off...Tempo
that will control the effect output
level
Amt 100...+100
the effect output level
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a Type V847, V848 Selects the type of wah
b Open 1...100
c Close 1...100
d Mode Pedal, Auto
Switches between pedal wah
and auto-wah
e Pedal Source 0...100
Specifies the modulation source
that will use the pedal wah
f Pedal Manual 0...100
Sets the center frequency for the
pedal wah when the modulation
source is not moved
g
Auto Sensi-
tivity
0...100 Sets the auto-wah sensitivity
h Auto Polarity Up, Down
Specifies whether the auto-wah
sweep is normal or inverted
i Auto Attack 0...10 Sets the auto-wahs attack speed
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
D
-mod
Auto Sensitivity
Envelope
Mode
Pedal(D-mod)
Auto
Wet / Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
+ Wah
Attack / Polarity
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) 014: St. Random Filter (Stereo Random Filter)
259
014: St. Random Filter (Stereo
Random Filter)
Thisstereobandpassfilterusesastepshapewaveformand
randomLFOformodulation.Youcancreateaspecialeffect
fromfilteroscillation.
a: LFO Phase [degree]
Offsettingtheleftandrightphasesaltershowmodulationis
appliedtotheleftandrightchannels,creatingaswelling
affect.
a: LFO Waveform
b: LFO Frequency [Hz]
c: LFO Step Frequency [Hz]
WhenLFOWaveformissettoStepTri,LFOisastepshape,
trianglewaveform.TheLFOFrequencyparametersetsthe
originaltrianglewaveformspeed.ChangingtheLFOStep
Frequencyparameterenablesyoutoadjustthewidthofthe
steps.
WhenLFOWaveformissettoRandom,theLFOStep
FrequencyparameterusesarandomLFOcycle.
d: BPM
e: Step Base Note
e: Times
ThewidthofanLFOstep,oracycleofrandomLFO,is
obtainedbymultiplyingthelengthofanote(,)(selected
forStepBaseNote,inrelationtothetempospecifiedin
BPM,ortheMIDIClocktempoifBPMissettoMIDI)bythe
numberspecifiedintheTimesparameter.
i: Wet/Dry
Theeffectsoundsphasewillbereversedwhenyousetthis
parameterintherangeofvaluesfromWetto1:99.
a
LFO
Waveform
Step-Tri,
Random
Selects the LFO Waveform p.259
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
Sets the LFO phase difference
between the left and right
p.259
b
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
used for both LFO speed and
step speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
c
LFO Step
Frequency
[Hz]
0.05...50.00
Sets the LFO step speed (speed
that changes in steps p.259
Amt
50.00...
+50.00
LFO step speed
d
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
e
Step Base
Note
,...
Selects the type of notes to
specify the LFO step speed
p.259
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of notes to
p.259
f
LFO Type
(Step)
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 to control the LFO step
speed p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
g
Manual 0...100 Sets the filter center frequency
Src Off...Tempo
for the filter center frequency
Amt 100...+100
the filter center frequency
h
Depth 0...100
Sets the modulation depth of
filter center frequency
Src Off...Tempo
filter modulation
Amt 100...+100
filter modulation
i Resonance 0...100 Sets the resonance amount
j
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Filter
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Filter
LFO Phase
LFO: Step-Tri/Random
0 +90 +180 [degree]
0 [degree] 90 180
LFO Phase
Step Frequency
LFO Frequency
Step Frequency
Step-Tri Random
Random Filter LFO
260
015: Multi Mode Filter (Stereo
Multi Mode Filter)
Thisisamultimodefilterwithfourtypes;lowpass,high
pass,bandpass,andbandreject.YoucanuseLFOor
dynamicmodulationtovarythecutofffrequencyor
resonance.
016: St. Sub Oscillator (Stereo
Sub Oscillator)
Thiseffectaddsverylowfrequenciestotheinputsignal.Itis
veryusefulwhensimulatingaroaringdrumsoundor
emphasizingpowerfullowrange.Thiseffectisdifferent
fromtheequalizerinthatyoucanaddverylowrange
harmonics.Youcanalsoadjusttheoscillatorfrequencyto
matchaparticularnotenumber,foruseasanoctaver.
a: OSC Mode
b: Note Interval
b: Note Fine
TheOSCModeparameterselectstheoscillatoroperation
mode.WhenNote(KeyFollow)isselected,theoscillators
frequencyisdeterminedbasedonthenotenumber,
allowingyoutouseitasanoctaver.TheNoteInterval
parametersetsthepitchoffsetfromtheoriginalnote
numberbysemitonesteps.TheNoteFineparameterallows
youtofinetuneinstepsofcents.
d: Envelope Pre LPF
Thisparametersetstheupperlimitofthefrequencyrangeto
whichverylowharmonicsareadded.Adjustthisparameter
a
Type
LPF, HPF, BPF,
BRF
Selects the type of filter
Trim 0...100 Sets the input level
b
Cutoff 0...100
Sets the cutoff frequency (center
frequency)
Src Off...Tempo
the cutoff
Amt 100...+100
the cutoff
c
Src Off...Tempo
modulate the amount of
resonance
Amt 100...+100
resonance will be modulated
d
LFO
Waveform
Triangle, Sine Selects the LFO Waveform
Phase [deg] 180...+180
p.259
Depth 0...100
Sets the depth to which the LFO
will modulate the cutoff
frequency
e
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
f
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
g
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
h
Drive SW Off, On
Switches distortion on/off within
the filter
Output Level 0...100 Sets the output level
i
Drive Gain 0...100 Sets the distortion amount
Low Boost 0...100
Sets the amount of low-range
boost
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Multimode Filter Driver
Driver
Trim Output
Output Trim
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine LFO Shape
LPF
HPF
BPF
BRF
Filter Type
Multimode Filter
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a OSC Mode
Note (Key
Follow), Fixed
Determines whether the oscil-
lator frequency follows the note
number or whether it is fixed
p.260
b
Note Interval 48...0
Sets the pitch difference from
the note number when OSC
Mode=Note (Key Follow) p.260
Note Fine 100...+100
Fine adjustment of the oscillator
frequency p.260
c
Fixed
Frequency
[Hz]
10.0...80.0
Sets the oscillator frequency
when OSC Mode=Fixed
Src Off...Tempo
for the oscillator frequency when
OSC Mode=Fixed
Amt 80...+80
modulation amount when OSC
Mode=Fixed
d
Envelope Pre
LPF
1...100
Sets the upper limit of the
frequency range for which very
low harmonics are added
p.260
e
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Sets the sensitivity with which
very low harmonics are added
Envelope
Shape
100...+100
Sets the oscillators volume
envelope curve
f
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Wet / Dry
Note No.
OSC Mode
Fixed
Note (Key Follow)
Sine Oscillator
Fixed Frequency
Pitch
Note Interval, Fine
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope Sens
Envelope Shape
Envelope Shape
D
-mod
Pre LPF
Envelope Sens Pre LPF
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) 017: Talking Modulator
261
ifyoudonotwanttoaddlowerharmonicstothehigher
range.
017: Talking Modulator
Thiseffectaddsanunusualcharacter,likeahumanvoice,to
theinputsignal.Modulatingthetoneviadynamic
modulation,youcancreateaninterestingeffectthatsounds
asiftheguitarorsynthesizeristalking.
c: Voice Top
d: Voice Center
e: Voice Bottom
Theseparametersassignvowelstothetop,center,and
bottompositionofthecontroller.
E.g.:WhenVoiceTop=A,VoiceCenter=I,andVoice
Bottom=U:
IfSweepModeissettoDmodisselectedasthemodulation
source,movingyourfingerfromtherighttoleftofwill
changethesoundfromatoi,thenu.
IfSweepModeissettoLFO,thesoundwillchange
cyclicallyfromatoi,u,i,thena.
f: Formant Shift
Thisparameteradjuststhefrequencyleveltowhichthe
effectisapplied.Ifyouwishtoapplytheeffecttoahigher
rangesound,setthisparametertoahighervalue;toapply
theeffecttoalowerrangesound,setthistoalowervalue.
f: Resonance
Thisparametersetstheintensityofresonanceforthevoice
pattern.Alargervaluewilladdmorecharactertothesound.
018: Stereo Decimator
Thiseffectcreatesaroughsoundlikeacheapsamplerby
loweringthesamplingfrequencyanddatabitlength.You
canalsosimulatenoiseuniquetoasampler(aliasing).
a Sweep Mode D-mod, LFO
Switches between modulation
source control and LFO control
b
Manual Voice
Control
Bottom,
1...49, Center,
51...99, Top
Voice pattern control
Src Off...Tempo
that controls the voice pattern
c Voice Top A, I, U, E, O
Selects a vowel sound at the top
end of control p.261
d Voice Center A, I, U, E, O
Selects a vowel sound in the
center of control p.261
e Voice Bottom A, I, U, E, O
Selects a vowel sound at the
bottom end of control p.261
f
Formant Shift 100...+100
Sets the frequency to which the
effect is applied p.261
Resonance 0...100
Sets the Level of resonance of
the voice pattern p.261
g
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
h
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
i
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
D
-mod
Voice Top: A
Voice Center: I
Voice Bottom: U
A -I- U-E- O Talking Modulator
LFO
D-mod
LFO
Sweep Mode
a
Pre LPF Off, On
Selects whether the harmonic
noise caused by a decrease in
sampling frequency is generated
or not p.262
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the ratio of cut of the high
range
b
Sampling
Frequency
[Hz]
1.00k...
48.00k
Sets the sampling frequency
Src Off...Tempo
the sampling frequency
Amt
48.00k...
+48.00k
the sampling frequency
c
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00 Sets the speed of the LFO
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
d
MIDI Sync Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
for this individual effect
Base Note ,...
specify the LFO speed
Times x1...x32
specify the LFO speed
+ Max
Zero
D
-mod
Max
Voice Bottom Voice Center Voice Top
U
I
A A
O
E
JS X
JS +Y
JS Y
etc
Zero
+ Max
Talking Modulator Control
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Pre LPF
High Damp Output Level
High Damp Output Level
Sampling Frequency
Decimator
Decimator
D
-mod
LFO
Resolution
Resolution
262
a: Pre LPF
Ifasamplerwithaverylowsamplingfrequencyreceives
veryhighpitchedsoundthatcouldnotbeheardduring
playback,itcouldgeneratepitchnoisethatisunrelatedto
theoriginalsound.SetPreLPFtoOntopreventthisnoise
frombeinggenerated.
IfyousettheSamplingFrequencytoabout3 kHzandset
PreLPFtoOff,youcancreateasoundlikearingmodulator.
g: Resolution
h: Output Level
IfyousetasmallervaluefortheResolutionparameter,the
soundmaybedistorted.Thevolumelevelmayalsobe
changed.UseOutputLeveltoadjustthelevel.
019: St. Analog Record (Stereo
Analog Record)
Thiseffectsimulatesthenoisecausedbyscratchesanddust
onanalogrecords.Italsoreproducessomeofthe
modulationcausedbyawarpedturntable.
b: Flutter
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthedepthofthe
modulationcausedbyawarpedturntable.
e: Click Level
Thisparameterenablesyoutosettheleveloftheclicknoise
thatoccursonceeveryrotationoftheturntable.This
simulationreproducesrecordnoise,andthenoisegenerated
afterthemusiconavinylrecordfinishes.
e
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
f
Depth 0...100
Sets the depth of the sampling
frequency LFO modulation
Src Off...Tempo
Selects the LFO modulation
source of the sampling
frequency
Amt 100...+100
Sets the LFO modulation
amount of the sampling
frequency
g Resolution 4...24 Sets the data bit length p.262
h
Output Level 0...100 Sets the output level p.262
Src Off...Tempo
for the output level
Amt 100...+100
the output level
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a Speed [RPM] 33 1/3, 45, 78 Sets the r.p.m. of a record
b Flutter 0...100
Sets the modulation depth
p.262
c
Noise Density 0...100 Sets the noise density
Noise Tone 0...100 Sets the noise tone
d
Noise Level 0...100 Sets the noise level
Src Off...Tempo
for the noise level
Amt 100...+100
the noise level
e
Click Level 0...100
Sets the click noise level
p.262
Src Off...Tempo
for the click noise level
Amt 100...+100
the click noise level
f EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
g
Pre EQ Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k Sets the EQ center frequency
Q 0.5...10.0 Sets the EQ band width
Gain [dB] 18.0...+18.0 Sets the EQ gain
h
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Analog Record
Simulation
Pre EQ
Pre EQ
EQ Trim
EQ Trim
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic) 020: OD/Hi.Gain Wah (Overdrive/Hi.Gain Wah)
263
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic)
020: OD/Hi.Gain Wah
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain Wah)
ThisdistortioneffectutilizesanOverdrivemodeandaHi
Gainmode.Controllingthewaheffect,the3bandEQ,and
theampsimulationwillallowyoutocreateversatile
distortionsounds.Thiseffectissuitableforguitarandorgan
sounds.
a: Wah
TheWahparameterswitchesthewaheffecton/off.
a: Sw
Thisparametersetshowthewaheffectisswitchedonand
offviathemodulationsource.
WhenSw=Moment,thewaheffectisusuallyturnedoff.It
isturnedononlywhenyoupressthepedaloroperatethe
joystick.
Whenavalueforthemodulationsourceislessthan64,
offspeedisselected,andwhenthevalueis64or
higher,onisselected.
WhenSw=Toggle,thewaheffectisswitchedbetweenon
andoffeachtimeyoupressthepedaloroperatethejoystick.
Theswitchwillbeturnedon/offeachtimethevalueof
themodulationsourceexceeds64.
b: Wah Sweep Range
b: Wah Sweep Src
Thisparametersetsthesweeprangeofthewahcenter
frequency.Anegativevaluewillreversethedirectionof
sweep.Thewahcenterfrequencycanbecontrolledbythe
modulationsourcespecifiedintheWahSweepSrc
parameter.
d: Pre Low-cut
Cuttingthesignalinthelowrangebeforeitisinputtothe
Distortionwillcreateasharpdistortion.
d: Drive
e: Output Level (Level)
Thedegreeofdistortionisdeterminedbythelevelofinput
signalandthesettingofDrive.RaisingtheDrivesetting
willcausetheentirevolumeleveltoincrease.Usethe
OutputLevelparametertoadjustthevolumelevel.The
OutputLevelparameterusesthesignallevelinputtothe3
BandEQ.Ifclippingoccursatthe3BandEQ,adjustthe
OutputLevelparameter.
a
Wah Off, On Switches Wah on/off p.263
Src Off...Tempo
that switches the Wah on and off
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Selects the switching mode for
the modulation source that
switches the Wah on and off
p.263
b
Wah Sweep
Range
10...+10 Sets the range of Wah p.263
Wah Sweep
Src
Off...Tempo
that controls the Wah p.263
c Drive Mode
Overdrive, Hi-
Gain
Switches between overdrive and
hi-gain distortion
d
Drive 1...100
Sets the degree of distortion
p.263
Pre Low-cut 0...10
Sets the low range cut amount
of the distortion input p.263
e
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 50...+50
the output level
f
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center frequency for
Low EQ (shelving type)
Gain [dB] 18...+18 Sets the gain of Low EQ
g
Mid1Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Mid/High EQ 1 (peaking type)
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width of Mid/High
EQ 1 p.255
Gain [dB] 18...+18 Sets the gain of Mid/High EQ 1
h
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 2 p.255
i
Direct Mix 0...50
Sets the amount of the dry
sound mixed to the distortion
Speaker
Simulation
Off, On
Switches the speaker simulation
on/off
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Amp Simulation
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Direct Mix
Pre Low-cut
D
-mod
Wah
Mode: Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Drive
Driver
264
021: St. Guitar Cabinet (Stereo
Guitar Cabinet)
Thissimulatestheacousticalcharacterofaguitaramps
speakercabinet.
022: St. Bass Cabinet (Stereo
Bass Cabinet)
Thissimulatestheacousticalcharacterofabassamps
speakercabinet.
b Type
Selects the type of the cabinet
TWEED -
1x12
Open-back cabinet with one 12"
speaker, typically used for blues
TWEED -
4x10
Open-back cabinet with four 10"
speakers
BLACK - 2x10
Open-back cabinet with two 10"
speakers
BLACK - 2x12
American open-back cabinet
with two12" speakers
VOX AC15 -
1x12
Vox AC15 open-back cabinet
with one 12" Blue speaker
VOX AC30 -
2x12
Vox AC30 open-back cabinet
with two 12" Blue speakers
VOX AD412 -
4x12
VOX AD412 closed-back cabinet
with four 12" speakers
UK H30 -
4x12
Closed-back classic cabinet with
four 30W 12" speakers
UK T75 - 4x12
Closed-back cabinet with four
75W 12" speakers
US V30 - 4x12
Closed-back cabinet with four
30W 12" speakers
c Air 0...100 Sets the mic position
d
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Trim
Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Cabinet Simulator
Cabinet Simulator
b Cabinet Type
Selects the cabinet type
LA - 4x10
Four 10" speakers / LA sound
cabinet
MODERN -
4x10
Four 10" aluminum-cone
speakers / modern cabinet
METAL - 4x10
Four 10" aluminum-cone
speakers / modern cabinet
CLASSIC -
8x10
Eight 10" speakers / classic
cabinet
UK - 4x12
Four 12" speakers / UK-manufac-
tured cabinet
STUDIO -
1x15
One 15" speaker / studio combo
cabinet
JAZZ - 1x15
One 15" speaker / jazz combo
cabinet
VOX AC100 -
2x15
Two 15" speakers / cabinet for
Vox AC100
US - 2x15
Two 15" speakers / US-manufac-
tured cabinet
UK - 4x15
Four 15" speakers / UK-manufac-
tured cabinet
LA - 1x18
One 18" speaker /
LA sound cabinet
COMBI - 1x12
& 1x18
One 12" and one 18" speaker
combination cabinet
c
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Trim
Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Cabinet Simulator
Cabinet Simulator
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic) 023: Bass Amp Model
265
023: Bass Amp Model
Thissimulatesabassamp.
024: Bass Amp+Cabinet (Bass
Amp Model+Cabinet)
Thissimulatesabassampandspeakercabinet.
a: Amplifier Type
h: Cabinet Type
Recommended Combinations of Bass Amp Models and
Cabinets:
Note:ItisconvenienttousetheEffectPresetfunctionto
presetyourfavoritepairingsofampmodelandcabinet.(see
p.60)
a
Amplifier
Type
Selects the amplifier type
LA STUDIO
An amp that is typical of the LA
sound.
JAZZ COMBO
A combo amp favored by jazz
bassists.
GOLD PANEL
An amp distinctive for its eye-
catching gold panel and clean
sound.
SCOOPED An amp typical of 80s sounds.
VALVE2 A tube amp suitable for rock.
VALVE
A tube amp with the ULTRA LO
switch turned ON.
CLASSIC
A tube amp whose basic
character changes according to
the setting of the value dial.
b
Volume 0...100 Sets the output level
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
the output level
c Bass 0...100 Sets the bass (low range) level
d
Middle 0...100 Sets the middle (mid range) level
Mid Range 0...4 Sets the mid-frequency range
e Treble 0...100 Sets the treble (high range) level
f Presence 0...100
Sets the presence (high-
frequency tone)
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
+
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Volume
Wet / Dry
D
-mod
Bass Amp Model
a
Amplifier
Type
LA STUDIO,
JAZZ
COMBO,
GOLD PANEL,
SCOOPED,
VALVE2,
VALVE,
CLASSIC
Selects the type of the amplifier
p.265
b
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
the output level
d
Mid Range 0...4 Sets the mid-frequency range
f Presence 0...100
frequency tone)
g
Cabinet
Simulater
Off, On
Switches the cabinet simulator
on/off
h Cabinet Type
LA - 4x10,
MODERN -
4x10,
METAL - 4x10,
CLASSIC -
8x10,
UK - 4x12,
STUDIO -
1x15,
JAZZ - 1x15,
VOX AC100 -
2x15,
US - 2x15,
UK - 4x15,
LA - 1x18,
COMBI - 1x12
& 1x18
p.264
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Amplifier Type Cabinet Type
LASTUDIO LA4x10,LA1x18
JAZZCOMBO JAZZ1x15
GOLDPANEL MODERN4x10
SCOOPED METAL4x10
VALVE2 CLASSIC8x10
VALVE CLASSIC8x10
CLASSIC COMBI1x12&1x18
+
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Volume
Wet / Dry
D
-mod
Bass Amp Model1 Cabinet Simulator
266
025: TrebleBST (Treble
Booster)
Thiseffectmodelsafamousboost/overdriveeffectthatwas
developedinordertoproduceaguitarorchestraeffect,
anddesignedforusewiththeVOXAC30.Youcanusethis
toaddclearboosttothesignal,orapplyittoanorgansound
toaddanoverdrivethatgeneratesrichovertones.Three
controlsallowabroadrangeofsettings,lettingyoucreatea
widevarietyofoverdrivesounds.
026: Tube PreAmp Model
(Tube PreAmp Modeling)
Thiseffectsimulatesatwostagevacuumtubepreamp.You
canmakeindividualsettingsfortwovacuumtubes
connectedinseries.Thisletsyoucreatethewarmsound
typicalofvacuumtubes.
b, f: Saturation [%]
Withhighersettingsofthisvalue,thewaveformwillchange
athighgainlevels,tendingtocausedistortion.Lower
settingsofthisvaluewillproducelinearresponse.
c: Tube1 Bias
Thisexpressestheeffectthatchangesinvacuumtubebias
haveonthedistortionofthewaveform.Highersettingsof
thisvaluewillproducedistortionevenatlowgainlevels.
Sincethiswillalsochangetheovertonestructure,youcan
useittocontrolthetonalcharacter.
d: Tube1 Phase
WiththeWetInvertsetting,thephaseofthesignalwillbe
invertedbetweenstage1andstage2.SinceBiasisapplied
totheinvertedsignalinstage2,thiswillchangethetonal
character.
027: St. Tube PreAmp (Stereo
Tube PreAmp Modeling)
Thisisastereovacuumtubepreampsimulator(See026:
TubePreAmpModel(TubePreAmpModeling)on
page 266.).
a Drive 1...100 Sets the gain for overdrive p.263
b Level 0...100 Sets the output level p.263
c Tone 1...100 Sets the tone for overdrive
b
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99 ...
99:1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Tube1 Low
Cut [Hz]
Thru,
21...8.00k
Sets the cutoff frequency for the
low cut filter of stage 1
High Cut [Hz]
53...20.00k,
Thru
high cut filter of stage 1
b
Tube1 Gain
[dB]
24.0...+24.0 Sets the input gain for stage 1
Saturation
[%]
0...100
Sets the input/output response
for stage 1 p.266
c Tube1 Bias 0...100
Sets the bias voltage for stage 1
p.266
d Tube1 Phase
Normal,
Wet Invert
Turns phase reversal on/off
p.266
e
Tube2 Low
Cut [Hz]
Thru,
21...8.00k
low cut filter of stage 2
High Cut [Hz]
53...20.00k,
Thru
high cut filter of stage 2
f
Tube2 Gain
[dB]
24.0...+24.0 Sets the input gain for stage 2
Saturation
[%]
0...100
for stage 2 p.266
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Treble Booster
+ Tube Pre Amp1 Tube Pre Amp2
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Wet / Dry
+
Invert
g Tube2 Bias 0...100
Sets the bias voltage for stage 2
p.266
h
Tube2
Output Level
[dB]
48.0...+0.0 Sets the output level
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Mic/Pre Amp - Saturation
In
Out
Saturation = 0
Saturation = 50
Saturation = 100
Bias = 0
In
Out
Satulation = 50
Bias = 0
Bias = 50
Bias = 100
Mic/Pre Amp - Bias
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Tube Pre Amp1 Tube Pre Amp2
Tube Pre Amp1 Tube Pre Amp2
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Invert
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic) 028: Mic Model+PreAmp (Mic Modeling + PreAmp)
267
028: Mic Model+PreAmp (Mic
Modeling + PreAmp)
Thiseffectsimulatesamicandvacuumtubepreamp.You
canchoosefromvarioustypesofmicandpositionstocreate
differingsoniccharacters.
b: Mic Position
Thisexpressestheeffectthatthemicpositionhasonthe
sound.TheClosesettingistheclosestmicposition,andthe
Farsettingisthefarthest.
a Mic Type
Vintage
Dynamic,
Multi
Condenser,
Percussion
Condenser,
Drums Dynamic,
Vocal Dynamic,
Multi Dynamic,
Vocal
Condenser,
Vocal Tube,
Kick Dynamic
Selects the type of mic
b Mic Position
Close, On, Off,
Far
Sets the mic placement distance
p.267
c
Tube Low Cut
[Hz]
Thru,
21...8.00k
Sets the frequency of the low cut
filter
High Cut [Hz]
53...20.00k,
Thru
Sets the frequency of the high
cut filter
d
Tube Gain
[dB]
24.0...+24.0
Sets the input gain to the
vacuum tube preamp
Saturation
[%]
0...100
of the preamp p.266
e Tube Bias 0...100
Sets the bias level of the preamp
p.266
f
Tube Output
Level [dB]
48.0...+0.0
preamp
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
+ Tube Pre Amp Mic Simulation
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Wet / Dry
268
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser)
029: Stereo Chorus
Thiseffectaddsthicknessandwarmthtothesoundby
modulatingthedelaytimeoftheinputsignal.Youcanadd
spreadtothesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftand
rightLFOsfromeachother.
e: L Pre Delay [msec]
e: R Pre Delay [msec]
Settingtheleftandrightdelaytimeindividuallyallowsyou
tocontrolthestereoimage.
030: Vintage Chorus
Thismodelsafamouschorusunitthatwasbuiltintoa
guitaramp.Althoughitdoesnotprovideachorusand
vibratoselectswitch,youcanusetheWet/Drysettingto
producetheireffect.TheSpeed,Depth,andManual
parametersallowanevenwiderrangeofsoundsthanthe
originalunit.
e: Wet/Dry
d: Output Mode
Forthemastereffects,Wet/Dryadjuststheoutputlevelof
theeffectsound.
WhenOutputModeisMono,LandRwilloutputthesame
vibratoeffect.Normally,youllusetheWet/Drysettingto
mixthedirectsoundandprocessedsoundsothatachorus
effectisproduced.IfyousetthistoWetsothatnoneofthe
directsoundisincluded,youllobtainavibratoeffect.
IfOutputModeisST(LD&RW),thedirectsoundwillbe
pannedtoL,andtheeffectsoundwillbepannedtoRfor
output.Normally,youllusetheWet/Drysettingtomixthe
directsoundandprocessedsound,producingachorus
effectononlytheRchannel,andcreatingaspaciousstereo
effectthatextendstotheleftandright.IfyousetthistoWet,
andpanthedirectandprocessedsoundstoleftandright,
andthenoutputthemtostereospeakers,thedirectsound
andprocessedsoundwillbemixedintheair,producinga
choruseffectwithspaciousclarity.
a
LFO
Waveform
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.259
b
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
c
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
d
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
e
L Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time for the left
channel p.268
R Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time for the right
channel p.268
f
Depth 0...100
Sets the depth of LFO
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
for the LFO modulation depth
Amt 100...+100
the LFO modulation depth
g EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
h
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
range equalizer
i
Pre LEQ Gain
[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
j
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Chorus
Chorus
Left
Right
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
LEQ HEQ
LFO: Tri / Sine
a
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the speed of LFO
Src Off...Tempo
Speed [Hz]
Amt 100...+100
Speed [Hz]
b
Depth 0...100 Sets the modulation depth
Src Off...Tempo
Depth
Amt 100...+100
Depth
c Manual 1...100 Sets the sweep frequency
d Output Mode
0: Mono,
1: ST (L-D&R-W)
Sets the outpu mode
e
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99 ...
99:1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100 ... +100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
+ Chorus
LFO
Output Mode
Mono
Stereo
(L-D&R-W)
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser) 031: Black Chorus
269
031: Black Chorus
ThismodelsaDanishmadestereochorus+pitchmodulator
&flanger.Althoughthiseffectwasoriginallyintendedfor
guitar,itwasalsousedbynumerouskeyboardplayers.
Usedwithelectricpiano,itproducesadistinctivetone.
c: Mode
b: Intensity
IncreasingtheIntensityvaluewillstrengthenthe
modulationeffect.Thiscontrolstheeffect,direct,and
feedbackvalues.Thevaluesthatarecontrolledwilldepend
ontheModesetting.
032: EP Chorus
Thisisinspiredbyararechorusbuiltintoanearlyversionof
afamousmodifiedtinepiano.
033: St.HarmonicChorus
(Stereo Harmonic Chorus)
Thiseffectapplieschorusonlytohigherfrequencies.This
canbeusedtoapplyachoruseffecttoabasssoundwithout
makingthesoundthinner.Youcanalsousethischorus
blockwithfeedbackasaflanger.
g: High/Low Split Point
Thisparametersetsthefrequencythatsplitsthehighand
lowrange.Onlythehighrangewillbesenttothechorus
block.
a
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the LFO speed
Src Off...Tempo
Speed [Hz]
Amt 100...+100
Speed [Hz]
b Intensity 1...100
Sets the intensity of LFO
modulation
c Mode 0, 1, 2
Select a mode
0: Chorus
1: Pitch Modulation
2: Flanger
d Width 0...100 Sets the LFO modulation depth
e Input Gain 1...100 Sets the input gain
f Output Mode 0, 1
Select a output mode
0: Mono
1: Stereo
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99 ...
99:1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100 ... +100
Wet/Dry
a
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the LFO speed p.259
Src Off...Tempo
Speed [Hz]
Amt 100...+100
Speed [Hz]
b
Depth 0...100
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
c
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1:9999:1,
Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Chorus
LFO
Input Gain
Mode & Intensity
Mono
Stereo
Output Mode
-
+
+
+
a
LFO
Waveform
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.259
b
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
c
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
d
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
e
Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time from the
original sound
f
Depth 0...100
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
g
High/Low
Split Point
1...100
Sets the frequency split point
between the low and high range
p.269
h
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feed back amount of the
chorus block p.270
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the high range damping
amount of the chorus block
i
Low Level 0...100 Sets the low range output level
High Level 0...100
Sets the high range (chorus)
output level
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Low Level
Low Level
High Level
High Level
High/Low Split Point
High Damp
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
270
h: Feedback
Setsthefeedbackamountofthechorusblock.Increasingthe
feedbackwillallowyoutousetheeffectasaflanger.
034: St. Biphase Mod. (Stereo
Biphase Modulation)
ThisstereochoruseffectaddstwodifferentLFOstogether.
YoucansettheFrequencyandDepthparametersforeach
LFOindividually.DependingonthesettingoftheseLFOs,
verycomplexwaveformswillcreateananalogtype,
unstablemodulatedsound.
035: Multitap Cho/Delay
(Multitap Chorus/Delay)
ThiseffecthasfourchorusblockswithadifferentLFO
phase.Youcancreateacomplexstereoimagebysetting
eachblocksdelaytime,depth,outputlevel,andpan
individually.Youcanalsofixsomeofthechorusblocksto
combinethechorusanddelayeffects.
a
LFO1
Waveform
Triangle, Sine Selects LFO1 waveform
LFO2
Waveform
Triangle, Sine Selects LFO2 waveform
Phase Sw
0 deg,
180 deg
Switches the LFO phase
difference between left and right
b
LFO1
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...30.00 Sets the LFO1 speed
Src Off...Tempo
LFO1&2 speed
LFO1 Amt
30.00...
+30.00
LFO1 speed
c
LFO2
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...30.00 Sets the LFO2 speed
Amt
30.00...
+30.00
LFO2 speed
d
LFO1 Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase offset when LFO1
Type = Common 1 or Common 2
p.257
e
LFO2 Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase offset when LFO2
Type = Common 1 or Common 2
p.257
f
Depth1 0...100
Sets the depth of LFO1
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
LFO1&2 modulation depth
Amt 100...+100
LFO1 modulation depth
g
Depth2 0...100
Sets the depth of LFO2
modulation
Amt 100...+100
LFO2 modulation depth
h
L Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
channel p.268
R Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
channel p.268
i
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback amount
p.270
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping amount in the
high range
Chorus/Flanger
Left
Right
Feedback
180 [degree]
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
LFO1: Tri / Sine
LFO2: Tri / Sine
Chorus/Flanger
High Damp
j
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
b
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
c
Tap1 (000)
[msec]
0...1000
Sets the Tap1 (LFO phase=0
degrees) delay time
Depth 0...30 Sets the Tap1 chorus depth
Level 0...30 Sets the Tap1 output level
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Sets the Tap1 stereo image
d
Tap2 (180)
[msec]
0...1000
degrees) delay time
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
e
Tap3 (090)
[msec]
0...1000
degrees) delay time
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
f
Tap4 (270)
[msec]
0...1000
degrees) delay time
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
LFO1
LFO2
Bi-Phase Modulation LFO
Depth1
Depth2
+
Left
Right
Feedback Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Level
Level
Level
Level
Pan
Pan
Pan
Pan
LFO: Triangle
Tap1 Delay
Tap2 Delay
Tap3 Delay
Tap4 Delay
0 [degree]
180 [degree]
90 [degree]
270 [degree]
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser) 036: Ensemble
271
036: Ensemble
ThisEnsembleeffecthasthreechorusblocksthatuseLFOto
createsubtleshimmering,andgivesthreedimensional
depthandspreadtothesound,becausethesignalisoutput
fromtheleft,right,andcenter.
c: Shimmer
ThisparametersetstheamountofshimmeringoftheLFO
waveform.Increasingthisvalueaddsmoreshimmering,
makingthechoruseffectmorecomplexandricher.
037: Polysix Ensemble
ThismodelstheensembleeffectbuiltintotheclassicKorg
PolySixprogrammablepolyphonicsynthesizer.
038: Stereo Flanger
Thiseffectgivesasignificantswellandmovementofpitch
tothesound.Itismoreeffectivewhenappliedtoasound
withalotofharmonics.Thisisastereoflanger.Youcanadd
spreadtothesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftand
rightLFOsfromeachother.
g
Tap1
Feedback
100...+100 Sets the Tap1 feedback amount
Src Off...Tempo
Tap1 feedback amount and
effect balance
Amt 100...+100
Sets the Tap1 feedback amount
and modulation amount
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Speed 1...100 Sets the speed of the LFO
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt 100...+100
LFO speed
b
Depth 0...100
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
c Shimmer 0...100
Sets the amount of shimmering
of the LFO waveform p.271
d
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO
Shimmer
+ Ensemble
Time
Level
Ensemble LFO
Shimmer
a
Depth 0...100 Sets the depth of the effect
Src Off...Tempo
that will control the effect depth
Amt 100...+100
effect depth will be modulated
b
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...50.0
original sound
b
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape 100...+100
Changes the curvature of the
LFO Waveform p.258
c
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.259
d
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
e
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
+
Polysi x
Ensemble
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Flanger
Flanger
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Shape
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
272
h: Feedback
i: Wet/Dry
ThepeakshapeofthepositiveandnegativeFeedbackvalue
isdifferent.Theharmonicswillbeemphasizedwhenthe
effectsoundismixedwiththedrysoundifyouseta
positivevalueforbothFeedbackandWet/Dry,andifyou
setanegativevalueforbothFeedbackandWet/Dry.
h: High Damp [%]
Thisparametersetstheamountofdampingofthefeedback
inthehighrange.Increasingthevaluewillcuthighrange
harmonics.
039: Vintage Flanger
Thismodelsaclassicanalogflanger.Itishighlyeffectivefor
chordingonclavitypekeyboardsorelectricpiano.
040: St. Random Flanger
(Stereo Random Flanger)
Thestereoeffectusesastepshapewaveformandrandom
LFOformodulation,creatingauniqueflangingeffect.
f
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
g Depth 0...100
modulation
h
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the feedback damping
amount in the high range
p.272
i
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.272
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the speed of LFO
Src Off...Tempo
Speed [Hz]
Amt 100...+100
Speed [Hz]
b
Depth 0...100
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
Depth
Amt 100...+100
Depth
c Resonance 0...100 Sets the resonance amount
d Manual 1...100 Sets the sweep frequency
e
LFO Reset
Source
Off...Tempo Selects a modulation source for
LFO reset
f Reset Offset 0...100 Sets the offset
g
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Flanger
LFO
Feedback
LFO Sync
Reset Offset
a
Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...50.0
original sound
b
LFO
Waveform
Step-Tri,
Random
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.259
c
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
used for both LFO speed and
step speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
d
LFO Step
Frequency
[Hz]
0.05...50.00
Sets the LFO step speed (speed
that changes in steps)
Step Amt
50.00...
+50.00
LFO step speed
e
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
f
Step Base
Note
,...
p.259
Times x1...x32
p.259
g
LFO Type
(Step)
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
h Depth 0...100
modulation
i
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
High Damp
[%]
0...100
p.272
j
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.272
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Flanger
Flanger
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser) 041: St. Env. Flanger (Stereo Envelope Flanger)
273
041: St. Env. Flanger (Stereo
Envelope Flanger)
ThisFlangerusesanenvelopegeneratorformodulation.Youwill
obtainthesamepatternofflangingeachtimeyouplay.Youcan
alsocontroltheFlangerdirectlyusingthemodulationsource.
c: Sweep Mode
c: Src
Thisparameterswitchestheflangercontrolmode.WithSweep
Mode=EG,theflangerwillsweepusingtheenvelope
generator.Thisenvelopegeneratorisincludedintheenvelope
flanger,andnotrelatedtothePitchEG,FilterEG,orAmpEG.
TheSrcparameterselectsthesourcethatstartstheenvelope
generator.Ifyouselect,forexample,Gate,theenvelope
generatorwillstartwhenthenoteonmessageisreceived.
WhenSweepMode=Dmod,themodulationsourcecan
controltheflangerdirectly.Selectthemodulationsource
usingtheSrcparameter.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthemodulationsource
specifiedfortheSrcparameterissmallerthan64,and
theeffectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.The
EnvelopeGeneratoristriggeredwhenthevalue
changesfrom63orsmallerto64orhigher.
d: EG Attack
d: EG Decay
AttackandDecayspeedaretheonlyadjustableparameterson
thisEG.
042: Stereo Phaser
Thiseffectcreatesaswellbyshiftingthephase.Itisvery
effectiveonelectricpianosounds.Youcanaddspreadtothe
soundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftandrightLFOsfrom
eachother.
h: Resonance
i: Wet/Dry
ThepeakshapeofthepositiveandnegativeFeedbackvalue
isdifferent.Theharmonicswillbeemphasizedwhenthe
effectsoundismixedwiththedrysound,ifyouseta
a
L Delay
Bottom
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the lower limit of the left-
channel delay time
L Delay Top
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the upper limit of the left-
channel delay time
b
R Delay
Bottom
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the lower limit of the right-
channel delay time
R Delay Top
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Sets the upper limit of the right-
channel delay time
c
Sweep Mode EG, D-mod
Determines whether the flanger
is controlled by the envelope
generator or by the modulation
source p.273
Src Off...Tempo
that triggers the EG (when
Sweep Mode = EG), or the
modulation source that causes
the flanger to sweep (when
Sweep Mode = D-mod) p.273
d
EG Attack 1...100 Sets the EG attack speed p.273
EG Decay 1...100 Sets the EG decay speed p.273
e Feedback 100...+100
p.272
f
High Damp
[%]
0...100
p.272
g
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.272
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
EG Attack/Decay
EG
D-mod
Sweep Mode
D
-mod
Flanger
Flanger
Left
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
a
LFO
Waveform
LFO Waveform p.258
b
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.259
c
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
d
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
e
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
f
Manual 0...100
effect is applied
Src Off...Tempo
for the LFO modulation
Amt 100...+100
the LFO modulation
j
Depth 0...100
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
for the LFO modulation depth
Amt 100...+100
h
Resonance 100...+100
Sets the resonance amount
p.274
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the resonance damping
p.274
i
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.274
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Resonance
LFO Shape
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Phaser
Phaser
274
positivevalueforbothResonanceandWet/Dry,andifyou
setanegativevalueforbothResonanceandWet/Dry.
h: High Damp [%]
Thisparametersetstheamountofdampingoftheresonance
inthehighrange.Increasingthevaluewillcuthighrange
harmonics.
043: Small Phaser
ThismodelsaclassicphaserthatwasborninNewYork
duringthe1970s.Withawarm,richtone,itisalsolovedby
manyelectricpianoplayers.
b: Color
Thisletsyouchoosebetweentwotypesofphasersound.
TurningthisOnproducesadeeperphaseshifteffectwitha
distinctivemodulation.
044: Orange Phaser
Thismodelsastandardmodelofanalogphaserthat
achievedgreatpopularity.Itgivesasenseofmovementto
electricpianosounds,addingarichsoundingphaseshift
effect.
045: Black Phaser
ThismodelsaDanishmadefourstagephaserthatfeatured
awiderange.
046: U-VIBE
Thismodelsafamouschorus/vibratopedaleffect.
Simulatingarotaryspeaker,thiseffectproduceda
fascinatinglylushtone.
a
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the speed of the LFO
Src Off...Tempo
Speed [Hz]
Amt 100...+100
Speed [Hz]
b Color Off, On
Switches the tone of the phaser
sound p.274
c
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.274
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Phaser
LFO
Color
a
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the speed of the LFO
Src Off...Tempo
Speed [Hz]
Amt 100...+100
Speed [Hz]
b
Depth 0...100
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
Depth
Amt 100...+100
Depth
c Resonance 0...100 Sets the resonance amount
d Manual 1...100
Sets the frequency where the
effect is applied
e
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the speed of the vibration
Src Off...Tempo
Speed [Hz]
Amt 100...+100
Speed [Hz]
b
Depth 0...100 Sets the depth of vibration
Src Off...Tempo
Depth
Amt 100...+100
Depth
c
Mix 0...100 Sets the effect mix level
Src Off...Tempo
Mix
Amt 100...+100
Mix
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Phaser
LFO
Resonance
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ U-VIBE
LFO
Mix
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser) 047: St. Random Phaser (Stereo Random Phaser)
275
c: Mix
d: Wet/Dry
TheMixparameterspecifiestheamountofeffectsound
relativetothedirectsound.Asettingof0producesthe
directsound,asettingofabout50produceschorus,anda
settingof100producesavibratoeffect.IfyousettheWet/
DryparametertoWet,thesoundwillbeoutputwiththe
mixbalancespecifiedbyMix.
047: St. Random Phaser
(Stereo Random Phaser)
Thisisastereophaser.Theeffectusesastepshape
waveformandrandomLFOformodulation,creatinga
uniquephasingeffect.
d
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
effect and the dry input p.275
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
LFO
Waveform
Step-Tri, Step-
Sin, Random
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.259
b
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
commonly used for LFO speed
and step speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
c
LFO Step
Frequency
[Hz]
0.05...50.00 Sets the LFO step speed p.259
Amt
50.00...
+50.00
LFO step speed
d
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
e
Step Base
Note
,...
p.257
Times x1...x32
p.257
f
LFO Type
(Step)
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
Left
Right
Resonance
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Phaser
Phaser
g
Manual 0...100
effect is applied
Src Off...Tempo
for the LFO modulation
Amt 100...+100
the LFO modulation
h Depth 0...100
modulation
i
p.274
High Damp
[%]
0...100
p.274
j
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.274
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
276
048: St. Env. Phaser (Stereo
Envelope Phaser)
Thisstereophaserusesanenvelopegeneratorfor
modulation.Youwillobtainthesamepatternofphasing
eachtimeyouplay.YoucanalsocontrolthePhaserdirectly
usingthemodulationsource.
a
L Manual
Bottom
0...100
Sets the lower limit of the
frequency range for the effect on
the left channel
L Manual Top 0...100
the left channel
b
R Manual
Bottom
0...100
Sets the lower limit of the
the right channel
R Manual Top 0...100
the right channel
c
Sweep Mode EG, D-mod
Determines whether the flanger
is controlled by the envelope
generator or by the modulation
source p.273
Src Off...Tempo
that triggers the EG (when EG is
selected for Sweep Mode), or
modulation source that causes
the flanger to sweep (when D-
mod is selected for Sweep
Mode) p.273
d
EG Attack 1...100
Sets the EG attack speed
p.273
EG Decay 1...100
Sets the EG decay speed
p.273
e Resonance 100...+100
p.274
f
High Damp
[%]
0...100
p.274
g
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.274
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
EG Attack/Decay
EG
D-mod
Sweep Mode
D
-mod
Phaser
Phaser
Left
Right
Resonance
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 049: Stereo Vibrato
277
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift)
049: Stereo Vibrato
Thiseffectcausesthepitchoftheinputsignaltoshimmer.
UsingtheAutoFadeallowsyoutoincreaseordecreasethe
shimmeringspeed.
a: AUTOFADE Src
b: Fade-In Delay [msec]
b: Fade-In Rate
d: LFO Frequency Mod
WhenLFOFrequencyModissettoAUTOFADE,youcan
usethemodulationsourceselectedinAUTOFADESrcasa
triggertoautomaticallyfadeinthemodulationamount.
WhenMIDISyncissettoOn,youcannotusethis.
TheFadeInRateparameterspecifiestherateoffadein.The
FadeInDelayparameterdeterminesthetimefrom
AutoFademodulationsourceOnuntilthefadeinstarts.
ThefollowingisanexampleoffadeinwheretheLFO
speedisincreasedfrom1.0Hzto4.0Hzwhenanoteon
messageisreceived.
AUTOFADESrc=Gate1,LFOFrequencyMod=AUTOFADE,
LFOFrequency[Hz]=1.0,Amt=3.0
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthedynamic
modulationsourcespecifiedfortheAUTOFADESrc
parameterissmallerthan64,andtheeffectisonwhen
thevalueis64orhigher.TheAutoFadefunctionis
triggeredwhenthevaluechangesfrom63orsmallerto
64orhigher.
050: St. Auto Fade Mod. (Stereo
Auto Fade Modulation)
Thisstereochorus/flangereffectenablesyoutocontrolthe
LFOspeedandeffectbalanceusingautofade,andyoucan
spreadthesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftandright
LFOsfromeachother.
a
AUTOFADE
Src
Off...Tempo
that starts AutoFade p.277
b
Fade-In Delay
[msec]
00...2000
Sets the fade-in delay time
p.277
Fade-In Rate 1...100
Sets the rate of fade-in
p.277
c
LFO
Waveform
LFO Waveform p.259
d
LFO
Frequency
Mod
D-mod,
AUTOFADE
Switches between D-mod and
AUTOFADE for the LFO
frequency modulation p.277
e
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
f
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
g
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
h
Depth 0...100
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Vibrato
Vibrato
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine LFO Shape
Fade-In Delay LFO Frequency AutoFade
a
AUTOFADE
Src
Off...Tempo
that starts AutoFade p.277
Fade-In Delay
[msec]
00...2000
Sets the fade-in delay time
p.277
Rate 1...100
Sets the rate of fade-in
p.277
b
LFO
Frequency
Mod
D-mod,
AUTOFADE
AUTOFADE for the LFO
frequency modulation
p.277
Wet/Dry Mod
D-mod,
AUTOFADE
AUTOFADE for the effect balance
modulation
p.277
c
LFO
Waveform
LFO Waveform p.258
AUTOFADE
AutoFade
Note On All Note Of
Fade-In Rate
Source=Gate1
LFO Freq. Mod=AUTOFADE
LFO Frequency[Hz]=1.0
Amount=+3.0
LFO Frequency
=1.0+3.0=4.0Hz
LFO Frequency
=1.0Hz
Gate1 Signal
AUTOFADE
Fade-In Dealy
AutoFade LFO Frequency
Wet / Dry
Delay
Delay
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Shape
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
278
051: 2Voice Resonator
Thiseffectresonatestheinputsignalataspecifiedpitch.
Youcansetthepitch,outputlevel,andpansettingsfortwo
resonatorsindividually.Youcancontroltheresonance
intensityviaanLFO.
a: Control Mode
g: Voice 1: Resonance
i: Voice 2: Resonance
Thisparameterdeterminestheresonanceintensity.
WhenControlMode=Manual,theResonanceparameter
setstheintensityofresonance.IftheResonanceparameter
hasanegativevalue,harmonicswillbechanged,and
resonancewilloccuratapitchoneoctavelower.
WhenControlMode=LFO,theintensityofresonance
variesaccordingtotheLFO.TheLFOswaysbetween
positiveandnegativevalues,causingresonancetooccur
betweenspecifiedpitchesanoctaveapartinturn.
WhenControlMode=Dmod,theresonanceiscontrolled
bythedynamicmodulationsource.IfJSXisassignedasthe
modulationsource,thepitchanoctavehigherandlowercan
becontrolled,similartowhenLFOisselectedforControl
Mode.
a: LFO/D-mod Invert
WhenControlMode=LFOorDmod,thecontrolledphase
ofeitherVoice1or2willbereversed.Whentheresonance
pitchissetforVoice1(Resonancehasapositivevalue),
Voice2willresonateatapitchanoctavebelow(Resonance
hasanegativevalue).
f: Voice 1: Pitch
f: Fine [cent]
h: Voice 2: Pitch
h: Fine [cent]
ThePitchparameterspecifiesthepitchofresonancebynote
name.TheFineparameterallowsforfineadjustmentin
stepsofcents.
d
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.259
e
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
f
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
g
L Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...500.0 Sets the left channel delay time
R Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...500.0 Sets the right channel delay time
h Depth 0...200
modulation
i
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
High Damp
[%]
0...100
p.272
j
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.272
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Control
Mode
Manual, LFO,
D-mod
Switches the controls of
resonance intensity p.278
LFO/D-mod
Invert
Off, On
Reverses the Voice 1 and 2
control when LFO/D-mod is
selected p.278
b
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
D-mod Src Off...Tempo
that controls resonance intensity
c
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
Left
Right
Resonance
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
High Damp
Trim
Trim
+
Level
Level Pan
Pan
Control Mode
D
-mod
LFO
Manual
Invert: On/Of
Resonator
Resonator
Pitch, Fine [cents]
d
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
e
Mod. Depth 100...+100
Sets the amount of resonance
intensity control via LFO/D-mod
Trim 0...100
Sets the input level at the
resonator
f
Voice1: Pitch C0...B8
Sets the voice1 Pitch for
resonance p.278
Fine [cent] 50...+50
Fine-adjusts the voice 1 pitch for
resonance p.278
Level 0...100 Sets the Voice1 output level
g
Voice1:
Resonance
100...+100
Sets the intensity of resonance
when Control Mode = Manual
p.278
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping amount of
resonant sound in the high
range p.279
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Sets the Voice1 stereo image
h
Voice2: Pitch C0...B8
Sets the voice 2 Pitch for
resonance p.278
Fine [cent] 50...+50
Fine-adjusts the voice 2 pitch for
resonance p.278
Level 0...100 Sets the Voice2 output level
i
Voice2:
Resonance
100...+100
Sets the intensity of resonance
when Control Mode = Manual
p.278
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping amount of
resonant sound in the high
range p.279
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Sets the Voice2 stereo image
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 :99... 99
: 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 052: Doppler
279
g: High Damp [%]
i: High Damp [%]
Thissetstheamountofdampingamountforthehigh
frequenciesoftheresonantsound.Lowervaluescreatea
metallicsoundwithahigherrangeofharmonics.
052: Doppler
ThiseffectsimulatestheDopplereffectofamovingsound
withachangingpitch,similartothesirenofanpassing
ambulance.Mixingtheeffectsoundwiththedrysoundwill
createauniquechoruseffect.
a: LFO Mode
a: Src
b: LFO Sync
TheLFOModeparameterswitchesLFOoperationmode.
WhenLoopisselected,theDopplereffectwillbecreated
repeatedly.IfLFOSyncissettoOn,theLFOwillbereset
whenthemodulationsourcespecifiedwiththeSrc
parameteristurnedon.
WhenLFOModeissetto1Shot,theDopplereffectis
createdonlyoncewhenthemodulationsourcespecifiedin
theSrcfieldisturnedon.Atthistimeifyoudonotsetthe
Srcparameter,theDopplereffectwillnotbecreated,andno
effectsoundwillbeoutput.
specifiedfortheSrcparameterissmallerthan64,and
theeffectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.The
Dopplereffectistriggeredwhenthevaluechanges
from63orsmallerto64orhigher.
f: Pitch Depth
WiththeDopplereffect,thepitchisraisedwhenthesound
approaches,andthepitchisloweredwhenthesoundgoes
away.Thisparametersetsthispitchvariation.
g: Pan Depth
Thisparametersetsthewidthofthestereoimageofthe
effectsound.Withlargervalues,thesoundseemstocome
andgofrommuchfurtheraway.Withpositivevalues,the
soundmovesfromlefttoright;withnegativevalues,the
soundmovesfromrighttoleft.
053: Scratch
Thiseffectisappliedbyrecordingtheinputsignaland
movingthemodulationsource.Itsimulatesthesoundof
scratchesyoucanmakeusingaturntable.
a
LFO Mode Loop, 1-Shot
Switches LFO operation mode
p.279
Src Off...Tempo
LFO reset p.279
b LFO Sync Off, On
Switches between LFO reset on
and off when LFO Mode is set to
Loop p.279
c
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
d
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
e
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
f
Pitch Depth 0...100
Sets the pitch variation of the
moving sound p.279
Src Off...Tempo
pitch variation
Amt 100...+100
pitch variation
g
Pan Depth 100...+100
Sets the panning of the moving
sound p.279
Src Off...Tempo
panning
Amt 100...+100
panning
h
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Pan Depth
D
-mod
+
Trigger LFO Mode = 1-Shot
Doppler
LFO
a
Scratch
Source
Off...Tempo
for simulation control p.280
b Response 0...100
Sets the speed of the response
to the Scratch Src p.280
c
Envelope
Select
D-mod, Input
Selects whether the start and
end of recording is controlled via
the modulation source or the
input signal level p.280
Src Off...Tempo
that controls recording when
Envelope Select is set to D-mod
p.280
Pitch
H
i
g
h
e
r
Doppler - Pitch / Pan Depth
L
o
w
e
r
Original Pitch
Left
Center
Right
Pitch Depth
Pan Depth
< < < < < <<<<<< >>>>>> > > > > >
Volume Louder Louder
Pan Depth
= () value
Pan Depth
= (+) value
Input
D-mod
Envelope Select
D
-mod
Envelope Control
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Scratch
Direct
Mix
D
-mod
Rec Control Scratch
280
a: Scratch Source
b: Response
TheScratchSourceparameterenablesyoutoselectthe
modulationsourcethatcontrolssimulation.Thevalueofthe
modulationsourcecorrespondstotheplaybackposition.
TheResponseparameterenablesyoutosetthespeedofthe
responsetothemodulationsource.
c: Envelope Select
c: Src
d: Threshold
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoDmod,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenthemodulationsourcevalueis64or
higher.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoInput,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenitslevelisovertheThresholdvalue.
Themaximumrecordingtimeis2,730msec.Ifthisis
exceeded,therecordeddatawillstartbeingerasedfromthe
top.
e: Response
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthespeedoftheresponse
totheendofrecording.Setasmallervaluewhenyouare
recordingaphraseorrhythmpattern,andsetahighervalue
ifyouarerecordingonlyonenote.
f: Direct Mix
WithAlwaysOn,adrysoundisusuallyoutput.With
AlwaysOff,drysoundsarenotoutput.WithCrossFade,a
drysoundisusuallyoutput,anditismutedonlywhen
scratching.
SetWet/DrytoWettousethisparametereffectively.
054: Grain Shifter
Thiseffectcutsextremelyshortsamples(grains)fromthe
inputsignalwaveformandplaysthemrepeatedly,givinga
mechanicalcharactertothesound.
a: Duration
c: LFO Sample Cycle [Hz]
Durationsetsthelengthofthesampledgrain,andtheLFO
SampleCyclecontrolshowoftenanewgrainissampled.In
betweenSampleCycles,thecurrentgrainisrepeated
continuously.
d Threshold 0...100
Sets the recording start level
when Envelope Select is set to
Input p.280
e Response 0...100
to the end of recording p.280
f Direct Mix
Always On,
Always Off,
Cross Fade
Selects how a dry sound is mixed
p.280
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
+ Max
Zero
Scratch!
D
-mod
Max
JS X
JS+Y
JSY
etc
Zero + Max
Scratch Source
Recorded Sound
Scratch Source
Start Playback Position End
a
Duration 0...100
Sets the duration of the grain
p.280
Src Off...Tempo
modulate the duration of the
grain
Amt 100...+100
grain duration will be modulated
b LFO Sync Src Off...Tempo
that will reset the LFO
c
LFO Sample
Cycle [Hz]
0.02...20.00
grain will be switched p.280
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
d
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
e
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
f
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1: 99... 99
: 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
+
Left
Right
Sample Cycle
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO
D
-mod
Trigger
Grain Shifter
In
Out
Sample Cycle / Duration
Sample Cycle
Duration
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 055: Stereo Tremolo
281
055: Stereo Tremolo
Thiseffectmodulatesthevolumeleveloftheinputsignal.
Theeffectisstereo,andoffsettingtheLFOoftheleftand
rightphasesfromeachotherproducesatremoloeffect
betweenleftandright.
a: LFO Waveform
ThisparametersetsthebasicshapeoftheLFO.TheVintage
waveformmodelsclassicguitaramptremolo.
b: LFO Phase [degree]
Thisparameterdeterminesthedifferencebetweentheleft
andrightLFOphases.Ahighervaluewillsimulatetheauto
paneffectinwhichthesoundispannedbetweenleftand
right.
056: TEX Treml (TEX Tremolo)
Thismodelsthehighlyacclaimedtremolocircuitthatwas
builtintoaUSmadecomboamp.TheSpreadsettinglets
youcreateapaneffectthatwaversbetweenleftandright.
057: St. Env. Tremolo (Stereo
Envelope Tremolo)
Thiseffectusestheinputsignalleveltomodulateastereo
tremolo(LFOvolumemodulation).Forinstance,youcan
createatremoloeffectthatbecomesdeeperandfasterasthe
inputgetsmorequiet.
a
LFO
Waveform
Triangle, Sine,
Vintage, Up,
Down
Selects the LFO Waveform
p.281
LFO Waveform p.258
b
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.281
c
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
d
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
e
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
f
Depth 0...100
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
the depth of modulation
Amt 100...+100
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down LFO Shape
Tremolo
Tremolo
Tremolo - LFO Waveform
Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down
a
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the tremolo speed
Src Off...Tempo
Speed [Hz]
Amt 100...+100
Speed [Hz]
b
Depth 0...100 Select the tremolo depth
Src Off...Tempo
Depth
Amt 100...+100
Depth
c Spread 0...100
Sets the width of the stereo
image of the effect sound
d Level Adjust 1...100 Sets the output level
e
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Sets the envelopes sensitivity to
the input signal
Envelope
Shape
100...+100 Sets the envelopes curvature
b
LFO
Waveform
Triangle, Sine,
Vintage
LFO Waveform p.258
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Spread
LFO
Tremolo
Tremolo
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
Envelope Sens
+ Envelope
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage
Envelope Shape
Tremolo
Tremolo
282
d: LFO Frequency [Hz]
d: Envelope Amount [Hz]
e: Depth
e: Envelope Amount
Thegraphicbelowshowsanexampleoftremolo
modulationwithnegativemodulationofbothDepthand
Frequency.Atthestartofthenote,theinputisatmaximum
volume.ThisslowsdowntheLFOFrequencyto1.0Hz,but
alsomodulatestheDepthto0sothetremolodoesnthave
anyeffect.
Astheinputvolumediesdown,theFrequencyspeedsup;
theDepthalsoincreases,makingthetremoloeffect
increasinglyaudible.Whentheinputvolumeapproaches
silence,theDepthisatitsmaximum(100)andFrequencyis
at8Hz.
058: Stereo Auto Pan
Thisisastereoin,stereooutautopanner.ThePhaseand
Shapeparametersletsyoucreatevariouspanningeffects,
suchasmakingtheleftandrightinputsseemtochaseeach
otheraroundthestereofield.
a: LFO Shape
YoucanchangethepanningcurvebymodifyingtheLFOs
Shape.
b: LFO Phase [degree]
Thisdeterminesthephasedifferencebetweentheleftand
rightLFOs.Whenyougraduallychangethevalueaway
from0,thesoundsfromtheleftandrightchannelswillseem
tochaseeachotheraround.Ifyousettheparameterto+180
or180,thesoundsfromeachchannelwillcrossovereach
other.
Youllonlyheartheeffectofthisparameteriftheinputis
truestereo,withdifferentsignalsintheleftandright
channels.
c
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.281
d
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Sets the speed of the LFO
p.282
Envelope
Amount [Hz]
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the amount added to or
subtracted from the Frequency
when the envelope is at
maximum p.282
e
Depth 0...100
Sets the initial amount of
tremolo p.282
Envelope
Amount
100...+100
Sets the amount added to or
subtracted from the Depth when
the envelope is at maximum
p.282
f
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
LFO
Waveform
LFO Waveform p.282
b
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.282
Level
L
o
u
d
e
r
Time
Shimmer
LFO Frequency[Hz]=8.0
Envelope Amount[Hz]= 7.0Hz
Depth=100
Envelope Amount= 100
Dry Envelope
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
Pan
Pan
LFO: Tri / Sin
Depth
c
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
d
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
e
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
f
Depth 0...100
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
L-In
Left Center Right
Output Stereo Image
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
LFO Phase = 0 degrees LFO Phase = 90 degrees LFO Phase = 180 degrees
Stereo Auto Pan - LFO Phase
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 059: St. Phaser + Trml (Stereo Phaser + Tremolo)
283
059: St. Phaser + Trml (Stereo
Phaser + Tremolo)
Thiseffectcombinesastereophaserandtremolo,with
linkedLFOs.Swellingphasermodulationandtremolo
effectssynchronizewitheachother,creatingasoothing
modulationeffectparticularlysuitableforelectricpiano.
a: Type
a: LFO Phase [degree]
SelectthetypeofphaserLFOandtremoloLFOfortheType
parameter.Howtheeffectsoundmovesorrotatesdepends
onthetypeofLFO.SelectingLFOPhaseenablesyouto
offsetthetimingofthephaserpeakandcontrolasubtle
movementandrotationofthesound.
g: Phaser Wet/Dry
j: Wet/Dry
PHASERWet/Drysetsthebalancebetweenthephaser
outputandthedrysound.OUTPUTWet/Drysetsthe
balancebetweenthefinalphaserandtremolooutputlevel
andthedrysound.
060: St. Ring Modulator
(Stereo Ring Modulator)
Thiseffectcreatesametallicsoundbyapplyingthe
oscillatorstotheinputsignal.UsetheLFOorDynamic
Modulationtomodulatetheoscillatortocreatearadical
modulation.Matchingtheoscillatorfrequencywithanote
numberwillproducearingmodulationeffectinspecifickey
ranges.
a
Type
Phaser -
Tremolo,
...
Phaser LR -
Tremolo LR
Selects the type of the tremolo
and phaser LFOs p.283
Phaser - Tremolo,
Phaser - Tremolo Spin,
Phaser - Tremolo LR,
Phaser LR - Tremolo,
Phaser LR - Tremolo Spin, Phaser
LR - Tremolo LR
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
Sets the phase difference
between the tremolo and phaser
LFOs p.283
b
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the LFO speed modulation
amount
c
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
d
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
e
Phaser
Manual
0...100 Sets the phaser frequency range
Sets the phaser resonance
amount
f
Phaser Depth 0...100
Sets the phaser modulation
depth
Src Off...Tempo
for the phaser modulation depth
Amt 100...+100
the phaser modulation depth
g
Phaser Wet/
Dry
Wet, 2 :
98...Dry... 2 :
98, Wet
phaser effect and dry sounds
p.283
h
Tremolo
Shape
100...+100
Sets the degree of the tremolo
LFO shaping
i
Tremolo
Depth
0...100
Sets the tremolo modulation
depth
Src Off...Tempo
for the tremolo modulation
depth
Amt 100...+100
the tremolo modulation depth
Phaser
Phaser
Left
Right
Resonance
LFO Type
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Phaser Wet / Dry
Phaser Wet / Dry
LFO
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
Tremolo
Tremolo
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
p.283
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
OSC Mode
Fixed, Note
(Key Follow)
Switching between specifying
the oscillator frequency and
using a note number
p.284
Pre LPF 0...100
Sets the damping amount of the
high range input to the ring
modulator p.284
b
Fixed
Frequency
[Hz]
0...12.00k
when OSC Mode is set to Fixed
p.284
Src Off...Tempo
for the oscillator frequency when
OSC Mode is set to Fixed
Amt
12.00k...
+12.00k
the oscillator frequency when
OSC Mode is set to Fixed
c
Note Offset 48...+48
Sets the pitch difference from the
original note when OSC Mode is
set to Note (Key Follow)
p.284
Note Fine 100...+100
Fine-adjusts the oscillator
frequency p.284
d Direct Mix 0...100
Direct signal (after passing
through the pre-low-pass filter)
mixed into the ring modulation
output
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Ring Modulator
Pre LPF
Ring Modulator
Note No.
OSC Mode
Fixed
Note (Key Follow)
Fixed Frequency
Pitch
Note Ofset, Fine
Sine Oscillator
LFO
Direct Mix
284
a: OSC Mode
Thisparameterdetermineswhetherornottheoscillator
frequencyfollowsthenotenumber.
a: Pre LPF
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthedampingamountof
thehighrangesoundinputtotheringmodulator.Ifthe
inputsoundcontainslotsofharmonics,theeffectmay
sounddirty.Inthiscase,cutacertainamountofhighrange.
b: Fixed Frequency [Hz]
ThisparametersetstheoscillatorfrequencywhenOSC
ModeissettoFixed.
c: Note Offset
c: Note Fine
TheseparametersfortheoscillatorareusedwhenOSC
ModeissettoNote(KeyFollow).TheNoteOffsetsetsthe
pitchdifferencefromtheoriginalnoteinsemitonesteps.
TheNoteFineparameterfineadjuststhepitchincentsteps.
Matchingtheoscillatorfrequencywiththenotenumber
producesaringmodulationeffectinthecorrectkey.
061: Detune
Usingthiseffect,youcanobtainadetuneeffectthatoffsets
thepitchoftheeffectsoundslightlyfromthepitchofthe
inputsignal.Comparedtothechoruseffect,amorenatural
soundthicknesswillbecreated.
d: Input Level D-mod [%]
d: Src
Thisparametersetsthedynamicmodulationoftheinput
level.
d
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
e
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
f
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
g
LFO Depth 0...100
modulation for the oscillator
frequency
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
h
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Pitch Shift
[cent]
100...+100
the input signal
Src Off...Tempo
pitch shift
Amt 100...+100
pitch shift
b
Delay Time
[msec]
0...1000 Sets the delay time
c
Feedback 100...+100 Sets the feedback amount
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
d
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
the input level p.284
Src Off...Tempo
for the input level p.284
e
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level
Input Level
+
High Damp
Delay
Feedback
Detune
Input Level
L
o
u
d
e
r
Max Zero
Higher
D
-mod
Input Level
Max Zero
Higher
D
-mod
x1.0
x0.5 Input Level Dmod= +100
Input Level Dmod= +50
L
o
u
d
e
r
x1.0
x0.5
Input Level Dmod= 100
Input Level Dmod= 50
Input Level Dmod
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 062: Pitch Shifter
285
062: Pitch Shifter
Thiseffectchangesthepitchoftheinputsignal.Youcan
selectfromthreetypes:Fast(quickresponse),Medium,and
Slow(preservestonalquality).Youcanalsocreateaneffect
inwhichthepitchisgraduallyraised(ordropped)usingthe
delaywithfeedback.
a: Mode
Thisparameterswitchesthepitchshifteroperatingmode.
WithSlow,tonalqualitywillnotbechangedtoomuch.With
Fast,theeffectbecomesaPitchShifterthathasaquick
response,butmaychangethetone.Mediumisinbetween
thesetwo.Ifyoudonotneedtosettoomuchpitchshift
amount,setthisparametertoSlow.Ifyouwishtochange
thepitchsignificantly,useFast.
b: Pitch Shift [1/2tone]
b: Src
b: Amt
c: Fine [cent]
c: Amt
TheamountofpitchshiftwillusethevalueofthePitch
ShiftplustheFinevalue.Theamountofmodulationwill
usetheb:Amtvalueplusthec:Amt.
ThesameModulationSourceisusedforbothPitchShift
andFine.
e: Feedback Position
f: Feedback
WhenFeedbackPositionissettoPre,thepitchshifter
outputisagaininputtothepitchshifter.Therefore,ifyou
specifyahighervaluefortheFeedbackparameter,thepitch
willberaised(orlowered)moreandmoreeachtime
feedbackisrepeated.
IfFeedbackPositionissettoPost,thefeedbacksignalwill
notpassthroughthepitchshifteragain.Evenifyouspecify
ahighervaluefortheFeedbackparameter,thepitchshifted
soundwillberepeatedatthesamepitch.
063: Pitch Shifter BPM
Thispitchshifterenablesyoutosetthedelaytimetomatch
thesongtempo.
d: BPM
e: Delay Base Note
e: Times
ThedelaytimeisthedurationofTimesnumberofDelay
BaseNotenotevaluesattheBPMtempo(orifBPMissetto
MIDI,thetempodeterminedbyMIDIClock).
d: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto5,290msec.Ifthedelaytime
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearson
thedisplay.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthis
messagewillnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplay
parameter.
a Mode
Slow,
Medium, Fast
Switches Pitch Shifter mode
p.285
b
Pitch Shift [1/
2tone]
24...+24
Sets the pitch shift amount by
steps of a semitone p.285
Src Off...Tempo
pitch shift amount p.285
Amt 24...+24
c
Fine [cent] 100...+100
Sets the pitch shift amount by
steps of a cent p.285
Amt 100...+100
d
Delay Time
[msec]
0...2000 Sets the delay time
e
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post
Switches the feedback
connection p.285
f
Feedback 100...+100
p.285
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
g
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
h
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level
Input Level
+
High Damp
Delay
Feedback
Pitch Shifter
Feedback Position
Pre
Post
a Mode
Slow,
Medium, Fast
p.285
b
Pitch Shift [1/
2tone]
24...+24
Sets the pitch shift amount in
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 24...+24
c
Fine [cent] 100...+100
steps of one cent p.285
Amt 100...+100
d
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Time Over? ---, OVER!
Displays an error message when
the delay time exceeds the
upper limit p.285
e
Delay Base
Note
,...
specify the delay time p.285
Times x1...x32
f
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post
connection p.285
g
Feedback 100...+100
p.285
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
h
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level
Input Level
+
High Damp
Delay
Feedback
Pitch Shifter
Feedback Position
Pre
Post
Tempo
286
064: Pitch Shift Mod. (Pitch
Shift Modulation)
Thiseffectmodulatesthedetunedpitchshiftamountusing
anLFO,addingaclearspreadandwidthtothesoundby
panningtheeffectsoundanddrysoundtotheleftandright.
Thisisespeciallyeffectivewhentheeffectsoundanddry
soundoutputfromstereospeakersaremixed.
a: Pitch Shift [cent]
f: Depth
Theseparameterssettheamountofpitchshiftandamount
ofmodulationbymeansoftheLFO.
g: Pan
h: Wet/Dry
ThePanparameterpanstheeffectsoundanddrysoundto
theleftandright.WithL,theeffectsoundispannedleft,and
thedrysoundispannedright.WithaWet/Dry=Wetsetting,
theeffectanddrysoundwillbeoutputinaproportionof
1:1.
065: Organ Vib/Chorus (Organ
Vibrato/Chorus)
Thiseffectsimulatesthechorusandvibratocircuitryofa
vintageorgan.Themodulationspeedanddepthcanbe
customized.
b: Control Mode
c: Preset Type
d: Custom Mix
e: Custom Depth
f: Custom Speed [Hz]
IfControlMode=Preset,youcanusec:PresetTypetoselect
theeffect.Inthiscase,theCustomMix/Depth/Speedsettings
areignored.IfControlMode=Custom,theCustomMix/
a
Pitch Shift
[cent]
100...+100
the input signal p.286
b
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Square
c
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src Off...Tempo
LFO speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO speed
d
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
e
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
f
Depth 100...+100
Sets the LFO modulation depth
for pitch shift amount p.286
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
g Pan
L, 1 : 99...99 :
1, R
Sets the panning effect sound
and dry sound separately
p.286
h
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
effect and the dry input p.286
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sqr
Pan
+ Pitch Shifter
Pitch
H
i
g
h
e
r
Pitch Shift Mod - Pitch Shift / Depth
L
o
w
e
r
Original Pitch
Pitch Shift (+ value)
LFO Waveform=Triangle
Depth (+value)
LFO Waveform=Square
Depth (value)
a Input Trim 0...100 Sets the input level
b
Control
Mode
Preset,
Custom
Selects either preset or custom
settings p.286
c
Preset Type
V1, C1, V2, C2,
V3, C3
Selects the effect type when
Mode=Preset
V1/V2/V3 are variations of
vibrato, and C1/C2/C3 are varia-
tions of chorus p.286
Src Off...Tempo
that will change the effect type
Amt 5...+5
changing the effect type
p.287
d
Custom Mix
Vibrato,
1:99...99:1,
Chorus
Sets the mix level of the direct
sound when Mode=Preset
p.286
Src Off...Tempo
that will control the mix level of
the direct sound
Amt 100...+100
controlling the mix level of the
direct sound
e
Custom
Depth
0...100 Sets the vibrato depth p.286
Src Off...Tempo
that will control vibrato depth
Amt 100...+100
controlling the vibrato depth
f
Custom
Speed [Hz]
0.02...20.00 Sets the vibrato speed p.286
Src Off...Tempo
for controlling the vibrato speed
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
controlling the vibrato speed
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
+ Vibrato/Chorus
Mode
Preset Setting
CustomParameters
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 066: Rotary Speaker
287
Depth/Speedsettingsarevalid,andthec:PresetType
settingisignored.
c: Amt
IfPresetType=V1andSrc=JS+Y,youcansetthisto+5and
moveJS+Ytocontroltheeffectintheorderof
V1C1V2C2V3C3.
066: Rotary Speaker
Thiseffectsimulatesarotaryspeaker,andobtainsamore
realisticsoundbysimulatingtherotorinthelowrangeand
thehorninthehighrangeseparately.Theeffectalso
simulatesthestereomicrophonesettings.
a: Sw
Thisparametersetshowthemodulationsourceswitches
betweenrotationandstop.
WhenSw=Toggle,thespeakerrotatesorstopsalternately
eachtimeyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via
MIDI,rotationwillswitchbetweenstartandstopeachtime
themodulationamountexceeds64.
WhenSw=Moment,thespeakerrotatesbydefault,and
stopsonlywhenyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.
ViaMIDI,modulationvaluesabove64makethespeaker
rotate,andvaluesbelow64makeitstop.
b: Speed Switch
Thisparametercontrolshowtherotationspeed(slowand
fast)isswitchedviathemodulationsource.
WhenSw=Toggle,thespeedwillswitchbetweenslowand
fasteachtimeyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via
MIDI,thespeedwillswitcheachtimethemodulation
amountexceeds64.
WhenSw=Moment,thespeedisusuallyslow.Itbecomes
fastonlywhenyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via
MIDI,modulationvaluesabove64setthespeedtoFast,and
valuesbelow64setittoSlow.
c: Manual Speed Ctrl
Ifyouwishtocontroltherotationspeedmanually,instead
ofswitchingbetweenSlowandFast,selectamodulation
sourceintheManualSpeedCtrlparameter.Ifyoudont
wanttousemanualcontrol,setthistoOff.
d: Horn Acceleration
e: Rotor Acceleration
Onarealrotaryspeaker,therotationspeedacceleratesor
deceleratesgraduallyafteryouswitchthespeed.TheHorn
andRotorAccelerationparameterssetthetransitiontimes
betweenfastandslowspeeds.
g: Mic Distance
g: Mic Spread
Thisisasimulationofstereomicrophonesettings.
a
Mode Switch Rotate, Stop
Switches between speaker
rotation and stop
Src Off...Tempo
Rotate/Stop
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for Rotate/
Stop modulation
p.287
b
Speed Switch Slow, Fast
Switches the speaker rotation
speed between slow and fast
p.287
Src Off...Tempo
Slow/Fast
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for Slow/
Fast modulation
p.287
c
Manual
Speed Ctrl
Off...Tempo
Sets a modulation source for
direct control of rotation speed
p.287
d
Horn
Acceleration
0...100
How quickly the horn rotation
speed in the high range is
switched p.287
Horn Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (high-range side)
horn rotation speed. Standard
value is 1.00. Selecting Stop will
stop the rotation
e
Rotor
Acceleration
0...100
Determines how quickly the
rotor rotation speed in the low
range is switched p.287
Rotor Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (low-frequency) rotor
speed. Standard value is 1.00.
Selecting Stop will stop the
rotation
f
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Rotor, 1...99,
Horn
Sets the level balance between
the high-frequency horn and
low-frequency rotor
g
Mic Distance 0...100
Sets the distance between the
microphone and rotary speaker
p.287
Mic Spread 0...100
Sets the angle of left and right
microphones p.287
h
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
D
-mod
D
-mod
D
-mod
Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop
Speed Switch: Slow/Fast
Manual Speed Control
Speaker Simulation
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Horn
Rotary Speaker
Rotor
+
Mic Spread
Microphone Microphone
Mic Distance Mic Distance
Rotary Speaker (Top View)
Rotary Speaker - Mic Placement
288
067: St.EP Tone+Trml (Stereo
EP Tone+Tremolo)
Thisfaithfullysimulatesthepreampsectionandvibrato
(tremolo)effectfromafamousmodeloftinetypeelectric
piano.
d: Sw
WhenthisissettoToggle,theVibratoSwitchwillalternate
betweenonandoff.Forinstance,ifvibratoisoff,andSrcis
assignedtoafootswitch,thefirstpresswillturnonthe
Vibrato,andthenextpresswillturnitoffagain.
Momentarymeansthatthechangehappensonlywhilethe
controllerisenabled.Continuingtheexamplefromabove,
whenthefootswitchispresseddown,theVibratowillturn
on;whenthefootswitchisreleased,theVibratowillturnoff
again.
Srcletsyouswitchtotheoppositeoftheprogrammed
setting.Forinstance,ifvibratoison,andtheSwissetto
Moment,thenpressingdownonthefootswitchwouldturn
offtheVibrato.
Ifyousetmodulationsourcetouseacontinuouscontroller,
suchastheJoystick,valuesof063areasiftheswitchwas
off,andvaluesof64127areasiftheswitchwason.
Finallynotethattheassignableswitches,SW1andSW2,
canthemselvesbesettoeithermomentortogglemodes,
andthesesettingsarereflectedbytheswitchLEDs.
Individualparametersettings,suchasthevibratoon/offand
Sw,donotaffecttheLEDs.
So,ifyoureusingSW1orSW2asthemodulationsource,its
besttosettheSwtoMoment,andthenjustlettheswitch
itselfdeterminethemomentary/togglebehavior.
a Volume 0100
Sets the volume level of the
preamp
b Treble 10.0+10.0
Sets the high-frequency boost or
cut.
c Bass 10.0+10.0
This controls the low-frequency
boost or cut.
d
Vibrato Switch On, Off Switches Vibrato on/off
Src Off...Tempo
Vibrate on/off
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
switches the Vibrate on and off
p.288
e
Vibrato
Intensity
1...100
Sets the intensity of LFO
modulation
Src Off...Tempo
Intensity
Amt 100...+100
Intensity
f
Vibrato
Speed
00.0100 Sets the LFO speed
Src Off...Tempo
Speed
Amt 100...+100
Speed
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Delay 068: L/C/R Delay
289
Delay
068: L/C/R Delay
ThismultitapdelayoutputsthreeTapsignalstotheleft,
right,andcenterrespectively.Youcanalsoadjusttheleft
andrightspreadofthedelaysound.
e: High Damp [%]
e: Low Damp [%]
Theseparameterssetthedampingamountofhighrange
andlowrange.Thetoneofthedelayedsoundbecomes
darkerandlighterasitfeedsback.
g: Spread
Thisparametersetsthepanwidthoftheeffectsound.The
stereoimageiswidestwithavalueof50,andtheeffect
soundofbothchannelsisoutputfromthecenterwitha
valueof0.
069: Stereo/CrossDelay
Thisisastereodelay,andcanbyusedasacrossfeedback
delayeffectinwhichthedelaysoundscrossoverbetween
theleftandrightbychangingthefeedbackrouting.
a
L Delay Time
[msec]
0...2730 Sets the delay time of TapL
Level 0...50 Sets the output level of TapL
b
C Delay Time
[msec]
0...2730 Sets the delay time of TapC
Level 0...50 Sets the output level of TapC
c
R Delay Time
[msec]
0...2730 Sets the delay time of TapR
Level 0...50 Sets the output level of TapR
d
Feedback
(C Delay)
100...+100
Sets the feedback amount of
TapC
Src Off...Tempo
the TapC feedback amount
Amt 100...+100
the TapC feedback amount
e
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
f
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
g Spread 0...50
p.289
h
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
C Delay
R Delay
Left
Right
Feedback
Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
L Delay
Input Level D-mod
+
Level
Level
Level
a Stereo/Cross Stereo, Cross
Switches between stereo delay
and cross-feedback delay
b
L Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0
channel
c
R Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0
channel
d
L Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback amount for
the left channel
Src Off...Tempo
feedback amount
Amt L 100...+100
the left channel feedback
e
R Feedback 100...+100
the right channel
Amt R 100...+100
the right channel feedback
f
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
g
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
h
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
i Spread 50...+50
p.289
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Delay
Delay
Stereo/Cross
Left
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Spread
Stereo/Cross
290
070: St. Multitap Delay (Stereo
Multitap Delay)
TheleftandrightMultitapDelayshavetwotaps
respectively.Changingtheroutingoffeedbackandtap
outputallowsyoutocreatevariouspatternsofcomplex
effectsounds.
a: Mode
Youcanchangehowtheleftandrightdelaysignalsare
pannedbymodifyingtheroutingoftheleftandrightdelay
asshowninthefigureabove.Youneedtoinputdifferent
soundstoeachchannelinorderforthisparametertobe
effective.
d: Tap1 Level
ThisparametersetstheoutputlevelofTap1.Settinga
differentlevelfromTap2willaddauniquetouchtoa
monotonousdelayandfeedback.
071: St. Mod Delay (Stereo
Modulation Delay)
ThisstereodelayusesanLFOtosweepthedelaytime.The
pitchalsovaries,creatingadelaysoundwhichswellsand
shimmers.Youcanalsocontrolthedelaytimeusinga
modulationsource.
a Mode
Normal, Cross
Feedback,
Cross Pan1,
Cross Pan2
Switches the left and right delay
routing p.290
b
Tap1 Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0 Sets the Tap1 delay time
c
Tap2 Time
[msec]
d Tap1 Level 0...100
Sets the Tap1 output level
p.290
e
Feedback
(Tap2)
Src Off...Tempo
the Tap2 feedback amount
Amt 100...+100
f
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
g
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
h
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
i
Spread 100...+100
p.289
Src Off...Tempo
the effect sounds stereo image
width
Amt 100...+100
width
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Feedback
Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Delay
Feedback
Tap1 Level Mode Mode
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Tap1=(1)
Tap2=(2)
Mode: Normal Mode: Cross Feedback Mode: Cross Pan1 Mode: Cross Pan2
a
Modulation
Mode
LFO, D-mod
Switches between LFO
modulation control and
modulation source control
b
D-mod
Modulation
L/R:+/+,
L/R:+/
Reversed L/R control by
modulation source p.291
Src Off...Tempo
that controls delay time
Response 0...30
Sets the rate of response to the
modulation source
c
LFO
Waveform
LFO Waveform p.258
d
LFO D-mod
Sync
Off, On
Switches LFO reset off/on
p.291
Src Off...Tempo
that resets the LFO
e
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
f
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
g
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
h
L LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase obtained when
the left LFO is reset p.291
L Depth 0...200
Sets the depth of the left LFO
modulation
i
R LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
the right LFO is reset p.291
R Depth 0...200
Sets the depth of the right LFO
modulation
j
L Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...1000.0
channel
Sets the feedback amount of left
delay
k
R Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...1000.0
channel
right delay
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Modulation Mode
D-mod
LFO
D
-mod
Delay
Delay
L/R: +/+ +/
LFO Shape
Response
LFO Sync
Delay 072: St. Dynamic Delay (Stereo Dynamic Delay)
291
b: D-mod Modulation
Whenthemodulationsourceisusedforcontrol,this
parameterreversestheleftandrightmodulationdirection.
d: LFO D-mod Sync
d: Src
h: L LFO Phase [deg]
i: R LFO Phase [deg]
IfLFODmodSyncisOn,theLFOwillberesetbythe
modulationsourcethatisreceived.
TheSrcparametersetsthemodulationsourcethatresetsthe
LFO.Forexample,youcanassignGateasamodulation
sourcesothatthesweepalwaysstartsfromthespecified
point.
LLFOPhaseandRLFOPhasesetthephaseobtainedwhen
theleftandrightLFOsarereset.Inthisway,youcancreate
changesinpitchsweepfortheleftandrightchannels
individually.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueofthemodulationsource
specifiedintheSrcparameteris63orsmaller,andthe
effectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.TheLFOis
triggeredandresettotheLLFOPhaseandRLFO
Phasesettingswhenthevaluechangesfrom63or
smallerto64orhigher.
072: St. Dynamic Delay (Stereo
Dynamic Delay)
Thisstereodelaycontrolsthelevelofdelayaccordingtothe
inputsignallevel.Youcanusethisasaduckingdelaythat
appliesdelaytothesoundonlywhenyouplaykeysata
highvelocityoronlywhenthevolumelevelislow.
a: Control Target
Thisparameterselectsnolevelcontrol,delayoutputcontrol
(effectbalance),orfeedbackamountcontrol.
a: Polarity
b: Threshold
b: Offset
c: Attack
d: Release
TheOffsetparameterspecifiesthevaluefortheControl
Targetparameter(thatissettoNone),expressedastheratio
relativetotheparametervalue(theWet/Dryvaluewith
ControlTarget=OutputLevel,ortheFeedbackvaluewith
ControlTarget=Feedback).
WhenPolarityispositive,theControlTargetvalueis
obtainedbymultiplyingtheparametervaluebytheOffset
value(iftheinputlevelisbelowthethreshold),orequalsthe
parametervalueiftheinputlevelexceedsthethreshold.
WhenPolarityisnegative,ControlTargetvalueequalsthe
parametervalueiftheinputlevelisbelowthethreshold,or
isobtainedbymultiplyingtheparametervaluebythe
Offsetvalueifthelevelexceedsthethreshold.
l
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Control
Target
None, Out, FB
Selects from no control, output,
and feedback p.291
Polarity +, Reverses level control p.291
b
Threshold 0...100
Sets the level to which the effect
is applied p.291
Offset 0...100
Sets the offset of level control
p.291
c Attack 1...100
Sets the attack time of level
control p.291
d Release 1...100
Sets the release time of level
control p.291
e
L Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0
channel
f
R Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0
channel
g Feedback 100...+100 Sets the feedback amount
h
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
i Spread 100...+100
p.289
j
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Delay
Left
Right
Feedback Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp LowDamp
Threshold
Delay
FB Out
Control Target Attack, Release Envelope +
292
TheAttackandReleaseparametersspecifyattacktimeand
releasetimeofdelaylevelcontrol.
073: St. AutoPanningDly
(Stereo Auto Panning Delay)
Thisstereodelayeffectpansthedelaysoundleftandright
usingtheLFO.
Dynamic Delay
Threshold
Dry
Envelope
Wet
Target=Output Level
Polarity= ()
Wet
Target=Output Level
Polarity= (+)
Delay Time
Time
(Ducking Delay)
Release
Attack
Level
a
L Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0
channel
the left channel
b
R Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0
channel
the right channel
c
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
d
LFO
Waveform
LFO Waveform p.258
e
Phase
[degree]
180...+180
p.282
f
Panning
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00 Sets the panning speed
g
MIDI Sync Off, On
Switches between using the
frequency of the panning speed
and using the tempo and notes
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
specify the delay time for the
panning speed p.257
Times x1...x32
panning speed p.257
h
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
i
Panning
Depth
0...100 Sets the panning width
Src Off...Tempo
for the panning width
Amt 100...+100
Set the modulation amount of
the panning width
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
Pan
Pan
LFO: Tri / Sin
Depth
Delay
Delay
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Feedback
Delay 074: Echo Plus
293
074: Echo Plus
Thismodelsafamousanalogtapeechounit.Ontheoriginal
device,echowascreatedbyaplaybackhead,andthe
delaytimewasspecifiedbyadjustingthespeedofthe
motor.Thewarmthandsubtletyoftheechoesitgenerated
madethislofiunitafavoritewithmanypromusicians.
075: Tape Echo
Thiseffectsimulatesatapeechounitwiththreeplayback
heads.Thedistortionandtonalchangetypicalofmagnetic
tapearealsoreproduced.
a: Delay (Tap1) [msec]
a: Src
a: Amt
b: Tap2 Position [%]
b: Tap3 Position [%]
ThedelaytimeforTap2and3isspecifiedasaproportion
(%)relativetoDelay(Tap1).Evenifyouusedynamic
modulationtocontrolDelay(Tap1),Tap2and3willchange
atthesameproportion.
d: Feedback Amt
e: Feedback Amt
f: Feedback Amt
g: Feedback
ThefeedbackoutputfromTap1,2,and3ismixedaccording
totheFeedbackAmt,andthenthefinalamountoffeedback
isspecifiedbyFeedback.
076: Auto Reverse
Thiseffectrecordstheinputsignalandautomaticallyplays
itinreverse(theeffectissimilartoatapereversesound).
a
Time [ms] 0...2700 Sets the delay time
Src Off...Tempo
Time [ms]
Amt 100...+100 Sets the amount for Time [ms]
b
Feedback 0...100 Sets the amount of feedback
Src Off...Tempo
Feedback
Amt 100...+100 Sets the amount of Feedback
c Tone 1...100 Sets the tone of the delay sound
d
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
e
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Input Level
Mod Src
Off...Tempo
f
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Delay (Tap1)
[msec]
0...2700
Sets the delay time (tap1)
p.293
Src Off...Tempo
the delay time p.293
Amt
2700...
+2700
delay time p.293
b
Tap2 Position
[%]
0...100
Sets the position of Tap 2 relative
to the Tap 1 delay time the
depth of pitch variation
p.293
c
Tap3 Position
[%]
0...100
p.293
d
Tap1 Level 0...100 Sets the Tap1 output level
Pan L, 1...99, R Sets the stereo image of tap1
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
p.293
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Delay
Feedback
Low Damp Tone
Input Level
D-mod
WahFlatter
D
-mod
Tap2/3
Position
+
Tape
Saturation
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
Pan Level
Wet / Dry
Wet:MonoIn- StereoOut / Dry:StereoIn- StereoOut
Feedback
FeedbackAmt
High/ Low Damp PreTone
Delay
(1)
(2)
(3)
DelayTime
e
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
p.293
f
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
p.293
g
Feedback 0...100
Sets the amount of feedback for
Taps 1, 2, and 3 p.293
Src Off...Tempo
feedback amount
Amt 100...+100 Sets the feedback amount
h
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range
i Saturation 0...100 Sets the distortion amount
j
Input Trim 0...100 Sets the input gain
Pre Tone 0...100 Sets the tone of the input
k
Wow Flutter
[Hz]
0.02...1.00
Sets the frequency at which
pitch variation will occur
Wow Flutter
depth
0...100 Sets the depth of pitch variation
l
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a Rec Mode Single, Multi
Sets the recording mode
p.294
b
Reverse Time
[msec]
20...2640
Sets the maximum duration of
the reverse playback p.294
Input
D-mod
Envelope Select
D
-mod
Envelope Control
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Auto Reverse
Direct
Mix
Rec/Reverse Play
Control
294
a: Rec Mode
b: Reverse Time [msec]
WhenRecModeissettoSingle,youcansetupto2,640msec
forReverseTime.Ifrecordingstartsduringthereverse
playback,theplaybackwillbeinterrupted.
WhenRecModeissettoMulti,youcanmakeanother
recordingduringthereverseplayback.However,the
maximumReverseTimeislimitedto1,320msec.
Ifyouwishtorecordaphraseorrhythmpattern,setRec
ModetoSingle.Ifyourecordonlyonenote,setRecModeto
Multi.
TheReverseTimeparameterspecifiesthemaximum
durationofthereverseplayback.Thepartinexcessofthis
limitwillnotbeplayedinreverse.Ifyouwishtoaddshort
piecesofthereverseplaybackofsinglenotes,makethe
ReverseTimeshorter.
c: Envelope Select
c: Src
d: Threshold
Theseparametersselectthesourcetocontrolthestartand
endofrecording.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoDmod,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenthevalueofthemodulationsource
selectedbytheSrcparameteris64orhigher.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoInput,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenitslevelexceedstheThresholdlevel.
Whenrecordingiscompleted,reverseplaybackstarts
immediately.
077: Sequence BPM Dly
(Sequence BPM Delay)
Thisfourtapdelayenablesyoutoselectatempoand
rhythmpatterntosetupeachtap.
a: BPM
b: Rhythm Pattern
WiththetempospecifiedbytheBPMparameter(orthe
MIDIClocktempoifBPMissettoMIDI),thelengthofone
beatequalsthefeedbackdelaytime,andtheinterval
betweentapsbecomesequal.Selectingarhythmpatternwill
automaticallyturnthetapoutputsonandoff.WhenBPMis
settoMIDI,thelowerlimitoftheBPMis44.
c
Envelope
Select
D-mod, Input
Selects whether the start and
end of recording is controlled via
the modulation source or the
input signal level p.294
Src Off...Tempo
that controls recording when
p.294
d Threshold 0...100
Sets the recording start level
when Envelope Select is set to
Input p.294
e Response 0...100
to the end of recording p.280
f Direct Mix
Always On,
Always Off,
Cross Fade
Selects how a dry sound is mixed
p.280
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Rec Rec
Mode/Reverse Time
Input
Mode = Single
Mode = Multi
Time
Reverse Time Reverse Time
Envelope Select = Input
Reverse Reverse
a BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
b
Rhythm
Pattern
,...,,,
_ Selects a rhythm pattern
p.294
c
Tap1 Pan L, 1...99, R Sets the panning of Tap1
d
Feedback 100...+100 Sets the feedback amount
Src Off...Tempo
feedback amount
Amt 100...+100 Sets the feedback amount
e
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
f
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Delay
Left
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
Input Level D-mod
+
Tempo
BPM
BPM
RythmPattern
Pan
Delay 078: L/C/R BPM Delay
295
078: L/C/R BPM Delay
TheL/C/Rdelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytimewith
thesongtempo.Youcanalsosynchronizethedelaytime
withthearpeggiatororsequencer.Ifyouprogramthetempo
beforeperformance,youcanachieveadelayeffectthat
synchronizeswiththesonginrealtime.Delaytimeissetby
notes.
a: Time Over?
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearsinthe
display.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessage
willnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplayparameter.
079: Stereo BPM Delay
Thisstereodelayenablesyoutosetthedelaytimetomatch
thesongtempo.
a: Time Over? L, R
a
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
upper limit p.295
b
L Delay Base
Note
,...
specify the delay time for TapL
p.285
Times x1...x32
p.285
c
C Delay Base
Note
,...
specify the delay time for TapC
p.285
Times x1...x32
p.285
d
R Delay Base
Note
,...
specify the delay time for TapR
p.285
Times x1...x32
p.285
e
Feedback
(C Delay)
100...+100
TapC
Src Off...Tempo
for the TapC feedback
Amt 100...+100
the TapC feedback
f
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
g
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
h Spread 0...50
p.289
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
C Delay
Left
Right
Feedback
Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
L Delay
Input Level D-mod
+
Level
Level
Level
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
R Delay
a
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Time Over? L ---, OVER!
Display the error message if the
left channel delay time exceeds
the upper limit p.295
R ---, OVER!
right channel delay time exceeds
b
L Delay Base
Note
,...
specify the left channel delay
time p.285
Times x1...x32
time p.285
Adjust [%] 2.50...+2.50
Fine-adjust the left channel delay
time
c
R Delay Base
Note
,...
specify the right channel delay
time p.285
Times x1...x32
time p.285
Adjust [%] 2.50...+2.50
Fine-adjust the right channel
delay time
d
the left channel
Src Off...Tempo
feedback amount
Amt L 100...+100
e
the right channel
Amt R 100...+100
f
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
g
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
h
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Adjust [%]
Adjust [%]
Delay
Delay
296
080: St.BPM Mtap Delay (Stereo
BPM Multitap Delay)
Thisisastereomultitappeddelaythatletsyousetthedelay
timetomatchthetempoofthesong.
081: St.BPM Mod. Delay (Stereo
BPM Modulation Delay)
Thisisastereomodulationdelaythatletsyousynchronize
thedelaytimetothetempoofthesong.
a Mode
Normal, Cross
Feedback,
Cross Pan1,
Cross Pan2
Switches the left and right delay
routing p.290
b
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Time Over? 1 ---, OVER!
the delay time for Tap1 exceeds
the upper limit
p.295
2 ---, OVER!
the delay time for Tap2 exceeds
the upper limit
p.295
c
Tap 1 Base
Note
,...
specify the delay time for Tap1
p.285
Times x1...x32
p.285
d
Tap 2 Base
Note
,...
p.285
Times x1...x32
p.285
e Tap1 Level 0...100
p.290
f
Feedback
(Tap2)
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
g
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
h
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
i
Spread 100...+100
p.289
Src Off...Tempo
width
Amt 100...+100
width
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Left
Right
Feedback
Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Delay
Feedback
Tap1 Level Mode Mode
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Tap1=(1)
Tap2=(2)
a
Modulation
Mode
LFO, D-mod
Switches between LFO
modulation control and
modulation source control
b
D-mod
Modulation
L/R:+/+,
L/R:+/
Reversed L/R control by
modulation source p.291
Src Off...Tempo
that controls delay time
Response 0...30
Sets the rate of response to the
modulation source
c
LFO
Waveform
LFO Waveform p.258
d
LFO D-mod
Sync
Off, On
Switches LFO reset off/on
p.291
Src Off...Tempo
that resets the LFO
e
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
f
MIDI Sync Off, On
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
Times x1...x32
g
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
h
L LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
the left LFO is reset p.291
Depth 0...200
Sets the depth of the left LFO
modulation
i
R LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
the right LFO is reset p.291
Depth 0...200
Sets the depth of the right LFO
modulation
j
BPM(Delay)
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
R ---, OVER!
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Modulation Mode
D-mod
LFO
D
-mod
Delay
Delay
L/R: +/+ +/
LFO Shape
Response
LFO Sync
Delay 082: St.BPMAutoPanDly (Stereo BPM Auto Panning Delay)
297
j: Time Over? L, R
082: St.BPMAutoPanDly (Stereo
BPM Auto Panning Delay)
Thisstereoautopanningdelayenablesyoutosetthedelay
timetomatchthesongtempo.
083: Tape Echo BPM
Thisisatapeechothatletsyousynchronizethedelaytime
tothetempoofthesong.
k
L Delay Base
Note
,...
time p.285
Times x1...x32
time p.285
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback amount of left
delay
l
R Delay Base
Note
,...
time p.285
Times x1...x32
time p.285
Feedback 100...+100
right delay
m
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
R ---, OVER!
b
L Delay Base
Note
,...
time p.285
Times x1...x32
time p.285
Feedback 100...+100
the left channel
c
R Delay Base
Note
,...
time p.285
Times x1...x32
time p.285
Feedback 100...+100
the right channel
d
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
Pan
Pan
LFO: Tri / Sin
Depth
Delay
Delay
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Feedback
e
LFO
Waveform
Shape 100...+100
LFO Waveform p.258
LFO Phase 180...+180
p.281
f
Panning
Frequen-
cyuency [Hz]
0.02...20.00 Sets the panning speed p.257
g
MIDI Sync Off, On
When this is on, the pan LFO
speed is set by BPM, Base Note,
and Times, instead of Frequency
p.257
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note ,...
panning speed p.257
Times x1...x32
panning speed p.257
h
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
LFO2 p.257
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.257
i
Panning
Depth
0...100 Sets the panning width
Src Off...Tempo
for the panning width
Amt 100...+100
Set the modulation amount of
the panning width
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
BPM (Delay)
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Tap1 Dmod
Src
Off...Tempo
the delay time p.298
b
Tap1 Delay
Note
,...
specify the delay time (tap1)
p.285, p.298
Times x1...x32
specify the delay time (tap1)
p.285, p.298
upper limit p.298
c
Tap1 Dmod
Note
,...
Selects the note value used to
specify the delay time when the
modulation is at maximum
p.298
Times x1...x32
Specifies the number of notes
used to specify the delay time
when the modulation is at
maximum p.298
Wah Flatter
D
-mod
Tap2/3 Position
+
Tape
Saturation
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
Pan Level
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Feedback Amt
High / Low Damp Pre Tone
Delay
(1)
(2)
(3)
Delay Time
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Tempo
298
a: Tap1 Dmod Src
b: Tap1 Delay Note
b: Times
c: Tap1 Dmod Note
c: Times
IfTap1DmodSrcisOffortheselectedmodulationisat0,
thedelaytimewillbethelengthspecifiedbyTap1Delay
NoteandTimes.
IfTap1DmodSrcisotherthanOff,thedelaytimewill
changesothatitwillbeasspecifiedbyTap1DmodNote
andTimeswhenthemaximummodulationisreached.
b: Time Over?
d
Tap2 Position
[%]
0...100
p.293
e
Tap3 Position
[%]
0...100
p.293
f
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
p.293
g
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
p.293
h
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
p.293
i
Feedback 0...100
Sets the amount of feedback for
Taps 1, 2, and 3 p.293
Src Off...Tempo
feedback amount
Amt 100...+100
Sets the depth by which
feedback amount will be
modulated
j
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range
k Saturation 0...100 Sets the distortion amount
l
Input Trim 0...100 Sets the input gain
Pre Tone 0...100 Sets the tone of the input
m
Wow Flutter
[Hz]
0.02...1.00
Sets the frequency at which
pitch variation will occur
Wow Flutter
depth
0...100 Sets the depth of pitch variation
n
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Reverb and Early Reflections (Reverb ER) 084: Reverb Hall
299
Reverb and Early Reflections (Reverb ER)
084: Reverb Hall
Thishalltypereverbsimulatesthereverberationofmidsize
concerthallsorensemblehalls.
085: Reverb SmoothHall
Thishalltypereverbsimulatesthereverberationoflarger
hallsandstadiums,andcreatesasmoothrelease.
086: Reverb Wet Plate
Thisplatereverbsimulateswarm(dense)reverberation.
087: Reverb Dry Plate
Thisplatereverbsimulatesdry(light)reverberation.
b: Pre Delay [msec]
b: Pre Delay Thru [%]
ThePreDelaysetsthedelaytimetothereverbinput,
allowingyoutocontrolspaciousness.
UsingthePreDelayThruparameter,youcanmixthedry
soundwithoutdelay,emphasizingtheattackofthesound.
088: Reverb Room
Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflectionsthat
makethesoundtighter.Changingthebalancebetweenthe
earlyreflectionsandreverbsoundallowsyoutosimulate
nuances,suchasthetypeofwallsofaroom.
089: Reverb BrightRoom
Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflectionsthat
makethesoundbrighter.
c: ER Level
d: Reverb Level
Theseparameterssettheearlyreflectionlevelandreverb
level.
a
Reverb Time
[sec]
0.1...10.0 Sets the reverberation time
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
b
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Sets the delay time from the dry
sound p.299
Pre Delay
Thru [%]
0...100
Sets the mix ratio of non-delay
sound p.299
c EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
d
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
range equalizer
e
Pre LEQ Gain
[dB]
15.0...+15.0 Sets the gain of Low EQ
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
15.0...+15.0 Sets the gain of High EQ
f
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
+
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
Pre Delay Reverb
Pre Delay Thru
a
Reverb Time
[sec]
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
b
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
sound p.299
Pre Delay
Thru [%]
0...100
Sets the mix ratio of non-delay
sound p.299
c ER Level 0...100
Sets the level of early reflections
p.299
d Reverb Level 0...100
Sets the reverberation level
p.299
e EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
f
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
range equalizer
g
Pre LEQ Gain
[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
h
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Time
Reverb - Hall / Plate Type
Level
L
o
u
d
e
r
Dry
Reverb
Pre Delay Thru
Pre Delay Reverb Time
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
+
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
Pre Delay Reverb Reverb Level
ER Level
ER Level
Pre Delay Thru
ERs
ERs
300
Changingtheseparametervaluesallowsyoutosimulatethe
typeofwallsintheroom.Thatis,alargerERLevel
simulatesahardwall,andalargerReverbLevelsimulatesa
softwall.
090: Reverb2 Spring
TheReverb2typereverbsReverb2SpringReverb2Room
haveadifferentsoniccharacterthanRev.HallRev.Room2.
Theymodelthespringreverbsystemsthatarebuiltinto
someamps.
091: Reverb2 Hall
Thismodelsthereverberationofaconcerthallthatincludes
numerousechocomponents.
092: Reverb2 Plate
Thismodelsatypeofreverbunitthatvibratesametalplate
ratherthansprings.Thereverbtimeisrelativelyshort.
Becausethereverberationhasafastattack,itissuitablefor
percussiveplaying.
093: Reverb2 Room
Thismodelsthereverberationofatypicalroomthat
includesnumerousearlyreflections.
Time
Inthesereverbs,Timeisnotexpressedinseconds,but
insteadisavaluefrom1to100.Avalueof1producesthe
shortestreverb,and100providesthelongestreverb.
094: Early Reflections
Thiseffectisonlytheearlyreflectionpartofareverberation
sound,andaddspresencetothesound.Youcanselectone
ofthefourdecaycurves.
a: Type
Thisparameterselectsthedecaycurvefortheearly
reflection.
a Time [sec] 0...100 Sets the reverberation time p.300
b
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
c
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range
d
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...70
sound p.299
e
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Reverb - Room Type
Time
Level
L
o
u
d
e
r
ER
(Early Refections)
Dry
Reverb
Pre Delay Thru
Pre Delay Reverb Time
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Pre Delay Reverb
a Type
Sharp, Loose,
Modulated,
Reverse
Selects the decay curve for the
early reflection p.300
b
ER Time
[msec]
10...800
Sets the time length of early
reflection
c
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Sets the time taken from the
original sound to the first early
reflection
d EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the input level of EQ applied
to the effect sound
e
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
range equalizer
f
Pre LEQ Gain
[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
+
EQ Trim
Pre Delay Early Refections
LEQ HEQ
Sharp
Loose
Modulated
Early Refections - Type
Reverse
Dry
Pre Delay ER Time
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 095: P4EQ - Exciter (Parametric 4-Band EQ - Exciter)
301
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono)
095: P4EQ - Exciter (Parametric 4-
Band EQ - Exciter)
Thiseffectcombinesamonofourbandparametricequalizer
andanexciter.
096: P4EQ - Wah (Parametric 4-
Band EQ - Wah/Auto Wah)
andawah.Youcanchangetheorderoftheconnection.
P4EQ
a [E]Trim 0...100
Sets the parametric EQ input
level
b
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Band 1
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
Gain [dB] 18...+18 Sets the gain of Band 1
c
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
Band 2
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
d
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Band 3
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
e
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Band 4
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
EXCITER
f
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
g
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
Sets the frequency range to be
emphasized p.256
h
Wet/Dry
Dry,1 : 99... 99
: 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Trim
+ Exciter
Parametric 4Band EQ Exciter
P4EQ
a
[E]Trim 0...100
level
Routing
P4EQ Wah,
Wah P4EQ
Changes the order of the
parametric equalizer and wah
connection
b
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Band 1
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
c
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
Band 2
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
d
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Band 3
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
e
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Band 4
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
WAH
f
[W]Frequenc
y Bottom
0...100
Frequency
Top
0...100
g
[W]Sweep
Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
LFO p.257
Src Off...Tempo
Mode=D-mod
h
[W]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LPF Off, On
on and off
i
[W]Wet/Dry
Dry,1 : 99... 99
: 1, Wet
Sets the wah effect balance
Src Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry modulation
source for the wah
Amt 100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry modulation
amount for the wah
j
Wet/Dry
Dry,1 : 99... 99
: 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Trim
+
Parametric 4Band EQ
Routing
Wah/Auto Wah
D
-mod
Envelope
Sweep Mode
D-mod
Auto
LFO
LFO
Wah
302
097: P4EQ - Cho/Flng
(Parametric 4-Band EQ -
Chorus/Flanger)
andachorus/flanger.
i: [F]Output Mode
WhenWetInvertisselected,therightchannelphaseofthe
chorus/flangereffectsoundisinverted.Thiscreatespseudo
stereoeffectsandaddsspread.
However,ifamonoinputtypeeffectisconnectedafterthis
effect,theleftandrightsoundsmaycanceleachother,
eliminatingthechorus/flangereffects.
098: P4EQ - Phaser (Parametric 4-
Band EQ - Phaser)
andaphaser.
P4EQ
a [E]Trim 0...100
level
b
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Band 1
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
c
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
Band 2
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
d
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Band 3
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
e
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Band 4
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
CHORUS/FLANGER
f
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
g
[F]Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...1350.0 Sets the delay time
Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
h
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the effect balance of the
chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src Off...Tempo
source for the chorus/flanger
Amt 100...+100
amount for the chorus/flanger
i
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the output mode for the
chorus/flanger p.302
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
+
Parametric 4Band EQ Chorus/Flanger
Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
P4EQ
a [E]Trim 0...100
level
b
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Band 1
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
c
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
Band 2
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
d
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Band 3
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
e
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Band 4
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
PHASER
f
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
g
[P]Manual 0...100
effect is applied
Depth 0...100
modulation
p.274
h
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the phaser effect balance
p.259, p.274
Src Off...Tempo
source for the phaser
Amt 100...+100
amount for the phaser
i
[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the phaser output mode
p.305
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Trim
+
Parametric 4Band EQ Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 099: P4EQ - Mt. Delay (Parametric 4-Band EQ - Multitap Delay)
303
099: P4EQ - Mt. Delay
(Parametric 4-Band EQ -
Multitap Delay)
andamultitapdelay.
100: Comp - Wah (Compressor -
Wah/Auto Wah)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandawah.Youcan
changetheorderoftheconnection.
P4EQ
a [E]Trim 0...100
level
b
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Band 1
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
c
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
Band 2
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
d
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Band 3
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
e
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Band 4
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
MULTITAP DELAY
f
[D]Tap1 Time
[msec]
Tap1 Level 0...100
p.290
g
[D]Tap2 Time
[msec]
Feedback
(Tap2)
h
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
high range
i
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the multitap delay effect
balance
Src Off...Tempo
source for the multitap delay
Amt 100...+100
amount for the multitap delay
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Trim
+
Parametric 4Band EQ Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
COMPRESSOR
a
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100 Sets the sensitivity p.251
b
[C]Attack 1...100 Sets the attack level p.251
Sets the compressor output level
p.251
c [C]EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
d
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15 Sets the gain of Low EQ
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15 Sets the gain of High EQ
WAH
e
[W]Frequenc
y Bottom
0...100
Frequency
Top
0...100
f
[w]Sweep
Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
LFO
Src Off...Tempo
Mode=D-mod
g
[W]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LPF Off, On
on and off
h
[W]Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src Off...Tempo
source for the wah
Amt 100...+100
amount for the wah
i Routing
CompWah,
Wah Comp
Switches the order of the
compressor and wah
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Compressor
Routing
Wah/Auto Wah
Wah
D
-mod
Envelope
Sweep Mode
D-mod
Auto
LFO
LFO
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Comp
304
101: Comp - Amp Sim
(Compressor - Amp Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
102: Comp - OD/HiGain
(Compressor - Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandanoverdrive/
highgaindistortion.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
COMPRESSOR
a
[C]
Sensitivity
b
p.251
d
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
AMP SIM
e
[A]Amplifier
Type
SS, EL84, 6L6
Selects the type of guitar
amplifier
f Routing
CompAmp,
AmpComp
compressor and amp simulation
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Compressor
Routing
Amp Simulation
Amp Simulation Filter
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Comp
COMPRESSOR
a
[C]
Sensitivity
b
p.251
OD/HI-GAIN
c
[O]
Drive Mode
Overdrive, Hi-
Gain
high-gain distortion
Drive 1...100
p.263
d
[O]Output
Level
0...50
Sets the overdrive output level
p.263
Src Off...Tempo
for the overdrive output level
Amt 50...+50
the overdrive output level
e
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
f
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 1 p.255
g
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 2 p.255
h
[O]Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the overdrive effect balance
Src Off...Tempo
source for the overdrive
Amt 100...+100
amount for the overdrive
i Routing
CompOD/
HG,
OD/HG
Comp
compressor and overdrive
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Drive
Driver
Compressor
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Comp
Wet / Dry
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 103: Comp - P4EQ (Compressor - Parametric 4-Band EQ)
305
103: Comp - P4EQ (Compressor -
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandafourband
parametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
104: Comp - Cho/Flng
(Compressor - Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandachorus/
flanger.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
h: [F]Output Mode
i: Routing
WhenWetInvertisselected,therightchannelphaseofthe
chorus/flangereffectsoundisinverted.Thiscreatespseudo
stereoeffectsandaddsspread.
However,ifamonoinputtypeeffectisconnectedafterthis
effect,theleftandrightsoundsmaycanceleachother,
eliminatingthechorus/flangereffects.
WhenRoutingissettoFlangerComp,[F]OutputMode
willbesettoNormal.
COMPRESSOR
a
[C]
Sensitivity
b
p.251
P4EQ
c [E]Trim 0...100
level
d
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Band 1
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
e
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
Band 2
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
f
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Band 3
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
g
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Band 4
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
h Routing
CompP4EQ,
P4EQ Comp
compressor and parametric EQ
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Compressor
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Comp
COMPRESSOR
a
[C]
Sensitivity
b
p.251
d
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
CHORUS/FLANGER
e
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
f
[F]Delay Time
[msec]
Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
g
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
h
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
i Routing
Comp
Flanger,
Flanger
Comp
compressor and chorus/flanger
p.305
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Compressor Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Comp
Output Level
Envelope - Control
306
105: Comp - Phaser
(Compressor - Phaser)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandaphaser.You
canchangetheorderoftheeffects.
106: Comp - Mt. Delay
(Compressor - Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandamultitap
delay.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
COMPRESSOR
a
[C]
Sensitivity
b
p.251
d
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
PHASER
e
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
f
[P]Manual 0...100
effect is applied
Depth 0...100
modulation
p.274
g
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.274
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
h
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
p.302
i Routing
Comp
Phaser,
Phaser
Comp
compressor and phaser
p.305
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Compressor
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Comp
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
COMPRESSOR
a
[C]
Sensitivity
b
p.251
d
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
MULTITAP DELAY
e
[D]Tap1 Time
[msec]
Tap1 Level 0...100
p.290
f
[D]Tap2 Time
[msec]
Feedback
(Tap2)
g
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
high range p.289
h
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
balance
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
i Routing
Comp
Mt.Delay,
Mt.Delay
Comp
compressor and multitap delay
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Compressor
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Comp
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 107: Limiter - P4EQ (Limiter - Parametric 4-Band EQ)
307
107: Limiter - P4EQ (Limiter -
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandafourband
parametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
a: [L]Ratio
a: Threshold [dB]
c: [L]Gain Adjust [dB]
Thisparametersetsthesignalcompression[L]Ratio.
Compressionisappliedonlywhenthesignallevelexceeds
theThresholdvalue.
AdjusttheoutputlevelusingtheGainAdjustparameter,
sincecompressioncausestheentireleveltobereduced.
108: Limiter - Cho/Flng
(Limiter - Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandachorus/flanger.
Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
LIMITER
a
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
compressor is applied
p.307
b
[L]Attack 1...100 Sets the attack time
Release 1...100 Sets the release time
c
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Sets the limiter output gain
p.307
P4EQ
d [E]Trim 0...100
level
e
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Band 1
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
f
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
Band 2
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
g
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Band 3
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
h
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Band 4
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
i Routing
LimiterP4EQ,
P4EQ Limiter
Switches the order of the limiter
and parametric EQ
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Limiter
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
LIMITER
a
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
b
c
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
p.307
CHORUS/FLANGER
d
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
e
[F]Delay Time
[msec]
Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
f [F]EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
g
[F]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
h
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
Input Level
Output Level
Threshold
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Ration=Inf : 1
Louder
L
o
u
d
e
r

Time
Level
Threshold
Ratio=Inf : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Dry Ratio=1.0 : 1
Limiter - Threshold / Ratio
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Limiter
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine
308
109: Limiter - Phaser
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandaphaser.Youcan
changetheorderoftheeffects.
110: Limiter - Mt.Delay
(Limiter - Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandamultitapdelay.
i
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Routing
Limiter
Flanger,
Flanger
Limiter
and chorus/flanger
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
LIMITER
a
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
b
c
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
p.307
PHASER
d
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
e
[P]Manual 0...100
effect is applied
Depth 0...100
modulation
p.274
f
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.274
Src Off...Tempo
Selects the phasers Wet/Dry
modulation source
Amt 100...+100
Sets the phasers Wet/Dry
modulation amount
g
[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
p.302
h Routing
Limiter
Phaser,
Phaser
Limiter
and phaser p.305
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Limiter
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
LIMITER
a
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
b
c
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
p.307
MULTITAP DELAY
d
[D]Tap1 Time
[msec]
Tap1 Level 0...100 Sets the Tap1 output level p.290
e
[D]Tap2 Time
[msec]
Feedback 100...+100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount
f
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
high range p.289
g
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
balance
Src Off...Tempo
Selects the multitap delays Wet/
Dry modulation source
Amt 100...+100
Sets the multitap delays Wet/Dry
modulation amount
h Routing
Limiter
Mt.Delay,
Mt.Delay
Limiter
and multitap delay
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Limiter
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 111: Exciter - Comp (Exciter - Compressor)
309
111: Exciter - Comp (Exciter -
Compressor)
Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandacompressor.You
canchangetheorderoftheeffects.
112: Exciter - Limiter
Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandalimiter.Youcan
changetheorderoftheeffects.
EXCITER
a
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
b
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
emphasized p.256
c [X]EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
d
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
COMPRESSOR
e
[C]
Sensitivity
f
p.251
g Routing
Exciter
Comp,
Comp
Exciter
Switches the order of the exciter
and compressor
h
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Compressor
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Comp
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Exciter
Exciter
EXCITER
a
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
b
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
emphasized p.256
c [X]Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
d
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
LIMITER
e [L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
p.307
f
[L]Threshold
[dB]
40...0
g [L]Attack 1...100 Sets the attack time
h
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
p.307
i Routing
Exciter
Limiter,
Limiter
Exciter
Switches the order of the exciter
and limiter
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Exciter
Exciter Limiter
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
310
113: Exciter - Cho/Flng (Exciter -
Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandachorus/flanger.
114: Exciter - Phaser
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandaphaser.
EXCITER
a
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
b
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
emphasized p.256
d
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
CHORUS/FLANGER
e
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
f
[F]Delay Time
[msec]
Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
g
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
h
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Exciter
Exciter
EXCITER
a
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
b
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
emphasized p.256
d
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
PHASER
e
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
f
[P]Manual 0...100
effect is applied
Depth 0...100
modulation
p.274
g
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.274
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
h
[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
p.302
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Exciter
Exciter Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 115: Exciter - Mt.Delay (Exciter - Multitap Delay)
311
115: Exciter - Mt.Delay (Exciter
- Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandamultitapdelay.
116: OD/HG - Amp Sim
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Amp
Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonooverdrive/highgaindistortion
andanampsimulation.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
EXCITER
a
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
b
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
emphasized p.256
d
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
MULTITAP DELAY
e
[D]Tap1 Time
[msec]
Tap1 Level 0...100
p.290
f
[D]Tap2 Time
[msec]
Feedback
(Tap2)
g
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
high range p.289
h
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
balance
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Exciter
Exciter
OD/HI-GAIN
a
[O]Drive
Mode
Overdrive, Hi-
Gain
Drive 1...100
p.263
b
[O]Output
Level
0...50
p.263
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 50...+50
e
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
f
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 1 p.255
g
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 2 p.255
AMP SIM
h
[A]Amplifier
Type
SS, EL84, 6L6
amplifie
i Routing
OD/HG
Amp,
Amp
OD/HG
overdrive and amp
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Amp Simulation
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Drive
Driver
312
117: OD/HG - Cho/Flng
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Chorus/
Flanger)
andachorus/flanger.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
118: OD/HG - Phaser
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Phaser)
andaphaser.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
OD/HI-GAIN
a
[O]Drive
Mode
Overdrive, Hi-
Gain
Drive 1...100
p.263
b
[O]Output
Level
0...50
p.263
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 50...+50
e
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
f
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 1 p.255
g
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 2 p.255
CHORUS/FLANGER
h
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
i
[F]Delay Time
[msec]
Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
j
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
k
[F]Output
Mode
Normal, Wet
Invert
Routing
OD/HG
Flanger,
Flanger
OD/HG
overdrive and chorus / flanger
l
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Drive
Driver
OD/HI-GAIN
a
[O]Drive
Mode
Overdrive, Hi-
Gain
Drive 1...100
p.263
b
[O]Output
Level
0...50
p.263
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 50...+50
e
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
f
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 1 p.255
g
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 2 p.255
PHASER
h
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
i
[P]Manual 0...100
effect is applied
Depth 0...100
modulation
p.274
j
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.274
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
k
[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
p.305
Routing
OD/HG
Phaser,
Phaser OD/
HG
overdrive and phaser p.305
l
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Drive
Driver
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 119: OD/HG - Mt.Delay (Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Multitap Delay)
313
119: OD/HG - Mt.Delay
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Multitap Delay)
andamultitapdelay.
120: Wah - Amp Sim (Wah -
Amp Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonowahandanampsimulation.
OD/HI-GAIN
a
[O]Drive
Mode
Overdrive, Hi-
Gain
Drive 1...100
p.263
b
[O]Output
Level
0...50
p.263
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 50...+50
e
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
f
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 1 p.255
g
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 2 p.255
MULTITAP DELAY
h
[D]Tap1 Time
[msec]
Tap1 Level 0...100
p.290
i
[D]Tap2 Time
[msec]
j
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
high range p.289
k
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
balance
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
l
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Drive
Driver
WAH
a
[W]
Frequency
Bottom
0...100
Frequency
Top
0...100
b
[W]Sweep
Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
LFO p.257
Src Off...Tempo
Mode=D-mod
c
[W]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LPF Off, On
on and off
d
[W]Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
source for the wah
Amt 100...+100
amount for the wah
AMP SIM
e
[A]Amplifier
Type
SS, EL84, 6L6
amplifier
f Routing
Wah Amp,
Amp Wah
Switches the order of the wah
and amp simulation
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Wet / Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Amp Simulation
Wah/Auto Wah
Wah
D
-mod
Envelope
Sweep Mode
D-mod
Auto
LFO
LFO
314
121: Decimator - Amp
(Decimator - Amp Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonodecimatorandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
122: Decimator - Comp
(Decimator - Compressor)
Thiseffectcombinesamonodecimatorandacompressor.
123: AmpSim - Tremolo (Amp
Simulation- Tremolo)
Thiseffectcombinesamonoampsimulationandatremolo.
DECIMATOR
a
[D]Pre LPF Off, On
Turn the harmonic noise caused
by lowered sampling on and off
p.262
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the ratio of high-range
damping
b
[D]Sampling
Frequency
[Hz]
1.00k...48.00k Sets the sampling frequency
Resolution 4...24 Sets the data bit length p.262
c
[D]Output
Level
0...100
Sets the decimator output level
p.262
AMP SIM
d
[A]Amplifier
Type
SS, EL84, 6L6
amplifier
e Routing
Decimator
Amp,
Amp
Decimator
decimator and amp simulation
f
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
DECIMATOR
a
[D]Pre LPF Off, On
Turn the harmonic noise caused
by lowered sampling on and off
p.262
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the ratio of high-range
damping
b
[D]Sampling
Frequency
[Hz]
1.00k...48.00k Sets the sampling frequency
Resolution 4...24 Sets the data bit length p.262
c
[D]Output
Level
0...100
Sets the decimator output level
p.262
COMPRESSOR
d
[C]
Sensitivity
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Decimator
Routing
Amp Simulation
Pre LPF High Damp
Output Level
Decimator
Resolution
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Decimator
Routing
Pre LPF High Damp
Output Level
Decimator
Resolution
Compressor
Comp
Output Level
Envelope - Control
e
p.251
f Routing
Decimator
Comp,
Comp
Decimator
decimator and compressor
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
AMP SIM
a
[A]Amplifier
Type
SS, EL84, 6L6
amplifier
TREMOLO
b
[T]LFO
Waveform
Triangle, Sine,
Vintage, Up,
Down
LFO Waveform p.258
c
[T]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
d [T]Depth 0...100
modulation
e
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Amp Simulation Tremolo
Amp Simulation Filter Tremolo
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down LFO Shape
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 124: Cho/Flng - Mt.Dly (Chorus/Flanger - Multitap Delay)
315
124: Cho/Flng - Mt.Dly (Chorus/
Flanger - Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonochorus/flangerandamultitap
delay.
125: Phaser - Cho/Flng (Phaser
- Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonophaserandachorus/flanger.
CHORUS/FLANGER
a
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
b
[F]Delay Time
[msec]
Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
c [F]EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
d
[F]PreLEQ
Gain [dB]
PreHEQ Gain
[dB]
e
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...1 : 99,
Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
chorus/flanger p.259, p.272
MULTITAP DELAY
a
[D]Tap1 Time
[msec]
Tap1 Level 0...100
p.290
b
[D]Tap2 Time
[msec]
c
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
high range p.289
d
[D]Mt.DelayW
et/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
balance
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
e
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
LEQ HEQ EQ
Trim
Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Chorus/Flanger
Cho/Flng
Wet / Dry
Mt.Dly
Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
PHASER
a
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
b
[P]Manual 0...100
effect is applied
Depth 0...100
modulation
p.274
c
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.259, p.274
CHORUS/FLANGER
d
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
e
[F]Delay Time
[msec]
Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
f [F]EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
g
[F]PreLEQ
Gain [dB]
PreHEQ Gain
[dB]
h
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
i
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Chorus/Flanger
Cho/Flng
Wet / Dry
LEQ HEQ EQ
Trim
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
Phaser
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine LFO: Tri / Sine
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
316
126: Reverb - Gate
Thiseffectcombinesamonoreverbandagate.
f: [G]Envelope Select
f: Src
g: [G]Input Reverb Mix
g: Threshold
The[G]EnvelopeSelectparameterenablesyoutoselect
whetherturningthegateonandoffistriggeredbytheinput
signallevelorcontrolleddirectlybythemodulationsource.
YoucanselectfromOfftoGate2+DmprfortheSrc
parametertospecifythemodulationsource.
When[G]EnvelopeSelectissettoInput,thegateis
controlledbythelevelofsignalsthatarethecombinationof
thedrysoundandthereverbsound.Whenthesignallevel
exceedsthethreshold,thegateopensandthereverbsound
isoutput.
Normally,set[G]InputReverbMixtoDry(thegateis
controlledonlybythedrysound).Ifyouwishtoextendthe
gatetime,setthe[G]InputReverbMixvaluehigherand
adjusttheThresholdvalue.
REVERB
a
[R]Reverb
Time [sec]
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
b
[R]Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Sets the delay time of the reverb
sound and gate control signal
c
[R]EQ Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
Reverb
Balance
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the reverb effect balance
d
[R]PreLEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
range equalizer
e
[R]PreLEQ
Gain [dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
GATE
f
[G]Envelope
Select
D-mod, Input
Switches between modulation
source control and input signal
control p.316
Src Off...Tempo
that controls the gate when
p.316
g
[G]Input
Reverb Mix
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
dry and reverb sounds of the
gate control signal p.316
Threshold 0...100
Sets the gate threshold level
p.316
h [G]Polarity +,
Switches between non-invert and
invert of the gate on/off state
p.254
i
[G]Attack 1...100 Sets the attack time p.254
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Reverb
Balance
+
LEQ HEQ
EQ Trim
Reverb Pre Delay
Envelope - Control
D-mod
Input
Envelope Select
Gate
Input Reverb Mix
Reverb
Gate
Gate+Dmpr
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 126: Reverb - Gate
317
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono)
127:P4EQ//P4EQ(Parametric4BandEQ//Parametric4
BandEQ)through171:BPMDl//BPMDl(MultitapBPM
Delay//MultitapBPMDelay)areparalleleffects.
Thepanandeffectbalanceofeacheffectcanbeset
independently.
Inthescreen,theLsideisshownas[1],andtheRsideas
[2].
Theseprovidevariouscombinationsof4bandEQ,
Compressor,Limiter,Exciter,Overdrive,Wah,Chorus/
Flanger,Phaser,andMultitapDelay,asdescribedbelow.
P4EQ (4-band EQ)
Comp (Compressor)
Limiter
Exciter
0D/HG (Overdrive)
P4EQ
b
B1 Cutoff [Hz] 20...1.00k
Band 1
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
c
B2 Cutoff [Hz] 50...5.00k
Band 2
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
d
B3 Cutoff [Hz] 300...10.00k
Band 3
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the bandwidth of Band3
p.255
e
B4 Cutoff [Hz] 500...20.00k
Band 4
Q 0.5...10.0
p.255
f
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
g L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
127
Sets the stereo image
COMPRESSOR
a Sensitivity 1...100 Sets the sensitivity p.251
b Attack 1...100 Sets the attack level p.251
c Output Level 0...100 Sets the output level
e
Pre LEQ Gain
[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
f
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry,1 : 99... 99
: 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
g L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
127
LIMITER
a Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
p.307
b
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
c Attack 1...100 Sets the attack time
d Release 1...100 Sets the release time
e
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
f
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
g L Pan (R Pan)
L000...
C064...R127
EXCITER
a Exciter Blend 100...+100
b
Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
emphasized p.256
c Trim 0...100 Sets the EQ input level
d
Pre LEQ Gain
[dB]
e
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
f
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
g L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
127
OD/HI GAIN
a
Drive Mode
Overdrive, Hi-
Gain
Drive 1...100
p.263
b
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 50...+50
the output level
c
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
d
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 1 p.255
e
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 2 p.255
f
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
g L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
127
318
Wah
Cho/Flng (Chorus / Flanger)
Phaser
BPM Dly (Multi-tap BPM Delay)
WAH
a
Frequency
Bottom
0...100
Frequency
Top
0...100
b
Sweep Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
LFO p.257
Src Off...Tempo
Mode=D-mod
c
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
d Resonance 0...100 Sets the resonance amount
e
Low Pass
Filter
Off, On
on and off
f
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
g L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
127
CHORUS/FLANGER
a
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
LFO
Waveform
b Delay [msec] 0.0...1350.0 Sets the delay time
c
Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
p.272
e
Pre LEQ Gain
[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
f
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
g L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
127
PHASER
a
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
b
LFO
Waveform
c Manual 0...100
effect is applied
d Depth 0...100
modulation
e Resonance 100...+100
p.274
f
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
g L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
127
MULTITAP BPM DELAY
a
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
upper limit p.295
Time Over? R ---, OVER!
upper limit p.295
b
Tap1 Base
Note
,...
Tap1 p.285
Times x1...x32
Tap1 p.285
c
Tap2 Base
Note
,...
Tap2 p.285
Times x1...x32
Tap2 p.285
d
Feedback
(Tap2)
e
High
Damp[%]
0...100
high range p.289
f
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
g L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
127
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 127: P4EQ // P4EQ (Parametric 4-Band EQ // Parametric 4-Band EQ)
319
127: P4EQ // P4EQ (Parametric
4-Band EQ // Parametric 4-
Band EQ)
ThiseffectconnectstwofourbandEQ(p.317)unitsin
parallel.
128: P4EQ // Comp (Parametric
4-Band EQ // Compressor)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)anda
compressor(p.317)inparallel.
129: P4EQ // Limiter (Parametric
4-Band EQ // Limiter)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andalimiter
(p.317)inparallel.
130: P4EQ // Exciter (Parametric
4-Band EQ // Exciter)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andanexciter
(p.317)inparallel.
131: P4EQ // OD/HG
(Parametric 4-Band EQ //
Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andanoverdrive
(p.317)inparallel.
132: P4EQ // Wah (Parametric
4-Band EQ // Wah)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andawah
(p.318)inparallel.
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Parametric 4Band EQ
Parametric 4Band EQ
Parametric 4Band EQ
Envelope - Control
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim
Trim LEQ HEQ
Output Level
Compressor
Parametric 4Band EQ
Compressor
Parametric 4Band EQ
Envelope - Control
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Parametric 4Band EQ
Limiter
Parametric 4Band EQ
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim
Exciter
Parametric 4Band EQ
Exciter
Parametric 4Band EQ
Trim LEQ HEQ
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim
Output Level
Parametric 4Band EQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Parametric 4Band EQ
3 Band PEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
D
-mod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wah / Auto Wah
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wah
LFO Sweep Mode
Envelope
320
133: P4EQ // Cho/Flng
Chorus/Flanger)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andachorus/
flanger(p.318)inparallel.
134: P4EQ // Phaser (Parametric
4-Band EQ // Phaser)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andaphaser
(p.318)inparallel.
135: P4EQ // BPM Dly
Multitap BPM Delay)
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andamultitap
BPMdelay(p.318)inparallel.
136: Comp // Comp
(Compressor // Compressor)
Thiseffectconnectstwocompressor(p.317)unitsinparallel.
137: Comp // Limiter
(Compressor // Limiter)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andalimiter
(p.317)inparallel.
138: Comp // Exciter
(Compressor // Exciter)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andanexciter
(p.317)inparallel.
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Chorus / Flanger
Parametric 4Band EQ
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Phaser
Parametric 4Band EQ
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Multitap BPM Delay
Parametric 4Band EQ
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim LEQ HEQ
Trim LEQ HEQ
Output Level
Output Level
Compressor
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressor
Compressor
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim LEQ HEQ
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressor
Envelope - Control
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Limiter
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim LEQ HEQ
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressor
Exciter
Exciter
Trim LEQ HEQ
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 139: Comp // OD/HG (Compressor // Overdrive Hi.Gain)
321
139: Comp // OD/HG
(Compressor // Overdrive
Hi.Gain)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andanoverdrive
(p.317)inparallel.
140: Comp // Wah (Compressor
// Wah)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andawah(p.318)
inparallel.
141: Comp // Cho/Flng
(Compressor // Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andachorus/
142: Comp // Phaser
(Compressor // Phaser)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andaphaser
(p.318)inparallel.
143: Comp // BPM Dly
(Compressor // Multitap BPM
Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andamultitap
144: Limiter // Limiter
Thiseffectconnectstwolimiter(p.317)unitsinparallel.
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim LEQ HEQ
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressor
Output Level
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
D
-mod
Wah / Auto Wah
Wah
LFO Sweep Mode
Envelope
Trim LEQ HEQ
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressor
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
Trim LEQ HEQ
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressor
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressor
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Multitap BPM Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Trim LEQ HEQ
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Compressor
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Envelope - Control
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiter
Limiter
322
145: Limiter // Exciter
Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andanexciter(p.317)in
parallel.
146: Limiter // OD/HG (Limiter /
/ Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andanoverdrive
(p.317)inparallel.
147: Limiter // Wah
Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andawah(p.318)in
parallel.
148: Limiter // Cho/Fl (Limiter /
/ Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andachorus/flanger
(p.318)inparallel.
149: Limiter // Phaser
Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andaphaser(p.318)in
parallel.
150: Limiter // BPM Dl (Limiter
// Multitap BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsalimiter(p.317)andamultitapBPM
delay(p.318)inparallel.
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiter
Exciter
Exciter
Trim LEQ HEQ
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiter
Output Level
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiter
Wah / Auto Wah
Wah
D
-mod
LFO Sweep Mode
Envelope
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiter
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiter
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Multitap BPM Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiter
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 151: Exciter // Exciter
323
151: Exciter // Exciter
Thiseffectconnectstwoexciter(p.317)unitsinparallel.
152: Exciter // OD/HG (Exciter //
Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
Thiseffectconnectsanexciter(p.317)andanoverdrive
(p.317)inparallel.
153: Exciter // Wah
Thiseffectconnectsanexciter(p.317)andawah(p.318)in
parallel.
154: Exciter // Cho/Fl (Exciter //
Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectsanexciter(p.317)andachorus/flanger
(p.318)inparallel.
155: Exciter // Phaser
Thiseffectconnectsanexciter(p.317)andaphaser(p.318)in
parallel.
156: Exciter // BPM Dl (Exciter /
/ Multitap BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsanexciter(p.317)andamultitapBPM
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim LEQ HEQ
Exciter
Exciter
Exciter
Exciter
Trim LEQ HEQ
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim LEQ HEQ
Exciter
Exciter
Output Level
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim LEQ HEQ
Exciter
Exciter
Wah / Auto Wah
Wah
D
-mod
LFO Sweep Mode
Envelope
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim LEQ HEQ
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
Exciter
Exciter
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim LEQ HEQ
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Exciter
Exciter
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Trim LEQ HEQ
Multitap BPM Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Exciter
Exciter
324
157: OD/HG // OD/HG
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain //
Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
Thiseffectconnectstwooverdrive(p.317)unitsinparallel.
158: OD/HG // Wah (Overdrive/
Hi.Gain // Wah)
Thiseffectconnectsanoverdrive(p.317)andawah(p.318)
inparallel.
159: OD/HG // Cho/Fln
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain // Chorus/
Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectsanoverdrive(p.317)andachorus/
160: OD/HG // Phaser
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain // Phaser)
Thiseffectconnectsanoverdrive(p.317)andaphaser
(p.318)inparallel.
161: OD/HG // BPMDly
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain // Multitap
BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsanoverdrive(p.317)andamultitap
162: Wah // Wah
Thiseffectconnectstwowah(p.318)unitsinparallel.
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Output Level
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Output Level 3 Band PEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wah / Auto Wah
Wah
D
-mod
LFO Sweep Mode
Envelope
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Multitap BPM Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
D
-mod
D
-mod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Wah / Auto Wah
Wah
LFO
LFO Sweep Mode
Sweep Mode
Envelope
Envelope
Wah / Auto Wah
Wah
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 163: Wah // Cho/Flng (Wah // Chorus/Flanger)
325
163: Wah // Cho/Flng (Wah //
Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectsawah(p.318)andachorus/flanger
(p.318)inparallel.
164: Wah // Phaser
Thiseffectconnectsawah(p.318)andaphaser(p.318)in
parallel.
165: Wah // BPM Dly (Wah //
Multitap BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsawah(p.318)andamultitapBPMdelay
(p.318)inparallel.
166: Cho/Fl // Cho/Fl (Chorus/
Flanger // Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectconnectstwochorus/flanger(p.318)unitsin
parallel.
167: Cho/Fl // Phaser (Chorus/
Flanger // Phaser)
Thiseffectconnectsachorus/flanger(p.318)andphaser
(p.318)inparallel.
168: Cho/Fl // BPMDly (Chorus/
Flanger // Multitap BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsachorus/flanger(p.318)andamultitap
D
-mod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
LFO Sweep Mode
Envelope
Wah / Auto Wah
Wah
D
-mod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
LFO Sweep Mode
Envelope
Wah / Auto Wah
Wah
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
D
-mod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Multitap BPM Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
LFO Sweep Mode
Envelope
Wah / Auto Wah
Wah
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Trim LEQ HEQ
Multitap BPM Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
326
169: Phaser // Phaser
Thiseffectconnectstwophaser(p.318)unitsinparallel.
170: Phaser // BPMDly (Phaser //
Multitap BPM Delay)
Thiseffectconnectsaphaser(p.318)andamultitapBPM
171: BPM Dl // BPM Dl
(Multitap BPM Delay //
Multitap BPM Delay)
ThiseffectconnectstwomultitapBPMdelay(p.318)unitsin
parallel.
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser
Resonance
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser
Resonance
Multitap BPM Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Left
Right
Wet / Dry Pan
Wet / Dry Pan
Multitap BPM Delay
Multitap BPM Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Double Size 172: St. Mltband Limiter (Stereo Multiband Limiter)
327
Double Size
DoublesizeeffectscanbeusedonlywithinserteffectsIFX1,
2,3,4andmastereffectMFX1.
172: St. Mltband Limiter
(Stereo Multiband Limiter)
Thisisastereomultibandlimiter.
173: PianoBody/Damper
(PianoBody/Damper Simulation)
Thiseffectsimulatestheresonanceofthepianosoundboard
causedbythestringvibration,andalsosimulatesthe
resonanceofotherstringsthatarenotbeingplayedwhen
youpressthedamperpedal.Itwillcreateaveryrealistic
soundwhenappliedtoacousticpianosounds.
a: Sound Board Depth
Thisparametersetstheintensityofresonanceofthepiano
soundboard.
b: Damper Depth
b: Src
Thisparametersetstheresonanceintensityoftheother
stringscreatedwhenthedamperpedalispressed.TheSrc
parameterselectsthemodulationsourcefromwhichthe
dampereffectisapplied.Usually,selectDamper#64Pdl
(Damperpedal).
specifiedfortheSrcparameteris63orsmaller,andthe
effectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.
c: Tone
d: Mid Shape
Theseparameterscontrolthetonalqualityoftheeffect
sound.
e: Tune
Sincethiseffectsimulatestheresonanceofthestrings,the
soundvariesdependingonthepitch.Ifyouhavechanged
tuningusingtheMasterTune(GlobalP0),adjustthis
parametervalue.
a Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
p.307
b
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
c Attack 1...100 Sets the attack time
d Release 1...100 Sets the release time
e
Low Offset
[dB]
40...0
Sets the low range gain of trigger
signal p.253
f
Mid Offset
[dB]
40...0
Sets the mid range gain of
g
High Offset
[dB]
40...0
Sets the high range gain of
h
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Src Off...Tempo
for the output gain
Amt 63...+63
the output gain
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Limiter
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Limiter
Low
Mid
High
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Low
Mid
High
Ofset
Band-Pass Filters
Limiter
a
Sound Board
Depth
0...100
Sets the intensity of resonance of
the sound board p.327
b
Damper
Depth
0...100
Sets the intensity of the string
resonance created when the
damper pedal is pressed p.327
Src Off...Tempo
damper effect p.327
c Tone 1...100
Sets tonal quality of effect sound
p.327
d Mid Shape 0...36
Sets the mid range of tonal
quality p.327
e Tune 50...+50 Fine tuning p.327
f
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
D
-mod
Piano
Body/Damper
Simulation
Damper
+
328
174: Vocoder
Thiseffectappliesthetimbralcharacterofaonesignal(the
modulator)toasecondsignal(thecarrier).
OntheKROME,anexternalsourcesuchasamiccannotbe
usedasthemodulatorsource,butyoucancreateunique
effectsbyusinganinternalsoundsourceasthemodulator.
Tryselectingvoicetypesounds,rhythms,orsoundeffects
asthemodulator.Themostsuitablechoicesforthecarrier
aresoundsthatcontainalargenumberofovertones,suchas
stringsordistortedguitar.Fordetailsonhowtomake
settings,refertoExample:Vocoder(Combination)on
page 238.
e: Formant Shift
ByoffsettingtheCarrierfilter,youcanadjusttheheightof
thefrequencyrangetowhichthevocodereffectisapplied.
Thetonalqualitywillchangesignificantly.
g: Noise Level
Thisparameterenablesyoutomixwhitenoisewiththe
Carrier.
h: Modulator High Mix
Thisparametersetsthehighrangeoutputlevelofthe
modulatorsound.Ifthemodulatorisahumanvoice,itwill
makethewordsmoreclear.
175: OD/HyperGain Wah
(Overdrive/Hyper Gain Wah)
Thisdistortioneffecthastwomodes:overdriveandhyper
gainthatproducesastrongdistortion.Ahigherhighgain
settingisrequiredforthiseffectrelativetoanormalsize
effect.
a Carrier Trim 0...100 Sets the Carrier input level
b
Modulator
Trim
0...100 Sets the Modulator input level
c
Modulator
Source
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Selects the modulator input
d
Modulater
Select
L/R Mix,
L Only,
R Only
Selects whether to use the left/
right mix, only left, or only right
of the modulator input
e Formant Shift 2...+2
Sets the height of the frequency
for the vocoder effect p.328
f Response 0...100
to the modulator input
g
Noise Level 0...100
Sets the noise mix level to the
Carrier p.328
Src Off...Tempo
for the noise mix level
Amt 100...+100
the noise mix level
h
Modulator
High Mix
0...100
Sets the high-range output level
of the modulator p.328
i
Low Gain [dB] 12...+12
Sets the low-range output level
of the vocoder
High Gain
[dB]
12...+12
Sets the high-range output level
of the vocoder
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Wet: Stereo In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Band Pass Filter
Envelope
Carrier Trim
Modulator Trim
Modulator High Mix
Noise
Generator
Noise Level
+
+
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Modulator Source
Modulator Select
+ +
a
Wah Off, On Switches Wah on/off p.263
Src Off...Tempo
that switches the Wah on and off
p.263
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
switches the Wah on and off
p.263
b
Wah Sweep
Range
10...+10 Sets the range of Wah p.263
Wah Sweep
Src
Off...Tempo
that controls the Wah
p.263
c Drive Mode
Overdrive,
Hyper-Gain
hi-gain distortion
d
Drive 1...120
p.263
Pre Low-cut 0...10
Sets the low range cut amount
of the distortion input p.263
e
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 50...+50
the output level
f
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
g
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 1 p.255
h
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Q 0.5...10.0
EQ 2 p.255
i
Direct Mix 0...50
Sets the amount of the dry
sound mixed to the distortion
Speaker
Simulation
Off, On
on/off
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Amp Simulation
3 Band EQ
Output Level
Direct Mix
Pre Low-cut
D
-mod
Wah
Mode: Overdrive / Hyper-Gain
Drive
Driver +
Double Size 176: GuitarAmp + P4EQ (Guitar Amp Model + Parametric 4-Band EQ)
329
176: GuitarAmp + P4EQ
(Guitar Amp Model +
Thiscombinesaguitarampsimulation(whicheven
faithfullyreplicatesthedistortionandtonecontrolcircuitry)
withafourbandequalizer.
Byusingthisinconjunctionwith021:St.GuitarCabinet
(StereoGuitarCabinet)onp.264,youcanobtainaneven
morerealisticguitarsoundthatsimulatesaguitaramp+
speakercabinet.
a: Amplifier Type
d: Presence
IftheAmplifierTypeisVOXAC15...VOXAC30TB,thissets
theattenuationofthehighfrequencyrange.Forothertypes,
thissetstheboostofthehighfrequencyrange.
ThiscorrespondstotheCutknobcontrolofampsmadeby
theVOXCorporation.
e: Post P4EQ
Bychainingthiswith19:St.GuitarCabinetyoucansimulate
thecombinationofaguitarampandspeakercabinet.Inthis
case,werecommendthatyousetPostP4EQtoThru,but
ifnecessaryyoucanturnitOnandadjustthetone.
Recommended Combinations of Guitar Amp Models
and Cabinet Simulators:
p.60)
177: G.Amp Clean Combo
Thismodelsthecleanchannelofaampthatwentonsalein
1975andcontainedtwo12speakers.Asthenamesuggests,
itproducesacleantonewithatightsoundingcharacter,and
adeepandcompactlowend.
178: G.Amp California
ThisAmericancomboampwithfour10speakerswas
producedduringtheyears19631968,andwasknownfor
itsbig,cleansoundanditswarmandhuskysoundwhen
drivenheavily.
179: G.Amp Tweed
ThisAmericanmadetweedcovered1957modelcombo
ampwithtwo12speakersisknownforitsrich,cleantone
thatisidealforclassicrock,blues,andcountry.Byraising
thevolumeyoucanalsoproduceapowerfulandpunchy
overdrivesound.
a
Amplifier
Type
VOX AC15,
VOX AC15TB,
VOX AC30,
VOX AC30TB,
UK BLUES, UK
70'S,
UK 80'S,
UK 90'S,
UK MODERN,
US MODERN,
US HIGAIN,
BOUTIQUE
OD,
BOUTIQUE
CL,
BLACK 2x12,
TWEED -
1x12,
TWEED -
4x10
p.329
Drive Gain 0...100 Sets the input gain
b
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
the output level
c
Bass 0...100 Sets the bass (low range) level
d
Treble 0...100 Sets the treble (high range) level
Presence 0...100
frequency tone) p.329
e Post P4EQ Thru, On
Selects through or on for the
equalizer p.329
f
Band1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Band 1
Q 0.5...10.0 Sets Band 1s bandwidth
g
Band2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
Band 2
h
Band3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Band 3
i
Band4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Band 4
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
+
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Volume
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
D
-mod
Guitar Amp Model
VOXAC15 VOXAC151x12
VOXAC15TB VOXAC151x12
VOXAC30 VOXAC302x12
VOXAC30TB VOXAC302x12
UKBLUES UKH304x12
UK70S UKH304x12
UK80S UKT754x12
UK90S UKT754x12
UKMODERN UKT754x12,USV304x12
USMODERN USV304x12
USHIGAIN USV304x12,UKT754x12
BOUTIQUEOD UKH304x12
BOUTIQUECL UKH304x12
BLACK2x12 BLACK2x12
TWEED1x12 TWEED1x12
TWEED4x10 TWEED4x10
330
180: G.Amp Modded OD
Thismodelsa100WboutiqueampheadproducedinNorth
Hollywood.Anoverdrivetonewitharichharmonic
structureiscombinedwitharelaxedsustain,makingforan
enjoyableplayingexperience.
Examples of amp and cabinet combinations
Werecommendthatyouusetheseampmodeleffectsina
chainwiththecabinetmodeleffect(S21:St.GtCab).Youare
freetouseanycombinationtocreateavarietyofsounds,so
tryoutvariouscombinationsandlistentotheresult.Here
aresometypicalcombinations.
181: BassTubeAmp+Cab. (Bass
Tube Amp Model + Cabinet)
Thissimulatesabassamp(withgainanddrive)andspeaker
cabinet.
a: Amplifier Type
i: Cabinet Type
Recommended Combinations of Bass Amp Models and
Cabinets:
p.60)
a Gain 0...100 Sets the input gain
b
Source Off...Tempo
Volume
Amount 100...+100
Volume
d Middle 0...100 Sets the middle (mid range) level
f Presence 0...100
frequency tone)
g
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Source Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Wet/Dry
177: G,Amp Clean Combo
1x12 TWEED
2x10 BLACK
2x12 BLACK
4x12 UK H30
178: G.Amp California
1x12 TWEED
4x10 TWEED
2x12 BLACK
4x12 UK H30
179: G.Amp Tweed
1x12 TWEED
2x10 BLACK
2x12 BLACK
180: G.Amp Modded OD
4x12 UK T75
4x12 US V30
+
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Volume
Wet / Dry
Guitar Amp Model
a
Amplifier
Type
p.329
STUDIO
COMBO
A tube combo ideal for the
Motown sound
VOX AC100
A 100W tube amp AC100 made
by Vox
UK MAJOR
A 200W tube amp made in the
UK
b Drive Gain 0...100 Sets the input gain
c
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
the output level
d Bass 0...100 Sets the bass (low range) level
e Middle 0...100 Sets the middle (mid range) level
f Treble 0...100 Sets the treble (high range) level
g Presence 0...100
frequency tone)
h
Cabinet
Simulator
Off, On
Switches the cabinet simulator
on/off
i Cabinet Type
LA - 4x10,
MODERN -
4x10,
METAL - 4x10,
CLASSIC -8x10,
UK - 4x12,
STUDIO - 1x15,
JAZZ - 1x15,
VOX AC100 -
2x15,
US - 2x15,
UK - 4x15,
LA - 1x18,
COMBI - 1x12
& 1x18
p.265, p.330
j
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
STUDIOCOMBO STUDIO1x15
AC100 VOXAC1002x15
UKMAJOR UK4x15,UK4x12
+
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Volume
Drive
Wet / Dry
D
-mod
Bass Amp Model2 Cabinet Simulator
Double Size 182: EP Cabinet/Drive
331
182: EP Cabinet/Drive
Thisfaithfullysimulatesthecharacteristicsofthepower
ampandspeakercabinetofafamousmodeloftinetype
electricpiano.Itproducesatonewithadistinctivesenseof
driveandwarmth.
c: Drive
Atlowersettings,theampisveryclean;asyouincreasethe
Drive,itgetsdirtierandmoredistorted.Theoutputlevelis
compensated,soincreasingDrivecausesonlyamoderate
increaseinperceivedvolume.
183: St. Mic + PreAmp (Stereo
Mic Modeling + PreAmp)
Thisisastereomicandpreampsimulator(See028:Mic
Model+PreAmp(MicModeling+PreAmp)onpage 267.).
Forexampleyoumightusethistosimulatemicingofa
stereosourcesuchasarotaryspeaker.
184: Multitap Cho/Delay
(Multitap Chorus/Delay)
ThiseffecthassixchorusblockswithdifferentLFOphases.
Youcanproduceacomplexstereoimagebysettinga
differentdelaytimeanddepthforeachblock.Youcan
controlthedelayoutputlevelviaamodulationsource.
a Cabinet Type
Tine EP I,
Tine EP II,
Reed EP
Select the power amp and
speaker cabinet.
b
Drive Switch Off, On Switches drive on/off
Src Off...Tempo
Selects a modulation source to
switch drive on/off
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for drive
on/off modulation
c
Drive 00.0100
Sets the amount of overdrive
and distortion in the amp
Src Off...Tempo
Drive
Amt 100...+100
Drive
d
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Tube Pre Amp Mic Simulation
Tube Pre Amp Mic Simulation
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Wet / Dry
a
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
b
Tap1 (000)
[msec]
0...2000
degrees) delay time
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Selects on, off, or modulation
source for the control of Tap1
output
p.332
c
Tap2 (180)
[msec]
0...2000
degrees) delay time
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff (Dm),
OffOn (Dm)
output
p.332
d
Tap3 (060)
[msec]
0...2000
degrees) delay time
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
output
p.332
e
Tap4 (240)
[msec]
0...2000
degrees) delay time
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
output
p.332
f
Tap5 (120)
[msec]
0...2000
degrees) delay time
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
output
p.332
g
Tap6 (300)
[msec]
0...2000
degrees) delay time
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
output
p.332
Left
Right
Feedback Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
LFO: Triangle
0 [degree]
180 [degree]
60 [degree]
240 [degree]
120 [degree]
300 [degree]
Tap1 Delay
Tap2 Delay
Tap3 Delay
Tap5 Delay
Tap6 Delay
Tap4 Delay
D
-mod
On/Of Control
Panning Preset
332
b, c, d, e, f, g: Status
TheseparameterssettheoutputstatusofeachTap.
AlwaysOn:Outputisalwayson.(Nomodulation)
AlwaysOff:Outputisalwaysoff.(Nomodulation)
OnOff(dm):Outputlevelisswitchedfromontooff
dependingonthemodulationsource.
OffOn(dm):Outputlevelisswitchedfromofftoon
dependingonthemodulationsource.
Combiningtheseparameters,youcanchangefrom4phase
chorustotwotapdelaybycrossfadingthemgraduallyvia
themodulationsourceduringaperformance.
h: Panning Preset
Thisparameterselectscombinationsofstereoimagesofthe
tapoutputs.
184: St. Pitch Shifter (Stereo
Pitch Shifter)
Thisisastereopitchshifter.Thepitchshiftamountforthe
leftandrightchannelscanbereversedfromeachother.
a: L/R Pitch
WhenyouselectUp/Downforthisparameter,thepitchshift
amountfortherightchannelwillbereversed.Ifthepitch
shiftamountispositive,thepitchoftheleftchannelis
raised,andthepitchoftherightchannelislowered.
h
Panning
Preset
1 : L 1 2 3 4 5
6 R,
2 : L 135 246 R,
3 : L 1 3 5 2 4
6 R,
4 : L 1 4 5 6 3
2 R
Selects the stereo panning
pattern for each tap
p.332
i
Tap1
Feedback
Src Off...Tempo
for the Tap output level,
feedback amount, and effect
balance
Amt 100...+100
Tap1 feedback amount
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
a
Mode
Slow,
Medium, Fast
p.287
L/R Pitch
Normal,
Up/Down
Determines whether or not the
L/R pitch shift amount is inverted
p.332
b
Pitch Shift [1/
2tone]
24...+24
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 24...+24
c
Fine [cent] 100...+100
Amt 100...+100
d
L Delay
[msec]
0...2000
channel
e
R Delay
[msec]
0...2000
channel
f
Feedback 100...+100
p.285
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
g
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post
connection p.285
Spread 100...+100
p.289
h
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Feedback Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
High Damp
Input Level
Input Level
Feedback Position
Pre
Pre
Post
Post
Delay Pitch Shifter
Delay Pitch Shifter
Double Size 185: St. PitchShift BPM (Stereo Pitch Shifter BPM)
333
185: St. PitchShift BPM (Stereo
Pitch Shifter BPM)
Thisstereopitchshifterenablesyoutosetthedelaytimeto
matchthesongtempo.
186: Rotary SpeakerOD
(Rotary Speaker Overdrive)
Thisisastereorotaryspeakereffect.Ithasaninternal
speakersimulatorthatsimulatesoverdrive(recreatingthe
ampdistortion)andcharacteristicsoftherotaryspeaker,
producingaveryrealisticrotaryspeakersound.
a
Mode
Slow,
Medium, Fast
p.285
L/R Pitch
Normal,
Up/Down
Determines whether or not the
L/R pitch shift amount is inverted
p.332
b
Pitch Shift [1/
2tone]
24...+24
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 24...+24
c
Fine [cent] 100...+100
Amt 100...+100
pitch shift amount Sets the
modulation amount of pitch
shift amount p.285
d
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
R ---, OVER!
e
L Delay Base
Note
,...
time p.285
Times x1...x32
time p.285
f
R Delay Base
Note
,...
time p.285
Times x1...x32
time p.285
g
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post
connection p.285
Spread 100...+100
h
Feedback 100...+100
p.285
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range
i
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Left
Right
Feedback Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
High Damp
Input Level
Input Level
Feedback Position
Pre
Pre
Post
Post
Delay Pitch Shifter
Delay Pitch Shifter
a
Overdrive Off, On Switches overdrive on/off
Src Off...Tempo
Selects a modulation source to
switch overdrive on/off
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for
overdrive on/off modulation
p.334
b
Overdrive
Gain
0...100
Determines the degree of
distortion
Overdrive
Level
0...100 Sets the overdrive output level
C
Overdrive
Tone
0...15
Sets the tonal quality of the
overdrive
Speaker
Simulator
Off, On
on/off
d
Mode Switch Rotate, Stop
Switches between speaker
rotation and stop
Src Off...Tempo
Rotate/Stop
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for Rotate/
Stop modulation
p.287
e
Speed Switch Slow, Fast
Switches the speaker rotation
speed between slow and fast
Src Off...Tempo
Slow/Fast
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode for Slow/
Fast modulation p.287
f
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Rotor, 1...99,
Horn
Sets the volume balance
between the high-range horn
and low-range rotor
Manual
SpeedCtrl
Off...Tempo
Sets a modulation source for
direct control of rotation speed
p.287
g
Horn
Acceleration
0...100
Sets how quickly the horn
rotation speed changes
p.287
Horn Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (high-frequency)
horn rotation speed. Standard
value is 1.00. Stop stops the
rotation
h
Rotor
Acceleration
0...100
Sets how quickly the rotor speed
changes p.287
Rotor Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (low-frequency) rotor
rotation speed. Standard value is
1.0. Stop stops the rotation
i
Mic Distance 0...100
Distance between the micro-
phone and rotary speaker
p.287
Mic Spread 0...100
Angle of left and right micro-
phones p.287
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
Horn/Rotor
Balance
D
-mod
D
-mod
D
-mod
D
-mod
Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop
Speed Switch: Slow/Fast
Manual Speed Control
On/Of
Speaker Simulation
Overdrive
Horn
Rotary Speaker
Rotor
+
334
a: Sw
Thisparameterdetermineshowtoswitchon/offthe
overdriveviaamodulationsource.
WhenSw=Toggle,overdriveisturnedon/offeachtimethe
pedalorjoystickisoperated.
Overdrivewillbeswitchedon/offeachtimethevalue
ofthemodulationsourceexceeds64.
WhenSw=Moment,overdriveisappliedonlywhenyou
pressthepedaloroperatethejoystick.
Onlywhenthevalueforthemodulationsourceis64or
higher,theoverdriveeffectisapplied.
188: L/C/R Long Delay
ThismultitapdelayoutputsthreeTapsignalstoleft,right
andcenterrespectively.Youcansetamaximumof
5,460msecforthedelaytime.
189: St/Cross Long Delay
(Stereo/Cross Long Delay)
Thisisastereodelay,andcanbyusedasacrossfeedback
delayeffectinwhichthedelaysoundscrossoverbetween
leftandrightbychangingthefeedbackrouting.Youcanset
amaximumof2,730msecforthedelaytime.
a
L Delay Time
[msec]
0...5460 Sets the delay time of TapL
b
C Delay Time
[msec]
0...5460 Sets the delay time of TapC
c
R Delay Time
[msec]
0...5460 Sets the delay time of TapR
d
Feedback
(C Delay)
100...+100
TapC
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
the TapC feedback
e
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
f
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
g Spread 0...50
p.289
h
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
C Delay
R Delay
Left
Right
Feedback
Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
L Delay
Input Level D-mod
+
Level
Level
Level
a Stereo/Cross Stereo, Cross
Switches between stereo delay
and cross-feedback delay
b
L Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...2730.0
channel
c
R Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...2730.0
channel
d
the left channel
Src Off...Tempo
feedback amount
Amt 100...+100
e
the right channel
Amt 100...+100
f
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
g
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
h
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
i Spread 50...+50
p.289
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Delay
Delay
Stereo/Cross
Left
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp LowDamp
Spread Stereo/Cross
Double Size 190: Hold Delay
335
190: Hold Delay
Thiseffectrecordstheinputsignalandplaysitback
repeatedly.Youcancontrolthestartofrecordingandreset
viaamodulationsource.Easytouseforrealtime
performances.
a: Loop Time [msec]
WithAuto,thelooptimeisautomaticallyset.Otherwise,
youcanspecifythelooptime.
WhenAutoisselected,theLoopTimeisautomaticallysetto
thetimeittakesforaperformancerecordedwhilethe
ModulationSourceorManualRECControlison.However,
ifthetimelengthexceeds10,800msec,thelooptimewillbe
automaticallysetto10,800msec.
c: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto10,800msec.Ifthedelay
timeexceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appears
inthedisplay.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthis
parameter.
b: Loop BPM Sync
c: BPM
d: Loop Base Note
d: Times
IfLoopBPMSyncison,theTimessettingisignored;the
looptimeisdeterminedbyBPM,LoopBaseNote,and
Times.Eveninthiscase,thedelaytimecannotexceed
10,800msec.
Holdprocedure(whenLoopTime=Auto)
1. RecSrcJS+Y:#01
ResetSrcJSY:#02
ManualRECControlRECOff
ManualRSTControlRESET
LoopTime[msec]Auto
MIDI/TempoSyncOff
Itshouldbenotedthatallrecordingswillbedeleted
whileResetisOn.
2. ManualRSTControlOff
ResetiscancelledandtheunitentersRecreadymode.
3. Pushthejoystickinthe+Ydirection(forward)andplay
aphraseyouwishtohold.Whenyoupullthejoystick
toitsoriginalposition,therecordingwillbefinished
andthephraseyoujustplayedwillbeheld.
LoopTimeisautomaticallysetonlyforthefirstrecord
ingafterresetting.Ifthetimelengthexceeds10,800msec,
LoopTimewillbeautomaticallysetto10,800msec.(If
youhavesetTimesto110,800msec,thespecifiedloop
timewillbeusedregardlessofthetimetakenfrompush
ingthejoystickforwarduntilitispulledback.However,
therecordingmethodremainsthesame.Thephrase
beingplayedwhilethejoystickispushedforwardwillbe
held.)
4. Ifyoumadeamistakeduringrecording,pullthejoy
stickintheYdirection(back)toreset.Inthisway,the
recordingwillbeerased.Repeatstep3.again.
5. Therecordedphrasewillberepeatedagainandagain.
Youcanusethistocreateanaccompaniment.
6. Bypushingthejoystickinthe+Ydirection(forward),
youcanalsooverdubperformancesoverthephrasethat
isbeingheld.
e: REC Control Src
g: Manual REC Control
RECControlSrcselectsthemodulationsourcethatcontrols
recording.
Ifthismodulationison,orifManualRECControlissetto
On,youcanrecordtheinputsignal.Ifarecordinghas
alreadybeencarriedout,additionalsignalswillbe
overdubbed.
specifiedfortheRECControlSrcparameteris63or
smaller,andtheeffectisonwhenthevalueis64or
higher.
f: RST Control Src
h: Manual RST Control
TheRSTControlSrcparameterspecifiesthemodulation
sourcethatcontrolstheresetoperation.
WhenyousetthismodulationsourcetoOn,orManualRST
ControltoRESET,youcanerasewhatyourecorded.Ifthe
LoopTimeparameterhasbeensettoAuto,thelooptimeis
alsoreset.
specifiedfortheRSTControlSrcparameteris63or
smaller,andtheeffectisonwhenthevalueis64or
higher.
a
Loop Time
[msec]
Auto,
1...10800
Sets Automatic loop time setup
mode or specifies loop time
p.335
b
Loop BPM
Sync
Off, On
Specifies whether delay time is
set in milliseconds, or as a note
value relative to tempo p.335
c
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
An error indication that appears
if delay time exceeds the upper
limit when MIDI/Tempo
Sync=On
d
Loop Base
Note
,...
Times x1...x32
e
REC Control
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects control source for
recording p.335
f
RST Control
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects control source for reset
p.335
g
Manual REC
Control
REC Off,
REC On
Sets the recording switch
p.335
h
Manual RST
Control
Off, RESET Sets the reset switch p.335
i
Pan
L100...L1, C,
R1...R100
Sets the stereo image of the
effect
Src Off...Tempo
stereo image of the effect
Amt 100...+100
stereo image of the effect
j
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Pan
Delay
D
-mod
D
-mod
Loop Time: Auto/ ...5400ms
+
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
REC Control
RST Control
336
191: LCR BPM Long Dly (L/C/R
BPM Long Delay)
TheL/C/Rdelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytimewith
thesongtempo.
a: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto10,920msec.Ifthedelay
timeexceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appears
inthedisplay.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthis
parameter.
192: St. BPM Long Dly (Stereo
BPM Long Delay)
Thestereodelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytimewith
thesongtempo.
a: Time Over? L, R
a
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
upper limit p.336
b
L Delay Base
Note
,...
p.285
Times x1...x32
p.285
c
C Delay Base
Note
,...
elects the type of notes to
p.285
Times x1...x32
p.285
d
R Delay Base
Note
,...
p.285
Times x1...x32
p.285
e
Feedback
(C Delay)
100...+100
TapC
Src Off...Tempo
Amt 100...+100
the TapC feedback
f
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
g
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
h Spread 0...50
p.289
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
C Delay
R Delay
Left
Right
Feedback
Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
L Delay
Input Level D-mod
+
Level
Level
Level
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
a
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
R ---, OVER!
b
L Delay Base
Note
,...
time p.285
Times x1...x32
time p.285
Adjust [%] 2.50...+2.50
Fine-adjust the left channel delay
time
c
R Delay Base
Note
,...
time p.285
Times x1...x32
time p.285
Adjust [%] 2.50...+2.50
Fine-adjust the right channel
delay time
d
the left channel
Src Off...Tempo
feedback amount
L Amt 100...+100
e
the right channel
R Amt 100...+100
f
High Damp
[%]
0...100
high range p.289
g
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
low range p.289
h
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src Off...Tempo
i
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times Adjust [%]
Base Note x Times Adjust [%]
Delay
Delay
Double Size 193: Early Reflections
337
193: Early Reflections
Thisearlyreflectioneffecthasmorepreciseearlyreflections
withtwicethemaximumlengthofanormalsizeeffect(See
094:EarlyReflectionsonpage 300.).Youcancreateavery
smoothanddensesound.
a Type
Sharp, Loose,
Modulated,
Reverse
Selects the decay curve for the
early reflection p.300
b
ER Time
[msec]
10...1600
Sets the time length of early
reflection
c
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Sets the time taken from the
original sound to the first early
reflection
d EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the input level of EQ applied
to the effect sound
e
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
equalizer
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
range equalizer
f
Pre LEQ Gain
[dB]
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Amt 100...+100
Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
+
EQ Trim
Pre Delay Early Refections
LEQ HEQ
338
339
Appendices
Alternate Modulation Sources (AMS)
Alternate Modulation
Overview
AlternateModulationletsyouusecontrollers,envelopes,
LFOs,etc.tomodulateProgramparameters.Youcanuse
onecontrollertomodulatemultipleparameters
simultaneously.Youcanalsocreatecomplexmodulation
setupsinwhich(forexample)anenvelopemodulatesthe
frequencyofanLFO,andthatLFOisthenusedtomodulate
afilter.
Programsprovide48types(88destinations)foralternate
modulation.
Alternate Modulation Sources
Youcanusethesourceslistedonthefollowingpageto
controlAlternateModulation.Ifyouselecttwoormore
AlternateModulationdestinationsforcontrolbythesame
AMS,asinglesourcewillapplymodulationtoeachofthe
specifieddestinations.
FrequentlyusedassignmentssuchasusingJoystickXto
controlpitchareprovidedasspecialparameters,soitisnot
necessarytouseAlternateModulationtoaccomplishthis.
AMS Mixers
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,or
processanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomethingnew.
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether,oruse
oneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.Youcanalso
usethemtochangetheshapesofLFOsandEGsinvarious
ways,modifytheresponseofrealtimecontrollers,andmore.
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMSsources,
justliketheLFOsandEGs.
Theoriginal,unmodifiedinputstotheAMSMixersarestill
availableaswell.Forinstance,ifyouuseLFO1asaninput
toaAMSMixer,youcanusetheprocessedversionofthe
LFOtocontroloneAMSdestination,andtheoriginal
versiontocontrolanother.
Finally,youcancascadetwoAMSMixerstogether,byusing
oneastheinputofanother.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee61:OSC1AMSMix1on
page 46.
OSC1 Filter1 A Filter1 B Amp 1
Pitch EG
Level Mod 1
Level Mod 2
Time Mod
Intensity Mod
Filter1 EG
Intensity Mod to A Intensity Mod to B
Level Mod
Time Mod 1
Time Mod 2
Amp1 EG
Level Mod
Time Mod 1
Time Mod 2
Cutof Mod 1
Cutof Mod 2
Cutof Mod 1
Cutof Mod 2
Pan Mod
LFO1 LFO2
Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod Intensity Mod to A
Intensity Mod to A
Intensity Mod to B
Intensity Mod to B Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod
Pitch Mod
Resonance Mod
Frequency Mod 2
Frequency Mod 1
Frequency Mod 2
Frequency Mod 1
Amp Mod
OSC 1
OSC 2
Alternate Modulation
Output Level Mod
Resonance Mod
Output Level Mod
Intensity Mod to A Intensity Mod to B
Common LFO
Time Mod 3 Time Mod 3
Driver
Drive
Low Boost
Frequency Mod
Intensity Mod Intensity Mod Intensity Mod
Reset Reset
Reset
Reset
Shape
Shape Shape
Appendices
340
AMS (Alternate Modulation
Source) List
Physical and MIDI controllers
Off
Thismeansthatnomodulationsourceisselected.
Note Number
ThisisthenotesMIDInotenumber,from0(C2)to127
(G9).
Velocity
ThisisthenotesMIDInoteonvelocity.
Exp. Velocity (Exponential Velocity)
ThisisMIDInoteonvelocitythroughanexponentialcurve.
Thecurvemeansthatlowvelocitieswonthaveverymuch
effect,andthedifferencebetweentwolowervelocityvalues
wontbeverynoticeable.
Ontheotherhand,highvelocitiesproduceincreasingly
greatereffects,andthedifferencebetweenanytwohigher
velocityvalueswillbemorepronounced.
Poly After
Polyphonicaftertouchallowsadifferentaftertouchvaluefor
eachnote.ThiscanbereceivedfromexternalMIDIdevices
orgeneratedbytheinternalsequencer.TheKROME
keyboarditselfdoesnotgeneratepolyaftertouch,however.
After Touch
Theeffectwillbeappliedbychannelaftertouchmessages
fromtheKROMEssequencedataorreceivedfromMIDIIN.
JS X
Thisisthehorizontalmovementofthemainjoystick.Italso
receivesMIDIPitchbend.
JS+Y: CC#01
Thisistheverticalmovementofthemainjoystick,upwards
fromthecenter.ItalsoreceivesMIDICC#01(modwheel).
JSY: CC#02
Thisistheverticalmovementofthemainjoystick,
downwardsfromthecenter.ItalsoreceivesMIDICC#02
(breathcontroller).
JS +Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick +Y & After Touch/2)
Theeffectwillbecontrolledbythejoystick+Y(Vertical
upward)andbyaftertouch.Inthiscase,theeffectof
aftertouchwillbeonlyhalfofthespecifiedintensity.
JS Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick Y & After Touch/2)
TheeffectwillbecontrolledbythejoystickY(Vertical
downward)andbyaftertouch.Inthiscase,theeffectof
aftertouchwillbeonlyhalfofthespecifiedintensity.
Pedal: CC#04 (Foot Pedal: CC#04)
ThisAMSsourcereceivesMIDICC#04.Itcanalsobe
generatedbyafootpedalconnectedtotherearpanel
ASSIGNABLEPEDALinput,iftheGlobalFootPedal
AssignparameterissettoFootPedal(CC#04).Formore
information,pleaseseeFootPedalAssignmentson
page 350.
KnobMod1: #17 (Realtime Knob Modulation1: CC#17)
ThisAMSsourcealwaysrespondstoMIDICC#17.AMIDI
valueof0causesthemaximumnegativemodulation;64
(center)meansnomodulation;and127causesthemaximum
positivemodulation.(Youcaninvertthisresponse,if
desired,byusinganegativeAMSintensity.)
ItalsousuallycorrespondstoRealtimeControlsUSERknob
1ontheControllersSetuppage;butthiswilldependonthe
RealtimeControlsknobAssignsettingsofeachindividual
Program,Combination,andSong.
Basically,therearetwoseparatefactors:aphysicalknob
namedUSERknob1,andanAMSsourcenamedKnob
Mod.1:#17.Thisprovidesagreatdealofflexibilitybuts
itsalsoeasytolinkthetwotogether.Todoso:
1. GotothecurrentmodesControllerspage.
2. SetknobUSER1sRealtimeControlsKnobAssignto
KnobMod.1:#17.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee13:ControllersSetup
onpage 16,andRealtimeControlsKnobs14
Assignmentsonpage 348.
ThisAMSsourcealwaysrespondstoMIDICC#19,andwill
usuallyalsocorrespondtoRealtimeControlsUSERknob2.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeKnobMod1:#17(Realtime
KnobModulation1:CC#17)onpage 340.
KnobMod1[+] (Realtime Knob Modulation1[+])
WiththeseAMSsources,theknobpositionandthedirection
oftheresultingchangearedifferentthanKnobMod1:#17
KnobMod4:#21.IfAMSintensityissettoapositive(+)
value,rotatingtheknobtothefarleftwillproduceanAMS
effectof0.Rotatingtheknobtowardtherightwillapply
changeonlyinthepositivedirection.(Iftheintensityissetto
anegativevalue,theresultwillbetheopposite.)
Damper: #64
ThisistheDamperpedal,alsosometimescalledthesustain
pedal.ItcorrespondstoMIDICC#64.
WhenusingKorgsoptionalhalfdamperpedal,theDS1H,
thisAMSsourceiscontinuousnotjuston/off.
Porta.SW: #65
ThisistheMIDIportamentoswitch(CC#65),whichalso
enablesanddisablesportamento.
Sostenuto: #66
ThisistheMIDIsostenutopedal(CC#66).
Soft: CC#67
ThisistheMIDIoftpedal(CC#67).
SW 1: CC#80 (SW 1 Modulation: CC#80)
ThisisCC#80,whichisthedefaultforassignablefrontpanel
switch1(SW1).TouseSW1andSW2asAMSsources:
1. GototheControllersSetuppage.
2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,assignSW1toSW1Mod.
(CC#80)andSW2toSW2Mod.(CC#81).
TheseassignmentsarestoredseparatelyforeachProgram,
Combination,andSong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSW1/2Assignmentson
page 348.
SW 2: CC#81 (SW 2 Modulation: CC#81)
ThisisCC#81,whichisthedefaultforassignablefrontpanel
switch2(SW2).Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSW1:
CC#80(SW1Modulation:CC#80)above.
341
Foot SW: #82 (Foot SW: CC#82)
ThisAMSsourcereceivesMIDICC#82.Itcanalsobe
generatedbyafootswitchconnectedtotherearpanel
ASSIGNABLESWITCHinput,iftheGlobalFootPedal
AssignparameterissettoFootSW(CC#82).Formore
information,pleaseseeFootSwitchAssignmentson
page 349.
MIDI: CC#83
MIDIcontrolchange(CC#83)
Tempo
Thisletsyouusethesystemtempoasamodulationsource.
120isthecenter,foravalueof0;60BPMis99,and240BPM
is+99.
Notethatthisisdifferentfromactuallysyncingtotempo;
forthatpurpose,usethededicatedsynchronization
functionsfortheLFOs,effects,etc.
Gate1
Gate1+Damper
Gate1istriggeredbyanewnoteafterallnoteshavebeen
released,suchasatthebeginningofaphrase.Gate
1+Damperissimilar,exceptthatitistriggeredbyanew
noteonafterallnotesandthedamperarereleased.
YoucanusethistoresettheCommonLFO.Forinstance,to
createaneffectsimilartothepervoiceLFOandStep
SequencersKeySyncOffsetting,useGate1+Damperas
theresetsource.
Gate2
Gate2+Damper
Gate2issimilartoGate1,butittriggerswitheverynew
noteon,eveninthemiddleofalegatophrase.
Gate2+Damperincludesthedamperpedalintheequation,
asshowninthediagrambelow.
Note:WhenusedasaresetcontrollerforCommonLFO,
Gate2andGate2+Damperwillhavethesameeffect.
Gate1,Gate1+Damper,
Gate2,Gate2+Damper
Dmpr
Gate2
Gate2+Dmpr
Time
Gate1
Note
1 2 3 1 2 3
Damper Pedal
Gate1+Dmpr
On
Of
Reset
Controller
Appendices
342
Alternate Modulation settings
WhenyouoperateanAMS(AlternateModulationSource),
themodulationdestinationwillbeaffectedasshowninthe
tablebelow.
Byusingalternatemodulation,youcancreatecomplex
systemsofmodulationinwhichEG,LFO,keyboardtracks,
andcontrollersworktogether.
YoucanapplycomplexchangetoanLFOorEG,for
examplebyusingthepitch/filter/ampEGtocontrolthe
frequencyorintensityofanLFOthatmodulatesthepitch/
filter/amp,orbyusingLFO2tocontrolthefrequencyof
LFO1.
Thetone,EG,andLFOetc.canbecontrollednotonlyby
keyvelocityorthejoystick,butalsofromabutton,knob,
orpedaletc.
Panningcanbecontrolledinrealtimefromacontroller,
EG,orLFOetc.
YoucanusethefilterEGtocontrolpitchorvolumeatthe
sametimethatitcontrolsthefilter.
Controllersetc.canbeusedtocontrolEGlevelsortimes.
ThisletsyoushapetheEGinrealtime.
Filter/ampkeyboardtrackingornotenumbercanbeused
tocontroltheEGorLFOaccordingtothekeyboardpitch
thatisplayed.
Pitch,tone,EGorLFOcanbecontrolledbythetempoof
thearpeggiatorand/orsequencer.
AMSoperationsandtheirresult
AMS source
& value range
Amp EG
0...+99
Pitch & Filter
EGs
99...0...+99
LFO1 & 2
99...0...+99
Common LFO
99...0...+99
Filter & Amp
Key Track
99...0...+99
Common
Key Track
1 & 2
99...0...+99
Note Number
C1...C4...C9
EXT(+/) *1
Max...0...+Max
EXT (Tempo) *2
, =...60.00...120.00...240.00...
EXT(+) *3
0...127
Parameter AMS
Intensity
Pitch*4 (+12.00) 0...+1
Octave
10+1
Octaves
(FilterEGas
AMS;
dedicated
parameter
forPitchEG)
Dedicated
parameter
1...0...+1
Octaves
Dedicated
parameter
1...0...+1
Octaves
0...+1
Octave
PitchEG
Int.
(+12.00) Dedicated
parameter
forPitchEG
1...0...+1
Octaves
1...0...+1
Octaves
0...+1
Octave
Pitch
LFO1/2Int.
(+12.00) 0...+1
Octave
1...0...+1
Octaves
1...0...+1
Octaves
0...+1
Octave
Filter
Frequency
(+99) 0...+10
Octaves
100+10
Octaves
(PitchEGas
AMS;
dedicated
parameter
forFilterEG)
Dedicatedparameter Dedicated
parameter
forFilter
KTrk
100+10
Octaves
100+10
Octaves
0...+10
Octaves
Filter
Resonance
(+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
FilterEG
Int.
(+99) Dedicated
parameter
forFilterEG
99...0...+99 99...0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
FilterLFO1/
2Int.
(+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Filter
Output
LevelA/B
(+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Drive (+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
LowBoost (+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Amp (+99) Dedicated
parameter
0...1x...8x Dedicated
parameter
0...1x...8x Dedicated
parameter
forAmp
KTrk
0...1x...8x 1x...8x
Amp
LFO1/2Int.
(+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Pan (+50) 0...+63 63...0...+63 0...+63
EGLevel (+66) 99...0...+99 0...+99
EGTime (+49) 1/64x...1x...64x 1x...64x
LFO1
Frequency*4
(+99) 1x...64x 1/64x...
1x...64x
(LFO2
only)
1/64x...1x...64x 1x...64x
LFO2
Frequency*4
(+99) 1x...64x 1/64x...1x...64x 1x...64x
Common
LFO
Frequency*4
(+99) 1/64x...1x...64x 1x...64x
LFO1
Shape
(+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99
(LFO2
only)
99...0...+99 0...+99
LFO2
Shape
(+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Common
LFO
Shape
(+99) 99...0...+99 0...+99
343
Notes for the table
*1 EXT(+):JSX,Ribbon:CC#16,KnobMod1(CC#17),Knob
Mod2(CC#19),KnobMod3(CC#20),KnobMod4
(CC#21)
*2 WhenTempoisselectedasanAMSsource,thebase
valueis,=120.00.
ForexampleifthePitchAMSissettoTempo,and
Intensityissetto12.00,doublingthetempovalue(,
=120.00240.00)willraisethepitchoneoctave,and
halvingthetempo(,=120.0060.00)willlowerthepitch
oneoctave.Thestatedmodulationresultsarefortempo
valuesbetween60bpmand240bpm.Asthetempo
decreasesfrom60to0bpm,AMSmodulationwillhave
increasinglynegativeeffects;asitincreasesfrom240to
250bpm,modulationwillhaveincreasinglypositive
effects.
*3 EXT(+):Velocity,Exp.Velocity,PolyAfter,AfterTouch,
JS+Y:CC#01,JSY:CC#02,JS+Y&AT/2,JSY&AT/2,
Pedal:CC#04,ValueSldr:#18,KnobMod1[+],KnobMod2
[+],KnobMod3[+],KnobMod4[+],Damper:CC#64,
Porta.SW:CC#65,Sostenuto:CC#66,Soft:CC#67,
SW1:CC#80,SW2:CC#81,MIDI:CC#83,MIDI:CC#85,
MIDI:CC#86,MIDI:CC#87,MIDI:CC#88.
*4 ItispossibletocontrolLFOFrequencybyusingTempo
AMSandIntensity.HoweverifyouusetheFrequency
MIDI/TempoSyncfunction(Prog51c),theLFO
frequencycanbesynchronizedtothetempoandnote
value.
The effects of AMS on various
parameters, and example applications
Welldescribesomeexamplesofusingalternate
modulation.
Pitch (Prog 22a)
PitchcanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,filter/ampEG,
controllers,ortempoetc.
IfyouselectFilterEGorAmpEGastheAMSandset
Intensityto+12.00,thepitchwillchangeupto1octave
insynchronizationwiththeEG.
IfyouselectTempoastheAMSandsetIntensityto
+12.00,doublingthetempo(basedon,=120.00)willraise
thepitchoneoctave,andhalvingthetempowilllowerthe
pitchoneoctave.
Pitch EG (Prog 22b)
PitchEGintensitycanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,
keyboardtracking,controllers,ortempo.
IfyouselectJS+Y:CC#01astheAMSandsetIntensityto
+12.00,movingthejoystickinthe+Ydirectionwill
graduallyincreasetheeffectofthePitchEGtoa
maximumof1octave.IfIntensityhasanegativevalue,
theeffectofthePitchEGwillbeinverted.
LFO 1/2 (Prog 22d)
PitchmodulationintensityoftheLFO1/2canbecontrolled
bytheCommonLFO,anEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,
ortempoetc.
IfyouselectEGastheAMS,thepitchchangewidthof
LFOmodulationetc.canbecontrolledinsynchronization
withthelevelchangesoftheEG.Withpositive(+)
settingsofIntensity,thevibratoeffectwillgradually
deepenastheEGlevelrises,orgraduallylessenastheEG
leveldecreases.Withnegative()settingsofIntensity,the
LFOphasewillbeinverted.
IfyouselectacontrollersuchasSW1or2astheAMS,
youcanpresstheSW1orSW2switchwhendesiredto
turnonthevibratoeffect.
Filter (Cutoff) Frequency (Prog 31b(c))
ThecutofffrequencyoffilterA/Bcanbecontrolledbythe
pitch/ampEG,Commonkeyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempo.Usethe33:Filter1ModulationpageFilterA/B
Modulation(Prog33b)tosetAMSandIntensityforFilter
AorB.
IfyouselectJSXastheAMS1orAMS2andsetIntensity
toapositive(+)value,movingthejoysticktowardthe
rightwillraisethecutofffrequency,andmovingit
towardtheleftwilllowerthecutofffrequency.Negative
()settingswillhavetheoppositeeffect.
IfyouselectthesamecontrollerasanAMS1orAMS2and
setseparateintensitiesforFilterA(LowPassFilter)
IntensityandFilterB(HighPassFilter)Intensity,you
canoperateasinglecontrollertosimultaneouslycontrol
thecutofffrequenciesofbothfilters.
Resonance (Prog 31b)
YoucanusetheEG,LFO,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.tocontroltheresonancelevel.
IfyouselectFilterKTrkorAmpKTrkastheAMS,you
canusethefilterorampkeyboardtrackingsettingsto
controltheresonancelevel.Forexampleiftheamp
keyboardtrackingparametersRampBtmLoandRamp
HiToparesettopositive(+)values,AmpKTrkisselected
astheAMS,andIntensityitsettoapositive(+)value,
playingtowardeitherendofthekeyboardwillcauseamp
keyboardtrackingtoincreasethevolume,andAMSto
raisetheresonancelevel.
YoucanselectacontrollerastheAMS,andapply
resonancewhendesiredbyoperatingthecontroller.
YoucanselectCommonLFO,LFO1or2astheAMS,and
usetheLFOtocontroltheresonancelevel.
Output (Prog 31b)
tempoetc.tocontroltheoutputlevelofFilterA/B.
SettheFilterRoutingtoParallel,andspecifythedesired
TypeandothersettingsforFilterAandFilterB.Setthe
AMStoLFOforFilterAandFilterB,andsettheLFOto
+99and99respectively.TheoutputofFilterAandFilter
Bwillbecyclicallyfadedin/outbytheLFO.
Filter EG Intensity (Prog 33a)
FilterEGintensitycanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,
Commonkeyboardtracking,acontrollerortempoetc.You
canuseIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBtoindependently
specifytheintensityforFilterAandB.
IfyouselectJSY(CC#02)astheAMSandsetIntensity
toAandIntensitytoBtoapositive(+)value,movingthe
joystickintheYdirectionwillgraduallyincreasethe
effectoftheFilterEG.IfyousetIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoBtoanegative()value,theeffectofthe
FilterEGwillbeinverted.
IfyouselectJSXastheAMSandsetIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoBtoapositive(+)value,operatingthe
joysticktowardtherightwillgraduallyincreasetheeffect
oftheFilterEG.Operatingthejoysticktowardtheleftwill
graduallyincreasetheeffectoftheFilterEGwithan
invertedphase.
Filter LFO1/2 Intensity (Prog 34a)
TheLFO1/2filtermodulationintensitycanbecontrolledby
theEG,CommonLFO,keyboardtracking,controller,or
tempoetc.YoucanuseIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBto
independentlyspecifytheintensityforFilterAandB.
IfyouselectEGastheAMS,theautowaheffect
producedbyLFOmodulationwillbecontrolledbythe
changesinEGlevel.IfyousetIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoBtoapositive(+)value,thewaheffectwill
deepenastheEGlevelrises,andwilllessenastheEG
Appendices
344
levelfalls.Withnegative()valuesofIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoB,thephaseoftheLFOwillbeinverted.
IfyouuseacontrollersuchasSW1or2astheAMS,you
canapplytheautowaheffectwhendesiredbypressing
theSW1orSW2switch.
Filter Common LFO (Prog 34b)
tempoetc.tocontroltheCommonLFOfiltermodulation
intensity.YoucanuseIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBto
specifytheintensityseparatelyforFilterAandB.
YoucansetAMStoacontroller,andoperatethe
controlleronlywhendesiredtocontrolthedepthofthe
filtersweepproducedbytheCommonLFO.
Driver Drive (Prog 41a)
Driver Low Boost (Prog 41a)
YoucanusetheEG,LFO,keyboardtracking,controllers,
andtempoetc.tocontrolthedriversboostandlowboost.
AlthoughyoucanuseseparateAMStocontrolthesetwo
parameters,itisalsoeffectivetocontrolthem
simultaneouslybyusingcontrollerssuchastheknobsetc.(It
isparticularlyeffectivetocontrolthefilterresonanceatthe
sametime.Thisisalsoniceforsynthbasssounds.)
IfyouchooseKnobMod.1(CC#17)astheAMS,set
Intensitytoapositive(+)value,andsetRealtimeControls
toUSER,turningknob1towardtherightofcenterwill
raisethedriveorlowboostlevel,whileturningtheknob
towardtheleftofcenterwilllowerthedriveorlowboost
level.IfIntensityissettoanegative()value,the
oppositewilloccur.
IfyousetAMStoCommonLFO,LFO1,or2,thedrive
amountwillbecontrolledcyclicallybytheLFO.
Amp (Prog 42b)
Thevolumecanbecontrolledbythepitch/filterEG,
CommonLFO,controllers,ortempoetc.
IfanEGorcontrollerthatchangeswithapositive(+)
value(EXT(+))isselectedastheAMS,settingthe
Intensityto+99willallowyoutoincreasethevolumetoa
maximumofeighttimesthatofthecurrentvolume.
IfanEG,LFO,orcontrollerthatchangeswithavalue
(PitchEG,FilterEG,LFO,KT,EXT(+)isselectedasthe
AMS,settingtheIntensityto+99willallowyouto
increasethevolumetoamaximumofeighttimesthatof
thecurrentvolume(forpositive(+)changesoftheAMS),
ortodecreasethevolumetozero(fornegative()
changesoftheAMS).
Inadditiontothetimevariantchangesinvolume
producedbytheampEG,youcanalsomakethevolume
changeinsynchronizationwiththepitch/filterEG.Select
PitchEGorFilterEGastheAMS,andadjustIntensity.If
youwishtocanceltheeffectoftheAmpEGandusethe
pitch/filterEGtocontrolthevolume,setalllevelsofthe
AmpEGto+99.
Amp LFO1/2 Intensity (Prog 42b)
TheampmodulationintensityofLFO1/2canbecontrolled
bytheEG,CommonLFO,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.
IfyouselectEGastheAMS,thedepthofthetremolo
effectproducedbyLFOmodulationwillchangein
synchronizationwiththechangesinEGlevel.Ifyouset
Intensitytoapositive(+)value,thetremoloeffectwill
deepenastheEGlevelrises,andlessenastheEGlevel
falls.IfIntensityissettoanegative()value,thephaseof
theLFOwillbeinverted.
IfselectacontrollersuchasSW1or2astheAMS,you
canapplythetremoloeffectbypressingtheSW1orSW2
switchwhendesired.
Pan (Prog 41c)
TheoscillatorpancanbecontrolledbytheEG,LFO,
keyboardtracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
IfyouselectNoteNumberastheAMSandsetIntensity
to+50,panningwillbecontrolledbythekeyboard
position:centerattheC4note,farrightatC9orabove,
andfarleftatC1orbelow.
IfEGisselectedastheAMS,theoscillatorpanwillbe
controlledinsynchronizationwiththechangesinEG
level.IfIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,thepanwill
movetowardtherightastheEGlevelincreases,and
towardtheleftastheEGleveldecreases.IfIntensityis
settoanegative()value,theoppositeeffectwilloccur.
EG Reset
Pitch EG (Prog 28a)
Filter EG (Prog 35a)
Amp EG (Prog 43a)
tempoetc.tocontrolEGReset.UsetheThresholdsettingto
specifytheAMSvalueatwhichresultwilloccur.
BysettingAMStoCommonLFO,youcanresetthe
envelopecyclicallyattheintervaloftheCommonLFO.
Theresultisjustasiftheshapespecifiedbytheenvelope
werebeingusedasaspecialLFO.
YoucanresettheenvelopebysettingAMStoacontroller
suchasJS+Y,andoperatingthecontrollerwhendesired,
producingaoneshotfilterenvelopesweep.
EG Level
Pitch EG (Prog 28c)
Filter EG (Prog 35c)
Amp EG (Prog 43c)
EGlevelscanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,keyboard
tracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
YoucanspecifyanIntensityvalueforeachEGsegment
(Start,Attack,Break).IfyousettheIntensityvalueto+66,
youwillbeabletocontroltherespectivelevelovera
maximumrangeof99.
SetAMStoVelocityforAmpEGLevelModulation,
IntensityStartto+00,Attackto+66,andBreakto66.
SetallAmpEGlevelsto+00.Asyouplaywithincreasing
velocity,theEGlevelswillchangemoregreatly.Atthe
maximumvelocity,theStartLevelwillstayat+00,butthe
AttackLevelwillchangeto+99andtheBreakLevelwill
changeto99.
EG Time
Pitch EG (Prog 28c)
Filter EG (Prog 35c)
Amp EG (Prog 43d)
EGtimescanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,keyboard
tracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
YoucanspecifyanIntensityvalueforeachEGsegment
(Attack,Decay,Slope,Release).EGtimesaredetermined
bytheAlternateModulationvaluewhenthepreceding
pointisreached.Forexample,theAlternateModulation
valueatthemomenttheenvelopereachestheattacklevel
willdeterminethedecaytime.
IfIntensityissettoavalueof8,17,25,33,41,or49,the
correspondingtimecanbemultipliedbyamaximumof2,4,
8,16,32,or64times(ordividedby1/2,1/4,1/8,1/16,1/32,1/
64).
SelectJS+Y:CC#01forAMS,andsetAMSIntensityto+8,
Atto+,Dcto,andSlandRlto0.Whenyoumovethe
joystickinthe+Ydirection,theAttackTimewillbe
lengthenedbyamaximumof2times.TheDecayTime
willbeshortenedbyamaximumof1/2.TheSlopeand
Releasetimeswillnotchange.
345
LFO Frequency (Prog 51a)
ThefrequencyofLFO1,2orCommonLFOcanbe
controlledbytheEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.
YoucanalsousetheLFO2frequencytomodulateLFO1,or
usetheCommonLFOfrequencytomodulateLFO1/2.
IfIntensityissettoavalueof16,33,49,66,82,or99,the
correspondingfrequencycanbemultipliedbyamaximum
of2,4,8,16,32,or64times(ordividedby1/2,1/4,1/8,1/16,
1/32,1/64).
SelectJS+Y:CC#01forAMS,andsetIntensityto+16.
Whenyoumovethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,theLFO
frequencywillbeincreasedbyamaximumof2times.If
yousetIntensityto16andmovethejoystickinthe+Y
direction,theLFOfrequencywillbedecreasedbyupto1/
2.
LFO Frequency AMS Intensity (Prog 51b)
YoucanusetheEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.tocontroltheintensityoftheAMSthatcontrols
thefrequencyoftheLFO1,2,orCommonLFO.
ForexampleifyoureusingthepitchEGtomodulatethe
LFOfrequency,youcoulduseaseparateAMStocontrolthe
depthofthiseffect.
SetAMStoacontrollersuchasSW1or2,sothatthe
pitchEGwilllightlycontroltheLFOfrequencywhenthe
switchisoff,andmoredeeplywhentheswitchison.
LFO Shape (Prog 51a)
YoucanuseaEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,ortempo
etc.tocontroltheshapeoftheLFO1,2,orCommonLFO
waveform.YoucanalsousetheLFO2frequencyto
modulateLFO1,orusetheCommonLFOfrequencyto
modulateLFO1/2.
YoucancontroltheLFOwaveformbysettingAMStoa
controllersuchasJS+Y,andoperatingthecontrollerwhen
desired.
Common LFO Reset (Prog 510a)
Youcanuseacontrollerortempoetc.toresettheCommon
LFO.
BysettingAMStoGate1,youcanmaketheCommon
LFOresetwhenanoteisplayedfromastateinwhichall
notesareoff.Forexample,thiswillensurethatafilter
sweepalwaysstartsfromthesameplace.
YoucansetAMStoacontrollersuchasJS+Y:CC#01,and
operatethecontrollerwhenyouwanttoresettheLFO.
Appendices
346
Dynamic Modulation Sources (Dmod)
Youcancontrolcertaineffectparametersusingthejoystick,
RealtimeControlsknobs,SW1/SW2,etc.onthefly.
Theseparameterscanalsobecontrolledbythesequencer.
ControllingeffectsinthiswayisreferredtoasDynamic
Modulation.Forexample,youcanuseAfterTouchtospeed
uptheLFOofthechorusandflanger,oryoucanusethe
joysticktosweepawaheffect.Thisletsyoutakefull
advantageoftheeffectsaspartoftheexpressivepotentialof
yourinstrument.
Mostoftheparametersfordynamicmodulationconsistof
parametervaluesforSourceandAmount.TheSourcefield
selectsthemodulationsource,andAmountsetsthe
modulationintensity.WhentheSourceisatitsmaximum
value(forinstance,whenJS+Yismovedallthewayup),the
actualdegreeoftheeffectwillbetheparametervalueplus
theAmount.
Example:Wet/Dry10:90,SourceJS+Y:#01,Amount+50
Inthiscase,theeffectbalancewillnormallybe10:90,and
movingthejoystickinthe+Ydirectionwillgradually
increasetheproportionoftheeffectsound.Whenthe
joystickismovedallthewayinthe+Ydirection,theeffect
balancewillbe60:40.
Seetheindividualeffectsdescriptionsforexplanationsof
otherdynamicmodulationparameters.Parameterswhich
canbecontrolledthroughdynamicmodulationaremarked
bythe symbol.
Dmod and MIDI
InProgrammode,dynamicmodulationisalways
controlledviatheglobalMIDIChannel.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,dynamic
modulationiscontrolledviatheMIDIchannel
independentlyspecifiedbytheChforIFX15,MFX1,2,
andTFX.
Dynamic Modulation Source
List
Wet / Dry
Max Zero Higher
D
-mod
Dry
Wet
60:40
10:90
Dynamic Modulation (Example)
Wet / Dry=10:90
Amt= +50
Wet / Dry=60:40
Amt= 50
Off dynamicmodulationisnotused
Gate1 noteon/off(p.347)
Gate1+Dmpr noteon+damperon/off(p.347)
Gate2 noteon/off(retrigger)(p.347)
Gate2+Dmpr noteon+damperon/off(retrigger)(p.347)
NoteNumbr notenumber
Velocity velocity
ExpVelocity exponentialvelocity(p.347)
AfterTouch aftertouch(ChannelAfterTouch)reception
JSX joystickX(horizontal)direction
JS+Y:#01 joystick+Y(Verticalupward)direction(CC#01)
JSY:#02
joystickY(Verticaldownward)direction
(CC#02)
Pedal:#04 assignablefootpedal(CC#04)(p.347)
FXCtrl1:#12 MIDIeffectcontrol1(CC#12)
FXCtrl2:#13 MIDIeffectcontrol2(CC#13)
Ribbon:#16 MIDIControlChange(CC#16)
ValSldr:#18 MIDIControlChange(CC#18)(p.347)
KnobM1:#17
RealtimeControlsUSERknob(knob
modulation1CC#17)(p.347)
KnobM2:#19
KnobM3:#20
KnobM4:#21
KnobM1[+] RealtimeControlsUSERknob1[+](p.347)
Damper:#64 damperpedal(CC#64)
PrtaSW:#65 portamentoswitch(CC#65)
Sostenu:#66 sostenutopedal(CC#66)
Soft:#67 softpedal(CC#67)
SW1:#80
assignablepanelswitch1(SW1modulation
CC#80)(p.348)
SW2:#81
assignablepanelswitch2(SW2modulation
CC#81)(p.348)
FootSW:#82 assignablefootswitch(CC#82)(p.349)
MIDI:CC#83 MIDIControlChange(CC#83)
Tempo
tempo(internalclockorexternalMIDIclock
tempodata)(p.347)
Dynamic Modulation Sources (Dmod)
347
Gate1, Gate1+Dmpr (Gate1, Gate1+Damper)
Theeffectisatmaximumduringnoteon,andwillstop
whenallkeysarereleased.WithGate1+Damper,theeffect
willremainatmaximumevenafterthekeysarereleased,as
longasthedamper(sustain)pedalispressed.
Gate2, Gate2+Dmpr (Gate2, Gate2+Damper)
ThisisessentiallythesameasforGate1orGate1+Dmpr.
HoweverwhenGate2orGate2+Damperareusedasa
dynamicmodulationsourcefortheEGof041:St.Env.
Flangeretc.ortheAUTOFADEof049:StereoVibrato,a
triggerwilloccurateachnoteon.(InthecaseofGate1and
Gate1+Dmpr,thetriggeroccursonlyforthefirstnoteon.)
Exp Velocity (Exponential Velocity)
Modulationwillbeappliedexponentiallyaccordingtothe
velocityvalue.Weakvelocityvalueswillproducelittle
effect,buttheeffectwillincreaserapidlyasthevelocity
valuesrise.
Pedal: #04 (Foot Pedal: CC#04)
Ifyouwishtousetheassignablefootpedalasadynamic
modulationsource,setFootPedalAssign(GlobalP2:
Controller21a)toFootPedal(CC#04).(SeeFootPedal
Assignmentsonpage 350.)
Afootcontrolleretc.connectedtotheASSIGNABLEPEDAL
jackcanbeusedtocontrolaneffect.
KnobM1:#17 (Knob Modulation1: CC#17)
Ifyouwanttouseknobs14asadynamicmodulation
sourcewhentheRealtimeControlsisUSER,usethe
ControllersSetuppageRealtimeControlsKnobAssign
parametertoassignKnobUSER1toKnobMod.1(CC#17),
KnobUSER2toKnobMod.2(CC#19),KnobUSER3to
KnobMod.3(CC#20),andKnobUSER4toKnobMod.4
(CC#21)foreachprogram,combination,orsong.(See
RealtimeControlsKnobs14Assignmentsonpage 348.)
ThenputtheRealtimeControlsinUSER,andyoucanuse
knobs14tocontroltheeffects.
Iftheknobissettothe12oclockposition,theresulting
effectasadynamicmodulationsourcewillbezero.Ifthe
Amountisapositive(+)value,rotatingtheknobtowardthe
rightwillapplypositivechange,androtatingittowardthe
leftitwillproducenegativechange.(Withnegativevalues,
theresultwillbetheopposite.)
KnobM1 [+] (Knob Modulation1 [+])
Theknobpositionandthedirectionoftheresultingchange
aredifferentthanKnobMod.1(CC#17)KnobMod.4
(CC#21).IfAmountissettoapositive(+)value,rotatingthe
knobtothefarleftallthewaywilproduceaneffectof0as
thedynamicmodulationsourceallthewaywillapply
changeonlyinthepositivedirection.(IftheAmountissetto
anegativevalue,theresultwillbetheopposite.)
SW 1: #80 (Switch Modulation 1: CC#80)
SW 2: #81 (Switch Modulation 2: CC#81)
IfyouwishtousetheSW1orSW2switchasadynamic
modulationsource,makesettingsinProgram,orSongtoset
theControllersSetuppageparameterPanelSwitchAssign
tothefollowingvaluesrespectively:SW1toSW1Mod.
(CC#80),orSW2toSW2Mod.(CC#81)(SeeSW1/2
Assignmentsonpage 348.).
TheeffectwillbecontrolledwhenyouoperatetheSW1or
SW2switch.
FootSW: #82 (Foot Switch: CC#82)
Ifyouwishtouseanassignablefootswitchasadynamic
modulationsource,setFootSwitchAssign(Global21a)to
FootSwitch(CC#82)(SeeFootSwitchAssignmentson
page 349.).
Theeffectwillbecontrolledwhenyouoperateafootswitch
etc.connectedtotheASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
Tempo
Theresultingmodulationwillbezeroat120BPM,the
maximumpositivevalueat240BPM,andthemaximum
negativevalueat60BPM.
Gate1,Gate1+Dmpr
Gate1
Note
Dmpr
1 2 3 1 2 3
Damper Pedal
Gate1+Dmpr
Time
On
Of
Gate2,Gate2+Dmpr
Gate2
Note
Dmpr
1 2 3 1 2 3
Damper Pedal
Gate2+Dmpr
Time
On
Of
Appendices
348
Controller Assignments
SW1/2 Assignments
Switchassignmentsaresavedseparatelywitheach
Program,Combination,andSong.
Programs:13:ControllersSetuponpage 16
Combinations:11:ControllersSetuponpage 78
Sequencermode:11:Setuponpage 122
List of SW 1/2 assignments
ThefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedtoSW1andSW2.
Off
Thissettingdisablestheswitch.
SW1 Mod. (CC#80) (SW1 Modulation: CC#80)
SW2 Mod. (CC#81) (SW2 Modulation: CC#81)
ThisletsyouusetheswitchasanAMSorDmodsource.
NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignSW1ModorSW2Mod
tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheProgramor
Effect.
Eachtimetheswitchisturnedonoroff,ittransmitsthe
correspondingMIDICC(80or81);Offis0,andOnis127.
Porta.SW (CC#65) (Portamento SW: CC#65)
ThisturnsPortamentoonandoff.WhentheLEDislit,
Portamentoison.
Eachtimetheswitchisturnedonoroff,ittransmitsMIDI
CC#65;Offis0,andOnis127.
WithsinglePrograms,thissimplyenablesanddisables
Portamento,regardlessoftheoftheProgramsstored
PortamentoEnablesetting.
WithdoublePrograms,itsslightlymorecomplex.If
PortamentoiseitherenabledforbothOSC1and2,orofffor
both,thenthePortamentoSwitchcontrolsbothOSC.
IfPortamentoisenabledforonlyoneofthetwo,onlythat
elementwillbeaffectedbytheswitch;fortheotherelement,
Portamentowillalwaysbeoff.
Octave Down
Whentheswitchison(LEDlit),thepitchwillbetransposed
downbyoneoctave.
Octave Up
Whentheswitchison(LEDlit),thepitchwillbetransposed
upbyoneoctave.
Lock functions
TheLockfunctionsletyouuseSW1orSW2tolockthe
currentpositionofthejoystick.Thisleavesyourhandsfree
toplayonthekeyboard,ortouseothercontrollers.
Forinstance,letssaythatJS+Yisassignedtocreateafilter
sweep,andthatSW2isassignedtoJS+YLock.Youcanthen:
1. Movethejoysticktoopenupthefilter.
2. PressSW2toturnonJS+YLock.
3. Releasethejoystick.
SinceSW2islockingJS+Y,thefilterremainsopen,even
thoughthejoystickhasphysicallysnappedbacktoitscenter
position.
NotethatLockaffectsonlythephysicalcontrols.Evenif
LockisOn,incomingMIDImessagescanstillchangethe
joystick.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeLockingtheJoystickon
JS X Lock
LockstheeffectofthejoystickXaxis.
JS Y Lock
LockstheeffectofthejoystickYaxis(both+and
directions).
JS+Y Lock
Lockstheeffectofthejoystick+Ydirection.
JSY Lock
LockstheeffectofthejoystickYdirection.
Realtime Controls Knobs 14
Assignments
Thefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedasthefunctionof
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlsisassignedtoUSER.
KnobassignmentsaresavedseparatelywitheachProgram,
Combination,andSong.
Programs:13:ControllersSetuponpage 16
Combinations:11:ControllersSetuponpage 78
Sequencermode:11:Setuponpage 122
List of Knobs 14 assignments
ThefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedtoRealtime
Controlsknobs14.
Off
Thissettingdisablestheknob.
Knob Mod. 14 (CC#s17, 19, 20, 21)
ThesesettingsletyouusetheknobasanAMSorDmod
source.Notethatyoullalsoneedtoassigntheknobto
controlthedesiredparameterwithintheProgramorEffect.
Master Volume
Thiscontrolstheoverallvolume,andtransmitsthe
UniversalSystemExclusiveMasterVolumemessage[F0H,
7FH,nn,04,01,vv,mm,F7H].Youcanusethistoadjustthe
volumesofallTracksorTimbresatthesametime,while
preservingtheirrelativebalance.
Portamento Time (CC#05)
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Notethatadifferent
controller,CC#65,turnsPortamentoonandoff;see
Porta.SW(CC#65)(PortamentoSW:CC#65)onpage 348.
Volume (CC#07)
Controlsthevolume,andtransmitsCC#7.
Post IFX Pan (CC#08)
ControlsthepanningafterthelastInsertEffectinthechain,
andtransmitsCC#8.
Pan (CC#10)
Controlsstereopan,andtransmitsCC#10.
Expression (CC#11)
Expressionisasecondaryvolumecontrol,whichyoucan
usetoscalelevelwithoutaffectingthemainvolumesettings
orCC#7values.
Whenusedoneatatime,MIDIVolumeandExpression
affectlevelinexactlythesameway:aMIDIvalueof127is
equaltoProgramsmainLevelsetting,andlowervalues
349
reducethevolume.
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously,theone
withthelowervaluedeterminesthemaximumvolume,and
theonewiththehighervaluescalesdownfromthat
maximum.
FX Control 1 & 2 (CC#s12 & 13)
TheseassignmentsareintendedforEffectDynamic
Modulation(Dmod).NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFX
Control1or2tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
Effect.
Cutoff (CC#74)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersatonce.
Forinstance,itaffectsbothFiltersAandB.
Resonance (CC#71)
Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.For
instance,itaffectsbothFiltersAandB.
Filter EG Int. (CC#79)
Itaffectsallofthefiltersatonce;forinstance,itaffectsboth
FiltersAandB.
F/A Attack (CC#73)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs,along
withotherrelatedparameters.
WhentheCCvalueisabove64,thisalsoaffectstheAmp
EGsStartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,andAttack
TimeAMS,asdescribedbelow:
Betweenvaluesof65and80,theStartLevel,StartLevel
AMS,andAttackTimeAMSwillchangefromtheir
programmedvaluesto0.Overthesamerange,theAttack
Levelwillchangefromitsprogrammedvalueto99.
F/A Decay (CC#75)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterandAmp
EGs.
F/A Sustain (CC#70)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterandAmpEGs.
F/A Release (CC#72)
Pitch LFO1 Spd (CC#76)
ThisscalesLFO1sfrequency.
Pitch LFO1 Dep (CC#77)
ThisscalestheeffectofLFO1onthePitch.
Pitch LFO1 Dly (CC#78)
ThisscalesLFO1sfadeintime.
SW 1 Mod. & SW 2 Mod (CC#s 80 & 81)
Normally,theseareusedforthetwoassignableswitches
butyoucanassignthemtotheknobsinstead,ifyoulike.
Foot Switch (CC#82)
YoucanusethisgeneralpurposecontrollerasanAMSor
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFootSW
(CC#82)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
ProgramorEffect.
MIDI CC#83 (CC#83)
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignMIDI
CC#83tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheProgram
orEffect.
MFX Send 1 & 2 (CC#s 93 & 91)
ThesecontrolthesendlevelstoMasterEffects1and2,
respectively.
CC#s93and91actuallycontrolsendlevelsintwodifferent
places:thesendsdirectlyfromtheProgramOSCandthe
sendlevelsofthelastInsertEffectinthechainwhich
matchestheCCsMIDIchannel.
MIDI CC#0095 and 102119
ThesesettingsletyoutransmitanyMIDICC,exceptfor
registeredandnonregisteredparameters(CCs96101).If
youchooseaCCwhichisusedbyAMS,Dmod,orthe
standardCCroutings,thenitwillaffectthecorresponding
KROMEparameters.
WhentheRealtimeControlsinTONE,thefunctionof
knobs14isfixed.
Knobs 14
RealtimeControlsknob14havepresetassignments,as
below:
TONE [1]: CUTOFF (Filter Cutoff: CC#74)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersatonce.
TONE [2]: RESONANCE (Filter Resonance: CC#71)
Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.
TONE [3]: EG INTENSITY (Filter EG Intensity: CC#79)
TONE [4]: EG RELEASE (Filter, Amplifier EG Release: CC#72)
Foot Switch Assignments
Youcanconnectafootswitch(suchastheoptionalKorgPS1
orPS3)totherearpanelASSIGNABLESWITCHinput,and
thenuseittocontrolawidevarietyoffunctions,as
describedbelow.
Thissettingismadeglobally,ontheGlobalP2:Controllers
FootControllerspage.
Foot Switch and MIDI CCs
SomeoftheassignmentsincludeMIDICCs,whichare
transmittedeachtimetheswitchisturnedonoroff(Off=0,
andOn=127).NotethattheMIDICCscanstillbereceived
eveniftheyarenotassignedtoaphysicalcontroller.
USER[1][4]andSW1/2arespecialcases,sincethesecan
themselvesbeassignedtodifferentMIDICCs.Ifthe
footswitchisassignedtoduplicatethesecontrols,itwillalso
usetheirCCassignments.
List of Foot Switch assignments
Off
Thissettingdisablestheswitch.
Foot Switch (CC#82)
ThisletsyouusetheswitchasanAMSorDmodsource.
NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFootSW(CC#82)to
controlthedesiredparameterwithintheProgramorEffect.
Portamento SW (CC#65)
Thiscontrolsportamentoon/off.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseePorta.SW(CC#65)(PortamentoSW:CC#65)on
page 348.
Sostenuto (CC#66)
Thiscontrolsthesostenutoeffect,whichholdsonlythe
notesbeingplayedatthemomentthatthefootswitchis
turnedon.
Soft (CC#67)
Turnsthesoftpedaleffectonandoff.
Damper (CC#64)
Turnsthedamperpedaleffectonandoff.
Appendices
350
Program Up
Thisletsyouusetheswitchtoincrementthecurrent
ProgramorCombinationnumber,forhandsfreepatch
changes.NotethatthisisonlyactivewhileontheProgP0:
PlayorCombiP0:Playpages,respectively.
Whenyouusethiscontrol,theKROMEwillalsotransmit
thecorrespondingMIDIProgramChangeandBankSelect
messages.
Program Down
ThisdecrementsthecurrentProgramorCombination
number,forhandsfreepatchchanges.Formore
information,pleaseseeProgramUpabove.
Value Inc
Operatingthefootswitchwillproducethesameoperation
aspressingtheINCbutton.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
21:MenuCommandonpage 202.
Value Dec
Operatingthefootswitchwillproducethesameoperation
aspressingtheDECbutton.
Song Start/Stop
Thefootswitchwillcontrolsequencerstart/stop.
Simultaneously,aMIDIStartorStopmessagewillbe
transmitted.
Song Punch In/Out
IfSeqP0:PreferenceRecordingSetup(08b)issetto
ManualPunchIn,theswitchcanbeusedtopunchinand
punchoutwhenrecordingonthesequencer.
Cue Repeat Control
ThisisvalidiftheRepeatsettingforeachstepinSeqP11:
CueListissettoFS(111b).Ifyoupressthepedalswitch
whileastepisrepeating,thiswillbethetriggertoproceed
tothenextstep.
Tap Tempo
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofthefrontpanelTAPbutton,
forsettingthesystemtempoinrealtime.
ARP ON/OFF
Thefootswitchwillturnthearpeggiatoron/off.
DRUM TRACK ON/OFF
ThefootswitchwillturntheDrumTrackon/off.
JS+Y (CC#01)
Theswitchwillcontroltheeffectproducedbyjoystick
movementinthe+Ydirection(Verticalupward).
JSY (CC#02)
Theswitchwillcontroltheeffectproducedbyjoystick
movementintheYdirection(Verticaldownward).
Value Slider (CC#18)
Dmodsource.Notethatyoullalsoneedtoassign
ValueSlider(CC#18)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithin
theProgramorEffect.
TONE [1]TONE [4]
USER [1]USER [4]
Usetheswitchtocontroltheeffectofknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsisinUSER/TONE.
(Footswitchonisequivalenttoturningtheknobtothefar
right;footswitchoffisequivalenttoturningtheknobto
thefarleft.)
SW1, 2
Thefootswitchduplicatesthefunctionoftheselectedfront
panelswitch.
ARP GATE
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsGate.
thefarleft.)
ARP VELOCITY
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsVelocity.
thefarleft.)
ARP LENGTH
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsLength.
thefarleft.)
ARP STEP
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsStep.
thefarleft.)
Foot Pedal Assignments
Youcanconnectapedal(suchastheoptionalKorgXVP10
orEXP2)totherearpanelASSIGNABLEPEDALinput,
andthenuseittocontrolawidevarietyoffunctions,as
describedbelow.
ThissettingismadefortheentireKROME,ontheGlobalP2:
ControllersFootControllerspage.
A note on MIDI CCs
SomeoftheassignmentsincludeMIDICCs,whichare
transmittedwhenevertheknobismoved.Notethatthe
MIDICCscanstillbereceivedeveniftheyarenotassigned
toaphysicalcontroller.
IfyouselectUSER[1]USER[4],theMIDIcontrolchange
messagespecifiedbytheRealtimeControlsKnobAssign
settingsineachmodewillbetransmitted.
List of Foot Pedal assignments
Off
Thissettingdisablesthepedal.
Master Volume
Thiscontrolstheoverallvolume,andtransmitsthe
UniversalSystemExclusiveMasterVolumemessage[F0H,
7FH,nn,04,01,vv,mm,F7H].Youcanusethistoadjustthe
volumesofallTracksorTimbresatthesametime,while
preservingtheirrelativebalance.
Foot Pedal (CC#04)
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFoot
Pedal(CC#04)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
ProgramorEffect.
Portamento Time (CC#05)
Controlsthespeedatwhichportamentowillchangethe
pitch.
Volume (CC#07)
ControlthevolumeofaProgram,Combination,orofa
MIDItrackinSequencermodes.
Post IFX Pan (CC#08)
ControlthepanafterpassingthroughtheInsertEffect.
Pan (CC#10)
ControlthepanofaProgram,ofatimbreinaCombination,
orofaMIDItrackinSequencermodes.
351
Expression (CC#11)
Expressionisasecondaryvolumecontrol,whichyoucan
usetoscalelevelwithoutaffectingthemainvolumesettings
orCC#7values.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Expression(CC#11)onpage 348.
FX Control 1 & 2 (CC#s12 & 13)
TheseassignmentsareintendedforEffectDynamic
Modulation(Dmod).NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFX
Ctrl1or2tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheEffect.
MFX Send 1 & 2 (CC#s 93 & 91)
ThesecontrolthesendlevelstoMasterEffects1and2,
respectively.
CC#s93and91actuallycontrolsendlevelsintwodifferent
places:thesendsdirectlyfromtheProgramOSCandthe
sendlevelsofthelastInsertEffectinthechainwhich
matchestheCCsMIDIchannel.
JS+Y (CC#01)
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofJS+Y.WhateverJS+Yis
assignedtocontrol,thepedalwillcontrolaswell.
JSY (CC#02)
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofJSY.WhateverJSYis
assignedtocontrol,thepedalwillcontrolaswell.
Ribbon (CC#16)
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignRibbon
(CC#16)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
ProgramorEffect.
Value Slider (CC#18)
Dmodsource.Notethatyoullalsoneedtoassign
ValueSlider(CC#18)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithin
theProgramorEffect.
TONE [1]...TONE [4]
USER [1]...USER [4]
Usethepedaltocontroltheeffectofknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsisinUSER/TONE.
ARP GATE
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsGate.
ARP VELOCITY
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsVelocity.
ARP SWING
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsSwing.
ARP STEP
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsStep.
Appendices
352
System exclusive messages affected by Create Excl Data,
Erase Excl Data, and Event Edit
Create/Erase Event Edit
*Dump/Ext*
*Unavailable*
Univ: Mater Volume MaterVolume
Univ: Master Balance MasterBalance
Univ: Master Fine Tune MasterFineTune
Univ: Master Coarse Tune MasterCoarseTune
Song Setup Song Common Controls [SELECT] Controls [SELECT]
Tone Adjust Track Tone Adjust Track
Tone Adjust Auto
Load
TA AutoLoad
Scale Type Scale Type
Scale Key Scale Key
Scale Random Scale Random
[SW1] [SW1]
SW1:Assign SW1:Assign
SW1:Mode SW1:Mode
[SW2] [SW2]
SW2:Assign SW2:Assign
SW2:Mode SW2:Mode
USER CONTROL1:
Assign
USER1:Assign
USER CONTROL2:
Assign
USER2:Assign
USER CONTROL3:
Assign
USER3:Assign
USER CONTROL4:
Assign
USER4:Assign
Drum Track [ON/OFF] DT:[ON/OFF]
Pattern Bank DT:Pattern Bank
Pattern Number DT:PatternNumber
Shift DT:Shift
Input MIDI Channel DT:In MIDI Ch
Output MIDI Channel DT:Out MIDI Ch
Trigger Mode DT:Trigger Mode
Trigger Sync DT:Trigger Sync
Trigger Latch DT:Trigger Latch
Keyboard Zone
Bottom
DT:KeyZone Btm
Keyboard Zone Top DT:KeyZone Top
Velocity Zone
Bottom
DT:VelZone Btm
Velocity Zone Top DT:VelZone Top
Track 01 Play/Mute/Solo Play/Mute T01:Play/Mute
Solo T01:Solo
Parameter Program T01:Program
Pan T01:Pan
Volume T01:Volume
EX2 Bank
Select(MSB)
T01:EX2Bank MSB
EX2 Bank Select(LSB) T01:EX2Bank LSB
Force OSC Mode T01:OSC Mode
OSC Select T01:OSC Select
Arpeggiator Assign T01:Portamento
Portamento T01:Portamento
Transpose T01:Transpose
Detune T01:Detune
Bend Range T01:Bend Range
Use Program's Scale T01:Prog's Scale
Delay Time [ms] T01:DelayTime:ms
Delay MIDI/Tempo
Sync
T01:DelayMIDISync
Delay Sync Base Note T01:Delay Base
Delay Sync Times T01:Delay Times
Auto Load Program
EQ
T01:Auto Prog EQ
EQ Bypass T01:EQ Bypass
EQ Input Trim T01:EQ Input Trim
EQ High Gain T01:EQ High Gain
EQ Mid Freq T01:EQ Mid Freq
EQ Mid Gain T01:EQ Mid Gain
EQ Low Gain T01:EQ Low Gain
Bus Select T01:Bus Select
Send1(MFX1) T01:Send1(MFX1)
Send2(MFX2) T01:Send2(MFX2)
FX Control Bus T01:FX Ctrl Bus
Tone Adjust SW1:Assign T01TA:SW1:Assign
SW2:Assign T01TA:SW2:Assign
SW1:On/Off T01TA:SW1:on/off
SW1:(On)Value T01TA:SW1:Value
Slider1:Assign T01TA:SL1:Assign
Slider1:Value T01TA:SL1:Value
Track 02...16 Play/Mute/Solo Play/Mute T02:Play/Mute
: : :
Tone Adjust Slider8:Value T16TA:SL8:Value
Arpeggiator Arpeggio [ON/OFF] KAR:[ON/OFF]
Run A KAR:[LATCH]
Run B KAR:[MOD.CTRL]
[GATE] KAR:[M] SCENE
[VELOCITY] KAR:SceneQuantze
[SWING] KAR:LinkStartSeed
[STEP] KAR:Load GE Opt
Arpeggior-A, B Pattern KAR:UseRTCModel
Resolution KAR:Reset Scenes
Octave KAR:DT Run 1
Gate KAR:DT Run 2
Velocity KAR:DT Run 3
Sort KAR:DT Run 4
Latch KAR:DT Run 1
Key Sync. KAR:DT Run 2
Keyboard KAR:DT Run 3
Keyboard Zone
Bottom
KAR:DT Run 4
Keyboard Zone Top KAR:DT Run 1
System exclusive messages affected by Create Excl Data, Erase Excl Data, and Event Edit
353
Velocity Zone
Bottom
KAR:DT Run 2
Velocity Zone Top KAR:DT Run 3
Insert Effect Setup IFX1 SW IFX1:SW
IFX1 IFX1
IFX1 Control Channel IFX1:Control Ch.
IFX1 Chain To IFX1:Chain To
IFX1 Chain IFX1:Chain
IFX1 Pan IFX1:Pan
IFX1 Bus Select IFX1:Bus Select
IFX1 Control Bus IFX1:Control Bus
IFX1 Send1 IFX1:Send1
IFX1 Send2 IFX1:Send2
IFX2 SW IFX2:SW
: :
IFX5 IFX5:Send2
IFX1:No Effect Parameter0 IFX1:Parameter0
: :
Parameter71 IFX1:Parameter71
IFX2:No Effect...
IFX5:No Effect
: :
Common FX LFO1 Frequency[Hz] FX LFO1:Freq[Hz]
Sync(Reset) FX LFO1:Sync
Sync Source FX LFO1:Sync Src
Sync Control Channel FX LFO1:Sync Ctrl
MIDI/Tempo Sync FX LFO1:MIDI Sync
MIDI Sync BPM FX LFO1:BPM
MIDI Sync BaseNote FX LFO1:Base Note
MIDI Sync Times FX LFO1:Times
Common FX LFO2 Frequency[Hz] FX LFO1:Freq[Hz]
: :
MIDI Sync Times FX LFO2:Times
Master Effect Setup MFX1 SW MFX1:SW
MFX1 MFX1
MFX1 Control
Channel
MFX1:Control Ch.
MFX1 Return MFX1:Return
MFX2 SW MFX2:SW
MFX2 MFX2
MFX2 Control
Channel
MFX2:Control Ch.
MFX2 Return MFX2:Return
MFX Chain MFX Chain
Chain Direction MFX Chain Direct.
Chain Level MFX Chain Level
MFX1:No Effect Parameter0 MFX1:Parameter0
: :
Parameter71 MFX1:Parameter71
MFX2:No Effect Parameter0 MFX2:Parameter0
: :
Parameter71 MFX2:Parameter71
Total Effect Setup TFX SW TFX SW
TFX TFX
TFX Control Channel TFX:Control Ch.
Master Volume TFX Master Vol.
TFX:No Effect Parameter0 TFX:Parameter0
: :
Parameter71 TFX:Parameter71
Appendices
354
MIDI transmission when the KROMEs controllers are operated
ThefollowingtablesshowtherelationbetweentheMIDI
messagesthataretransmittedwhentheKROMEs
controllersareoperated,andtheAMS(alternatemodulation
source)orDMS(dynamicmodulationsource)that
correspondtoeachMIDImessage.
#indicatesafixedfunction,and*indicatesanassignable
function.
MIDI Messages and physical controllers
ARP
Available
forAMS
Available
forDmod MIDImessages Joystick
Realtime
Knob
TONE14
Realtime
Knob
USER14
SW1,2 On/Off
Knob1
(GATE)
Knob2
(VELOCITY)
Knob3
(SWING)
Knob4
(STEP)
Damper
Foot
Switch
Foot
Pedal
Noteoff
Noteon(notenumber) * *
Noteon(velocity) * *
Polyaftertouch *
CC#
0 Bankselect(MSB) * * * * * *
1 Modulation1 #(+Y) * * * * * * * * * *
2 Modulation2 #(Y) * * * * * * * * * *
3 * * * * * *
4 Footcontroller * * * * * * * * *
5 Portamentotime * * * * * * *
6 Dataentry(MSB) * * * * * *
7 Volume * * * * * * *
8 PostInsertEffectpanpot * * * * * * *
9 * * * * * *
10 Panpot * * * * * * *
11 Expression * * * * * * *
12 Effectcontrol1 * * * * * * * *
13 Effectcontrol2 * * * * * * * *
14 ARPOn/Offcontrol * [*] * * * * *(1)
15 * * * * * *
16 Controller(CC#16) * * * * * * * * * *
17 Knobmodulation5 * * * * * * * *
18 Controller(CC#18) * * * * * * * * * *
22 ARPGATEcontrol * * [*] * * * *(1) *(1)
23 ARPVELOCITYcontrol * * * [*] * * *(1) *(1)
24 ARPSWINGcontrol * * * * [*] * *(1) *(1)
25 ARPSTEPcontrol * * * * * [*] *(1) *(1)
26 * * * * * *
27 * * * * * *
28 * * * * * *
29 * * * * * *
30 * * * * * *
31 * * * * * *
32 Bankselect(LSB) * * * * * *
33...37 * * * * * *
38 Dataentry(LSB) * * * * * *
39...63 * * * * * *
64 Damper * * * * * * # * * *
65 PortamentoOn/Off * * * * * * * * * *
66 Sostenuto * * * * * * * * *
67 Softpedal * * * * * * * * *
68...69 * * * * * *
70 Sustainlevel * * * * * *
71 Filterresonancelevel #(Knob2) * * * * * * * *
72 Releasetime #(Knob4) * * * * * * * *
73 Attacktime * * * * * *
74 Filtercutofffrequency #(Knob1) * * * * * * * *
75 Decaytime * * * * * *
76 LFO1speed * * * * * *
77 LFO1depth(pitch) * * * * * *
78 LFO1delay * * * * * *
79 FilterEGintensity #(Knob3) * * * * * * * *
80 SW1modulationOn/Off * *(SW1) * * * * * * *
81 SW2modulationOn/Off * *(SW2) * * * * * * *
82 FootswitchOn/Off * * * * * * * * *
83 Controller(CC#83) * * * * * * * *
84 * * * * * *
85 Controller(CC#85) * * * * * * * *
86 Controller(CC#86) * * * * * * * *
87 Controller(CC#87) * * * * * * * *
88 Controller(CC#88) * * * * * * * *
89...90 * * * * * *
91 Effectdepth1(send2level) * * * * * * *
92 Effectdepth2(IFX15On/Off) * * * * * *
93 Effectdepth3(send1level) * * * * * * *
94 Effectdepth4(MFX1,2On/Off) * * * * * *
95 Effectdepth5(TFX1,2On/Off) * * * * * *
96 Dataincrement * * * * * *
97 Datadecrement * * * * * *
98 NRPN(LSB) * * * * * *
99 NRPN(MSB) * * * * * *
100 RPN(LSB) * * * * * *
0:Bendrange * * * * * *
1:Finetune * * * * * *
2:Coarsetune * * * * * *
101 RPN(MSB)0 * * * * * *
102 * * * * * *
103 * * * * * *
104 * * * * * *
105 * * * * * *
106 * * * * * *
107 * * * * * *
108 * * * * * *
109 * * * * * *
114 * * * * * *
115 * * * * * *
116 * * * * * *
117 * * * * * *
118 * * * * * *
119 * * * * * *
Programchange
Channelaftertouch * *
PitchBend +X,X * *
Universalexclusive
Mastervolume * *
Masterbalance
Masterfinetune
Mastercoarsetune
MIDI transmission when the KROMEs controllers are operated
355
(1):WhenaarpeggiatorcontrollerisassignedtoaCC#
indicatedby[*](GlobalP2:ControllersMIDICC#
Assign)
*:Assignable
[*]: TheARPControllerscanbeassignedtoCC#00119.
CC#sindicatedby[*]willbeassignedautomatically
whenyouexecutetheGlobalP2MIDICC#Assign
menucommandResetControllerMIDIAssignwiththe
CCDefaultsetting.
TheCCDefaultsettingsaretheCC#srecommendedas
theCC#foreachofthesecontrollers.Normallyyou
shouldusethesesettingswhenassigningCC#s.
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,the
correspondingortheassignedcontrolchangewillbe
transmitted.
IfyouchooseUSER[1]USER[4],orSW1/2,itsMIDI
controlchangemessagewillbetransmittedaccordingtothe
settingsinRealtimeControlsKnobAssign,SW1/2Assign.
IfyouveselectedARPON/OFF,ARPGATE,ARP
VELOCITY,ARPSWING,ARPSTEP,thoseMIDIcontrol
changemessageswillbetransmittedaccordingtotheGlobal
P2MIDICC#Assignsettings.
Thefollowingsectionsdescribesoperationineachmode.
Program mode
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,acontrol
changemessagewillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel(MIDIChannelGlobal11a).
IftheRealtimeControlsissettoUSER,andknobs14
ortheassignablepedalareassignedtoMasterVolume,
theuniversalexclusivemessageMasterVolumewillbe
transmitted.
Combination mode
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,acontrol
changemessagewillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel(MIDIChannelGlobal11a).
Simultaneously,themessagewillalsobetransmittedonthe
MIDIchannel(MIDIChannelCombi31(2)c)ofanytimbre
whoseStatus(Combi31(2)c)isEXTorEX2.
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,itseffect
willapplytoanytimbrewhoseStatusisINTandwhose
MIDIChannelsettingiseitherGchorthesameasthe
globalMIDIchannel.
InthecaseofMasterVolume,theuniversalexclusive
messageMasterVolumewillbetransmittedonlyonthe
globalMIDIchannel.
YoucanmakesettingsforMIDIFilter(CombiP5)to
enableordisablecontrolchangesandcontrollersfor
eachtimbre.Whenchecked,theaboveoperationswill
beenabled.
EffectdynamicmodulationcanbecontrolledwhentheCh
(Combi84a,92a)settingforIFX15,MFX1,2,orTFXis
eithersettoGchortothesamechannelastheglobalMIDI
channel.(InthecaseofAllRouted,controlispossibleonthe
MIDIchannelofanyroutedtimbre.)
Sequencer mode
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,itseffect
willapplytotheMIDItrack116thatiscurrentlyselected
byTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).
IftheStatus(Seq31(2)c)ofthetrackselectedbyTrack
SelectisEXT,EX2,orBTH,acontrolchangemessagewillbe
transmittedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDI
Channel(Seq31(2)c).
IftheStatusisINTorBTH,operatingoneoftheKROMEs
controllerswillaffectonlythatMIDItrack.Simultaneously,
thesameeffectwillalsoapplytoanyMIDItrackwiththe
sameMIDIChannelsetting.
InthecaseofMasterVolume,theuniversalexclusive
messageMasterVolumewillbetransmitted.
YoucanmakesettingsforMIDIFilter(SeqP3)toenable
ordisablecontrolchangesandcontrollersforeach
track.Whenchecked,theoperationseffectivefora
StatusofINTorBTHwillbeenabled.Trackswhose
StatusisEXT,EX2,orBTHwilltransmitcontrol
changesregardlessofthissetting.
EffectdynamicmodulationcanbecontrolledwhentheCh
(Seq84a,92a)settingforIFX15,MFX1,2,orTFXmatches
theMIDIchannelofthetrackselectedbyTrackSelect.(In
thecaseofAllRouted,controlispossibleontheMIDI
channelofallroutedtracks.)
IfoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperatedduring
realtimerecording,thecorrespondingorassignedcontrol
changewillberecorded.
Appendices
356
KROME and MIDI CCs
Responses to standard MIDI
controllers
ThefollowingtableshowshowtheKROMErespondsto
MIDIcontrolchangemessages,andtherelationbetween
settingsandcontrollermovementsontheKROME.
CC# Control Value Function
0 Bankselect(MSB) 0127 bankselectmessageMSB *1
1 Modulation1 0127 correspondstojoystickmovementinthe+Ydirection(Verticalupward)
2 Modulation2 0127 correspondstojoystickmovementintheYdirection(Verticaldownward)
3
4 Footcontroller 0127
correspondstowhentheassignablepedalfunctionissettoFoot
Pedal
5 Portamentotime 0127 portamentotime
6 Dataentry(MSB) 0127 MSBofRPNandNRPNdata *2
7 Volume 0127 volume *3
8 PostInsertEffectpanpot 0127 panaftertheInsertEffect
9
10 Panpot 0127 pan
11 Expression 0127 volume *3
12 Effectcontrol1 0127 correspondstoeffectdynamiccontrolsourceFXControl1(p.363)
13 Effectcontrol2 0127 correspondstoeffectdynamiccontrolsourceFXControl2(p.363)
14 ARPON/OFFcontrol
063(Off),
64127(On)
equivalenttoon/offwhenCC#14isassignedtotheARPbuttons *7
15
16 Controller(CC#16) 0127 forcontrollingAMSorDmod
17 Knobmodulation1 0127
correspondstowhentheRealtimeControlsknobfunctionissettoKnob
Mod.1
18 Controller(CC#18) 0127 forcontrollingAMSorDmod *8
Mod.2
Mod.3
Mod.4
22 ARPGATEcontrol 0127
equivalenttowhenCC#22isassignedtoarpeggiocontrolknob1
(GATE)
*7
23 ARPVELOCITYcontrol 0127
(VELOCITY)
*7
24 ARPSWINGcontrol 0127
(SWING)
*7
25 ARPSTEPcontrol 0127
(STEP)
*7
2631
32 Bankselect(LSB) 0127 LSBofbankselectmessage *1
3337
38 Dataentry(LSB) 0127 LSBofRPNorNRPNdata *2
3963
64 Damper 0127 dampereffect
65 PortamentoOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
turntheportamentoeffecton/off
66 SostenutoOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
turnthesostenutoeffecton/off
67 Soft 0127 softpedaleffect
6869
70 Sustainlevel 0127 sustainlevelsofthefilterEGandampEG *4
71 Filterresonancelevel 0127 resonancelevelofthefilter *4
72 Releasetime 0127 cutofffrequencyofthehighpassfilter *4
73 Attacktime 0127 releasetimesofthefilterEGandampEG *4
74 Filtercutofffrequency 0127 cutofffrequencyofthelowpassfilter *4
75 Decaytime 0127 decaytimes/slopetimesofthefilterEGandampEG *4
76 LFO1speed 0127 LFO1speed *4
KROME and MIDI CCs
357
Youcanassignanycontrolchangenumber(CC#00119)to
theRealtimeControlsKnobsUSER14.Inthiscase,the
transmittedvalueswillallbe0127.
Youcanassignanycontrolchangenumber(CC#00119)to
theARPbutton,arpeggiocontrolknobs14.Inthiscase,
ARPbuttonswilltransmitvaluesof0(Off)or127(On),
knobs14willtransmitvaluesof0127.
*1 IntheKROMEsequencer,bankselectmessagesare
normallyspecifiedasprogramchangeevents(MIDI
EventEditSequencerP6).Howeverinsomecasesthis
willbeinsufficientwhenyouwishtochangebanksonan
externaldevice.Insuchcases,youcanuseCC#00and
CC#32tospecifythebanks.
Forinformationontherelationbetweenbankselect
numbersandthebanksofyourexternaldevice,referto
theownersmanualforyourexternaldevice.
*2 Unlikeconventionalcontrolchanges,pitchbendrange,
finetune,andcoarsetunesettingsaremadeusingRPC
(RegisteredParameterControl)messages.InProgram,
Combination,andSequencermodes,youcanuseRPC
messagestocontrolthebendrangeandtuningforeach
program,Timbre(Combination),orTrack(Sequencer).
TheprocedureistouseanRPN(RegisteredParameter
Number)messagetoselecttheparameterthatyouwish
toedit,andthenuseDataEntrytoinputavalueforthat
parameter.Toselecttheparameter,useCC#100(witha
valueof0002)andCC#101(withavalueof00).use
CC#06andCC#38toenterthedata.
Thedataentryvaluesforeachparameterandthecorre
spondingsettingsareasfollows.
Forexample,ifinSequencermodeyouwishtoseta
MIDItrackthatisreceivingchannel1toatranspose
(coarsetuning)valueof12,youwouldfirsttransmit[B0,
64,02](64H=CC#100)and[B0,65,00](65H=CC#101)to
theKROMEtoselecttheRPNcoarsetune.Thenyou
77 LFO1depth 0127 pitchLFO1intensity *4
78 LFO1delay 0127 LFO1delay *4
79 FilterEGintensity 0127 filterEGintensity *4
80 SW1modulationOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
correspondstoon/offwhentheSW1functionissettoSW1Mod.
81 SW2modulationOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
correspondstoon/offwhentheSW2functionissettoSW2Mod.
82 FootswitchOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
correspondstoon/offwhenthefunctionoftheassignablefootswitchisset
toFootSW
84
89,90
91 Effectdepth1(send2level) 0127 send2level
92
Effectdepth2(InsertEffect15On/
Off)
063(Off),
64127(On)
turnInserteffect15on/off *5
93 Effectdepth3(send1level) 0127 send1level
94
Effectdepth4(mastereffect1,2
On/Off)
063(Off),
64127(On)
mastereffect1,2on/off *5
95 Effectdepth5(totaleffectOn/Off)
063(Off),
64127(On)
totaleffecton/off *5
96 Dataincrement 0
97 Datadecrement 0
98 NRPN(LSB) LSBofNRPN
99 NRPN(MSB) MSBofNRPN
100 RPN(LSB)
0 selectsthepitchbendrange *2
1 controlsFineTune *2
2 controlsCoarseTune *2
101 RPN(MSB) 0 MSBofRPN
102...119
CC# Control Value Function
CC#06 CC#38
RPN=1 (Fine tune)
Parameter value (1 cent steps)
CC#06 CC#38
RPN=2 (Coarse tune)
Parameter value (Semitone steps)
CC#06 CC#38
RPN=0 (Pitch bend range)
Parameter value (Semitone steps)
0
12
24
127
00
00
00
00
0
+12
+24
+24
0
64
127
127
00
00
00
127
-100
0
+98
+99
0
40
64
88
127
00
00
00
00
00
-24
-24
0
+24
+24
Appendices
358
wouldsetthisto12bytransmitting[B0,06,34]
(06H=CC#6),34H=52(correspondsto12),and[B0,26,
00](26H=CC#38,00H=0).
*3 ThevolumeoftheKROMEisdeterminedbymultiplying
theVolume(CC#07)withtheExpression(CC#11).In
Sequencermodewhenyoustopthesongplaybackand
returnthelocationtothebeginningofthetrack,the
Volumewillbesettothestartingvalue,andthe
Expressionwillbesettothemaximumvalue(127).
*4 Avalueof64willcorrespondtothevaluespecifiedby
theprogramparameter.0istheminimum,and127isthe
maximum.Changingfrom631orfrom65126will
adjusttheeffectfromtheprogramparametersetting
towardtheminimumvalueormaximumvalue.
Fordetailsaboutthespecificparameterscontrolledby
theseCCs,pleaseseeParameterscontrolledbyMIDI
CCs#7079onpage 358.
*5 ControlledontheglobalMIDIchannel.
*6 IfyouassignaCC#totheARPbuttonorarpeggiocontrol
knobs14andperformtheseoperationsontheKROME,
theassignedCC#willbetransmitted,andtheKROME
itselfwillalsobecontrolledatthesametime.Ifthis
messageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameasifthe
KROMEitselfhadbeenoperated.
TheCC#settingsforeachknobandbuttonaremadein
theGlobalP2MIDICC#Assignpage.Usethesesettings
ifyouneedtoassigncontrolchangemessages,forexam
plewhenyouwanttorecordbuttonoperationsonthe
internalsequenceroranexternalMIDIsequencer,orto
controlthearpeggiatorfromanexternalMIDIdevice.
Eachknobandbuttoncanbeassignedtoanydesired
MIDIcontrolchangemessageCC#00119,butnormally
youwillchoosetheGlobalP2MIDICC#Assignmenu
commandResetControllerMIDIAssignandusetheCC
Defaultsettings.
ThistableshowstheoperationsfortheCCDefaultset
tings.TheCCDefaultsettingsaretheCC#srecom
mendedforusewiththesecontrollers.Normally,you
willassigntheseCC#s.
Parameters controlled by MIDI
CCs #70-79
CC#7079correspondtotheKROMEsprogramparameters
listedbelow.
InProgrammode,thecorrespondingprogramparameters
willbetemporarilyeditedwhenCC#7079messagesare
receivedontheglobalMIDIchannel(MIDIChannelGlobal
11a),whenknobs14areoperatedwhentheRealtime
ControlsisinTONE,orwhenknobs14areoperatedwhen
assignedtoCC#7079withtheRealtimeControlsinUSER.
Inmostcases,youcanusetheWriteProgrammenu
commandtosavetheeditedvalues,overwritingthe
previousProgramsettings.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanuse
theseCCstotemporarilyedittheparametersforall
TimbresorTracksonagivenMIDIchannel.However,
CC# Internal parameters controlled by the CC
70(Sustainlevel)
FilterEG1/2Sustain(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Sustain(seepage 39)
71(Filterresonance) FilterA/B,1/2Resonance(seepage 27)
72(Releasetime)
FilterEG1/2Release(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Release(seepage 39)
73(Attacktime)
EGTimes:
FilterEG1/2Attack(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Attack(seepage 39)
AmpEG1/2TimeModulation:Attack(seepage 39)
EGLevels:
AmpEG1/2LevelStart(seepage 38)
AmpEG1/2LevelAttack(seepage 38)
AmpEG1/2LevelModulation:Start(seepage 40)
74(Filtercutofffrequency) FilterA/B,1/2Frequency(seepage 27)
75(Decaytime)
FilterEG1/2Decay(seepage 32)
FilterEG1/2Slope(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Decay(seepage 39)
AmpEG1/2Slope(seepage 39)
76(LFO1speed) LFO1Frequency(seepage 42)
77(LFO1Pitchintensity) PitchLFO1Intensity(seepage 22)
78(LFO1delay) LFO1Delay(seepage 43)
79(FilterEGintensity)
FilterEG1/2IntensitytoA(seepage 30)
FilterEG1/2IntensitytoB(seepage 30)
MIDI applications
359
MIDI applications
About MIDI
MIDIstandsforMusicalInstrumentDigitalInterface,andis
aworldwidestandardforexchangingvarioustypesof
musicaldatabetweenelectronicmusicalinstrumentsand
computers.WhenMIDIcablesareusedtoconnecttwoor
moreMIDIdevices,performancedatacanbeexchanged
betweenthedevices,eveniftheyweremadebydifferent
manufacturers.
Settings when connected to a
MIDI device or computer
Herewewillexplainthesettingsyoullmakeonthe
KROMEwhenconnectingittoanotherdevice.
The Convert Position setting
TheKROMEssettingsKeyTranspose,VelocityCurve,and
AfterTouchCurve(MIDIIN)(Global01a)respectively
allowyoutoadjustthetransposition,velocitysensitivity,
andaftertouch(receivedonlyfromtheinternalsequenceror
fromMIDIIN)sensitivity.
Theaftertouchcurveisappliedonlytodatareceived
fromtheinternalsequencerorfromMIDIIN.TheAfter
TouchCurve(MIDIIN)settingdoesnothingif
ConvertPosition(Global11a)isPreMIDI.
Theeffectthatthesesettingswillhaveontheinternal
sequencerandontheMIDIdatathatistransmittedand
receivedwilldependonConvertPosition(Global11a)
setting.
IfyouwanttocontrolanexternalMIDItonegenerator
fromtheKROME,setConvertPositiontoPreMIDI.The
varioussettingslistedabovewillbereflectedintheMIDI
datathatistransmitted.Thesesettingswillalsobe
reflectedinthedatathatisrecordedontheinternal
sequencer.
IncomingMIDIdatawillbehandledwithsettingsequiv
alenttoKeyTranspose0,VelocityCurve4,andAfter
TouchCurve3.
WhencontrollingtheKROMEstonegeneratorfroman
externalMIDIdevice,selectPostMIDI.Theabovelisted
settingswillaffecttheMIDIdatathatisreceived.These
settingswillalsoaffectthedatathatisplayedbackfrom
theinternalsequencer.
OutgoingMIDIdatawillbehandledwithsettingsequiv
alenttoKeyTranspose0,andVelocityCurve4.
Local Control On settings
IfyouveconnectedtheKROMEtoacomputerorexternal
MIDIsequencerandwanttousetheechobackfromthat
devicetoplaytheKROME,turnechobackonforyour
externalMIDIsequencerorcomputer(sothatthedatait
receivesatMIDIINwillberetransmittedfromMIDIOUT),
andturnofftheKROMEslocalcontrolsetting(sothatthe
KROMEskeyboardsectionandsoundgeneratorwillbe
internallydisconnected).
WhenyouplaythekeyboardoftheKROME,themusical
datawillbetransmittedtotheexternalMIDIsequenceror
computer,andthenechoedbacktoplaytheKROMEstone
generator.Inotherwords,byturningLocalControlOFF,
youcanpreventnotesfrombeingsoundedinduplicate,as
wouldotherwiseoccurifanoteweresoundedbythe
KROMEsownkeyboardandagainbythedatathatwas
echoedback.
Ifthearpeggiatorfunctionison,playingtheKROMEs
keyboardwillnotcausethearpeggiatortooperate,andonly
themusicaldataproducedbyplayingthekeyboardwillbe
transmitted.Thearpeggiatorwilloperateonlyinresponse
tothenotesthatareechoedbackandreceivedatMIDIIN.
Inthisway,turningoffLocalControlpreventsthe
arpeggiatorfromoperatinginduplicate.
Usethissettingwhenyouwishtorecordontheexternal
MIDIsequencerorcomputeronlythenotesthattriggerthe
arpeggiator,andtousetheechoedbacknotestooperatethe
arpeggiatorwhilemonitoringyourrecordingorduring
playback.
Note:Ifyouwantthenotedataproducedbythearpeggiator
toberecordedontheexternalsequencer/computer,setLocal
Controlon,andturnofftheEchoBacksettingoftheexternal
sequencer/computer.
ToturnoffLocalControl,presstheLocalControlOn
(Global11a)checkboxtouncheckit.
WhenusingtheKROMEbyitself,leaveLocalControl
turnedon.(IfthisisoffwhentheKROMEisusedbyitself,
playingthekeyboardwillnotproducesound.)
Appendices
360
Messages transmitted and
received by the KROME
Inthetextbelow,[]indicateshexadecimalnotation.
MIDI channels
MIDImessagescanbeexchangedwhenthetransmitting
andreceivingdevicesaresettothesameMIDIchannel.
MIDIusessixteenchannels,numbered116.Thewayin
whichchannelsarehandledwilldifferdependingonthe
mode.
Program mode
OtherthantransmissionfortheDrumTrackfunction,all
dataistransmittedandreceivedontheglobalMIDI
channel.
TheglobalMIDIchannelisthebasicchannelthatthe
KROMEusesforMIDItransmission/reception,andisset
byMIDIChannel(Global11a).
TheDrumTrackfunctioninProgrammodewilltransmit
andreceiveonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:GlobalMIDIchannel.
Transmit:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumTrack
ProgMIDIOut(Global11a)setting(default:channel
10).
Note:TransmissionisenabledifDrumTrackProgMIDI
Out(Global11a)ischecked.Bydefault,thisisoff
(unchecked).
Combination mode
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmit/receive
messagesforselectingacombinationandturningeffects
on/off,andtotransmit/receiveexclusivedata.
Eachtimbrewilltransmit/receiveMIDIdataontheMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c)thatisspecifiedforthattimbre.
TheDrumTrackfunctionwilltransmitandreceiveonthe
followingMIDIchannels.
Receive:GlobalMIDIchannel.TheKROMEskeyboard
willcontroltriggering.
Transmit:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumPat
ternOutput(Combi76a)settingofeachcombination.
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofatimbretowhicha
drumprogramisassigned.
TheChMIDIchannelspecifiedforeacheffect(Combi8
4a,92a)isusedtocontroldynamicmodulationofthe
insert/master/totaleffect,thepanfollowingtheinsert
effect,andsend1and2.
Whenyouoperatethekeyboardorcontrollersofthe
KROME,messageswillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel,andwillalsobetransmittedontheMIDIchannel
ofanytimbrewhoseStatus(Combi21a)issettoEXTor
EX2.
ChannelmessageswillbereceivediftheymatchtheMIDI
channelofatimbrewhoseStatusissettoINT(Combi3
1(2)c).
Sequencer mode
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmit/receive
exclusivedataandformessagesthatswitcheffectson/off.
MIDIdatatransmission/receptionforeachMIDItrack
willoccurontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachMIDI
trackbyMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c).
TheDrumTrackfunctionwilltransmitandreceiveonthe
followingMIDIchannels.
Receive:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumPat
ternInput(Seq11a)settingofeachsong.Youwillnor
mallysetthistoTchandusetheKROMEskeyboardto
controltriggering.
Transmit:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumPat
ternOutput(Seq11a)settingofeachsong.Setthisto
matchtheMIDIchanneloftheMIDItracktowhicha
drumpatternisassigned.
TheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeacheffectbytheCh
parameter(Seq84a,92a)isusedtocontroldynamic
modulationoftheinsert/master/totaleffect,thepan
followingtheinserteffect,andsend1and2.
Whenyouoperatethekeyboardorcontrollersofthe
KROME,messageswillbetransmittedontheMIDI
channelselectedbyTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).However,
messageswillbetransmittedonlyiftheselectedMIDI
trackhasaStatusofBTH,EXT,orEX2.Formore
information,pleaseseeTrackSelectonpage 110.
Whenthesequencerisplayedback,musicaldataofMIDI
trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2willbe
transmittedonthespecifiedMIDIchannels.
MIDItrackswhoseStatusisINTorBTHwillreceive
channelmessagesofthematchingMIDIchannel.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeStatusonpage 125,and
MIDIChannelonpage 125.
Note on/off
Note-on [9n, kk, vv]
Note-off [8n, kk, vv]
(n:channel,kk:notenumber,vv:velocity)
WhenyouplayanoteontheKROMEskeyboard,itwill
transmitnoteon/offmessages.
Whenthearpeggiatorisrunning,noteon/offmessages
generatedbythearpeggiatoraretransmitted.IfLocalisOff,
noteon/offmessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatorwillnot
betransmitted.(SeeLocalControlOnsettingson
page 359)
IftheDrumTrackProgMIDIOutsetting(Global11a)is
checked,thedrumtrackpatternwilltransmitnoteon/off
messageswhilethedrumtrackfunctionisoperating.
However,mostinstrumentsdonotreceiveortransmitnote
offvelocity,andneitherdoestheKROME.
Program Change/Bank Select
Changing the program/bank
Program change [Cn, pp]
(n:channel,pp:programnumberthatallows128soundsto
beselected)
Programs000127inbanksAEcorrespondtoprogram
changes[Cn,00][Cn,7F].
Programs001128inbanksGM,g(1),g(2),g(3),g(4),g(5),
g(6),g(7),g(8),g(9),andg(d)correspondtoprogram
changes[Cn,00][Cn,7F].
Bank select MSB (CC#0) [Bn, 00, mm]
Bank select LSB (CC#32) [Bn, 20, bb]
(n:channel,mm:banknumberupperbyte,bb:banknumber
lowerbyte)
Theinternalbanksthatcorrespondtoeachbankselect
numberwilldependontheBankMapsetting(Global0
2a).KORGisthedefaultsetting.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeBankMaponpage 196.
SimplyreceivingaBankSelectmessagewillnotcausethe
programorbanktochange.Theprogramorbankwill
MIDI applications
361
actuallychangewhenaProgramChangemessageis
received.
Program mode
InProgP0:Play,thesemessageswilltransmitandreceive
programchangeandbankselectoperations.Theywillnot
bereceivedinP1P9.
Note:Drumtrackprogramsdonotsupporttransmissionor
receptionofprogramchangeorbankselectmessages.
Combination, Sequencer modes
Programchangeandbankselectmessagescanbe
receivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbre/
MIDItracktoselectprogramsonthattimbre/track.
Whenyouselectacombination,programchangeand
bankselectmessageswillbetransmittedbytimbres
whoseStatusisEXTorEX2.
InSequencermode,programchangeorbankselectmes
sageswillbetransmittedbytrackswhoseStatusisBTH,
EXT,orEX2whenyouselecttheProgramSelectparame
ter(01(2)b),whenyouselectasong,orwhenyoureturn
tothebeginningofameasure.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeProgramSelectonpage 112.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,transmission/
receptioncanbeswitchedon/offforeachtimbre/track.
SeeEnableProgramChangeonpage 87,andGlobalP1:
MIDITrackMIDIOutonpage 200.
Selecting combinations
Youcanuseprogramchangeandbankselectmessagesto
selectcombinationsinthesamewaythatyouselect
programs.
Combinations000127inbanksADcorrespondto
programchanges[Cn,00][Cn,7F].
Similarlyasforprogrambanks,theinternalbanksthat
correspondtoeachbankselectnumberwilldependon
theBankMapsetting(Global02a).Formore
information,pleaseseeBankMaponpage 196.
InCombiP0:Play,programchangeandbankselect
messagesaretransmitted/receivedontheglobalMIDI
channel.TheyarenotreceivedinP1P9.
Note:AllprogramchangescanbeturnedoffinMIDIFilter
(Global12b)
Asneeded,youcanindependentlyturnallprogramchanges
on/off,specifywhetherornotincomingmessageswillbe
abletochangecombinations,andturnreception/
transmissionofbankselectmessageson/off.
IfCombinationChange(Global12b)isunchecked,the
combinationwillnotchangeevenifaprogramchangeon
theglobalMIDIchannelisreceivedinCombiP0:Play.In
thiscase,theprogramofthetimbrethatmatchesthe
MIDIchannelofthereceivedmessagewillchange.
IfBankChange(Global12b)isunchecked,bankselect
messageswillnotbetransmittedorreceived.
Aftertouch
Channel aftertouch [Dn, vv]
(n:channel,vv:value)
Whenthismessageisreceived,theaftertoucheffectwillbe
applied.Theassignedalternatemodulationordynamic
modulationeffectwillalsobeapplied.
ThekeyboardoftheKROMEitselfcannottransmit
aftertouch.Aftertouchcanbereceivedonlyfromthe
internalsequencerorfromMIDIIN.
Aftertouchreceptionfortheentireinstrumentcanbe
turnedon/offinEnableAfterTouch(Global12b).
InCombinationandSequencermodes,aftertouchcanbe
turnedon/offindependentlyforeachtimbre/track
(EnableAfterTouchCombi/Seq51(2)c).
Polyphonic aftertouch [An, kk, vv]
(n:channel,kk:notenumber,vv:value)
ThereisanothertypeofaftertouchcalledPolyphonicKey
Pressure,whichallowsaftertouchtobeapplied
independentlyforindividualkeys.Thismessagecanbe
usedasanalternatemodulationsource,butcannotbe
transmittedbytheKROMEskeyboard.Inordertousethis
message,itwillhavetobereceivedfromanexternaldevice,
orrecordedonyoursequencer.
TheaftertouchmentionedinthismanualreferstoChannel
AfterTouch.
Pitch bend
Pitch bend change [En, bb, mm]
(n:channel,bb:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteof
thevalue,togetherexpressingavalueof16,384stepswhere
8,192[bb,mm=00H,40H]isthecentervalue)
WhentheKROMEsjoystickismovedintheXaxis(left/
right),apitchbendeffectwillbeapplied,andpitchbender
messageswillalsobetransmitted.Whenthesemessagesare
received,apitchbendeffectwillbeapplied.
Therangeofpitchchangethatisproducedbypitchbend
messagescanalsobeadjustedviaMIDI.(SeeChangingthe
pitchbendrangeonpage 365)
Control change
[Bn, cc, vv]
Transmittedandreceivedas(n:channel,cc:controlchange
no.,vv:value)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDItransmissionwhen
theKROMEscontrollersareoperatedonpage 354,and
KROMEandMIDICCsonpage 356.
Controlchangescanbeturnedon/offasawholein
EnableControlChange(Global12b).
InCombinationandSequencermodes,theP3:MIDI
Filter1settingsallowtransmission/receptionofcontrol
changestobeindividuallyturnedon/offforeachtimbre/
track.Fortheassignablecontrollers(SW1,SW2,Realtime
ControlsKnobUSER1USER4,andFootPedal/Switch),
MIDIfiltersettingswillapplytothecontrolchange
numbertowhicheachcontrollerisassigned.Other
ControlChangeappliestocontrolchangesthatarenot
coveredbytheitemsoftheothercheckboxes.
Note:YoucanselectMIDICC#00CC#119forknobs14
whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
AlthoughyoucanselectMIDICC#00CC#119fortheARP
Controllers,youwillnormallyusethedefaultsettingsthat
areassignedwhenyouexecutethemenucommandReset
ControllerMIDIAssignwithDefaultSetting,ARP
ControllersSWARPON/OFFatCC#014,KNOB1ARP
GATEatCC#022,KNOB2ARPVELOCITYatCC#023,
KNOB3ARPSWINGatCC#024,KNOB4ARPSTEPat
CC#025.
Selecting program/combination banks
Bank select (CC#00, CC#32)
Technically,BankSelectisacontroller.Inpractice,however,
itisacomponentofProgramChange.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeProgramChange/BankSelectonpage 360)
Appendices
362
Using the joystick to apply modulation
Modulation 1 depth (CC#01) [Bn, 01, vv]
WhenyoumovetheKROMEsjoystickinthe+Ydirection
(Verticalupward),Modulation1Depthmessageswillbe
transmitted.Whenthesemessagesarereceived,thesame
effectwillbeappliedaswhentheKROMEsjoystickis
operated.Normallythiswillapplyavibratoeffect(pitch
LFO).
receptioncanbeturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track
(EnableJS+YCombi/Seq53(4)c).
Modulation 2 depth (CC#02) [Bn, 02, vv]
WhenyoumovetheKROMEsjoystickintheYdirection
(Verticaldownward),Modulation2Depthmessageswillbe
transmitted.Whenthesemessagesarereceived,thesame
effectwillbeappliedaswhentheKROMEsjoystickis
operated.Normallythiswillapplyawaheffect(filterLFO).
receptioncanbeturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track
(EnableJSYCombi/Seq53(4)c).
Othermanufacturersusethismessageforotherpurposes
(e.g.,breathcontroller,etc.)
Controlling portamento
Portamento time (CC#05) [Bn, 05, vv]
IfyouassigntheaboveCC#toanAssignablePedalorknobs
14whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected,rotating
thatknobwilltransmitPortamentoTimemessages,andwill
modifythespeedatwhichtheportamentopitchchanges.
Whenthismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameas
whenthecontrollerisoperated.
Portamento switch (CC#65) [Bn, 41, vv]
WhentheaboveCC#isassignedtoSW1,SW2orthe
AssignableSwitch,operatingthatswitchwilltransmit
vv=127[7F]forONorvv=0[00]forOFF,andtheportamento
effectwillbeswitchedon/off.Whenthismessageis
received,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrolleris
operated.(vvof63[3F]orlesswillbeOFF,and64[40]or
greaterwillbeON.)(SeeSW1/2Assignmentsonpage 348)
receptionofthismessagecanbeturnedon/off
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnablePortamento
SWCombi51(2)c/Seq31a).
InSequencermode,portamentotime/switchmessages
willbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatusisBTH,
EXT,orEX2whenyousetPortamento(Seq33(4)c),re
selectasongorSMF,orreturntothebeginningofa
measure.Formoreinformation,pleaseseePortamento
onpage 126.
Controlling volume
Volume (CC#07) [Bn, 07, vv]
WhentheaboveCC#isassignedtotheAssignablePedalor
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected,
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitVolumemessages,
andthevolumewillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,
theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrolleris
operated.
Expression (CC#11) [Bn, 0B, vv]
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitExpressionmessages,
andthevolumewillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,
operated.
ThevolumeoftheKROMEisdeterminedbymultiplying
thevalueoftheVolumemessagewiththevalueofthe
Expressionmessage.
IfadjustingtheVolumemessagedoesnotincreasethe
volumeasyouexpect,orifthereisnosound,transmitMIDI
messagesfromanexternaldevicetoresetthevalueofthe
Expressionmessage(setvvto127).
Note:InSequencermode,thiswillberesetwhenthe
Locationofthesongismovedto001:01.000.
InCombinationmode,Volumemessageswillbe
transmittedbyeachtimbrewhoseStatusisEXTorEX2
whenyoureselectthecombination.
WhenyouchangetheVolumesetting(Seq03(4)b)in
Sequencermode,orwhenyoureselectthesongorreturn
tothebeginningofthesonginSequencermode,volume
messageswillbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatus
isBTH,EXT,orEX2.SeeGlobalP1:MIDITrackMIDI
Outonpage 200.
Note:RegardlessoftheStatussettings,reselectingasong,
orreturningtothebeginningwillresettheinternalVolume
valuetothevaluespecifiedbyeachtrack(thestarting
settings),andwillresettheExpressionvaluetothe
maximum.
Note:Thismessagecanbeusedtocontrolthevolumeof
eachMIDItrack.Normally,youwillincludeaVolume
messageintheMIDItracksettingdata(thesettingsatthe
beginningofthetrack)tosettheinitialvolume,anduse
Expressiontocreatechangesindynamicsasthesong
progresses.
ByusingtheuniversalexclusiveMasterVolumemessage,
youcanadjusttheoverallvolumewithoutchangingthe
volumebalancebetweentimbresortracks.(Aboutsystem
exclusivemessagesonpage 365)
Controlling pan (stereo position)
Pan (CC#10) [Bn, 0A, vv]
(vv:value,where00isfarleft,64iscenter,and127isfar
right)
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitPanmessages,and
thepanningwillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,the
resultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrollerisoperated.
WhenyousetthePan(Seq03(4)b)inSequencermode,or
whenyoureselectthesongorreturntothebeginningof
themeasureinSequencermode,Panpotmessages(except
forRND)willbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatus
isBTH,EXT,orEX2.SeePanonpage 113,GlobalP1:
MIDITrackMIDIOutonpage 200.
Post insert effect pan (CC#08) [Bn, 08, vv]
(vv:value,where00isfarleft,64iscenter,and127isfar
right)
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitPostInsertEffect
Panpotmessages,andthepanningofthesoundfollowing
theinserteffectwillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,
operated.
InProgrammode,thismessageistransmitted/receivedon
theglobalMIDIchannel.InCombination,andSequencer
modes,thismessageistransmitted/receivedontheMIDI
channelspecifiedforeachinserteffect.
WhenyousetPan:#8(Seq83b)inSequencermode,or
whenyoureselectthesongorreturntothebeginningof
themeasureinSequencermode,PostInsertEffectPanpot
MIDI applications
363
messageswillbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatus
isBTH,EXT,orEX2.Formoreinformation,pleasesee8
3b:InsertEffectonpage 149.
Controlling effects
Effect control 1 (CC#12) [Bn, 0C, vv]
Effect control 2 (CC#13) [Bn, 0D, vv]
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitEffectControl1/2
messages,andthespecifieddynamicmodulationwillbe
controlled.Whenthismessageisreceived,theresultwillbe
thesameaswhenthecontrollerisoperated.
Althoughvarioustypesofcontrolchangecanbeselectedas
dynamicmodulationsources,EffectControl1(CC#12)and2
(CC#13)arededicatedfordynamicmodulation.
Effect 1 depth (Send 2) (CC#91) [Bn, 5B, vv]
Effect 3 depth (Send 1) (CC#93) [Bn, 5D, vv]
RealtimeControlsknobs14,operatingthatcontrollerwill
transmitEffect1Depth(Send2)orEffect3Depth(Send1)
messages,andthesendlevel1or2tothemastereffects
MFX1orMFX2willbecontrolledrespectively.Whenthis
messageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthe
controllerisoperated.
OnthecorrespondingMIDIchannels,thiswill
simultaneouslycontrolthetimbre/tracksettingaswellas
thesettingfollowingtheInsertEffect.
InCombination,andSequencermodes,theactualsend
levelofthetimbre/trackisdeterminedbymultiplyingthis
valuewiththesend1/2settingsforeachoscillator(Prog
81d).(SeeSend1(MFX1),Send2(MFX2)on
page 96,GlobalP1:MIDITrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
WhenyouadjustSend1(MFX1)orSend2(MFX2)
(Sequencer81b)inSequencermode,orwhenyoure
selectasongorreturntothebeginningofthemeasurein
Sequencermode,Send1/2willbetransmittedbyeach
trackwhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.(SeeSend1
(MFX1)onpage 148).
Effect 2 depth (IFX15 on/off) (CC#92) [Bn, 5C, vv]
Effect 4 depth (MFX1, 2 on/off) (CC#94) [Bn, 5E, vv]
Effect 5 depth (TFX on/off) (CC#95) [Bn, 5F, vv]
Separatelyfromtheeffecton/offsettingsineachmode,
EffectGlobalSW(Global01b)allowsyoutoturnoffinsert
effectsIFX15andmastereffectsMFX1,2andtotaleffect
TFX.MastereffectsMFX1/2andthetotaleffectTFXcanalso
beturnedoffusingthefrontpanelMASTERFXbuttonand
TOTALFXbutton.
IfyouuncheckEnableIFX15,EnableMFX1&2orEnable
TFX,thecorrespondingmessagewillbetransmittedwith
vv=0[00].Ifyoucheckthesesettings,thecorresponding
messagewillbetransmittedwithvv=127[7F].Ifyou
uncheckthesesettings,thecorrespondingeffect(s)willbe
turnedoffasagroup.Ifyoucheckthesesettings,theon/off
settingsofeachmodewillbeused.Thesameappliesto
reception.(vvof00isoff,and01orgreateristheoriginal
setting.)Thesemessagesaretransmitted/receivedonthe
globalMIDIchannel.(IFX15on/offMFX1,2on/off
TFXon/offonpage 59,page 61)
Note:Thesemessagesaredefinedsimplyforusein
adjustingtheeffectlevels,andmaynothavethesame
functiononanotherinstrumentconnectedtotheKROME.
Using various controllers
Herewewillexplaintypicalwaystousethevarious
controllers.YoucanchoosefromMIDICC#00CC#119for
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
Foot controller (CC#04) [Bn, 04, vv]
IftheaboveCC#isassignedastheAssignablePedal
function,thismessagewillbetransmittedwhenthe
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableFootPedal/
SwitchCombi/Seq51(2)c).
Controller (CC#18) [Bn, 12, vv]
ThismessagewillbetransmittedwhentheKROMEs
VALUEdialisoperated.
ThisisvalidinProgramSelect(Prog01a)and
CombinationSelect(Combi01(2)a)whentheprogramor
combinationnumber/nameisselected(highlighted).
Knob modulation USER [1], USER [2], USER [3], USER [4]
(CC#17, 19, 20, 21)
[Bn, 11, vv], [Bn, 13, vv], [Bn, 14, vv], [Bn, 15, vv]
IftheaboveCC#areassignedtotheknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsUSERmodeisselected,thesemessages
willbetransmittedwhentheknobsareoperated.
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableRealtime
ControlsKnobUER[1],USER[2],USER[3],USER[4]
Combi57(8)c/Seq57(8)c).
Controller (CC#83) [Bn, 53, vv]
IfyouassigntheaboveCC#toaknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsUSERmodeisselected,thismessagewill
betransmittedwhenyouoperatethecorresponding
controlleroftheKROME.
Damper pedal (CC#64) [Bn, 40, vv]
Thismessageistransmittedwhenyouoperateadamper
pedal(optionalDS1H)connectedtotheDAMPERjack,and
thedampereffectwillbeturnedon/off.IftheDS1Hisused,
ahalfdampereffectcanbeapplied.
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableDamper
Combi/Seq51(2)c).
SW1 modulation (CC#80) [Bn, 50, vv]
SW2 modulation (CC#81) [Bn, 51, vv]
IftheaboveCC#areassignedasthefunctionofSW1or
SW2,operatingtheswitchwilltransmitthismessagewith
vv=127[7F]forON,andvv=00[00]forOFF.
receptionofthesemessagescanbeturnedon/off
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableSW1,Enable
SW2Combi/Seq59(10)c)
Foot switch (CC#82) [Bn, 52, vv]
IftheaboveCC#isassignedasthefunctionofthe
ASSIGNABLESWITCH,operatingtheswitchwilltransmit
thismessagewithvv=127[7F]forON,andvv=00[00]for
OFF.
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableFoot
SwitchCombi/Seq59(10)c).
Sostenuto (CC#66) [Bn, 42, vv]
ASSIGNABLESWITCH,operatingtheswitchwilltransmit
thismessagewithvv=127[7F]forON,andvv=00[00]for
Appendices
364
OFF,andthesostenutoeffectwillbeturnedon/off.When
thismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameaswhen
thecontrollerisoperated(OFFforvv=63[3F]orbelow,and
ONforvv=64[40]orabove).
Soft pedal (CC#67) [Bn, 43, vv]
ASSIGNABLESWITCH,operatingtheswitchwilltransmit,
andthesoftpedaleffectwillbeturnedon.Whenthis
messageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthe
WhenFootcontroller(CC#04)Softpedal(CC#67)are
operatedontheKROME,thespecifiedalternatemodulation
ordynamicmodulationetc.willbecontrolled.Whenthese
messagesarereceived,theresultwillbethesameasifthe
controllerhadbeenoperated.ForSW1modulation
(CC#80)Softpedal(CC#67),vvof63[3F]orlesswillbe
OFF,and64[3F]orgreaterwillbeON.
Controlling via the controllers of a connected
MIDI instrument such as the KRONOS
Ribbon Controller (CC#16) [Bn, 10, vv]
Whenacontrolchangeisreceivedfromtheribbon
controllerorotherassignedcontrollerofaMIDIinstrument
(suchastheKRONOS),thespecifiedeffect(e.g.,alternate
modulationordynamicmodulation)willbeapplied.
InCombinationorSequencermodes,transmissionand
receptioncanbeturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track.
(EnableRibbonCC#16onpage 88,page 134)
Controller (CC#85, CC#86, CC#87, CC#88)
[Bn, 12, vv], [Bn, 13, vv], [Bn, 14, vv], [Bn, 15, vv]
WhentheVALUEdialofMIDIinstrumentssuchasthe
KRONOS,oracontrolchangeassignedtoacontrolleris
received,thespecifiedalternatemodulationordynamic
modulationeffectwillbeapplied.
Controlling Program tone & envelope
shapes
CC#7079controlspecificparametersofaprogram.
Fordetailsontheprogramparametersthatcorrespondto
eachcontrolchange,andhowtheKROMEwillrespondin
eachmodewhenthesearereceived,refertoKROMEand
MIDICCsonpage 356.
Filter cutoff (CC#74) [Bn, 4A, vv]
Resonance level (CC#71) [Bn, 47, vv]
Filter EG intensity (CC#79) [Bn, 4F, vv]
Release time (CC#72) [Bn, 48, vv]
Thesemessagesaretransmittedwhenyouoperatethe
RealtimeControlsTONE[1][4]knobs.(Theycanalsobe
setasRealtimeControlsUSER[1][4]knobsfunctions.)
Sustain level (CC#70) [Bn, 46, vv]
Attack time (CC#73) [Bn, 49, vv]
Decay time (CC#75) [Bn, 4B, vv]
LFO 1 speed (CC#76) [Bn, 4C, vv]
LFO 1 depth (pitch) (CC#77) [Bn, 4D, vv]
LFO 1 delay (CC#78) [Bn, 4E, vv]
ThesemessagesaretransmittedwhenassigntheaboveCC#
totheRealtimeControlsUSER[1][4]knobsfunction.
Whenyouoperatethese,thecorrespondingprogram
parameterswillbecontrolled,andthesoundandenvelope
willchange.Whenthesemessagesarereceived,theresult
willbethesameaswhenthecontrollerisoperated.(When
themessagehasavaluevv=64[40],thesettingwillhavethe
valuethatwassetbytheprogramparameter.)
receptioncanbeturnedon/offindependentlyforeach
timbre/track(EnableRealtimeControls
CUTOFFRELEASE,USER[1]...USER[4]Combi/Seq5
5(6/7/8)).
Note:InProgrammode,thecorrespondingprogram
parameterswillbetemporarilyeditedbythesemessages.
YoucanWritetheprogramtosavethemodifiedstate
(exceptforcertainparameters).TheWriteoperationcanalso
beperformedbyaMIDISystemExclusiveProgramWrite
Requestmessage,inadditiontotheusualmethodofusing
theKROMEsbuttons.Whenyouwritethedata,thevalues
ofthecorrespondingprogramparameterswillberewritten.
Note:Theresultsofreceivingthesemessageswilldepend
ontheinstrument.Theoperationmaybedifferentwhena
deviceotherthantheKROMEisconnected.
Control the arpeggiator
IfyouassignthefollowingCC#stoknobandswitchof
arpeggiator,thespecifiedCC#willbetransmittedwhenyou
operatetheKROME,andtheKROMEitselfwillbe
controlledsimultaneously.Whenthesemessagesare
received,theresultwillbethesameasifyouoperatedthe
KROMEitself.
TheCC#settingsfortheknobsandbuttonsaremadeinthe
GlobalP2MIDICC#Assignpage.However,youcanedit
thesesettingsifyouneedtoassignMIDIcontrolchange
messagestothecontrollers,suchaswhenyouwantto
recordtheRealtimeControlsARPknob,ARPbutton
operationsontheinternalsequenceroranexternalMIDI
sequencer,ortocontrolthearpeggiatorfromanexternal
MIDIdevice.IfGlobalP1:MIDIARPControllersMIDIOut
issettoControlChange,MIDIcontrolchangemessageswill
betransmitted.(SeeARPControllersMIDIOuton
page 200)
EachknobandbuttoncanbeassignedanyMIDIcontrol
changeCC#00CC#119,oradesiredMIDInotenumber.
However,youwillnormallyusethedefaultsettingsthatare
assignedwhenyouexecutethemenucommandReset
ControllerMIDIAssignwithCCDefault.Formore
information,pleaseseeResetControllerMIDIAssignon
page 220.
TheoperationsdescribedbelowarefortheseCCDefault
settings.TransmittedwhenthecorrespondingKROME
controlleristransmitted.Whenthisisreceived,thesame
effectwillapplyaswhentheKROMEscontrolleris
operated.
ARP ON/OFF (CC#14) [Bn, 0E, vv]
CorrespondstotheARPbutton.Itwilltransmitvv=127[7F]
whenOn,andvv=000[7F]whenOff.
KNOB1 ARP GATE (CC#22) [Bn, 16, vv]
KNOB2 ARP VELOCITY (CC#23) [Bn, 17, vv]
KNOB3 ARP LENGTH (CC#24) [Bn, 18, vv]
KNOB4 ARP STEP (CC#25) [Bn, 19, vv]
Correspondstoknobs14whentheRealtimeControlsisset
toARP.
Silencing all notes on a specific channel
All note off (CC#123) [Bn, 7B, 00] (value 00)
Whenthisisreceived,allcurrentlysoundingnotesonthat
channelwillbeturnedoff(asthoughthekeyshadbeen
released).However,thereleaseportionofthenoteswill
remain.
All sound off (CC#120) [Bn, 78, 00] (value 00)
Whenthisisreceived,allcurrentlysoundingnotesonthat
channelwillbesilenced.WhiletheAllNoteOffmessage
allowsthereleaseportionofthenotestoremain,theAll
SoundOffmessagewillsilencethenotesimmediately.
However,thesemessagesareprovidedforemergencyuse,
andarenotsomethingthatyouwillusewhileperforming.
MIDI applications
365
Resetting all controllers on a specific channel
Reset all controllers (CC#121) [Bn, 79, 00] (value 00)
Whenthisisreceived,thevalueofallcontrollersonthat
channelwillbereset.
Using RPN (Registered Parameter
Numbers)
RPN(RegisteredParameterNumbers)areatypeofmessage
thatallowsettingstobemadeinawaythatiscommon
betweeninstrumentmanufacturers.(NRPN(Nonregistered
ParameterNumbers)andexclusivemessagescanbefreely
usedinnoncompatiblewaysbydifferentmanufacturers
andmodelsofinstrument.)
RPNmessagescanbeusedforeditingwiththefollowing
procedure.
1. UseRPNMSB(CC#101)[Bn,65,mm]andRPNLSB
(CC#100)[Bn,64,rr](n:channel,mm,rr:upperand
lowerbytesoftheparameternumber)messagesto
selecttheparameter.
2. UsedataentryMSB(CC#6)[Bn,06,mm]anddataentry
LSB(CC#38)[Bn,26,vv](n:channel,mm,vv:upperand
lowerbytesofthevalue,togetherexpressing16,384lev
els)tospecifythevalue.
3. Youcanusedataincrement(CC#96)[Bn,60,00]ordata
decrement(CC#97)[Bn,61,00](n:channel,valueis
fixedat00)tochangethevalueinstepsofone.
TheKROMEcanreceivethefollowingthreeRPNmessages
(tuning,transpose,andpitchbendrange).
Tuning
RPN fine tune [Bn, 65, 00, 64, 01]
ThisRPNmessagecanbeusedtoadjustthedetuningfora
programortimbre(inCombinationmode),orforatrack(in
Sequencermode).
Theprocedureisasfollows.
1. [Bn,65,00,64,01]:SelectRPNparameter01.
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.A
valueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,0[mm,vv=00,
00]is100cents,and16383[mm,vv=7F,7F]is+99cents.
Note:YoucanusetheuniversalexclusiveFineTune
messagetoadjusttheoveralltuningthatcorrespondstothe
MasterTune(GlobalP0:01a)parameter.(SeeAbout
systemexclusivemessagesonpage 365)
Transposing
RPN coarse tune [Bn, 65, 00, 64, 02]
ThisRPNmessagecanbeusedtoadjustthetransposition
foraprogramortimbre(inCombinationmode),orfora
track(inSequencermode).
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.
Normallyonlytheupperbyteisused.
Avalueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,6656[mm,vv=34,
00]is12semitones,and9728[mm,vv=4C,00]is+12
semitones.
Note:YoucanusetheuniversalexclusiveCoarseTune
messagetoadjusttheoveralltuningthatcorrespondstothe
KeyTranspose(GlobalP0:01a)parameter.(SeeAbout
systemexclusivemessagesonpage 365)
Changing the pitch bend range
RPN pitch bend range [Bn, 64, 00, 65, 00]
ThisRPNmessagecanbeusedtoadjustthepitchbend
rangeforaprogramortimbre(inCombinationmode)orfor
atrack(inSequencermode).
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.
Normallyonlytheupperbyteisused.
Avalueof0[mm,vv=00,00]is+00,andavalueof1536[mm,
vv=0C,00]is+12(oneoctave).Althoughitispossibletoseta
negativevalueforatimbre/track,onlypositivevaluescanbe
setusingRPNmessages.
About system exclusive messages
Sincethewayinwhichthesemessagesareusedisleftupto
eachmanufacturer,theyaremainlyusedtotransmitand
receivesounddataandeditingdataforparametersthatare
uniquetoaparticularinstrument.TheKROMEssystem
exclusivemessageformatis[F0,42,3n,00,01,15,ff,.F7]
F0:exclusivestatus
42:KorgID
3n:[n=0F]globalMIDIchannel116
mm:ModelIDbyte1(00)
mm:ModelIDbytes2(01)
mm:ModelIDbytes3(15)
ff:functionID(typeofmessage)
:
:
F7:endofexclusive
Note:ToobtainacopyoftheMIDIImplementationwhich
includesMIDISystemExclusiveformatinformation,please
contactyourKorgdistributor.
Universal system exclusive
Certainofthesystemexclusivemessagesarepublicly
definedforaspecificuse,andthesearecalleduniversal
systemexclusivemessages.
TheKROMEusesthefollowingsixuniversalsystem
exclusivemessages.
Inquiry message request [F0, 7E, nn, 06, 01, F7]
Inquiry message [F0, 7E, nn, 06, 02, (nine bytes), F7]
Whenaninquirymessagerequestisreceived,theKROME
willrespondbytransmittinganinquirymessagethatmeans
IamaKorgKROME,withsystemversion
GM system on [F0, 7E, nn, 09, 01, F7]
WhenthismessageisreceivedinSequencermode,the
KROMEwillbeinitializedforGMplayback.
Master volume [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 01, vv, mm, F7]
(vv:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteofthevalue,
togetherindicating16384steps)
ThismessageistransmittedifyouassignMasterVolumeas
thefunctionoftheAssignablePedalorasaRealtime
ControlsUSER14knobs.Thiswilladjusttheoverall
volumebalancewithoutchangingtherelativevolume
balancebetweentimbres/tracks.Whenthismessageis
received,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrolleris
operated.
Master balance [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 02, vv, mm, F7]
(vv:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteofthevalue,
togetherindicating16384steps,where8192isthedefault
Appendices
366
position,andlowervalueswillmovethesoundtowardthe
left)
Whenthisisreceived,theoverallpanningwillbeadjusted
withoutchangingtherelativepanningbetweentimbres/
tracks.
Master fine tuning [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 03, vv, mm, F7]
(Avalueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,4096[mm,vv=20,
00]is50cents,and12288[mm,vv=60,00]is+50cents.)
Whenthisisreceived,theMasterTune(GlobalP0:01a)
parameterwillbeset.
Master coarse tuning [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 04, vv, mm, F7]
(Normallyonlytheupperbytemmisused.Avalueof8192
[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,6656[mm,vv=34,00]is12
semitones,and9728[mm,vv=4C,00]is+12semitones.)
Whenthisisreceived,theKeyTranspose(Global01a)
parameterwillbeset.
Transmitting sound settings data (Data
Dump)
Dataforprograms,combinations,drumkits,userarpeggio
pattern,globalsettings,andsequencerdatacanbe
transmittedasMIDISystemExclusivemessages.The
operationofsendingthissystemexclusivedatatoan
externaldeviceiscalledadatadump.
Byperformingadatadump,youcanstoretheKROMEs
soundsandsettingsonanexternaldevice,orrewritethe
soundsandsettingsofanotherKROME.
Therearethefollowingtwotypesofdatadump.
WhenyouusetheDump(GlobalP1)menucommandto
dumpdata,varioustypesofinternalmemorydatawillbe
transmitted.IfthisdataisreceivedbytheKROME,the
datawillbewrittendirectlyintointernalmemory,andit
willnotbenecessarytoperformtheWriteoperation.(See
SendingSysExdatadumpsonReceivingSysExdata
dumpsonpage 219)
IftheEnableExclusive(Global12b)settingischecked,
datawillalsobedumpedinresponsetoaDumpRequest
message.Thisdataistransmittedandreceivedonthe
globalMIDIchannel.
WhentheKROMEreceivesthisdata,thedatawillbe
writtenintotheeditbuffer.Ifyouwanttosavethedata
intointernalmemory,youllhavetoexecutetheWrite
operation.ThiscanbedoneeitherbyexecutingtheWrite
operation(SeeWritingtointernalmemoryonpage 115
oftheOperationguide)ontheKROMEitself,orbya
MIDISystemExclusiveprogramwriterequest,combina
tionwriterequest,drumkitwriterequest,userarpeggio
patternwriterequestorglobalsettingwriterequest.
Editing sounds via SysEx
ByusingvariousMIDISystemExclusivedatadumps,you
canrewriteallprogramsoranindividualprogram.Byusing
parameterchangemessages,youcaneditindividual
parametersasfollows.
Parameter changes
InProgrammode,allparametersotherthantheprogram
namecanbeedited.
InCombinationmode,parametersotherthanthe
combinationnamecanbeedited.
InSequencermode,youcaneditthetrackparametersin
P0,1,2,3,4,and5,andtheP7:Arpeggiator/DrumTrack,
P8:InsertEffect,andP9:Master/TotalEffectparameters.
(SeeSystemExclusiveeventssupportedinSequencer
modeonpage 191)
Drum kit parameter change and user arpeggio pattern pa-
rameter change
InGlobalmode,youcaneditdrumkitanduserarpeggio
pattern.
SincetheotherglobalparametersorSequencermode
musicaldatacannotbeedited,youwillusedatadumpsto
transferthisdata.
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmitandreceivethis
data.
FirstchecktheEnableExclusive(Global12b)settingto
enabletransmissionandreceptionofexclusivedata.When
youswitchmodesontheKROME,amodechangewillbe
transmitted.Whenyoueditindividualparameters,
parameterchangemessageswillbetransmitted.
Whenthesemessagesarereceived,thesameediting
operationwillbeperformedasonthetransmitteddevice.
Cautionsregardingdatadumpsandsoundediting
AfterMIDISystemExclusivedatahasbeenreceivedand
processed,aDataLoadCompletedmessagewillbe
transmitted.Thecontrolmasterdevicemustnottransmit
thenextmessageuntilthismessageisreceived(oruntila
sufficientintervaloftimehaselapsed).
Whenyouchangeuseparameterchangestoedit,the
changeswillaffectthedataintheeditbufferandwillnot
bestoredininternalmemoryunlessyouWrite,sothatthe
changeswillbelostifyoureselecttheprogramor
combination.TheWriteoperationcanbeperformedbya
MIDISystemExclusiveProgramWriteRequestor
CombinationWriteRequestmessage,inadditiontothe
usualmethodofusingtheKROMEsbuttons.Formore
information,pleaseseeWritingtointernalmemoryon
Thereisnoneedtowriteasong,butitwillnotbebacked
upwhenyouturnoffthepower.Importantdatathatyou
wanttokeepmustbesavedtoanSDcardbeforeyouturn
offthepower.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSaving
toSDcardonpage 113oftheOperationguide.
If notes are stuck
Ifsomeproblemcausesstucknotesthatcontinue
soundingeventhoughyouarenolongerplayingonthe
keyboardorviaMIDI,youcanstopthesoundbyswitching
theKROMEsmode.
Playing the KROME multi-timbrally from
an external device
TheKROMEcanbeconnectedtoanexternaldeviceand
playedmultitimbrallyinthefollowingways.
MIDImessagesfromtheexternaldevicecanplaya
combination(16partmultitimbralperformance).You
canchangetheoverallsettings(programs,levels,and
effects)byusingprogramchangemessagestoswitch
combinations.
MIDImessagesfromtheexternaldevicecanbeusedto
playasong(16partmultitimbralperformance).Overall
settings(programs,levels,effectsetc.)canbechangedby
usingaSongSelectmessagetoswitchsongs.
MIDIClockmessagesfromtheexternaldevicecanbe
usedtomaketheKROMEplaybackasong(setMIDI
ClocktoExternalMIDI,andruntheKROMEs
sequencer).(Synchronizingtheplaybackofthe
Arpeggiator,DrumTrackfunctionorsequencer)You
canchangetheoverallsettings(programs,levels,effects)
byusingsongselectmessagestoswitchsongs.
MIDI applications
367
Note:MIDIClockExternalUSBwilloperateinthesame
wayasExternalMIDI.WiththeAutosetting,anexternal
MIDIclockreceivedattheMIDIINconnectorortheUSBB
connectorwillautomaticallycausetheKROMEtoswitchto
thesamemethodofoperationasExternalMIDIorExternal
USB.
Synchronizing the playback of the
Arpeggiator, Drum Track function or
sequencer
ThechoiceofwhethertheKROMEwillbethemaster(the
controllingdevice)ortheslave(thecontrolleddevice)is
madebyMIDIClock(Global11a).
Note:WhenMIDIClockissettoAuto,theKROMEwill
normallyoperateinthesamewayasfortheInternalsetting.
WhenanexternalMIDIclockisreceivedfromtheMIDIIN
orUSBconnector,theKROMEwillautomaticallyoperateas
fortheExternalMIDIsetting.
Using the KROME as master and the external MIDI
device as slave
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIOUTconnectortotheMIDIIN
connectoroftheexternalMIDIdevice.Connectthe
KROMEsUSBBconnectortoyourcomputersUSBport.
WhenyousetMIDIClocktoInternal,theKROMEwill
bethemasterdevice,andwilltransmitMIDItimingclock
messages.
ArpeggiatorandDrumTrackfunction:Thetempocan
becontrolledfromtheKROME.
PerformancedatawillbetransmittedviaMIDI.(Perfor
mancedatafromthedrumtrackwillbetransmittedin
ProgrammodeiftheDrumTrackProgMIDIChsetting
(Global11a)ischecked.Performancedatafromthe
ArpeggiatorandtheDrumTrackfunctioninCombina
tionorSequencermodewillbetransmittedfromtimbres
orMIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.)An
externaltonegeneratorconnectedtoMIDIOUTorUSB
willsound,andthetempoofanexternalsequencercan
becontrolled.
Sequencer:Themusicaldatacanbeplayedbackand
controlledontheKROME.
Simultaneously,thesequencerplaybackwillbetransmit
tedviaMIDIfromMIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,
EXT,orEX2.Anexternaltonegeneratorconnectedto
MIDIOUTorUSBwillsound,andthetempoofanexter
nalsequencercanbecontrolled.
Using the external MIDI device as master and the
KROME as slave
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIINconnectortotheMIDIOUT
connectoroftheexternalMIDIdevice.Connectthe
KROMEsUSBconnectortoyourcomputersUSBport.
IfyouusetheMIDIconnectorstomakeconnections,set
MIDIClocktoExternalMIDI.IfyouusetheUSB
connectortomakeconnections,setittoExternalUSB.The
KROMEwillbetheslave.
ArpeggiatorandDrumTrackfunction:Thetempowill
followtheMIDItimingclock.Ifyouplaybacktheexter
nalsequencer,theKROMEsArpeggiatororDrumTrack
functionwillsynchronizetotheexternaltimingclock.
EvenifMIDIClockisExternalMIDIorExternalUSB
andtheKROMEisbeingcontrolledfromtheexternal
device,theperformanceoftheArpeggiatororDrum
TrackfunctionwillstillbetransmittedviaMIDI.(Perfor
mancedatafromtheDrumTrackwillbetransmittedin
ProgrammodeiftheDrumTrackProgMIDIOutsetting
(Global11a)ischecked.Performancedatafromthe
arpeggiatorandthedrumtrackfunctioninCombination
orSequencermodewillbetransmittedfromtimbresor
MIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.)
Sequencer:TheKROMEwillnotbeabletocontrolthe
performancedata;itwillbecontrolledbytheexternal
MIDIdeviceconnectedtoMIDIINorthecomputercon
nectedtoUSB.Ifyouwishtoplaybacktheexternal
sequencertomaketheKROMEssequencerplaybackin
synchronizationtotheexternaltimingclock,youmust
firstsetthesametimesignatureandstartingmeasure
locationsonbothdevices.
EvenifMIDIClockissettoExternalMIDIorExternal
USBandtheKROMEisbeingcontrolledfromanexternal
device,musicaldatawillbetransmittedbytrackswhose
StatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.
Recording musical data from an external
device
Therearetwowaysinwhichyoucanplaybackanexternal
sequencerandrecorditsplaybackontheKROME.
SetMIDIClock(Global11a)toInternal,begin
recording,andthenstarttheexternalsequencer.Withthis
method,theMIDImessageswillberecordedwithoutthe
twodevicesbeingsynchronized.Sincetheincoming
musicaldatawillsimplyberecorded,thismethodallows
theperformancetobereproducedfaithfully,butsince
measuredivisionsetc.willnotbekepttrackof,this
methodisnotsuitableifyouintendtoeditthedatalater.
IfyousetMIDIClocktoExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,
thestartofrecordingandthetempoetc.willallbeunder
thecontroloftheexternalsequencer.
Sincethetwodeviceswillbesynchronizedduringthe
recordingprocess,measuredivisionsetc.willbe
accuratelypreserved.(Youwillneedtosetthetime
signaturebeforerecording.)Formoreinformation,please
seeMultiREConpage 118.
Recording the MIDI output of the
KROMEs controllers, Arpeggiator, Drum
Track function and internal sequencer to
an external sequencer/computer
IfyouwishtorecordtheMIDIoutputoftheKROMEs
controllers,Arpeggiator,DrumTrackfunction,andinternal
sequenceronanexternalsequencerorcomputerandusethe
KROMEasthemonitoringandplaybacktonegenerator
whileyourecord,youmustturnofftheKROMEsLocal
Controlsetting(LocalControlOnGlobal11a),andset
yourexternalsequencer/computerforechoback(afunction
bywhichthedatareceivedatMIDIINisretransmitted
withoutchangefromMIDIOUT)sothatthedatafromthe
KROMEscontrollers,Arpeggiator,DrumTrackfunction
andinternalsequencerwillnotbeappliedinduplicateto
thetonegenerator.
Using an external MIDI sequencer/computer to
record performance data from the Drum Track
function
TurnofftheKROMEslocalcontrolsetting.InProgram
mode,theDrumTrackfunctionwilltransmitperformance
dataiftheDrumTrackProgMIDIOutsetting(Global11a)
ison(checked).Bydefault,thisisoff(unchecked),soyoull
needtoturniton.
Inyourexternalsequencer/computer,turntheechoback
settingon.Withthesesettings,thesoundgeneratorwont
produceduplicatenotes,andrecordingandplaybackwill
occurcorrectly.
Appendices
368
Using the Realtime Controls Knob 14 to record
MIDI control changes on an external MIDI se-
quencer/computer
SettheKROMEtoLocalControlOff.SettheexternalMIDI
sequencer/computertoEchoBackOn.Withthesesettings,
recordingandplaybackwilloccurcorrectly,andthecontrol
changeswillnotbeappliedtothetonegeneratorin
duplicate.
Recording the Arpeggiator or RPPR function on
an external MIDI sequencer/computer
Whenthearpeggiatorison,playingthekeyboardor
operatingthecontrollersoftheKROMEwilloperateand
controlthearpeggiator.
Inthesameway,thearpeggiatorwillbecontrolledbyMIDI
messagesreceivedfromMIDIIN.
NotestransmittedfromMIDIOUT(USB)bythearpeggiator
arecontrolledasfollows,accordingtothelocalcontrol
setting(LocalControlOnGlobal11a).
InSequencermode,whentheRPPRfunctionison,playing
thekeyboardwillcauseRPPRtooperate.Similarly,the
RPPRfunctionwillalsooperateinresponsetonotes
receivedontheMIDIchannelofthetrackselectedbyTrack
Select(Seq01(2)a).NoteswillbetransmittedbyRPPR
fromMIDIOUTaccordingtothelocalcontrolsetting(Local
ControlOn)asdescribedbelow.
LocalControlOn:NotesfromthearpeggiatororRPPRwill
betransmittedfromMIDIOUT(USB).
LocalControlOff:NotesfromthearpeggiatororRPPRwill
notbetransmittedfromMIDIOUT(USB).TheKROMEwill
soundonlyinresponsetoMIDImessagesreceivedatMIDI
IN,orgeneratedbythearpeggiatororRPPR.
Setting example 1
Recordthenotemessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatoror
RPPRfunctionontheexternalMIDIsequencer/computer.
1. TurnonthisinstrumentsarpeggiatororRPPRfunc
tion.SetthisinstrumenttoLocalControlOn.
2. TurnLocalControlOnforthisinstrument.
3. TurnEchoBackOffonyourexternalsequencer/com
puter.
Byturningechobackoff,youwillpreventthearpeggiatoror
RPPRfunctionfromperformingduplicateprocessingonthe
monitorednotesduringrecording.
4. Duringplayback,turnoffthearpeggiatorandRPPR
functionsofthisinstrument.
Setting example 2
UsetheexternalMIDIsequencer/computertorecordonly
thenotesthattriggerthearpeggiatororRPPRfunction,
andoperatethisinstrumentsarpeggiatororRPPR
functionformonitoringwhilerecording,andduring
playback.
1. TurnontheKROMEsarpeggiatororRPPRfunction.
2. SettheKROMEtoLocalControlOff.
ThenotemessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatororRPPR
functionwillnotbeoutput.
3. OnyourexternalMIDIsequencer/computer,turnecho
backon.
Withthesesettings,thedatawillberecordedandplayed
correctly,andthearpeggiatororRPPRfunctionwillnotbe
appliedinduplicate.
About GM (General MIDI)
TheKROMEsupportstheGMstandard.Italsosupportsthe
GM2soundmap(includingbankselect)with256programs
and9drumprogramsprovidedinROMbanksGM,g(1)
g(9),andg(d).(Banksg(1)g(9)areGM2variationprograms,
andg(d)containsdrumprograms.)
GMisastandardthatensuresbasiccompatibilityofsounds
andcontrollersbetweenGMcompatibleinstrumentsmade
bydifferentmanufacturers.WhenusingGMwithKROME,
beawareofthefollowing.
GMSystemOnissupportedinSequencermode.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeGMInitializeonpage 165.
WhenyouwishtoplayaGMsequence,orloadGMdata
intoasong,setBankMap(Global02a)toGM(2).
About standard MIDI files
StandardMIDIfiles(SMF)makeitpossiblefordifferent
computerprogramsormusicalinstrumentsmadeby
differentmanufacturerstoexchangetimebasedMIDIdata.
EachstandardMIDIfilecontainsonesong.TheKROME
supportsformat0(type0)inwhichalloftheMIDIdatais
combinedintoonetrack,andformat1(type1)inwhichthe
dataisseparatedbytrack.
WhenaSMFisloadedintoasonginMediamode,the
programbankthatisselectedwilldifferdependingonthe
BankMap(Global02a)setting.Whenplaying/loading
SMFdatathatconformstotheGMspecifications,setBank
MaptoGM(2).
Sequencer mode
InMediamodewhenyouconvertasongintoaStandard
MIDIFileandsaveit,youcanchooseeitherformat0or
format1.
IfKROMEsongdatathatwassavedasaformat1SMF
fileisloadedintoanotherdevice,thetrackconfiguration
maybedifferentthanitwasbeforebeingsaved.Thisis
becauseMIDItracksthatcontainnomusicaldataare
omitted,andtheremainingtracksaremovedintothe
unusedtracks.Thiswillnotaffecttheplaybackitself.
Ifsongdatathatwassavedbyanotherdeviceasaformat
1SMFfileisloadedintotheKROME,thetrack
configurationmaybedifferentthanitwasbeforebeing
saved.Thisisbecausetracksthatcontainnomusicaldata
areomitted,andtheremainingtracksaremovedintothe
unusedtracks.Thiswillnotaffecttheplaybackitself.
WhenexchangingsequencedatabetweentwoKROME,we
recommendthatyousavethesequencedatainthe
KROMEsnativeformat(SaveSEQ).
WhensequencedataissavedintheKROMEsnativeformat,
allofthesettingsandpatternsuniquetotheKROMEwillbe
saved,whichwillensureahigherlevelofreproducibility
thanwhenthedataissavedasaStandardMIDIFile(Save
toStdMIDIFile).
Parameterchangesandotherrecordeddataisincludedin
thesongdataasSystemExclusiveevents,soitcanbesaved
toorloadedfrommediaasusual.Exclusivemessagescan
alsobeloadedorsavedasSMF(StandardMIDIFile)data
(LoadStandardMIDIFile,SaveSongasStandardMIDI
File).ThisallowsrecordedSystemExclusiveeventstobe
savedasSMFdata,orexclusivemessagesincludedinSMF
datatobeconvertedintosongdata.
Duringplayback,thisdatacanbetransmittedtoanexternal
MIDIdevice,orusedtocontroltrackparametersoreffect
parametersofthesong.
Compatibility with the M50
369
Compatibility with the M50
TheKROMEcanloadM50format.PCGand.SNGfiles
whileconvertingthem.Datacompatibilityissupportedfor
loadingandsavingeachtypeofdataviamedia.
KROMEformat.PCGand.SNGfilescannotbeloadedby
theM50.Songdata(.SNG)canbeloadedintotheM50ifyou
firstsaveitasStandardMIDIFile(SMFformat)data(see
p.232).
WhenloadingM50format.PCGor.SNGfilesintothe
KROME,pleasebeawarethatthefollowinglimitationswill
apply.
Pad parameters
(Program, Combination, Song)
SincetheKROMEdoesnothavethesefunctions,the
correspondingparameterswillnotbeloaded.
External Setup parameters (Global)
SincetheKROMEdoesnothavethesefunctions,the
correspondingparameterswillnotbeloaded.
Global Mode Foot Switch Assign parameters
Settingsrelatedtootherfunctionswillbeloadedinthe
followingways.
Global Mode Foot Pedal Assign parameter
Settingsrelatedtootherfunctionswillbeloadedinthe
followingways.
Bank/number configurations on the KROME and
M50
Thefollowingtableshowstheconfigurationofthe
Combination,Program,DrumKit,DrumPattern,
Multisample,andDrumsamplebanksandnumbersforthe
KROMEandtheM50.Thetableattherightshowswhatwill
happenwhenanM50formatfileisloadedintotheKROME.
Ifthedatabeingloadedcontainsabankornumberthat
doesntexistontheKROME,itssettingswillbemodifiedif
thereisnocorrespondingbank.Thismeansthatthedata
maynotsoundcorrectly.Pleaseusecautionwhenloading
filesbetweentheKROMEandtheM50.
M50 KROME
RTKnob1A...4B TONE[1][4],USER[1][4]knobs
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,
LENGTH,OCTAVE
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,SWING,STEP
M50 KROME
RTKnob1A...4B TONE[1][4],USER[1][4]knobs
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,
LENGTH,OCTAVE
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,SWING,STEP
Bank configurations on the M50
Bank configurations on the
KROME
Combination
A A
B B
C C
D D
Program
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F
G(GM),g(1)g(9),g(d) GM,g(1)g(9),g(d)
Drum Kit
0031(INT) 0031(INT)
3247(USER) 3247(USER)
4856(GM) 4856(GM)
User Drum Track Pattern
U000U999 U000U999
User Arpeggio Pattern
U000U999 U000U1027
Multisample
Mono Mono
Stereo Stereo
XLMono
XLStereo
Drumsample
Mono Mono
Stereo Stereo
XLMono
XLStereo
Appendices
370
MIDI Implementation
K
R
O
M
E

M
I
D
I

I
M
P
L
E
M
E
N
T
A
T
I
O
N

M
a
r
c
h
.
1
5
.
'
1
2
C
o
n
s
u
l
t

y
o
u
r

l
o
c
a
l

K
o
r
g

d
e
a
l
e
r

f
o
r

m
o
r
e

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

o
n

M
I
D
I

S
y
s
t
e
m

E
x
c
l
u
s
i
v
e

i
m
p
l
e
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
.

1
.

T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
E
D

D
A
T
A
1
-
1

C
H
A
N
N
E
L

M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S

[
H
]

:
H
e
x
,

[
D
]

:
D
e
c
i
m
a
l
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
|
S
t
a
t
u
s
|

S
e
c
o
n
d

|

T
h
i
r
d

|

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n

(

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
d

b
y

.
.
.
.
)

|
E
N
A

|
|
[
H
e
x
]

|
[
H
]

[
D
]

|

[
H
]

[
D
]

|

|

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
|

8
n

|

k
k

(
k
k
)

|

4
0

(
6
4
)

|

N
o
t
e

O
f
f

(

K
e
y

O
f
f

)

*
1
|

A

|
|

9
n

|

k
k

(
k
k
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

N
o
t
e

O
n

(
v
v
)
=
1
-
1
2
7

(

K
e
y

O
n

)

*
1
|

A

|
|

A
n

|

k
k

(
k
k
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

P
o
l
y

K
e
y

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(

S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e

d
a
t
a

)

|

Q

|
|

B
n

|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

m
m

(
m
m
)

|

B
a
n
k

S
e
l
e
c
t
(
M
S
B
)

(

B
A
N
K

k
e
y
s
,

P
r
o
g
/
C
o
m
b
i

c
h
a
n
g
e

)

*
2
|

P
B

|
|

B
n

|

0
1

(
0
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
1

(

J
o
y
s
t
i
c
k

+
Y
,

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
2

(
0
2
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
2

(

J
o
y
s
t
i
c
k

-
Y
,

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
4

(
0
4
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

F
o
o
t

P
e
d
a
l

(

P
d
l

=

F
o
o
t

P
e
d
a
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
5

(
0
5
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

P
o
r
t
a
m
e
n
t
o

T
i
m
e

(

K
n
o
b
/
P
d
l

=

P
o
r
t
a
.
T
i
m
e
,

S

C
h
g

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
7

(
0
7
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

V
o
l
u
m
e

(

K
n
o
b
/
P
d
l

=

V
o
l
u
m
e
,

S
/
C

C
h
g

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
8

(
0
8
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

P
o
s
t

I
F
X

P
a
n
p
o
t

(

K
n
o
b
/
P
d
l

=

I
F
X

P
a
n
,

S

C
h
g

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
A

(
1
0
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

P
a
n
p
o
t

(

K
n
o
b
/
P
d
l

=

P
a
n
,

S

C
h
g

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
B

(
1
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

E
x
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

(

K
n
o
b
/
P
d
l

=

E
x
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
C

(
1
2
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

1

(

K
n
o
b
/
P
d
l

=

F
X

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
1

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
D

(
1
3
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

2

(

K
n
o
b
/
P
d
l

=

F
X

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
2

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
E

(
1
4
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

A
R
P

O
N
/
O
F
F
,

A
S
W

)

*
3
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
0

(
1
6
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
1

(

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
1

(
1
7
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
2

(

K
n
o
b

=

K
n
o
b

M
o
d
1
)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
2

(
1
8
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
3

(

A
S
W
/
P
d
l
)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
3

(
1
9
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
4

(

K
n
o
b

=

K
n
o
b

M
o
d
2

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
4

(
2
0
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

K
n
o
b

=

K
n
o
b

M
o
d
3

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
5

(
2
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

K
n
o
b

=

K
n
o
b

M
o
d
4

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
6

(
2
2
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
1

G
A
T
E
,

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

*
3
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
7

(
2
3
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
2

V
E
L
O
C
I
T
Y
,

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

*
3
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
8

(
2
4
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
3

S
W
I
N
G
,

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

*
3
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
9

(
2
5
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
4

S
T
E
P
,

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

*
3
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

2
0

(
3
2
)

|

b
b

(
b
b
)

|

B
a
n
k

S
e
l
e
c
t
(
L
S
B
)

(

B
A
N
K

k
e
y
s
,

P
r
o
g
/
C
o
m
b
i

c
h
a
n
g
e

)

*
2
|

P
B

|
|

B
n

|

4
0

(
6
4
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

H
o
l
d
1

(

D
a
m
p
e
r

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
1

(
6
5
)

|

0
0
/
7
F

(
0
0
/
1
2
7
)

|

P
o
r
t
a
m
e
n
t
o

O
f
f
/
O
n

(

S
W
1
/
S
W
2
/
A
S
W

=

P
o
r
t
a
.
S
W
,

S

C
h
g

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
2

(
6
6
)

|

0
0
/
7
F

(
0
0
/
1
2
7
)

|

S
o
s
t
e
n
u
t
o

O
f
f
/
O
n

(

A
S
W

=

S
o
s
t
e
n
u
t
o

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
3

(
6
7
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
f
t

P
e
d
a
l

(

A
S
W

=

S
o
f
t

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
6

(
7
0
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

1

(

K
n
o
b

=

F
/
A

S
u
s
t
a
i
n

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
7

(
7
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

2

(

K
n
o
b

T
O
N
E
2
,

K
n
o
b

=

R
e
s
o
n
a
n
c
e
,

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
8

(
7
2
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

3

(

K
n
o
b

T
O
N
E
4
,

K
n
o
b

=

F
/
A

R
e
l
e
a
s
e
,

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
9

(
7
3
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

4

(

K
n
o
b

=

F
/
A

A
t
t
a
c
k

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
A

(
7
4
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

5

(

K
n
o
b

T
O
N
E
1
,

K
n
o
b

=

F
i
l
t
e
r

C
u
t
o
f
f
,

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
B

(
7
5
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

6

(

K
n
o
b

=

F
/
A

D
e
c
a
y

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
C

(
7
6
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

7

(

K
n
o
b

=

P
i
t
c
h

L
F
O
1

S
p
d

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
D

(
7
7
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

8

(

K
n
o
b

=

P
i
t
c
h

L
F
O
1

D
e
p

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
E

(
7
8
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

9

(

K
n
o
b

=

P
i
t
c
h

L
F
O
1

D
l
y

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
F

(
7
9
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

1
0

(

K
n
o
b

T
O
N
E
3
,

K
n
o
b

=

F
i
l
t
e
r

E
G

I
n
t
,

A
S
W
/
P
d
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
0

(
8
0
)

|

0
0
/
7
F

(
0
0
/
1
2
7
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
5

(

S
W
1
/
K
n
o
b

=

S
W
1

M
o
d
.

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
1

(
8
1
)

|

0
0
/
7
F

(
0
0
/
1
2
7
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
6

(

S
W
2
/
K
n
o
b

=

S
W
2

M
o
d
.

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
2

(
8
2
)

|

0
0
/
7
F

(
0
0
/
1
2
7
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
7

(

A
S
W
/
K
n
o
b

=

F
o
o
t

S
W

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
3

(
8
3
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
8

(

K
n
o
b

=

M
I
D
I

C
C
#
8
3

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
B

(
9
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

1

D
e
p
t
h

(

K
n
o
b
/
P
d
l

=

M
F
X

S
e
n
d
2
,

S

C
h
g

)

|

C

|
|

B
g

|

5
C

(
9
2
)

|

0
0
/
7
F

(
0
0
/
1
2
7
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

2

D
e
p
t
h

(

A
l
l

I
n
s
e
r
t

F
X

O
f
f
/
O
n

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
D

(
9
3
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

3

D
e
p
t
h

(

K
n
o
b
/
P
d
l

=

M
F
X

S
e
n
d
1
,

S

C
h
g

)

|

C

|
|

B
g

|

5
E

(
9
4
)

|

0
0
/
7
F

(
0
0
/
1
2
7
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

4

D
e
p
t
h

(

M
a
s
t
e
r

F
X
1
/
2

O
f
f
/
O
n

)

|

C

|
|

B
g

|

5
F

(
9
5
)

|

0
0
/
7
F

(
0
0
/
1
2
7
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

5

D
e
p
t
h

(

T
o
t
a
l

F
X

O
f
f
/
O
n

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

c
c

(
c
c
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

(
c
c
)
=
0
-
1
1
9

(

S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

d
a
t
a

)

|

Q

|
|

B
n

|

c
c

(
c
c
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

(
c
c
)
=
0
-
1
1
9

(

K
n
o
b

=

M
I
D
I

C
C
#
0
0
-
1
1
9

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

c
c

(
c
c
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

(
c
c
)
=
0
-
1
1
9

(

A
R
P

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
s

=

M
I
D
I

C
C
#
0
0
-
1
1
9

)

|

C

|
|

C
n

|

p
p

(
p
p
)

|

-
-

-
-

|

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

C
h
a
n
g
e

(

P
r
o
g
/
C
o
m
b
i

c
h
a
n
g
e

)

*
2
|

P

|
|

D
n

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

-
-

-
-

|

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(

A
f
t
e
r

T
o
u
c
h

)

|

Q

|
|

E
n

|

b
b

(
b
b
)

|

b
b

(
b
b
)

|

B
e
n
d
e
r

C
h
a
n
g
e

(

J
o
y

S
t
i
c
k

X

)

|

C

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
P
d
l

:

A
s
s
i
g
n
a
b
l
e

F
o
o
t

P
e
d
a
l
A
S
W

:

A
s
s
i
g
n
a
b
l
e

F
o
o
t

S
w
i
t
c
h
K
n
o
b

:

R
e
a
l
t
i
m
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

K
n
o
b

1
,
2
,
3
,
4
S

C
h
g

:

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

c
h
a
n
g
e

a

S
o
n
g

N
o
.
(
S
e
q
.

m
o
d
e
)
.

(
S
t
a
t
u
s

=

E
X
T
,
E
X
2
,
B
T
H
)
C
/
S

C
h
g

:

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

c
h
a
n
g
e

a

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

o
r

S
o
n
g

N
o
.
(
S
e
q
.

m
o
d
e
)
.

(
S
t
a
t
u
s

=

E
X
T
,
E
X
2

o
r

B
T
H
)
n

:

M
I
D
I

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

N
o
.

(
0

-

1
5
)

-
-
-
-
-
-

U
s
u
a
l
l
y

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l
.

W
h
e
n

i
n

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
/
S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

m
o
d
e
,

e
a
c
h

t
i
m
b
r
e
'
s
/
t
r
a
c
k
'
s

c
h
a
n
n
e
l
.

(
S
t
a
t
u
s

=

E
X
T
,
E
X
2

o
r

B
T
H
)
g

:

A
l
w
a
y
s

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

N
o
.

(
0

-

1
5
)
E
N
A

=

A

:

A
l
w
a
y
s

E
n
a
b
l
e
d
.

C

:

E
n
a
b
l
e
d

w
h
e
n

E
n
a
b
l
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

C
h
a
n
g
e

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

c
h
e
c
k
e
d
.

P

:

E
n
a
b
l
e
d

w
h
e
n

E
n
a
b
l
e

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

C
h
a
n
g
e

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

c
h
e
c
k
e
d
.

P
B
:

E
n
a
b
l
e
d

w
h
e
n

E
n
a
b
l
e

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

a
n
d

B
a
n
k

C
h
a
n
g
e

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

c
h
e
c
k
e
d
.

T

:

E
n
a
b
l
e
d

w
h
e
n

E
n
a
b
l
e

A
f
t
e
r

T
o
u
c
h

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

c
h
e
c
k
e
d
.

Q

:

E
n
a
b
l
e
d

w
h
e
n

S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

i
s

p
l
a
y
i
n
g
(
t
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
)
,

r
e
c
o
r
d
i
n
g
(
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
)
.
*
1

:

k
k

=

2
4

-

1
0
8

:

K
R
O
M
E

6
1
K
e
y
s

(
6
1
k
e
y
s

+

T
r
a
n
s
p
o
s
e
)

=

1
2

-

1
0
8

:

K
R
O
M
E

7
3
K
e
y
s

(
7
3
k
e
y
s

+

T
r
a
n
s
p
o
s
e
)

=

0
9

-

1
2
0

:

K
R
O
M
E

8
8
K
e
y
s

(
8
8
k
e
y
s

+

T
r
a
n
s
p
o
s
e
)

=

0
0

-

1
2
7

:

S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r
*
2

:

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

M
I
D
I

O
u
t
[
H
e
x
]

(
B
a
n
k

M
a
p

i
s

K
O
R
G
)

(
B
a
n
k

M
a
p

i
s

G
M
(
2
)
)
B
a
n
k

A

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

B
a
n
k

A

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

m
m
,
b
b
,
p
p

=

0
0
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

=

3
F
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

B

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

B

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

0
0
,
0
1
,

0
0

-

7
F

3
F
,
0
1
,

0
0

-

7
F

C

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

C

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

0
0
,
0
2
,

0
0

-

7
F

3
F
,
0
2
,

0
0

-

7
F

D

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

D

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

0
0
,
0
3
,

0
0

-

7
F

3
F
,
0
3
,

0
0

-

7
F

E

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

0
0
,
0
4
,

0
0

-

7
F

3
F
,
0
4
,

0
0

-

7
F

F

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

0
0
,
0
5
,

0
0

-

7
F

3
F
,
0
5
,

0
0

-

7
F

G
M

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

:

7
9
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

7
9
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

g
(
1
)
-
(
9
)

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

:

7
9
,
0
1
-
0
9
,

0
0

-

7
F

7
9
,
0
1
-
0
9
,

0
0

-

7
F

g
(
d
)

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

:

7
8
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

7
8
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

*
3

:

W
h
e
n

C
C
#

b
y

"
C
C

D
e
f
a
u
l
t
"

i
s

a
s
s
i
g
n
e
d

t
o

t
h
e

A
R
P

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
s

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

M
o
d
e
.

R
e
s
e
t

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

M
I
D
I

A
s
s
i
g
n

=

C
C

D
e
f
a
u
l
t

A
R
P

O
N
/
O
F
F

:
C
C
#
1
4

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
1

G
A
T
E

:
C
C
#
2
2

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
2

V
E
L
O
C
I
T
Y

:
C
C
#
2
3

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
3

S
W
I
N
G

:
C
C
#
2
4

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
4

S
T
E
P

:
C
C
#
2
5
1
-
2

S
Y
S
T
E
M

C
O
M
M
O
N

M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S

[
H
]

:
H
e
x
,

[
D
]

:
D
e
c
i
m
a
l
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
|
S
t
a
t
u
s
|

S
e
c
o
n
d

|

T
h
i
r
d

|

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n

(

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

)

|
|
[
H
e
x
]

|
[
H
]

[
D
]

|

[
H
]

[
D
]

|

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
|

F
2

|

s
s

(
s
s
)
|

t
t

(
t
t
)

|

S
o
n
g

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

P
o
i
n
t
e
r

|
|

|

|

|

s
s

:

L
e
a
s
t

s
i
g
n
i
f
i
c
a
n
t

[
L
S
B
]

*
4
|
|

|

|

|

t
t

:

M
o
s
t

s
i
g
n
i
f
i
c
a
n
t

[
M
S
B
]

*
4
|
|

F
3

|

s
s

(
s
s
)
|

|

S
o
n
g

S
e
l
e
c
t

(
S
o
n
g

o
r

C
u
e

L
i
s
t

i
s

s
e
l
e
c
t
e
d
)

|
|

|

|

|

s
s

:

S
o
n
g
(
0
-
1
2
7
)

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
s

S
o
n
g

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

P
o
i
n
t
e
r

m
e
s
s
a
g
e

w
h
e
n

i
n

S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

m
o
d
e
.

(
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

C
l
o
c
k
)

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
s

S
o
n
g

S
e
l
e
c
t

m
e
s
s
a
g
e

w
h
e
n

i
n

S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

m
o
d
e
.

*
4

:

F
o
r

e
x
a
m
p
l
e
,

i
f

t
i
m
e

s
i
g
n
a
t
u
r
e

i
s

4
/
4

o
r

8
/
8
,

t
t
,
s
s

=

0
0
,
1
0

m
e
a
n
s

o
n
e

m
e
a
s
u
r
e
.
MIDI Implementation
371
1
-
3

S
Y
S
T
E
M

R
E
A
L
T
I
M
E

M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+

|
S
t
a
t
u
s
[
H
e
x
]

|

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n

(

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
d

w
h
e
n

.
.
.

)

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
|

F
8

|

T
i
m
i
n
g

C
l
o
c
k

(

A
l
w
a
y
s

i
n

P
r
o
g
/
C
o
m
b
i
/
S
e
q
/
G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

)

*
5
|
|

F
A

|

S
t
a
r
t

(

S
T
A
R
T

i
n

S
e
q

m
o
d
e

)

*
5
|
|

F
B

|

C
o
n
t
i
n
u
e

(

C
o
n
t
i
n
u
e

S
T
A
R
T

i
n

S
e
q

m
o
d
e

)

*
5
|
|

F
C

|

S
t
o
p

(

S
T
O
P

i
n

S
e
q

m
o
d
e

)

*
5
|
|

F
E

|

A
c
t
i
v
e

S
e
n
s
i
n
g

(

A
l
w
a
y
s

)

*
6
|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
*
5

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
s

t
h
e
s
e

m
e
s
s
a
g
e
s

w
h
e
n

M
I
D
I

C
l
o
c
k

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
.
*
6

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
s

t
h
i
s

m
e
s
s
a
g
e

w
h
e
n

M
I
D
I

C
l
o
c
k

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
.

1
-
4

S
Y
S
T
E
M

E
X
C
L
U
S
I
V
E
1
-
4
-
1

U
N
I
V
E
R
S
A
L

S
Y
S
T
E
M

E
X
C
L
U
S
I
V
E

M
E
S
S
A
G
E

(

N
O
N

R
E
A
L
T
I
M
E

)

D
E
V
I
C
E

I
N
Q
U
l
R
Y

R
E
P
L
Y

(

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
s

w
h
e
n

r
e
c
e
i
v
e
d

a

I
N
Q
U
I
R
Y

M
E
S
S
A
G
E

R
E
Q
U
E
S
T

)

[

F
0
,
7
E
,
0
g
,
0
6
,
0
2
,
4
2
,
1
5
,
0
1
,
m
m
,
0
0
,
v
v
,
w
w
,
x
x
,
0
0
,
F
7

]

3
r
d

b
y
t
e

g

:

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

6
t
h

b
y
t
e

4
2

:

K
O
R
G

I
D

7
t
h

b
y
t
e

1
5

:

K
R
O
M
E

s
e
r
i
e
s

I
D

L
S
B

8
t
h

b
y
t
e

0
1

:

K
R
O
M
E

s
e
r
i
e
s

I
D

M
S
B

9
t
h

b
y
t
e

m
m

:

K
R
O
M
E

6
1
K
e
y
s

m
e
m
b
e
r

c
o
d
e

m
m

=

0
5

K
R
O
M
E

7
3
K
e
y
s

m
e
m
b
e
r

c
o
d
e

m
m

=

0
E

K
R
O
M
E

8
8
K
e
y
s

m
e
m
b
e
r

c
o
d
e

m
m

=

1
7

1
1
t
h

b
y
t
e

v
v

:

S
y
s
t
e
m

V
e
r
s
i
o
n

1
s
t

(

1

-

)

1
2
t
h

b
y
t
e

w
w

:

S
y
s
t
e
m

V
e
r
s
i
o
n

2
n
d

(

0

-

)

1
3
t
h

b
y
t
e

x
x

:

S
y
s
t
e
m

V
e
r
s
i
o
n

3
r
d

(

0

-

)

(
i
.
e
.

V
e
r
s
i
o
n

1
.
0
.
2
:

v
v
=
0
1
,

w
w
=
0
0
,

x
x
=
0
2

)
1
-
4
-
2

U
N
I
V
E
R
S
A
L

S
Y
S
T
E
M

E
X
C
L
U
S
I
V
E

M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S

(

R
E
A
L
T
I
M
E

)

M
a
s
t
e
r

V
o
l
u
m
e

[

F
0
,
7
F
,
0
g
,
0
4
,
0
1
,
v
v
,
m
m
,
F
7

]

3
r
d

b
y
t
e

g

:

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

6
t
h

b
y
t
e

v
v

:

V
a
l
u
e
(
L
S
B
)

7
t
h

b
y
t
e

m
m

:

V
a
l
u
e
(
M
S
B
)

m
m
,
v
v

=

0
0
,
0
0

-

7
F
,
7
F

:

M
i
n

-

M
a
x
2
.

R
E
C
O
G
N
I
Z
E
D

R
E
C
E
I
V
E

D
A
T
A
2
-
1

C
H
A
N
N
E
L

M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S

[
H
]

:
H
e
x
,

[
D
]

:
D
e
c
i
m
a
l
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
|
S
t
a
t
u
s
|

S
e
c
o
n
d

|

T
h
i
r
d

|

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n

(

U
s
e

.
.
.
.
.

)

|
E
N
A

|
|
[
H
e
x
]

|
[
H
]

[
D
]

|

[
H
]

[
D
]

|

|

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
|

8
n

|

k
k

(
k
k
)

|

x
x

(
x
x
)

|

N
o
t
e

O
f
f

|

A

|
|

9
n

|

k
k

(
k
k
)

|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

N
o
t
e

O
f
f

|

A

|
|

9
n

|

k
k

(
k
k
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

N
o
t
e

O
n

(
v
v
)

=

1
-
1
2
7

|

A

|
|

A
n

|

k
k

(
k
k
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

P
o
l
y

K
e
y

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(

a
s

A
M
S

)

|

T
,
Q
|
|

B
n

|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

m
m

(
m
m
)

|

B
a
n
k

S
e
l
e
c
t
(
M
S
B
)

(

f
o
r

P
r
o
g
/
C
o
m
b
i

c
h
a
n
g
e

)

*
1
|

P

|
|

B
n

|

0
1

(
0
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
1

(

a
s

J
o
y

S
t
i
c
k

+
Y

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
2

(
0
2
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
2

(

a
s

J
o
y

S
t
i
c
k

-
Y

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
4

(
0
4
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

F
o
o
t

P
e
d
a
l

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

F
o
o
t

P
e
d
a
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
5

(
0
5
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

P
o
r
t
a
m
e
n
t
o

T
i
m
e

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
6

(
0
6
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

D
a
t
a

E
n
t
r
y

(
M
S
B
)

(

f
o
r

R
P
C

e
d
i
t

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
7

(
0
7
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

V
o
l
u
m
e

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
8

(
0
8
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

B
a
l
a
n
c
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

(

f
o
r

P
o
s
t

I
F
X

P
a
n
p
o
t

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

*
2
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
A

(
1
0
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

P
a
n
p
o
t

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
B

(
1
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

E
x
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
C

(
1
2
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

1

(

a
s

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

F
x

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
1

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
D

(
1
3
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

2

(

a
s

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

F
x

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
2

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

0
E

(
1
4
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
R
P

O
N
/
O
F
F

)

*
4
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
0

(
1
6
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
1

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

R
i
b
b
o
n

C
C
#
1
6

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
1

(
1
7
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
2

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

K
n
o
b

M
o
d
1

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
2

(
1
8
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
3

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

V
a
l
u
e

S
l
i
d
e
r

C
C
#
1
8

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
3

(
1
9
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
4

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

K
n
o
b

M
o
d
2

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
4

(
2
0
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

K
n
o
b

M
o
d
3

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
5

(
2
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

K
n
o
b

M
o
d
4

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
6

(
2
2
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
1

G
A
T
E

)

*
4
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
7

(
2
3
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
2

V
E
L
O
C
I
T
Y

)

*
4
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
8

(
2
4
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
3

S
W
I
N
G

)

*
4
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

1
9

(
2
5
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
R
P

K
n
o
b
4

S
T
E
P

)

*
4
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

2
0

(
3
2
)

|

b
b

(
b
b
)

|

B
a
n
k

S
e
l
e
c
t
(
L
S
B
)

(

f
o
r

P
r
o
g

/

C
o
m
b
i

c
h
a
n
g
e

)

*
1
|

P

|
|

B
n

|

2
6

(
3
8
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

D
a
t
a

E
n
t
r
y

(
L
S
B
)

(

f
o
r

R
P
C

e
d
i
t

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
0

(
6
4
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

H
o
l
d
1

(

a
s

D
a
m
p
e
r
)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
1

(
6
5
)

|
<
=
3
F
/
>
=
4
0
(
<
=
6
3
/
>
=
6
4
)
|

P
o
r
t
a
m
e
n
t
o

O
f
f
/
O
n

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
2

(
6
6
)

|
<
=
3
F
/
>
=
4
0
(
<
=
6
3
/
>
=
6
4
)
|

S
o
s
t
e
n
u
t
o

O
f
f
/
O
n

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
3

(
6
7
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
f
t

P
e
d
a
l

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
6

(
7
0
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

1

(

f
o
r

S
u
s
t
a
i
n

L
e
v
e
l

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
7

(
7
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

2

(

f
o
r

R
e
s
o
n
a
n
c
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
8

(
7
2
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

3

(

f
o
r

R
e
l
e
a
s
e

T
i
m
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
9

(
7
3
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

4

(

f
o
r

A
t
t
a
c
k

T
i
m
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
A

(
7
4
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

5

(

f
o
r

F
i
l
t
e
r

C
u
t
o
f
f

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
B

(
7
5
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

6

(

f
o
r

D
e
c
a
y

T
i
m
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
C

(
7
6
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

7

(

f
o
r

L
F
O
1

S
p
e
e
d

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
D

(
7
7
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

8

(

f
o
r

L
F
O
1

P
i
t
c
h

D
e
p
t
h

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
E

(
7
8
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

9

(

f
o
r

L
F
O
1

D
e
l
a
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

4
F

(
7
9
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

S
o
u
n
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

1
0

(

f
o
r

F
i
l
t
e
r

E
G

I
n
t
e
n
s
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
0

(
8
0
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
5

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

S
W

1

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
1

(
8
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
6

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

S
W

2

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
2

(
8
2
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
7

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

F
o
o
t

S
w
i
t
c
h

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
3

(
8
3
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

M
u
l
t
i

P
u
r
p
o
s
e

C
t
r
l
8

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

C
C
#
8
3

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
5

(
8
5
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

C
C
#
8
5

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
6

(
8
6
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

C
C
#
8
6

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
7

(
8
7
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

C
C
#
8
7

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
8

(
8
8
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

(

a
s

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

=

C
C
#
8
8

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
B

(
9
1
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

1

D
e
p
t
h

(

f
o
r

S
e
n
d

2

L
e
v
e
l

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
g

|

5
C

(
9
2
)

|
0
0
/
!
=
0
0

(
0
0
/
!
=
0
0
0
)
|

E
f
f
e
c
t

2

D
e
p
t
h

(

f
o
r

A
l
l

I
n
s
e
r
t

F
X

O
f
f
/
O
n

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

5
D

(
9
3
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

E
f
f
e
c
t

3

D
e
p
t
h

(

f
o
r

S
e
n
d

1

L
e
v
e
l

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

)

|

C

|
|

B
g

|

5
E

(
9
4
)

|
0
0
/
!
=
0
0

(
0
0
/
!
=
0
0
0
)
|

E
f
f
e
c
t

4

D
e
p
t
h

(

f
o
r

M
a
s
t
e
r

F
X
1
,
2

O
f
f
/
O
n

)

|

C

|
|

B
g

|

5
F

(
9
5
)

|
0
0
/
!
=
0
0

(
0
0
/
!
=
0
0
0
)
|

E
f
f
e
c
t

5

D
e
p
t
h

(

f
o
r

T
o
t
a
l

F
X

O
f
f
/
O
n

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

6
0

(
9
6
)

|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

D
a
t
a

I
n
c
r
e
m
e
n
t

(

f
o
r

R
P
C

e
d
i
t

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

6
1

(
9
7
)

|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

D
a
t
a

D
e
c
r
e
m
e
n
t

(

f
o
r

R
P
C

e
d
i
t

)

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

6
4

(
1
0
0
)
|

0
r

(
0
r
)

|

R
P
N

P
a
r
a
m

N
o
.

(
L
S
B
)

(

f
o
r

R
P
N

s
e
l
e
c
t

)

*
3
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

6
5

(
1
0
1
)
|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

R
P
N

P
a
r
a
m

N
o
.

(
M
S
B
)

(

f
o
r

R
P
N

s
e
l
e
c
t

)

*
3
|

C

|
|

B
n

|

c
c

(
c
c
)

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

d
a
t
a

(

f
o
r

S
e
q
.

r
e
c
o
r
d
i
n
g

(
c
c
)

=

0
-
1
1
9

)

|

C
,
Q
|
|

B
n

|

7
8

(
1
2
0
)
|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

A
l
l

S
o
u
n
d

O
f
f

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

7
9

(
1
2
1
)
|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

R
e
s
e
t

A
l
l

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
s

|

C

|
|

B
n

|

7
A

(
1
2
2
)
|

0
0
/
7
F

(
0
0
/
1
2
7
)

|

L
o
c
a
l

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

O
f
f
/
O
n

|

A

|
|

B
n

|

7
B

(
1
2
3
)
|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

A
l
l

N
o
t
e
s

O
f
f

|

A

|
|

B
n

|

7
C

(
1
2
4
)
|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

O
m
n
i

M
o
d
e

O
f
f

(

a
s

A
l
l

N
o
t
e
s

O
f
f

)

|

A

|
|

B
n

|

7
D

(
1
2
5
)
|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

O
m
n
i

M
o
d
e

O
n

(

a
s

A
l
l

N
o
t
e
s

O
f
f

)

|

A

|
|

B
n

|

7
E

(
1
2
6
)
|

<
=
1
0

(
<
=
1
6
)

|

M
o
n
o

M
o
d
e

O
n

(

a
s

A
l
l

N
o
t
e
s

O
f
f

)

|

A

|
|

B
n

|

7
F

(
1
2
7
)
|

0
0

(
0
0
)

|

P
o
l
y

m
o
d
e

O
n

(

a
s

A
l
l

N
o
t
e
s

O
f
f

)

|

A

|
|

C
n

|

p
p

(
p
p
)

|

-
-

-
-

|

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

C
h
a
n
g
e

(

f
o
r

P
r
o
g
/
C
o
m
b
i

c
h
a
n
g
e

)

*
1
|

P

|
|

D
n

|

v
v

(
v
v
)

|

-
-

-
-

|

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(

a
s

A
f
t
e
r

T
o
u
c
h

)

|

T

|
|

E
n

|

b
b

(
b
b
)

|

b
b

(
b
b
)

|

B
e
n
d
e
r

C
h
a
n
g
e

|

C

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
+
Appendices
372
A
M
S

:

A
l
t
e
r
n
a
t
e

M
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

S
o
u
r
c
e
F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

:

E
f
f
e
c
t

D
y
n
a
m
i
c

M
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

S
o
u
r
c
e
n

:

M
I
D
I

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

N
o
.

(
0

-

1
5
)

U
s
u
a
l
l
y

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l
.

W
h
e
n

i
n

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
/
S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

m
o
d
e
,

e
a
c
h

t
i
m
b
r
e
'
s
/
t
r
a
c
k
'
s

c
h
a
n
n
e
l
.
(
S
t
a
t
u
s

i
s

I
N
T

o
r

B
T
H
)
g

:

A
l
w
a
y
s

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

N
o
.

(
0

-

1
5
)
x

:

R
a
n
d
o
m
E
N
A

:

S
a
m
e

a
s

T
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
t
e
d

d
a
t
a
*
1

:

W
h
e
n

B
a
n
k

M
a
p

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

K
O
R
G
;

M
I
D
I

I
n

[
H
e
x
]

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

m
m
,
b
b
,
p
p

=

0
0
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

B
a
n
k

A

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

B
a
n
k

A

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

0
0
,
0
1
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

B

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

B

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

0
0
,
0
2
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

C

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

C

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

0
0
,
0
3
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

D

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

D

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

0
0
,
0
4
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

E

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

0
0
,
0
5
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

F

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

7
9
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

G
M

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

7
9
,
0
1
-
0
9
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

g
(
1
)
-
g
(
9
)

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

7
8
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

g
(
d
)

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

3
8
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

G
M

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

3
E
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

g
(
d
)

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

W
h
e
n

B
a
n
k

M
a
p

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

G
M
(
2
)
;

M
I
D
I

I
n

[
H
e
x
]

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

m
m
,
b
b
,
p
p

=

3
F
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

B
a
n
k

A

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

B
a
n
k

A

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

3
F
,
0
1
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

B

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

B

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

3
F
,
0
2
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

C

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

C

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

3
F
,
0
3
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

D

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

:

D

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

3
F
,
0
4
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

E

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

3
F
,
0
5
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

F

0
0
0

-

1
2
7

7
9
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

G
M

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

7
9
,
0
1
-
0
9
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

g
(
1
)
-
g
(
9
)

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

7
8
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

g
(
d
)

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

0
0
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

G
M

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

3
8
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

G
M

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

3
E
,
0
0
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

g
(
d
)

0
0
1

-

1
2
8

3
F
,
7
F
,

0
0

-

7
F

:

M
u
t
e

(
K
O
R
G

M
U
T
E
)

*
2

:

W
h
e
n

i
n

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

m
o
d
e
,

G
l
o
b
a
l

c
h
a
n
n
e
l
.

W
h
e
n

i
n

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
/
S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

m
o
d
e
,

e
a
c
h

I
F
X
'
s

c
h
a
n
n
e
l
.
*
3

:

r

=

0

:

P
i
t
c
h

B
e
n
d

S
e
n
s
i
t
i
v
i
t
y

(

B
e
n
d

R
a
n
g
e

)

=

1

:

F
i
n
e

T
u
n
e

(

D
e
t
u
n
e

)

=

2

:

C
o
a
r
s
e

T
u
n
e

(

T
r
a
n
s
p
o
s
e

)
F
o
r

d
r
u
m

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
,

b
o
t
h

o
f

F
i
n
e

T
u
n
e

a
n
d

C
o
a
r
s
e

T
u
n
e

a
f
f
e
c
t

t
o

D
e
t
u
n
e
.
D
a
t
a

E
n
t
r
y

L
S
B

v
a
l
u
e

h
a
s

n
o

e
f
f
e
c
t

f
o
r

P
i
t
c
h

B
e
n
d

S
e
n
s
i
t
i
v
i
t
y

a
n
d

C
o
a
r
s
e

T
u
n
e
.
*
4

:

W
h
e
n

C
C
#

b
y

"
C
C

D
e
f
a
u
l
t
"

i
s

a
s
s
i
g
n
e
d

t
o

t
h
e

A
R
P

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
s

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

M
o
d
e
.

n

:

W
h
e
n

i
n

P
r
o
g
r
a
m
/
C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

m
o
d
e
,

G
l
o
b
a
l

c
h
a
n
n
e
l
.

W
h
e
n

i
n

S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

m
o
d
e
,

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

s
e
l
e
c
t
e
d

t
r
a
c
k
'
s

c
h
a
n
n
e
l
.
2
-
2

S
Y
S
T
E
M

C
O
M
M
O
N

M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S

[
H
]

:
H
e
x
,

[
D
]

:
D
e
c
i
m
a
l
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
|
S
t
a
t
u
s
|

S
e
c
o
n
d

|

T
h
i
r
d

|

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n

(

U
s
e

f
o
r

.
.
.
.
.

)

|
|
[
H
e
x
]

|
[
H
]

[
D
]

|

[
H
]

[
D
]

|

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+

|

F
2

|

s
s

(
s
s
)
|

t
t

(
t
t
)

|

S
o
n
g

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

P
o
i
n
t
e
r

(

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

)

*
6
|
|

|

|

|

s
s

:

L
e
a
s
t

s
i
g
n
i
f
i
c
a
n
t

[
L
S
B
]

|
|

|

|

|

t
t

:

M
o
s
t

s
i
g
n
i
f
i
c
a
n
t

[
M
S
B
]

|
|

F
3

|

s
s

(
s
s
)
|

|

S
o
n
g

S
e
l
e
c
t

(
S
o
n
g

o
r

C
u
e

L
i
s
t

s
e
l
e
c
t
)

|
|

|

|

|

s
s

:

S
o
n
g
(
0
-
1
2
7
)

N
o
.

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+

R
e
c
e
i
v
e

w
h
e
n

i
n

S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

m
o
d
e
.

2
-
3

S
Y
S
T
E
M

R
E
A
L
T
I
M
E

M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S

+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
|
S
t
a
t
u
s
[
H
e
x
]

|

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n

(

U
s
e

f
o
r
.
.
.
.
.

)

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
|

F
8

|

T
i
m
i
n
g

C
l
o
c
k

(

T
e
m
p
o
,

A
M
S

&

F
X

D
m
o
d

S
r
c

)

*
5
|
|

F
A

|

S
t
a
r
t

(

S
e
q

S
t
a
r
t

&

A
r
p
e
g
g
i
a
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
)

*
6
|
|

F
B

|

C
o
n
t
i
n
u
e

(

S
e
q

C
o
n
t
i
n
u
e

s
t
a
r
t

&

A
r
p
e
g
g
i
a
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
)
*
6
|
|

F
C

|

S
t
o
p

(

S
e
q

S
t
o
p

&

A
r
p
e
g
g
i
a
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
)

*
6
|
|

F
E

|

A
c
t
i
v
e

S
e
n
s
i
n
g

(

M
I
D
I

C
o
n
n
e
c
t

c
h
e
c
k

)

|
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
*
5

R
e
c
e
i
v
e

w
h
e
n

M
I
D
I

C
l
o
c
k

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

M
I
D
I
.
*
6

R
e
c
e
i
v
e

w
h
e
n

M
I
D
I

C
l
o
c
k

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

M
I
D
I
,

a
n
d

R
e
c
e
i
v
e

E
x
t
.

R
e
a
l
t
i
m
e

C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

m
o
d
e

i
s

c
h
e
c
k
e
d
.
2
-
4

S
Y
S
T
E
M

E
X
C
L
U
S
I
V
E
2
-
4
-
1

U
N
I
V
E
R
S
A
L

S
Y
S
T
E
M

E
X
C
L
U
S
I
V
E

M
E
S
S
A
G
E

(

N
O
N

R
E
A
L
T
I
M
E

)

D
E
V
I
C
E

I
N
Q
U
l
R
Y

(

W
h
e
n

r
e
c
e
i
v
e
d

t
h
i
s

m
e
s
s
a
g
e
,

t
r
a
n
s
m
i
t
s

I
N
Q
U
l
R
Y

M
E
S
S
A
G
E

R
E
P
L
Y

)

[

F
0
,
7
E
,
n
n
,
0
6
,
0
1
,
F
7

]

3
r
d

b
y
t
e

n
n

:

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

=

0

-

F

:

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

=

7
F

:

A
n
y

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

G
M

S
y
s
t
e
m

O
n

(

R
e
c
e
i
v
e

w
h
e
n

i
n

S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

m
o
d
e

)

[

F
0
,
7
E
,
n
n
,
0
9
,
0
1
,
F
7

]

3
r
d

b
y
t
e

n
n

:

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

=

0

-

F

:

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

=

7
F

:

A
n
y

C
h
a
n
n
e
l
2
-
4
-
2

U
N
I
V
E
R
S
A
L

S
Y
S
T
E
M

E
X
C
L
U
S
I
V
E

M
E
S
S
A
G
E
S

(

R
E
A
L
T
I
M
E

)

M
a
s
t
e
r

V
o
l
u
m
e

[

F
0
,
7
F
,
0
g
,
0
4
,
0
1
,
v
v
,
m
m
,
F
7

]

3
r
d

b
y
t
e

g

:

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

6
t
h

b
y
t
e

v
v

:

V
a
l
u
e
(
L
S
B
)

7
t
h

b
y
t
e

m
m

:

V
a
l
u
e
(
M
S
B
)

m
m
,
v
v

=

0
0
,
0
0

-

7
F
,
7
F

:

M
i
n

-

M
a
x

M
a
s
t
e
r

B
a
l
a
n
c
e

[

F
0
,
7
F
,
0
g
,
0
4
,
0
2
,
v
v
,
m
m
,
F
7

]

3
r
d

b
y
t
e

g

:

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

6
t
h

b
y
t
e

v
v

:

V
a
l
u
e
(
L
S
B
)

7
t
h

b
y
t
e

m
m

:

V
a
l
u
e
(
M
S
B
)

m
m
,
v
v

=

0
0
,
0
0
:
L
e
f
t
,

4
0
,
0
0
:
C
e
n
t
e
r
,

7
F
,
7
F
:
R
i
g
h
t

M
a
s
t
e
r

F
i
n
e

T
u
n
e

(

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

M
a
s
t
e
r

T
u
n
e
(
c
e
n
t
)

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

)

[

F
0
,
7
F
,
0
g
,
0
4
,
0
3
,
v
v
,
m
m
,
F
7

]

3
r
d

b
y
t
e

g

:

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

6
t
h

b
y
t
e

v
v

:

V
a
l
u
e
(
L
S
B
)

7
t
h

b
y
t
e

m
m

:

V
a
l
u
e
(
M
S
B
)

m
m
,
v
v

=

2
0
,
0
0
:
-
5
0
,

4
0
,
0
0
:
+
0
0
,

6
0
,
0
0
:
+
5
0

M
a
s
t
e
r

C
o
a
r
s
e

T
u
n
e

(

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

T
r
a
n
s
p
o
s
e

(
c
h
r
o
m
a
t
i
c

s
t
e
p
)

i
n

G
l
o
b
a
l

)

[

F
0
,
7
F
,
0
g
,
0
4
,
0
4
,
v
v
,
m
m
,
F
7

]

3
r
d

b
y
t
e

g

:

G
l
o
b
a
l

C
h
a
n
n
e
l

6
t
h

b
y
t
e

v
v

:

V
a
l
u
e
(
L
S
B
)

7
t
h

b
y
t
e

m
m

:

V
a
l
u
e
(
M
S
B
)

m
m
,
v
v

=

3
4
,
0
0
:
-
1
2
,

4
0
,
0
0
:
+
0
0
,

4
C
,
0
0
:
+
1
2
4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan
2012 KORG INC.
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS
This product has been manufactured according to strict specications and voltage
requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should
be used. If you have purchased this product via the internet, through mail order, and/or via a
telephone sale, you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in
which you reside.
WARNING: Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could
be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturers or distributors warranty.
Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be
disqualied from the manufacturers or distributors warranty.

Usa Krome Paramg e

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Usa Krome Paramg e

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2 E

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen